EP2™ SOFTWARE

USER GUIDE: CLI AND OPCODES

Document Number 964-5924-001

Revision AB
10 October 2018

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

NOTICE: The contents of this document are proprietary to Rockwell Collins and shall not be disclosed,
disseminated, copied, or used except for purposes expressly authorized in writing by Rockwell Collins.
The technical data in this document (or file) is controlled for export under the Export Administration
Regulations (EAR), 15 CFR Parts 730-774. Violations of these export laws may be subject to fines and
penalties under the Export Administration Act.

Cage Code 0EFD0, © 2018 Rockwell Collins. All rights reserved

© 2018 All rights reserved
Rockwell Collins
Printed in the United States of America

Rockwell Collins
400 Collins Rd NE
Cedar Rapids, IA 52498-0503
http://www.rockwellcollins.com

Part Number: 964-5924-001 AB

This program has not been published by the copyright owner, and has been disclosed to
other parties only under license, prohibiting unauthorized disclosure, copying, or use. Any
unauthorized copying, use, or disclosure is strictly prohibited under such license by the
software owner in accordance with the Trade Secret Act of Utah.

The technical data in this document (or file) is controlled for export under the Export
Administration Regulations (EAR), 15 CFR Parts 730-774. Violations of these export laws
may be subject to fines and penalties under the Export Administration Act.

Restricted Rights Legend:

Use, duplication, or disclosure is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Commercial
Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 (c)(1).

ROCKWELL COLLINS MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING

BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THESE MATERIALS AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS
AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN AS-IS BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL ROCKWELL COLLINS BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL,
COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR
ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
LIABILITY TO ROCKWELL COLLINS, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT
EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
ROCKWELL COLLINS, ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR
THE PRODUCT DESCRIBED HEREIN EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THE APPLICABLE
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND SUBJECT TO TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH
THEREIN AND APPLICABLE ROCKWELL COLLINS POLICIES AND PROCEDURES.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The Rockwell Collins logo design is a trademark of Rockwell Collins. All other logos,
trademarks or service marks used herein are the property of their respective owners.

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information

 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
The total number of pages for Revision AB of this publication is
1286, consisting of the following:

Page No. Revision

i – ii AB
A–B AB
iii – xl AB
1-1 – 1-12 AB
2-1 – 2-454 AB
3-1 – 3-310 AB
4-1 – 4-48 AB
5-1 – 5-210 AB
6-1 – 6-28 AB
A-1 – A-182 AB

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 REVISION HISTORY
EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes Revision History

Rev Description Date Approver Pages

– initial release 29 July 2010 R A Vellinga 228
A Updated CLI commands 18 October 2010 R A Vellinga 316
B Updated CLI commands 20 Jan 2011 R A Vellinga 338
C Updated CLI commands and opcodes. 23 June 2011 B Southwick 782
Added Chapters 4, 5 and Appendix A.
D Updated the CIGI opcode chapter. 11 July 2011 R A Vellinga 732
E Updated for v1.6. 4 Oct 2011 R A Vellinga 816
F Updated for v1.7. 11 Jan 2012 R A Vellinga 856
G Updated for v1.8. 16 Feb 2012 R A Vellinga 872
H Updated for Windows 7 30 May 2012 R A Vellinga 964
J Updated for v2.1. 2 Nov 2012 R A Vellinga 1006
K Updated for v3.0. 18 April 2013 R A Vellinga 1044
L Updated for v4.0 22 Oct 2013 R A Vellinga 1090
M Added chapter 6 08 Jan 2014 R A Vellinga 1120
N Updated for 5.0 16 April 2014 R A Vellinga 1112
P Updates to Appendix A, and Chapter 2 22 April 2014 R A Vellinga 1122
R Updated for 6.0 30 October 2014 R A Vellinga 1138
T Updated for 7.0 22 April 2015 R A Vellinga 1166
U Updated for 8.0 12 Nov 2015 R A Vellinga 1162

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

V Updated for 9.0 20 April 2016 R A Vellinga 1170
W Updated for 10.0. 28 Nov 2016 R A Vellinga 1196
Y Updated for 11.0 08 November 2017 R A Vellinga 1252
AA Updated for 12.0 26 April 2018 R A Vellinga 1274
AB Updated for 13.0 10 October 2018 R A Vellinga 1286

APPROVALS
(For most recent revision)
Name Role Approval

Prepared by: Publications Preparer N/A

Reviewed by: Software Engineering Engineering Review N/A
Reviewed by: T K Naylor DAC N/A
Approved by: R A Vellinga Engineering Electronic in PDM

B EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

ABOUT THIS BOOK................................................................. XXXVII

1 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW – HOW TO USE THE IG ....................... 1-1

1.1 Introduction ..................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Initialization and General Controls ...................................... 1-2
1.2.1 IG Startup and Restart ............................................. 1-2
1.2.2 Loading Models & Texture ......................................... 1-3
1.2.3 Scene Management & Control CLI .............................. 1-3
1.3 Display Interface .............................................................. 1-3
1.3.1 Coordinate Systems ................................................. 1-3
1.3.2 Viewport & Video Control .......................................... 1-3
1.4 Database and Eye Control (Scene Dynamics) ....................... 1-3
1.4.1 Introduction ............................................................ 1-3
1.4.2 Script Files .............................................................. 1-4
1.4.3 Model Control and Animation..................................... 1-4

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.4.3.1 Motion Systems .............................................. 1-4
1.4.3.2 Model Animation ............................................. 1-4
1.4.4 Routed and Converging Traffic .................................. 1-4
1.4.4.1 Routed Traffic ................................................. 1-4
1.4.4.2 Converging Traffic ........................................... 1-5
1.4.4.3 TCAS Traffic ................................................... 1-5
1.4.4.4 Converging Birds ............................................ 1-5
1.5 Mission Functions ............................................................. 1-5
1.5.1 Height Above Terrain ............................................... 1-5
1.5.2 Collision Detection ................................................... 1-6
1.5.3 Line-of-Sight ........................................................... 1-6
1.5.4 Hit Detection ........................................................... 1-6
1.5.5 Surface Material Feedback ........................................ 1-6
1.6 Ownship Lights................................................................. 1-6

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes iii

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

1.6.1 Ownship Lights Implementation ................................. 1-6

1.7 Airport Controls ................................................................ 1-6
1.7.1 Airport ................................................................... 1-6
1.7.2 Lighting .................................................................. 1-7
1.7.3 Runway Contamination ............................................. 1-7
1.8 Generic Airport ................................................................. 1-7
1.9 Environment Simulation .................................................... 1-7
1.9.1 Environment Information Feedback ............................ 1-7
1.9.1.1 Weather Feedback .......................................... 1-7
1.9.1.2 Environment Feedback Host Controls................. 1-7
1.9.2 Time of Day & Ambient Simulation ............................. 1-8
1.9.3 Time of Year ........................................................... 1-8
1.10 Weather Simulation .......................................................... 1-8
1.10.1 Visibility and Ground Fog .......................................... 1-8
1.10.2 Cloud Control .......................................................... 1-8
1.10.3 Storm Control ......................................................... 1-8
1.11 Wind Effects .................................................................... 1-8
1.12 Radar Terrain Generation .................................................. 1-9
1.13 Scene Control .................................................................. 1-9
1.13.1 Scene Organization .................................................. 1-9
1.13.2 Real-World Heights .................................................. 1-9
1.13.3 Season ................................................................... 1-9
1.14 Polygon Switch Assignments .............................................. 1-9
1.15 Airport Control & Feedback .............................................. 1-10
1.15.1 Airport Data .......................................................... 1-10
1.15.2 Runway Contamination ........................................... 1-10
1.15.3 Airport Lighting Assignments ................................... 1-10
1.16 Ownship Lighting Controls ............................................... 1-10

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.17 Environmental Controls ................................................... 1-10
1.17.1 Time of Day .......................................................... 1-10
1.17.2 Visibility and Ground Fog ........................................ 1-10
1.17.3 Cloud Control ........................................................ 1-10
1.17.4 Horizon ................................................................ 1-10
1.17.5 Rain Defocus ......................................................... 1-11
1.18 Visual Script (Control) Files.............................................. 1-11
1.19 Video Display On/Display Blanking.................................... 1-11
1.20 Height Above & Height of Terrain (HAT/HOT) ..................... 1-11
1.21 Collision Detection Applications ........................................ 1-11
1.22 Routed Traffic Recording and Control ................................ 1-11
1.23 Surface Movement Guidance and Control System (SMGCS) . 1-11
1.24 Tracks ........................................................................... 1-12
1.25 Tracers ......................................................................... 1-12

iv EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

1.26 Laser Range Finder ......................................................... 1-12

1.27 3D Waves and Sea States................................................ 1-12
1.28 Sensor Operation and Thermal (IR) Modes ........................ 1-12
1.29 Taxi Camera and Brief/Debrief ......................................... 1-12

2 CLI COMMANDS ................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Introduction ..................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Command Structure.......................................................... 2-1
2.3 Commands—Short Descriptions .......................................... 2-3
2.4 CLI Commands .............................................................. 2-28
2.4.1 ABORT ................................................................. 2-28
2.4.2 AIRPORT............................................................... 2-28
2.4.2.1 AIRPORT \ALN .............................................. 2-29
2.4.2.2 AIRPORT \LOD .............................................. 2-30
2.4.2.3 AIRPORT \SUBMODEL .................................... 2-30
2.4.2.4 AIRPORT \VISIT ............................................ 2-30
2.4.3 ALPHACULL ........................................................... 2-30
2.4.4 ANIMATE .............................................................. 2-31
2.4.4.1 ANIMATE \SEQUENCE .................................... 2-32
2.4.5 ATMOSPHERE ........................................................ 2-33
2.4.5.1 ATMOSPHERE \GLARE ................................... 2-34
2.4.5.2 ATMOSPHERE \TUNE ..................................... 2-34
2.4.6 BEHAVIOR ............................................................ 2-35
2.4.6.1 BEHAVIOR \MODEL ....................................... 2-35
2.4.6.2 BEHAVIOR \PARAM ....................................... 2-35
2.4.7 BIND .................................................................... 2-36
2.4.7.1 BIND \AUTOPRIORITY ................................... 2-36
2.4.7.2 BIND \HAT ................................................... 2-37

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.7.3 BIND \TERRAIN ............................................ 2-37
2.4.7.4 BIND \WAVE ................................................ 2-38
2.4.8 BOWSPRAY ........................................................... 2-39
2.4.8.1 BOWSPRAY \DEFINE...................................... 2-40
2.4.9 BOWWAKE ............................................................ 2-41
2.4.9.1 BOWWAKE \DEFINE ...................................... 2-42
2.4.10 BS ....................................................................... 2-43
2.4.10.1 BS \TUNE ..................................................... 2-43
2.4.11 CAPTURE .............................................................. 2-45
2.4.11.1 CAPTURE \IMAGEBUS (engineering diagnostic) . 2-45
2.4.11.2 CAPTURE \SCENEBUS (engineering diagnostic) . 2-45
2.4.11.3 CAPTURE \TEXTUREBUS
(engineering diagnostic) ................................ 2-45
2.4.12 CAPTUREIMAGE ..................................................... 2-46
2.4.12.1 CAPTUREIMAGE \CONFIGURE ......................... 2-47

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes v

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

2.4.13 CATENARY ............................................................ 2-48

2.4.13.1 CATENARY \DEFINE ....................................... 2-49
2.4.14 CDC ..................................................................... 2-49
2.4.15 CDL (Collision Detection Line Segment) .................... 2-50
2.4.15.1 CDL \CONFIG ............................................... 2-51
2.4.15.2 CDL \FIC ...................................................... 2-51
2.4.16 CHAIN .................................................................. 2-52
2.4.16.1 CHAIN \FOLLOW ........................................... 2-53
2.4.16.2 CHAIN \LOOKAT ........................................... 2-53
2.4.16.3 CHAIN \SPIN ................................................ 2-53
2.4.16.4 CHAIN \TOW ................................................ 2-54
2.4.17 CLAMP .................................................................. 2-54
2.4.17.1 CLAMP \HPR ................................................. 2-54
2.4.17.2 CLAMP \XYZ ................................................. 2-55
2.4.18 CLEAR .................................................................. 2-55
2.4.18.1 CLEAR \LABEL .............................................. 2-55
2.4.18.2 CLEAR \SCREEN ............................................ 2-55
2.4.19 CLIPSHADOWS ...................................................... 2-56
2.4.20 CLOUDS ............................................................... 2-56
2.4.20.1 CLOUDS \AAAUTOCONTROL ........................... 2-58
2.4.20.2 CLOUDS \BROKEN ........................................ 2-58
2.4.20.3 CLOUDS \BTUNE ........................................... 2-59
2.4.20.4 CLOUDS \CUE............................................... 2-60
2.4.20.5 CLOUDS \HORIZON ....................................... 2-61
2.4.20.6 CLOUDS \OCTA............................................. 2-62
2.4.20.7 CLOUDS \OCTATEXTURE ................................ 2-63
2.4.20.8 CLOUDS \OPAQUETEXTURE ............................ 2-64
2.4.20.9 CLOUDS \SCUD ............................................ 2-65

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.20.10 CLOUDS \TEXTURE ....................................... 2-65
2.4.20.11 CLOUDS \TRANSITION .................................. 2-65
2.4.20.12 CLOUDS \TRIM ............................................. 2-66
2.4.20.13 CLOUDS \TUNE ............................................. 2-66
2.4.20.14 CLOUDS \TYPE ............................................. 2-68
2.4.20.15 CLOUDS \VOLUMESCUD ................................ 2-69
2.4.21 COBRA ................................................................. 2-69
2.4.21.1 COBRA \COLOR ............................................ 2-69
2.4.21.2 COBRA \EDGEBLENDCOLOR ........................... 2-70
2.4.21.3 COBRA \EDGEBLENDMASK ............................. 2-70
2.4.21.4 COBRA \INTENSITY ....................................... 2-70
2.4.21.5 COBRA \NLIM ............................................... 2-71
2.4.21.6 COBRA \SYMBOLOGY..................................... 2-71
2.4.21.7 COBRA \TESTPATTERN .................................. 2-71

vi EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

2.4.22 COLLISIONMASK ................................................... 2-72

2.4.23 COLOR ................................................................. 2-72
2.4.23.1 COLOR \IDXOVERRIDE .................................. 2-73
2.4.23.2 COLOR \RESTORE ......................................... 2-73
2.4.23.3 COLOR \SAVE ............................................... 2-73
2.4.24 COMM .................................................................. 2-74
2.4.24.1 COMM \CONFIG ............................................ 2-74
2.4.24.2 COMM \DEBUG ............................................. 2-75
2.4.24.3 COMM \PLAYBACK ......................................... 2-75
2.4.24.4 COMM \RECORD ........................................... 2-76
2.4.24.5 COMM \SERIALSYNC ..................................... 2-77
2.4.24.6 COMM \STATS .............................................. 2-77
2.4.24.7 COMM \WATCH ............................................. 2-77
2.4.25 CONTINUE ............................................................ 2-78
2.4.26 CONVERGE ........................................................... 2-78
2.4.26.1 CONVERGE \DEFINE ...................................... 2-79
2.4.27 COUNTERMEASURE ................................................ 2-80
2.4.27.1 COUNTERMEASURE \DEFINE .......................... 2-80
2.4.27.2 COUNTERMEASURE \MONITOR ....................... 2-81
2.4.28 CPC ..................................................................... 2-81
2.4.28.1 CPC \BLEND ................................................. 2-81
2.4.28.2 CPC \DIMMER ............................................... 2-82
2.4.28.3 CPC \NVG .................................................... 2-82
2.4.28.4 CPC \POWER ................................................ 2-82
2.4.28.5 CPC \SHUTDOWN .......................................... 2-83
2.4.28.6 CPC \UTMDAYEDGEBLEND ............................. 2-83
2.4.29 CRASH ................................................................. 2-84
2.4.30 CREATECOLORCODERFROMSCRATCH ....................... 2-84

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.31 CTANDTHEME ........................................................ 2-84
2.4.31.1 CTANDTHEME \CONFIG ................................. 2-85
2.4.31.2 CTANDTHEME \CT ......................................... 2-86
2.4.31.3 CTANDTHEME \CTDEBUG ............................... 2-87
2.4.31.4 CTANDTHEME \DISTTOSHORE ........................ 2-88
2.4.31.5 CTANDTHEME \DISTSHOREPAGER .................. 2-88
2.4.31.6 CTANDTHEME \DISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT . 2-88
2.4.31.7 CTANDTHEME \ELEVATION ............................. 2-88
2.4.31.8 CTANDTHEME \FEATURES3D .......................... 2-89
2.4.31.9 CTANDTHEME \LOADBRUSH ........................... 2-90
2.4.31.10 CTANDTHEME \REGION ................................. 2-90
2.4.31.11 CTANDTHEME \REMOVEDISTTOSHORE ............ 2-91
2.4.31.12 CTANDTHEME
\REMOVEDISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT .......... 2-91
2.4.31.13 CTANDTHEME \STATS ................................... 2-91

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes vii

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

2.4.32 CTTEST ................................................................ 2-92

2.4.33 CTTHEME .............................................................. 2-94
2.4.33.1 CTTHEME \CULTFEATURES ............................. 2-94
2.4.33.2 CTTHEME \CULTLIGHTS ................................. 2-95
2.4.33.3 CTTHEME \CULTTUNING ................................ 2-95
2.4.34 DATABASE ............................................................ 2-98
2.4.35 DB ....................................................................... 2-98
2.4.35.1 DB \CALC ..................................................... 2-99
2.4.35.2 DB \CIGI...................................................... 2-99
2.4.35.3 DB \COMPLETE ............................................. 2-99
2.4.35.4 DB \IGNORE ................................................. 2-99
2.4.35.5 DB \LIST .................................................... 2-100
2.4.35.6 DB \REPOSITION ........................................ 2-100
2.4.35.7 DB \STATUS ............................................... 2-100
2.4.35.8 DB \UNLOAD .............................................. 2-101
2.4.35.9 DB \WGS84 ................................................ 2-101
2.4.35.10 DB \WORLD ............................................... 2-101
2.4.36 DEFINE............................................................... 2-102
2.4.37 DEFOCUS ........................................................... 2-102
2.4.37.1 DEFOCUS \LEVEL ........................................ 2-102
2.4.37.2 DEFOCUS \RASTER ..................................... 2-103
2.4.38 DEVGAIN ............................................................ 2-103
2.4.39 DEVLEVEL ........................................................... 2-103
2.4.40 DIGUY ................................................................ 2-103
2.4.40.1 DIGUY \ACTION .......................................... 2-104
2.4.40.2 DIGUY \CHAR ............................................. 2-104
2.4.40.3 DIGUY \DEFINEACTIONLIST ......................... 2-105
2.4.40.4 DIGUY \DEFINECHARTYPE ............................ 2-105

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.40.5 DIGUY \TUNING .......................................... 2-106
2.4.40.6 DIGUY \WEAPON ........................................ 2-107
2.4.41 DS ..................................................................... 2-107
2.4.41.1 DS \CONFIG ............................................... 2-107
2.4.42 EBGAMMA ........................................................... 2-107
2.4.43 ECHO ................................................................. 2-108
2.4.43.1 ECHO \FORC .............................................. 2-108
2.4.44 ELEVTEST ........................................................... 2-108
2.4.44.1 ELEVTEST \SHADOW ................................... 2-108
2.4.45 EMP ................................................................... 2-109
2.4.45.1 EMP \AC .................................................... 2-109
2.4.45.2 EMP \COLORSCALE ..................................... 2-109
2.4.45.3 EMP \NOISE ............................................... 2-110
2.4.45.4 EMP \PIXELSTACK ....................................... 2-110

viii EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

2.4.45.5 EMP \POLARITY .......................................... 2-110

2.4.45.6 EMP \SPACIALFILTER .................................. 2-111
2.4.45.7 EMP \TEMPORALFILTER ............................... 2-111
2.4.45.8 EMP \TRACKER ........................................... 2-111
2.4.45.9 EMP \ZOOM ................................................ 2-111
2.4.46 ENDIF ................................................................ 2-111
2.4.47 ENVIRONMENT .................................................... 2-112
2.4.47.1 ENVIRONMENT \SUNMOONMODEL ................ 2-112
2.4.47.2 ENVIRONMENT \TUNING .............................. 2-112
2.4.48 EXTRAPOLATE ..................................................... 2-113
2.4.49 EYEPOINT ........................................................... 2-114
2.4.49.1 EYEPOINT \CONTROLVOLUME ....................... 2-114
2.4.50 FACETRANDCOLOR .............................................. 2-114
2.4.51 FADE .................................................................. 2-115
2.4.52 FASTSLEW .......................................................... 2-115
2.4.52.1 FASTSLEW \FASTTIMEFEATURES .................. 2-115
2.4.52.2 FASTSLEW \SLEWRATESCALE ....................... 2-116
2.4.53 FICLAYER ........................................................... 2-117
2.4.53.1 FICLAYER \DEBUG ...................................... 2-117
2.4.54 FILE ................................................................... 2-117
2.4.55 FIXED ................................................................ 2-118
2.4.55.1 FIXED \VF .................................................. 2-118
2.4.56 FJCD .................................................................. 2-119
2.4.56.1 FJCD \CONFIG ............................................ 2-120
2.4.56.2 FJCD \DEBUG ............................................. 2-120
2.4.56.3 FJCD \FIC .................................................. 2-120
2.4.57 FOGCOLOR ......................................................... 2-121
2.4.57.1 FOGCOLOR \BASECOLOR ............................. 2-121

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.58 FRAME ............................................................... 2-121
2.4.59 GAIN .................................................................. 2-122
2.4.59.1 GAIN \AUTO ............................................... 2-122
2.4.60 GENERICAIRPORT ................................................ 2-123
2.4.60.1 GENERICAIRPORT \CONFIGWINDSOCK.......... 2-125
2.4.60.2 GENERICAIRPORT \DAFIFMAPPING ............... 2-125
2.4.60.3 GENERICAIRPORT \PRINT ............................ 2-126
2.4.60.4 GENERICAIRPORT \REFERENCE .................... 2-126
2.4.60.5 GENERICAIRPORT \UNLOADAUTOGEN ........... 2-126
2.4.61 GFOG ................................................................. 2-126
2.4.61.1 GFOG \PATCHY_FOG ................................... 2-127
2.4.61.2 GFOG \TRANSITION .................................... 2-127
2.4.61.3 GFOG \TUNE .............................................. 2-128
2.4.62 GLARE ................................................................ 2-130

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes ix

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

2.4.62.1 GLARE \BEACON ......................................... 2-131

2.4.62.2 GLARE \ILLUMINATION ................................ 2-131
2.4.62.3 GLARE \LOBES ........................................... 2-132
2.4.62.4 GLARE \PATTERN ........................................ 2-132
2.4.62.5 GLARE \STROBE ......................................... 2-133
2.4.63 GLEVEL .............................................................. 2-133
2.4.63.1 GLEVEL \TABLE........................................... 2-134
2.4.64 GROUNDFIRE ...................................................... 2-134
2.4.64.1 GROUNDFIRE \DEFINE................................. 2-136
2.4.65 GUNFIREGLEAM ................................................... 2-136
2.4.66 HAT ................................................................... 2-137
2.4.66.1 HAT \CONFIG ............................................. 2-138
2.4.66.2 HAT \FIC .................................................... 2-139
2.4.66.3 HAT \FORCEBYPASS .................................... 2-139
2.4.66.4 HAT \MONITOR ........................................... 2-139
2.4.67 HAZE ................................................................. 2-139
2.4.68 HD ..................................................................... 2-140
2.4.68.1 HD \CONFIG ............................................... 2-141
2.4.69 HELP .................................................................. 2-142
2.4.70 HORIZON ........................................................... 2-142
2.4.70.1 HORIZON \COLOR ....................................... 2-142
2.4.70.2 HORIZON \NVG .......................................... 2-143
2.4.70.3 HORIZON \STEP_VALUES ............................. 2-143
2.4.71 HOSTOP ............................................................. 2-144
2.4.71.1 HOSTOP \CIGI202ESIGWRAPPER .................. 2-144
2.4.71.2 HOSTOP \CIGICELESTIALSPHERECTRL .......... 2-144
2.4.71.3 HOSTOP \CIGIENTITYANIMATIONCTRL .......... 2-144
2.4.71.4 HOSTOP \CIGIENTITYPLUMECTRL ................. 2-145

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.71.5 HOSTOP \CIGIGLARECTRL ........................... 2-145
2.4.71.6 HOSTOP \CIGIHATREQUESTCTRL .................. 2-145
2.4.71.7 HOSTOP \CIGIILLUMSOURCE0DEFAULT ......... 2-146
2.4.71.8 HOSTOP \CIGILOSREQUESTCTRL .................. 2-146
2.4.71.9 HOSTOP \CIGILFRESPONSECTRL .................. 2-146
2.4.71.10 HOSTOP \CIGIMFECTRL ............................... 2-147
2.4.71.11 HOSTOP \CIGIREGWINDCTRL ....................... 2-147
2.4.71.12 HOSTOP \CIGIRESETCTRL ............................ 2-147
2.4.71.13 HOSTOP \CIGISTANDARDBYTEORDER ........... 2-147
2.4.71.14 HOSTOP \CIGITERRSURFACECTRL ................ 2-148
2.4.71.15 HOSTOP \CIGITRACERRESETCTRL ................ 2-148
2.4.71.16 HOSTOP \CIGIVIEWDEFINITIONCTRL ............ 2-148
2.4.71.17 HOSTOP \CIGIWEATHERCTRL ....................... 2-149
2.4.71.18 HOSTOP \ESIG303D .................................... 2-149

x EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

2.4.71.19 HOSTOP \ESIG3040 .................................... 2-150

2.4.71.20 HOSTOP \ESIGE000 .................................... 2-150
2.4.72 IF ...................................................................... 2-150
2.4.73 IFANY................................................................. 2-151
2.4.74 IG ...................................................................... 2-151
2.4.74.1 IG \ANIMATION .......................................... 2-151
2.4.74.2 IG \CONNECT ............................................. 2-152
2.4.75 ILLUMINATION .................................................... 2-153
2.4.75.1 ILLUMINATION \SNVG ................................. 2-154
2.4.76 INTENSITY .......................................................... 2-154
2.4.76.1 INTENSITY \GLOBAL_ENABLE ....................... 2-156
2.4.76.2 INTENSITY \GLOBAL_POINT_LIGHT_SOURCES 2-156
2.4.76.3 INTENSITY \GLOBAL_UNLIT_POLYGONS ........ 2-156
2.4.76.4 INTENSITY \MASK_POLICY ........................... 2-157
2.4.76.5 INTENSITY \STEP_VALUES ........................... 2-157
2.4.76.6 INTENSITY \SUBSWITCH ............................. 2-158
2.4.77 IR ...................................................................... 2-159
2.4.77.1 IR \AGCMODEHOSTTABLE ............................ 2-161
2.4.77.2 IR \ATMMODEL ........................................... 2-162
2.4.77.3 IR \C ......................................................... 2-162
2.4.77.4 IR \CALC .................................................... 2-162
2.4.77.5 IR \COMPAT ............................................... 2-163
2.4.77.6 IR \CONFIGURE .......................................... 2-163
2.4.77.7 IR \CONSTRAINTS ...................................... 2-168
2.4.77.8 IR \CONTROL ............................................. 2-170
2.4.77.9 IR \CONTZOOM .......................................... 2-171
2.4.77.10 IR \DIURNAL .............................................. 2-172
2.4.77.11 IR \ENVIRONMENT ...................................... 2-173

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.77.12 IR \EOGAIN ................................................ 2-175
2.4.77.13 IR \EPX ...................................................... 2-176
2.4.77.14 IR \FILE ..................................................... 2-178
2.4.77.15 IR \FOCUS ................................................. 2-178
2.4.77.16 IR \GROUND .............................................. 2-179
2.4.77.17 IR \HISTOGRAM.......................................... 2-179
2.4.77.18 IR \HORIZON ............................................. 2-180
2.4.77.19 IR \INTENSITY ............................................ 2-181
2.4.77.20 IR \LFMELODY ............................................ 2-181
2.4.77.21 IR \LIGHTING ............................................. 2-182
2.4.77.22 IR \LIMITS ................................................. 2-183
2.4.77.23 IR \LP ........................................................ 2-184
2.4.77.24 IR \MATERIALCODE ..................................... 2-184
2.4.77.25 IR \NLGAIN ................................................ 2-185

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xi

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

2.4.77.26 IR \NVGTUNING.......................................... 2-185

2.4.77.27 IR \OFFSET ................................................ 2-189
2.4.77.28 IR \POLYGON ............................................. 2-190
2.4.77.29 IR \POWERLINE .......................................... 2-191
2.4.77.30 IR \PROCESS .............................................. 2-191
2.4.77.31 IR \RAINFALL ............................................. 2-191
2.4.77.32 IR \RENDER ............................................... 2-192
2.4.77.33 IR \SEASTATE ............................................ 2-192
2.4.77.34 IR \SHADOW .............................................. 2-193
2.4.77.35 IR \STMOD ................................................. 2-194
2.4.77.36 IR \SUPPORT .............................................. 2-195
2.4.77.37 IR \SYMBOL ............................................... 2-196
2.4.77.38 IR \TEST .................................................... 2-197
2.4.77.39 IR \TEXTURE .............................................. 2-198
2.4.77.40 IR \THERMALCUER ...................................... 2-199
2.4.77.41 IR \TRACK.................................................. 2-200
2.4.77.42 IR \TRACKPARAMS ...................................... 2-201
2.4.77.43 IR \TUNING ................................................ 2-203
2.4.77.44 IR \VISIBILITY............................................ 2-206
2.4.77.45 IR \WASH .................................................. 2-208
2.4.77.46 IR \WATER ................................................. 2-209
2.4.78 KEYDEF .............................................................. 2-210
2.4.79 KEYPAD .............................................................. 2-211
2.4.80 KLOD ................................................................. 2-212
2.4.80.1 KLOD \SCALE ............................................. 2-212
2.4.81 KST ................................................................... 2-213
2.4.82 LASERBEAM ........................................................ 2-213
2.4.82.1 LASERBEAM \DEFINE ................................... 2-214

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.82.2 LASERBEAM \ENDPOSITION ......................... 2-215
2.4.82.3 LASERBEAM \MONITOR .............................. 2-217
2.4.82.4 LASERBEAM \STARTPOSITION ...................... 2-217
2.4.83 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE ................................. 2-218
2.4.83.1 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \GROUP ............ 2-218
2.4.83.2 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \LIST ............... 2-219
2.4.83.3 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \RANGE ............ 2-219
2.4.83.4 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \SELECT ........... 2-219
2.4.84 LIGHTPOINT........................................................ 2-219
2.4.84.1 LIGHTPOINT \ANIMATION ............................ 2-219
2.4.84.2 LIGHTPOINT \COPY ..................................... 2-220
2.4.84.3 LIGHTPOINT \DEFINE .................................. 2-220
2.4.84.4 LIGHTPOINT \EYEPOINT .............................. 2-220
2.4.84.5 LIGHTPOINT \FIXTURES............................... 2-221

xii EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

2.4.84.6 LIGHTPOINT \HALOS ................................... 2-222

2.4.84.7 LIGHTPOINT \INTENSITY ............................. 2-226
2.4.84.8 LIGHTPOINT \MAP ....................................... 2-228
2.4.84.9 LIGHTPOINT \POSITION .............................. 2-229
2.4.84.10 LIGHTPOINT \RENDER ................................. 2-229
2.4.84.11 LIGHTPOINT \SIZE ...................................... 2-230
2.4.84.12 LIGHTPOINT \STEPVALUEOVERRIDES ............ 2-231
2.4.84.13 LIGHTPOINT \SWITCHES ............................. 2-231
2.4.84.14 LIGHTPOINT \TEXTURE ................................ 2-231
2.4.85 LIGHTSOURCETUNE ............................................. 2-232
2.4.85.1 LIGHTSOURCETUNE \LATITUDE .................... 2-232
2.4.85.2 LIGHTSOURCETUNE \NDOTERANGEADJUST ... 2-233
2.4.86 LOAD ................................................................. 2-233
2.4.86.1 LOAD \INSET .............................................. 2-234
2.4.86.2 LOAD \PROCESSDESCRIPTION ..................... 2-234
2.4.87 LOADBRUSH ....................................................... 2-234
2.4.88 LOADDT ............................................................. 2-234
2.4.89 LOADEMISSIVETEXTURES ..................................... 2-235
2.4.90 LOBE .................................................................. 2-235
2.4.90.1 LOBE \DEFINE ............................................ 2-235
2.4.91 LOCKDOWN ........................................................ 2-237
2.4.92 LOD ................................................................... 2-237
2.4.92.1 LOD \DBLOADLIST ...................................... 2-237
2.4.92.2 LOD \LODLIST ............................................ 2-237
2.4.93 LODTUNE............................................................ 2-237
2.4.94 LOS ................................................................... 2-239
2.4.94.1 LOS \CONFIG ............................................. 2-241
2.4.94.2 LOS \DISTSHORE ........................................ 2-241

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.94.3 LOS \FIC .................................................... 2-241
2.4.94.4 LOS \MONITOR ........................................... 2-241
2.4.95 LRF .................................................................... 2-242
2.4.95.1 LRF \CONFIG .............................................. 2-242
2.4.95.2 LRF \DEGRADE ........................................... 2-243
2.4.95.3 LRF \LATLON_FORMAT................................. 2-243
2.4.95.4 LRF \TEXT .................................................. 2-244
2.4.96 MATERIAL ........................................................... 2-244
2.4.96.1 MATERIAL \AMBRANGEADJUST ..................... 2-245
2.4.96.2 MATERIAL \CONTAMINANT ........................... 2-245
2.4.96.3 MATERIAL \DIFFRANGEADJUST..................... 2-246
2.4.96.4 MATERIAL \SPECRANGEADJUST .................... 2-246
2.4.97 MATERIALMASK ................................................... 2-247
2.4.97.1 MATERIALMASK \PRINT ............................... 2-248

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xiii

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

2.4.98 MESSAGE ........................................................... 2-248

2.4.99 MFE ................................................................... 2-248
2.4.99.1 MFE \BENCHMARK ...................................... 2-248
2.4.99.2 MFE \CLI .................................................... 2-249
2.4.99.3 MFE \DROP ................................................ 2-249
2.4.99.4 MFE \EVENTS ............................................. 2-249
2.4.99.5 MFE \LIST .................................................. 2-250
2.4.99.6 MFE \TRAVERSE.......................................... 2-250
2.4.100 MIRROR.............................................................. 2-251
2.4.100.1 MIRROR \MODEL......................................... 2-251
2.4.100.2 MIRROR \VIEWPORT ................................... 2-251
2.4.101 MONOCONVERSIONTUNE...................................... 2-252
2.4.102 MONOINTENSITY ................................................. 2-253
2.4.102.1 MONOINTENSITY \POLYGON ........................ 2-253
2.4.102.2 MONOINTENSITY \TEXTURE ......................... 2-253
2.4.103 MOVINGMODELMASK ........................................... 2-253
2.4.103.1 MOVINGMODELMASK \PRINT ........................ 2-254
2.4.104 NEWPAGER ......................................................... 2-254
2.4.104.1 NEWPAGER \CT .......................................... 2-255
2.4.104.2 NEWPAGER \ELEV ....................................... 2-255
2.4.104.3 NEWPAGER \TEST ....................................... 2-256
2.4.105 NVGBLOOM ......................................................... 2-257
2.4.105.1 NVGBLOOM \ALPHA ..................................... 2-258
2.4.105.2 NVGBLOOM \DEPTHDELTA ........................... 2-259
2.4.105.3 NVGBLOOM \DIAMETER ............................... 2-259
2.4.105.4 NVGBLOOM \HALOALPHA ............................. 2-260
2.4.105.5 NVGBLOOM \HALODIAMETER ....................... 2-261
2.4.105.6 NVGBLOOM \TEXTURE ................................. 2-262

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.105.7 NVGBLOOM \WEIGHT .................................. 2-262
2.4.106 OWNSHIPLIGHT................................................... 2-263
2.4.107 PAGER ................................................................ 2-263
2.4.107.1 PAGER \CT ................................................. 2-265
2.4.107.2 PAGER \ELEVDB .......................................... 2-266
2.4.107.3 PAGER \GBLINSETINRANGEDEFS .................. 2-267
2.4.107.4 PAGER \LISTINSETSINRANGE ....................... 2-267
2.4.107.5 PAGER \PFCULL .......................................... 2-267
2.4.107.6 PAGER \PFPAGE .......................................... 2-268
2.4.107.7 PAGER \SEASTATE ...................................... 2-269
2.4.107.8 PAGER \TERRAINSKIN ................................. 2-270
2.4.108 PAGERDEBUG ...................................................... 2-272
2.4.108.1 PAGER \PAGETOSPEC .................................. 2-272
2.4.109 PARTICLE ........................................................... 2-273

xiv EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

2.4.109.1 PARTICLE \APPEARANCE .............................. 2-273

2.4.109.2 PARTICLE \CHAIN ....................................... 2-275
2.4.109.3 PARTICLE \EMITTER .................................... 2-276
2.4.109.4 PARTICLE \MOVEMENT ................................ 2-277
2.4.109.5 PARTICLE \PRINT ........................................ 2-278
2.4.109.6 PARTICLE \SCUD ........................................ 2-279
2.4.109.7 PARTICLE \TEXTURE .................................... 2-280
2.4.109.8 PARTICLE \TIMING ...................................... 2-280
2.4.109.9 PARTICLE \TYPE.......................................... 2-281
2.4.110 PATH .................................................................. 2-282
2.4.110.1 PATH \APPEND ........................................... 2-282
2.4.110.2 PATH \PREPEND .......................................... 2-282
2.4.110.3 PATH \REMOVE ........................................... 2-282
2.4.111 PHYSICSSHIP ...................................................... 2-283
2.4.111.1 PHYSICSSHIP \CLEANALL ............................. 2-283
2.4.111.2 PHYSICSSHIP \PROPERTIES ......................... 2-283
2.4.112 PHYSICSSIM ....................................................... 2-283
2.4.112.1 PHYSICSSIM \BALLISTIC ............................. 2-283
2.4.112.2 PHYSICSSIM \CLEANALL .............................. 2-284
2.4.112.3 PHYSICSSIM \PROPERTIES........................... 2-284
2.4.113 PLUMES .............................................................. 2-285
2.4.113.1 PLUMES \DEFINE ........................................ 2-286
2.4.114 POSITION ........................................................... 2-288
2.4.114.1 POSITION \EQUATE ..................................... 2-289
2.4.114.2 POSITION \JIGGLE ...................................... 2-290
2.4.114.3 POSITION \LATLON_FORMAT........................ 2-290
2.4.114.4 POSITION \WOBBLE .................................... 2-290
2.4.115 POWERLINES ...................................................... 2-291

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.115.1 POWERLINES \DECORATIONS ...................... 2-291
2.4.116 PP ...................................................................... 2-292
2.4.116.1 PP \BASELINE ............................................. 2-292
2.4.116.2 PP \FILE ..................................................... 2-293
2.4.116.3 PP \INSETMASK .......................................... 2-294
2.4.116.4 PP \INTERLACE ........................................... 2-294
2.4.116.5 PP \MESSAGE ............................................. 2-295
2.4.116.6 PP \OVERLAY .............................................. 2-295
2.4.116.7 PP \RESPONSE ........................................... 2-296
2.4.116.8 PP \SWRENDER .......................................... 2-297
2.4.116.9 PP \VIDEOALIGN ......................................... 2-298
2.4.116.10 PP \VIDEOIN .............................................. 2-298
2.4.116.11 PP \VIDEOOUT ............................................ 2-299
2.4.116.12 PP \VIDEOSYNC .......................................... 2-299

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xv

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

2.4.117 PRIMEFFECTS ...................................................... 2-300

2.4.118 PRINT ................................................................ 2-300
2.4.118.1 PRINT \LABEL ............................................. 2-300
2.4.118.2 PRINT \SCREE ............................................ 2-301
2.4.119 PROBER .............................................................. 2-302
2.4.119.1 PROBER \PICK ............................................ 2-302
2.4.119.2 PROBER \TVERTS ........................................ 2-303
2.4.120 PROPERTY .......................................................... 2-304
2.4.121 PROXYPOLYOUTPUT ............................................. 2-304
2.4.122 RADAR ............................................................... 2-304
2.4.122.1 RADAR \CTLODOVERRIDE ............................ 2-305
2.4.122.2 RADAR \DISPLAY ........................................ 2-305
2.4.122.3 RADAR \RENDERCONTROL ........................... 2-305
2.4.122.4 RADAR \TERRAINLODOVERRIDE ................... 2-306
2.4.123 RAINSNOW ......................................................... 2-307
2.4.123.1 RAINSNOW \INI .......................................... 2-307
2.4.123.2 RAINSNOW \UNLOAD .................................. 2-307
2.4.124 RANGEFOCUS...................................................... 2-307
2.4.125 RATE .................................................................. 2-308
2.4.126 REFLECTIVITYTUNE.............................................. 2-308
2.4.126.1 REFLECTIVITYTUNE \AOI ............................. 2-308
2.4.126.2 REFLECTIVITYTUNE \WIND .......................... 2-309
2.4.127 REGIONALWEATHER ............................................ 2-309
2.4.127.1 REGIONALWEATHER \FILTER ........................ 2-311
2.4.127.2 REGIONALWEATHER \FOGVOLUME ................ 2-312
2.4.127.3 REGIONALWEATHER \MODEL ....................... 2-314
2.4.127.4 REGIONALWEATHER \PROXY ........................ 2-315
2.4.127.5 REGIONALWEATHER \PROXYTEXTURE ........... 2-316

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.127.6 REGIONALWEATHER \TUNE .......................... 2-317
2.4.128 REMAP ............................................................... 2-318
2.4.128.1 REMAP \LIGHTS .......................................... 2-318
2.4.129 RENDERMODE ..................................................... 2-318
2.4.129.1 RENDERMODE \AFFINITY ............................. 2-322
2.4.129.2 RENDERMODE \DEBUG ................................ 2-323
2.4.129.3 RENDERMODE \IMPORTCACHE ..................... 2-324
2.4.129.4 RENDERMODE \OGL .................................... 2-325
2.4.129.5 RENDERMODE \SORTCACHE ......................... 2-328
2.4.129.6 RENDERMODE \STATEDATA ......................... 2-329
2.4.129.7 RENDERMODE \TEXTURE ............................. 2-329
2.4.129.8 RENDERMODE \THREAD .............................. 2-330
2.4.129.9 RENDERMODE \THROTTLETEXCOMPRESSION . 2-330
2.4.130 RIBBON .............................................................. 2-331

xvi EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

2.4.131 ROTORWASH ...................................................... 2-332

2.4.131.1 ROTORWASH \ALPHA .................................. 2-332
2.4.131.2 ROTORWASH \DEFINE ................................. 2-332
2.4.131.3 ROTORWASH \LAG ...................................... 2-335
2.4.131.4 ROTORWASH \MONITOR .............................. 2-336
2.4.131.5 ROTORWASH \TERRAINMODE....................... 2-336
2.4.132 ROTORWASHTABLE .............................................. 2-336
2.4.132.1 ROTORWASHTABLE \FIC .............................. 2-336
2.4.132.2 ROTORWASHTABLE \MANUAL ....................... 2-337
2.4.132.3 ROTORWASHTABLE \MATERIAL .................... 2-337
2.4.133 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF .......................................... 2-337
2.4.133.1 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \GROUNDEFFECT ........ 2-338
2.4.133.2 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF
\OWNSHIPRECIRCULATION .......................... 2-339
2.4.133.3 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \ROTORSPRAY ............ 2-339
2.4.133.4 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \SCUD ....................... 2-341
2.4.134 ROUTE ............................................................... 2-341
2.4.134.1 ROUTE \DEFINE .......................................... 2-342
2.4.134.2 ROUTE \INFO ............................................. 2-343
2.4.134.3 ROUTE \LIST .............................................. 2-343
2.4.135 ROUTERECORD.................................................... 2-343
2.4.135.1 ROUTERECORD \DEFINE .............................. 2-343
2.4.136 RUNWAY ............................................................. 2-344
2.4.137 SCALE ................................................................ 2-344
2.4.138 SEASON ............................................................. 2-344
2.4.139 SENSORTEXSCALAR ............................................. 2-345
2.4.140 SHADOW ............................................................ 2-345
2.4.140.1 SHADOW \CONFIG ...................................... 2-346

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.140.2 SHADOW \ENV ........................................... 2-346
2.4.141 SIGNBOARDSCALE ............................................... 2-346
2.4.142 SKY ................................................................... 2-347
2.4.142.1 SKY \REFLECTION ....................................... 2-348
2.4.142.2 SKY \TEXTURE ............................................ 2-348
2.4.143 SMCMAP ............................................................. 2-349
2.4.144 SMPOLY .............................................................. 2-349
2.4.144.1 SMPOLY \ENABLE ........................................ 2-351
2.4.144.2 SMPOLY \LATLONGFILTER ........................... 2-352
2.4.145 SNVG ................................................................. 2-353
2.4.145.1 SNVG \ATM ................................................ 2-353
2.4.145.2 SNVG \CLD ................................................ 2-353
2.4.145.3 SNVG \DIR ................................................. 2-354
2.4.145.4 SNVG \FOG ................................................ 2-354
2.4.145.5 SNVG \HALO .............................................. 2-354

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xvii

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

2.4.145.6 SNVG \POS ................................................ 2-355

2.4.145.7 SNVG \VIEWPORT ....................................... 2-355
2.4.146 SPANRATE .......................................................... 2-356
2.4.147 SPXCONFIG ........................................................ 2-356
2.4.147.1 SPXCONFIG \DEBUG ................................... 2-356
2.4.147.2 SPXCONFIG \GENERIC ................................. 2-356
2.4.147.3 SPXCONFIG \HAT ........................................ 2-356
2.4.147.4 SPXCONFIG \STORM ................................... 2-356
2.4.148 STARS ................................................................ 2-357
2.4.149 STATISTICS ........................................................ 2-357
2.4.150 STATS ................................................................ 2-357
2.4.151 STGAIN .............................................................. 2-358
2.4.152 STLEVEL ............................................................. 2-358
2.4.153 STORM ............................................................... 2-358
2.4.153.1 STORM \LLEVEL .......................................... 2-359
2.4.153.2 STORM \LSCENE ......................................... 2-359
2.4.153.3 STORM \RLEVEL.......................................... 2-360
2.4.153.4 STORM \SDIST ........................................... 2-360
2.4.153.5 STORM \SLEVEL.......................................... 2-361
2.4.153.6 STORM \SSCENE ......................................... 2-361
2.4.154 STORMCONTROL ................................................. 2-362
2.4.154.1 STORMCONTROL\OWNSHIP ......................... 2-363
2.4.154.2 STORMCONTROL\SAND ............................... 2-363
2.4.155 STORMDEFINE .................................................... 2-364
2.4.155.1 STORMDEFINE \LIGHTNING ......................... 2-365
2.4.155.2 STORMDEFINE \LLEVEL ............................... 2-366
2.4.155.3 STORMDEFINE \LTUNE ................................ 2-366
2.4.155.4 STORMDEFINE \PARTICLECLOUD .................. 2-367

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.155.5 STORMDEFINE \PARTICLELIGHTNING ............ 2-368
2.4.155.6 STORMDEFINE \PARTICLERAINSHAFT............ 2-369
2.4.155.7 STORMDEFINE \RAIN .................................. 2-370
2.4.155.8 STORMDEFINE \RLEVEL ............................... 2-370
2.4.155.9 STORMDEFINE \RTUNE ................................ 2-371
2.4.155.10 STORMDEFINE \TUNE .................................. 2-371
2.4.156 SWAPOFFSET ...................................................... 2-372
2.4.157 SWITCH ............................................................. 2-373
2.4.158 SYMBOLOGY ....................................................... 2-373
2.4.158.1 SYMBOLOGY \FILE ...................................... 2-373
2.4.158.2 SYMBOLOGY \OFFSETS ................................ 2-373
2.4.158.3 SYMBOLOGY \OPTIONS ............................... 2-374
2.4.158.4 SYMBOLOGY \PLUGIN .................................. 2-374
2.4.158.5 SYMBOLOGY \VIEWPORT ............................. 2-374

xviii EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

2.4.159 SYSTEM .............................................................. 2-374

2.4.159.1 SYSTEM \AFFINITY ...................................... 2-375
2.4.159.2 SYSTEM \BG ............................................... 2-375
2.4.159.3 SYSTEM \DIFFTABLEFORCE .......................... 2-375
2.4.159.4 SYSTEM \FASTTIME ..................................... 2-375
2.4.159.5 SYSTEM \FILES ........................................... 2-375
2.4.159.6 SYSTEM \MBUS........................................... 2-376
2.4.159.7 SYSTEM \MODULE ....................................... 2-376
2.4.159.8 SYSTEM \PROCESS ..................................... 2-376
2.4.159.9 SYSTEM \SLOWTIME ................................... 2-376
2.4.159.10 SYSTEM \THREAD ....................................... 2-376
2.4.159.11 SYSTEM \TIMEOUT ...................................... 2-377
2.4.160 TERRAIN............................................................. 2-377
2.4.160.1 TERRAIN \SUBDIVISIONSCALE ..................... 2-381
2.4.161 TEXTURE ............................................................ 2-382
2.4.161.1 TEXTURE \CT.............................................. 2-382
2.4.161.2 TEXTURE \REDUCE ...................................... 2-383
2.4.161.3 TEXTURE \REFLECTION................................ 2-383
2.4.162 TILEPAGER ......................................................... 2-383
2.4.162.1 TILEPAGER \TUNING ................................... 2-384
2.4.162.2 TILEPAGER \VISIT....................................... 2-384
2.4.163 TOD (Time of Day) ............................................... 2-385
2.4.163.1 TOD \CPCADJUST ....................................... 2-387
2.4.163.2 TOD \DATE ................................................ 2-388
2.4.163.3 TOD \DUOTEXTURE ..................................... 2-388
2.4.163.4 TOD \MOON ............................................... 2-389
2.4.163.5 TOD \SUN .................................................. 2-390
2.4.163.6 TOD \SUNPOSMODE .................................... 2-392

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.163.7 TOD \TIMEZONE ......................................... 2-393
2.4.164 TRACER .............................................................. 2-393
2.4.165 TRACKER ............................................................ 2-395
2.4.165.1 TRACKER \CONFIGURE ................................ 2-396
2.4.165.2 TRACKER \HARDWIRE ................................. 2-396
2.4.165.3 TRACKER \MOTIONSYSTEM .......................... 2-397
2.4.165.4 TRACKER \SEOS ......................................... 2-397
2.4.165.5 TRACKER \SEOSCONFIG .............................. 2-397
2.4.165.6 TRACKER \SEOSDISPLAY ............................. 2-398
2.4.165.7 TRACKER \SEOSPROJECTOR ......................... 2-399
2.4.165.8 TRACKER \TYPES ........................................ 2-399
2.4.166 TRACKS .............................................................. 2-401
2.4.166.1 TRACKS \DEFINE ........................................ 2-402
2.4.167 TRAFFIC ............................................................. 2-403

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xix

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

2.4.167.1 TRAFFIC \DIAG ........................................... 2-404

2.4.168 TRAILS ............................................................... 2-404
2.4.168.1 TRAILS \DEFINE ......................................... 2-405
2.4.169 TRIGGER ............................................................ 2-406
2.4.169.1 TRIGGER \ALTABOVE .................................. 2-406
2.4.169.2 TRIGGER \ALTBELOW .................................. 2-407
2.4.169.3 TRIGGER \CLEAN ........................................ 2-407
2.4.169.4 TRIGGER \HAT............................................ 2-407
2.4.169.5 TRIGGER \LOAD ......................................... 2-408
2.4.169.6 TRIGGER \PAUSEROUTE .............................. 2-408
2.4.169.7 TRIGGER \RANGE ....................................... 2-409
2.4.169.8 TRIGGER \ROUTE ........................................ 2-410
2.4.169.9 TRIGGER \RVR ........................................... 2-410
2.4.169.10 TRIGGER \RVRABOVE .................................. 2-410
2.4.169.11 TRIGGER \RVRBELOW ................................. 2-410
2.4.169.12 TRIGGER \SPEED ........................................ 2-411
2.4.169.13 TRIGGER \TIME .......................................... 2-411
2.4.169.14 TRIGGER \UNLOAD ..................................... 2-412
2.4.169.15 TRIGGER \VIS ............................................ 2-412
2.4.169.16 TRIGGER \VISABOVE ................................... 2-412
2.4.169.17 TRIGGER \VISBELO ..................................... 2-413
2.4.170 UNBIND .............................................................. 2-413
2.4.171 UNCHAIN ............................................................ 2-413
2.4.171.1 UNCHAIN \FOLLOW ..................................... 2-413
2.4.171.2 UNCHAIN \LOOKAT ..................................... 2-414
2.4.171.3 UNCHAIN \SPIN .......................................... 2-414
2.4.171.4 UNCHAIN \TOW .......................................... 2-414
2.4.172 UNDEFINE .......................................................... 2-414

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.173 UNLOAD ............................................................. 2-414
2.4.173.1 UNLOAD \INSET.......................................... 2-415
2.4.173.2 UNLOAD \PROCESSDESCRIPTION ................. 2-415
2.4.174 UNLOADDT ......................................................... 2-415
2.4.175 VELOCITY ........................................................... 2-415
2.4.176 VF...................................................................... 2-416
2.4.176.1 VF \CONFIG ............................................... 2-416
2.4.176.2 VF \DEBUG................................................. 2-417
2.4.177 VIDEO ................................................................ 2-418
2.4.177.1 VIDEO \BLANK............................................ 2-418
2.4.177.2 VIDEO \INTCOMP ........................................ 2-418
2.4.177.3 VIDEO \OGL ............................................... 2-419
2.4.177.4 VIDEO \TRANSPORT .................................... 2-419
2.4.178 VIEWPORT .......................................................... 2-419

xx EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

2.4.178.1 VIEWPORT \CAPTURE .................................. 2-420

2.4.178.2 VIEWPORT \EDGEBLEND .............................. 2-421
2.4.178.3 VIEWPORT \GAMMA .................................... 2-421
2.4.178.4 VIEWPORT \GROUP ..................................... 2-421
2.4.178.5 VIEWPORT \NLIM ........................................ 2-422
2.4.178.6 VIEWPORT \OVERLAY .................................. 2-422
2.4.178.7 VIEWPORT \PAGINGOFFSET ......................... 2-423
2.4.178.8 VIEWPORT \RENDER ................................... 2-424
2.4.179 VISIBILITY .......................................................... 2-424
2.4.179.1 VISIBILITY \FIL .......................................... 2-425
2.4.179.2 VISIBILITY \TUNE ....................................... 2-425
2.4.180 VSM ................................................................... 2-425
2.4.181 WAIT ................................................................. 2-426
2.4.181.1 WAIT \DB .................................................. 2-426
2.4.181.2 WAIT \DBCONFIG ....................................... 2-426
2.4.182 WAM .................................................................. 2-426
2.4.182.1 WAM \BREAKPOINT ..................................... 2-427
2.4.182.2 WAM \BSAND ............................................. 2-427
2.4.182.3 WAM \BSNOW ............................................ 2-428
2.4.182.4 WAM \RANGE ............................................. 2-428
2.4.182.5 WAM \SELECT ............................................ 2-428
2.4.183 WATCH ............................................................... 2-429
2.4.184 WAVES ............................................................... 2-430
2.4.184.1 WAVES \BUMP ............................................ 2-432
2.4.184.2 WAVES \INTENSITY..................................... 2-432
2.4.184.3 WAVES \LOD .............................................. 2-432
2.4.184.4 WAVES \ORIGIN ......................................... 2-433
2.4.184.5 WAVES \SPECULAR ..................................... 2-433

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.184.6 WAVES \TARGET ......................................... 2-434
2.4.184.7 WAVES \TUNE ............................................ 2-434
2.4.184.8 WAVES \WHITECAPS ................................... 2-435
2.4.184.9 WAVES \WINDLANE .................................... 2-437
2.4.184.10 WAVES \WINDTOBEAUFORT ......................... 2-437
2.4.185 WAVESENHANCED ............................................... 2-438
2.4.185.1 WAVESENHANCED \ANTIALIASING ............... 2-440
2.4.185.1 WAVESENHANCED \CATSPAW ...................... 2-440
2.4.185.2 WAVESENHANCED \CHOP ............................ 2-441
2.4.185.3 WAVESENHANCED \FLATTEN ........................ 2-441
2.4.185.4 WAVESENHANCED \FROTH........................... 2-441
2.4.185.5 WAVESENHANCED \GLARE ........................... 2-441
2.4.185.6 WAVESENHANCED \GLOBALNOISE ................ 2-442
2.4.185.7 WAVESENHANCED \LOD .............................. 2-443

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxi

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

2.4.185.8 WAVESENHANCED \SHORELINE .................... 2-445

2.4.185.9 WAVESENHANCED \SPRAY ........................... 2-445
2.4.185.10 WAVESENHANCED \TARGET ......................... 2-446
2.4.185.11 WAVESENHANCED \WAVESHAPE .................. 2-446
2.4.185.12 WAVESENHANCED \WHITECAP ..................... 2-447
2.4.185.13 WAVESENHANCED \WINDLANE ..................... 2-448
2.4.186 WIND ................................................................. 2-448
2.4.186.1 WIND \VEGETATION.................................... 2-449
2.4.187 ZOOM ................................................................ 2-450
2.4.187.1 ZOOM \HIRESCTPAGEMODE ......................... 2-453

3 OPCODES ....................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Introduction ..................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Opcode Tables ................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Opcode Descriptions ....................................................... 3-21
3000 End of Data ............................................................... 3-22
3001 Storm ...................................................................... 3-23
3002 Ground Fog .............................................................. 3-24
3004 Cloud ...................................................................... 3-25
3005 Haze Correction ......................................................... 3-26
3006 Time of Day ............................................................... 3-27
3007 Horizon ..................................................................... 3-29
3008 Visibility ................................................................... 3-30
3009 Ambient .................................................................... 3-31
300A Storm (Advanced) ..................................................... 3-32
300C DEFOCUS .................................................................. 3-36
300E Advanced Clouds (ESIG) ............................................. 3-37
300F Clouds EP ................................................................. 3-38

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3020 Landing Lights (ESIG) ................................................. 3-40
3021 Strobe ..................................................................... 3-41
3022 Beacon .................................................................... 3-42
3023 Light and Polygon Intensity ........................................ 3-43
3024 Random-Light Switch ................................................. 3-45
3025 Database .................................................................. 3-46
3028 Steerable Searchlight (Optional) .................................. 3-48
3029 Noise Control (Optional).............................................. 3-49
302A Fog Color Control ....................................................... 3-50
302B G-level Dimming Control ............................................. 3-51
3030 Height-Above-Terrain Switch ...................................... 3-53
3031 Height-Above-Terrain Testpoint Request ....................... 3-54
3032 Height-Above-Terrain Testpoint Switch ........................ 3-56
3036 Laser Range-Finder Switch .......................................... 3-57
3037 Laser Range-Finder Cursor .......................................... 3-58

xxii EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

3038 Laser Range-Finder Cursor Switch ................................ 3-59

3039 Fast-Jet Collision Detection Definition .......................... 3-60
303C Laser Range-Finder Single-Response Request ................ 3-62
303D Terrain Following Models (TFM) ................................... 3-63
3040 Moving-Model Definition ............................................. 3-65
3041 Moving-Model and Eyepoint Control ............................. 3-69
3042 Animation, Converging Traffic, and Bird Strike ............... 3-72
3043 Viewport .................................................................. 3-74
3044 Eyepoint .................................................................. 3-76
3046 Illumination-Source Switch .......................................... 3-77
3047 Tracer Bullet ............................................................. 3-78
3048 Illumination-Source Definition (Optional) ..................... 3-79
3049 Static Model Definition ................................................ 3-80
304C Moving-Model Update ................................................ 3-83
3050 ASCII ...................................................................... 3-85
3052 VIDEO ..................................................................... 3-86
3056 External Device Operation (Optional) ........................... 3-87
3057 Viewport Visibility....................................................... 3-88
3059 dGamma ................................................................... 3-89
3061 IRPP Mode - deprecated ............................................. 3-90
3062 IRPP AGC/Gain/Level .................................................. 3-92
3063 IRPP Distortion - deprecated ....................................... 3-93
3064 IRPP Polarity............................................................. 3-94
3065 IRPP Test Pattern ....................................................... 3-95
3066 EXG Symbol Intensity ................................................. 3-96
3067 EXG Symbol Control ................................................... 3-97
3068 IR Environment .......................................................... 3-98
3069 IR Visibility Control ................................................... 3-100

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

306A IRPP Configuration - deprecated ................................ 3-101
306B IRPP Switches ......................................................... 3-103
306C IR Support Temperature .......................................... 3-104
306D EXG Target Tracker Offset Track Data - deprecated..... 3-105
306F IRPP Viewport Control Data - deprecated..................... 3-107
307B Script File ............................................................... 3-109
3080 Height Above Terrain ................................................ 3-110
3081 Collision-Detection Response (Clouds only) ................. 3-112
3082 Laser Range-Finder Response .................................... 3-113
3084 Height-Above-Terrain (ESIG) ................................... 3-114
3087 Enhanced Laser Range-Finder Response...................... 3-116
308D Animate.................................................................. 3-118
308F Animate Frame Number ........................................... 3-119
3090 Moving-Model Velocity ............................................. 3-120

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxiii

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

3091 Wave Equation......................................................... 3-123

309A Advanced Routed Traffic Control ............................... 3-125
309B Advanced Routed Traffic Request .............................. 3-129
309C Routed Traffic Status ............................................... 3-130
309D Wind Effects ........................................................... 3-131
309E Generic Airport Control ............................................. 3-132
309F Scattered Clouds ...................................................... 3-136
30B0 EXG Thermal Cuer Parameters .................................. 3-137
30B1 IR Diurnal Control ................................................... 3-138
30B3 EXG Symbol Value .................................................. 3-139
30B5 IRPP Configuration File Select ................................... 3-140
30B6 EXG Tracking Type Select ........................................ 3-141
30B9 IRPP Histogram Intensity Clip .................................... 3-142
30BA EXG Symbol Update ................................................. 3-143
30BC EXG TargetTracker Parameters ................................. 3-144
30D0 Model Chaining ........................................................ 3-146
30D1 Model Switch ........................................................... 3-150
30D4 Character Animation Request .................................... 3-151
3121 Advanced Routed Traffic Information Block................. 3-152
3122 Advanced Routed Traffic Route Status Block ............... 3-154
3130 DI-Guy Character Type ............................................. 3-156
3131 DI-Guy Action Type .................................................. 3-157
3132 DI-Guy Aim Angles ................................................... 3-158
3133 DI-Guy Model Definition ............................................ 3-159
3134 DI-Guy Model Update ............................................... 3-161
3140 Radar Patch Request ............................................... 3-164
3150 IRPP Noise Control .................................................. 3-166
3151 IRPP AC Coupling .................................................... 3-167

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3152 IRPP Histogram Parameters ....................................... 3-168
3153 IRPP AGC Parameters ............................................... 3-169
3154 IRPP Blur ................................................................ 3-170
3155 IRPP Spatial Filter .................................................... 3-171
3156 IRPP Degraded Elements ........................................... 3-172
3157 EXG Target Tracker Control ....................................... 3-173
3158 IRPP Video Control ................................................... 3-174
3159 IRPP Persistence ...................................................... 3-175
315A IRPP Zoom .............................................................. 3-176
315B IRPP Histogram Clipping Plane ................................... 3-178
315C IRPP BlurEx ............................................................. 3-179
3166 EXG Video Continuous Zoom Control ......................... 3-180
3167 EXG Clear Software Render ....................................... 3-181
3168 EXG Software Render Position ................................... 3-182

xxiv EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

3184 Collision-Detection Line Segment Response ................. 3-183

3190 Time of Year Response.............................................. 3-184
3203 IRPP Gain, Level, and Noise Response ....................... 3-185
3206 EXG Target Tracker Response .................................... 3-186
3207 EXG Thermal Cuer Response ..................................... 3-188
320A Range Focus ............................................................ 3-189
320B Catenary ................................................................. 3-190
320C Mirror Control .......................................................... 3-192
321A Sea States Global Control ......................................... 3-193
3250 ASCIITwo ............................................................... 3-194
Extended Opcodes ................................................................. 3-195
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/002C Number of Airports Request .... 3-196
E000 Number of Airports Response .................................... 3-197
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/002D Airport Information Request .... 3-198
E000 Airport Information Response .................................... 3-200
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/002F Load Status Request ............... 3-204
E000 Load Status Response ............................................... 3-206
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0030 Moving Model Request ............ 3-207
E000 Moving Model Response ............................................ 3-209
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0034 Tracks Control ....................... 3-211
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0035 Bow Wake Control .................. 3-213
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0036 Rotorwash ............................ 3-215
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0037 Trails Control ......................... 3-218
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0038 Plume Control ........................ 3-220
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0039 Model Scale ........................... 3-223
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/003A Countermeasure Control ......... 3-224
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/003C TOD Date .............................. 3-226
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/003C TOD Date Response ............... 3-227

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/003F Set Tracer ............................. 3-228
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/004C Line-of-Sight Switch ............... 3-230
E000 Line-of-Sight Response ............................................. 3-231
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/004D Define Line-of-Sight (LOS)
Testpoint ............................................................ 3-233
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0053 Wind Layer ............................ 3-236
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/005C Extended Laser Range-Finder
Response Enable ................................................. 3-237
E000 Extended Laser Range-Finder Response ...................... 3-239
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/005D Extended Collision Detection
Response Enable ................................................. 3-242
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0062 Set Rotorwash Ramp .............. 3-244
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0064 Shadow Control ..................... 3-246
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0065 Set Weather Region ............... 3-248
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0066 Set Reference Airport ............. 3-250

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxv

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/006B Vector Fixed Selectable Feature

Control ............................................................... 3-251
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/006E IR Wavelength Limits Control .. 3-252
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0074 Crash Indication Control ......... 3-253
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/007A Ribbon Control....................... 3-254
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/007D Auto-Generic Reposition Data
Request .............................................................. 3-257
E000 Auto-generic Reposition Data Response ...................... 3-259
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/007E CPC Control of Projector Dimmer
Value ................................................................. 3-261
E000 sub 0005/007F CPC Control CPC Control of NVG Mode . 3-262
E000 sub 0005/0080 CPC Control of Projector Blend Mask.... 3-263
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0081 Extended Tracks Control ......... 3-264
E000 sub 0005/0083 CPC Control of Projector Power ........... 3-266
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0085 Runway Position Data Request . 3-267
E000 Runway Position Data Response ................................. 3-269
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0086 Weather Feedback Request ..... 3-271
E000 Weather Feedback Response ..................................... 3-273
E000 sub 0005/0088 CPC Control of Projector Shutdown ..... 3-276
E000 sub 0005/0089 CPC Control of UTM Function .............. 3-277
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0097 Moving Model Wave Bind Control3-278
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00FD Position Equate ...................... 3-281
E000 Sub Opcode 000E/0022 Ownship Lights ..................... 3-282
E000 Sub Opcode 000E/0023 Ownship Light Animation ........ 3-283
E000 Sub Opcode 000E/0024 Ownship Light Movement ........ 3-284
E000 Sub Opcode 000E/002B Runway Contamination ........... 3-285
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/009B Advanced Light and Polygon
Intensity ............................................................. 3-286
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/009C Advanced Light and Polygon

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Enable ................................................................ 3-288
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/009D Advanced Light Animation
Control ............................................................... 3-289
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/009F Ground Fire Control ................ 3-291
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00A0 Ground Fire Control ................ 3-293
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00A9 Enhanced Water HAT Request . 3-295
E000 Enhanced Water HAT Response .................................. 3-297
E000 Sup Opcode 0005/00AA Catspaw Intensity Request ...... 3-299
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00ED Laser Beam End .................... 3-302
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00EE Laser Beam Origin .................. 3-305
E000 Sub Opcode 000E/00F9 IG Sync Data Request ............. 3-307
E000 Sub Opcode 000E/00FA IG Sync Data Response........... 3-309
E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00FC Number of Viewport Controls ... 3-310

xxvi EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

4 TRANSFER PROTOCOLS AND OPCODE FORMATS ......................... 4-1

4.1 Introduction ..................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 13BHost/IG Data Transfer Protocol .................................. 4-1
4.2 General Protocol ............................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 14BHost Packet Data Field.............................................. 4-3
4.2.2 IG Packet Data Field................................................. 4-3
4.2.3 Status Codes ........................................................... 4-4
4.2.3.1 3BInitialization ................................................... 4-4
4.2.3.2 34BNormal Operation ........................................... 4-4
4.2.3.3 35BError Handling ................................................ 4-5
4.2.4 17BMultiple Packet Operation ......................................... 4-5
4.3 3BAsynchronous-Specific Protocol .......................................... 4-6
4.4 4BSynchronous-Specific Protocol ............................................ 4-6
4.5 5BMotion Systems................................................................ 4-7
4.5.1 18BMotion System Positioning ........................................ 4-7
4.5.2 19BMoving Models ........................................................ 4-8
4.6 6BExtrapolation and Non-Extrapolation ................................... 4-9
4.7 Host/IG Interface ............................................................. 4-9
4.7.1 20BEthernet Interface ................................................... 4-9
4.7.1.1 36BPhysical Link Layer Interface ............................ 4-9
4.7.1.2 37BEthernet Standards and Descriptions ............... 4-10
4.7.2 21BExamples of Ethernet Host and IG Packets ................ 4-10
4.8 UDP Interface ................................................................ 4-12
4.8.1 25BUDP-Specific Operation........................................... 4-12
4.8.2 UDP–General Protocol ............................................ 4-13
4.8.2.1 38BUDP Host to IG Interface-Specific Control Field . 4-14
4.8.2.2 UDP IG to Host Interface-Specific Control Field . 4-15
4.9 12BFormats and Descriptions ................................................ 4-15

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4.9.1 31BEP2 Opcode Data Formats....................................... 4-16
4.9.2 32BEP2 Extended Opcode Data Formats ........................ 4-40
4.9.2.1 Send Data Format (Host to IG) ....................... 4-42
4.9.2.2 43BRequest Data Format (Host to IG) ................... 4-43
4.9.2.3 4BResponse Data Format (IG to Host) ................. 4-44
4.9.2.4 45BField Explanation .......................................... 4-45
4.9.2.5 46BIEEE Format (32 bit) ..................................... 4-46
4.9.2.6 47BIEEE Format (64 bit) ..................................... 4-47

5 CIGI 3 OPCODES ............................................................... 5-1

5.1 Introduction ..................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Rockwell Collins EP2 CIGI Interface Compliance Statement .... 5-2
5.3 Host To IG Packets ........................................................... 5-3
5.3.1 IG Control [1] (3.0 Implementation) ......................... 5-3
5.3.1.1 IG Control [1] (3.2 Implementation) ................. 5-4

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxvii

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

5.3.2 Entity Control [2] (3.0 Implementation) ..................... 5-5

5.3.2.1 Entity Control [2] (3.2 Implementation)............. 5-7
5.3.3 Conformal Clamped Entity Control [3] ........................ 5-9
5.3.4 Component and Short Component Control [4/5] ........ 5-10
5.3.4.1 Entity Component Control .............................. 5-11
5.3.4.1.1 Entity Scale Control ................................... 5-12
5.3.4.1.2 Entity Scale All Control............................... 5-13
5.3.4.1.3 Entity Light/Poly Mask Control .................... 5-15
5.3.4.1.4 Entity Light/Poly Specific Control ................. 5-16
5.3.4.1.5 Entity Tracks Control ................................ 5-17
5.3.4.1.6 Entity Trails Control ................................... 5-18
5.3.4.1.7 Entity Plume Control .................................. 5-19
5.3.4.1.8 Entity Rotor Wash Control .......................... 5-21
5.3.4.1.9 Entity Bow Wake Control ........................... 5-23
5.3.4.1.10 Entity Collision Mask Control ....................... 5-24
5.3.4.1.11 Entity Tracer Control ................................. 5-25
5.3.4.1.12 Entity Light / Poly Mask Specific Control ....... 5-27
5.3.4.1.13 Entity Switch Control ................................. 5-28
5.3.4.1.14 Entity Shadow Control ............................... 5-29
5.3.4.1.15 Laserbeam Control Origin ........................... 5-31
5.3.4.1.16 Laserbeam Control End .............................. 5-33
5.3.4.1.17 Entity Bind Control .................................... 5-35
5.3.4.1.18 Entity Countermeasure Control ................... 5-36
5.3.4.1.19 Entity Terrain Following Control .................. 5-38

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5.3.4.1.20 Entity Model Definition Control .................... 5-39
5.3.4.1.21 Entity Viewport Dependent Model Control ..... 5-40
5.3.4.1.22 Entity Static Model Definition Control ........... 5-43
5.3.4.1.23 Entity Class Viewport Specific Model Control . 5-45
5.3.4.1.24 CIGI4 Entity Wave Bind ............................. 5-46
5.3.4.1.25 Entity Character Animation Control .............. 5-47
5.3.4.1.26 Entity Switch Node Control ......................... 5-48
5.3.4.1.27 Entity Animation Control ............................ 5-49
5.3.4.2 View ............................................................ 5-50
5.3.4.2.1 View Port Mask Control .............................. 5-51
5.3.4.2.2 View Port Paging Offset 0 ........................... 5-52
5.3.4.2.3 View Port Paging Offset 1 ........................... 5-53
5.3.4.2.4 View Port Paging Offset 2 ........................... 5-55

xxviii EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

5.3.4.2.5 View Port Crash Indication Control .............. 5-56

5.3.4.2.6 View Port Zoom Control ............................. 5-57
5.3.4.3 View Group Component Control ...................... 5-57
5.3.4.3.1 Viewport Group Mask Control ...................... 5-58
5.3.4.3.2 View Port Group Zoom Control .................... 5-59
5.3.4.3.3 View Port Group Crash Indication Control ..... 5-60
5.3.4.4 Sensor Component Control............................. 5-61
5.3.4.4.1 Sensor Noise Control ................................. 5-62
5.3.4.4.2 Sensor IRPP AGC/Gain/Level Control ........... 5-63
5.3.4.4.3 Sensor IRPP Distortion Control .................... 5-64
5.3.4.4.4 Sensor IRPP Polarity .................................. 5-65
5.3.4.4.5 Sensor IRPP Test Pattern ........................... 5-66
5.3.4.4.6 Sensor Symbol Intensity ............................ 5-67
5.3.4.4.7 Sensor Symbol Control .............................. 5-68
5.3.4.4.8 Sensor IR Environment .............................. 5-69
5.3.4.4.9 Sensor IR Visibility Control ......................... 5-69
5.3.4.4.10 Sensor IRPP Switches Control ..................... 5-70
5.3.4.4.11 Sensor IRPP Viewport Control ..................... 5-71
5.3.4.4.12 Sensor EXG Thermal Cuer Parameters ......... 5-72
5.3.4.4.13 Diurnal Control ......................................... 5-73
5.3.4.4.14 Sensor Symbol Value Control ...................... 5-74
5.3.4.4.15 Sensor IRPP Config File Select Control ......... 5-74
5.3.4.4.16 Sensor EXG Tracking Type Select ................ 5-75
5.3.4.4.17 Sensor IRPP Histogram Intensity Clip........... 5-75

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5.3.4.4.18 Sensor Symbol Update ............................... 5-76
5.3.4.4.19 Sensor EXG Target Tracker Parameters ........ 5-76
5.3.4.4.20 Sensor IRPP Noise Control .......................... 5-78
5.3.4.4.21 Sensor IRPP AC Coupling........................... 5-79
5.3.4.4.22 Sensor IRPP AGC Parameters ...................... 5-80
5.3.4.4.23 Sensor IRPP Histogram Parameters ............. 5-81
5.3.4.4.24 Sensor IRPP Blur ....................................... 5-82
5.3.4.4.25 Sensor IRPP Spatial Filter ........................... 5-84
5.3.4.4.26 Sensor IRPP Degraded Elements ................. 5-85
5.3.4.4.27 Sensor EXG Target Tracker Control.............. 5-86
5.3.4.4.28 Sensor IRPP Video Output Control ............... 5-87
5.3.4.4.29 Sensor IRPP Persistence Control .................. 5-88

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxix

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

5.3.4.4.30 Sensor IRPP Zoom..................................... 5-89

5.3.4.4.31 IRPP Histogram Clipping Plane .................... 5-90
5.3.4.4.32 Sensor IRPP BlurEx ................................... 5-91
5.3.4.4.33 Sensor EXG Video Continuous Zoom Control . 5-92
5.3.4.4.34 Sensor EXG Clear Software Render .............. 5-93
5.3.4.4.35 Sensor EXG Software Render Position .......... 5-94
5.3.4.5 Regional Sea Surface Component Control ........ 5-95
5.3.4.5.1 Regional Sea State Control ......................... 5-95
5.3.4.5.2 Regional 3d Waves LOD Component Control . 5-96
5.3.4.6 Regional Layered Weather Component Control . 5-98
5.3.4.6.1 Regional Wind Control ............................... 5-98
5.3.4.6.2 Regional Visibility Component Control .......... 5-99
5.3.4.6.3 Regional Fog Color Component Control ...... 5-100
5.3.4.6.4 Regional Scene Reduction (EP2 Incomplete) 5-101
5.3.4.7 Global Sea Surface Component Control .......... 5-102
5.3.4.7.1 Global Sea State Control .......................... 5-102
5.3.4.7.2 Global 3D Waves LOD Control ................... 5-103
5.3.4.7.3 Global 3D Waves Control .......................... 5-104
5.3.4.8 Global Terrain Surface Component Control ..... 5-106
5.3.4.8.1 Group Specific Control ............................. 5-106
5.3.4.8.2 Vector Fixed Selectable Feature Control ..... 5-107
5.3.4.9 Global Layered Weather Component Control ... 5-108
5.3.4.9.1 Rain Intensity Control .............................. 5-108
5.3.4.9.2 Snow Intensity Control ............................ 5-109

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5.3.4.9.3 Sand Intensity Control ............................. 5-109
5.3.4.9.4 Wind Effects Control ................................ 5-110
5.3.4.9.5 Storm Effects Control............................... 5-111
5.3.4.10 Atmosphere Component Control ................... 5-112
5.3.4.10.1 Haze Correction Control (EP2 Incomplete) .. 5-112
5.3.4.10.2 Fog Color Control .................................... 5-113
5.3.4.11 Celestial Sphere Component Control.............. 5-114
5.3.4.11.1 Time of Day ............................................ 5-115
5.3.4.11.2 Horizon Control ....................................... 5-116
5.3.4.11.3 Ambient Control ...................................... 5-117
5.3.4.11.4 Celestial Position Request ......................... 5-118
5.3.4.11.5 Time Of Year Control ............................... 5-119
5.3.4.11.6 Sun & Moon Position Request.................... 5-120

xxx EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

5.3.4.12 System Component Control .......................... 5-121

5.3.4.12.1 SEOS Projector Operational State Control ... 5-122
5.3.4.12.2 SEOS Projector Time of Day Control .......... 5-123
5.3.4.12.3 Rotor Wash Ramp Control ........................ 5-124
5.3.4.12.4 Environmental Tuning File Control ............. 5-125
5.3.4.12.5 SEOS Display Radius Control .................... 5-126
5.3.4.12.6 Ownship Lights Control ............................ 5-127
5.3.4.12.7 Ownship Strobe Control ........................... 5-128
5.3.4.12.8 Ownship Beacon Control .......................... 5-129
5.3.4.12.9 Color Control .......................................... 5-130
5.3.4.12.10 Laser Range Finder Switch Control ........ 5-131
5.3.4.12.11 Laser Range Finder Cursor Control ........ 5-132
5.3.4.12.12 Laser Range Finder Cursor Switch
Control .................................................. 5-133
5.3.4.12.13 Laser Range Finder Single Response Request
Control .................................................. 5-133
5.3.4.12.14 Ownship Steerable Lights Control ......... 5-134
5.3.4.12.15 ASCII Control ..................................... 5-135
5.3.4.12.16 Script File Index Control ...................... 5-136
5.3.4.12.17 Illumination 1 ..................................... 5-137
5.3.4.12.18 Illumination 2 ..................................... 5-138
5.3.4.12.19 Illumination 3 ..................................... 5-139
5.3.4.12.20 IG Information and Events ................... 5-140
5.3.4.12.21 IG Information and Events Response..... 5-141

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5.3.4.12.22 Sensor System Range Focus ............... 5-143
5.3.5 Articulated Parts Control [ 6 ] ............................... 5-144
5.3.5.1 Articulated Parts Short Control [ 7 ] ............. 5-146
5.3.6 Rate Control [ 8 ] (3.0 Implementation) ................. 5-147
5.3.6.1 Rate Control [ 8 ] (3.2 Implementation) ........ 5-147
5.3.7 Celestial Sphere Control [ 9 ] ............................... 5-148
5.3.8 Atmosphere Control [ 10 ] ................................... 5-149
5.3.9 Environmental Region Control [ 11 ] ...................... 5-150
5.3.10 Weather Control [12] .......................................... 5-152
5.3.11 Terrestrial Surface Conditions Control [15] ............. 5-156
5.3.12 View Control [ 16 ] ............................................. 5-157
5.3.13 Sensor Control [ 17 ] .......................................... 5-159
5.3.14 View Definition [ 21 ] .......................................... 5-160
5.3.15 Collision Detection Segment Definition [22] ............ 5-162
5.3.16 Hat/Hot Request [ 24 ] (3.0 Implementation).......... 5-163

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxxi

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Contents

5.3.16.1 Hat/Hot Request [24] (3.2 Implementation) ... 5-164

5.3.17 Line Of Sight Segment Request [ 25 ] (3.0
Implementation).................................................. 5-165
5.3.17.1 Line Of Sight Segment Request [ 25 ] (3.2
Implementation) ......................................... 5-167
5.3.18 Line Of Sight Vector Request [ 26 ]
(3.0 Implementation) ........................................... 5-169
5.3.18.1 Line of Sight Vector Request [ 26 ] (3.2
Implementation) ......................................... 5-169
5.3.19 Position Request [ 27 ] ........................................ 5-171
5.3.20 Environmental Conditions Request [28]
(EP2 Incomplete) ................................................. 5-172
5.3.21 User Defined ( EP2 Opcodes Packet ) [ 201 ] ........... 5-174
5.3.22 User Defined IRPP 0x306A Configuration Packet
[ 203 ] ............................................................... 5-175
5.3.23 User Defined Entity Chain/Tow 0x30D0 Control Packet
[ 207 ] .............................................................. 5-177
5.3.24 User Defined CPC Control Packet [215] ................. 5-180
5.3.24.1 CPC Command Control Packet Parameters ..... 5-180
5.3.25 User Defined Pause Resume Opcode [216].............. 5-181
5.3.26 User Defined Symbology Control [ 217 ] ................. 5-182
5.3.27 User Defined CIGI Advanced Storm Opcode ............ 5-183
5.3.28 Third Party Reserved Opcode [224]........................ 5-187
5.3.29 Third Party Reserved Opcode [225]........................ 5-187
5.3.30 Image Capture Request [250] ............................... 5-187
5.3.31 Long String ASCII Command [255] ........................ 5-189
5.3.32 IG To Host Packets .............................................. 5-190
5.3.33 Start Of Frame [ 101 ] (3.0 Implementation) .......... 5-190
5.3.33.1 Start Of Frame [ 101 ] (3.2 Implementation) . 5-191

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5.3.34 HAT/HOT Response [ 102 ] (3.0 Implementation) ... 5-193
5.3.34.1 Hat/Hot Response [ 102 ]
(3.2 Implementation) .................................. 5-194
5.3.35 Hat/Hot Extended Response [ 103 ]
(3.0 Implementation) ........................................... 5-195
5.3.35.1 HAT/HOT Extended Response [ 103 ] (3.2
Implementation) ......................................... 5-196
5.3.36 Line Of Sight Response [ 104 ] (3.2 Implementation)5-197
5.3.37 Line Of Sight Extended Response [ 105 ] (3.0
Implementation).................................................. 5-198
5.3.37.1 Line Of Sight Extended Response [ 105 ] (3.2
Implementation) ......................................... 5-199
5.3.38 Position Response [ 108 ] .................................... 5-200
5.3.39 Collision Detection Segment Notification [113] ....... 5-201
5.3.40 Animation Stop Notification [ 115 ] ........................ 5-202

xxxii EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Contents

5.3.41 User Defined Response Packet (EP Response Opcodes)

[202] ................................................................. 5-203
5.3.42 User Defined LRF Extended Response [ 204 ] .......... 5-204
5.3.43 User Defined Celestial Position Response [206] ....... 5-206
5.3.44 Sun & Moon Position Response [218] ..................... 5-207
5.3.45 Image Capture Response [251] ............................. 5-208
5.3.46 Formats and Descriptions ..................................... 5-209
5.3.47 Reset Standby, Operate Modes .............................. 5-209
5.3.48 CigiDbX.rst—Script File ......................................... 5-209

6 HOST COMMUNICATIONS ...................................................... 6-1

6.1 Introduction ..................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Protocol Layers ................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1 Application Layer ..................................................... 6-3
6.2.1.1 CIGI .............................................................. 6-4
6.2.1.2 ESIG ............................................................. 6-6
6.2.1.3 RADAR .......................................................... 6-7
6.2.2 Transport Layer ....................................................... 6-9
6.2.2.1 RAW .............................................................. 6-9
6.2.2.2 UDP ............................................................ 6-12
6.2.2.3 TCP ............................................................. 6-14
6.2.3 Internetwork Layer ................................................ 6-17
6.2.4 Network Access Layer ............................................ 6-17
6.3 Example Settings ........................................................... 6-17
6.3.1 CIGI 3.2/Synchronous/UDP ..................................... 6-18
6.3.2 ESIG/Raw Ethernet/Asynchronous ........................... 6-19
6.3.3 ESIG/UDP/Synchronous .......................................... 6-20
6.4 Multiple IG Communication .............................................. 6-21

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6.5 Example Settings ........................................................... 6-23
6.5.1 ESIG/UDP/Asynchronous/Master.............................. 6-23
6.5.2 ESIG/RAW Ethernet/Synchronous/Slave ................... 6-24
6.6 Comm Record/Playback ................................................... 6-25
6.6.1 Comm \Record Command ....................................... 6-26
6.6.2 Comm \Playback Command .................................... 6-26
6.6.3 OpcodeDecode Tool ............................................... 6-27

APPENDIX A EP TO EP2 CLI COMPARISON .................................... A-1

A.1 Introduction .....................................................................A-1
A.2 Differences between EP and EP2 CLI Commands and
Parameters ......................................................................A-1

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxxiii

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Figures

Figure 6-1. Setting Host Communication Settings ................................... 6-2

Figure 6-2. Configuration Host Properties Window (HostType Set to ESIG) . 6-3
Figure 6-3. Configuration Host Properties Window
(HostType Set to CIGI 3.2) ............................................................ 6-4
Figure 6-4. ESIG Protocol Settings........................................................ 6-6
Figure 6-5. Radar Parameters .............................................................. 6-8
Figure 6-6. Raw Ethernet Parameters .................................................. 6-10
Figure 6-7. UDP Parameters .............................................................. 6-12
Figure 6-8. TCP Ethernet Parameters .................................................. 6-15
Figure 6-9. Config Host Properties CIGI 3.2, Synchronous, UDP ............. 6-18
Figure 6-10. Config Host SimHost1 Properties CIGI 3.2, Synchronous,
UDP .......................................................................................... 6-19
Figure 6-11. Config Host Properties ESIG, Raw Ethernet, Asynchronous .. 6-19

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Figure 6-12. Config Host Properties ESIG, Raw Ethernet, Asynchronous .. 6-20
Figure 6-13. Config Host Properties ESIG, UDP, Synchronous ................ 6-20
Figure 6-14. Config Host SimHost1 Properties ESIG, UDP, Synchronous .. 6-21
Figure 6-15. Config Host Properties ESIG, UDP, Asynchronous, Multi IG
Master ....................................................................................... 6-23
Figure 6-16. Config Host Properties ESIG, UDP, Synchronous,
Multi IG Slave ............................................................................. 6-24
Figure 6-17. The EP2 Comm Record/Playback App................................. 6-25

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxxiv

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Tables

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description ......................................... 2-3

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number .................................................... 3-2
Table 3-2. Opcodes Listed by Name with Related CLI Command.............. 3-13
Table 4-1. Status Codes for Host Packet Header Block ............................. 4-3
Table 4-2. Status Codes for IG Packet Header Block ................................ 4-3
Table 4-3. Motion System Parameter Scaling Values and Resolutions ......... 4-8
Table 6-1. CIGI Parameters .................................................................. 6-5
Table 6-2. ESIG Parameters ................................................................ 6-6
Table 6-3. Radar Parameters ............................................................... 6-8
Table 6-4. Raw Ethernet Parameters................................................... 6-10
Table 6-5. UDP Parameters ................................................................ 6-13

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Table 6-6. TCP Ethernet Parameters .................................................... 6-15
Table 6-7. Configuration Parameters for Multiple IG to Host
Communications ......................................................................... 6-22
Table A-1. EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison .....................................A-2

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxxv

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 This page intentionally left blank

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

xxxvi EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
About This Book

Introduction
This document contains a master listing of CLI commands and
opcodes available for use on the EP-8000 series and EP-80 image
generators manufactured by Rockwell Collins.
This document is subject to updates to maintain accuracy.

Related Documents
These documents, or their equivalent, might provide additional
information. To purchase any of these documents not included in
your order, contact your Rockwell Collins sales representative.
NOTE: Unless noted, all numbers are Rockwell Collins part
numbers.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

EP2 Real-Time Initialization Procedure
Rockwell Collins 964-5924-003

EP2 User Interface Manual

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-002

EP2 Disk Manager Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-010

EP2 Test Pattern User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-011

EP2 Sea States User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-012

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxxvii

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
About This Book

EP2 Head Tracker User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-013

EP2 Environment Module User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-014

EP2 Mission Function Module User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-016

EP2 Helicopter Zoom User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-017

EP2 Special Effects User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-018

EP2 Taxi Camera and Brief/Debrief User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-019

EP2 Light Points User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-020

EP2 Particle Storms User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-024

EP2 Fast Jet Zoom User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-025

EP2 Generic Airport User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-026

EP2 OGL Symbology Plugin Interface for EP-80

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-027

EP2 OGL Video Overlay Plugin User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-028

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

EP2 SDF Symbology User Guide
Rockwell Collins 964-5924-029

EP2 Sand Storms User Guide for EP-8100

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-030

EP-8100 Modeled Mirrors User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-032

EP2 Enhanced Sea State User Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5924-034

EP2EP2 OpenFlight Converter Guide

Rockwell Collins 964-5934-003

xxxviii EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP2 Sensors User Guide
Rockwell Collins 945-5465-001

EP2 Radar Terrain Server User Guide

Rockwell Collins 945-5465-003
EP-8100 Image Generator Operation and Maintenance Manual
Rockwell Collins 946-00C6-001
EP-8000 Image Generator Operation and Maintenance Manual
Rockwell Collins 964-5925-001

EP-80 Image Generator Operation and Maintenance Manual

Rockwell Collins 964-5927-001

Abbreviations and Acronyms

2D two dimensional
3D three dimensional
API application programming interface
ARINC Aeronautical Radio, Inc
ATP acceptance test procedure
CBIT continuous built-in tests
CD collision detection
COTS commercial off-the-shelf
CPU central processing unit
CT continuous texture
DAFIF digital aeronautical flight information file
DB database
DR data router
DVI digital video interface
ECT2 Environment Creation Tool – 2nd generation
EGPWS enhanced ground proximity warning system

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

EP environmental processor
EP2 second generation real-time software
EP2-DBGS database generation system – 2nd generation
ESIG legacy image generator
FCC Federal Communication Commission
FPGA field programmable gate array
GUI graphical user interface
HAT height above terrain
HOT height of terrain
IBIT initiated built-in tests
IG image generator
IOS Instructor Operating Station
lat latitude
LCD liquid crystal display
LCOS liquid crystal on silicon
LOD level-of-detail

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes xxxix

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
About This Book

lon longitude
LRU lowest replaceable unit
MTBF mean time between failures
MSL mean sea level
MTTR mean time to repair
NLIM nonlinear image mapping
OTW out-the-window
PBIT power-on built-in tests
PC personal computer
PCB printed circuit board
PDU power distribution unit
RGB red, green, blue
RGBA red, green, blue, alpha
RT real-time computer
SCO screen coverage optimization
SP scene processor
SRIO serial rapid input/output
TÜV Technischer Überwachungs-Verein
UDP user datagram protocol
WGS World Geodetic System
WAM wind affected model

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

xl EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
1 Functional
Overview – How
To Use the IG

1.1 Introduction
The simulator host, the Instructor Operating Station (IOS), and
some testing applications (such as ATP2) all communicate with the
real-time software via an opcode interface. A Graphical User
Interface (GUI) is provided which provides both graphical and text
command-line interface (CLI) methods for controlling the system.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

This section provides details of the opcode and CLI controls for the
EP2 real-time software with references to the documents that
provide more information.
The functional groups of the EP2 Real-Time are:
• Initialization and general controls
• Display interface
• Viewport and display
• Database and eye control (scene dynamics)
− Model control and animation
− Routed and converging traffic
• Mission functions
− Height above terrain
− Collision detection

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 1-1

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

− Line of sight
− Hit detection
− Mission Functions Engine
− Valid Material Codes
• Ownship lights
• Airport controls
• Generic airport
• Environment simulation
− Simulator environment
− Time of day and ambient simulation
− Time of year
• Weather simulation
− Visibility fog and haze
− Horizon & sky effects
− Layered cloud
− Storms and weather fronts
− General wind effects
− Color control
− Continuous texture control
• Radar Terrain Generation
• Tile Pager
The EP2 real-time software has been designed for compatibility with
host applications written for the ESIG and EP/EPX legacy products.
To access new features available on EP/EPX and EP2 platforms, host
applications will need to be modified in those areas.
More detailed information concerning the operation of these
functions can be found in the user guides referenced in the About
This Book - Related Documents section of this document.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.2 Initialization and General Controls
The host controls the IG by sending a block of opcode packets
terminated by an end of data opcode (3000).
The initialization process is described in the EP-8000 Real-Time
initialization document.

1.2.1 IG Startup and Restart

The host should monitor the IG return information for a
start/restart condition of the IG. This can be found in the Ethernet
packet, data field, header block, and status code.

1-2 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

1.2.2 Loading Models & Texture

Some CLI commands are related to initialization and general
control, specifically loading and unloading models, textures, and
associated tasks. These are: LOAD, UNLOAD, RENDERMODE, and
SCALE.

1.2.3 Scene Management & Control CLI

CLI commands particularly relating to load management in the IG
include KLOD and KST.

1.3 Display Interface

Control of the displays is accomplished through video and viewport
CLI commands or opcodes.

1.3.1 Coordinate Systems

EP2 uses a right-handed system in which the positive z-axis is
vertical up, the positive x-axis points east, and the positive y-axis
points north.
Rotations are applied in the order yaw/pitch/roll and are expressed
in degrees. Yaw is a positive rotation about the z-axis, pitch is a
positive rotation about the x-axis, and roll is a positive rotation
about the y-axis.

1.3.2 Viewport & Video Control

A viewport is used to render a particular viewing window in the
synthetic environment. The viewing window is defined by clipping

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

planes that emanate from an eyepoint. The eyepoint can be
positioned at any place in the synthetic environment.
Opcodes 3052 and 3043 are available for viewport host control. In
most applications, only 3052 is used. Viewport and video
initialization in the CLI commands include: RATE, VIEWPORT,
VIDEO, VIDEO \BLANK, VIDEO \TRANSPORT.

1.4 Database and Eye Control (Scene Dynamics)

1.4.1 Introduction
The following capabilities are covered in this section.
• Script (reset) files for controlling sequences of commands
• Auto-triggered effects
• Moving models

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 1-3

Rockwell Collins, Inc. – Proprietary Information
EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

• Routed traffic
• Host driven traffic

1.4.2 Script Files

EP2 includes a script file facility also known as Reset Files to allow
the host to more easily control miscellaneous functions such as
visual test patterns, customer specific model tuning and IG controls
etc.

1.4.3 Model Control and Animation

1.4.3.1 Motion Systems
Model capabilities include binding, positioning and chaining.
Host opcodes for model control include 3049, 3040, 3041, 3042,
304C, 3090, and 303D.
CLI commands used for modeling include ANIMATE, BIND, BIND
\TERRAIN, CHAIN, DB, POSITION, POSITION \EQUATE, UNBIND,
UNCHAIN, EXTRAPOLATE, EYEPOINT, and VELOCITY.

1.4.3.2 Model Animation

The EP2 real-time provides a means to control animation sequences
such as those used for windsocks and marshallers.

1.4.4 Routed and Converging Traffic

Host opcode controls include opcodes 3042, 309A, 309B, and 3121.
CLI commands include CONVERGE, ROUTE, ROUTE\DEFINE,

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ROUTE\INFO, ROUTE\LIST, ROUTERECORD,
ROUTERECORD\DEFINE.

1.4.4.1 Routed Traffic

Advanced routed traffic is a feature for EP2 that allows real-time
recording and storage of route files by using the path of the
eyepoint, which can be played back later to any moving model.
The CLI interface can be used as an offline maintenance tool for
recording and testing routes. It is recommended that the full routed
traffic interface be implemented and that the recording capability
be included within an appropriate instructor visual maintenance
page.

1-4 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

1.4.4.2 Converging Traffic

The B747-400 aircraft from the database model toybox is pre-
bound by RC-STS onto reserved converging traffic motion systems
for use by the host for non-TCAS converging traffic scenarios.
The aircraft appears on the IG-controlled converging route only if
the host sets the motion system select number to a valid selection
(i.e., non-zero).

1.4.4.3 TCAS Traffic

An aircraft from the database model toybox is pre-bound by RC-
STS or alternatively bound by the host if required onto the reserved
TCAS traffic motion systems for use by the host for integrated
TCAS traffic.

1.4.4.4 Converging Birds

The birds model from the database model toybox is pre-bound by
RC-STS onto the reserved Converging Birds motion system for use
by the host for simulated Converging Birds malfunctions.

1.5 Mission Functions

Mission functions are a key part of flight simulation.
The following mission functions are supported:
• Height above terrain
• Height of terrain
• Line segment collision detection
• Line-of-sight detection

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

• Fast jet collision detection
• Hit detection
• Material code feedback
• Modeled effects (such as marshaller controls) based upon non-
visible databases control structures
More details can be found in the EP2 Mission Function Module User
Guide.

1.5.1 Height Above Terrain

The following host opcodes apply to HAT: 3080, 3084, 3030, 3031,
and 3032. The CLI command HAT controls this feature.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 1-5

Rockwell Collins, Inc. – Proprietary Information
EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

1.5.2 Collision Detection

Host opcodes 3039, 3081, 3184, E000 (0005/005D) and E000
(extended CD response) provide control for host collision detection.
The CLI commands CDL, CDC, and FJCD control collision detection.

1.5.3 Line-of-Sight
The CLI LOS command controls this feature.

1.5.4 Hit Detection

The CLI HD command controls this feature.

1.5.5 Surface Material Feedback

The Surface Material Code (SMC) in conjunction with Collision
Detection can be used to determine when the aircraft wheels have
run off the runway or taxiway.

1.6 Ownship Lights

1.6.1 Ownship Lights Implementation
Ownship lights consist of landing lights, beacon and strobe lights.
Host controls for ownship lights include the following opcodes:
3020, 3028, 3021, 3022, and extended opcodes E000 subopcode
000E/0022 and E000 subopcode 000E/0024.
CLI commands include: GLARE, GLARE \BEACON, GLARE \LOBES,
GLARE \STROBE, LOBE, LOBE \DEFINE, and OWNSHIPLIGHT.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.7 Airport Controls
The following sections discuss general airport controls.
Host opcodes for airport lighting control are 3023 and 3024. Host
opcodes for airport information are extended opcodes E000
subopcode 0005/002C and response, and E000 subopcode
0005/002D and response.
The CLI commands include AIRPORT, INTENSITY, LIGHTPOINT.

1.7.1 Airport
The data relating to each airport can be sent to the host.

1-6 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

1.7.2 Lighting
To permit maximum control of the airport lighting, the switch
standard is applied to all lights within each new build
EP-8000/EP-8100 airport.

1.7.3 Runway Contamination

A number of runway contaminations are available.

1.8 Generic Airport

A generic airport is provided to be used whenever a specific airport
model does not exist in the database. Further information regarding
the use of the generic airport can be found in the Generic Airport
User Guide.

1.9 Environment Simulation

This section defines the environment simulation effects.

1.9.1 Environment Information Feedback

The EP2 real-time software is able to report environment
information back to the host. This is particularly useful when using
the regional weather feature as it enables the host to know the
state of the weather at any given time.

1.9.1.1 Weather Feedback

The following feedback information is available:
Visibility

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

•
• Ground fog height and RVR
• Cloud layer 0 top, bottom and density
• Cloud layer 1 top, bottom and density
• Scattered cloud bottom and density

1.9.1.2 Environment Feedback Host Controls

The host should send extended opcode E000 sub-opcode
0005/0086 to enable Weather Feedback Response.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 1-7

Rockwell Collins, Inc. – Proprietary Information
EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

1.9.2 Time of Day & Ambient Simulation

The effects of the sun and moon as light sources are simulated and
sun and moon models are available. Time of day is controlled by
the opcode 0x3006 and the TOD CLI command.

1.9.3 Time of Year

Time of year is controlled by host opcode 0x3025 and the CLI
SEASON command.

1.10 Weather Simulation

1.10.1 Visibility and Ground Fog
The ground fog feature allows fog to sit in valleys and in between
mountains in a realistic and correctly occulted manner.
Conventional pixel-based visibility is available on EP2 and takes
effect above the Ground Fog height.
Host opcodes include 3008, 3002, 302A and 3057. CLI commands
are VISIBILITY, GFOG.

1.10.2 Cloud Control

Three types of clouds are available: layered, scattered/broken and
storm clouds.
Host opcodes include 3004, 300E, 300F, and 309F. CLI commands
are CLOUDS, CLOUDS \TRANSITION, CLOUDS \CUE, CLOUDS
\BROKEN and CLOUDS \SCUD.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.10.3 Storm Control
Host opcodes include 3001 and 300A. CLI commands are STORM,
STORMDEF and STORMCONTROL. Further details can be found in the
EP2 Particle Storms User Guide.

1.11 Wind Effects

Windsocks, flags, smoke plumes, blowing sand, blowing snow, and
falling snow are effects that are built into inset databases or built
into the EP2 real-time system. These are known collectively as wind
affected models (WAMs).
The wind effect is more of an effect on other effects than an effect
itself, since wind cannot be seen; only the effects of the wind can
be seen. Wind affects many aspects of the system: falling snow,
falling rain, blowing snow/sand, scattered clouds, layered clouds,

1-8 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

ground fog, smoke plumes, trails (missile and contrails), ship

wakes, waves, whitecaps, wind lanes, wiggling trees, rotorwash,
and specifically modeled wind-affected models, such as windsocks,
and flags.
Wind effects are controlled by host opcode 309D and the CLI
command WAM with all of its qualifiers. Wind layers are controlled
by the Wind Layer extended opcode (0005/0053) and the CLI
command WIND.

1.12 Radar Terrain Generation

This is described in the EP2 Radar Terrain Server User Guide.

1.13 Scene Control

1.13.1 Scene Organization
EP2 uses four distinctive scene components:
• A low-level 3D earth model.
• Detailed 3D terrain insets.
• 3D features and airports.
• Moving models.

1.13.2 Real-World Heights

All airports built as either flat or sloping are modeled at the real-
world height. A flat airport has the runways and taxiways modeled
at the ARINC or origin runway touchdown (TD) point height. A
sloping airport has the heights of the runways and taxiways based

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

on an airport profile plan.

1.13.3 Season
The time of year can be selected to be either Summer or Winter.

1.14 Polygon Switch Assignments

Certain polygons in an airport model have their brightness set by
the airport specific script file relating to that airport, or the real-
time depending on environmental conditions.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 1-9

Rockwell Collins, Inc. – Proprietary Information
EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

1.15 Airport Control & Feedback

1.15.1 Airport Data
EP2 can provide feedback of data relating to each modeled Airport
and associated runways.

1.15.2 Runway Contamination

All runways are modeled with a dry surface. Other runway
contaminants are available as options for given airports.

1.15.3 Airport Lighting Assignments

To permit maximum control of the airport lighting, the switch
standard is applied to all lights within each new build
EP-8000/EP-8100 airport.

1.16 Ownship Lighting Controls

EP2 software provides control of the ownship landing lights,
beacons and strobes.

1.17 Environmental Controls

EP2 software provides control of falling snow, and blowing snow or
sand.

1.17.1 Time of Day

EP2 software provides control of time-of-day (day, dawn, dusk, and
night).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.17.2 Visibility and Ground Fog
Ground fog allows fog to sit in valleys and in between mountains in
a realistic and correctly occulted manner. Conventional pixel-based
visibility is available on EP2.

1.17.3 Cloud Control

Three types of clouds are available: layered, scattered/broken and
storm clouds.

1.17.4 Horizon
EP2 allows control of the horizon feature.

1-10 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

1.17.5 Rain Defocus

A control is provided to defocus the scene to simulate the effect of
rain on the windscreen.

1.18 Visual Script (Control) Files

EP2 includes a script file facility also known as Reset Files to allow
the host to more easily control miscellaneous functions such as
visual test patterns, customer specific model tuning and IG
controls.

1.19 Video Display On/Display Blanking

EP2 includes an internal timer for blanking the visual displays if no
input is received from the host or if the eyepoint has not moved for
a predefined time period.

1.20 Height Above & Height of Terrain (HAT/HOT)

The height-above-terrain (HAT)/height-of-terrain (HOT) feature is
designed to simulate the ownship radar altimeter and terrain
following on the ground.

1.21 Collision Detection Applications

There are two collision detection systems, the first uses an
internally defined test point and is normally used to detect the
aircraft entering clouds and the second is based on line segments
colliding with objects for collision detection and surface detection.

1.22 Routed Traffic Recording and Control

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Advanced routed traffic is a feature for EP2 that allows real-time
recording and storage of route files by using the path of the
eyepoint, which can be played back later to any moving model.

1.23 Surface Movement Guidance and Control

System (SMGCS)
Surface Movement Guidance & Control System is only available in
certain pre-defined models.
A standard interface is provided for host computers to control
Surface Movement Guidance & Control System (SMGCS) routes.
Light switches are assigned to be used for SMGCS light groups,
allowing airports to be built using lights within a pre-defined range.
It is not possible to predefine what these switches should do as all
SMGCS systems operate in slightly different fashions. In order to

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 1-11

Rockwell Collins, Inc. – Proprietary Information
EP2 Real-Time System Software Overview

achieve the desired effect, script files are built that perform the
necessary light switching. These script files are called by the host
for each SMGCS state

1.24 Tracks
This is described in chapter 7 of the EP2 Special Effects User Guide.

1.25 Tracers
This is described in chapter 11 of the EP2 Special Effects User Guide.

1.26 Laser Range Finder

Host opcodes include 3036, 3037, 3038, 303C, 3082 and 3087. CLI
command is LRF.

1.27 3D Waves and Sea States

This is described in the EP2 Sea State User Guide.

1.28 Sensor Operation and Thermal (IR) Modes

This is described in the EP2 Sensor User Guide.

1.29 Taxi Camera and Brief/Debrief

This is described in the EP2 Taxi Camera and Brief/Debrief User
Guide.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1-12 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
2 CLI Commands

2.1 Introduction
Command-line interface (CLI) commands are executed, from the EP2
user interface, either interactively at the CLI> prompt or in script files,
allowing the user direct and scripted control of many IG functions. The
EP2 UI serves as an interactive user interface to the IG and provides IG
control, monitoring, test, and tuning functions. It communicates with
the IG in the same manner as the simulation host, and can generate
ESIG-style opcodes as well.
NOTE: When you type help <command name> at the CLI> prompt, the
system may display diagnostic command options intended for
internal Rockwell Collins use only. Diagnostic commands will

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

not be defined in this manual.
CLI commands in this section are in alphabetical order.

2.2 Command Structure

CLI commands are entered at the CLI> prompt, together with their
associated parameters, qualifiers, and keywords.
• Entering the command alone without any parameters, qualifiers, or
keywords results in a listing of the current status or settings for that
command and its parameters.
• Entering the command with parameters, qualifiers, or keywords
changes the status or settings for that command. Commands are
entered by following the syntax shown below:

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-1

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

CLI> command [ [parameter [keyword] ] [parameter [keyword] ] . .

[\qualifier [parameter [keyword] ] ] . . . .]
Where:
[ ] refers to optional items on the command line
. . . means that each [ ] may be repeated
NOTE: If parameters and qualifiers on a command level are used on
the same CLI line, the parameters must precede the qualifiers.
Once a qualifier is used, it can be followed by its own
parameters or by another qualifier
Each command is identified by a unique name. The entire name can be
entered at the CLI prompt, or the name can be abbreviated by only
entering enough of it to distinguish it from other CLI commands.
Command parameters can be specified in the same abbreviated fashion,
as long as enough characters are supplied to uniquely identify each
parameter. A space must separate each parameter contained in the
command line. Parameters might also require keywords such as
switches, numeric values, or alphanumeric strings. These keywords
must be separated from their associated parameter by a space or an
equal sign.
A switch keyword may be entered as either ON or OFF, and a numeric
keyword may be entered as a real number or as an integer. If a real
number is entered for a parameter that requires an integer keyword, the
fractional portion of the entered number is truncated. CLI alphanumeric
parameter keywords do not need enclosing quotes.
Integer values can be entered as either a decimal number such as 15, or
as a hexadecimal number such as 0xF. The 0x tells the command parser
that the number is in hexadecimal format.
A qualifier is used as a command option in cases where the option is the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

subcommand of a command. It must be preceded by a backslash (\),
and it requires its own parameters; in turn, the command-option
parameters require a keyword. An example of the syntax is shown
below:
command [ . . . [\qualifier] . . . ] \qualifier [ [parameter [keyword] . . . ] . . . . ]
If a filename is entered as a parameter keyword, it can contain a
maximum of eleven characters. Numbers and the underscore character (
_ ) can appear in the filename, but not as the filename’s first character.
The filename can be followed by a period delimiter ( . ) and an extension
of up to three characters.
A few of the CLI commands require keywords that specify a primary
moving model (mm) and its submodel components. A dot-notation
convention is used to describe these entities. This convention specifies
the primary mm by an integer, and indicates one of its submodel
components by specifying the primary model integer number, a period

2-2 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

delimiter ( . ), and the submodel number. For example, the primary mm

6 is entered as 6, and its second submodel component is entered as 6.2.
A vertical bar ( | ) that separates a set of parameters or keywords
indicates an exclusive-OR condition. If a set uses the vertical bar, only
one of the parameters or keywords that are listed may be specified in an
individual CLI command.
Most CLI input is not case sensitive. Commands, parameters, qualifiers,
and keywords can be entered in uppercase or lowercase. An exception
to this is the filename keyword. Filenames must be entered in
lowercase.

2.3 Commands—Short Descriptions

Table 2-1 lists the command names and qualifiers (if any), in
alphabetical order, along with a short description.

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial ABORT Aborts the processing of queued CLI commands. All
initial AIRPORT Used to view information about an airport. All
8.0 \ALN Used for alignment file validation All
1.5 \LOD Sets the default level of detail scale for all All
airports/cities.
1.5 \SUBMODEL Allows position and select control of airport All
submodels.
initial \VISIT Positions the eyepoint at an airport All
10.0 ALPHACULL Set/get AlphaCull parameters for EP-8100. 8100
initial ANIMATE Displays or controls an animation. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initial \SEQUENCE Defines the animation sequence. All
initial ATMOSPHERE Sets atmosphere light scattering parameters. All
1.3 \GLARE Sets up parameters for glare around the sun. All
6.0 \TUNE Sets atmosphere light scattering tuning. All
3.0 BEHAVIOR \MODEL Controls a model behavior. All
11 BEHAVIOR \PARAM Sets model behavior parameters. All
initial BIND Displays a model binding, or binds a model to a All
motion system.
4.0 \AUTOPRIORITY Enable/disable automatic promotion / demotion of all All
MM rendering priorities.
2.1 \HAT Enables motion system with a general HAT. All
initial \TERRAIN Sets motion system to follow terrain. All
2.1 \WAVE Sets motion system to follow 3D sea state motion. All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-3

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
1.7 BOWSPRAY Binds a previously defined particle effect and make it All
react to a model's movement relative to sea state
waves.
1.8 BOWSPRAY \DEFINE Binds a previously defined particle effect and makes it All
react to a model's movement relative to sea state
waves.
1.7 BOWWAKE Controls a previously defined bow wake. All
1.7 \DEFINE Defines the attributes of a bow wake type. All
initial BS\TUNE Fine-tunes the blowing snow and sand layer. Debug All
only.
initial CAPTURE The command has three qualifiers. All
6.0 \IMAGEBUS Captures image bus (engineering diagnostic). All
initial \SCENEBUS Captures scene bus (engineering diagnostic). All
2.1 \TEXTURE Captures texture bus (engineering diagnostic). All
1.4 CAPTUREIMAGE Captures an image from the EXG and sends it to Test All
Pattern or Symbology
1.6 \CONFIGURE Create a configuration to capture an image from the All
EXG and send to Test Pattern or Symbology.
11.0 CATENARY Defines or alters a catenary cable
11.0 CATENARY \DEFINE Defines a type of catenary, which includes width and
color.
1.3 CDC Collision detection clouds All
initial CDL Displays/defines collision line segments, and enables/ All
disables collision detection with line segments.
1.3 \CONFIG Configures run-time parameters for line collision All
detection.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.1 \FIC Determines whether the material returns FIC. All
initial CHAIN Displays/creates a link between two moving models. All
initial \FOLLOW Chains a motion system to follow a moving model. All
initial \LOOKAT Chains a motion system to look at a moving model. All
initial \SPIN Chains a motion system to rotate based on velocity of All
a moving model.

initial \TOW Chains a motion system to be towed by a moving All

model.
initial CLAMP Views motion system position/rotation clamp. All
initial \HPR Sets motion system rotation clamp. All
initial \XYZ Sets motion system position clamp. All
initial CLEAR\LABEL Deletes on-label text. All
initial CLEAR\SCREEN Deletes on-screen text. All

2-4 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
1.7 CLIPSHADOWS Sets parameters for shadows derived by clipping. All
initial CLOUDS Defines nonpolygonal cloud layers. All
initial \BROKEN Controls broken (also referred to as scattered) clouds. All
1.3 \BTUNE Tuning parameters for broken clouds. All
1.4 \CUE Controls the in-cloud speed cue effect. All
initial \HORIZON Controls the horizon band. All
initial \OCTA Specifies broken cloud octa levels 1-15 All
initial \OCTATEXTURE Configure texture parameters for an octa level of All
broken clouds.
initial \OPAQUETEXTURE Configures opaque texture parameters for an octa All
level of broken clouds.
1.4 \SCUD Sets the scud bottom\top transition range for a cloud All
layer.
initial \TEXTURE Modifies the texture maps used for nonpolygonal All
cloud layers.
initial \TRANSITION Defines the cloud layer transition zone. All
5.0 \TRIM Specifies the cloud trim settings. All
initial \TUNE Fine-tunes nonpolygonal cloud layers. All
1.7 \TYPE Specifies the cloud type setting. All
\VOLUMESCUD Enables/disables volumetric scud. All
4.0 COBRA Controls cobra auto-align functionality. All
4.0 \COLOR Color matrix control. All
4.0 \EDGEBLENDCOLOR Edgeblend color control. All
4.0 \EDGEBLENDMASK Edgeblend mask control. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4.0 \INTENSITY Intensity uniformity control. All
4.0 \NLIM NLIM control. All
4.0 \SYMBOLOGY Symbology control. All
4.0 \TESTPATTERN Test pattern control. All
initial COLLISIONMASK Changes the participation of a particular moving All
model in the various mission function tests.
initial COLOR All
initial \RESTORE Restores a color palette from file. All
initial \SAVE Saves a color palette to file. All
initial COMM Displays status of the host interface, enables/disables All
the host interface, and controls host data capture.
6.0 \CONFIG Configures the communications interface. All
initial \DEBUG Controls the output of host information to the All
console.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-5

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial \PLAYBACK Used to play back the host-block file. All
4.0 \SERIALSYNC Sends the host sync signal on pin 7 of the serial port. All
1.7 \STATS Reports statistics on packets received on a host All
connection.
initial \WATCH Records position data for a given moving model All
provided by the host.
initial CONTINUE Continue CLI processing. All
initial CONVERGE Assigns a converging traffic scenario to an MM. The All
scenario has to be defined.
initial \DEFINE Controls a converging traffic scenario. All
2.1 COUNTERMEASURE Controls a previously defined countermeasure effect. All
2.1 \DEFINE Defines (allocates memory for) or modifies a All
countermeasure effect definition.
2.1 \MONITOR Specifies which countermeasure effect will be All
monitored in EP2 statistics output (Engineering
Command).
4.0 CPC Commands to control communication from the IG to All
the Communications PC (CPC).
5.0 \BLEND Sets the nighttime edge blend state to on or off for All
one or all the projectors in a display subsystem.
4.0 \DIMMER Sends a preset for the dimmer control. All
5.0 \NVG Sets the NVG mode to on or off for one or all the All
projectors in a display sub-system.
5.0 \POWER Sets the power state to on or off for one or all the All
projectors in a display sub-system.
5.0 \SHUTDOWN Allows the user to shutdown the OS and leave the All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

power on, turn the power off, or reboot the hardware.
5.0 \UTMDAYEDGEBLEND Enable or disable day edge blending for one or all the All
projectors in a display sub-system.
1.5 CRASH Controls the crash indication for a visual channel. All
9.0 CREATECOLORCODER Creates color coder. All
FROMSCRATCH
10.0 CTANDTHEME Enables the 3D WholeEarth module. All
10.0 \CONFIG Cache management configuration (high-water mark
settings)
10.0 \CT Sets parameters for the 3D WholeEarth CT pager. All
10.0 \CTDEBUG Sets parameters for 3D WholeEarth CT debug All
11.0 \DISTTOSHORE Read a distance-to-shore database. All
13.0 \DISTSHOREPAGER Set parameter for distance-to-shore paging. All
12.0 \DISTTOSHOREWIT Read a distance-to-shore database. All

2-6 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
HGRADIENT
11.0 \ELEVATION Elevation pager settings. All
10.0 \FEATURES3D Sets parameters for 3D WholeEarthfeatures. All
10.0 \LOADBRUSH Loads a 3D WholeEarth brush map. All
12.0 \REGION Update the theme library dynamic 3D paging All
parameters.
11.0 \REMOVEDISTTOSH Read a distance-to-shore database. All
ORE
12.0 \REMOVEDISTTOSH Read a distance-to-shore database. All
OREWITHGRADIENT
10.0 \STATS Output stats for the CTandTheme module. All
initial CTTEST Tests CT and related performance. All
initial CTTHEME Sets the CT theme generation options. All
1.5 \CULTFEATURES Set the CT theme cultural 3D feature rendering All
options.
initial \CULTLIGHTS Set the CT theme cultural lights rendering options. All
1.5 \CULTTUNING Set the CT theme cultural lights and 3D feature All
tuning options.
1.5 DATABASE Configures a database type. All
initial DB Forces an unload of any current insets and then All
executes the specified database load script.
1.9 \CALC WGS84 calculator. All
4.0 \CIGI Provides controls for database load and unload All
specific to the CIGI host interface.
initial \COMPLETE Database load complete (not a user command). All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initial \IGNORE List, update, or clear the ignore paths used when All
searching for epins.
initial \LIST Displays database elements of a given type. All
1.4 \REPOSITION Controls reposition pager parameters. All
4.0 \STATUS Current load status.
initial \UNLOAD Temporarily unloads certain data types. All
1.5 \WORLD Sets world size/shape. All
1.9 \WGS84 WGS84 mode control. All
initial DEFINE Defines a variable used in if statements. All
initial DEFOCUS Sets defocus level. All
initial \LEVEL Sets defocus values per level. All
1.3 \RASTER Sets parameters of the raster defocus kernel. All
initial DEVGAIN Sets the emband sensor device gain. All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-7

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial DEVLEVEL Sets the emband sensor device level. All
initial DIGUY Initialize / re-initialize the Di-Guy scenario. All
initial \ACTION Sets the action state for a Di-Guy character. All
initial \CHAR Assigns a particular DI-guy character type to a All
moving model.
initial \DEFINEACTIONLIST Defines a named action list that can be referenced in All
the DIGUY \DEFINECHARTYPE command.
initial \DEFINECHARTYPE Defines a DiGuy character type and its appearances. All
initial \TUNING Tune motion LOD culling. All
initial \WEAPON Sets the current azimuth and elevation of a DI-Guy All
character's weapon aim angles and head gaze angles.
9.0 DS
9.0 \CONFIG Configure database server memory manager (one
time at startup only).
initial EBGAMMA Sets the edge blend gamma for a viewport. All
initial ECHO Enable/disable echoing of commands. All
5.0 \FORCE Sets echo force mode. All
initial ELEVTEST Tests terrain-related performance. All
7.0 EMP \AC Diagnostics – ac-coupling control. All
7.0 EMP \COLORSCALE Diagnostics – color scale control. All
7.0 EMP \NOISE Diagnostics – noise control. All
11.0 EMP \PIXELSTACK Diagnostics – pixel stack control All
7.0 EMP \POLARITY Diagnostics – polarity control. All
7.0 EMP \SPACIALFILTER Diagnostics – spacial filter control. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7.0 EMP Diagnostics – temporal filter control. All
\TEMPORALFILTER
11.0 EMP \TRACKER Diagnositics - tracker control All
11.0 EMP \ZOOM Diagnositics - zoom control All
initial ENDIF Ends processing of an if command. All
initial ENVIRONMENT Environment tuning
initial \SUNMOONMODEL Loads a model for the sun and moon. All
initial \TUNING View or set parameters for environment tuning files. All
initial EXTRAPOLATE Displays, enables or disables, and controls All
extrapolation for a moving model.
initial EYEPOINT Configure eyepoint. All
6.0 \CONTROLVOLUME Alternate position from which control volumes can be All
calculated.
1.4 FACETRANDCOLOR Randomly colors terrain skin facets. All

2-8 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
1.7 FADE Sets the sub-model fade value. All
11.0 FASTSLEW Configure optimizations at fast slew rate. All
13.0 FASTSLEW Fast time handling of features.
\FASTTIMEFEATURE
S
11.0 FASTSLEW The linear interpolation of slew rate based on zoom All
\SLEWRATESCALE factor.
12.0 FICLAYER FIC replacement layer. All
12.0 FICLAYER \DEBUG Sets parameters for 3D WholeEarth CT debug. All
initial FILE Displays or modifies the file names contained in the All
file table.
1.6 FIXED \VF Displays or modifies the selects for vector fixed All
selectable features.
1.7 FJCD The fast jet collision detection definition. All
2.1 \CONFIG Configuration settings for all FJCD test points. All
1.7 \DEBUG Allows debugging of collisions by artificially specifying All
a model’s velocity.
2.1 \FIC Determines whether the material returns FIC. All
initial FOGCOLOR Defines the fog color. All
8.0 \BASECOLOR Sets the base color for global fog. All
1.3 FRAME Diagnostic frame capture utility. All
initial GAIN View or set raster gain scalars (not persisted) All
6.0 \AUTO View or set raster gain scalars for auto gain (not All
persisted)
initial GENERICAIRPORT Set and view generic airport parameters. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6.0 \CONFIGWINDSOCK Configures the slot associated with each windsock All
type.
2.1 \DAFIFMAPPING Specifies DAFIF FLIP-code mapping mode. All
3.0 \PRINT Prints out the generic airport configuration for a All
specified instance.
initial \REFERENCE Sets and views generic reference airport and runway. All
1.3 \UNLOADAUTOGEN Unload all autogeneric airports and associated data. All
initial GFOG Define the groundfog layer. All
initial \PATCHY_FOG The octa level of the patchy ground fog. All
initial \TRANSITION Defines the ground fog transition zone. All
initial \TUNE Fine tuning of the groundfog layer. All
initial GLARE Enables/disables beacon, strobe and lobe glare. All
initial \BEACON Setup the ownship beacon. All
13.0 \ILLUMINATION Sets the glare intensities used for illumination sources All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-9

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
tied to ownship.
initial \LOBES Sets the intensities used for landing light glare. All
initial \PATTERN Setup flash patterns for the beacon & strobe. All
initial \STROBE Setup the ownship strobe. All
2.1 GLEVEL Controls the G-level dimming effect. All
2.1 \TABLE Modifies the G-level dimming table. All
11.0 GROUNDFIRE Performs GroundFire functions. All
11.0 \DEFINE Defines or modifies a GroundFire effect. All
1.9 GUNFIREGLEAM Gun fire gleam effect control. All
initial HAT Displays, defines, or deletes height-above-terrain All
(HAT) testpoints, and enables or disables HAT.
1.3 \CONFIG Configures runtime parameters for HAT. All
1.5 \FIC Determines whether the material returns FIC or SMC All
when over terrain.
2.1 \FORCEBYPASS Force CIGI 3.0 HAT requests to bypass MFE for a All
given testpoint.
initial \MONITOR Monitor a single HAT test point stats. All
1.6 HAZE Controls the haze influence on general visibility. All
1.6 HD Hit-Detection testpoint definition. All
5.0 \CONFIG Configuration settings for all HD test points. All
initial HELP Displays parameters for each of the CLI commands. All
initial HORIZON Sets horizon glow parameters. All
initial \COLOR Sets horizon glow color. All
10.0 \NVG Sets horizon glow parameters for NVG-specific All
adjustments.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initial \STEP_VALUES Sets horizon glow step intensities. All
HOSTOP The command has seventeen qualifiers.
8.0 \CIGI202ESIGWRAP Configuration control to change the standard CIGI All
PER 202 wrapped ESIG opcode big endian data.
5.0 \CIGICELESTIALSPH Configuration to control handling of the CIGI Celestial All
ERECTRL Sphere Control opcode.
5.0 \CIGIENTITYANIMAT Configuration to control handling of the CIGI Entity All
IONCTRL Animation control opcode.
6.0 \CIGIENTITYPLUMEC Configuration to control handling of the CIGI Entity All
TRL Plume Control opcode.
6.0 \CIGIGLARECTRL Configuration to control handling of the CIGI Glare All
control opcode.
13.0 \CIGIHATREQUESTC Configuration to handle the default flags for the All
TRL HAT\HOT Request and Segment Request.

2-10 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
12.0 \CIGIILLUMSOURCE Control handling of the non-specified illumination All
0DEFAULT parameters for the illumination source being
controlled in the CIGI ILLUMINATION 1 opcode.
12.0 \CIGILOSREQUESTC Configuration to handle the default flags for the LOS All
TRL Vector Request and Segment Request.
13.0 \CIGILRFRESPONSE Configuration to handle the response behavior of LRF All
CTRL request opcode.
12.0 \CIGIMFECTRL Configuration to control handling of the CIGI mission All
function opcodes.
5.0 \CIGIREGWINDCTRL Configuration to control handling of the CIGI Regional All
Wind Control opcode.
5.0 \CIGIRESETCTRL Configuration to control handling of the CIGI Reset All
opcode.
12.0 \CIGISTANDARDBYT Configuration to control handling of the CIGI byte
EORDER order.
5.0 \CIGITERRSURFACE Configuration to control handling of the CIGI All
CTRL Terrestrial Surface Conditions Control opcode.
11.0 \CIGITRACERRESET Configuration to control handling of the CIGI Tracer All
CTRL compatibility mode.
12.0 \CIGIVIEWDEFINITI Configuration to control handling of the CIGI view
ONCTRL definition opcode.
5.0 \CIGIWEATHERCTRL Configuration to control handling of the CIGI Weather All
Control opcode.
4.0 \ESIG303D Configuration to control handling of the ESIG 303D All
opcode.
4.0 \ESIG3040 Configuration to control handling in ESIG opcode All
3040.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

13.0 \ESIGE000 Configuration to control handling of the ESIG All
Extended opcode.
initial IF Conditionally processes lines until the next endif. All
10.0 IFANY Conditionally processes lines until the next endif. All
1.7 IG \ANIMATION Sets IG animation synchronization parameters. All
1.7 IG \CONNECT Sets IG interconnect parameters. All
1.7 ILLUMINATION Controls light sources. All
10.0 \SNVG Controls simulated NVG properties of a light source. All
initial INTENSITY Displays or controls the intensity of local or global All
switch.
6.0 \GLOBAL_ENABLE Sets the enable/disable state for a global light/poly All
switch.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-11

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial \GLOBAL_POINT_LI Sets the scalar used to globally adjust the brightness All
GHT_SOURCES of positional light sources.
initial \GLOBAL_UNLIT_PO Sets the scalar used to globally adjust the brightness All
LYGONS of unlit primitives.
2.1 \MASK_POLICY Sets policy for interpreting 0s in local switch masks. All
initial \STEP_VALUES Sets the intensity scalars associated with a step All
number.
13.0 \SUBSWITCH Sets the intensity scalar for a global light subswitch. All
1.4 IR Display or modify PostProcessor parameters. All
8.0 \AGCMODEHOSTTAB Use to modify the lookup table for AGC modes sent by
LE the host.
initial \ATMMODEL Specifies the sensor atmosphere model and aerosol All
model to be used for all thermal embands.
8.0 \C Alias for IR \CONFIGURE.
initial \CALC Sets the radiance calculation algorithm. All
5.0 \COMPAT Enables/disables previous release compatibility. All
1.4 \CONFIGURE Display or modify configuration parameters for All
PostProcessor.
1.4 \CONSTRAINTS Establish gain and level constraints for both primary All
and secondary gain and level.
1.4 \CONTROL Defines the zoom, dead element, persistence, and All
freeze frame.
3.0 \CONTZOOM Defines specific continuous zoom parameters. All
Initial \DIURNAL Control of the ambient diurnal temperature profile. All
Initial \ENVIRONMENT Sensor environment/tuning parameters. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Initial \EOGAIN Gain/level controls for NVG/EO texture and the moon All
light source.
Initial \EPX Sensor material/usage tuning parameters. All
initial \FILE Process an .if file. All
1.4 \FOCUS Controls primary and secondary blur filters of various All
types.
4.0 \GROUND Sets ground temp profile relative to ambient.
1.6 \HISTOGRAM Specifies histogram plane parameters. All
7.0 \HORIZON Controls EO/NVG horizonglow intensity. All
1.4 \INTENSITY Display or modify group intensity for PostProcessor. All
1.3 \LFMELODY Controls the diurnal behavior of the global fog All
brightness scalar.
1.3 \LIGHTING Adjusts the constant sun light source intensity. All

2-12 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial \LIMITS Sets the min and max wavelength limits for the All
specified EM Band.
3.0 \LP Controls the sensor lightpoint tuning parameters. All
initial \MATERIALCODE Surface temperatures for a range of usages. All
initial \NLGAIN Sets parameters for the RT sensor nonlinear gain All
algorithm.
1.4 \NVGTUNING Controls EO/NVG sky tuning parameters. All
1.4 \OFFSET Define the tracking offset and the desired target All
contrast.
initial \POLYGON Control of polygon-based sensor calculations. All
7.0 \POWERLINE Scales the modeled powerline radius at load time. All
3.0 \PROCESS Control of the processing of sensor module tasks. All
initial \RAINFALL Controls sensor rain parameters used in the thermal All
and atmospheric transmittance calculations.
8.0 \RENDER Sets the method/parameters used to combine All
intensity and mod textures in the renderer.
7.0 \SEASTATE Modify seastate module textures at load time. All
2.1 \SHADOW Controls the sensor shadow tuning parameters. All
initial \STMOD Controls the diurnal behavior of the sensor texture All
modulation scalar.
1.5 \SUPPORT Legacy global support temperatures. All
1.4 \SYMBOL Display or control symbols for the PostProcessor. All
1.4 \TEST Input a test parameter. All
initial \TEXTURE Control of sensor-texture-based sensor calculations. All
1.4 \THERMALCUER Used to control the EXG-based thermalcuer All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.4 \TRACK Controls the optional EXG-based target tracker. All
1.4 \TRACKPARAMS Used to establish parameters for the optional EXG- All
based target tracker.
initial \TUNING Controls the sensor tuning parameters All
initial \VISIBILITY Controls the sensor visibility calculations. All
initial \WASH Used to control the EXG sensor washout effect. All
initial \WATER Controls sensor water tuning parameters. All
initial KEYDEF Provides control of keypad flight and defines the flight All
options that are to be controlled.
initial KEYPAD Activates and configures keypad control of a moving All
model.
initial KLOD Configures KLOD geometry level of detail load All
management.
1.6 \SCALE Sets KLOD scalar for a class of scene elements. All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-13

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial KST Configures KST texture level of detail load All
management.
1.9 LASERBEAM Controls a laser beam effect. All
1.9 \DEFINE Defines (allocates memory for) or modifies a laser All
beam type definition.
1.9 \ENDPOSITION Controls the end position of a laser beam effect. All
1.9 \MONITOR Specifies which Rotor Wash effect will be monitored in All
EP2 statistics output.
1.9 \STARTPOSITION Controls the start position of a laser beam effect. All
initial LIGHT_CALIBRATION_ Light calibration switches specified by group. All
TABLE \GROUP
initial LIGHT_CALIBRATION_ Light calibration switches specified by list. All
TABLE \LIST
initial LIGHT_CALIBRATION_ Light calibration switches specified by range. All
TABLE \RANGE
initial LIGHT_CALIBRATION_ Selects the switch specification type and/or All
TABLE \SELECT specification set.
7.0 LIGHTPOINT Sets lightpoint animation overrides per light switch. All
\ANIMATION
initial LIGHTPOINT \COPY Sets one lightpoint control set equal to another. All
initial LIGHTPOINT \DEFINE Associates a category name with a light point control All
set index.
1.6 LIGHTPOINT Position from which lightpoint attributes (i.e., range, All
\EYEPOINT directionality, etc.) are computed.
initial LIGHTPOINT Sets Light Point Control Set fixture control options for All
\FIXTURES a category. Category name of light point control set.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initial LIGHTPOINT \HALOS Sets Light Point Control Set halo control options for a All
category.

initial LIGHTPOINT Sets Light Point Control Set intensity control options All
\INTENSITY for a category.
initial LIGHTPOINT \MAP Sets lightpoint switch mapping options. All
initial LIGHTPOINT Sets Light Point Control Set position control options All
\POSITION for a category.
initial LIGHTPOINT \RENDER Sets Light Point Control Set Rendering options for a All
category.
initial LIGHTPOINT \SIZE Sets Light Point Control Set size control options for a All
category.
8.0 LIGHTPOINT Set the override step intensity scalars. All
\STEPVALUEOVERRI
DES

2-14 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial LIGHTPOINT Sets the global switches to which the control set are All
\SWITCHES applied.
initial LIGHTPOINT Specifies a texture map to load for halo/fixture All
\TEXTURE textures.
initial LIGHTSOURCETUNE Sets or gets lightsource diffuse table tuning All
parameters.
2.1 \LATITUDE Set/get latitude based control of directional All
lightsource diffuse table.
6.0 \NDOTERANGEADJU View/set tunable parameters for range-based
ST adjustment of NdotE intensity reduction.
initial LOAD Specifies something to be loaded (see qualifiers). All
initial \INSET Loads database insets. All
6.0 \PROCESSDESCRIPT Loads process description file. All
ION
9.0 LOADBRUSH Loads a brush map.
initial LOADDT Causes the detail texture file of the given name to be All
loaded.
10.0 LOADEMISSIVETEXTU To load emissive textures in a multi-sensortype All
RES configuration.
initial LOBE Enable/disable landing lights. All
initial \DEFINE Defines a landing light. All
1.9 LOCKDOWN Enables the real-time lockdown mode. All
5.0 LOD Assigns a tunable LOD scalar to a model type. All
8.0 \DBLOADLIST List all loaded models. All
8.0 \LODLIST List loaded models that have lod scalars set. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

9.0 LODTUNE Sets parameters for lod node tuning groups: value =
(value * scalar) + offset.
initial LOS Line-of-Sight test definition All
2.1 \CONFIG Configuration settings for all LOS test points. All
12.0 \DISTSHORE Allow debug printing of distance to shore values All
2.1 \FIC Determines whether the material returns FIC. All
12.0 \MONITOR Monitor a single LOS test point stats All
1.5 LRF Laser range-finder cursor definition All
1.5 \CONFIG Configures run-time parameters for laser range- All
finder.
1.5 \DEGRADE Define LRF degradation due to rain, fog or visibility. All
9.0 \LATLON_FORMAT The lat/lon output format.
1.5 \TEXT Displays cursor distances on the screen. All
initial MATERIAL Views/sets material palette entry (not persisted). All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-15

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
6.0 \AMBRANGEADJUST Views/sets tunable parameters for range-based All
adjustment of ambient component of material palette
entries.
2.1 \CONTAMINANT Views/sets tunable material palette parameters for All
runway contaminants.
6.0 \DIFFRANGEADJUST Views/sets tunable parameters for range-based All
adjustment of diffuse component of material palette
entries
6.0 \SPECRANGEADJUST Views/sets tunable parameters for range-based All
adjustment of specular component of material palette
entries
1.5 MATERIALMASK Defines material masks that determine which All
polygons can be intersected based on material code.
1.5 \PRINT Prints the existing material mask. All
1.7 MESSAGE Sends a moving model message. All
1.9 MFE \BENCHMARK Enables MFE benchmarking – DEBUG only All
1.8 MFE \CLI Sends a CLI command to a specific MFE. All
1.8 MFE \DROP Debug functionality used to simulate an MFE dropping All
out.
5.0 MFE \EVENTS Debug functionality used to dump event files. All
1.8 MFE \LIST Instructs the MFEs to list test points currently being All
processed.
5.0 MFE \TRAVERSE Controls MFE-specific handling during the mission All
functions traversal.
11.0 MIRROR Select mirroring type for a viewport All
11.0 MIRROR \MODEL Configure modeled mirrors All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

11.0 MIRROR \VIEWPORT Configure and control viewport mirrors All
5.0 MONOCONVERSIONTU Sets/gets mono-conversion tuning parameters per EM All
NE band.
initial MONOINTENSITY Loads a polygon mono-intensity palette. All
\POLYGON
initial MONOINTENSITY Loads a texture mono-intensity palette. All
\TEXTURE
7.0 MOVINGMODELMASK Defines moving models that should be excluded from EP-80
mission functions.
7.0 \PRINT Print the existing moving model mask. EP-80

2-16 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
1.7 NVGBLOOM Controls for NVG blooms and halos. EP-80
1.7 \ALPHA The NVG blooms alpha piecewise linear function. EP-80
1.7 \DEPTHDELTA The NVG depth delta command for changing how the EP-80
depths are compared.
1.7 \DIAMETER The NVG blooms diameter piecewise linear function. EP-80
1.7 \HALOALPHA The NVG halo alpha piecewise linear function. EP-80
1.7 \HALODIAMETER The NVG halo diameter. EP-80
5.0 \TEXTURE Specifies textures to be applied to NVG blooms and/or EP-80
halos.
1.7 \WEIGHT NVG blooms and halos color weight. EP-80
initial OWNSHIPLIGHT Controls steerable ownship lights. All
1.7 PAGER Generic pager settings for CT, terrain, and 3D point All
feature pagers.
1.7 \CT Pager settings for CT pager. All
3.0 \ELEVDB Page settings for elevation database. All
7.0 \GBLINSETINRANGE Defines the global switch-in paging range. All
DEFS
7.0 \LISTINSETSINRAN List the current number of database inset layers that All
GE are designated as in-range for paging.
2.1 \PFCULL Pager settings for 3D Point Feature culler. All
2.1 \PFPAGE Pager settings for 3D point feature pager. All
1.9 \SEASTATE Pager settings for the seastate surface. All
1.7 \TERRAINSKIN Pager settings for the terrain pager. All
1.8 PAGERDEBUG Debug pager. All
1.9 \PAGETOSPEC Debug pagetospec function. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initial PARTICLE Particle effect controls. All
initial \APPEARANCE Define particle appearance. All
initial \CHAIN Chains a particle effect to a model system. All
initial \EMITTER Defines particle effect emitter parameters. All
initial \MOVEMENT Defines how a particle moves. All
initial \PRINT Prints all the parameters of a particle effect. All
1.8 \SCUD Defines particle scud effect. All
initial \TEXTURE Configure texture parameters for particle effect. All
initial \TIMING Defines particle effect timings and durations. All
initial \TYPE Define a particle effect type. All
initial PATH Set a file search path. All
initial \APPEND Append to a file search path. All
initial \PREPEND Prepend to a file search path. All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-17

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial \REMOVE Remove from a file search path. All
10.0 PHYSICSSHIP Cleaning physics. All
\CLEANALL
10.0 PHYSICSSHIP Adding physics properties to ship. All
\PROPERTIES
10.0 PHYSICSSIM Adding ballistic simulation to object. All
\BALLISTIC
10.0 PHYSICSSIM Cleaning physics. All
\CLEANALL
10.0 PHYSICSSIM Adding physics properties to object. All
\PROPERTIES
1.4 PLUMES Performs plumes functions. All
1.4 \DEFINE Defines or modifies a plumes effect. All
initial POSITION Displays or controls the position and select of a All
moving model.
initial \EQUATE Used to place one moving model at the same location All
as another moving model.
initial \JIGGLE Perturb the position of a moving model. All
initial \WOBBLE Perturb the orientation of a moving model. All
12.0 POWERLINES Configures droop calculations for powerlines. All
12.0 \DECORATIONS Defines powerline decorations. All
4.0 PP \BASELINE Provides controls used for baseline tuning of the post All
processor.
1.6 PP\FILE Specifies files used to initialize PostProcessor All
functions
1.6 PP\INSETMASK Specifies Inset Mask parameter All
1.6 PP\INTERLACE Specifies the Interlace parameters All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.6 PP\MESSAGE Used to control the PostProcessor messages shown in All
the log
7.0 PP\OVERLAY Specifies the settings for the overlay planes. All
1.6 PP\RESPONSE Used to control the PostProcessor response opcodes All
3.0 PP\SWRENDER Specifies the position of the PIP render window.
1.6 PP\VIDEOALIGN Specifies the settings for the video aligner All
1.6 PP\VIDEOIN Specifies the settings for video input format All
1.6 PP\VIDEOOUT Specifies the settings for video output format All
1.6 PP\VIDEOSYNC Specifies the settings for video sync All
initial PRINT\LABEL Sets a text label. All
initial PRINT\SCREEN Prints text to the screen. All
2.1 PROBER\PICK Picks a point with LOS test and specify a range to test
(for debug).
2.1 PROBER\TVERTS Prober for terrain vertices.

2-18 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
1.6 PROPERTY Sets the value of a module property. All
1.6 RADAR Specifies radar operation modes. EP-80
Desktop
10.0 \CTLODOVERRIDE Override calculated level of detail for radar. All
1.6 \DISPLAY Specifies radar display modes. EP-80
Desktop
1.6 \RENDERCONTROL Requests radar data patches. EP-80
Desktop
10.0 \TERRAINLODOVER Override calculated terrain level of detail (LOD) for All
RIDE radar.
initial RAINSNOW\INIT Initializes the rain and snow environment submodule. All
1.3 RAINSNOW\UNLOAD Uninitializes the rain and snow environment. All
initial RANGEFOCUS Controls range focus. All
initial RATE Sets the field rate. All
1.3 REFLECTIVITYTUNE Sets or gets a reflectivity scalar. All
1.3 \AOI Sets or gets angle-of-incidence reflectivity table All
tuning parameters.
1.4 \WIND Sets and gets wind speed reflectivity tuning All
parameters.
initial REGIONALWEATHER Defines a weather region. All
1.7 \FILTER Configures filter parameters for a region. All
1.7 \FOGVOLUME Sets weather region fogVol of ground fog parameters. All
1.7 \MODEL Configures a region’s proxy settings. All
1.5 \PROXY Configures a region’s proxy settings. All
1.5 \PROXYTEXTURE Configure texture parameters for a region proxy. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.5 \TUNE Sets weather region cloud proxy and vis proxy All
parameters.
initial RENDERMODE Controls render mode. All
\AFFINITY Controls OGL-specific thread affinity related to EP-80
rendering.
\DEBUG Controls temporary debug render values. EP-80
9.0 \IMPORTCACHE Controls options related to the OGL-specific import EP-80
cache operation.
initial \OGL Controls the OGL rendering mode. For debugging EP-80
only.
1.7 \STATEDATA Controls OGL-specific state data. EP-80
7.0 \TEXTURE Controls OGL texturing. EP-80
1.6 \THREAD Control OGL-specific threads related to rendering. EP-80

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-19

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
8.0 \THROTTLETEXCOM Controls OGL texture compression throttling. EP-80
PRESSION
initial RIBBON Used to display or control the state of a moving model All
flight ribbon.
initial ROTORWASH Controls a previously defined rotorwash effect. All
8.0 \ALPHA Controls how alpha transparency is applied to All
rotorwash.
initial \DEFINE Defines or modifies a rotorwash effect. All
1.9 \LAG Controls the rotorwash model/emitter position lag All
effect.
1.8 \MONITOR Specifies which rotorwash effect will be monitored in All
EP2 statistics output.
1.9 ROTORWASHTABLE The command has three qualifiers. All
1.9 \FIC Adds to and modifies entries in the rotorwash FIC All
configuration table.
1.8 \MANUAL Adds to and modifies entries in the Rotorwash Manual All
Configuration Table
1.8 \MATERIAL Adds to and modifies entries in the Rotorwash All
Material (SMC) Configuration Table.
1.9 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF The command has four qualifiers. All
1.9 \GROUNDEFFECT Defines rotorwash type ground effect parameters. All
1.9 \OWNSHIPRECIRCU Defines rotorwash type for ownship recirculation All
LATION parameters.
1.9 \ROTORSPRAY Defines rotorwash type rotor spray parameters. All
1.9 \SCUD Defines rotorwash type scud parameters. All
initial ROUTE Perform route playback function. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initial \DEFINE Defines or modifies a route definition. All
initial \INFO Prints the specified route’s information. All
initial \LIST Lists the current routes. All
initial ROUTERECORD Perform route record function All
initial \DEFINE Defines new route recording. All
initial RUNWAY Sets runway contaminants All
initial SCALE Scales a motion system. All
initial SEASON Displays or controls the system season setting. All
9.0 SENSORTEXSCALAR Sets a submodel sensor type intensity scale.
1.7 SHADOW Controls moving model shadows. All
7.0 \CONFIG Controls configuration of moving model shadows All

2-20 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial \ENV Sets parameters applied to terrain and cloud All
shadows.
5.0 SIGNBOARDSCALE Sets parameters for LOD scale (sign board scale) All
groups.
initial SKY Used to set several parameters for the sky. All
1.3 \REFLECTION Sets the parameters of the reflected sky dome. All
initial \TEXTURE Sets or displays the parameters for a sky texture. All
1.4 Enable/specify the SMC mapping function (not
SMCMAP persisted) All

1.5 SMPOLY Provides Scene Manager Polygon control. All

2.1 \ENABLE Scene Manager enable/disable poly by type (debug). All
2.1 \LATLONGFILTER Scene Manager lat/long filter (debug). All
10.0 SNVG SNVG (stimulated NVG) control. EP-8100
10.0 \ATM SNVG (stimulated NVG) atmosphere control. EP-8100
10.0 \CLD SNVG (stimulated NVG) layered cloud control. EP-8100
10.0 SNVG (stimulated NVG) sun/moon directional light
\DIR control. EP-8100

10.0 \FOG SNVG (stimulated NVG) fog volume control. EP-8100

10.0 \HALO SNVG (stimulated NVG) complex light halo control. EP-8100
10.0 SNVG \POS - SNVG (stimulated NVG) positional
\POS light control. EP-8100

10.0 Set the SNVG (stimulated NVG) video select for a

\VIEWPORT viewport. EP-8100

SPX Configuration parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.1 SPXCONFIG All
2.1 \DEBUG SPX debug information. All
2.1 \GENERIC SPX genericairport configuration. All
2.1 \HAT SPX HAT configuration. All
2.1 \STORM SPX storm cloud model configuration. All
initial STARS Loads a star light point model. All
initial STATISTICS Handles statistics. All
initial STATS Controls the display of GE statistics. All
initial STGAIN Sets the emband sensor texture gain. All
initial STLEVEL Sets the emband sensor device level temperature. All
initial STORM Old ESIG storm controls. All
initial \LLEVEL Settings for the lightning levels. All
initial \LSCENE Settings for the lightning at different TODs. All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-21

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial \RLEVEL Settings for the rain levels. All
initial \SDIST Sets the extent of the storm. All
initial \SLEVEL Settings for the storms overall level. All
initial \SSCENE Settings for the storms at different TODs. All
initial STORMCONTROL Enable, control and position storm cells. All
initial \OWNSHIP Controls storm effects around the ownship. All
8.0 \SAND Controls a sand storm. All
initial STORMDEFINE Defines a storm cell for use with the StormControl All
command.
1.3 \LLEVEL Settings for the lightning levels for use with the All
StormControl command.
1.3 \LTUNE Tunes a storm cell’s lightning for use with the All
StormControl command.
initial \LIGHTNING Defines a storm cell's lightning for use with the All
StormControl command.
1.6 \PARTICLECLOUD Defines the particle cloud parameters for a level of a All
particle storm cell.
1.6 \PARTICLELIGHTNING Define the particle storm cell's lightning models for All
use with the StormControl command.
1.6 \PARTICLERAINSHAFT Defines the volumetric rain shaft for a particle storm All
cell.
initial \RAIN Defines a storm cell's rain for use with the All
StormControl command.
1.3 \RLEVEL Settings for the rain levels for use with the All
StormControl command.
1.3 \RTUNE Tune a storm cell’s rain for use with the StormControl All
command.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.3 \TUNE General tuning of storms for use with the All
StormControl command.
1.5 SWAPOFFSET Controls swap offset for multiple heads. All
initial SWITCH Sets the switch mask index for a motion system. All
1.5 SYMBOLOGY Set device number for subsequent symbology\file All
commands.
1.5 \FILE Read/write a symbology block data file (debug). All
1.9 \OFFSETS Symbology X and Y offsets for a viewport. EP-80
1.9 \OPTIONS Symbology options file. EP-80
1.5 \PLUGIN Symbology plug-in DLL to load. EP-80
1.5 \VIEWPORT Associate a symbology device number with a viewport EP-80
for OGL-based symbology.
initial SYSTEM Sets the run state of the system. All
2.1 \AFFINITY Sets the processor affinity for process threads. All

2-22 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
1.5 \BG Sets the run state of background. All
12.0 \DIFFTABLEFORCE Force sending of diffuse lighting tables. All
6.0 \FASTTIME Sets the run state of fasttime. aLL
1.4 \MODULE Control module execution All
1.5 \PROCESS Sets the process attributes. All
1.5 \SLOWTIME Sets the run state of slowtime. All
1.4 \THREAD Set the number of process threads All
1.4 \TIMEOUT Configure system timeout parameters. All
initial TERRAIN Terrain and CT parameters. All
11.0 \SUBDIVISIONSCAL Linear interpolation of subdivisionratio based on zoom All
E factor.
initial TEXTURE Set/get texture control parameters. All
12.0 \CT Set texture resolution reduction levels. All
1.7 \REDUCE Sets texture resolution reduction levels. All
1.3 \REFLECTION Set/get texture control parameters for reflection All
scene.
initial TILEPAGER Tile parameters. All
initial \VISIT Positions the eyepoint at a tile. All
initial TOD Sets the current time of day. All
2.1 \CPCADJUST Adjust the transition between DARK and BRIGHT CPC
adjusted TOD returns.
1.6 \DATE Enable and set the date for autocalculate mode. All
1.6 \DUOTEXTURE Adjust the transition between day and night texture. All
initial \MOON Sets the moon parameters for a given time of day All
scene.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initial \SUN Sets the sun parameters for a given time of day All
scene.
6.0 \SUNPOSMODE Parameters for sunPos mode
5.0 \TIMEZONE Controls settings related to the time zone used for All
local time in autocalculate mode.
1.9 TRACER Defines a tracer All
1.6 TRACKER Control for the head tracker processes in the system. EP-80
1.6 \CONFIGURE Configure/assign a tracker to a tracker device. EP-80
1.6 \HARDWIRE Specifies constant x,y,z and h,p,r. EP-80
\INITIAL head tracker controlled viewport data EP-80
1.6 \MOTIONSYSTEM Typically used when controlling helmet mounted EP-80
displays for a head tracker controlled motion system.
1.6 \SEOS Enables/disables head tracker controlled SEOS EP-80
Optimizer calculations.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-23

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
1.6 \SEOSCONFIG Configure SEOS specific data needed for distortion EP-80
correction processing by the SEOS optimizer.
1.7 \SEOSDISPLAY Configure display definition parameters required for EP-80
accurate Optimizer HTAOI calculations.
1.6 \SEOSPROJECTOR Configures SEOS projector with viewport specific data EP-80
for SEOS optimizer.
1.7 \TYPES Controls the EP2 real-time modification of tracker EP-80
data.
1.7 TRACKS Controls a previously defined track. All
1.7 \DEFINE Defines the attributes of a track type. All
12.0 TRAFFIC Advanced traffic control. All
12.0 \DIAG Advanced traffic diagnostic. All
1.4 TRAILS Performs trails functions. All
1.4 TRAILS \DEFINE Defines or modifies a trails effect. All
initial TRIGGER \ALTABOVE Creates a trigger that activates when a moving model All
goes above a specified altitude.
initial TRIGGER \ALTBELOW Creates a trigger that activates when a moving model All
goes below a specified altitude.
initial TRIGGER \CLEAN Clears out all parameters from all triggers. All
initial TRIGGER \HAT Creates a trigger that activates when a moving model All
goes above/below a specified HAT(not implemented).
initial TRIGGER \LOAD Creates a trigger that activates when a moving model All
is paged in.
8.0 TRIGGER Creates a trigger that activates when a mm goes All
\PAUSEROUTE into/out of a specified range, and pauses the given
route.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initial TRIGGER \RANGE Creates a trigger that activates when a moving model All
goes into/out of a specified range.
1.3 TRIGGER \ROUTE Creates a trigger that activates when a route has All
completed.
8.0 TRIGGER \RVR Creates a trigger that activates when an mm goes All
above/below a specified HAT.
initial TRIGGER \SPEED Creates a trigger that activates when the speed of the All
eye or a mm goes above or below a specified speed.
8.0 TRIGGER \UNLOAD Creates a trigger that activates when a moving model All
is paged out.
8.0 TRIGGER \VIS Creates a trigger that activates when a mm goes All
above/below a specified HAT.
initial UNBIND Unbinds a model or range of models. All
initial UNCHAIN Unchain a motion system. All
initial \FOLLOW Unchains a following motion system. All

2-24 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
initial \LOOKAT Unchains a looking motion system. All
initial \SPIN Unchains a spinning motion system. All
initial \TOW Unchains a towed motion system. All
initial UNDEFINE Undefines a variable used in if statements. All
initial UNLOAD Unload a model or range of models. All
initial \INSET Unloads database insets. All
initial UNLOADDT Unload a terrain detail map. All
initial VELOCITY Sets motion system position/rotation velocity. All
1.5 VF \CONFIG Configuration command for vector features. All
1.5 VF \DEBUG Debug command for vector features. All
initial VIDEO Enables or disables video output. All
initial \BLANK Controls auto-video blanking. All
2.1 \INTCOMP Configures video intensity compensation. EP-8000
1.9 \OGL Controls OGL video options. OGL
initial \TRANSPORT Enables or disables transport delay test. All
initial VIEWPORT Configure a viewport. All
initial \EDGEBLEND Enables or disables viewport edgeblend. All
1.6 \GROUP Viewport group level of detail control. All
1.3 \NLIM Enables or disables viewport NLIM. All
7.0 \OVERLAY Contains controls for a viewport. All
1.7 \PAGINGOFFSET Generic pager settings for CT, terrain, and 3D point All
feature pagers.
1.5 \RENDER Viewport render control. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initial VISIBILITY Set or display the visibility. All
initial \FILE Loads/saves visibility calibration files. All
6.0 \TUNE Sets visibility tuning parameters All
initial WAIT Temporarily stops execution of a script file that is All
being executed interactively in EP2 user interface.
initial \DB Waits for the database to be loaded. All
13.0 \DBCONFIG Configure the WAIT \DB behavior. All
initial WAM Controls wind affected models. All
2.1 \BREAKPOINT Defines breakpoint speed in knots. All
initial \BSAND Sets blowing sand specific parameters. All
initial \BSNOW Sets blowing snow specific parameters. All
initial \RANGE Defines ranges of wind-affected models. All
initial \SELECT Enable/disable wind affected model selects. All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-25

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
1.6 WATCH Initiates the capture of a specific host opcode for All
analysis and then allows display of captured opcodes.
1.6 WAVES Defines 3D sea state and wave parameters. All
8.0 \BUMP Controls generation of 3D sea states bump maps All
based on proximity of eye to the nearest sea state
vertices.
1.9 \INTENSITY Modifies the intensity or modulation map. All
1.6 \LOD Defines the LOD parameters of the sea state. All
1.6 \ORIGIN Sets the origin of the waves. Needed to synchronize All
multiple RT boxes.
1.7 \SPECULAR Tweaking normal for specular effects. All
10.0 \TARGET Deals with targets on the sea states surface. These All
targets will have 3D waves around them.
1.6 \TUNE Tunes the appearance of the sea state. All
1.7 \WHITECAPS Used enable and control the whitecaps effect. All
1.6 \WINDLANE Defines the wind lane texture. All
1.6 \WINDTOBEAUFORT Defines the wind speed threshold and the texture All
base name for the Beaufort scales.
11.0 WAVESENHANCED Defines enhanced sea state parameters. All
11.0 \ANTIALIASING Controls wave antialiasing properties. All
11.0 \CHOP Controls chop properties. All
13.0 \FLATTEN Sets up parameters for water flattening. All
11.0 \FROTH Controls froth properties. All
11.0 \GLARE Setup parameters for reflected glare from sun & All
moon.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

11.0 \GLOBALNOISE Controls global noise properties. All
11.0 \LOD Define the LOD parameters of the sea state. All
11.0 \SHORELINE Controls shoreline properties. All
12.0 \SPRAY Controls the sea spray effect. All
11.0 \TARGET Deals with targets on the sea states surface. These All
targets will have 3D waves around them.
11.0 \WAVESHAPE Define individual wave properties. All
11.0 \WHITECAP Controls whitecap properties. All
11.0 \WINDLANE Controls windlane properties. All
initial WIND Define or display wind layers All
11.0 \VEGETATION configure wind affected vegetation parameters. All
1.9 ZOOM Zoom settings for CT, terrain, and feature paging All
environment.

2-26 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Table 2-1. CLI Commands—Short Description

Vers Command Description Platform
4.0 \HIRESCTPAGEMODE Enable and define the parameters used for high All
resolution CT paging mode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-27

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4 CLI Commands

This section contains the commands, along with all parameters,
qualifiers, and keywords available in the CLI command set. The
commands are listed in alphabetical order.
Unless otherwise stated, all distances are measured in feet and all
angles are measured in degrees

2.4.1 ABORT
The ABORT command aborts the processing of queued CLI commands.

2.4.2 AIRPORT
The AIRPORT command is used to view and set airport parameters.

Format: AIRPORT[NAME=name] [ICAO=icao] [LATDEGREE=latdegree]

[LATMINUTE=latminute] [LATSECOND=latsecond]
[LONGDEGREE=longdegree] [LONGMINUTE=longminute]
[LONGSECOND=longsecond] [ALTITUDE=altitude]
[H=h] [P=p] [R=r] [ELEVATION=elevation]
[PAGERANGE=pageRange] [LODSCALE=lodScale] [TOY=toy]
[ENTERSCRIPT=enterscript] [EXITSCRIPT=exitscript] [DUO=duo]
[SPEC=spec] [COMPRADIUS=compRadius] [LIST=list]
[LISTFULL=listfull] [LISTPAGED=listpaged]
[LISTREVISION=listrevision] [LISTXREF=listxref] [INDEX=index]

[\ALN] [\LOD] [\SUBMODEL] [\VISIT]

Syntax
name Airport name
Description:
icao The airport icao.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

latdegree (-90..90) latitude degrees
latminute (0..60) latitude minutes
latsecond (0..60) latitude seconds
longdegree (-180..180) longitude degrees
longminute (0..60) longitude minutes
longsecond (0..60) longitude seconds
altitude altitude in feet
h heading
p pitch
r roll
elevation Airport runway elevation in feet

2-28 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

pageRange page range in feet

lodScale (-1..10) LOD scale
toy (summer winter july december both)
Time of year of the model.
enterscript name of reset file to run when paged
in (full path)
exitscript name of reset file to run when paged
out (full path)
duo Inset supports duo texture.
(ON/OFF)
spec Inset supports specular texture.
(ON/OFF)
compRadius (0..2.64e+006) Inset feature
compatibility radius in feet.
list Lists all loaded airports.
listfull Expanded list of all loaded airports.
listpaged Only lists paged-in models.
listrevision Revision list of all loaded airports.
listxref First external reference list of all
loaded airports.
index Used to reference a particular
instance.
[\ALN] See descriptions below for details
[\LOD] about these qualifiers.
[\SUBMODEL]
[\VISIT]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.2.1 AIRPORT \ALN
The \ALN qualifier is used for alignment file validation.

Format: AIRPORT \ALN [MAXRWYLENGTH=maxRwyLength]

[MINRWYLENGTH=minRwyLength]
[MAXHEADINGDIFF=maxHeadingDiff]
[MAXDISTFROMORIGIN=maxDistFromOrigin]

Syntax
maxRwyLength Longest valid runway length in feet.
Description:
minRwyLength Shortest valid runway length in feet.
maxHeadingDiff Maximum valid difference in heading.
Maximum valid distance from
maxDistFromOrigi
runway's midpoint to database origin
n
in feet.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-29

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.2.2 AIRPORT \LOD

The \LOD qualifier is used to position the eyepoint at an airport.

Format: AIRPORT \LOD [SCALE=scale]

Syntax
scale (0..10) level of detail scale
Description:

2.4.2.3 AIRPORT \SUBMODEL

The \SUBMODEL qualifier is used to position the eyepoint at an airport.

Format: AIRPORT \SUBMODEL [NAME=name] [SM=sm] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z]

[SELECT=select]

Syntax
name Airport name.
Description:
sm (1..255) submodel number
x X offset in feet
y Y offset in feet
z Z offset in feet
select (0..255) submodel select

2.4.2.4 AIRPORT \VISIT

The \VISIT qualifier is used to position the eyepoint at an airport.

Format: AIRPORT \VISIT [NAME=name]

Syntax

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

name Airport name.
Description:

2.4.3 ALPHACULL
The ALPHACULL command sets and gets Alpha Cull parameters for
EP-8100.

Format: ALPHACULL [WINDGB=windgb] [PMOD=pmod] [DUMP=dump]

[MAP=map] [RELOAD=reload] [FORCE=force]

Syntax (0..10) Set the amount of mip

windgb
Description: guardband for wind affected maps.
pmod (-1..1) PMOD (projected pixel bias)
dump
Dump mip images.
(ON/OFF)

2-30 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

map (2..16383) The texture map ID.

Forces the alpha texture to be
reload
reloaded.
(off opaque transparent) Force reload
force image to be all opaque or all
transparent.

2.4.4 ANIMATE
The ANIMATE command controls animation for a submodel.

Format: ANIMATE [MM=mm] [LOAD=load] [UNLOAD=unload]

[START=start] [STOP=stop] [QUIT=quit]
[PAUSE=pause] [SUSPEND=suspend] [STEP=step]
[RESUME=resume] [SEQUENCE=sequence] [STYLE=style]
[FRAME=frame] [CYCLE_TIME=cycle_time] [SCALAR=scalar]
[DELAY=delay] [ITERS=iters] [CONTINUOUS=continuous]
[NOTIFY=notify] [AUTO_UNLOAD=auto_unload] [LIST=list]

[\SEQUENCE]

Syntax
mm The motion system.
Description:
load Loads the animation.
unload Unloads the animation.
start Starts the animation.
stop Stops the animation.
quit Quits the animation.
pause Pause the animation when it reaches a
given frame.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

suspend Suspends the animation at a given frame.
step Step the animation.
resume Resume the animation.
sequence (-1..4095) The animation sequence
number.
style (fwd back fwdback backfwd) Sets the
animation style.
frame (-1..10000) The animation frame.
cycle_time The animation cycle time.
scalar The animation rate scalar.
delay The start delay time.
iters (-1..1024) Number of iterations to run.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-31

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

continuous Enable/disable continuous running.

(ON/OFF)
notify Enable/disable notify on completion.
(ON/OFF)
auto_unload Unloads the animation at completion.
(ON/OFF)
list List all loaded animations.
[\SEQUENCE] See description below for details about this
qualifier.

2.4.4.1 ANIMATE \SEQUENCE

The \SEQUENCE qualifier defines the animation sequence.

Format: ANIMATE \SEQUENCE [NUM=num] [START=start] [FINISH=finish]

[CHAIN=chain] [STYLE=style] [CYCLE_TIME=cycle_time]
[SCALAR=scalar] [DELAY=delay] [ITERS=iters]
[AUTO_UNLOAD=auto_unload] [LIST=list]

Syntax
num (0..4095) The sequence number.
Description:
start (0..10000) The start frame number.
finish (-1..10000)The ending frame number.
chain (-1..4095) Next sequence to execute.
style (fwd back fwdback backfwd) Sets the
animation style.
cycle_time The animation cycle time.
scalar The animation rate scalar.
delay The start delay time.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

iters (-1..1024) The number of iterations to run.
auto_unload (on off) Unloads the animation at
completion.
list Lists all loaded animations.

2-32 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.5 ATMOSPHERE
The ATMOSPHERE command sets atmosphere light scattering
parameters.

Format: ATMOSPHERE [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]

[TERRAINRADIUS=terrainRadius][LAYERS=layers]
[ILLUMINATIONSCALE=illuminationScale] [RHHSCALAR=rhhscalar]
[REFLECTIONTRANSMITTANCESCALE=reflectionTransmittanceScale]
[REFLECTIONTRANSMITTANCEOFFSET=
reflectionTransmittanceOffset] [EMBAND=emband]

[\GLARE]

Syntax
red (0..1) Set the Rayleigh red beta value.
Description:
green (0..1) Set the Rayleigh green beta value.
blue (0..1) Set the Rayleigh blue beta value.
terrainRadius (0..1.32e+006) Radius in feet for querying
terrain altitude for density curve
adjustment.
layers Enable/disable homogeneous fog layers.
(OFF/ON)
illuminationScale (0..1) A scale factor applied to fog
illuminating polygons.
rhhscalar (0.1..10) A scale factor for region haze
height. Set this to force haze closer or
farther from the region top.
reflectionTransmitt (0.001..100) Scale elevation used in
anceScale reflection transmitance calculations.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

reflectionTransmitt (-1e+006..1e+006) Offset reflection
anceOffset transmitance calculations.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
[\GLARE] See below for details about this qualifier.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-33

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.5.1 ATMOSPHERE \GLARE

The \GLARE qualifier sets up parameters for glare around the sun.

Format: ATMOSPHERE \GLARE [ENABLE=enable] [SCENE=scene]

[WIDTH=width] [HALOWIDTH=haloWidth] [INTENSITY=intensity]
[RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax enable Enables or disables glare around the sun and

Description: (ON/OFF) moon.
scene (dawn day dusk night) TOD scene for the
rest of the parameters.
width (0..90) Width of the full glare (degrees).
haloWidth (0..90) Width of the glare fade off (degrees).
intensity (0..100) Full intensity of the glare.
red (0..1) Red color of the glare.
green (0..1) Green color of the glare.
blue (0..1) Blue color of the glare.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL) emband
(sensor type) for these parameters.

2.4.5.2 ATMOSPHERE \TUNE

The \TUNE qualifier sets atmosphere light scattering tuning parameters.
Format: ATMOSPHERE \TUNE [INSCATTERSCALAR=inScatterScalar]
[SCENE=scene]

Syntax (0..4) Scale factor for tuning inScatter color

inScatterScalar
Description: intensity.
scene (dawn day dusk night) Time of day scene to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

which the inScatterScalar applies.

2-34 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.6 BEHAVIOR
The BEHAVIOR command has two qualifiers, described below.

2.4.6.1 BEHAVIOR \MODEL

The \MODEL qualifier controls a model behavior.

Format: BEHAVIOR \MODEL [MM=mm] [BOTTOM=bottom] [TOP=top]

[ALL=all] [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax
mm (0..65535) Motion system number.
Description:
bottom (0..8191) Bottom motion system number in
range.
top (0..8191) Top motion system number in
range.
all Select all motion systems.
enable Enable/disable model behavior.

2.4.6.2 BEHAVIOR \PARAM

The \PARAM qualifier sets and gets model beharior parameters.

Format: BEHAVIOR \PARAM [MM=mm] [CLEAN=clean]

Syntax
mm (0..65535) Motion system number.
Description:
clean Remove all parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-35

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.7 BIND
The BIND command binds a model to a motion system.

Format: BIND [MODEL=model [MS=ms] [SELECT=select] [RENDER=render]

[LIST=list] [CLEAN = clean]

[\AUTOPRIORITY] [\HAT] [\TERRAIN] [\WAVE]

Syntax
Description: model The model name or slot number.
ms (0..65535) The motion system
number.
select (-1..511) The model’s select switch.
render Render priority for the model
(crit|fast|slow).
list Lists all bound moving models.
clean Resets all control values to default.
[\AUTOPRIORITY] See descriptions below for details
[\HAT] about these qualifiers.
[\TERRAIN]
[\WAVE]

2.4.7.1 BIND \AUTOPRIORITY

THE \AUTOPRIORITY qualifier enables and disables automatic promotion
and demotion of all MM rendering priorities.

Format: BIND \AUTOPRIORITY [ENABLE=enable]

[NOPROMOTION=nopromotion] [HOSTBOUNDONLY=hostBoundOnly]
[FTCRITTRANSSCALE=FtCritTransScale]
[FTNONCRITTRANSSCALE=FtNonCritTransScale]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[MINVELOCITY=minVelocity]

Syntax enable Enable/disable auto priority.

Description: (ON/OFF)
noPromotion Enable/disable promotion of rendering
(ON/OFF) priorities.
hostBoundOnly Enable/disable applying auto priority
(ON/OFF) to host bound models only.
FtCritTransScale (0..100) Scale the threshold for
transitioning from fast time non crit
to fast time crit.
FtNonCritTransScale (0..100) Scale the threshold for
transitioning from slow time to fast
time non crit.

2-36 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

minVelocity (0..100) The minimum velocity used

in computing the priority factor.
Example: BIND\AUTOPRIORITY Forces the transition of model
FtCritTransScale .85 priorities from FT non crit to FT crit
15% sooner than the default (range /
size / motion) threshold.

2.4.7.2 BIND \HAT

The \HAT qualifier enables a motion system with a general HAT.

Format: BIND \HAT [MM=mm] [ENABLE=enable] [Z=z] [LIST=list]

Syntax (0..8191) The moving model number.

Description: mm
enable Enable/disable terrain following.
(ON/OFF)
z (-1000..1000) Z offset to model
origin from the ground in feet.
list List of HAT bound models.

2.4.7.3 BIND \TERRAIN

The \TERRAIN qualifier sets a motion system to follow terrain.
Format: BIND \TERRAIN [MM=mm [Z=z] [SMOOTHPR=smoothpr]
[UPSMOOTH=upsmooth] [DOWNSMOOTH=downsmooth]
[CONFORM=conform] [ENABLE=enable] [TP_LENGTH=tp_length]
[TP_WIDTH=tp_width] [TP_MODE=tp_mode]
[TP_XOFFSET=tp_Xoffset] [TP_YOFFSET=tp_Yoffset]
[MODETRANSRANGE=modeTransRange] [LIST=list]

Syntax (0..8191) The moving model number.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Description: mm
z Z offset in feet
smoothpr (1..10000) Pitch/roll smooth factor.
upsmooth (1..10000) Up smooth factor.
downsmooth (1..10000) Down smooth factor.
conform Enable/disable terrain slope
(ON/OFF) conforming.
enable Enable/disable terrain following.
(ON/OFF)
tp_length (1..1000) Length of testpoint pattern
in feet.
tp_width (1..1000) Width of testpoint pattern
in feet.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-37

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

tp_mode (singlePoint multiPoint mixed) The

testpoint pattern specification.
tp_Xoffset Testpoints X offset.
tp_Yoffset Testpoints Y offset.
modeTransRange (1..100000) The range where mixed
mode transition occurs in feet.
list List Terrain bound models.

2.4.7.4 BIND \WAVE

The \WAVE qualifier sets motion systems to follow 3D sea state motion.

Format: BIND \WAVE [MM=mm] [Z=z] [SMOOTHPR=smoothpr]

[UPSMOOTH=upsmooth] [DOWNSMOOTH=downsmooth]
[CONFORM=conform] [ENABLE=enable] [TP_LENGTH=tp_length]
[TP_WIDTH=tp_width]

Syntax (0..8191) The moving model number.

Description: mm
z Z offset
smoothpr (1..10000) Pitch/roll smooth factor.
upsmooth (1..10000) Up smooth factor.
downsmooth (1..10000) Down smooth factor.
conform Enable/disable wave slope
(ON/OFF) conforming.
enable Enable/disable wave following.
(ON/OFF)
tp_length (1..5000) Length of testpoint pattern
in feet.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tp_width (1..5000) Width of testpoint pattern
in feet.

2-38 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.8 BOWSPRAY
The BOWSPRAY command binds a previously defined particle effect and
make it react to a model's movement relative to sea state waves.

Format: BOWSPRAY [NUM=num] [TYPE=type] [MM=mm] [XOFFSET=xoffset]

[TOPY=topY] [TOPZ=topZ] [BOTTOMY=bottomY]
[BOTTOMZ=bottomZ] [BOWANGLE=bowangle] [START=start]
[STOP=stop] [CLEAN=clean]

[\DEFINE]

Syntax
num (0..127) The bow spray slot number.
Description:
type (0..127) The bow spray type ID,
previously defined using the
BOWSPRAY \DEFINE command.
mm The moving model to which the
particle effect is to be attached and
act as the bow wake of the model.
xoffset The X offset in feet from the origin of
the moving model specified by mm to
where the bow spray is to originate.
topY The Y offset in feet to the top of the
bow from the origin of the moving
model specified by "mm"
topZ The Z offset in feet to the top of the
bow from the origin of the moving
model specified by "mm"
bottomY The Y offset in feet to the bottom of
the bow from the origin of the moving

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

model specified by "mm".
bottomZ The Z offset in feet to the bottom of
the bow from the origin of the moving
model specified by "mm".
bowangle The bowangle of the hull.
start Start the bow spray.
stop Stop the bow spray, but do not
remove it. The bow wake will fade out
as specified in the BOWWAKE\DEFINE
command.
clean Stop and remove the bow spray
emitter. A cleaned bow spray number
can be reused.
[\DEFINE] See description below for details
about this qualifier.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-39

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.8.1 BOWSPRAY \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines the attributes of a bow wake type. The
BOWWAKE command is then used to bind and control this type of track

Format: BOWSPRAY \DEFINE [TYPE=type] [PARTICLE=particle]

[TURNINGRIGIDNESS=TurningRigidness]
[UPDATEPARTICLEDEF=UpdateParticleDef]
[SPRAYVELRATIO=SprayVelRatio]
[SPRAYVELVARIANCE=SprayVelVariance]
[SPRAYVELBASE=SprayVelBase] [SPRAYVELCLAMP=SprayVelClamp]
[SPRAYZRATIO=SprayZRatio] [SPRAYZBASE=SprayZBase]
[SPRAYZCLAMP=SprayZClamp]
[PARTICLESIZERATIO=ParticleSizeRatio]
[PARTICLESIZEVARIANCE=ParticleSizeVariance]
[PARTICLESIZEBASE=ParticleSizeBase]
[PARTICLESIZECLAMP=ParticleSizeClamp]
[PARTICLESPACINGRATIO=ParticleSpacingRatio]
[PARTICLESPACINGBASE=ParticleSpacingBase]
[PARTICLESPACINGCLAMP=ParticleSpacingClamp]

Syntax (0..127) The bow spray type ID

type
Description: being defined.
particle The particle effect define name.
TurningRigidness (0..1) How much the spray hugs the
bow when turning.
UpdateParticleDef Update the particle effect definition.
SprayVelRatio Scaling spray particle velocity by
model speed.
SprayVelVariance How much the spray velocity varies
(in feet/second).
SprayVelBase This number is added to the scaled

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

particle velocity (in feet/second).
SprayVelClamp The final spray particle velocity is
clamped by this number.
SprayZRatio Pitch up the spray particle emitter
direction by model speed.
SprayZBase This number is added to the scaled
pitch (in degrees).
SprayZClamp The final pitch is clamped by this
number (in degrees).
ParticleSizeRatio Scale particle size by model speed.
ParticleSizeVariance How much the particle size varies.
ParticleSizeBase This number is added to the scaled
particle size.

2-40 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

ParticleSizeClamp The final particle size is clamped by

this number.
ParticleSpacingRatio Scale particle spacing by model
speed.
ParticleSpacingBase This number is added to the scaled
particle spacing.
ParticleSpacingClamp The final particle spacing is clamped
by this number.

2.4.9 BOWWAKE
The BOWWAKE command controls a previously defined bow wake.

Format: BOWWAKE [NUM=num] [TYPE=type] [MM=mm] [XOFFSET=xoffset]

[YOFFSET=yoffset] [WIDTHSCALE=widthScale] [START=start]
[STOP=stop] [CLEAN=clean]

[\DEFINE]

Syntax
num (0..127) The bow wake number.
Description:
type (0..127) The bow wake type ID,
previously defined using the
BOWWAKE \DEFINE command.
mm The moving model to which the bow
wake will be attached.
xoffset The X offset in feet from the origin of
the moving model, specified by mm,
where the bow wake is to originate.
yoffset The Y offset in feet from the origin of
the moving model, specified by mm,

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

where the bow wake is to originate.
widthScale (0..10) Dynamically scales the width
of the wake. Needed for submarine
wakes, based on speed and depth.
start Start the bow wake.
stop Stop the bow wake, but do not
remove it. The bow wake will fade out
as specified in the BOWWAKE
\DEFINE command.
clean Stop and remove the bow wake. A
cleaned bow wake number can be
reused.
[\DEFINE] See description below for details
about this qualifier.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-41

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.9.1 BOWWAKE \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines the attributes of a bow wake type. The
BOWWAKE command is then used to bind and control this type of track.

Format: BOWWAKE \DEFINE [TYPE=type] [TEMPLATE=template]

[BOATLENGTH=boatlength] [WIDTH16=width16] [WIDTH8=width8]
[WIDTH4=width4] [WIDTH2=width2] [TOLERANCE=tolerance]
[SPREAD=spread] [FADEIN=fadein] [BEGINFADE=beginfade]
[ENDFADE=endfade]
[TRANSPARENCYMULTIPLIER=transparencyMultiplier]
[LODRANGE=lodrange]

Syntax (0..127) The bow wake type id being

type
Description: defined.
template The template model being used to lay
down the bow wake.
boatlength The length of the boat having the bow
wake applied to it (in feet.)
width16 The desired width of the bow wake at
1/16 of the length from the beginning
of the wake (in feet).
width8 The desired width of the bow wake at
1/8 of the length from the beginning
of the wake (in feet).
width4 The desired width of the bow wake at
1/4 of the length from the beginning
of the wake (in feet).
width2 The desired width of the bow wake at
1/2 of the length from the beginning
of the wake (in feet).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tolerance (0..90) Specifies how often to lay
down a new polygon when forming
wake. If the angular difference
between the last two polygons being
drawn is above the tolerance, a new
polygon will be put down (in degrees).
spread The rate at which the width of the
wake spreads (in feet/second).
fadein The amount of time to fade the wake
in. Used to eliminate a hard edge
when starting a wake (in seconds).
beginfade The amount of time after a wake
polygon’s creation that it will begin to
fade out (in seconds).

2-42 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

endfade The amount of time after a wake

polygon’s creation that it will be
completely faded out (in seconds).
transparencyMultiplier (0..1) Multiplies the transparency of
the overall wake (0.0-1.0).
lodRange The LOD range at which this bowwake
type becomes visible. The default
lodRange is 1320000 feet (250 miles).

2.4.10 BS
The BS command has one qualifier, described below.

2.4.10.1 BS \TUNE
The \TUNE qualifier fine-tunes the blowing snow and sand layer. It is
subject to change as underlying functionality is refined.
This command is for development/debug use only.

Format: BS \TUNE [MODE=mode] [OPACITYMOD=opacityMod]

[BRIGHTMODTOP=brightModTop]
[BRIGHTPERSISTENCE=brightPersistence] [BRIGHTTOP=brightTop]
[BUMPMODTOP=bumpModTop] [BRIGHT3DSCALE=bright3dScale]
[HORIZONDEPRESSIONSCALE=horizonDepressionScale]
[AMBIENTINTENSITY=ambientIntensity]
[SPECULARINTENSITY=specularIntensity] [PROFILEAA=profileAA]
[COLORRED=colorRed] [COLORGREEN=colorGreen]
[COLORBLUE=colorBlue] [GLARE=glare] [MAPSIZE=mapSize]
[HEIGHTABOVEHOT=heightAboveHot] [FADEHEIGHT=fadeHeight]
[VIS=vis] [TEXTUREAA=textureAA] [HAZEALPHA=hazeAlpha]
[HAZEMAX=hazeMax]
[HAZESTARTFADERANGE=hazeStartFadeRange]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[HAZEENDFADERANGE=hazeEndFadeRange]
[ATEYEVISSCALAR=atEyeVisScalar] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (procedural textured) Hardware fog

Description: mode mode (default generic - CIGI is OGL
only).
opacityMod Opacity gain.
Brightness gain for the top of the
brightModTop
layer.
brightPersistence The amount of brightness inherited in
the higher frequencies of the texture.
brightTop Base brightness for the top of the
layer.
bumpModTop Bump gain for the top of the layer.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-43

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

bright3dScale Scale factor on the 3D appearance of

the clouds.
horizonDepressionSc Scale factor for horizon depression
ale (this is an engineering parameter and
will be removed before final release).
ambientIntensity (0..10) The ambient reflectance scale
of the cloud layer.
specularIntensity (0..10) The specular reflectance scale
of the cloud layer.
profileAA Antialiasing value of the fog (in
pixels).
colorRed (0..1) The fog's red color.
colorGreen (0..1) The fog's green color.
colorBlue (0..1) The fog's blue color.
glare Exponent applied to sun glare.
mapSize (0..1.32e+006) tmp
heightAboveHot Height of blowing snow and sand
above HOT in feet.
fadeHeight Height of blowing snow and sand
transition band in feet.
vis Visibility in blowing snow and sand
layer in feet.
textureAA Antialiasing value of the cloud texture
(in pixels).
hazeAlpha (0..1) Sets the alpha for the haze
calculation textured cloud layer.
hazeMax Sets the cloud layer haze max.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

hazeStartFadeRange Textured cloud layer haze start-fade
range in feet.
hazeEndFadeRange Textured cloud layer haze end-fade
range in feet.
atEyeVisScalar (0..1) Scale amount textured cloud
layer affects in cloud vis.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2-44 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.11 CAPTURE
The CAPTURE command has the following qualifiers: IMAGEBUS,
SCENEBUS and TEXTUREBUS, described below.
2.4.11.1 CAPTURE \IMAGEBUS (engineering diagnostic)
The \IMAGEBUS qualifier captures the image bus.

Format: CAPTURE \IMAGEBUS [FILE=file] [STOP=stop]

Syntax Filename to write image bus to

file
Description: (starts capturing).
stop Stops capture image bus.

2.4.11.2 CAPTURE \SCENEBUS (engineering diagnostic)

The \SCENEBUS qualifier captures the scene bus.

Format: CAPTURE \SCENEBUS [TYPE=type] [FILE=file] [SP=sp] [FOV=fov]

[SHOWJUMPS=showJumps] [HWCOMPARE=hwcompare]

Syntax
type (blk dl) Type of capture.
Description:
file The filename to write decoding to.
sp (0..31) The scene processor ID.
fov
Enable/disable fov culling.
(ON/OFF)
showJumps Enable/disable the printout of branch
(ON/OFF) commands.
hwcompare

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Compare RT to GE memory.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.11.3 CAPTURE \TEXTUREBUS (engineering diagnostic)

The \TEXTUREBUS qualifier captures the texture bus.

Format: CAPTURE \TEXTURE [FILE=file] [STOP=stop]

Syntax
file The filename to write decoding to.
Description:
stop Stops capture texture bus.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-45

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.12 CAPTUREIMAGE
The CAPTUREIMAGE command captures an image from the EXG and
sends it to Test Pattern or Symbology.

Format: CAPTUREIMAGE [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband] [ID=id]

[X=x] [Y=y] [WIDTH=width] [HEIGHT=height] [ZOOM=zoom]
[PATTERN=pattern] [SYMBOL=symbol] [SELECT=select]
[CLEAR=clear] [TESTPATTERN=testpattern]
[SYMBOLOGY=symbology]

Syntax Either the

Description: (0..63) viewport for a single viewport
or
(lwir,mwir,evs,nvg,eo,dtv) emband
viewport or emband
for all viewports of the defined
emband (the PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option)
(0..255) Identifier for this image
id
capture/clear.
(0..2047) The starting horizontal
x position for the image capture
(0-2047).
(0..2047) The starting vertical
y position for the image capture
(0-2047).
(0..1024) The width of the image to
width be captured - pattern (1-1024)
symbol (1-256).
(0..1024) The height of the image to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

height be captured - pattern (1-1024)
symbol (1-256).
An image scale factor that will be
zoom applied to the image after the
capture. (>=1.0).
(16..31) The test pattern number that
pattern
will receive the captured image.
(1..255) The symbol ID that will
symbol
receive the captured image.
(1..255) The select number of the
select symbol that will receive the captured
image.
Clear the captured image data for the
clear
given id.

2-46 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Copy the captured image to Test

testpattern
Pattern memory.
symbology Copy the captured image to a bitmap
symbol.

2.4.12.1 CAPTUREIMAGE \CONFIGURE

The \CONFIGURE qualifier controls the configuration to capture an
image from the EXG and send to Test Pattern or Symbology

Format: CAPTUREIMAGE \CONFIGURE [VIEWPORT=viewport |

EMBAND=emband] [ENABLETESTPATTERN=enableTestPattern]
[ENABLESYMBOLOGY=enableSymbology]

Syntax Either the

Description: (0..63) viewport for a single viewport
or
viewport or (lwir,mwir,evs,nvg,eo,dtv) emband
emband for all viewports of the defined
emband (the PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option)
enableTestPattern (off on local) Enable Image Capture
to Test Pattern.
enableSymbology (off on local) Enable Image Capture
to Symbology.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-47

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.13 CATENARY
The CATENARY command defines or alters a catenary cable.

Format: CATENARY [NUMBER=number] [ENABLE=enable] [TYPE=type]

[LENGTH=length] [MM=mm] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [ENDMM=endmm]
[ENDX=endx] [ENDY=endy] [ENDZ=endz]

[\DEFINE]

Syntax (0..255) The number of the catenary

number
Description: being controlled(0 – 255).
enable Enable or Disable the specified
(ON/OFF) catenary cable.
type (0..31) The previously defined
catenary type (specified using
CATENARY \DEFINE).(0 – 31).
length The length of the catenary in feet. If
this length is less than the distance
between the endpoints, a straight
line will be drawn between the
endpoints. (.0001 …).
mm (0..65535) The motion system to
which the catenary start point is
attached.
x The x offset from the origin of the
mm to the catenary start point.
y The y offset from the origin of the
mm to the catenary start point.
z The z offset from the origin of the
mm to the catenary start point.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

endmm (0..65535) The motion system to
which the catenary end point is
attached.
endx The x offset from the origin of the
mm to the catenary end point.
endy The y offset from the origin of the
mm to the catenary end point.
endz The z offset from the origin of the
mm to the catenary end point.
[\DEFINE] See description below for details
about this qualifiers.

2-48 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.13.1 CATENARY \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier is used to define a type of catenary, which
includes width and color.

Format: CATENARY \DEFINE [TYPE=type] [WIDTH=width] [RED=red]

[GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]

Syntax (0..31) The catenary type being

type
Description: defined. (0 -31)
width (0..5) The width of the catenary in
feet
red (0..1) The red component of the
catenary (0.0 to 1.0)
green (0..1) The green component of the
catenary (0.0 to 1.0)
blue (0..1) The blue component of the
catenary (0.0 to 1.0)

2.4.14 CDC
The CDC command controls collision detection clouds.

Format: CDC [ENABLE=enable] [CLOUD=cloud] [PRIORITY=priority]

[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax enable
Enables CDC opcode (3081) returns.
Description: (OFF/ON)
cloud Parameter ignored. Included for
(OFF/ON) backward compatibility.
priority Parameter ignored. Included for
backward compatibility.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-49

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.15 CDL (Collision Detection Line Segment)

The CDL command displays and defines collision line segments and
enables or disables collision detection with line segments (CDL).
Format: CDL [ENABLE = ON | OFF] [CMD=cmd] [MM=mm]
[SEGMENT=segment] [BEGX=begx] [BEGY=begy] [BEGZ=begz]
[ENDX=endx] [ENDY=endy] [ENDZ=endz]
[MATERIALMASKINDEX=materialmaskindex]
[MOVINGMODELMASKINDEX=movingmodelmaskindex]
[BYPASSMFE=bypassmfe] [CMDCLEAR=cmdclear][SEGCLEAR=segclear]
[LIST=list]
[\CONFIG] [\FIC]

Syntax enable Enable or disable all CDL tests.

Description: (ON/OFF)
cmd A CD command number that ranges
from 0–255. Each cmd is made up of
segments that range from 0–31 which
describe the shapes of the object that
the user wishes to test for collision.
Using this scheme one could define the
outline of an aircraft for example and
test to see if it collides with the
terminal.
mm Chained moving model number.
segment Up to 32 segments (numbered 0-31) can
be defined per command.
begx The x offset in feet from the mm’s origin
to the beginning endpoint of the line
segment.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

begy The y offset in feet from the mm’s origin
to the beginning endpoint.
begz The z offset in feet from the mm’s origin
to the beginning endpoint.
endx The x offset in feet from the mm’s origin
to the ending endpoint of the line
segment.
endy The y offset in feet from the mm’s origin
to the ending endpoint.
endz The z offset in feet from the mm’s origin
to the ending endpoint.
materialmaskindex (0..255) Index of material mask.
movingmodelmaski (0..8) Index of moving model mask.
ndex

2-50 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

bypassmfe The command is processed by the RT

(ON/OFF) rather than an MFE.
cmdclear Disables a command.
segclear Disables a segment.
list List all CDL testpoints currently enabled.
[\CONFIG] See descriptions below for details about
[\FIC] these qualifiers.

2.4.15.1 CDL \CONFIG

The \CONFIG qualifier configures run-time parameters for line collision
detection.

Format: CDL \CONFIG [REPORTMODE=reportMode] [WEATHER=weather]

[MINCLOUDFADE=minCloudFade]
[CLOUDSPHERESCALE=cloudSphereScale] [BOXSCALE=boxScale]
[THEMELFEATURES=themelFeatures]

Syntax (collision always transition) Specifies

reportMode
Description: when a CDL report is sent.
weather Enables CDL intersections with clouds
(ON/OFF) and fog.
(0..1) Minimum Cloud Particle fade
minCloudFade
value for intersections.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
cloudSphereScale
the particle sphere test.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
boxScale
the particle box test.
themelFeatures Enable CDL to intersect themel
(ON/OFF) features.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.15.2 CDL \FIC
The \FIC qualifier determines whether the material returns FIC.

Format: CDL \FIC [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax enable
Enables FIC CDL responses.
Description: (ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-51

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.16 CHAIN
The CHAIN command displays or creates a link between two moving
models. This is useful for chaining several moving models together.

Format: CHAIN [CHILD=child] [PARENT=parent] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z]

[HEADING=heading] [PITCH=pitch] [ROLL=roll]
[STABHEAD=stabHead] [STABPITCH=stabPitch]
[STABROLL=stabRoll] [STABZ=stabZ] [LIST]

[\FOLLOW] [\LOOKAT] [\SPIN] [\TOW]

Syntax
Description: child The child mm’s number.
parent The parent mm’s number. Defaulted to
ground.
x The x offset in feet of the child mm
origin with respect to the parent mm
origin.
y The y offset in feet of the child mm
origin with respect to the parent mm
origin.
z The z offset in feet of the child mm
origin with respect to the parent mm
origin.
heading The heading offset of the child mm
origin with respect to the parent mm
origin.
pitch The pitch offset of the child mm origin
with respect to the parent mm origin.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

roll The roll offset of the child mm origin
with respect to the parent mm origin.
stabHead
Excludes the Heading from chaining.
(ON/OFF)
stabPitch
Excludes the Pitch from chaining.
(ON/OFF)
stabRoll
Excludes the Roll from chaining.
(ON/OFF)
stabZ
Excludes Z from chaining.
(ON/OFF)
list A keyword to list all chained motion
systems.
[\FOLLOW] See the following sections for
[\LOOKAT] descriptions of these qualifiers.
[\SPIN] [\TOW]

2-52 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.16.1 CHAIN \FOLLOW

The \FOLLOW qualifier chains a motion system follow a moving model.

Format: CHAIN \FOLLOW [CHILD=child] [PARENT=parent] [X=x] [Y=y]

[Z=z]

Syntax
child Child motion system.
Description:
parent Parent moving model.
x X offset in feet relative to parent.
y Y offset in feet relative to parent.
z Z offset in feet relative to parent.

2.4.16.2 CHAIN \LOOKAT

The \LOOKAT qualifier chains a motion system to look at a moving
model.

Format: CHAIN \LOOKAT [CHILD=child] [PARENT=parent]

Syntax
child Child motion system.
Description:
parent Parent moving model.

2.4.16.3 CHAIN \SPIN

The \SPIN qualifier chains a motion system to rotate based on the
velocity of a moving model.

Format: CHAIN \SPIN [CHILD=child] [PARENT= parent] [RADIUS=radius]

[SPINAXIS=spinaxis]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax
child Child motion system.
Description:
parent Parent moving model.
radius Spin radius in feet.
spinaxis (X Y Z) Axis around which to spin.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-53

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.16.4 CHAIN \TOW

The \TOW qualifier chains a motion system to be towed by a moving
model.

Format: CHAIN \TOW [CHILD=child] [PARENT=parent] [DISTANCE=distance]

Syntax
child Child motion system.
Description:
parent Parent moving model.
distance Distance in feet from the parent.

2.4.17 CLAMP
The CLAMP command views a motion system position/rotation clamp.
Format: CLAMP [MM=mm]

[HPR] [XYZ]

Syntax
mm Motion system.
Description:
[HPR] See the sections below for
[XYZ] descriptions of these qualifiers.

2.4.17.1 CLAMP \HPR

The \HPR qualifier sets a motion system rotation clamp.

Format: CLAMP \HPR [MM=mm] [ENABLE=enable] [MINH=minh]

[MINP=minp] [MINR=minr] [MAXH=maxh] [MAXP=maxp]
[MAXR=maxr]

Syntax

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

mm Motion system.
Description:
enable Enable/disable
(ON/OFF)
minh (-180..180) Minimum heading angle
(degrees)
minp (-180..180) Minimum pitch angle
(degrees)
minr (-180..180) Minimum roll angle
(degrees)
maxh (-180..180) Maximum heading
angle (degrees)
maxp (-180..180) Maximum pitch angle
(degrees)

2-54 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

maxr (-180..180) Maximum roll angle

(degrees)

2.4.17.2 CLAMP \XYZ

The \XYZ qualifier sets a motion system position clamp.

Format: CLAMP \XYZ [MM=mm] [ENABLE=enable] [MINX=minx]

[MINY=miny] [MINZ=minz] [MAXX=maxx] [MAXY=maxy]
[MAXZ=maxz]

Syntax
mm Motion system.
Description:
enable Enable/disable.
(ON/OFF)
minx Minimum X position in feet.
miny Minimum Y position in feet.
minz Minimum Z position in feet.
maxx Maximum X position in feet.
maxy Maximum Y position in feet.
maxz Maximum Z position in feet.

2.4.18 CLEAR
The CLEAR command has two qualifiers that are described in the
sections below.

2.4.18.1 CLEAR \LABEL

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \LABEL qualifier deletes on-label text.

Format: CLEAR \LABEL [ID=id]

Syntax (0..255) Only delete labels with this

id
Description: id.

2.4.18.2 CLEAR \SCREEN

The \SCREEN qualifier deletes on-screen text.

Format: CLEAR \SCREEN [ID=id]

Syntax
id (0..255) Only delete text with this id.
Description:

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-55

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.19 CLIPSHADOWS
The CLIPSHADOWS command sets parameters for shadows derived by
clipping.

Format: CLIPSHADOWS [ENABLE=enable] [VIEWCASTERS=viewCasters]

[RANGE=range]

Syntax enable
Enable/disable shadows.
Description: (ON/OFF)
viewCasters
Enable/disable casters.
(ON/OFF)
Specifies the range in feet from the
range eyepoint at which shadows are
processed.

2.4.20 CLOUDS
The CLOUDS command defines nonpolygonal cloud layers.
WARNING: Clouds that are thicker than 15,000 feet may cause an
anomalous visibility / RVR below the cloud.

Format: CLOUDS [ENABLE=OFF|ON] [LAYER=layer] [BOTTOM=bottom]

[TOP=top] [TSCUD=tscud] [BSCUD=bscud] [DENSITY=density]
[ABOVEENABLE=aboveEnable] [CLOUDVIS=cloudVis]
[VISABOVE=visAbove] [AMBREDUCT=ambReduct]
[VCDAMPLITUDESCALAR=VCDamplitudeScalar]
[VCDFREQUENCYSCALAR=VCDfrequencyScalar]
[SCUDAMPLITUDESCALAR=ScudAmplitudeScalar]
[MIDDLELAYERPOWER=MiddleLayerPower]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[EXPANDMIDDLELAYER=ExpandMiddleLayer]
[TYPEINDEX=typeIndex] [REGION=region]
[CIGILAYERTHREEBROKENCLOUDS=OFF|ON] [LIST=list]
[EMBAND=emband]

[\AAAUTOCONTROL] [BROKEN] [\BTUNE] [\HORIZON] [OCTA]

[OCTATEXTURE] [\OPAQUETEXTURE] [\SCUD] [\TEXTURE]
[\TRANSITION] [\TUNE] [\VOLUMESCUD]

Syntax enable
Enable or disable the layer.
Description: (ON/OFF)
layer (0..2) The cloud layer to define.
bottom (0..50000) The altitude in feet of
the bottom of the cloud layer.
top The altitude in feet of the top of the
cloud layer.

2-56 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

tscud Enable or disable top scud.

(ON/OFF)
bscud Enable or disable bottom scud.
(ON/OFF)
density (1..8) The octa level of the cloud
(1 - 8).
aboveEnable Enable or disable visibility control
(ON/OFF) above the layer.

cloudVis (1..1.32e+006) Visibility in feet

within the cloud layer.
visAbove Visibility in feet above the cloud
layer.
ambReduct (0..1) % reduction in sun/moon
diffuse lighting below the layer.
(0..10) Scales the amplitude of the
VCDamplitudeScalar variable cloud density.
(0..10) Scales the frequency of the
VCDfrequencyScalar variable cloud density.
(0..10) Scales the amplitude of the
ScudAmplitudeScalar tscud, bscud, and patchy ground
fog.
MiddleLayerPower (0.1..100) scales

ExpandMiddleLayer (0..100000) scales

typeIndex (0..10) Specify a cloud layers type.

(0..7) Specify a weather region for
region the cloud layer.
Sets whether or not specifying the
layer three ID via the CIGI 12
cigiLayerThreeBroke Weather Control opcode results in
nClouds

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

that layer being treated as broken
clouds.
list A keyword to list the parameters for
all defined cloud layers.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-57

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

[\AAAUTOCONTROL] Refer to the following descriptions

[\BROKEN] for more information about these
[\BTUNE] qualifiers.
[\HORIZON]
[\OCTA]
[\OCTATEXTURE]
[\OPAQUETEXTURE]
[\SCUD]
[\TEXTURE]
[\TRANSITION]
[\TUNE]
[\VOLUMESCUD]

2.4.20.1 CLOUDS \AAAUTOCONTROL

The \AAAUTOCONTROL qualifier automatically controls the in-cloud vis
and transition ranges for clouds above a set AGL to minimize aliasing.

Format: CLOUDS \AAAUTOCONTROL [LAYER=layer] [ENVBLE=enable]

[MINVIS=minVis] [MINTRANS=minTrans]
[AGLTRIGGERALT=aglTriggerAlt]

Syntax (0..2) The cloud layer for which to

layer
Description: define AA auto control.
(off on) Enable/disable the AA auto
enable control.
minVis (0..10000) The minimum visibility
inside the cloud.
minTrans (5..2000) The minimum thickness of
the transition zone below.
aglTriggerAlt (0..65000) The clouds above ground
level where the auto control kicks in
(based on nearest airport).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.20.2 CLOUDS \BROKEN
The \BROKEN qualifier controls broken (scattered) clouds.

Format: CLOUDS \BROKEN [REGION=region] [ENABLE=enable]

[DENSITY=density] [ALTITUDE=altitude] [DISTANCE=distance]
[TERSHADOWENABLE=tershadowenable]
[TERSHADOWCONTRAST=tershadowcontrast]
[SCUDNOISEPERIOD=scudNoisePeriod]
[SCUDNOISEAMPLITUDE=scudNoiseAmplitude]
[SCUDOPACITY=scudOpacity]
[INCLOUDVISRANGE=inCloudVisRange] [SPEEDQINIT=speedQInit]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (0..20) Specifies the region to which

region
Description: the command applies.
enable (on off) Turns broken clouds on/off.

2-58 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

density (1..43) Sets the broken cloud octa

level 1-15.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
altitude (-5000..100000) Sets the altitude of
the bottom of the broken cloud layer.
distance (528000..5.28e+006) Specifies the
tiling size.
tershadowenable (on off) Turns cloud terrain shadows
on and off.
tershadowcontrast (0..1) Sets the contrast of the terrain
shadows.
scudNoisePeriod Sets the scud noise period (in feet) for
all regions.
scudNoiseAmplitu (-1..1) Sets the scud noise amplitude
de for all regions

scudOpacity (0..1) Sets the scud amplitude for all

regions.
inCloudVisRange Sets the scud amplitude for all
regions.
speedQInit Forces initialization of the In Cloud
Speed Cues Effect.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.20.3 CLOUDS \BTUNE

The \BTUNE qualifier is used for tuning parameters for broken clouds for
all regions.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: CLOUDS \BTUNE [BACKDIST=backDist] [COLORINTERP=colorInterp]
[DRAWSCUD=drawScud] [DRAWSPEEDQ=drawSpeedQ]
[DRAWPUFFS=drawPuffs] [MASKROTATION=maskRotation]
[VOLSCUDSPEEDQINTSCALE=volScudSpeedQIntScale]
[MAXSCUDDELTA=maxScudDelta]
[AFFECTEDBYWIND=affectedByWind]
[NUMPUFFTASKS=numPuffTasks]
[VOLSCUDSPEEDQDENSITYSCALE=volScudSpeedQDensityScale]
[FIXEDMIPINNERSMALLPUFFSHRINKDIST=fixedMipInnerSmallPuffSh
rinkDist] [FLATTENSCUD=flattenScud]

Syntax (0..20000) Sets the reference distance

Description: backDist behind the eye for puff orientation for all
regions.
(0..1) Color interpolant for broken cloud's
colorInterp
OCTA cloud color and the scene color

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-59

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

drawScud Enable/disable the broken cloud scud for

(ON/OFF) all regions.
drawSpeedQ
Enable/disable broken cloud speed cues.
(ON/OFF)
drawPuffs Enable/disable broken cloud particle
(ON/OFF) cloud puffs.
Enable/disable masking up close puff
maskRotation
rotation with a deferred puff (only valid
(ON/OFF)
in FixedMipLevel mode).
(0.01..1) The in-particle cloud speed
volScudSpeedQ
cue's intensity scale, if volumetric scud is
IntScale
enabled.
(0.001..1) max scud change per field due
maxScudDelta to the eye intersecting any particle
clouds. Defaults to 0.02.
affectedByWind Enable/disable wind affecting the position
(ON/OFF) of broken clouds.
numPuffTasks (1..8) Number of tasks to break puff
processing into.
volScudSpeedQ (0..1) In particle cloud speed cue's
DensityScale density scale if volumetric scud is
enabled.
fixedMipInnerS (1000..1e+006) Distance at which small
mallPuffShrinkD inside fixed MIP level puffs start to
ist shrink.
flattenScud Enable/disable flattening the bottom of
(ON/OFF) scudded clouds.

2.4.20.4 CLOUDS \CUE

The \CUE qualifier controls the in-cloud speed cue effect.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: CLOUDS \CUE [ENABLE=enable] [SCUDSCALE=scudScale]
[MINVIS=minVis] [SIZE=size]
[BASESIZEFORCULLRANGESCALE=baseSizeForCullRangeScale]
[SCENE=scene] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
enable Enable/disable the in cloud speed cues.
Description:
(0..1) Scale down the scud by this
scudScale
amount inside the cloud.
(0..10000) Minimum visibility inside the
minVis
cloud.
size (1..10000) Size of the cues in feet.
baseSizeForCull (1..100000) Base size we divide the size
RangeScale by to scale the cull range.

2-60 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

scene (dawn day dusk night) The scene to

which the cue parameters apply. If not
specified, the parameters are applied to
all times of day.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.20.5 CLOUDS \HORIZON

The \HORIZON qualifier is used to control the anti-aliasing horizon band.
Format: CLOUDS \HORIZON [ENABLE=OFF|ON] [HORIZONAA=horizonAA]
[MINHRZRANGEPERCENT=MinHrzRangePercent]
[MAXHRZRANGEPERCENT=MaxHrzRangePercent]
[SCALARRATE=ScalarRate]
[CLAMPMINHRZRANGE=ClampMinHrzRange]
[CLAMPRECHRZRANGE=ClampRecHrzRange] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax enable
Enable or disable the horizon band.
Description: (OFF/ON)
horizonAA The size of the horizon band.
MinHrzRangePe Percent of horizon range used to set
rcent MinHrzRange.
MaxHrzRangeP Percent of horizon range used to set
ercent MaxHrzRange.
(1..100) Rate at which horizon fades
ScalarRate away as the eye enters the transition
range of a fog layer.
ClampMinHrzRa MinHrzRange should not go below this
nge range.
ClampRecHrzRa RecHrzRange should not go below this
nge range.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-61

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.20.6 CLOUDS \OCTA

The \OCTA qualifier specifies broken cloud octa levels 1-8.

Format: CLOUDS \OCTA [OCTA=octa] [MAPNAME=mapName]

[WIDTHMILES=widthMiles] [LODRANGE=lodRange]
[FADEBANDPERCENT=fadeBandPercent] [LIGHTING=lighting]
[SPANRATEFILL=spanratefill]
[SPANRATEFILLNEARRANGE=spanratefillnearrange]
[SPANRATEFILLFARRANGE=spanratefillfarrange]
[OPAQUECENTERRANGE=opaquecenterrange]
[THICKNESS=thickness] [PARTICLESCALE=particleScale]
[RANDOMSCALE=randomScale]
[NODRAWCULLRANGE=nodrawcullrange] [ZOFFSET=zoffset]
[CLOUDTYPE=cloudtype] [TOPINTENSITY=topIntensity]
[BOTTOMINTENSITY=bottomIntensity]
[MATERIALINDEX=materialIndex]
[MIPTEXELTHRESHOLD=mipTexelThreshold] [RED=red]
[GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue] [SCUDSTARTRANGE=scudStartRange]
[SCUDFULLRANGE=scudFullRange]
[FIXEDMIPLEVEL=mixedMipLevel] [PRINT=print]

Syntax
octa (1..43) Specifies the octa level.
Description:
Specifies which texture map to use to
mapName identify where the clouds are.
widthMiles The width in Miles that the map
covers.
lodRange Distance in feet for 1st LOD transition.

fadeBandPercent Percent overlap of Mip Levels.

lighting (0..11) Which lights to apply to

clouds: 0=none; 1=sun; 2=phong;
3=sun and phong 4=unlit unscaled
5=Fixed Shaded.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

spanratefill Turns span fill rate on and off.
(OFF/ON)
spanratefillnearra No span fill rate less than this range.
nge
spanratefillfarrang No span fill rate greater than this
e range.

opaquecenterrang No span fill rate greater than this

e range.

thickness Thickness of cloud layer in feet (Height

of clouds).
particleScale Scale applied to drawn cloud puffs.

randomScale Random Scale applied to drawn cloud

puffs.

2-62 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

nodrawcullrange Range at which no cloud puffs are

drawn.
zoffset Altitude adjustment.
cloudtype (stratus hwassist stormLower
stormMiddle stormUpper) Type of
clouds.
topIntensity Intensity applied to puffs when eye is
above clouds.
bottomIntensity Intensity applied to puffs when eye is
below clouds.
materialIndex (0..255) Specifies the material table
index used for the puffs.
mipTexelThreshol (0..255) Controls cloud coverage in
d distance, if too big, clouds will not
render.
red (0..1) Specifies the red color used on
cloud polygons.
green (0..1) Specifies the green color used
on cloud puffs.
blue (0..1) Specifies the blue color used on
cloud puffs.
scudStartRange (0..10000) Sets the range to a puff
where scud begins.
scudFullRange (0..10000) Sets the range to a puff
where scud is fully applied.
fixedMipLevel (-1..10) Controls the Mip level used by
cloud puffs.
print Prints the octa definition parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.20.7 CLOUDS \OCTATEXTURE
The \OCTATEXTURE qualifier configures texture parameters for an octa
level of broken clouds.

Format: CLOUDS \OCTATEXTURE [OCTA=octa] [PATH=path] [TEX0=tex0]

[TEX1=tex1] [TEX2=tex2] [TEX3=tex3] [TEX4=tex4] [TEX5=tex5]
[TEX6=tex6] [TEX7=tex7] [THICKNESS=thickness]
[DEPTHMODAMP=depthModAmp] [SANDSTORM=sandStorm]
[PRINT=print]

Syntax
octa (1..43) Specifies the octa level.
Description:
path Path to textures.

tex0 Base texture map filename.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-63

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

tex1 Detail texture map filename.

tex2 Material map filename.

tex3 Sensor mod map filename.

tex4 Bump texture map filename.

tex5 Auxiliary texture map filename.

tex6 Specular texture map filename.

tex7 Light texture map filename.

thickness (0..32768) Volumetric Thickness.

depthModAmp (0..128) Depth modulation amplitude.

sandStorm (false true) Indicates whether opaque

texture is to be used for sand storms
or not.
print Prints out the octa texture
parameters.

2.4.20.8 CLOUDS \OPAQUETEXTURE

The \OPAQUETEXTURE qualifier configures opaque texture parameters
for an octa level of broken clouds.

Format: CLOUDS \OPAQUETEXTURE [PATH=path] [TEX0=tex0] [TEX1=tex1]

[TEX2=tex2] [TEX3=tex3] [TEX4=tex4] [TEX5=tex5] [TEX6=tex6]
[TEX7=tex7] [THICKNESS=thickness]
[DEPTHMODAMP=depthModAmp] [SANDSTORM=sandStorm]
[PRINT=print]

Syntax
path Path to textures.
Description:
tex0 Base texture map filename.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tex1 Detail texture map filename.
tex2 Material map filename.
tex3 Sensor mod map filename.
tex4 Bump texture map filename.
tex5 Auxiliary texture map filename.
tex6 Specular texture map filename.
tex7 Light texture map filename.
thickness (0..32768) Volumetric Thickness.
depthModAmp (0..128) Depth modulation amplitude.
sandStorm (false true) Indicates whether opaque
texture is to be used for sand storms
or not.
print Prints out the opaque texture
parameters.

2-64 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.20.9 CLOUDS \SCUD

The \SCUD qualifier sets the scud bottom and top transition range for a
cloud layer.
Format: CLOUDS \SCUD [LAYER=layer] [BTRANS=bTrans] [TTRANS=tTrans]
[BSCUDZOFFSET=bScudzOffset] [TSCUDZOFFSET=tScudzOffset]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (0..2) The cloud layer whose

layer
Description: transition range is being defined.
bTrans (5..2000) The thickness of the scud
transition zone below the cloud layer.
tTrans (5..2000) The thickness of the scud
transition zone above the cloud layer.
bScudzOffset The Z offset applied to Hybrid clouds
used for bottom scud.
tScudzOffset The Z offset applied to Hybrid clouds
used for top scud.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.20.10 CLOUDS \TEXTURE

The \TEXTURE qualifier is used to modify the texture maps used for
nonpolygonal cloud layers. This command is for development/debug use
only.
Format: CLOUDS \TEXTURE [WRITE=write] [SEED=seed]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax Writes the current textures to bitmap

write
Description: files.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

seed Specifies a new random seed and
generates new cloud textures.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.20.11 CLOUDS \TRANSITION

The \TRANSITION qualifier defines the cloud layer transition zone.
Format: CLOUDS \TRANSITION [LAYER=layer] [BTRANS=bTrans]
[TTRANS=tTrans] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (1..2) The cloud layer to define

layer
Description: transition range for.
(5..1000) The thickness of the
bTrans transition zone above and below the
cloud layer.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-65

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(5..1000) The thickness of the

tTrans transition zone above and below the
cloud layer.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.20.12 CLOUDS \TRIM

The \TRIM qualifier specifies the cloud trim settings.
Format: CLOUDS \TRIM [LAYER=layer] [BOTTOM=bottom] [TOP=top]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
layer (0..2) The cloud layer to trim.
Description:
The amount to trim from the bottom
bottom
of the cloud.
The amount to trim from the top of
top
the cloud.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.20.13 CLOUDS \TUNE

The \TUNE qualifier is used to fine-tune nonpolygonal cloud layers.
Format: CLOUDS \TUNE [LAYER=layer] [TYPEINDEX=typeIndex]
[PROFILEAA=profileAA] [COLORRED=colorRed]
[COLORGREEN=colorGreen] [COLORBLUE=colorBlue]
[AMBIENTINTENSITY=ambientIntensity]
[BOTTOMSPECULARINTENSITY=bottomSpecularIntensity]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[TOPSPECULARINTENSITY=topSpecularIntensity] [GLARE=glare]
[OPACITYMOD=opacityMod]
[BRIGHTMODBOTTOM=brightModBottom]
[BRIGHTMODTOP=brightModTop]
[BRIGHTBOTTOM=brightBottom] [BRIGHTTOP=brightTop]
[BUMPMODBOTTOM=bumpModBottom]
[BUMPMODTOP=bumpModTop]
[BRIGHT3DSCALE=bright3dScale]
[HORIZONDEPRESSIONSCALE=horizonDepressionScale]
[MAPSIZE=mapSize] [BRIGHTPERSISTENCE=brightPersistence]
[TEXTUREAA=textureAA] [HOLEFADE=holeFade]
[NOMIDDLELAYERTEST=noMiddleLayerTest]
[HAZEALPHA=hazeAlpha] [HAZEMAX=hazeMax]
[HAZESTARTFADERANGE=hazeStartFadeRange]
[HAZEENDFADERANGE=hazeEndFadeRange]
[ATEYEVISSCALAR=atEyeVisScalar] [EMBAND=emband]

2-66 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Syntax
layer (0..2) The cloud layer to tune.
Description:
typeIndex (0..10) Cloud layer type index to
tune.
profileAA Antialiasing value of the cloud
layer (in pixels).
colorRed (0..1) The cloud layer's red color.

colorGreen (0..1) The cloud layer's green

color.
colorBlue (0..1) The cloud layer's blue
color.
ambientIntensity (0..10) The ambient reflectance
scale of the cloud layer.
bottomSpecularIntens (0..10) the specular reflectance
ity scale for the bottom of the cloud
layer.
topSpecularIntensity (0..10) The specular reflectance
scale for the top of the cloud
layer.
glare Exponent applied to sun glare.

opacityMod Opacity gain.

brightModBottom Brightness gain for the bottom of

the layer.
brightModTop Brightness gain for the top of the
layer.
brightBottom Base brightness for the bottom of
the layer.
brightTop Base brightness for the top of the
layer.
bumpModBottom Bump gain for the bottom of the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

layer.
bumpModTop Bump gain for the top of the
layer.
bright3dScale Scale factor on the 3D
appearance of the clouds.
horizonDepressionSca Scale factor for horizon
le depression (this is an engineering
parameter and will be removed
before final release).
mapSize (0..1e+008) tmp
brightPersistence The amount of brightness
inherited in the higher
frequencies of the texture.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-67

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

textureAA The antialiasing value of the

cloud texture (in pixels).
holeFade The fade bandwidth of the hybrid
hole.
noMiddleLayerTest Enable or disable middle layer
(ON/OFF) test.
squashOuterLayer (0..1) squash the outer layers to
this percentage of the middle
layer thickness.
AAAltFadePercent (0..1) what percentage of the
way through the transition band
to place the Anti-Aliasing
Altitude.
TxtAltFadePercent (0..1) What percentage of the
way through the transition band
to place the texture Altitude.
hazeAlpha (0..1) Adjusts the haze in a
textured cloud layer.
hazeMax Sets the cloud layer haze max.
hazeStartFadeRange Textured cloud layer haze start-
fade range.
hazeEndFadeRange Textured cloud layer haze end-
fade range.
atEyeVisScalar (0..1) Scale amount textured
cloud layer affects in cloud vis.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO
VISUAL) emband (sensor type)
for these parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.20.14 CLOUDS \TYPE
The \TYPE qualifier specifies the cloud type settings.
Format: CLOUDS \TYPE [INDEX=index] [OCTALEVEL=octaLevel]
[CLOUDTYPETEXTURE=cloudtypetexture]
[LISTTEXTURES=listTextures] [LISTTYPES=listTypes]
[EMBAND=emband]
Syntax
index (0..10) The cloud type index.
Description:
octaLevel (1..8) Cloud octa levels are rounded
up to 2, 4, 6, 8.
cloudtypetexture Cloud type texture file name.
listTextures Lists all cloud type textures.
listTypes Lists all cloud type names and status.

2-68 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)

emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.20.15 CLOUDS \VOLUMESCUD

The \VOLUMESCUD qualifier is used to replace RIF (behind the RIF full-
screen scud) with fog volume scud.
Format: CLOUDS \VOLUMESCUD [ENABLE=enable] [DENSEXP=densExp]
Syntax enable
Turns volumetric scud on and off.
Description: (ON/OFF)
densExp
Turns volumetric scud on and off.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.21 COBRA
The COBRA command controls Cobra auto-align functionality.
Format: COBRA [ALIGN=align] [LOG=log] [SAVE=save] [RESTORE=restore]
[\COLOR] [\EDGEBLENDCOLOR] [\EDGEBLENDMASK] [\INTENSITY]
[\NLIM] [\SYMBOLOGY] [\TESTPATTERN]
Syntax align
Enter/exit auto-align mode.
Description: (ON/OFF)
log Enable/disable cobra interface
(ON/OFF) command logging.
save Save current auto-align for all
viewports.
restore Restore auto-align configuration to
last saved for all viewports.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.21.1 COBRA \COLOR
The \COLOR qualifier provides color matrix control.
Format: COBRA \COLOR [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable] [LOAD=load]
[SAVE=save]
Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport.
Description:
enable Enable flag.
(ON/OFF)
load Filename to load from.
save Saves current to file under name of
viewport.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-69

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.21.2 COBRA \EDGEBLENDCOLOR

The \EDGEBLENDCOLOR qualifier provides edgeblendcolor control.
Format: COBRA \EDGEBLENDCOLOR [VIEW=view] [LOAD=load]
[SAVE=save] [GAMMA=gamma]
Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport.
Description:
load Filename to load from.
save Saves current to file under name of
viewport.
gamma Projector gamma

2.4.21.3 COBRA \EDGEBLENDMASK

The \EDGEBLENDMASK qualifier provides edgeblend mask control.
Format: COBRA \EDGEBLENDMASK [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable]
[LOAD=load] [SAVE=save] [DUMP=dump]
Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport.
Description:
enable Enable flag.
(ON/OFF)
load Filename to load from.
save Saves current to file under name of
viewport.
dump Dumps current edgeblend mask to
image file.

2.4.21.4 COBRA \INTENSITY

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \INTENSITY qualifier provides intensity uniformity control.
Format: COBRA \INTENSITY [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable] [LOAD=load]
[SAVE=save] [PRINT=print] [X=x] [Y=y]
Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport.
Description:
enable Enable flag.
(ON/OFF)
load Filename to load from.
save Saves current to file under name of
viewport.
print Displays table information.
x (0..100) X index
y (0..100) Y index

2-70 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.21.5 COBRA \NLIM

The \NLIM qualifier provides NLIM control.
Format: COBRA \NLIM [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable] [LOAD=load]
[SAVE=save]
Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport.
Description:
enable Enable flag.
(ON/OFF)
load Filename to load from.
save Saves current to file under name of
viewport.

2.4.21.6 COBRA \SYMBOLOGY

The \SYMBOLOGY qualifier provides symbology control.
Format: COBRA \SYMBOLOGY [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable] [FILE=file]
[SAVE=save]
Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport.
Description:
enable Enable flag.
(ON/OFF)
file Image filename.
save Saves current to file under name of
viewport.

2.4.21.7 COBRA \TESTPATTERN

The \TESTPATTERN qualifier provides color matrix control.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: COBRA \TESTPATTERN [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable] [TYPE=type]
[FILE=file] [RESX=resx] [RESY=resy] [SAVE=save]
Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport.
Description:
enable Enable flag.
type (image checkerboard
checkerboardInverted) Type of test
pattern.
file Image filename.
resx (1..100) checkerboard resolution X
resy (1..100) checkerboard resolution Y
save Save test pattern image to file
(diagnostics).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-71

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.22 COLLISIONMASK
The COLLISIONMASK command changes the participation of a particular
moving model in the various mission function tests.
Format: COLLISIONMASK [MM=mm] [HAT=HAT] [noHAT=noHAT]
[LINE=line] [NOLINE=noLine] [LOS=los] [NOLOS=noLOS] [HD=HD]
[NOHD=noHD] [LIST]

Syntax
mm (0..65535) Moving model number.
Description:
HAT Enables HAT testing on the given
moving model.
noHAT Disables HAT testing on the given
moving model.
line Enables CDL testing on the given
moving model.
noLine Disables CDL testing on the given
moving model.
los Enables LOS testing on the given
moving model.
noLOS Disables LOS testing on the given
moving model.
HD Enables HD testing on the given
moving model.
noHD Disables HD testing on the given
moving model.
list Lists the collision flags enabled.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.23 COLOR
The COLOR command displays or modifies colors in the color palette.
Format: COLOR [N=n] [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]

[\RESTORE] [\SAVE]
Syntax
n (0..1023) The color palette index.
Description:
red The value of the color’s red pigment
(0..255).
green The value of the color’s green
pigment (0..255).
blue The value of the color’s blue pigment
(0..255).

2-72 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

[\RESTORE] Refer to the following descriptions for

[\SAVE] more information about these
qualifiers.

2.4.23.1 COLOR \IDXOVERRIDE

The \IDXOVERRIDE qualifier sets an index override value.
Format: INDEXOVERRIDE [TRIGGER=trigger] [REPLACE=replace]
Syntax (-1..1023) color index to be
trigger
Description: overridden.
replace (0..1023) override color index value.

2.4.23.2 COLOR \RESTORE

The \RESTORE qualifier is used to restore a color palette from a file.
Format: COLOR \RESTORE [FILE=file]
Syntax
Description: file The color palette filename.

2.4.23.3 COLOR \SAVE

The \SAVE qualifier is used to save the IG color palette to the specified
disk file.
Format: COLOR \SAVE [FILE=file] [OVERWRITE=overwrite]

Syntax
The color palette filename.
Description: file
overwrite Any existing file will be overwritten.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-73

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.24 COMM
The COMM command displays the status of the host interface, enables
or disables the host interface, and controls host data capture.
Format: COMM [HOST=ON|OFF] [RESET=reset]
[\CONFIG] [\DEBUG] [\PLAYBACK] [\RECORD] [\SERIALSYNC]
[\STATS] [\WATCH]
Syntax
Description: HOST (ON|OFF) The keyword to enable or disable
host communication. If disabled
there is no communication to or from
the host.
reset Forces the IG to send a restart
status to the host.
[\CONFIG] Refer to the following descriptions
[\DEBUG] for more information about these
[\PLAYBACK] qualifiers.
[\RECORD]
[\SERIALSYNC]
[\STATS]
[\WATCH]

2.4.24.1 COMM \CONFIG

The \CONFIG qualifier is used to configure the communications
interface.
Format: COMM \CONFIG [HANDSHAKE=handshake]
[CLEARONSENDFG=clearOnSendFg] [SMOOTHHAT=smoothHat]

Syntax handshake Enables or disables the host comms

Description: (ON/OFF) handshake.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

If enabled, the foreground response
clearOnSendFg buffer is cleared after sending. Else,
(ON/OFF) the clear happens on IG field
boundaries. Default is ON.
smoothHat Send previous hat values if second
(ON/OFF) host packet arrives in the same field.

2-74 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.24.2 COMM \DEBUG

The \DEBUG qualifier is used to control the output of host information to
the console.
Format: COMM \DEBUG [ENABLE=OFF|ON] [CPC=cpc] [CLI=cli]
[CIGIFRAMENUMBER=CIGIFrameNumber]

Syntax
Enables or disables the output of
Description: enable
host communication info.
(OFF/ON)
cpc Enables or disables the output of
(OFF/ON) DCPC communication info.
cli Enables or disables the CLI echo
(OFF/ON) when a CLI opcode is received.
CIGIFrameNumber Enables or disables monitoring of the
(OFF/ON) CIGI frame number - disable on IGs
running with multiple hosts.

2.4.24.3 COMM \PLAYBACK

The \PLAYBACK qualifier is used to playback a host-block file.
Format: COMM \PLAYBACK [ENABLE=OFF|ON] [REMOTE=remote] [FILE=file]
[STARTBLOCK=startblock] [ENDBLOCK=endblock] [REPLAY=replay]
[RELOCATE=relocate] [LATDEGREE=latdegree]
[LATMINUTE=latminute] [LATSECOND=latsecond]
[LONDEGREE=londegree] [LONMINUTE=lonminute]
[LONSECOND=lonsecond] [ALTITUDE=altitude]
[CLOSEREMOTE=closeRemote]

Syntax
Enables or disables the host-block
Description: enable
file playback.
(OFF/ON)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

remote Prevents the RT from starting the
(OFF/ON) client locally.
file The name of the host block file. If no
extension is provided, .hbf is
assumed.
startblock The block number at which playback
starts.
endblock The block number at which playback
stops.
replay Enables the replay of this comm file
(OFF/ON) after it ends.
relocate Enables addition of offsets to
(OFF/ON) recorded playback positions.
latdegree Latitude -degree component of
playback offset.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-75

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

latminute Latitude -minute component of

playback offset.
latsecond Latitude -second component of
playback offset.
londegree Longitude -degree component of
playback offset.
lonminute Longitude -minute component of
playback offset.
lonsecond Longitude -second component of
playback offset.
altitude Altitude component of playback
offset.
closeRemote Closes COMM record-playback app
(OFF/ON) window.

2.4.24.4 COMM \RECORD

The \RECORD qualifier is used to record host frames to a file.
Format: COMM \RECORD [ENABLE=enable] [REMOTE=remote] [FILE=file]
[CLOSEREMOTE=closeRemote]

Syntax enable Enables or disables host-block file

Description: (ON/OFF) recording.
remote Prevents the RT from starting the
(ON/OFF) client locally.
file Start recording host block to file.
closeRemote Closes COMM record-playback app
(OFF/ON) window.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-76 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.24.5 COMM \SERIALSYNC

The \SERIALSYNC qualifier is used to configure the IG to send the host
sync signal over pin 7 of the specified serial port.
Format: COMM \SERIALSYNC [ENABLE=enable]
[COMPORTNAME=comPortName]
[SIGNALDUTYCYCLE=signalDutyCycle]
[IGNOREOFFSET=ignoreOffset]

Syntax enable
Enables or disables the serial sync.
Description: (ON/OFF)
comPortName The name of the COM port to use for
the host sync signal (for example,
COM1)
signalDutyCycle (0.12..0.88) The duty cycle (on
time) of the host sync signal
specified as a percentage of field
time. (limited to 2ms buffers on
each end to avoid extending beyond
a field)
ignoreOffset Enables or disables the use of the
(ON/OFF) configured host sync offset for serial
sync. If ignore is on, then the serial
host sync signal will be triggered
immediately at video done.

2.4.24.6 COMM \STATS

The \STATS qualifier is used to report statistics on packets received on a
host connection.
Format: COMM \STATS [CONN=conn]

Syntax (0..4) The connection to monitor.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

conn
Description: Default is conn 1 if enabled.

2.4.24.7 COMM \WATCH

The \WATCH qualifier is used to record position data for a given moving
model provided by the host. The positional data is recorded as an EP2
event and is part of the event captures. The event capture tool is used to
plot the positional data points.
Format: COMM \WATCH [MS=ms] [SCALAR=scalar] [ENABLE=enable]
[DELTA=delta] [LAT=lat] [LON=lon] [ALT=alt]
[VELOCITY=velocity][REMOVE=remove]

Syntax (0..65535) Model number whose

ms
Description: position is being watched.
scalar Scalar applied to the deltas.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-77

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

enable Enables or disables the Watch

(ON/OFF) interface.
delta Records position deltas instead of
(ON/OFF) absolute positions.
lat Enables the watching of latitude
(ON/OFF) values.
lon Enables the watching of longitude
(ON/OFF) values.
alt Enables the watching of altitude
(ON/OFF) values.
velocity Enables the watching of velocity
(ON/OFF) values.
remove
Removes the ms from the watch list.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.25 CONTINUE
The CONTINUE command continues CLI processing.

2.4.26 CONVERGE
The CONVERGE command assigns a converging traffic scenario to an
MM. Scenario has to be defined.
Format: CONVERGE [MM=mm] [TYPE=type] [SCENARIO=scenario]
[STOP=stop] [START=start] [LOAD=load] [UNLOAD=unload]
[PAUSE=pause] [RESUME=resume] [LIST=list]

[\DEFINE]
The MM number to which the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax mm
Description: converging traffic sequence is to be
applied.
type The converging traffic type.
scenario Scenario number associated with
this sequence.
stop Stop the converging traffic
sequence.
start Start the converging traffic
sequence.
load Add the converging traffic sequence
number to the current list of
converging traffic.
unload Remove the converging traffic
number from the current list of
converging traffic.

2-78 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

pause Stop the sequence.

resume Restart the sequence.
list List the status of all currently loaded
converging-traffic scenarios.
[\DEFINE] Refer to the following section for a
description of this qualifier.

2.4.26.1 CONVERGE \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier controls a converging traffic scenario.
Format: CONVERGE \DEFINE [NAME=name] [TYPE=type]
[SCENARIO=scenario] [H=h] [P=p] [R=r]
[IMPACTTIME=impactTime] [VEERTIME=veerTime]
[SPEEDRATIO=speedRatio] [FIXEDSPEED=FixedSpeed]
[RANDOM=random] [TRACKOWNSHIP=trackownship]

Syntax name
Name of this converging traffic.
Description:
type 0:Aircraft 1:Bird 2:Missile.
scenario 0:Right 1:Left 2:Above 3:Below.
h Initial heading of the converging
traffic.
p Initial pitch of the converging traffic.
r Initial roll of the converging traffic.
impactTime Time in MS for MM to impact with
ownship.
veerTime Time in MS for MM to veer off
ownship.
speedRatio Model Speed/Ownship speed.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

FixedSpeed Feet/Second speed of MM, if not
tracking ownship.
random
Random variations in heading, pitch.
(ON/OFF)
trackownship
Moving model tracks ownship.
(ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-79

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.27 COUNTERMEASURE
The COUNTERMEASURE command controls a previously defined
countermeasure effect.
Format: COUNTERMEASURE [NUMBER=number] [ALL=all] [LIST=list]
[START=start] [CLEAN=clean]

[\DEFINE] [\MONITOR]

Syntax (0..127) Countermeasure effect

number
Description: identifier.
all When specified the action commands
apply to all defined countermeasure
effects.
list List defined countermeasure effects.
start Releases one set of the
countermeasures defined for this
effect.
clean Cleans all active countermeasures
defined for this effect.
[\DEFINE] Refer to the following sections for a
[\MONITOR] description of these qualifiers.

2.4.27.1 COUNTERMEASURE \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines (allocates memory for) or modifies a
countermeasure effect definition.
Format: COUNTERMEASURE \DEFINE [NUMBER=number]
[PARENTMODEL=parentmodel]
[PARENTSUBMODEL=parentSubModel] [XOFFSET=xOffset]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[YOFFSET=yOffset] [ZOFFSET=zOffset]
[PARTICLESYSTEM=particleSystem] [XDIR=xDir] [YDIR=yDir]
[ZDIR=zDir]

Syntax (0..127) Countermeasure effect

number
Description: identifier.
parentmodel (0..65535) Parent motion system
associated with the effect.
parentSubModel (0..510) Parent motion system's
sub-model associated with the
effect.
xOffset X offset from the parent motion
system's sub-model position.
yOffset Y offset from the parent motion
system's sub-model position.
zOffset Z offset from the parent motion
system's sub-model position.

2-80 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

particleSystem The particle system named effect

definition used for this
countermeasure definition.
xDir X direction used for the
countermeasure particle system.
yDir Y direction used for the
countermeasure particle system.
zDir Z direction used for the
countermeasure particle system.

2.4.27.2 COUNTERMEASURE \MONITOR

The \MONITOR qualifier specifies which countermeasure effect will be
monitored in EP2 statistics output.
Format: COUNTERMEASURE \MONITOR [NUMBER=number]

Syntax number (0..127) Countermeasure effect

Description: identifier for the effect to be
monitored.

2.4.28 CPC
A class of commands for communication from the IG to the
Communications PC (CPC) to control the dimmer function of projectors
in a display sub-system.
NOTE: Without the qualifier, the CPC command results in no action.
Format: CPC
[\BLEND] [\DIMMER] [NVG] [\POWER] [\SHUTDOWN]
[\UTMDAYEDGEBLEND]
2.4.28.1 CPC \BLEND
The \BLEND qualifier sets the nighttime edge blend state to on or off for

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

one or all the projectors in a display subsystem.

Format: CPC \BLEND [DISPLAY=display] [PROJECTOR=projector]

[STATE=state]

Syntax Specifies the display sub-system.

display
Description: Valid range is 0–7.
projector Specifies the projector to be affected
by the command. Valid range is –1–
9 where –1 indicates to apply to all
projectors.
state Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the
(ON/OFF) blend state.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-81

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.28.2 CPC \DIMMER

The \DIMMER qualifier allows the user to send a preset for the dimmer
control on one or all projectors.
Format: CPC \DIMMER [DISPLAY=display] [PROJECTOR=projector]
[PRESET=preset]

Syntax Specifies the display sub-system.

display
Description: Valid range is 0–7.
projector Specifies the projector to be affected
by the command. Valid range is –1–
9 where –1 indicates to apply to all
projectors.
preset Specifies which preset applies to the
dimmer control. Valid range is 0–7,
0 indicating darkest preset position
and 7 indicating brightest preset
position.

2.4.28.3 CPC \NVG

The \NVG qualifier sets the NVG mode to on or off for one or all the
projectors in a display sub-system.

Format: CPC \NVG [DISPLAY=display] [PROJECTOR=projector]

[MODE=mode]

Syntax Specifies the display sub-system.

display
Description: Valid range is 0–7.
projector Specifies the projector to be affected
by the command. Valid range is –1–
9 where –1 indicates to apply to all
projectors.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

mode Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the
(ON/OFF) NVG mode.

2.4.28.4 CPC \POWER

The \POWER qualifier set the power state to on or off for one or all the
projectors in a display sub-system.

Format: CPC \POWER [DISPLAY=display] [PROJECTOR=projector]

[STATE=state]

Syntax Specifies the display sub-system.

display
Description: Valid range is 0–7.
projector Specifies the projector to be affected
by the command. Valid range is –1–
9 where –1 indicates to apply to all
projectors.

2-82 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

state Specifies which preset applies to the

dimmer control. Valid range is 0–7,
0 indicating darkest preset position
and 7 indicating brightest preset
position.

2.4.28.5 CPC \SHUTDOWN

The \SHUTDOWN qualifier allows the user to shutdown the OS and leave
the power on, turn the power off, or reboot the hardware.

Format: CPC \SHUTDOWN [PWR_STATE=pwr_state]

Syntax (on off reboot) Enables (ON) or

pwr_state
Description: disables (OFF) the blend state.

2.4.28.6 CPC \UTMDAYEDGEBLEND

The \UTMDAYEDGEBLEND qualifier enables or disables day edge
blending for one or all the projectors in a display sub-system.

Format: CPC \UTMDAYEDGEBLEND [DISPLAY=display]

[PROJECTOR=projector] [MODE=mode]

Syntax Specifies the display sub-system.

display
Description: Valid range is 0–7.
projector Specifies the projector to be affected
by the command. Valid range is –1–
9 where –1 indicates to apply to all
projectors.
mode Sets the power state of the hardware
after OS shutdown to on, off, or
reboot.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-83

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.29 CRASH
The CRASH command controls the crash indication for a visual channel.
Format: CRASH [VIEW=view] [STATE=state] [RED=red] [GREEN=green]
[BLUE=blue] [RATE=rate]

Syntax view (0..63) The ID of the viewport to

Description: control.
state (off on flash) The state of the crash
indication
red (0..255) Red component of
indication color (0-255)
green (0..255) Green component of
indication color (0-255).
blue (0..255) Blue component of
indication color (0-255).
rate (1..180) Number of fields flash on,
then number of fields flash off
(ignored if STATE not set to flash).

2.4.30 CREATECOLORCODERFROMSCRATCH
The CREATECOLORCODERFROMSCRATCH command creates a color
coder.

Format: CREATECOLORCODERFROMSCRATCH [PATH=path] [PREFIX=prefix]

Syntax
path Path
Description:
prefix Prefix

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.31 CTANDTHEME
The CTANDTHEME command enables the 3D WholeEarth module.

Format: CTANDTHEME [USE3DWHOLEEARTH=use3DWholeEarth]

[CONFIG] [CT] [CTDEBUG] [DISTTOSHORE]

[DISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT] [ELEVATION] [FEATURES3D]
[LOADBRUSH] [REGION] [REMOVEDISTTOSHORE]
[REMOVEDISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT] [STATS]

Syntax Activate the 3D WholeEarth module

use3DWholeEarth
Description: to page in MegaTheme databases.
(ON/OFF)
The default is off.
[CONFIG]
[CT] Refer to the following sections for a
[CTDEBUG] description of these qualifiers.
[DISTTOSHORE]

2-84 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

[DISTSHOREPAGE
R]
[DISTTOSHOREWI
THGRADIENT]
[ELEVATION]
[FEATURES3D]
[LOADBRUSH]
REMOVEDISTTOS
HORE]
[REMOVEDISTTOS
HOREWITHGRADI
ENT]
[STATS]

2.4.31.1 CTANDTHEME \CONFIG

The \CONFIG qualifier provides cache management configuration (high-
water mark settings).

Format: CTANDTHEME \CONFIG

[FICCACHEHIWATERMARK=FICCacheHiwaterMark]
[INSETMASKCACHEHIWATERMARK=InsetMaskCacheHiwaterMark]
[MGTHMCACHEHIWATERMARK=MgThmCacheHiwaterMark]
[MAXFREE3DOBJECTS=MaxFree3DObjects]

Syntax FICCacheHiwater
Number of FIC blocks to cache.
Description: Mark
InsetMaskCacheHi Number of inset mask blocks to
waterMark cache.
MgThmCacheHiwa Number of megatheme blocks to
terMark cache.
MaxFree3DObjects Maximum number of 3D objects to
keep on the recycle list.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-85

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.31.2 CTANDTHEME \CT

The \CT qualifier sets parameters for the 3D WholeEarth CT pager.

Format: CTANDTHEME \CT [CTFORMAT=ctFormat]

[TEXTUREPAGERATIO=texturePageRatio]
[TEXTUREPAGEINTHROTTLE=texturePageInThrottle]
[TEXTUREPAGEINTHROTTLESTAGE2=texturePageInThrottleStage2]
[TEXTUREMAXLEVEL=textureMaxLevel]
[FADENUMFIELDS=fadeNumFields]
[BLENDSTARTLEVEL=blendStartLevel]
[PHOTOSUPERSAMPLEDSTLEVELMIN=
photoSuperSampleDstLevelMin]
[PHOTOSUPERSAMPLESRCLEVELMIN=
photoSuperSampleSrcLevelMin] [ENABLEBLENDING=enableBlending]
[PROJECTEDPIXELSIZESCALAR=projectedPixelSizeScalar]

Syntax (RGB DayNightSpecular Sensor) CT

ctFormat
Description: system format.
texturePageRatio CT transition range ratio threshold.
texturePageInThro Maximum number of texture paging
ttle tasks to schedule.
texturePageInThro Maximum number of texture paging
ttleStage2 tasks to schedule for Stage 2.
textureMaxLevel (1..15) Maximum texture map
paging level.
fadeNumFields (0..3600) Number of fast time fields
over which to fade-in CT maps.
blendStartLevel (1..31) Level at which to start inset
blending.
photoSuperSampl (0..31) Minimum texture MIP level at
eDstLevelMin which super-sampling is attempted.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

photoSuperSampl (1..31) Minimum level of existing
eSrcLevelMin data that will be referenced for
super-sampling.
enableBlending
Enable CT inset edge blending
(ON/OFF)
projectedPixelSize Scalar value to adjust the projected
Scalar pixel size used to test for CT Paging.

2-86 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.31.3 CTANDTHEME \CTDEBUG

The \CTDEBUG qualifier sets parameters for the 3D WholeEarth CT
debug.

Format: CTANDTHEME \CTDEBUG [DEBUGCTBORDERS=debugCTBorders]

[DEBUGPROJBORDERS=debugProjBorders]
[DEBUGFICS=debugFICs]
[DEBUGMATERIALFICS=debugMaterialFICs] [FICINDEX=ficIndex]
[RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue] [FICENABLE=ficEnable]
[LISTFICCOLORS=listFICColors] [DUMPFICCOLORS=dumpFICColors]
[LISTFICINDEX=listFICIndex] [LISTFICMAPTABLE=listFICMapTable]
[SIMPLE=simple]

Syntax debugCTBorders Enable debug lines near the CT

Description: (ON/OFF) borders.
debugProjBorders Enable debug lines at projection
(ON/OFF) plane boundaries.
debugFICs
Enable coloring of FICs.
(ON/OFF)
debugMaterialFICs Return Sensor material code instead
(ON/OFF) of FICs for Mission Functions (Sensor
mode only).
ficIndex (0..65535) Define a color for the FIC
index.
red (0..1) Red color of the ficIndex.
green (0..1) Green color of the ficIndex.
blue (0..1) Blue color of the ficIndex.
ficEnable Enable coloring of the specified
(ON/OFF) ficIndex.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

listFICColors List all the enabled FIC index colors.
dumpFICColors List all defined FIC index colors.
listFICIndex List the FIC index for each theme
that is used.
listFICMapTable List the FIC to FIC index mapping
table.
simple Do simple themes.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-87

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.31.4 CTANDTHEME \DISTTOSHORE

The \DISTTOSHORE qualifier reads a distance-to-shore database.

Format: CTANDTHEME \DISTTOSHORE [FACENUM=faceNum]

[FILENAME=filename]

Syntax
faceNum (0..5) Facenumber.
Description:
filename Path to the distance-to-shore data.

2.4.31.5 CTANDTHEME \DISTSHOREPAGER

The \DISTSHOREPAGER qualifier sets parameters for distance-to-shore
paging.

Format: CTANDTHEME \DISTSHOREPAGER [MAXLEVEL=maxLevel]

Syntax (1..100) Maximum MIP level for

maxLevel
Description: page blocks..

2.4.31.6 CTANDTHEME \DISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT

The \DISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT qualifier reads a distance-to-shore
database.

Format: CTANDTHEME \DISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT [FACENUM=faceNum]

[FILENAME=filename]

Syntax
faceNum (0..5) Facenumber.
Description:
filename Path to the distance-to-shore data.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.31.7 CTANDTHEME \ELEVATION
The \ELEVATION qualifier controls elevation pager settings.

Format: CTANDTHEME \ELEVATION [ELEVDATAPATH=elevDataPath]

[ELEVPAGEINTHROTTLE=elevPageInThrottle]
[MAXELEVATIONLEVEL=maxElevationLevel]
[ELEVPAGERADIUS=elevPageRadius]

Syntax
elevDataPath Path to the elevation data
Description:
elevPageInThrottl Maximum number of Elevation
e paging tasks to schedule.
maxElevationLevel (1..31) Maximum paging level for
Elevation data.
elevPageRadius (0..100000) Page in Elevation data
to this range.

2-88 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.31.8 CTANDTHEME \FEATURES3D

The \FEATURES3D qualifier sets parameters for 3D WholeEarth features.

Format: CTANDTHEME \FEATURES3D

[FEATPAGEINTHROTTLE=featPageInThrottle]
[MAX3DFEATURELEVEL=max3DfeatureLevel]
[MIN3DFEATURELEVEL=min3DfeatureLevel]
[PAGERANGEATMAXLEVEL=pageRangeAtMaxLevel]
[QUADTREELEVELDIFF=quadTreeLevelDiff]
[GLOBALDENSITY=globalDensity] [ENABLE3D=enable3D]
[OUTOFRANGEDBG=outOfRangeDbg] [PAGEMODE=pageMode]
[FOVSCALAR=fovScalar] [CULL3D=cull3D]

Syntax Maximum number of 3D Feature

featPageInThrottle
Description: paging tasks to schedule.
max3DfeatureLevel (1..31) Maximum paging level for 3D
Features. All 3D Features will be
paged in between the
max3DFeatureLevel and the
min3DFeatureLevel.
min3DfeatureLevel (1..31) Minimum paging level for 3D
Features. All 3D Features will be
paged in between the
max3DFeatureLevel and the
min3DFeatureLevel.
pageRangeAtMaxL Page in distance for features at
evel max3DFeatureLevel.
quadTreeLevelDiff (0..15) Difference between paging
level and Quad Tree level. Allows the
Quad Tree of 3D features to be more
shallow.
globalDensity (0..200) Global density culling

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

percentage for 3D features. This
value is multiplied by the
lightDensityPercent or
cultFeaturesDensity defined in the
theme definition file.
enable3D Enable loading of 3D features. This
(ON/OFF) only applies when the 3D Features
are loaded from file.
outOfRangeDbg Prints out the normalized position of
(ON/OFF) features that are out of range while
loading.
pageMode (normal helicopter helicopter2
export) 3D WholeEarth Feature
paging mode.
fovScalar (0..100) Scalar for 3D Feature FOV
culling in helicopter zoom mode.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-89

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

cull3D Cull 3D features from Quad Trees

(ON/OFF) according to themel density values.
Disable to use globalDensity > 100.

2.4.31.9 CTANDTHEME \LOADBRUSH

The \LOADBRUSH qualifier loads a 3D WholeEarth Brush Map.

Format: CTANDTHEME \LOADBRUSH [BRUSHMAPNAME=BrushMapName]

[BRUSHNUM=BrushNum] [LIST=list]

Syntax
BrushMapName Filename of the Brush Map.
Description:
BrushNum (0..100) Index number to update in
the table of Brush maps.
list List all the loaded Brush maps.

2.4.31.10 CTANDTHEME \REGION

The \REGION qualifier updates the theme library dynamic 3D paging
parameters.

Format: CTANDTHEME \REGION [PAGEINTHROTTLE=pageInThrottle]

[RADIUSSCALE=radiusScale]
[DISTANCEFROMRADIUS=distanceFromRadius]
[UNLOADRADIUSDISTANCE=unLoadRadiusDistance]
[UNLOADFIELDDELAY=unloadFieldDelay]
[LOADREGION=loadRegion] [UNLOADREGION=unloadRegion]
[LISTREGIONS=listRegions]

Syntax (1..100) Maximum number of 3D

Description: pageInThrottle Feature theme paging tasks to
schedule.
radiusScale (0.1..100) Scale the region radius
value for loading/unloading regional

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3D Feature themes.
distanceFromRadius Additional distance from the radius
value for loading/unloading regional
3D Feature themes.
unLoadRadiusDistan An additional distance that is added
ce to the region radius value for
unloading regional 3D Feature
themes.
unloadFieldDelay Number of ST fields to delay
unloading theme.
loadRegion (1..126) Debug - Force this region to
be loaded.
unloadRegion (1..126) Debug - Unload the given
region if it is outside the region
radius.

2-90 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

listRegions List the Regions and their load

status.

2.4.31.11 CTANDTHEME \REMOVEDISTTOSHORE

The \REMOVEDISTTOSHORE qualifier reads a distance-to-shore
database.

Format: CTANDTHEME \REMOVEDISTTOSHORE [FACENUM=faceNum]

[FILENAME=filename]

Syntax
faceNum (0..5) Facenumber.
Description:
filename Path to the distance-to-shore data.

2.4.31.12 CTANDTHEME
\REMOVEDISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT
The \REMOVEDISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT qualifier reads a distance-
to-shore database.

Format: CTANDTHEME \REMOVEDISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT

[FACENUM=faceNum] [FILENAME=filename]

Syntax
faceNum (0..5) Facenumber.
Description:
filename Path to the distance-to-shore data.

2.4.31.13 CTANDTHEME \STATS

The \STATS qualifier outputs stats for the CTandTheme module..

Format: CTANDTHEME \STATS [FILENAME=FileName]

[EVENTNAME=EventName] [CLEAR=clear] [DUMP=dump]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[RESET=reset] [FILECLEAR=FileClear]

Syntax Open file to dump stats. Old file

FileName
Description: contents will be discarded.
EventName Name that will be the first item on
the dump of the stats.
clear Clear the CTandTheme stats.
dump Dump the CTandTheme stats.
reset Reset stat state - allows headers to
print again.
FileClear Close the stats file.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-91

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.32 CTTEST
The CTTEST command is the terrain texture diagnostic command.

Format: CTTEST [TESTPATTERN=testPattern] [LABEL=label]

[CTBLENDING=CTBlending]
[REPLACEUNDEFINEDBYRED=replaceUndefinedByRed]
[UNDEFINEDBYNIGHTCTATNIGHT=undefinedByNightCTAtNight]
[PROFILELOG=ProfileLog] [PFPROFILELOG=PFProfileLog]
[LOGFILE=LogFile]
[DISABLESMALLBLOCKCACHE=disableSmallBlockCache]
[BLDTHEMEPTFEATS=bldThemePtFeats]
[ENABLETHEMEPTFEATLOG=enableThemePtFeatLog]
[ENABLETHEMECOLORMODE=enableThemeColorMode]
[ENABLETHEMEABSMODE=enableThemeAbsMode]
[ENABLEMIPLEVELCLAMP=enableMipLevelClamp]
[DONTCAREABOUTCTREADY=dontCareAboutCTReady]
[REPORTSCREENCENTERTEXTURE=reportScreenCenterTexture]
[TESTCOLORVARIESWITHMIPLEVEL=testColorVariesWithMIPLevel]
[USENEWFASTJETZOOMCTPAGINGPRIORITYALGORITHM=useNewFas
tJetZoomCTPagingPriorityAlgorithm]

Syntax testPattern Use test patterns instead of real

Description: textures from the DB.
off: regular CT paging.
on_WithPaging: replace the textures
after real paging.
on_SkipTheme: real paging but skip
themel CT generation.
on_NoPaging: no paging is done.
Use pre-loaded test patterns
label
Turn on/off CT labeling.
(ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

CTBlending
Turn the CT blending on or off.
(ON/OFF)
replaceUndefinedB
yRed Fill in undefined samples by red.
(ON/OFF)
undefinedByNight At night, texels are considered
CTAtNight undefined if the night texel is
(ON/OFF) undefined.
ProfileLog Start or end logging the texture
(ON/OFF) performance parameters.
PFProfileLog Start or end logging the point
(ON/OFF) feature performance parameters.
LogFile Name of log file to save to. Needed
when turning the ProfileLog off.

2-92 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

disableSmallBlock
Cache Enable/disable small block cache.
(ON/OFF)
bldThemePtFeats Enable the building of the theme
(ON/OFF) point features.
enableThemePtFe Enable log messaging for the
atLog sending and removing of theme
point feature lists to the
sceneManager.
enableThemeColor
Enable the theme maps to draw as a
Mode
color per level.
(ON/OFF)
enableThemeAbsM Enable the theme map texels to be
ode rendered in absolute mode as
(ON/OFF) opposed to diff mode.
enableMipLevelCla
Enable mip level clamp for paged-in
mp
CTs for smoother high LOD fade-in.
(ON/OFF)
dontCareAboutCT
Disables considering CT in the
Ready
terrain load status.
(ON/OFF)
reportScreenCent Reports screen center texture.
erTexture Debug only.
testColorVariesWit Test pattern color varies with MIP
hMIPLevel level.
useNewFastJetZoo
mCTPagingPriority Use the new fast jet zoom CT paging
Algorithm priority algorithm.
(ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-93

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.33 CTTHEME
The CTTHEME command sets the CT theme generation options.

Format: CTTHEME [USETHEMEABSMODE=useThemeAbsMode]

[USETEXELLERPPROJPLANEMODE=useTexelLerpProjPlaneMode]
[INTERTHEMEBLENDNUMLEVS=interThemeBlendNumLevs]
[ENABLETHEMEBILINEARBLENDING=enableThemeBiLinearBlending]
[ENABLENEWPROJPLANEMODE=enableNewProjPlaneMode]
[EXAMINEUSERADIUSFLAGFORPFPOPULATION=examineUseRadiusFl
agForPFPopulation]

[\CULTFEATURES] [\CULTLIGHTS] [\CULTTUNING]

useThemeAbsMod Sets the theme map texels so that

Syntax
e they are rendered using absolute
Description:
(ON/OFF) mode as opposed to diff mode.
Sets the theme texel re-projection
useTexelLerpProjP correction code to use linear
laneMode interpolation indexing into the texel
(ON/OFF) re-projection planes opposed to
using absolute indexing.
Number of levels of high resolution
interThemeBlendN
theme texture that have inter-theme
umLevs
blending is applied.
enableThemeBiLin
earBlending Enable bilinear blending for themes.
(ON/OFF)
enableNewProjPla
Enable new theme reprojection plane
neMode
correction mode.
(ON/OFF)
examineUseRadiu
Examine the DOF useRadius flag

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sFlagForPFPopulati
when deciding where to populate
on
theme point features. Default is off.
(ON/OFF)
[\CULTFEATURES]
Refer to the following sections for
[\CULTLIGHTS]
details on these qualifiers.
[\CULTTUNING]

2.4.33.1 CTTHEME \CULTFEATURES

The \CULTFEATURES qualifier sets the CT theme cultural 3D feature
rendering options.
Format: CTTHEME \CULTFEATURES [DENSITY=density]
(0..100) Set the density of the
Syntax
density cultural 3D features. 0%-100% of
Description:
modeled maximum.

2-94 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.33.2 CTTHEME \CULTLIGHTS

The \CULTLIGHTS qualifier sets the CT theme cultural lights rendering
options.
Format: CTTHEME \CULTLIGHTS [DENSITY=density]
(0..100) Set the density of the
Syntax
density cultural lights. 0%-100% of modeled
Description:
maximum.

2.4.33.3 CTTHEME \CULTTUNING

The \CULTTUNING qualifier sets the CT theme cultural lights and 3D
feature tuning options.
Format: CTTHEME \CULTTUNING
[ENABLEHIGHLEVFICPFRESMODE=enableHighLevFicPFResMode]
[PAGERANGESCALAR=pageRangeScalar]
[LEV5FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev5FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV6FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev6FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV7FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev7FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV8FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev8FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV9FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev9FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV10FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev10FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV11FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev11FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV12FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev12FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV13FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev13FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV14FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev14FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV15FICPFRESLEVENABLED=Lev15FicPFResLevEnabled]
[LEV5TCellDIVISIONS=Lev5TCellDivisions]
[LEV6TCellDIVISIONS=Lev6TCellDivisions]
[LEV7TCellDIVISIONS=Lev7TCellDivisions]
[LEV8TCellDIVISIONS=Lev8TCellDivisions]
[LEV9TCellDIVISIONS=Lev9TCellDivisions]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[LEV10TCellDIVISIONS=Lev10TCellDivisions]
[LEV11TCellDIVISIONS=Lev11TCellDivisions]
[LEV12TCellDIVISIONS=Lev12TCellDivisions]
[LEV13TCellDIVISIONS=Lev13TCellDivisions]
[LEV14TCellDIVISIONS=Lev14TCellDivisions]
[LEV15TCellDIVISIONS=Lev15TCellDivisions]

enableHighLevFicPF Specifies if the high resolution FIC

Syntax
ResMode point feature placement mode in
Description:
(ON/OFF) enabled.
(0..10) Set the page range scalar
pageRangeScalar of the themel cultural models. (0-
10)
Enable FIC page level 5 (512m
Lev5FicPFResLevEn texels at 1635308 ft range) as a
abled high FIC resolution level at which
(ON/OFF) the point feature positions are
resolved

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-95

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Enable FIC page level 6 (256 texels

Lev6FicPFResLevEn
at 808532 ft range) as a high FIC
abled
resolution level at which the point
(ON/OFF)
feature positions are resolved.
Enable FIC page level 7 (128m
Lev7FicPFResLevEn texels at 401989 ft range) as a
abled high FIC resolution level at which
(ON/OFF) the point feature positions are
resolved
Enable FIC page level 8 (64m
Lev8FicPFResLevEn texels at 200426 ft range) as a
abled high FIC resolution level at which
(ON/OFF) the point feature positions are
resolved.
Enable FIC page level 9 (32m
Lev9FicPFResLevEn texels at 100071 ft range) as a
abled high FIC resolution level at which
(ON/OFF) the point feature positions are
resolved.
Enable FIC page level 10 (16m
Lev10FicPFResLevE texels at 50000 ft range) as a high
nabled FIC resolution level at which the
(ON/OFF) point feature positions are
resolved.
Enable FIC page level 11 (8m
Lev11FicPFResLevE texels at 24991 ft range) as a high
nabled FIC resolution level at which the
(ON/OFF) point feature positions are
resolved.
Enable FIC page level 12 (4m
Lev12FicPFResLevE texels at 12493 ft range) as a high
nabled FIC resolution level at which the
(ON/OFF) point feature positions are
resolved.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Enable FIC page level 13 (2m
Lev13FicPFResLevE texels at 6246 ft range) as a high
nabled FIC resolution level at which the
(ON/OFF) point feature positions are
resolved.
Enable FIC page level 14 (1m
Lev14FicPFResLevE texels at 3122 ft range) as a high
nabled FIC resolution level at which the
(ON/OFF) point feature positions are
resolved.
Enable FIC page level 155 (0.5m
Lev15FicPFResLevE texels at 1561 ft range) as a high
nabled FIC resolution level at which the
(ON/OFF) point feature positions are
resolved.

2-96 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

(1..16) Number of divisions along

the edge of TCell level 5 for feature
Lev5TCellDivisions
paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along
the edge of TCell level 6 for feature
Lev6TCellDivisions
paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along
the edge of TCell level 7 for feature
Lev7TCellDivisions
paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along
the edge of TCell level 8 for feature
Lev8TCellDivisions
paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along
the edge of TCell level 9 for feature
Lev9TCellDivisions
paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along
the edge of TCell level 10 for
Lev10TCellDivisions
feature paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along
the edge of TCell level 11 for
Lev11TCellDivisions
feature paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along
the edge of TCell level 12 for
Lev12TCellDivisions
feature paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the edge of TCell level 13 for
Lev13TCellDivisions
feature paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along
the edge of TCell level 14 for
Lev14TCellDivisions
feature paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)
(1..16) Number of divisions along
the edge of TCell level 15 for
Lev15TCellDivisions
feature paging. Valid numbers are
(1,2,4,8,16)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-97

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.34 DATABASE
The DATABASE command configures a database type.
Format: DATABASE [MODE=mode] [UNITS=units] [ORIGIN=origin]
[LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]
[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude]

Syntax
mode (latlon xy) Database mode.
Description:
(feet meters decimeters) Set the
units
database units.
(none absolute dynamic) The
origin
database origin type
latdegree (-90..90) Latitude degrees.
latminute (0..60) Latitude minutes.
latsecond (0..60) Latitude seconds.
longdegree (-180..180) Longitude degrees.
longminute (0..60) Longitude minutes.
longsecond (0..60) Longitude seconds.
altitude Altitude

2.4.35 DB
The DB command forces an unload of any current insets and then
executes the specified database load script.
Format: DB [FILE=file] [FORCE=force]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[\CALC] [\COMPLETE] [\IGNORE] [\LIST] [\REPOSITION] [\UNLOAD]
[\WORLD]

Syntax
file Name of the database.
Description:
force Forces database to load if it is the
(ON/OFF) same database.
[\CALC]
[\COMPLETE]
[\IGNORE]
Refer to the following sections for
[\LIST]
details on these qualifiers.
[\REPOSITION]
[\UNLOAD]
[\WORLD]

2-98 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.35.1 DB \CALC
The \CALC qualifier is a WGS84 calculator.
Format: DB \CALC [ANGLE=angle] [DIST=dist]

Syntax
angle Angle of position.
Description:
dist Distance from eye.

2.4.35.2 DB \CIGI
The \CIGI qualifier provides controls for database load and unload
specific to the CIGI host interface.

Format: DB \CIGI [SKIPUNLOAD=skipUnload]

Switch this on to just run the cigiDb
script like any reset file not invoking
the db command and thus not
Syntax skipUnload
unloading the current database
Description: (ON/OFF)
(helpful when using a single 'global'
database rather than multiple
insets).

2.4.35.3 DB \COMPLETE
The \COMPLETE qualifier indicates that a database load is complete. This
is not a user command.

2.4.35.4 DB \IGNORE
The \IGNORE qualifier lists, updates, or clears the ignore paths used
when searching for epins.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: DB \IGNORE [PATHS=paths] [CLEAR=clear] [LIST=list]
A semi-colon separated list of paths
to ignore that will be added to
Syntax
paths current set of ignores. These are
Description:
subdirectory names; wildcards are
not supported.
clear Clear all ignore paths.
list List the current ignore paths.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-99

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.35.5 DB \LIST
The \LIST qualifier displays database elements of a given type.
Format: DB \LIST [PATH=path] [TYPE=type]
The inset .epin file. It is optional. If
Syntax
path specified, the contents of the inset
Description:
will be displayed.
(inset airfield landmark ct vf sct
type terrain) The type of database
elements to list (default: inset).

2.4.35.6 DB \REPOSITION
The \REPOSTION qualifier is used to control the reporting of database
paging status to the host (sometimes called load status). When a large
reposition is detected, the real-time marks paging incomplete, and then
starts checking the status of pagers until paging becomes complete.
There are host opcode options for the host to either poll the current
pager status or register a callback that reports after paging is complete.
Format: DB \REPOSITION [DISTANCE=distance] [MINTIME=minTime]
[MAXTIME=maxTime] [STWAIT=stWait]
[INITMAXTIME=initMaxTime] [BLACK=black]

Syntax The distance at which a reposition is

distance
Description: detected (in miles).
The minimum amount of time after a
reposition is detected that paging
minTime
complete will be reported (in
seconds).
The maximum amount of time after
a reposition is detected that paging

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

maxTime complete will be reported in seconds
(whether or not it is actually
complete).
(0..1000) Slowtime fields to wait
stWait after pager done before reporting
load status.
Maximum time during initial
initMaxTime
database load (seconds).
black
Blackout viewport on reposition.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.35.7 DB \STATUS
The \STATUS qualifier gives the current load status.

2-100 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.35.8 DB \UNLOAD
The \UNLOAD qualifier temporarily unloads certain data types.
Format: DB \UNLOAD [PATH=path] [TYPE=type]

Syntax Path of database inset .epin file or

path
Description: root of search path.
(airfield landmark ct vf sct terrain)
Type of database elements to
type
unload. If not specified, entire epin
will be unloaded from database.

2.4.35.9 DB \WGS84
The \WGS84 qualifier is WGS84 mode control.
Format: DB \WGS84 [ENABLE=enable]
[INGOREREDICULES=ignoreRedicules] [TEST=test] [TEST2=test2]

Syntax enable
enable/disable WGS84 correction
Description: (ON/OFF)
ignoreRedicules enable/disable WGS84 correction on
(ON/OFF) eye chained redicules.
test enable/disable WGS84 correction
(ON/OFF) test pattern.
Test2 enable/disable WGS84 correction
(ON/OFF) test pattern 2.

2.4.35.10 DB \WORLD
The \WORLD qualifier sets world size/shape.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: DB \WORLD [WORLDRADIUS=worldRadius]
[FLATRADIUS=flatRadius] [ROUNDWORLD=roundWorld]
[AIRPORTCORRECT=airportCorrect]

Syntax
worldRadius (0..4e+007) World radius in feet.
Description:
(0..1e+006) World-flattening radius
flatRadius
in feet.
roundWorld
Round world flag.
(ON/OFF)
airport position correct moving
airportCorrect
models

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-101

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.36 DEFINE
The DEFINE command defines a variable used in if statements.
Format: DEFINE [NAME=name] [VALUE=] [LIST=list]

Syntax
name Variable name.
Description:
value Variable name.
list List all variables.

2.4.37 DEFOCUS
The DEFOCUS command sets defocus level.
Format: DEFOCUS [LEVEL=level] [CHANNELMASK=channelMask]
[ALTERNATEMASK=alternateMask]

[\LEVEL] [\RASTER]

Syntax level
(0..2) Defocus level.
Description:
channelMask Channel enable mask.
alternateMask Alternate select mask - 0 for normal
wiper; 1 for alternate wiper.
[\LEVEL] Refer to the following descriptions
[\RASTER] for more information about these
qualifiers.

2.4.37.1 DEFOCUS \LEVEL

The \LEVEL qualifier sets defocus values per level.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: DEFOCUS \LEVEL [LEVEL=level] [CDEFOCUS=cDefocus]
[RDEFOCUS=rDefocus]

Syntax
level (0..2) Defocus level.
Description:
cDefocus (0..1) Light point defocus for this
level.
rDefocus (0..1) Raster defocus for this level.

2-102 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.37.2 DEFOCUS \RASTER

The \RASTER qualifier sets parameters of the raster defocus kernel.
Format: DEFOCUS \RASTER [SIGMAMIN=sigmaMin] [SIGMAMAX=sigmaMax]

Syntax (0..1) Gaussian defocus kernel min

sigmaMin
Description: value.
sigmaMax (0..6) Gaussian defocus kernel max
value.

2.4.38 DEVGAIN
The DEVGAIN command sets the emband sensor device gain.
Format: DEVGAIN [BAND=band] [GAIN=gain]

Syntax (nvg evs mwir lwir eo) Select the

band
Description: emband for the specified gain.
gain [intensity = radiance(level temp) +
gain * radiance]

2.4.39 DEVLEVEL
The DEVLEVEL command sets the emband sensor device level
temperature.
Format: DEVLEVEL [EMBAND=emband] [LEVELTEMP=leveltemp]

Syntax (nvg evs mwir lwir eo) Select the

emband
Description: emband for the specified gain.
leveltemp Sets the level temperature (C)
[intensity = radiance(level temp) +
gain * radiance]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.40 DIGUY
The DIGUY command initializes or re-initializes the DIGUY scenario.
Format: DIGUY [INIT=init] [CHARTYPESDEFINED=charTypesDefined]
[\ACTION] [\CHAR] [\DEFINEACTIONLIST] [\DEFINECHARTYPE]
[\TUNING] [\WEAPON]
Syntax init Initialize / re-initialize the DIGUY
Description: scenario. Must be in this state to
define actions / char types (comes
up in this state).
charTypesDefined Puts the DIGUY scenario in a state
that allows it to process actions
(and no longer allow action / char
definitions).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-103

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

[\ACTION] Refer to the following descriptions

[\CHAR] for more information about these
[\DEFINEACTIONLIST] qualifiers.
[\DEFINECHARTYPE]
[\TUNING]
[\WEAPON]

2.4.40.1 DIGUY \ACTION

The \ACTION qualifier sets the action state for a DI-Guy character.
Format: DIGUY \ACTION [MM=mm] [LIST=list] [INDEX=index]
[NAME=name] [SPEED=speed] [FORCEACTION=forceAction]
(0..4095) The moving model to
Syntax
mm which the DI-Guy character is
Description:
bound.
list List the available character actions
that can be assigned to a moving
model.
index The index number of the name of
the action type to be assigned to a
moving model.
name The name of the action type to be
assigned to a moving model.
speed Specifies the speed of the character
motion in database units/second.
forceAction Specifies whether the transition will
(ON/OFF) be smooth or abrupt when changing
action types.

2.4.40.2 DIGUY \CHAR

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \CHAR qualifier assigns a particular DI-Guy character type to a
moving model.
Format: DIGUY \CHAR [LIST=list] [MM=mm] [CREATE=create]
[INDEX=index] [NAME=name] [APPEARINDEX=appearIndex]
[DESTROY=destroy]

list List the available character types

Syntax
that can be assigned to a moving
Description:
model.
(0..4095) moving model to which
mm
the DI-Guy character is bound.
create Associate a moving model to a
DI-Guy character type.
index The index number of the name of
the character type to be assigned to
a moving model.

2-104 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

name The name of the character type to

be assigned to a moving model.
appearIndex The appearance index of the DI-Guy
appearance assigned to the DI-Guy
character.
destroy Disassociate the relationship
between a moving model and a
previously assigned DI-Guy
character type.

2.4.40.3 DIGUY \DEFINEACTIONLIST

The \DEFINEACTIONLIST qualifier defines a named action list which can
be referenced in the DIGUY\DEFINECHARTYPE command.
Format: DIGUY \DEFINEACTIONLIST [ACTIONLISTNAME=actionListName]
[ACTIONINDEX=actionIndex] [ACTIONALIASNAME=actionAliasName]
[ACTIONNAME=actionName]
The name of the action list that can
Syntax
actionListName be referenced in the
Description:
DIGUY\DEFINECHARTYPE command.
actionIndex The index into this action list to
reference this particular action
(defined by actionAliasName /
actionName).
actionAliasName The alias name of this action.
actionName The name of this action.

2.4.40.4 DIGUY \DEFINECHARTYPE

The \DEFINECHARTYPE qualifier defines a Di-Guy character type and its
appearance.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: DIGUY \DEFINECHARTYPE [CHARTYPENAME=charTypeName]
[CHARTYPEINDEX=charTypeIndex]
[APPEARANCEINDEX=appearanceIndex] [CHARNAME=charName]
[APPEARANCENAME=appearanceName]
[ACTIONLISTNAME=actionListName] [SLOTNUMBER=slotNumber]

Syntax
charTypeName The name of this character type.
Description:
charTypeIndex The index used to reference this
character type.
appearanceIndex The index used to reference this
appearance of this character type.
charName The name used to reference this
combination of appearance and
action list.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-105

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

appearanceName The name of this type of

appearance, also used as the base
name for the control file.
actionListName The name of this action list as
defined by the
DIGUY\DEFINEACTIONLIST
command.
slotNumber (0..4095) The slot number this
character type will be load into (not
automatic).

2.4.40.5 DIGUY \TUNING

The \TUNING qualifier tunes motion LOD culling.
Format: DIGUY \TUNING [KLODENABLE=klodEnable]
[KLODSCALAR=klodScalar] [LOD0RANGE=lod0Range]
[LOD1RANGE=lod1Range] [LOD2RANGE=lod2Range]
[LOD3RANGE=lod3Range] [LOD0FREQ=lod0Freq]
[LOD1FREQ=lod1Freq] [LOD2FREQ=lod2Freq]
[LOD3FREQ=lod3Freq]
Specifies whether or not the DIGUY
Syntax klodEnable
motion LOD ranges respond to
Description: (ON/OFF)
KLOD.
klodScalar (1..20) Specifies a multiplier which is
applied to the DIGUY KLOD scalar.
lod0Range Range limit at which all a DI-Guy
character’s articulated parts are
updated.
lod1Range Range limit at which all a DI-Guy
character’s articulated parts are
updated except the left ankle, left
wrist, right ankle, right wrist and
rifle joint.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

lod2Range Range limit at which the only DI-Guy
character’s articulated parts that are
updated are the base, back, left hip,
left knee, right hip and right knee.
lod3Range Range limit at which the only DI-Guy
articulated part that is updated is
the base.
lod0Freq (1..16) Frame rate update frequency
for the articulated parts defined in
lod0range.
lod1Freq (1..16) Frame rate update frequency
for the articulated parts defined in
lod1range.
lod2Freq (1..16) Frame rate update frequency
for the articulated parts defined in
lod2range.

2-106 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

lod3Freq (1..16) Frame rate update frequency

for the articulated parts defined in
lod3range.

2.4.40.6 DIGUY \WEAPON

The \WEAPON qualifier sets the current azimuth and elevation of a DI-Guy
character's weapon aim angles and head gaze angles.
Format: DIGUY \WEAPON [MM=mm] [AIMAZIMUTH=aimAzimuth]
[AIMELEVATION=aimElevation] [GAZEAZIMUTH=gazeAzimuth]
[GAZEELEVATION=gazeElevation]

Syntax (0..4095) moving model to which a

mm
Description: Di-Guy character is bound.
aimAzimuth Specifies the azimuth angle for
aiming a weapon.
aimElevation Specifies the elevation angle for
aiming a weapon.
gazeAzimuth Specifies the azimuth angle for the
head gaze.
gazeElevation Specifies the elevation angle for the
head gaze.

2.4.41 DS
The DS command has one qualifier described below.

2.4.41.1 DS \CONFIG
The DS \CONFIG qualifier configures the database server memory
manager (one time at startup).

Format: DS \CONFIG [TYPE=type] [MEMORY=memory]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax (ct sct terrain vf) Database element
type
Description: type to apply configuration.
memory (CRT DS EP2 Heap) Memory
management choice to apply to
selected type.

2.4.42 EBGAMMA
The EBGAMMA command sets edge blend gamma for a viewport.
Format: EBGAMMA [VP=vp] [TOD=tod] [GAMMA=gamma]
Syntax
vp (0..64) Viewport number.
Description:
tod (dawn day dusk night) Time-of-day.
gamma (0.1..5) Gamma value.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-107

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.43 ECHO
The ECHO command enables and disables the echoing of commands.
Format: ECHO [ENABLE=ON|OFF]
Syntax ENABLE Enables or disables the echoing of
Description: (ON/OFF) commands.

2.4.43.1 ECHO \FORCE

The \FORCE qualifier sets the echo force mode.
Format: ECHO \FORCE [MODE=mode]
Syntax mode (normal off on) Sets the echo force
Description: mode.

2.4.44 ELEVTEST
The ELEVTEST command draws a box at a given gridpost and extract
information.
Format: ELEVTEST [PROFILELOG=ProfileLog] [LOGFILE=Logfile]

Syntax ProfileLog Start or end logging the performance

Description: (ON/OFF) parameters
Logfile Name of log file to save to. Needed
when turning the ProfileLog off.

2.4.44.1 ELEVTEST \SHADOW

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \SHADOW qualifier debugs shadow ray tracing by drawing a line
from a given gridpost to the nth testpoint.

Format: ELEVTEST \SHADOW [ENABLE=enable] [FACE=face] [LEVEL=level]

[X=x] [Y=y]
[MAXSUNRISESTEPSRENDERED=maxSunRiseStepsRendered]
[MAXSUNSETSTEPSRENDERED=maxSunSetStepsRendered]
[TRACE=trace] [BREAK=break]

Syntax enable
Turn on or off.
Description:
face (0..5) Face ID.
level Level
x x
y y

2-108 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

maxSunRiseStep
(1..256) Max verts rendered in the line.
sRendered
maxSunSetSteps
(1..256) Max verts rendered in the line.
Rendered
trace (all higherpoints top) Connect trace line
to all steps or just the higher points.
break Set breakpoint at the gridpost, 0: no
break point, 1/-1: beginning of
sunrise/sunset raytracing, >1/<-1:
step of sunrise/sunset raytracing.

2.4.45 EMP
The EMP command has the nine qualifiers described below.

2.4.45.1 EMP \AC

The \AC qualifier provides diagnostic ac-coupling control.

Format: EMP \AC [VIEW=view] [SELECT=select] [ENABLE=enable]

[GAIN=gain] [LEVEL=level]

Syntax view
(0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
select (primary secondary) Select AC circuit.
enable
Enable/disable.
(ON/OFF)
gain (0..128) Gain
level (-128..128) Level

2.4.45.2 EMP \COLORSCALE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \COLORSCALE qualifier provides diagnostic colorscale control.

Format: EMP \COLORSCALE [VIEW=view] [RED=red] [GREEN=green]

[BLUE=blue]

Syntax view
(0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
red (0..1) red scale
green (0..1) green scale
blue (0..1) blue scale

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-109

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.45.3 EMP \NOISE

The \NOISE qualifier provides diagnostic colorscale control.

Format: EMP \NOISE [VIEW=view] [NOISEGAIN=noiseGain]

[WHITENOISEGAIN=whiteNoiseGain] [LENGTH=length]

Syntax view
(0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
noiseGain (0..1) Noise intensity.
whiteNoiseGain (0..1) White noise intensity.
length (1..8) Noise length.

2.4.45.4 EMP \PIXELSTACK

The \PIXELSTACK qualifier provides diagnostic pixel stack control.

Format: EMP \PIXELSTACK [VIEW=view] [VIDEO=video] [ENABLE=enable]

[SOURCE=source] [THRESHOLD=threshold]
[LINEOFFSET=lineOffset] [CAPTURE=capture]

Syntax view
(0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
video (0..1) video ID.
enable
Enable/disable pixel stack read-back.
(ON/OFF)
source (red green blue defocus) source of pixel
stack.
threshold (0..1) transition threshold.
lineOffset (0..1600) line offset.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

capture Capture filename.

2.4.45.5 EMP \POLARITY

The \POLARITY qualifier provides diagnostic polarity control.

Format: EMP \POLARITY [VIEW=view] [SELECT=select] [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax view
(0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
select (0..2) Select polarity circuit.
enable
Enable/disable.
(ON/OFF)

2-110 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.45.6 EMP \SPACIALFILTER

The \SPACIALFILTER qualifier provides diagnostic spacial filter control.

Format: EMP \SPACIALFILTER [VIEW=view] [SELECT=select]

Syntax view
(0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
select (0..9) Select polarity circuit.

2.4.45.7 EMP \TEMPORALFILTER

The \TEMPORALFILTER qualifier provides diagnostic temporal filter
control.

Format: EMP \TEMPORALFILTER [VIEW=view] [VALUE=value]

Syntax view
(0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
value (0..1) Value.

2.4.45.8 EMP \TRACKER

The \TRACKER qualifier provides diagnostic temporal filter control.

Format: EMP \TRACKER [VIEW=view] [ORDER=order]

Syntax view
(0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
order (normal new) Set the tracker pipe
order.

2.4.45.9 EMP \ZOOM

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \ZOOM qualifier provides diagnostic temporal filter control.

Format: EMP \ZOOM [VIEW=view] [FACTOR=factor] [BLEND=blend]

Syntax view
(0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
factor (0..128) Zoom factor.
blend
Enable/disable blend
(ON/OFF)

2.4.46 ENDIF
The ENDIF command ends processing of an if command.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-111

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.47 ENVIRONMENT
The ENVIRONMENT command has two qualifiers. They are described in
the sections below.

2.4.47.1 ENVIRONMENT \SUNMOONMODEL

The \SUNMOONMODEL qualifier loads a model for the sun and moon.

Format: ENVIRONMENT \SUNMOONMODEL [FILE=file] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax file The filename of the moon OpenFlight

Description: model.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.47.2 ENVIRONMENT \TUNING

The \TUNING qualifier is used to view or set parameters for environment
tuning files.

Format: ENVIRONMENT \TUNING [ENABLE=OFF|ON]

[SUMMERPATH=summerPath] [WINTERPATH=winterPath]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
Enables or disables environment
Description: enable
tuning files.
(OFF/ON)`
summerPath Set the path to summer environment
tuning files; use "default" to restore
default path.
winterPath Set the path to winter environment

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tuning files; use "default" to restore
default path.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2-112 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.48 EXTRAPOLATE
The EXTRAPOLATE command controls Extrapolation for a moving model.

Format: EXTRAPOLATE [MM=mm] [ENABLE=ON | OFF]

[SECONDARY=ON|OFF] [ROTATION=ON | OFF] [TRANSLATION=ON
| OFF] [TIMEOUT=timeout] [MAXPOSITIONDELTA=maxpositiondelta]
[HOSTRATE=hostRate] [AVEHOSTRATE=avehostRate] [LIST=list]

Syntax
Description: mm (0..65535) Model number whose
position is being extrapolated.
enable Enables or disables Extrapolation
(ON/OFF) within EP.
secondary Apply extrapolation for all
(ON/OFF) submodels.
rotation A keyword that enables or disables
(ON/OFF) rotational extrapolation for an mm.
translation A keyword that enables or disables
(ON/OFF) translational extrapolation for an
mm.
timeout Time in milliseconds after which
extrapolation is disabled with no
input from host. The default is –1,
meaning to never disable.
maxpositiondelta (0..1000) The maximum distance in
feet-per-field for which the IG will
extrapolate the motion system. Any
distance moved from one field to the
next which is greater than this value
will not be extrapolated. Default is

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

48.
hostRate (0..120) Expected host rate (Hz).
avehostrate Enables use of the average host rate
(ON/OFF) for extrapolation. It allows the IG to
extrapolate based on the last 180
packets received. If aveHostRate is
enabled then any hostRate set in this
command will be ignored and the
average host rate will be used
instead.
list List all extrapolated models.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-113

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.49 EYEPOINT
The EYEPOINT command is used to configure an eyepoint relative to a
moving model coordinate system.

Format: EYEPOINT [EYE=eye] [MM=mm] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [H=h] [P=p]

[R=r]

Syntax
Description: eye The eyepoint number (0..31).
mm The moving model coordinate
system to which the eyepoint is to
be chained.
x The X offset.
y The Y offset.
z The Z offset.
h Heading
p Pitch
r Roll

2.4.49.1 EYEPOINT \CONTROLVOLUME

The \CONTROLVOLUME qualifier sets an alternate position from which
control volumes may be computed.

Format: EYEPOINT \CONTROLVOLUME [ALTENABLE=altEnable] [MS=ms]

Syntax
Description: altEnable Enable/disable alternate control
volume eyepoint.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ms (0..65536) Motion system used as
the alternate control volume eye
position.

2.4.50 FACETRANDCOLOR
The FACETRANDCOLOR command randomly colorizes terrain skin facets.

Format: FACETRANDCOLOR [ENABLE=enable] [NUMCOLORS=numColors]

[GRAYSCALE=grayscale]

Syntax enable Enables or disables facetRandColor

Description: (ON/OFF) mode.
numColors The number of random colors.
grayscale
Use only grayscale colors.
(ON/OFF)

2-114 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.51 FADE
The FADE command sets the sub-model fade value.

Format: FADE [MM=mm] [ALPHA=alpha]

Syntax
mm The motion system.
Description:
alpha The sub-model fade value.

2.4.52 FASTSLEW
The FASTSLEW command configures optimizations at fast slew rate.

Format: FASTSLEW [ENABLE=enable] [SLEWRATE=slewRate]

[TERRAINTRAVERSETHREADS=TerrainTraverseThreads]
[MAXTERRAINTRAVERSALS=MaxTerrainTraversals]
[MAXCELLSPERTRAVERSAL=MaxCellsPerTraversal]

Syntax enable
Enable real time fast slew mode.
Description: (ON/OFF)
slewRate (0..100000) Slew rate that will
enable fast slew optimizations in
degrees per second.
TerrainTraverseTh (0..32) Define number of terrain
reads traversal tasks.
MaxTerrainTravers (1..32) Define the maximun number
als of terrain traversals in a ST field.
(1..500) Define the maximum
MaxCellsPerTraver
number of terrain cells changed in
sal
the tree to end ST field loop.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.52.1 FASTSLEW \FASTTIMEFEATURES
The \FASTTIMEFEATURES qualifier provides fast time handling of
features.

Format: FASTSLEW \FASTTIMEFEATURES [ENABLE=enable]

[MAXFEATURESPERCELL=maxFeaturesPerCell]
[FOVTRIGGER=FOVTrigger]
[BIGFEATURERADIUS=BigFeatureRadius]

Syntax enable Enable fast time FOV culling of

Description: (ON/OFF) features.
maxFeaturesPerCe (5..10000) Max number of features
ll in each quad tree cell.
FOVTrigger (0..180) FOV in degrees where fast
slew optimizations start.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-115

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

BigFeatureRadius (0..1e+006) Radius (feet) of

features that should not be inserted
into quad tree.

2.4.52.2 FASTSLEW \SLEWRATESCALE

The \SLEWRATESCALE qualifier performs linear interpolation of slew rate
based on zoom factor.

Format: FASTSLEW \SLEWRATESCALE [ENABLE=enable] [ZOOM=zoom]

[SLEWRATE=slewRATE] [LIST=list]

Syntax enable Enable linear interpolation of slew

Description: (ON/OFF) rate based on zoom factor.
zoom (1..512) Zoom factor for linear
interpolation of slew rate - slewRate
must also be specified.
slewRate SlewRate for the linear interpolation
of slewRate. Zoom must also be
specified.
list List the defined Zoom and slewRate
pairs.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-116 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.53 FICLAYER
The FICLAYER command enables an FIC replacement layer.

Format: FICLAYER [ENABLE=enable] [FICPAGERATIO=ficPageRatio]

[FICPAGEINTHROTTLE=ficPageInThrottle]
[FICMAXLEVEL=ficMaxLevel]

[\DEBUG]

Syntax enable Enable or disable high resolution fic

Description: (ON/OFF) layer.
ficPageRatio FIC transition range ratio threshold.
ficPageInThrottle Maximum number of FIC paging
tasks to schedule.
ficMaxLevel (1..15) Maximum FIC map paging
level.
[\DEBUG] Refer to the description below for
information on this qualifier.

2.4.53.1 FICLAYER \DEBUG

The \DEBUG qualifier sets parameters for 3D WholeEarth CT debug.

Format: FICLAYER \DEBUG [LISTFICMAPTABLE=listFICMapTable]

Syntax
listFICMapTable Lists the FIC to SMC mapping table.
Description:

2.4.54 FILE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The FILE command displays or modifies the file names contained in the
file table.

Format: FILE [INDEX=index] [NAME=name] [LIST=list]

Syntax
index (0..31) The index for the file table.
Description:
name The new filename that is to be
entered into the file table.
list List all filename values.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-117

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.55 FIXED
The FIXED command has one qualifier.

2.4.55.1 FIXED \VF

The \VF qualifier displays or modifies the selects for vector fixed
selectable features.

Format: FIXED \VF [ENTRY=entry] [SELECT=select] [RESET=reset]

[LIST=list]

Syntax
entry The fixed selectable feature number.
Description:
select (0..255) The select number for the
specified fixed selectable feature.
reset (0..255) Changes all features to the
specified select.
list Lists the selects of 160 features on
the CLI terminal starting with the
specified entry.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-118 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.56 FJCD
The FJCD command is the Fast Jet Collision Detection definition.

Format: FJCD [ENABLE=enable] [CMD=cmd] [MM=mm]

[SEGMENT=segment] [BEGX=begx] [BEGY=begy] [BEGZ=begz]
[ENDX=endx] [ENDY=endy] [ENDZ=endz]
[MATERIALMASKINDEX=materialmaskindex]
[MOVINGMODELMASKINDEX=movingmodelmaskindex]
[BYPASSMFE=bypassmfe] [CMDCLEAR=cmdclear]
[SEGCLEAR=segclear] [LIST=list]

[\CONFIG] [\DEBUG] [\FIC]

Syntax enable
Enable or disable all FJCD tests.
Description: (ON/OFF)
cmd (0..255) FJCD Command ID.
mm Chained moving model number..
segment (0..31) Line segment of a FJCD
command.
begx X offset of segment starting point.
begy Y offset of segment starting point.
begz Z offset of segment starting point.
endx X offset of segment ending point.
endy Y offset of segment ending point.
endz Z offset of segment ending point.
materialmaskinde (0..255) Index of material mask.
x

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

movingmodelmas (0..8) Index of moving model mask.
kindex
bypassmfe The command is processed by the RT
(ON/OFF) rather than an MFE
cmdclear Disables a command.
segclear Disables a segment.
list Lists all FJCD testpoints currently
enabled.
[\CONFIG] Refer to the following descriptions
[\DEBUG] for more information about these
[\FIC] qualifiers.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-119

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.56.1 FJCD \CONFIG

The \CONFIG qualifier has configuration settings for all FJCD test points.

Format: FJCD \CONFIG [CLOSEST=closest] [WEATHER=weather]

[MINCLOUDFADE=minCloudFade]
[CLOUDSPHERESCALE=cloudSphereScale] [BOXSCALE=boxScale]
[THEMELFEATURES=themelFeatures]

Syntax closest Returns the closest or the first

Description: (ON/OFF) collision.
weather Enables CDL intersections with
(ON/OFF) clouds and fog.
(0..1) Minimum Cloud Particle fade
minCloudFade
value for intersections.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
cloudSphereScale
the particle sphere test.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
boxScale
the particle box test.
themelFeatures Enable FJCD to intersect themel
(ON/OFF) features.

2.4.56.2 FJCD \DEBUG

The \DEBUG qualifier allows for debugging of collisions by artificially
specifying a model’s velocity.

Format: FJCD \DEBUG [MM=mm] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z]

Syntax
mm The moving model number.
Description:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

x X velocity in feet per second.
y Y velocity in feet per second.
z Z velocity in feet per second.

2.4.56.3 FJCD \FIC

The \FIC qualifier determines whether the material returns FIC.

Format: FJCD \FIC [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax enable
Enables FIC FJCD responses.
Description: (ON/OFF)

2-120 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.57 FOGCOLOR
The FOGCOLOR command sets the color of fog.

Format: FOGCOLOR [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]

[REGION=region] [EMBAND=emband]

[\BASECOLOR]

Syntax
Fog red component.
Description: red
green Fog green component.
blue Fog blue component.
region (0..7) Set the weather region to
which this fogcolor applies.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
[\BASECOLOR] Refer to the following description for
more information about this qualifier.

2.4.57.1 FOGCOLOR \BASECOLOR

The \BASECOLOR qualifier sets the basecolor for global fog.

Format: FOGCOLOR \BASECOLOR [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]

[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
Fog red component.
Description: red
green Fog green component.
blue Fog blue component.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.58 FRAME
The FRAME command is a diagnostic frame capture utility.

Format: FRAME [RECORD=record] [PATH=path] [CNT=cnt]

[CAPTURE=capture] [VP=vp]

Syntax
record Start frame position recording.
Description:
The path to which positions/images
path
are saved.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-121

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(1..1024) The maximum frame

cnt
positions to record.
capture Capture a viewport image.
vp (0..63) The viewport id to capture.

2.4.59 GAIN
The GAIN command allows you to set and view raster gain scalars (not
persisted).

Format: GAIN [POLYQ=polyq] [POLYP=polyp] [LIGHTQ=lightq]

[LIGHTP=lightp]

Syntax
polyq (0..4) poly quality scalar
Description:
polyp (0..4) poly performance scalar
lightq (0..4) light quality scalar
lightp (0..4) light performance scalar

2.4.59.1 GAIN \AUTO

The \AUTO qualifier allows you to set and view raster gain scalars for
auto gain (not persisted).

Format: GAIN \AUTO [POLYQ=polyq] [POLYP=polyp] [VPG=vpg]

[ENABLE=enable] [SCENE=scene] [LIST=list]

Syntax
polyq (0..4) poly quality scalar
Description:
polyp (0..4) poly performance scalar
vpg (0..7) viewport group

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

enable
Enable flag.
(ON/OFF)
(dawn day dusk night) Time of day
scene
scene to which the intensity applies.
list List auto gain scalars.

2-122 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.60 GENERICAIRPORT
The GENERICAIRPORT command allows you to view/set generic airport
parameters.

Format: GENERICAIRPORT [ENABLE=OFF|ON] [INSTANCE=instance]

[RWLENGTH=rwlength] [RWWIDTH=rwwidth]
[RWHEADING=rwheading] [RWNUMBER=rwnumber]
[RWCONTAM=rwcontam] [RWPARALLEL=rwparallel]
[APPLIGHTS=applights] [VLA=vla] [VLAANGLE=vlaangle]
[RIGHTTAXIWAY=righttaxiway] [LEFTTAXIWAY=lefttaxiway]
[MARKINGS=markings] [TERMTYPE=termtype] [TERMPOS=termpos]
[TERMSIDE=termside] [BEACON=beacon] [LATDEGREE=latdegree]
[LATMINUTE=latminute] [LATSECOND=latsecond]
[LONGDEGREE=longdegree] [LONGMINUTE=longminute]
[LONGSECOND=longsecond] [ALTITUDE=altitude] [SLOPE=slope]
[DTGBOARDS=dtgboards] [ARRESTINGGEAR=arrestinggear]
[CARRIERMARKINGS=carriermarkings] [FIXEDTD=fixedtd]
[FIXEDTDDISTANCE=fixedtddistance] [STOPBAR=stopbar]
[WINDSOCK=windsock] [WINDSOCKTYPE=windsocktype]
[CLUTTER=clutter] [AUTOPLACEMENT=autoplacement]
[AUTOUNDERLAY=AUTOUNDERLAY] [AUTOSLOPE=autoslope]
[KEEPLOADED=keepLoaded]
[AUTODECOMMISSION=autodecommission] [FEATURE=feature]

[\CONFIGWINDSOCK]
[\DAFIFMAPPING]
[\PRINT]
[\REFERENCE]
[\UNLOADAUTOGEN]

Syntax enable Turn this generic model on.

Description: (ON/OFF)
instance (0..7) Instance of the generic

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

airport.
rwlength (0..4500) Runway length.
rwwidth (30..60) Runway width: 30, 45, or
60.
rwheading (-360..360) Runway heading
rwnumber (0..37) Runway number
rwcontam (0..3) Runway contaminant.
rwparallel Turn parallel runway on or off.
(ON/OFF)
applights (0..13) Approach lights type.
vla (0..16) Visual landing aids type.
vlaangle (2.4..4) Visual Landing aids angle.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-123

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

righttaxiway
Turn the right taxiway on or off.
(ON/OFF)
lefttaxiway
Turn the left taxiway on or off.
(ON/OFF)
(British international jcab)
markings
touchdown zone style.
termtype (0..2) Terminal building style.
termpos (1..2) Terminal position.
(LEFT RIGHT) Terminal on left or
termside
right.
beacon (civil military) beacon type
latdegree (-90..90) Latitude degrees
latminute (0..60) Latitude minutes
latsecond (0..60) Latitude seconds
longdegree (-180..180) Longitude degrees
longminute (0..60) Longitude minutes
longsecond (0..60) Longitude seconds
altitude Altitude
slope (-1..1) Slope of the runway.
dtgboards Turn distance-to-go boards on or off.
(ON/OFF)
arrestinggear Turn arresting gear on or off.
(ON/OFF)
carriermarkings Turn carrier markings on or off.
(ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fixedtd Turn fixed touchdown on or off.
(ON/OFF)
fixedtddistance Distance (in feet) from the runway
threshold to VLA lights for fixed
touchdown mode. Default is 984.25
feet (300 meters).
stopbar Turns the stopbar on.
(ON/OFF)
windsock Turns the windsock on.
(ON/OFF)
windsocktype The type of windsock to be placed.
clutter Turns the generic clutter on.
(ON/OFF)

2-124 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

autoplacement Turns the autogeneric on.

(ON/OFF)
autounderlay Turns the autounderlay on.
(ON/OFF)
autoslope Turn the sloping of autogeneric
(ON/OFF) airports on.
keeploaded Keeps the ep2generic model loaded
(ON/OFF) in memory.
autodecommission Automatically turn the runway lights
(ON/OFF) of non-reference autogeneric airports
off.
feature (1..32) Type of terrain features
required for the airport underlay.
[\CONFIGWINDSO Refer to the sections below for
CK] details on these qualifiers.
[\DAFIFMAPPING]
[\PRINT]
[\REFERENCE]
[\UNLOADAUTOGE
N]

2.4.60.1 GENERICAIRPORT \CONFIGWINDSOCK

The \CONFIGWINDSOCK qualifier configures the slot associated with
each windsock type.

Format: GENERICAIRPORT \CONFIGWINDSOCK [TYPE=type] [SLOT=slot]

Syntax
type The windsock type.
Description:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The slot in which the windsock is
slot
loaded.

2.4.60.2 GENERICAIRPORT \DAFIFMAPPING

The \DAFIFMAPPING qualifier specifies DAFIF FLIP-code mapping mode.

Format: GENERICAIRPORT \DAFIFMAPPING [MODE=mode]

(0..1) mapping mode to use for

Syntax
mode DAFIF approach light codes (0 =
Description:
legacy)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-125

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.60.3 GENERICAIRPORT \PRINT

The \PRINT qualifier prints out a generic airport configuration for the
specified instance.

Format: GENERICAIRPORT \PRINT [INSTANCE=instance]

Syntax (0..7) Instance of the generic

instance
Description: airport.

2.4.60.4 GENERICAIRPORT \REFERENCE

The \REFERENCE qualifier sets and views the generic reference airport
and runway.

Format: GENERICAIRPORT \REFERENCE [ICAO=icao] [RWY=rwy]

Syntax The icao code for the reference

icao
Description: airport.
The runway identifier of the
rwy
reference runway.

2.4.60.5 GENERICAIRPORT \UNLOADAUTOGEN

The \UNLOADAUTOGEN qualifier unloads all autogeneric airports and
associated data.

2.4.61 GFOG
The GFOG command defines the groundfog layer.

Format: GFOG [ENABLE=OFF|ON] [PATCHY=patchy] [RVR=rvr]

[HEIGHT=height] [REGION=region]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[VOLSCUDMINRVRPERCENT=volScudMinRVRpercent]
[EMBAND=emband]

[\PATCHY_FOG] [\TRANSITION] [\TUNE]

Syntax enable Enable or disable groundfog.

Description: (ON/OFF)
patchy Enable or disable patchy ground fog.
(ON/OFF)
rvr The visibility within the ground fog
height The thickness of the fog.
region (0..7) Specify a weather region for
the cloud layer.

2-126 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

volScudMinRVRper The minimum visibility reached with

cent patchy ground fog with volumetric
scud enabled (as a percentage of
RVR)
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
[\PATCHY_FOG] Refer to the following descriptions
[\TRANSITION] for more information about these
[\TUNE] qualifiers.

2.4.61.1 GFOG \PATCHY_FOG

The \PATCHY_FOG qualifier is the octa level of the patchy ground fog.

Format: GFOG \PATCHY_FOG [PATCHINESS=patchiness]

[VOLSCUDMINRVRPERCENT=volScudMinRVRpercent]
[REGION=region] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax patchiness (1..7) the octa level of the patchy

Description: ground fog (1 - 7).
The minimum visibility reached
volScudMinRVRperce with patchy ground fog with
nt volumetric scud enabled (as a
percentage of RVR).

region (0..7) Specify a weather region for

the cloud layer.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.61.2 GFOG \TRANSITION
The \TRANSITION qualifier defines the ground fog transition zone.

Format: GFOG \TRANSITION [WIDTH=width] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (5..1000) The thickness of the

Description: width transition zone above the ground
fog.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-127

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.61.3 GFOG \TUNE

The \TUNE qualifier allows fine tuning of the ground fog layer. This
command is for development/debug use only.

Format: GFOG \TUNE [MODE=mode] [OPACITYMOD=opacityMod]

[BRIGHTMODTOP=brightModTop]
[BRIGHTPERSISTENCE=brightPersistence]
[BRIGHTTOP=brightTop] [BUMPMODTOP=bumpModTop]
[BRIGHT3DSCALE=bright3dScale]
[HORIZONDEPRESSIONSCALE=horizonDepressionScale]
[AMBIENTINTENSITY=ambientIntensity]
[SPECULARINTENSITY=specularIntensity]
[PROFILEAA=profileAA] [COLORRED=colorRed]
[COLORGREEN=colorGreen] [COLORBLUE=colorBlue] [GLARE=glare]
[MAPSIZE=mapSize] [TEXTUREAA=textureAA]
[SQUASHOUTERLAYER=squashOuterLayer]
[AAALTFADEPERCENT=AAAltFadePercent]
[TXTALTFADEPERCENT=TxtAltFadePercent]
[HAZEALPHA=hazeAlpha] [HAZEMAX=hazeMax]
[HAZESTARTFADERANGE=hazeStartFadeRange]
[HAZEENDFADERANGE=hazeEndFadeRange]
[ATEYEVISSCALAR=atEyeVisScalar] [EMBAND=emband]
[DISABLEFOGILLUMPOLY=disableFogIllumPoly]
[FOGILLUMPOLYINTENSITYSCALE=fogIllumPolyIntensityScale]

Syntax opacityMod Opacity gain.

Description:

brightModTop Brightness gain for the top of the

layer.
The amount of brightness
brightPersistence inherited in the higher frequencies
of the texture.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

brightTop Base brightness for the top of the
layer.
bumpModTop Bump gain for the top of the layer.

bright3dScale The scale factor on the 3D

appearance of the clouds
Scale factor for horizon
horizonDepression depression. (This is an engineering
Scale parameter and will be removed
before final release.)

ambientIntensity (0..10) The ambient reflectance

scale of the cloud layer.

specularIntensity (0..10) The specular reflectance

scale of the cloud layer.

2-128 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Antialiasing value of the fog (in

profileAA
pixels).
colorRed (0..1) The fog’s red color.
colorGreen (0..1) The fog’s green color.
colorBlue (0..1) The fog’s blue color.
glare Exponent applied to sun glare.
mapSize (0..1.32e+006) tmp
Antialiasing value of the cloud
textureAA
texture (in pixels).
(0..1) Squash the outer layers to
squashOuterLayer this percentage of the middle layer
thickness.
(0..1) Place the anti-aliasing
AAAltFadePercent altitude at this percentage of the
way through the transition band.
(0..1) Place the texture altitude at
TxtAltFadePercent this percentage of the way
through the transition band.
(0..1) sets the alpha for the haze
hazeAlpha
calculation textured cloud layer.
hazeMax Sets the cloud layer max haze.
Textured cloud layer haze start
hazeStartFadeRange
fade range.
Textured cloud layer haze end
hazeEndFadeRange
fade range.
(0..1) The scale amount textured
atEyeVisScalar
cloud layer affects in-cloud vis.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

disableFogIllumPoly Enable or disable fog illumination
(ON/OFF) Polygon in the ground fog
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
fogIllumPolyIntensit (0..1) Scale the fog illumination
yScale Polygon intensity.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-129

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.62 GLARE
The GLARE command enables or disables beacon, strobe and lobe glare.
Format: GLARE [BEACON=beacon] [STROBE=strobe]
[MAXVISIBILITY=maxVisibility] [MINRIF=minRIF]
[STROBEPATTERN=strobePattern]
[STROBEINTENSITY=strobeIntensity] [STROBELIGHT=strobeLight]
[STROBELIGHTINTENSITY=strobeLightIntensity]
[STROBELIGHTENABLED=strobeLightEnabled]

[\BEACON] [\ILLUMINATION] [\LOBES] [\PATTERN] [\STROBE]

Syntax beacon Enable or disable the ownship

Description: (ON/OFF) beacon.
strobe Enable or disable the wingtip strobe.
(ON/OFF)

maxVisibility (1..1.32e+006) Maximum visibility

at which glares have an effect.
minRIF (0..0.99) Minimum range
independent fog at which glares
have an effect.
strobePattern (0..255) The index into the flash
pattern table for the strobe.
(DEPRECATED)
strobeIntensity (0..255) unused
strobeLight (0..1024) The global light point
switch to sync with the strobe.
(DEPRECATED)
strobeLightIntensi (0..5) The light point intensity when

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ty the strobe is lit. (DEPRECATED)
strobeLightEnable Enable/disable light point sync with
d strobe (DEPRECATED)
[\BEACON] Refer to the following descriptions
[\ILLUMINATION] for more information about these
[\LOBES] qualifiers.
[\PATTERN]
[\STROBE]

2-130 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.62.1 GLARE \BEACON

The \BEACON qualifier sets up the ownship beacon.
Format: GLARE \BEACON [ONTIME=onTime] [OFFTIME=offTime]
[SCENE=scene] [intensity=INTENSITY] [INTENSITYID=intensityID]
[PATTERNID=patternid]
[LIGHTPOINTSWITCH=lightPointSwitch]
[LIGHTPOINTINTENSITY=lightPointIntensity]
[LIGHTPOINTSYNC=lightPointSync]

Syntax onTime The length of the beacon's lit

Description: state. (ms)
offTime The length of the beacon's unlit
state. (ms)
scene (dawn day dusk night) Time of day
scene for the intensity.
intensity Intensity for the specified time of
day scene.
intensityID (0..7) The intensity index value.
patternID (0..255) Specifies the flash
pattern for the beacon.
lightPointSwitch (0..1024) Global light point switch
to sync with the beacon.
lightPointIntensity (0..5) Light point intensity when
the beacon is lit.
lightPointSync Enables or disables light point
(ON/OFF) sync with beacon.

2.4.62.2 GLARE \ILLUMINATION

The \ILLUMINATION qualifier sets the glare intensities used for

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

illumination sources tied to ownship.

Format: GLARE \ILLUMINATION [SCENE=scene]

[FIRSTLOBEINTENSITY=firstLobeIntensity]
[ADDLOBEINTENSITY=addLobeIntensity]

Syntax scene (dawn day dusk night) Specify the

Description: scene for the intensities.
Intensity to use for the first
firstLobeIntensity illumination source tied to
ownship.
Intensity to use for addition
addLobeIntensity illumination sources tied to
ownship.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-131

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.62.3 GLARE \LOBES

The \LOBES qualifier sets up the intensities used for landing light glare.
Format: GLARE \LOBES [SCENE=scene]
[FIRSTLOBEINTENSITY=firstLobeIntensity]
[ADDLOBEINTENSITY=addLobeIntensity]
[USEALTERNATEGLARE=useAlternateGlare]
[ALTERNATEGLARECURVE=alternateGlareCurve]

Syntax (dawn day dusk night) Specifies

scene
Description: the scene for the intensities.
firstLobeIntensity Intensity to use for the first
landing light.
addLobeIntensity Intensity to use for addition
landing lights.
useAlternateGlare Enable/disable alternate glare
(ON/OFF) behavior.
alternateGlareCurve (0.1..10) curve shaping value.

2.4.62.4 GLARE \PATTERN

The \PATTERN qualifier sets up flash patterns for the beacon and strobe.

Format: GLARE \PATTERN [PATTERNID=patternID] [DELAYTIME=delayTime]

[SOFTFLASH=softFlash]
[SEGMENTID=segmentID] [ONTIME=onTime] [OFFTIME=offTime]
[LIST=list]

Syntax patternID (0..255) Index into the flash

Description: pattern table.
delayTime Milliseconds the pattern is delayed

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(i.e., phase).
softFlash Enable/disable soft flash behavior.
(ON/OFF)
segmentID (0..255) Segment of the given
flash pattern.
onTime Milliseconds the strobe is on.
offTime Milliseconds the strobe is off.
list Prints the pattern table.

2-132 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.62.5 GLARE \STROBE

The \STROBE qualifier sets up the ownship strobe.
Format: GLARE \STROBE [ONTIME=ontime] [OFFTIME=offtime]
[SCENE=scene] [INTENSITY=intensity]
[DELAYDOUBLETIME=delayDoubleTime] [PATTERNID=patternID]
[SEGMENT=segment] [INTENSITYID=intensityID]
[LIGHTPOINTSWITCH=lightPointSwitch]
[LIGHTPOINTINTENSITYSTEP=lightPointIntensityStep]
[LIGHTPOINTSYNC=lightPointSync] [LIST=list]
Syntax ontime The length of the strobe's lit state.
Description: (ms)
offtime The length of the strobe's unlit
state. (ms)
scene (dawn day dusk night) Time of day
scene for the intensity.
intensity Intensity for the specified time of
day scene.
delayDoubleTime Sets the off time between two on
times. (DEPRECATED)
patternID (0..255) The index into the flash
pattern table.
segment The segment of the given flash
pattern. (DEPRECATED)
intensityID (0..7) The intensity index value.
lightPointSwitch (0..1024) Global light point switch
to sync with the strobe.
lightPointIntensitySt (0..5) Light point intensity step
ep when the strobe is lit.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

lightPointSync Enables or disables light point
(ON/OFF) sync with strobe.
list unused

2.4.63 GLEVEL
The GLEVEL command controls the G-level dimming effect.

Format: GLEVEL [enable=enable] [level=level] [EMBAND=emband]

[\TABLE]

Syntax enable Enables or disables the G-level

Description: (ON/OFF) dimming effect.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-133

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

level (0..1) Specifies the current G-Level

(linear interpolation is used for levels
between table entries).
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
[\TABLE] Refer to the following description for
more information about this qualifier.

2.4.63.1 GLEVEL \TABLE

The \TABLE qualifier modifies the G-level dimming table.

Format: GLEVEL \TABLE [INDEX=index] [AMBIENTSCALE=ambientscale]

[COLORSCALE=colorscale] [SCUDSCALE=scudscale] [LIST=list]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
index (0..10) The table index to modify.
Description:
ambientscale (0..1) The ambient scale to load at
the specified index.
colorscale (0..1) The color scale to load at the
specified index.
scudscale (0..1) The scud scale to load at the
specified index.
list Triggers a list of all current G-Level
dimming table entries.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.64 GROUNDFIRE
The GROUNDFIRE command performs GroundFire functions.

Format: GROUNDFIRE [NUM=num] [TYPE=type] [MM=mm]

[XOFFSET=xoffset] [YOFFSET=yoffset] [ZOFFSET=zoffset]
[START=start] [STOP=stop] [CLEAN=clean] [ALL=all]
[VPMASK=vpMask] [HEIGHTSCALE=heightScale]
[LIFESCALE=lifescale]

[\DEFINE]

Syntax
num (0..127) GroundFire identifier.
Description:
type (0..127) GroundFire type identifier,
defined using the GroundFire\define
command.

2-134 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

mm (0..65535) Moving model associated

with the effect.
xoffset X offset from mm origin.
yoffset Y offset from mm origin.
zoffset Z offset from mm origin.
start Starts the groundfire.
stop Stops the groundfire.
clean Makes this groundfire number
available for a different groundfire.
all Applies the action stop or clean to all
groundfires.
vpMask Defines which viewports render this
groundfire.
heightscale Scalar applied to ground fire particle
height.
lifescale Scalar specifying alternate particle
size scaling, ignoring the particle
system start and end scale
parameters. Particles scale from
their emitted size to the emitted size
multiplied by the lifetime scalar over
their lifetime (e.g., a lifetime scale of
2.0 results in particles slowly
doubling in size over their lifetime). -
1 disables this alternate scaling.
[\DEFINE] Refer to the following description for
more information about this qualifier.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-135

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.64.1 GROUNDFIRE \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines or modifies a GROUNDFIRE effect.

Format: GROUNDFIRE \DEFINE [TYPE=type] [DEFNAME=defName]

[UPDATE=update]

Syntax
type (0..127) GroundFire type identifier.
Description:
defName The particle effect definition to use
as a template for the GroundFire
effect.
update Forces an update of the groundfire
definition.

2.4.65 GUNFIREGLEAM
The GUNFIREGLEAM command is gun fire gleam effect control.

Format: GUNFIREGLEAM [TRIGGER=trigger] [VISIBILITY=visibility]

[SIZE=size] [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]
[INTENSITY=intensity] [RAMPIN=rampin] [HOLD=hold]
[RAMPOUT=rampOut] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (single start stop) set gunfiregleam

trigger
Description: state single, start, stop.
visibility (0..1.32e+006) Visibility in feet of
max gleam effect.
size (0..65000) Size in feet of gleam
effect radius.
red (0..1) Red color value of gleam
effect.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

green (0..1) Green color value of gleam
effect.
blue (0..1) Blue color value of gleam
effect.
intensity (0..5) Scales the gleam color to
change total effect intensity.
rampin Number of frames used to ramp in
gleam effect.
hold Number of frames used to hold
gleam effect max value (ms).
rampOut Number of frames used to ramp out
gleam effect.

2-136 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)

emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.66 HAT
The HAT command displays, defines, or deletes height-above-terrain
(HAT) testpoints, and enables or disables HAT. The height above terrain
is the vertical distance from the testpoint to the terrain below.
Format: HAT [ENABLE=ON|OFF] [TP=tp] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [MM=mm]
[PRIORITY=priority] [MATERIALMASKINDEX=materialmaskindex]
[MOVINGMODELMASKINDEX=movingmodelmaskindex]
[ROTATE=ON|OFF] [BYPASSMFE=bypassmfe] [CLEAR=clear]
[LIST=list]

[\CONFIG] [\FIC] [\FORCEBYPASS] [\MONITOR]

Syntax enable
Enable or disable all HAT tests.
Description: (ON/OFF)
tp The testpoint id (0..255).
x X offset.
y Y offset.
z Z offset.
mm Relative moving model or submodel
number.
priority (0..1) Priority of the test point.
materialmaskinde (0..255) Index of material mask
x
movingmodelmas (0..8) Index of moving model mask.
kindex

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

rotate When enabled, the x,y,z offset is
(ON/OFF) model relative, i.e., rotated with the
mm.
bypassmfe The testpoint is processed by the RT
(ON/OFF) rather than an MFE
clear Disables a testpoint.
list List all HAT testpoints currently
enabled.
[\CONFIG] Refer to the following descriptions
[\FIC] for more information about these
[\FORCEBYPASS] qualifiers.
[\MONITOR]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-137

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.66.1 HAT \CONFIG

The \CONFIG qualifier configures runtime parameters for HAT.

Format: HAT \CONFIG [PROACTIVE=proactive]

[LOWPRIORITYFIELDRATE=lowPriorityFieldRate]
[RETURNONLYVALID=returnOnlyValid]
[VALIDHOTMIN=validHOTMin] [VALIDHOTMAX=validHOTMax]
[EXTENDZ=extendZ] [CIGIEXTENDZ=cigiExtendZ]
[IGNORECHAINEDCHILDREN=ignoreChainedChildren]
[WEATHER=weather] [MINCLOUDFADE=minCloudFade]
[CLOUDSPHERESCALE=cloudSphereScale] [BOXSCALE=boxScale]
[THEMELFEATURES=themelFeatures]
[HATSEASONHOLD=hatSeasonHold]
[HATSEASONWAIT=hatSeasonWait]

Syntax proactive
Enables proactive HAT responses
Description: (OFF\ON)
(2..10000) Low priority testpoints
lowPriorityFieldRate
are processed every n fields.
returnOnlyValid
Only return strictly valid testpoints.
(OFF\ON)
validHOTMin Minimum valid height-of-terrain in ft.
validHOTMax Maximum valid height-of-terrain in ft
Specifies the height in feet a HAT
extendZ test should be extended above the
test point.
Specifies the height in feet a CIGI
HAT test should be extended above
cigiExtendZ
the test point, if enabled in the test
point.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ignoreChainedChil
Ignores chained children in HAT
dren
tests.
(OFF\ON)
weather Enables HAT intersections with
(OFF\ON) clouds and fog.
(0..1) Minimum Cloud Particle fade
minCloudFade
value for intersections.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
cloudSphereScale
the particle sphere test.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
boxScale
the particle box test.
themelFeatures Enable HAT to intersect themel
(ON/OFF) features.

hatSeasonHold Holds HAT values during a season

2-138 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

(OFF\ON) change. The default is OFF.

Maximum time to wait for valid HAT
during a season change. Time in
hatSeasonWait
frames – e.g. 120 seconds = 120*60
= 7200. The default is 7200.

2.4.66.2 HAT \FIC

The \FIC qualifier determines whether the material returns the FIC or
SMC when over terrain.

Format: HAT \FIC [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax enable
Enables FIC HAT responses.
Description: (OFF\ON)

2.4.66.3 HAT \FORCEBYPASS

The \FORCEBYPASS qualifier forces CIGI 3.0 HAT requests to bypass
MFE for a given testpoint.
NOTE: The HAT \forceBypass CLI Command will be ultimately deprecated,
because CIGI 3.0 users can simply enable bypassMFE per testpoint
using the HAT CLI command and that setting will persist when CIGI
3.0 HAT Requests are received.

Format: HAT \FORCEBYPASS [TP=tp] [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax
tp (0..255) Testpoint ID.
Description:
enable
Enable or disable bypassMFE.
(OFF\ON)

2.4.66.4 HAT \MONITOR

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \MONITOR qualifier monitors a single HAT test point stats.

Format: HAT \MONITOR [TP=tp]

Syntax
tp (0..255) Test point ID.
Description:

2.4.67 HAZE
The HAZE command controls the haze influence on general visibility.

Format: HAZE [ENABLE=enable] [TOP=top] [CEILINGVIS=ceilingVis]

[AGLMODE=AGLmode] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax enable
This parameter is not used.
Description: (OFF\ON)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-139

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

top (1..65536) Set the height of the

haze.
ceilingVis (0..1.32e+006) This parameter is
not used.
AGLmode Enable/disable AGL - Above Ground
(OFF\ON) Level mode of specifying haze top,
otherwise it is in MSL - Mean Sea
Level mode.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.68 HD
The HD command controls the Hit-Detection testpoint definition.

Format: HD [TP=tp] [MM=mm] [POINT=point] [MODE=mode]

[TIMETAG=timetag] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [LATDEGREE=latdegree]
[LATMINUTE=latminute] [LATSECOND=latsecond]
[LONGDEGREE=longdegree] [LONGMINUTE=longminute]
[LONGSECOND=longsecond] [ALTITUDE=altitude]
[PROCESS=process] [MATERIALMASKINDEX=materialmaskindex]
[MOVINGMODELMASKINDEX=movingmodelmaskindex]
[BYPASSMFE=bypassmfe] [CLEAR=clear] [LIST=list]

Syntax
tp (0..31) Testpoint ID.
Description:
Relative moving model or submodel
mm
number.
point (0..31) Point in path being defined.
(immediate real-time) Processing
mode

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

mode for the testpoint.
Time in milliseconds for the specified
timetag
point in the path.
x X offset.
y Y offset.
z Z offset.
(-90..90) Absolute point latitude
latdegree
degrees.
(0..60) Absolute point latitude
latminute
minutes.
(0..60) Absolute point latitude
latsecond
seconds.
(-180..180) Absolute point longitude
longdegree
degrees.

2-140 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

(0..60) Absolute point longitude

longminute
minutes.
(0..60) Absolute point longitude
longsecond
seconds.
altitude Absolute point altitude.
(2..32) Perform the test with the
process
given number of points.
materialmaskinde
(0..255) Index of material mask.
x
movingmodelmas (0..8) Index of moving model mask.
kindex
bypassmfe The testpoint is processed by the RT
(ON/OFF) rather than an MFE.
clear Disables a testpoint.
List all HD testpoints currently
list
defined.

2.4.68.1 HD \CONFIG
The \CONFIG qualifier controls configuration settings for all HD test
points.

Format: HD \CONFIG [WEATHER=weather] [MINCLOUDFADE=minCloudFade]

[CLOUDSPHERESCALE=cloudSphereScale] [BOXSCALE=boxScale]
[THEMELFEATURES=themelFeatures]

Syntax weather Enables CDL intersections with clouds

Description: (OFF/ON) and fog.
(0..1) Minimum Cloud Particle fade
minCloudFade
value for intersections.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
cloudSphereScale
the particle sphere test.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
boxScale
the particle box test.
themelFeatures Enable HD to intersect themel
(OFF/ON) features.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-141

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.69 HELP
The HELP command displays parameters for each of the CLI commands.
Format: HELP [CMD=cmd] [LIST=list] [DEPRECATED=deprecated]

Syntax cmd The command to be expanded by the

Description: help utility. If a user does not supply
a parameter, the RTS displays a list
of all available commands.
list List description of all commands.
deprecated Show help regarding deprecated
commands.

2.4.70 HORIZON
The HORIZON command sets horizon glow parameters.

Format: HORIZON [ENABLE=enable] [HORB=horB] [HEADING=heading]

[WIDTH=width] [DEPRESS=depress]
[TRACKWITHSUN=trackWithSun] [EMBAND=emband]

[\COLOR] [\NVG] [\STEP_VALUES]

Syntax (off on) Enable or disable horizon

enable
Description: glow.
horB (0..5) Set the horizon intensity step.
heading (-360..360) Set the horizon heading.
(1..360) Set the width of the horizon
width
glow in degrees.
depress Set the horizon depression factor.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

trackWithSun Overrides the TOD autocalculate for
(ON/OFF) horizon position.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
[\COLOR]
Refer to the following sections for
[\NVG]
details on these qualifiers.
[\STEP_VALUES]

2.4.70.1 HORIZON \COLOR

The \COLOR qualifier sets the horizon glow color.

Format: HORIZON \COLOR [SCENE=scene] [REDSCALE=redScale]

[GREENSCALE=greenScale] [BLUESCALE=blueScale]

2-142 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Syntax (dawn dusk) The time of day scene

scene
Description: for the specified color.
(0..1) The horizon glow red
redScale
component.
(0..1) The horizon glow green
greenScale
component.
(0..1) The horizon glow blue
blueScale
component.

2.4.70.2 HORIZON \NVG

The \NVG qualifier sets horizon glow parameters for NVG specific
adjustments.
NOTE: Since this feature enhances the scene for horizon glow in NVG, if
horizon glow is not enabled, by using the HORIZON CLI command, this
feature does not apply.

Format: HORIZON \NVG [ENABLE=enable] [SCALE=scale]

[MAXPHASE=maxPhase] [MINPHASE=minPhase]

Syntax enable Enable or disable NVG specific

Description: (OFF\ON) horizon glow controls.
Any float value and is used as a
scale multiplier for the atmospheric
color/intensity.
The point in the atmospheric phase
maxPhase function value that the scale is fully
applied.
The point in the atmospheric phase
function value at which no scaling
will occur. If minPhase is set to any

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

minPhase
value other than zero, the behavior
of the scale will have an abrupt edge
within the scene.

2.4.70.3 HORIZON \STEP_VALUES

The \STEP_VALUES qualifier sets horizon glow step intensities.

Format: HORIZON \STEP_VALUES [STEP=step] [SCALAR=scalar] [LIST=list]

[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
step (0..5) The horizon glow step.
Description:
The intensity scalar for the specified
scalar
step.
Lists all the horizon steps and
list
intensities.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-143

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)

emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.71 HOSTOP
The HOSTOP command has twenty qualifiers described below.

2.4.71.1 HOSTOP \CIGI202ESIGWRAPPER

The \CIGI202ESIGWRAPPER qualifier is configuration control to change
the standard CIGI 202 wrapped ESIG opcode big endian data.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGI202ESIGWRAPPER [LRFENDIAN=lrfEndian]

[GAINLEVELENDIAN=gainLevelEndian]
[TARGETTRACKERENDIAN=targetTrackerEndian]
[THERMALCUERENDIAN=thermalCuerEndian]

Syntax Enables the 0x3082 ESIG data to

lrfEndian
Description: conform to the little endian flag in
(ON/OFF)
CIGI.
Enables the 0x3203 ESIG data to
gainLevelEndian
conform to the little endian flag in
(ON/OFF)
CIGI.
targetTrackerEndia Enables the 0x3206 ESIG data to
n conform to the little endian flag in
(ON/OFF) CIGI.
Enables the 0x3207 ESIG data to
thermalCuerEndian
conform to the little endian flag in
(ON/OFF)
CIGI.

2.4.71.2 HOSTOP \CIGICELESTIALSPHERECTRL

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \CIGICELESTIALSPHERECTRL qualifier is the configuration to control
handling of the CIGI Celestial Sphere Control opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGICELESTIALSPHERECTRL

[STARSOVERDRIVE=starsOverdrive]

Syntax starsOverdrive Replicates the over-driven CIGI star

Description: (ON/OFF) intensity value from EP.

2.4.71.3 HOSTOP \CIGIENTITYANIMATIONCTRL

The \CIGIENTITYANIMATIONCTRL qualifier is the configuration to control
handling of the CIGI Entity Animation control opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIENTITYANIMATIONCTRL

[SCALAREPCOMPATIBLE=scalarEPCompatible]

2-144 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Syntax enable/disable - When enabled, the

Description: scalar will be multiplied with the
scalarEPCompatible
animation sequence duration; when
(ON/OFF)
disabled, the scalar will divide the
duration.

2.4.71.4 HOSTOP \CIGIENTITYPLUMECTRL

The \CIGIENTITYPLUMECTRL qualifier is the configuration to control
handling of the CIGI Entity Plume Control opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIENTITYPLUMECTRL

[PLUMEVELOCITYDIVISOR=plumeVelocityDivisor]
[PLUMETRANSITIONDIVISOR=plumeTransitionDivisor]

Syntax plumeVelocityDiviso (1..1000) Scale the plumes’ initial

Description: r velocities down by this factor
plumeTransitionDivi (1..1000) Scale the plumes'
sor transition time down by this factor

2.4.71.5 HOSTOP \CIGIGLARECTRL

The \CIGIGLARECTRL qualifier is the configuration to control handling of
the CIGI Glare control opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIGLARECTRL

[intensityEPCompatible=intensityEPCompatible]

Syntax intensityEPCompatib
Replicates the beacon and strobe
Description: le
glare intensity value from EP1
(ON/OFF)

2.4.71.6 HOSTOP \CIGIHATREQUESTCTRL

The \CIGIHATREQUESTCTRL qualifier is the configuration to handle the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

default flags for the HAT\HOT Request and Segment Request.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIHATREQUESTCTRL

[ENABLEROTATETP=enableRotateTP] [ROTATETP=rotateTP]
[ENABLEBYPASSMFE=enableBypassMFE] [BYPASSMFE=bypassMFE]
[ENABLEOFFSETOVERRIDE=enableOffsetOverride]

Syntax enableRotateTP Enables the override of the Rotate TP

Description: (ON/OFF) flag.
rotateTP
Setting for the Rotate TP flag.
(ON/OFF)
enableBypassMFE Enables the override of the Bypass
(ON/OFF) MFE flag.
bypassMFE
Setting for the Bypass MFE flag.
(ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-145

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

enableOffsetOverrid
Setting for using the CIGI HAT
e
extend.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.71.7 HOSTOP \CIGIILLUMSOURCE0DEFAULT

The \CIGIILLUMSOURCE0DEFAULT qualifier is the configuration to
control handling of the non-specified illumination parameters for the
illumination source being controlled in the CIGI ILLUMINATION 1
opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIILLUMSOURCE0DEFAULT [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax When enabled, illum source 0 is used

Description: enable for default values; when disabled the
(ON/OFF) illum source in the opcode is used for
default values.

2.4.71.8 HOSTOP \CIGILOSREQUESTCTRL

The \CIGILOSREQUESTCTRL qualifier is the configuration to handle the
default flags for the LOS Vector Request and Segment Request.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGILOSREQUESTCTRL

[ENABLEFINDCLOSESTIF=enableFindClosestIF]
[FINDCLOSESTIF=findClosestIF]
[ENABLEBYPASSMFE=enableBypassMFE] [BYPASSMFE=bypassMFE]

Syntax enableFindClosestIF Enables the override of the Find

Description: (ON/OFF) Closest IF flag.
findClosestIF
Setting for the Find Closest IF flag.
(ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

enableBypassMFE Enables the override of the Bypass
(ON/OFF) MFE flag.
bypassMFE
Setting for the Bypass MFE flag.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.71.9 HOSTOP \CIGILFRESPONSECTRL

The \CIGILFRESPONSECTRL is the configuration to handle the response
behavior of LFR request opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGILFRESPONSECTRL [ALWAYSREPLY=alwaysReply]

Syntax Ignores the viewport enable request

alwaysReply
Description: and always respond even if viewport
(ON/OFF)
is not defined.

2-146 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.71.10 HOSTOP \CIGIMFECTRL

The \CIGIMFECTRL qualifier is the configuration to control handling of
the CIGI mission fuction opcodes.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIMFECTRL

[MINTESTPOINTRANGEEPCOMPATIBLE=minTestPointRangeEPCompa
tible]
[MAXTESTPOINTRANGEEPCOMPATIBLE=maxTestPointRangeEPComp
atible

Syntax minTestPointRangeE Replicate the limited number of test

Description: PCompatible points from EP1 (minimum value).
maxTestPointRange Replicate the limited number of test
EPCompatible points from EP1 (maximum value).

2.4.71.11 HOSTOP \CIGIREGWINDCTRL

The \CIGIREGWINDCTRL qualifier is the configuration to control
handling of the CIGI Regional Wind control opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIREGWINDCTRL

[WINDSPEEDEPCOMPATIBLE=windSpeedEPCompatible]

Syntax windSpeedEPCompa Enable/disable - when enabled, the

Description: tible velocity value is not converted
(ON/OFF) to knots.

2.4.71.12 HOSTOP \CIGIRESETCTRL

The \CIGIRESETCTRL qualifier is the configuration to control handling of
the CIGI reset opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIRESETCTRL

[ENVIRONMENTEPCOMPATIBLE=environmentEPCompatible]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax environmentEPCom Enable/disable – when enabled, the
Description: patible environment layer will not be reset
(ON/OFF) to EP2 defaults.

2.4.71.13 HOSTOP \CIGISTANDARDBYTEORDER

The \CIGISTANDARDBYTEORDER qualifier is the configuration to control
handling of the CIGI byte order unpacking.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGISTANDARDBYTEORDER [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax When enabled unpack CIGI

Description: enable Component Control and Short
(ON/OFF) Component Control according to
CIGI standard.Default is off.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-147

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.71.14 HOSTOP \CIGITERRSURFACECTRL

The \CIGITERRSURFACECTRL qualifier is the configuration to control
handling of the CIGI Terrestrial Surface Conditions Control opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGITERRSURFACECTRL

[CONTAMINANTEPCOMPATIBLE=contaminantEPCompatible]

Syntax contaminantEPComp
Enable/disable – when enabled, use
Description: atible
EP contaminant values (1-9).
(ON/OFF)

2.4.71.15 HOSTOP \CIGITRACERRESETCTRL

The \CIGITRACERRESETCTRL qualifier is the configuration to control
handling handling of the CIGI Tracer compatibility mode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGITRACERRESETCTRL

[CIGITRACERENVIRONMENTEPCOMPATIBLE=cigiTracerEnvironmentE
PCompatible]

Syntax cigiTracerEnvironme
Enables the Tracer CIGI opcode to
Description: ntEPCompatible
run for EP compatibility.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.71.16 HOSTOP \CIGIVIEWDEFINITIONCTRL

The \CIGIVIEWDEFINITIONCTRL qualifier is the configuration to control
handling of the CIGI view definition opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIVIEWDEFINITIONCTRL

[IGNORESELECTEPCOMPATIBLE=ignoreSelectEPCompatible]
[NEARSCALE=nearScale] [FARSCALE=farScale]

Syntax ignoreSelectEPComp Replicate the viewport select invalid

Description: atible range values from EP1.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Scale the incoming near plane
nearScale definition by this amount
(multiplier).
Scale the incoming far plane
farScale definition by this amount
(multiplier).

2-148 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.71.17 HOSTOP \CIGIWEATHERCTRL

The \CIGIWEATHERCTRL qualifier is the configuration to control handling
of the CIGI Weather Control opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \CIGIWEATHERCTRL

[WINDEPCOMPATIBLE=windEPCompatible]
[CLOUDLAYEREPCOMPATIBLE=cloudLayerEPCompatible]

Syntax Enable/disable – when enabled, wind

Description: windEPCompatible speed and velocity is set for Rain
(ON/OFF) layer when severity > 0, and not set
for Sand and Snow layers.
cloudLayerEPCompa Enable/disable - Cloud transition is
tible above cloud bottom and below cloud
(ON/OFF) top.

2.4.71.18 HOSTOP \ESIG303D

The \ESIG303D qualifier is the configuration to control handling of the
ESIG 303D opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \ESIG303D [OP303D_UPSMOOTH=op303D_upsmooth]

[OP303D_DOWNSMOOTH=op303D_downsmooth]
[OP303D_TP_LENGTH=op303D_tp_length]
[OP303D_TP_WIDTH=op303D_tp_width]
[OP303D_TP_MODE=op303D_tp_mode]
[OP303D_MODETRANSRANGE=op303D_modeTransRange]

Syntax
op303D_upsmooth (1..10000) up smooth factor
Description:
op303D_downsmoo
(1..10000) down smooth factor
th

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(1..1000) length of testpoint
op303D_tp_length
pattern
(1..1000) width of testpoint
op303D_tp_width
pattern
(singlePoint multiPoint mixed)
op303D_tp_mode
testpoint pattern specification
op303D_modeTrans (1..100000) range where mixed
Range mode transition occurs

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-149

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.71.19 HOSTOP \ESIG3040

The \ESIG3040 qualifier is the configuration to control handling of the
ESIG 3040 opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \ESIG3040 [OP3040BINDSELECTION=op3040BindSelection]

Syntax op3040BindSelecti
Enable/disable handling of bits 26
Description: on
and 27 in opcode 3040.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.71.20 HOSTOP \ESIGE000

The \ESIGE000 qualifier is the configuration to control handling of the
ESIG Extended opcode.

Format: HOSTOP \ESIGE000

[OPE000REQUESTRESPONSEPRIORITY=opE000RequestResponsePrio
rity]

Syntax opE000RequestRes Enable the request to set the

Description: ponsePriority response priority (currently only for
(ON/OFF) Load Status Response 002F).

2.4.72 IF
The IF command conditionally processes lines until the next endif
(logical AND of parameters).

Format: IF [NAME=name] [VALUE=value] [NAME2=name2]

[VALUE2=value2] [NAME3=name3] [VALUE3=value3]
[NAME4=name4] [VALUE4=value4] [NAME5=name5]
[VALUE5=value5]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax
name Variable name.
Description:
value Variable value.
name2 Variable name.
value2 Variable value.
name3 Variable name.
value3 Variable value.
name4 Variable name.
value4 Variable value.
name5 Variable name.
value5 Variable value.

2-150 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.73 IFANY
The IFANY command will conditionally process lines until the next endif
(logical OR of parameters).

Format: IFANY [NAME=name] [VALUE=value] [NAME2=name2]

[VALUE2=value2] [NAME3=name3] [VALUE3=value3]
[NAME4=name4] [VALUE4=value4] [NAME5=name5]
[VALUE5=value5]

Syntax
name Variable name.
Description:
value Variable value.
name2 Variable name.
value2 Variable value.
name3 Variable name.
value3 Variable value.
name4 Variable name.
value4 Variable value.
name5 Variable name.
value5 Variable value.

2.4.74 IG
The IG command has two qualifiers: \ANIMATION and \CONNECT.

2.4.74.1 IG \ANIMATION
The \ANIMATION qualifier sets IG animation synchronization
parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: \ANIMATION [SYNC=sync] [SMOOTHRESUME=smoothResume]
[PAUSE=pause] [RESUME=resume]

Syntax (none ntp host ig) The

sync
Description: synchronization mode.
smoothResume
Enable/disable smooth resume.
(ON/OFF)
pause Pause animation effects.
resume Resume animation effects.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-151

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.74.2 IG \CONNECT
The \CONNECT qualifier sets IG interconnect parameters.

Format: \CONNECT [TYPE=type] [IP=IP] [NAME=name]

Syntax (master slave) The IG interconnect

type
Description: type.
ip The IP address of the master IG.
name The name of the IG.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-152 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.75 ILLUMINATION
The ILLUMINATION command controls light sources.
Format: ILLUMINATION [SOURCE=source] [ENABLE=enable] [MM=mm]
[HEADING=heading] [PITCH=pitch] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z]
[BEAM=beam] [CURVE=curve] [FEATHER=feather]
[INTENSITY=intensity] [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]
[CHANMASK=chanMask] [EMBANDMASK=emBandMask]
[EMBANDINDEX=emBandIndex] [RANGE=range] [TYPE=type]
[ATMOSILLUM=atmosIllum] [BEAMENABLE=beamEnable]
[BEAMRANGE=beamRange] [GLARESCALE=glareScale] [LIST=list]

Syntax
source (0..11) light source number.
Description:
enable
Enable/disable the light source.
(ON/OFF)
(0..65535) The moving model to
mm
which the light is chained.
heading (-180..180) Heading.
pitch (-90..90) Pitch.
x X offset.
y Y offset.
z Z offset.
beam (0..89) Beam width.
(-1..15) ID of the range attenuation
curve
curve. (DEPRECATED)
feather (0..1) Light roll-off.
intensity (0..4) Light intensity.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

red (0..1) Red color of light
green (0..1) Green color of light
blue (0..1) Blue color of light
chanmask unused
Bit mask indicating which EM bands
emBandMask
display the light
(nvg evs mwir lwir eo visual) The EM
emBandIndex band to which the intensity applies
(default is visual).
range (0..100000) The light range.
type (spot omni) Set omni or spot light.
atmosIllum Enable/disable illuminating the
(ON/OFF) atmosphere.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-153

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

beamEnable Enable/disable rendering of the light

(ON/OFF) beam.
beamRange (0..100000) range of the beam in
(ON/OFF) feet.
(0..1) Scales the amount of ownship
glareScale
glare added from this light.
list List all lobes.

2.4.75.1 ILLUMINATION \SNVG

The \SNVG qualifier controls stimulated NVG properties of a light source.

Format: ILLUMINATION \SNVG [SOURCE=source] [SNVG=snvg]

Syntax
source (0..11) Light source number.
Description:
snvg Enable/disable light source as a
(ON/OFF) stimulated NVG light.

2.4.76 INTENSITY
The INTENSITY command sets the intensity scalar for a global/local
switch.
NOTE: The light and polygon switches are disabled when a light or
polygon number is specified with a negative scalar.

Behavior of this command relative to local light and poly

switches when masks (i.e., llmask or lpmask) are specified is
dependent on the state of the parameter cliEnableDisable (see
Section 2.4.67.4 INTENSITY \MASK_POLICY) as follows:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

cliEnableDisable ON - All switches specified (i.e. "1") in the 32-
bit mask are enabled and set to the specified intensity value. All
switches not specified (i.e. "0") in the 32-bit mask are disabled
but retain their current intensity value.

cliEnableDisable OFF - Only switches specified (i.e. "1") in the

32-bit mask are enabled and set to the specified intensity
value. All switches not specified (i.e. "0") in the 32-bit mask
are unaltered.

Format: INTENSITY [LIGHT=light] [POLY=poly] [LLMASK=llmask] [LN=ln]

[LPMASK=lpmask] [PN=pn] [MM=mm] [STEP=step]
[SCALAR=scalar] [LSRCSCALE=lSrcScale] [RANDOM=random]
[CALLIGRAPHIC=calligraphic] [TOD=tod]
[ADJUSTFORTOD=adjustForTod] [LIST] [BEGINLIGHT=beginLight]
[BEGINPOLY=beginPoly] [END=end]

2-154 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

[\GLOBAL_ENABLE] [\GLOBAL_POINT_LIGHT_SOURCES]
[\GLOBAL_UNLIT_POLYGONS] [\MASK_POLICY] [\STEP_VALUES]

Syntax
(0..1023) global light switch number.
Description: light
poly (0..1023) global poly switch number.
llmask Local light switch mask.
ln (0..31) local light switch number.

lpmask Local poly switch mask.

pn (0..31) Local poly switch number.

mm (0..65535) The moving-model

number for local switches.
step (0..5) Intensity scalar step.
scalar (-7.99..7.99) Intensity scalar applied
to the modeled intensity.
lSrcScale (0..4) light source intensity scale.
random Lightpoint randomization control.
(OFF/ON)
calligraphic Lightpoint calligraphic override - NOT
(OFF/ON) USED
tod (dawn day dusk night) The time of
day scene to which the global switch
applies.
adjustForTod Enable/disable global switch
(OFF/ON) interpolation based on time of day.
LIST Produce a listing of lights or

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

polygons, along with their
intensities.
beginLight (0..1023) Begin list at this global
light switch.
beginPoly (0..1023) Begin list at this global
poly switch.
end (0..1023) End list at this global
switch.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-155

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

[\GLOBAL_ENABLE] Refer to the following descriptions

[\GLOBAL_POINT_LI for more information about these
GHT_SOURCES] parameters.
[\GLOBAL_UNLIT_PO
LYGONS]
[\MASK_POLICY]
[\STEP_VALUES]
[\SUBSWITCH]

2.4.76.1 INTENSITY \GLOBAL_ENABLE

The \GLOBAL_ENABLE qualifier sets the enable/disable state for a global
light/poly switch.
Format: INTENSITY \GLOBAL_ENABLE [LIGHT=light] [POLY=poly]
[ENABLE=enable]

Syntax (0..1023) Global light switch

light
Description: number.
(0..1023) Global poly switch
poly
number.
enable
Global switch enable/disable.
(OFF/ON)

2.4.76.2 INTENSITY \GLOBAL_POINT_LIGHT_SOURCES

The \GLOBAL_POINT_LIGHT_SOURCES qualifier sets the scalar used to
globally adjust the brightness of positional light sources.

Format: INTENSITY \GLOBAL_POINT_LIGHT_SOURCES [SCALE=scale]

Syntax
scale (0..1) global point light source scale
Description:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.76.3 INTENSITY \GLOBAL_UNLIT_POLYGONS
The \GLOBAL_UNLIT_POLYGONS qualifier sets the scalar used to
globally adjust the brightness of unlit primitives.

Format: INTENSITY \GLOBAL_UNLIT_POLYGONS [SCALE=scale]

[SCENE=scene] [CLOUDCOVER=cloudCover] [LIST=list]

Syntax
scale (0..1) global unlit polygon scale
Description:
(dawn day dusk night) The time of
scene day scene to which the polygon scale
applies.
(clear overcast) The state of cloud
cloudCover coverage to which the polygon scale
applies.
list Lists all the global unlit polygon scales.

2-156 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.76.4 INTENSITY \MASK_POLICY

The \MASK_POLICY qualifier sets policy for interpreting 0s in local switch
masks.

Format: INTENSITY \MASK_POLICY [CLIENABLEDISABLE=cliEnableDisable]

[OP3040ENABLEDISABLE=op3040EnableDisable]
[OP3023ENABLEDISABLE=op3023EnableDisable]
[OP302CENABLEDISABLE=op302cEnableDisable]
[USEEXTENDEDSWITCHFLAGINOPCODES=
useExtendedSwitchFlagInOpcodes]
[OP3040PRESERVEPOLYGONINTENSITIES=
op3040PreservePolygonIntensities]

Syntax cliEnableDisable Enable/disable ESIG interpretation of

Description: (OFF/ON) 0s from CLI
op3040EnableDisa
Enable/disable ESIG interpretation of
ble
0s from opcode 3040.
(OFF/ON)
op3023EnableDisa
Enable/disable ESIG interpretation of
ble
0s from opcode 3023.
(OFF/ON)
Enable/disable ESIG interpretation of
op302cEnableDisa
0s from opcode 302c. Note that the
ble
302c opcode is not implemented in
(OFF/ON)
EP2.
useExtendedSwitc
Supports high switch numbers in
hFlagInOpcodes
legacy ESIG opcodes.
(OFF/ON)
op3040PreservePo Prevents opcode 3040 from changing
lygonIntensities polygon intensities set by opcode
(OFF/ON) 3023.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.76.5 INTENSITY \STEP_VALUES
The \STEP_VALUES qualifier sets the intensity scalars associated with a
step number.

Format: INTENSITY \STEP_VALUES [STEP=step]

[LIGHT_SCALAR=light_scalar] [POLY_SCALAR=poly_scalar]
[LIST=list]

Syntax step (0..5) step number

Description:
light_scalar (-1..7.99) light intensity scalar
poly_scalar (-1..7.99) poly intensity scalar
list Lists the step tables.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-157

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.76.6 INTENSITY \SUBSWITCH

The \SUBSWITCH qualifier sets the intensity scalar for a global light
subswitch.

Format: INTENSITY \SUBSWITCH [LIGHT=light] [ID=id] [STEP=step]

[SCALAR=scalar] [TOD=tod] [ADJUSTFORTOD=adjustForTod]
[ENABLE=enable] [ADD=add]

Syntax (0..1023) Global light switch

light
Description: number.
id Sub-switch id.
step (0..5) Intensity scalar step.
scalar (-7.99..7.99) Intensity scalar.
(dawn day dusk night) Time of day
tod scene to which the global switch
applies.
adjustForTod Enable/disable global switch
(OFF/ON) interpolation based on time of day.
enable Enable/disable global sub-switch
(OFF/ON) processing.
add (true false) Add or don't add the
sub-switch id.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-158 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.77 IR
The IR command displays or modifies PostProcessor parameters.

Format: IR [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband] [VIDEO=video]

[ACCOUPLING=accoupling] [AGC=agc] [GAIN=gain] [LEVEL=level]
[GAIN2=gain2] [LEVEL2=level2]
[SECONDARYLEVELNVGENABLE=secondaryLevelNVGEnable]
[FOCUS=focus] [FOCUSH=focusH] [FOCUSV=focusV]
[FOCUSSELECT=focusSelect] [FOCUSFILE=focusFile]
[VARIANCE=variance] [NOISELENGTH=noiselength]
[CORRELATION=correlation] [POLARITY=polarity]
[POLARITYPREGAIN=polarityPreGain]
[POLARITYPOSTTRACK=polarityPostTrack]
[TESTPATTERN=testPattern] [AUTOTRACK=autotrack]
[DESIGNATE=designate] [TRACKERID=trackerID]

[\AGCMODEHOSTTABLE] [\ATMMODEL] [\CALC] [\CONFIGURE]

[\CONSTRAINTS] [\CONTROL] [\CONTZOOM] [\DIURNAL]
[\ENVIRONMENT] [\EOGAIN] [\EPX] [\FILE] [\FOCUS]
[\HISTOGRAM] [\HORIZON] [\INTENSITY] [LFMELODY] [\LIGHTING]
[\LIMITS] [\LP] [\MATERIALCODE] [\NLGAIN] [\NVGTUNING]
[\OFFSET] [\POLYGON] [\POWERLINE] [\PROCESS] [\RENDER]
[\RAINFALL] [\SEASTATE] [\SHADOW] [\STMOD] [\SUPPORT]
[\SYMBOL] [\TEST] [\TEXTURE] [\THERMALCUER] [\TRACK]
[\TRACKPARAMS] [\TUNING] [\VISIBILITY] [\WASH] [\WATER]
Either the
(0..63) viewport for a single viewport
or
Syntax viewport or (lwir, mwir,evs,nvg,eo,dtv) emband
Description: emband for all viewports of the defined
emband (the PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sequence of this option)
(on off symbols bypass) Specifies
video
whether the IRPP video is on or off.
accoupling (off line field) Controls AC coupling.
(on gainLevel off gainOnly fast
agc stretch) Specifies automatic gain
(and level).
(0..64) Specifies the gain value for
gain
the specified IR viewport.
(-32..32) Specifies the level value for
level
the specified IR viewport.
(0..64) Specifies the secondary gain
gain2
value for the specified IR viewport.
(-32..32) Specifies the secondary
level2 level value for the specified IR
viewport.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-159

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

secondaryLevelNV
Disables/enables AC Coupling on
GEnable
secondary gain.
(ON/OFF)
(0..1) Indicate the isotropic focus
focus value to used in the specified
viewport.
(0..1) The horizontal component for
focusH
anisotropic blur.
(0..1) The vertical parameter for
focusV
anisotropic blur.
(0..255) Selects one of 255 pre-
focusSelect
loaded blur kernels.
Causes the IRPP to load the named
focusFile file that contains blur kernels to be
selected using focusSelect.
(0..100) Indicates the sensor pixel
variance
mismatch variance.
(0..3) Specifies the noiselength as
noiselength follows: 0=one pixel 1=two pixels
2=four pixels 3=eight pixels.
(on off) Specifies whether noise
correlation
correlation with gain is on or off.
(white black) The polarity of the
polarity specified viewport, applied after gain
and level but prior to target tracker.
(white black) The polarity of the
polarityPreGain specified viewport, applied prior to
gain and level.
(white black) The polarity of the
polarityPostTrack specified viewport, applied after the
target tracker.
(0..31) Controls the display of built-

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

in (0-5) and customer loaded (16-
31) test patterns. Built-in test
patterns are: no test pattern (0), 8
testPattern vertical gray bars (1), 8 reverse-
order gray bars (2), 10 vertical gray
bars (3), black screen (4), and white
screen (5). Built-in patterns 6-15 are
reserved for future use.
(on off) Enables or disables target
autotrack
tracking.
(on off) Application-specific target
designate
tracker control.
(0..14) Identifies which target
trackerID
tracker will be modified.

2-160 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

[\AGCMODEHOSTT Refer to the following descriptions

ABLE] for more information about these
[\ATMMODEL] qualifiers.
[\CALC]
[\CONFIGURE]
[\CONSTRAINTS]
[\CONTROL]
[\CONTZOOM]
[\DIURNAL]
[\ENVIRONMENT]
[\EOGAIN] [\EPX]
[\FILE] [\FOCUS]
[\HISTOGRAM]
[\HORIZON]
[\INTENSITY]
[LFMELODY]
[\LIGHTING]
[\LIMITS] [\LP]
[\MATERIALCODE]
[\NLGAIN]
[\NVGTUNING]
[\OFFSET]
[\POLYGON]
[\POWERLINE]
[\PROCESS]
[\RENDER]
[\RAINFALL]
[\SEASTATE]
[\SHADOW]
[\STMOD]
[\SUPPORT]
[\SYMBOL] [\TEST]
[\TEXTURE]
[\THERMALCUER]
[\TRACK]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[\TRACKPARAMS]
[\TUNING]
[\VISIBILITY]
[\WASH]
[\WATER]

2.4.77.1 IR \AGCMODEHOSTTABLE
The \AGCMODEHOSTTABLE qualifier is used to modify the lookup table
for AGC modes sent by the host.

Format: IR \AGCMODEHOSTTABLE [MODE0=mode0] [MODE1=mode1]

[MODE2=mode2] [MODE3=mode3] [MODE4=mode4]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-161

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Syntax (on gainLevel off gainOnly fast

Description: stretch) Specifies AGC mode for host
mode0
mode = 0 (off, gainLevel, gainOnly,
fast, or stretch)
mode1 (on gainLevel off gainOnly fast
stretch) Specifies AGC mode for host
mode = 1 (off, gainLevel, gainOnly,
fast, or stretch)
mode2 (on gainLevel off gainOnly fast
stretch) Specifies AGC mode for host
mode = 2 (off, gainLevel, gainOnly,
fast, or stretch)
mode3 (on gainLevel off gainOnly fast
stretch) Specifies AGC mode for host
mode = 3 (off, gainLevel, gainOnly,
fast, or stretch)
mode4 (on gainLevel off gainOnly fast
stretch) Specifies AGC mode for host
mode = 4 (off, gainLevel, gainOnly,
fast, or stretch)

2.4.77.2 IR \ATMMODEL
The \ATMMODEL qualifier specifies the sensor atmosphere model and
aerosol model to be used for all thermal embands.

Format: IR \ATMMODEL [MODEL=model] [AEROSOL=aerosol]

Syntax model (TROPICAL MIDLAT_SUMMER

Description: MIDLAT_WINTER SUBTROP_SUMMER
SUBTROP_WINTER USSTD_1976)
Modtran atm model.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

aerosol (RURAL MARITIME URBAN FOG1
FOG2) Modtran aerosol model.

2.4.77.3 IR \C
The \C qualifier is an alias for IR \CONFIGURE.

2.4.77.4 IR \CALC
The \CALC qualifier sets the radiance calculation algorithm properties
(currently disabled).

Format: IR \CALC [INTEGTYPE=integType] [RESETTIME=resetTime]

[RESETJUMPTIME=resetJumpTime] [REDCALC=redCalc]

Syntax integType (RESET ADVANCE) Radiance

Description: integration type.

2-162 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

resetTime Reset time in integer minutes for the

reset integ type.
resetJumpTime jump in TOD (minutes) required to
use the RESET calculation method if
integrationType is set to ADVANCE.
redCalc (STD IMPROVED) radiance
calculation method (default STD).

2.4.77.5 IR \COMPAT
The \COMPAT qualifier enables/disables previous release compatibility.

Format: IR \COMPAT [EP1_THERMAL=ep1_thermal]

[EP1_VIS_ATM=ep1_vis_atm]
[EP1_SENSOR_ATM=ep1_sensor_atm] [EP1_DENSITY=ep1_density]

Syntax ep1_thermal Enables EP thermal calculation

Description: (ON/OFF) compatibility. (Default is off)
ep1_vis_atm Constant density atmosphere
(ON/OFF) (independent of altitude). (Default is
off.)
ep1_sensor_atm Removes the altitude dependence of
(ON/OFF) the MODTRAN visibility calculation.
(Default is on.)
ep1_density Restores the (incorrect) ep1
(ON/OFF) atmosphere density calculation
(Default is off.)

2.4.77.6 IR \CONFIGURE
The \CONFIGURE qualifier displays or modifies configuration parameters
for postprocessor.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: IR \CONFIGURE [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]
[NOISE=noise] [DECAY=decay] [MDECAY=mDecay]
[XSTART=xStart] [XEND=xEnd] [YSTART=yStart] [YEND=yEnd]
[EXCLUDELOW=excludeLow] [EXCLUDEHIGH=excludeHigh]
[THRESHLOW=threshLow] [THRESHHIGH=threshHigh]
[CENTER=center] [BINS=bins] [LOWERLIMIT=lowerLimit]
[UPPERLIMIT=upperLimit] [LINESPERELEMENT=linesPerElement]
[NOISECORENABLE=noiseCorEnable]
[VIDEOLIMITLOW=videoLimitLow]
[VIDEOLIMITHIGH=videoLimitHigh]
[HISTOGRAMRANGEBOOST=histogramRangeBoost]
[INCLUDELOW=includeLow] [INCLUDEHIGH=includeHigh]
[THRESHOLD=threshold]
[DEGRADEDELEMENTMODE=degradedElementMode]
[SECONDARYCENTER=secondaryCenter]
[SECONDARYBINS=secondaryBins]
[SECONDARYLOWERLIMIT=secondaryLowerLimit]
[SECONDARYUPPERLIMIT=secondaryUpperLimit]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-163

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

[PRIMARYALPHAGAIN=primaryAlphaGain]
[SECONDARYALPHAGAIN=secondaryAlphaGain]
[PRIMARYALPHALEVEL=primaryAlphaLevel]
[SECONDARYALPHALEVEL=secondaryAlphaLevel]
[PRIMARYGAINMINDELTA=primaryGainMinDelta]
[SECONDARYGAINMINDELTA=secondaryGainMinDelta]
[PRIMARYLEVELMINDELTA=primaryLevelMinDelta]
[SECONDARYLEVELMINDELTA=secondaryLevelMinDelta]
[HISTOGRAMMODE=histogramMode]
[HISTOGRAMEXCLUSIONMODE=histogramExclusionMode]
[NOISEBIPOLAR=noiseBipolar] [SECNOISE=secNoise]
[SECNOISECORENABLE=secNoiseCorEnable]
[SECNOISEBIPOLAR=secNoiseBipolar]
[SECNOISELENGTH=secNoiseLength] [WHITENOISE=whiteNoise]
[WHITENOISECORENABLE=whiteNoiseCorEnable]
[WHITEENABLE=whiteEnable] [SUNSATVALUE=sunSatValue]
[SUNSATSTARTANGLE=sunSatStartAngle]
[SUNSATFINISHANGLE=sunSatFinishAngle]
[AGCCOPYTOMANUAL=agcCopyToManual]
[HIPIXTOHISTOGRAM=hiPixToHistogram]
[LOPIXSKIPGAIN=loPixSkipGain]
[DMAFORFASTAGC=dmaForFastAGC]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
viewport or nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
emband viewports of the defined emband (as
described in the PP \Baseline
command).
noise (0..1) Specifies the detector noise
gain for the current IR viewport.
decay (0..1) Specifies the ac coupling
decay rate for the current IR
viewport.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

mDecay (0..1e+008) Specifies the ac
coupling decay rate in mSec for the
current IR viewport.
xStart (0..1) Specifies the starting x
position in relative screen space for
the current IR viewport’s AGC
sampling.
xEnd (0..1) Specifies the ending x position
in relative screen space for the
current IR viewport’s AGC sampling.
yStart (0..1) Specifies the starting y
position in relative screen space for
the current IR viewport’s AGC
sampling.

2-164 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

yEnd (0..1) Specifies the ending y position

in relative screen space for the
current IR viewport’s AGC sampling.
excludeLow (0..1) (Deprecated) Fraction of pixels
to exclude from the histogram, from
black toward white.
excludeHigh (0..1) (Deprecated) Fraction of pixels
to exclude from the histogram, from
white toward black.
threshLow (0..1) Absolute intensity threshold
(prior to gain and level) below which
pixels will not be included in the
histogram.
threshHigh (0..1) Absolute intensity threshold
(prior to gain and level) above which
pixels will not be included in the
histogram.
center (0..1) Specifies the distribution
center for AGC for the current IR
viewport.
bins (0..1) Specifies the number of
intensity bins that will be summed
together to calculate the gain for the
current IR viewport.
lowerLimit (0..1) Specifies the lower limit for
the white and black areas that are
used in the calculation of gain for the
current IR viewport.
upperLimit (0..1) Specifies the upper limit for
the white and black areas that are

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

used in the calculation of gain for the
current IR viewport.
linesPerElement (1..16) Lines per element adjusts the
effect of line-based sensor effects,
such as sensor mismatch and dead
elements.
noiseCorEnable (on off) This is used to turn gain-
correlated noise ON or OFF.
videoLimitLow (0..1) Used to change the minimum
displayed intensity of non-symbology
video.
videoLimitHigh (0..1) Used to change the maximum
displayed intensity of non-symbology
video.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-165

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

histogramRangeB (-1..1) The histogramRangeBoost

oost parameter allows the white-most bin
to be scaled to compensate for
compression.
includeLow (0..1) Fraction of pixels to include in
the histogram, from black toward
white.
includeHigh (0..1) Fraction of pixels to include in
the histogram, from white toward
black.
threshold (0..1) Absolute intensity threshold
(prior to gain and level) below which
pixels will not be included in the
histogram.
degradedElement (0..2) Mode for Dead Elements and
Mode Mismatch. 0=coupled 1=image
2=linear.
secondaryCenter (0..1) Specifies the distribution
center for secondary AGC for the
current IR viewport.
secondaryBins (0..1) Specifies the number of
intensity bins that will be summed
together to calculate the secondary
gain for the current IR viewport.
secondaryLowerLi (0..1) Specifies the lower limit for
mit the white and black areas that are
used in the calculation of secondary
gain for the current IR viewport.
secondaryUpperLi (0..1) Specifies the upper limit for
mit the white and black areas that are

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

used in the calculation of secondary
gain for the current IR viewport.
primaryAlphaGain (0..1) Primary AGC Alpha gain.
secondaryAlphaGa (0..1) Secondary AGC Alpha gain.
in
primaryAlphaLevel (0..1) Primary AGC Alpha Level.
secondaryAlphaLe (0..1) Secondary AGC Alpha Level.
vel
primaryGainMinDe (0..100) Primary gain minimum
lta delta.
secondaryGainMin (0..100) Secondary gain minimum
Delta delta.
primaryLevelMinD (0..100) Primary level minimum
elta delta.

2-166 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

secondaryLevelMi (0..100) Secondary level minimum

nDelta delta.
histogramMode (off box planes) Type of Histogram
clipping.
histogramExclusio (pixels bins) Type of Histogram
nMode exclusion.
noiseBipolar Bipolar noise.
(ON/OFF)
secNoise (0..1) (Future Use) Value for
secondary noise.
secNoiseCorEnable (Future Use) Secondary Noise mode.
(ON/OFF)
secNoiseBipolar (Future Use) Bipolar secondary
(ON/OFF) noise.
secNoiseLength (0..3) (Future Use) Specifies the
noiselength as follows: 0=one pixel
1=two pixels 2=four pixels 3=eight
pixels.
whiteNoise (0..1) Value for white noise.
whiteNoiseCorEna White Noise mode.
ble
(ON/OFF)
whiteEnable White Noise enable.
(ON/OFF)
sunSatValue (0..1) Sun Saturation max level
adjustment.
sunSatStartAngle (0..180) Sun Saturation angle from
sun to start level adjustment.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sunSatFinishAngle (0..180) Sun Saturation angle from
sun to use max level adjustment.
agcCopyToManual Copy the last gain and level values
(ON/OFF) from AGC when disabling AGC.
hiPixToHistogram Pixels above the upper threshold are
(ON/OFF) used in the histogram calculation.
loPixSkipGain Pixels below the lower threshold do
(ON/OFF) not have AC Coupling, Gain, or Level
applied.
dmaForFastAGC Enables or disables the DMA used for
(ON/OFF) Fast AGC.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-167

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.77.7 IR \CONSTRAINTS
The \CONSTRAINTS qualifier establishes gain and level constraints for
both primary and secondary gain and level.
Format: IR \CONSTRAINTS [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]
[GAINPRIMIN=gainPriMin] [GAINPRIMAX=gainPriMax]
[LEVELPRIMIN=levelPriMin] [LEVELPRIMAX=levelPriMax]
[GAINSECMIN=gainSecMin] [GAINSECMAX=gainSecMax]
[LEVELSECMIN=levelSecMin] [LEVELSECMAX=levelSecMax]
[NOISECORMIN=noiseCorMin] [NOISECORMAX=noiseCorMax]
[SECNOISECORMIN=secNoiseCorMin]
[SECNOISECORMAX=secNoiseCorMax]
[WHITENOISECORMIN=whiteNoiseCorMin]
[WHITENOISECORMAX=whiteNoiseCorMax]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a single

Description: viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs, nvg,
viewport or eo,dtv) emband for all viewports of the
emband defined emband. (The PP \Baseline
command describes the proper
operational sequence of this option.)
(0..126) The minimum gain for
gainPriMin
primary gain.
(1..127) The maximum gain for
gainPriMax
primary gain.
(-128..126) The minimum level (or
levelPriMin
offset) for primary level.
(-127..127) The maximum level (or
levelPriMax
offset) for primary level.
(0..126) The minimum gain for
gainSecMin
secondary gain.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(1..127) The maximum gain for
gainSecMax
secondary gain.
(-128..126) The minimum level (or
levelSecMin
offset) for secondary level
(-127..127) The minimum level (or
levelSecMax
offset) for secondary level.
(0..1) Sets the minimum value of
noiseCorMin
gain-correlated noise.
(0..1) Sets the maximum value of
noiseCorMax
gain-correlated noise.
(0..1) (Future Use) Sets the minimum
secNoiseCorMin value of secondary gain-correlated
noise.

2-168 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

(0..1) (Future Use) Sets the maximum

secNoiseCorMax value of secondary gain-correlated
noise.
(0..1) Sets the minimum value of
whiteNoiseCorMin
white gain-correlated noise.
(0..1) Sets the maximum value of
whiteNoiseCorMax
white gain-correlated noise.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-169

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.77.8 IR \CONTROL
The \CONTROL qualifier defines the zoom, dead element, persistence,
and freeze frame.

Format: IR \CONTROL [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[ZOOM=zoom] [DEADELEMENT=deadElement]
[PERSISTENCE=persistence] [FREEZEFRAME=freezeFrame]
[FIXEDPATNOISE=fixedPatNoise]
[VIDEOSWITCHTOME=videoSwitchToMe] [CONFIGSEL=configSel]
[SPATIALFILTER=spatialFilter] [SFTOTRACKER=sfToTracker]
[SPATIALFILTERFILE=spatialFilterFile]
[SECONDARYENABLE=secondaryEnable] [PIPENABLE=pipEnable]
[PIPX=pipX] [PIPY=pipY] [PIPWIDTH=pipWidth]
[PIPHEIGHT=pipHeight]
[DEADELEMENTINTENSITY=DeadElementIntensity]
[FLASHINGELEMENTS=flashingElements]
[FLASHINGELEMENTSDUTY=flashingElementsDuty]
[FLASHINGELEMENTSINTENSITY=flashingElementsIntensity]
[PERSISTENCEMODE=persistenceMode] [VIDEOMODE=videoMode]
[VIDEOBLANKFRAMES=videoBlankFrames]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
(1..8) Specifies the amount of digital
zoom
zoom.
deadElement (0..255) Number of dead elements.
(0..255) Ranges from 0 (no

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

persistence persistence) to 255 (maximum
persistence).
freezeFrame ON to freeze the current video
(ON/OFF) frame, OFF to resume.
(0..1) Adjusts the amount of fixed-
fixedPatNoise pattern noise displayed by the post
processor.
videoSwitchToMe Causes the video switch to switch to
(ON/OFF) this viewport.
(0..255) Causes the IRPP to execute
configSel the configuration reset file specified
by number.
(-1..255) Custom spatial filter kernel
spatialFilter
enable and select.

2-170 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the

sfToTracker
output of the spatial filter from being
(ON/OFF)
sent to the target tracker.
Causes the named file, containing
spatialFilterFile
spatial filter kernels, to be loaded.
secondaryEnable Enables or disables the secondary
(ON/OFF) video input to the Zoom.
pipEnable Enables or disables the video
(ON/OFF) combiner for Picture in Picture (PIP).
(0..2048) Starting X position of the
pipX
PIP.
(0..2048) Starting Y position of the
pipY
PIP.
pipWidth (0..2048) The width of the PIP.
pipHeight (0..2048) The height of the PIP.
DeadElementInten (0.005..1) The intensity of dead
sity elements.
(0..1) The number of flashing
flashingElements
elements.
flashingElementsD (0..1) The flashing element duty
uty cycle.
flashingElementsI
(0..1) Intensity of flashing elements.
ntensity
persistenceMode (normal biased) Persistence mode.
(normal slave) Normal or Slave video
videoMode
mode.
(0..512) Number of frames to blank
videoBlankFrames

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the video.

2.4.77.9 IR \CONTZOOM
The \CONTZOOM qualifier specifies continuous zoom parameters.

Format: IR \CONTZOOM [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[SWENABLE=swenable] [SWZOOM=swzoom]

Syntax Either the

Description: (0..63) viewport for a single viewport
or
viewport or (lwir, mwir,evs,nvg,eo,dtv) emband
emband for all viewports of the defined
emband (the PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-171

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

swenable Enable the software continuous

(ON/OFF) zoom.
(1..16) Specifies the scale factor for
swzoom
the software rendering zoom.

2.4.77.10 IR \DIURNAL
The \DIURNAL qualifier controls the ambient diurnal temperature profile.

Format: IR \DIURNAL [ENABLE=enable] [PEAKTIME=peaktime]

[MINAMBTEMP=minambtemp] [MAXAMBTEMP=maxambtemp]
[FIRSTMINDELTATIME=firstmindeltatime]
[LASTMINDELTATIME=lastmindeltatime] [SLOPE=slope] [TEST=test]

Syntax enable
Enables.
Description: (ON/OFF)
Specifies the time-of-day that the
peaktime
peak temperature occurs (HH:MM).
minambtemp Minimum temperature (C).
maxambtemp Maximum temperature (C).
(-12..0) The number of hours,
relative to IR dawn, that the
firstmindeltatime
minimum ambient temperature will
be held constant (must be <= 0).
(0..12) The number of hours,
relative to IR dawn, that the
lastmindeltatime
minimum ambient temperature will
be held constant (must be >= 0).
Modifies the calculated ambient
temperature decrease after sunset
slope
(deg. C / hour) (more negative ->

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

steeper decrease).
test
Test
(ON/OFF)

2-172 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.77.11 IR \ENVIRONMENT
The \ENVIRONMENT qualifier has sensor environment/tuning
parameters.

Format: IR \ENVIRONMENT [TEMPERATURE=temperature]

[GROUNDTEMP=groundtemp] [WINDSPEED=windspeed]
[HUMIDITY=humidity] [ABSORPTION_SCALAR=absorption_scalar]
[SCATTERING_SCALAR=scattering_scalar]
[FOG_SCALAR=fog_scalar] [SKYFOGSCALAR=skyfogscalar]
[SKYPOLYSCALAR=skypolyscalar] [RAINSOAK=rainsoak] [DAY=day]
[MONTH=month] [YEAR=year] [LATDEGREE=latdegree]
[LATMINUTE=latminute] [LATSECOND=latsecond]
[LONGDEGREE=longdegree] [LONGMINUTE=longminute]
[LONGSECOND=longsecond] [LFOGTRANS=lfogtrans]
[WINDENABLE=windenable] [SOLARATTEN=solaratten]
[MINSOLARIRRAD=minsolarirrad]
[TYPICALUSAGEINDEX=typicalusageindex]
[COLDSKYSCALAR=coldskyscalar] [TIME=time] [LATITUDE=latitude]
[LONGITUDE=longitude] [GUSTDURATION=gustduration]
[MINGUST=mingust]

Syntax
temperature Ambient temperature (Celsius).
Description:
groundtemp Ground temperature (Celsius).
Sensor-only wind speed
windspeed
(meters/sec).
humidity (0..100) Relative humidity (%).
(0..100) Legacy-only atmospheric
absorption_scalar
absorption scalar.
(0..100) Legacy-only atmospheric
scattering_scalar
scattering scalar.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(0..100) Legacy-only (LWIR) fog
fog_scalar
scalar.
(0..1) Legacy-only (LWIR) fog color
skyfogscalar
scalar.
(0..1) Legacy-only (LWIR) sky
skypolyscalar
polygon color scalar.
rainsoak (yes no) Enables rainsoak.
day (1..31) Sensor-only day-of-the month.
month (1..12) Sensor-only month (1 - 12).
year (1970..2038) Sensor-only year.
(-90..90) Sensor-only latitude (int,
latdegree
degrees, + N).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-173

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(0..59) Sensor-only latitude (int,

latminute
minutes).
(0..59.99) Sensor-only latitude
latsecond
(float, seconds).
(-359..359) Sensor-only longitude
longdegree
(int, degrees, + E).
(0..59) Sensor-only longitude (int,
longminute
minutes).
(0..59.99) Sensor-only longitude
longsecond
(float, seconds).
(0..1) Scales cloud/fog layer
lfogtrans
transmittance.
windenable (on off) Enables/disables sensor-only
(ON/OFF) windspeed.
Scales the solar heating term in the
solaratten
sensor thermal calculation.
(0..1) Scale factor applied to a
maximum solar heating value to set
minsolarirrad
the minimum value used in the
sensor thermal calculation.
Use the temperature profile of the
specified usage in place of the
typicalusageindex
ambient temperature for tuning
adjustments (-1 disables).
Scale factor applied to the cold-sky
coldskyscalar reflection term in the thermal
calculation.
time Sensor-only TOD.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(-90..90) Sensor-only latitude (float,
latitude
decimal degrees, + N).
(-359..359) Sensor-only longitude
longitude
(float, decimal degrees, + E).
wind speed gust tolerance (gusts of
gustduration duration < windgustduration sec
ignored).
wind speed changes < mingust
mingust
(knots) ignored).

2-174 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.77.12 IR \EOGAIN
The \EOGAIN qualifier has the NVG/EO band tuning parameters.

Format: IR \EOGAIN [EMBAND=emband] [LPGAIN=lpgain] [LPLEVEL=lplevel]

[MODGAIN=modgain] [MODLEVEL=modlevel] [REFGAIN=refgain]
[REFLEVEL=reflevel] [MOONSCALE=moonscale]
[MOONLEVEL=moonlevel] [FEATLPSCALE=featlpscale]

Syntax (NVG EO) Specifies the emband

emband
Description: affected by the command.
Specifies the lavapool (lightmap)
lpgain
component gain.
Specifies the lavapool (lightmap)
lplevel
component level.
Specifies the modulation component
modgain
gain.
Specifies the modulation component
modlevel
level.
Specifies the reflectance component
refgain
gain.
Specifies the reflectance component
reflevel
level.
Scales the moon lightsource
moonscale
intensity.
Level added to the moon lightsource
moonlevel
intensity
Scale factor applied to the feature
featlpscale
lightpool images at load time

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-175

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.77.13 IR \EPX
The \EPX qualifier controls sensor pm/usage tuning parameters.

Format: IR \EPX [EMBAND=emband] [PMINDEX=pmindex]

[USAGEINDEX=usageindex] [SUPPTYPE=supptype]
[THICKNESS=thickness] [SUPPTEMP=supptemp] [SUPPCC=suppcc]
[EMISS=emiss] [SOLARABS=solarabs]
[THERMALCOND=thermalcond] [BACKGCOLOR=backgcolor]
[AMBREFL=ambrefl] [DELTAT=deltat]
[NEWPRIMARYINDEX=newprimaryindex]
[NEWSECONDARYINDEX=newsecondaryindex]
[DEFAULTINDEX=defaultindex]
[REFLECTION_SCALAR=reflection_scalar] [EOSCALAR=eoscalar]
[DTP=dtp] [INTENSITY=intensity] [SOLARREFL=solarrefl]
[LAGSCALE=lagScale] [CALCTYPE=calcType]

Syntax (NOT_SET NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO)

Description: Specifies the emband for some
emband
pmindex properties; ignored if no
pmindex.
(1..255) Sensor .if file material
pmindex
index.

usageindex (1..4095) Sensor .if file usage index.

(0..7) Support type for usageindex;

FIXED, AMBIENT, GROUND or
(0-fixed, 1-ambient, 2-ground, 3-
supptype
cool, 4-room, 5-warm, 6-hot, 7-
forced hot). It is ignored if no
usageindex is entered.
Sets the thickness (m) for the
thickness specified usageindex; it is ignored if

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

no usageindex is entered.
Sets the support temperature (C) for
the specified usageindex, for
supptemp
supptype fixed; ignored if no
usageindex is entered.
Sets the support conductivity
coefficient (W /(m^2 K)) for the
suppcc
specified usageindex; ignored if no
usageindex is entered.
Emissivity for the specified material
in the specified emband; ignored
emiss
unless both pmindex and emband
are entered.

2-176 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Solar absorption coefficient for the

solarabs specified material; ignored unless
pmindex is entered.
Thermal conductivity (W / (m K)) for
thermalcond the specified material; ignored
unless the pmindex is entered.
For single usageindex polys, scales
the primary polygon intensity and
backgcolor applies the scaled intensity as the
secondary intensity; ignored unless
the pmindex is entered
Scales the reflected ambient
contribution to the radiance for this
ambrefl
pmindex; ignored unless pmindex is
entered.
Adds the specified temperature
(deg C) to the surface temperature
deltat calculated by the real time for this
usage; ignored unless the
usageindex is entered.
(1..1999) If usageindex specifies a
dual material usage,
newprimaryindex newprimaryindex is inserted as the
new primary index for the specified
usage.
(1..1999) If usageindex specifies a
dual material usage,
newsecondaryindex newsecondaryindex is inserted as
the new secondary index for the
specified usage.
(1..255) Sets the global default

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

defaultindex
sensor index.
(0..1) Scales reflected radiance for
reflection_scalar
the specified usageindex.
NVG/EO tuning for the specified
eoscalar
usageindex.
dtp Enables the use of the pre-defined
(ON/OFF) diurnal thermal profile for this usage.
Sets the intensity for the static
intensity usage indices; ignored for non-static
usages.
Scales solar reflectance for the
solarrefl
specified pmindex.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-177

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Scales the time constant for the

lagScale specified usage (larger scale =>
more thermal lag).
(off diffusion notSet) Specifies the
calcType thermal lag sensor calculation type
for this usageIndex.

2.4.77.14 IR \FILE
The \FILE qualifier processes a sensor file.

Format: IR \FILE [LOAD=load] [SAVE=save] [PATH=path] [TYPE=type]

Syntax
load Load a sensor file.
Description:
save Save a sensor file (DTP only).
path The file name (full path).
type (IF ATM DTP) Sensor file type.

2.4.77.15 IR \FOCUS
The \FOCUS qualifier controls primary and secondary blur filters of
various types.

Format: IR \FOCUS [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[FILTER=filter] [MODE=mode] [SELECT=select] [BLUR=blur]
[BLURH=blurH] [BLURV=blurV] [TOTRACKER=toTracker]
[\FILE=file]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
filter (primary secondary software)
Selects either the PRIMARY or
SECONDARY or SOFTWARE blur filter
as the target of this command. The
software filter is only available on
RVP4-based EXG.
mode (off isotropic sharpen anisotropic
kernelselect) Sets the mode of the
selected filter.
select (0..255) When MODE = SELECT,
selects a pre-loaded blur kernel.

2-178 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

blur (0..1) When MODE = ISOTROPIC or

MODE = SHARPEN, adjusts the
amount of blur or sharpening.
blurH (0..1) When MODE = ANISOTROPIC,
controls the amount of blur in the
horizontal dimension.
blurV (0..1) When MODE = ANISOTROPIC,
controls the amount of blur in the
vertical dimension.
toTracker (off on) When ON, routes output of
secondary filter to target tracker.
file Used to specify file containing user-
specified blur kernels to be loaded.

2.4.77.16 IR \GROUND
The \GROUND qualifier sets ground temp profile relative to ambient.

Format: IR \GROUND [DELAY=delay] [SCALE=scale] [OFFSET=offset]

Syntax (-24..24) Hours the ground temp

Description: profile lags behind the ambient temp
delay
profile (delay > 0 => ground lags
ambient).
scale Scale factor applied to the ambient
temp profile to calculate the ground
temp profile.
offset Const (deg C) offset added to the
ambient temp profile to calculate the
ground temp profile; ground = scale
* (ambient + offset).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.77.17 IR \HISTOGRAM
The \HISTOGRAM qualifier specifies histogram plane parameters.

Format: IR \HISTOGRAM [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[PLANE=plane] [ENABLE=enable] [ORIGINX=originX]
[ORIGINY=originY] [NORMALX=normalX] [NORMALY=normalY]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
plane (0..3) Histogram plane to be
modified.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-179

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

enable Enable the histogram clipping plane.

(ON/OFF)
originX (0..1) Specifies the x coordinate of a
point on the clipping plane.
originY (0..1) Specifies the y coordinate of a
point on the clipping plane
normalX (-1..1) The x component of a unit
vector perpendicular to the clipping
plane and pointing into the
collection.
normalY (-1..1) The y component of a unit
vector perpendicular to the clipping
plane and pointing into the collection
region.

2.4.77.18 IR \HORIZON
The \HORIZON qualifier allows control of EO/NVG horizonglow intensity.

Format: IR \HORIZON [EMBAND=emband]

[GLAREELEVATIONLIMIT=glareElevationLimit] [MAXELEV=maxElev]
[MINELEV=minElev]
[MAXINTENSITYHORIZGLOW=maxIntensityHorizGlow]
[MININTENSITYHORIZGLOW=minIntensityHorizGlow]
[MINPHASE=minPhase]

Syntax (NVG EO) Specifies the emband for

emband
Description: following tuning parameters.
glareElevationLimit (-90..90) Elevation angle (deg) at
which the sun glare is disabled.
maxElev The positive sun elevation (deg) at
which the horizon glow intensity

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fades to min intensity.
minElev (-90..0) The negative sun elevation
(deg) from which the horizon glow
intensity increases from min
intensity.
maxIntensityHoriz Maximum horizon glow intensity.
Glow
minIntensityHoriz Minimum horizon glow intensity.
Glow
minPhase (0..1) Scales the horizon glow
intensity 90 deg from the sun.

2-180 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.77.19 IR \INTENSITY
The \INTENSITY qualifier displays or modifies a group’s intensity for
PostProcessor.

Format: IR \INTENSITY [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[GROUP=group] [INTENSITY=intensity]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
group (0..255) Specifies the number of the
symbol intensity group.
intensity (0..255) The intensity value for
symbols assigned to the group.

2.4.77.20 IR \LFMELODY
The \LFMELODY qualifier controls the diurnal behavior of the global fog
brightness scalar.

Format: IR \LFMELODY [MINIMUM=minimum] [MAXIMUM=maximum]

[MONO=mono] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax Sets the minimum value of the

minimum
Description: global fog brightness scalar.
maximum Sets the maximum value of the
global fog brightness scalar.
mono X enables high-res monochrome

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(ON/OFF) conversion.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO) Specifies
the emband for following
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-181

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.77.21 IR \LIGHTING
The \LIGHTING qualifier adjusts the (constant) sun light source
intensity.
Format: IR \LIGHTING [EMBAND=emband] [DIFFUSE=diffuse]
[AMBIENT=ambient]
[OCTAREDUCTIONENABLE=octareductionenable]
[VISREDUCTIONENABLE=visreductionenable]
[OCTAEXPONENT=octaexponent] [VISMIN=vismin]
[VISMAX=vismax] [MOONDIFFUSE=moondiffuse]
[MOONAMBIENT=moonambient] [COLDSKYDIFFUSE=coldskydiffuse]
[DAYSKYTUNE=dayskytune] [NIGHTSKYTUNE=nightSkyTune]
[INDEPENDENTAMBIENTENABLE=independentambientenable]
[SOLARATTEN=solaratten] [OVERCASTADJUST=overcastadjust]

Syntax (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO) specifies

Description: emband the emband for following
parameters.
diffuse (0..1) specifies the scale factor for
the sun diffuse component used to
simulate differential heating. 0.0 is
used for no differential heating.
Increase toward 1.0 to increase the
effect.
ambient (0..1) Specifies the scale factor for
the sun ambient component.
octareductionenab ON enables reduction of differential
le heating effect with increasing cloud
(ON|OFF) layer density (octa).
visreductionenable ON enables reduction of differential
(ON|OFF) heating effect with decreasing OTW
visibility.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

octaexponent (0.0-2.0) changes the roll off curve
of cloud density vs. amount of
differential heating reduction. 1.0 is
linear with equal steps from octa=1
to octa=8. (The modified diffuse will
be 0.0 when octareductionenable =
ON and layer 0, 1 or 2 has the
maximum ocat is set.)
vismin Shortest OTW visibility range where
the visibility reduction of diffuse
lighting has maximum reduction
(i.e., modified diffuse will be 0.0).

2-182 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

vismax Longest OTW visibility range where

the visibility reduction of diffuse
lighting starts to take effect.
Visibilities larger than this range
always use the unmodified diffuse
setting.
moondiffuse (0..1) Specifies the scale factor for
the moon diffuse component.
moonambient (0..1) Specifies the scale factor for
the moon ambient component.
coldskydiffuse (0..1) Specifies the scale factor for
the cold sky diffuse component used
to simulate cold sky reflection. 0.0 is
used for no cold sky reflection.
Increase toward 1.0 to increase the
effect.
dayskytune (0..1) Specifies the scale factor for
the diffuse lighting applied to the
sky.
nightskytune (0..1) Specifies the scale factor for
the diffuse lighting applied to the
sky.
independentambie ON enables independent sunlight
ntenable source ambient.
(OFF/ON)
solaratten Scales the solar heating term in the
sensor thermal calculation.
overcastadjust (0..1) Increases the illumination
under a full overcast (octa 8.0)
(default 0.0; no increase) (used

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

primarily to tune NVG moon
illumination under an overcast).

2.4.77.22 IR \LIMITS
The \LIMITS qualifier sets the min and max wavelength limits for the
specified EMBand.

Format: IR \LIMITS [EMBAND=emband] [MINIMUM=minimum]

[MAXIMUM=maximum]

Syntax (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO) specifies

Description: emband the emband for following
parameters.
minimum The minimum wavelength (um) for
the specified band.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-183

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

maximum The maximum wavelength (um) for

the specified band.

2.4.77.23 IR \LP
The \LP qualifier controls the sensor lightpoint tuning parameters.

Format: IR \LP [EMBAND=emband] [TYPE=type] [DAYDELTA=daydelta]

[NIGHTDELTA=nightdelta] [DAWNDELTA=dawndelta]
[DUSKDELTA=duskdelta] [HALOSCALE=haloscale]

Syntax (EVS MWIR LWIR) Specifies the

Description: emband emband for following tuning
parameters.
type (LIGHTPOINT RAIN SNOW) Specifies
the lightpoint type for the following
tuning parameters
daydelta (-1..1) Delta intensity added to the
typical usage intensity to produce
the specified lightpoint type intensity
in day scenes.
nightdelta (-1..1) Delta intensity added to the
typical usage intensity to produce
the specified lightpoint type intensity
in night scenes.
dawndelta (-1..1) Delta intensity added to the
typical usage intensity to produce
the specified lightpoint type intensity
in dawn scenes.
duskdelta (-1..1) Delta intensity added to the
typical usage intensity to produce
the specified lightpoint type intensity

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

in dusk scenes.
haloscale (0..1) Const scale applied to all .flt
model lightpoint halos.

2.4.77.24 IR \MATERIALCODE
The \MATERIALCODE qualifier sets the beginning and ending material
usage index to be printed. Output values includes surface temperatures,
exitance values, and radiance values for the specified range of usages.

Format: IR \MATERIALCODE [START=start] [END=end]

Syntax
start (1..1999) The first usageindex.
Description:
end (1..1999) The last usageindex.

2-184 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.77.25 IR \NLGAIN
The \NLGAIN qualifier sets parameters for the RT sensor nonlinear gain
algorithm.

Format: IR \NLGAIN [EMBAND=emband] [ENABLE=enable] [INDEX=index]

[TEMPERATURE=temperature] [GAIN=gain]

Syntax (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO) Specifies

Description: emband the emband for the nonlinear gain
parameters.
(on off clear delete) Enables/disables
the use of the nonlinear gain table,
clears the nonlinear gain table, or
enable
deletes the table entry for the index
specified, all for the specified
emband.
(0..7) Sets index of table entry to be
index
deleted when enable is set to delete.
Specifies the temperature (deg. C) for
temperature
a temperature/gain table entry.
Specifies the gain to be applied to the
gain RT calculated radiance for a
temperature/gain table entry.

2.4.77.26 IR \NVGTUNING
The \NVGTUNING qualifier controls the EO/NVG sky tuning parameters.
Format: IR \NVGTUNING [EMBAND=emband] [FOG=fog] [SKYFOG=skyfog]
[SKYPOLY=skypoly] [SKYPOLYMANUAL=skyPolyManual]
[AUTOSKY=autosky] [DAYSCALE=dayscale]
[NIGHTSCALE=nightscale] [DAWNDELTIME=dawndeltime]
[DUSKDELTIME=duskdeltime] [POLYDAYSCALE=polydayscale]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[POLYNIGHTSCALE=polynightscale] [SKYMIN=skymin]
[FOGMIN=fogmin] [ESIGDAYPOLYSCALE=esigdaypolyscale]
[ESIGNIGHTPOLYSCALE=esignightpolyscale]
[LAYERDAYSCALE=layerdayscale]
[LAYERNIGHTSCALE=layernightscale]
[DAWNTRANSTIME=dawntranstime]
[DUSKTRANSTIME=dusktranstime]
[DAWNTRANSANGLE=dawntransangle]
[DAYTRANSANGLE=daytransangle]
[DUSKTRANSANGLE=dusktransangle]
[NIGHTTRANSANGLE=nighttransangle] [ESIGPDAY=esigpday]
[ESIGPNIGHT=esigpnight] [EPDAWNDELTIME=epdawndeltime]
[EPDUSKDELTIME=epduskdeltime]
[EPDAWNTRANSTIME=epdawntranstime]
[EPDUSKTRANSTIME=epdusktranstime]
[AMBFRACTION=ambfraction] [MOONPHASETUNE=moonphasetune]
[MOONELEVTUNE=moonelevtune]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-185

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Syntax (NVG EO) Specifies the emband for

emband
Description: following tuning parameters.
Uniformly scales sensor atmospheric
fog visibility for optical emband channels
(NVG, EO).
Uniformly scales sensor fog brightness
skyfog
for optical emband channels (NVG,EO).
Uniformly scales sensor sky polygon
skypoly brightness for optical emband channels
(NVG, EO).
Overrides automatic scaling of sky
skyPolyManual
brightness (-1 to disable).
(off on skypoly) On - enables automatic
control of the skyfog brightness (skyfog
value ignored); Off - enables manual
control of the skyfog brightness (skyfog
autosky
value used); Skypoly - enables
automatic control of the skypoly; and
Esigcloudpoly brightness (skypoly value
ignored)(NVG, EO).
Scale factor applied to the base fog color
in the calculation of the fog brightness
dayscale after sunrise (includes the effect of the
offset set below). Used when autosky
== on for the specified EMBand.
Scale factor applied to the base fog color
in the calculation of the fog brightness
nightscale after sunset (includes the effect of the
offset set below). Used when autosky
== on for the specified EMBand.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The time (hours) added to the sunrise
time calculated by the RT system to
dawndeltime determine when the daydeltemp offset
above is applied. Used when autosky ==
on or autosky == skypoly.
The time (hours) added to the sunset
time calculated by the RT system to
duskdeltime determine when the nightdeltemp offset
above is applied. Used when autosky ==
on or autosky == skypoly.
Scale factor applied to the skyColor used
to calculate the sky polygon brightness
polydayscale
during the day. Used when autosky ==
skypoly for the specified EMBand.

2-186 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Scale factor applied to the skyColor used

to calculate the sky polygon brightness
polynightscale
during the night. Used when autosky ==
skypoly for the specified EMBand.
Scale factor representing the minimum
skymin sky brightness in the absence of
illumination by the sun or the moon.
Scale factor representing the minimum
fogmin fog brightness in the absence of
illumination by the sun or the moon.
Scale factor applied to the base fog color
used to calculate the intensity for
broken clouds, in-cloud speed cues, and
esigdaypolyscale
regional weather polygons during the
day. Used when autosky == skypoly or
autosky == on for the specified EMBand.
Scale factor applied to the base fog color
used to calculate the intensity for
broken clouds, in-cloud speed cues, and
esignightpolysca
regional weather polygons during the
le
night. Used when autosky == skypoly or
autosky == on for the specified
EMBand.
Scale factor applied to the base intensity
used to calculate the cloud layer
layerdayscale brightness during the day. Used when
autosky == skypoly or autosky == on
for the specified EMBand
Scale factor applied to the base intensity
used to calculate the cloud layer
layernightscale brightness during the night. Used when

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

autosky == skypoly or autosky == on
for the specified EMBand.
Specifies the number of hours to
transition from using the nightdeltemp
dawntranstime to the daydeltemp and from the
polynightdeltemp to the
polydaydeltemp.
Specifies the number of hours to
transition from using the daydeltemp to
dusktranstime the nightdeltemp and from the
polydaydeltemp to the
polynightdeltemp.
Specifies the number of elevation
degrees below the horizon to transition
dawntransangle
from using the night intensity to the
dawn intensity.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-187

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Specifies the number of elevation

degrees above the horizon to transition
daytransangle
from using the dawn intensity to the day
intensity.
Specifies the number of elevation
degrees above the horizon to transition
dusktransangle
from using the day intensity to the dusk
intensity.
Specifies the number of elevation
degrees below the horizon to transition
nighttransangle
from using the dusk intensity to the
night intensity.
Day scalar applied to the RT-calculated
cloud/fog-based solar attenuation
esigpday
applied to broken clouds and regional
weather polygons.
Night scalar applied to the RT-calculated
cloud/fog-based solar attenuation
esigpnight
applied to broken clouds and regional
weather polygons.
Time (hours) added to the sunrise time
calculated by the RT system to
epdawndeltime
determine when esigpday is applied.
Used when auto == on.
Time (hours) added to the sunset time
calculated by the RT system to
epduskdeltime
determine when esigpnight is applied.
Used when auto == on.
Specifies the number of hours to
epdawntranstim
transition from using esigpnight to
e
esigpday.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Specifies the number of hours to
epdusktranstime transition from using esigpday to
esigpnight.
(0..1) Percentage of total lighting
intensity to treat as ambient for scene
elements not lit by Phong light sources
(e.g., cloud layers, fog, ground fog,
etc.). Increasing this value causes these
ambfraction scene elements to remain brighter under
heavier cloud cover, but will also reduce
lighting variation with changing moon
elevation. For example, setting
ambfraction to 0.01 causes 1% of the
total lighting to be treated as ambient.

2-188 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Exponent defining power curve used to

scale moon light source intensity for
moonphasetune moon phase. Final scalar is calculated by
raising phase to moonphasetune value.
(default = 0.0).
Growth factor applied to logistic curve
used to scale moon intensity for moon
elevation. (does not affect Phong lit
moonelevtune scene elements). Final scalar calculated
as 1/(1 + e^(-moonelevtune*(elev/90 -
0.5))). -1 disables moon elevation
scaling.

2.4.77.27 IR \OFFSET
The \OFFSET qualifier defines the tracking offset and the desired target
contrast.

Format: IR \OFFSET [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[HORIZONTAL=horizontal] [VERTICAL=vertical]
[CONTRASTTYPE=contrasttype] [MASTER=master]
[TRACKERID=trackerID]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
(-50..50) Horizontal offset, from the
horizontal center of the screen, of the target
tracking position.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(-50..50) Vertical offset, from the
vertical center of the screen, of the target
tracking position.
(white black either auto) Specifies
contrasttype
the desired contrast of the target.
master (off on) Legacy parameter, not used.
(0..15) Identifies which target
trackerID
tracker will be modified.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-189

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.77.28 IR \POLYGON
The \POLYGON qualifier controls polygon-based sensor calculations.

Format: IR \POLYGON [EMBAND=emband] [MINTEMP=mintemp]

[MAXTEMP=maxtemp] [GAIN=gain] [SOLARREFL=solarrefl]
[DUALSIMOFFSET=dualsimoffset] [LAG=lag]
[SWCONTROL=swcontrol] [SWSCALE=swscale]
[SWUSAGE=swusage] [SWINTENSITY=swintensity] [PN=pn]
[ENABLE=enable] [DEBUG=debug] [LINRAD=linRad]

Syntax (evs mwir lwir) Specifies the emband

Description: emband for the mintemp and maxtemp
parameters.
Sets the temperature (C) for zero
mintemp polygon intensity in the specified
emband.
Sets the temperature (C) for 1.0
maxtemp polygon intensity in the specified
emband.
Sets the scale for conversion from
gain
radiance to intensity.
(0..1) (global) Scales the amount in-
solarrefl band solar irradiance that may be
reflected from a surface.
(0..1) Scale factor used to intensity-
match dual-similar usage radiances
dualsimoffset with sensor texture usage radiances.
This parameter affects all dual
similar materials.
lag (ON/OFF/DIFFUSION) Enables

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

thermal lag sensor calculations.
(OFF DUAL STMOD TYPICAL USAGE)
Enables polygon switch scalar
swcontrol modification based on the change in
the average intensity of selected
usage sets.
The fraction of the intensity average
swscale change that is applied to polygon
switches.
If swcontrol is set to usage, the
polygon switch scalar modification is
swusage
based on the intensity change of
swusage.
The base intensity used to calculate
swintensity the modification of polygon switch
scalars.

2-190 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

(0..31) The local poly switch number

pn
to enable/disable.
enable
Enables or disables pn.
(ON/OFF)
debug
ON enables extra printout.
(ON/OFF)
linRad Enables/disables the linear radiance
(ON/OFF) calculation.

2.4.77.29 IR \POWERLINE
The \POWERLINE qualifier scales the modeled powerline radius at load
time.

Format: IR \POWERLINE [SCALE=scale]

Syntax The scale factor applied to the

scale
Description: modeled powerline radius.

2.4.77.30 IR \PROCESS
The \PROCESS qualifier controls the processing of sensor module tasks.

Format: IR \PROCESS [TASK=task] [PROCESS=process]

Syntax
task (UPDATE RENDER) The sensor task.
Description:
(slowtime background noncrit) The
process system process for the designated
task.

2.4.77.31 IR \RAINFALL

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \RAINFALL qualifier controls sensor rain parameters used in the
thermal and atmospheric transmittance calculations.

Format: IR \RAINFALL [LEVEL=level] [AMOUNT=amount]

[THERMALSCALE=thermalscale] [COUPLEDENV=coupledenv]
[LIST=list]

Syntax (0..5) Sets the current real-time

level
Description: rainfall level.
The entered rainfall amount (mm/hr)
amount
is associated with the entered level.
(0..1) Scales the magnitude of the
thermalscale effect rain has on the environment
(contrast reduction).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-191

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(esig on off) When enabled, the

coupledenv sensor rainfall level and the
environment module rainfall level are
coupled.
Lists the current rainfall
list
levels/amounts.

2.4.77.32 IR \RENDER
The \RENDER qualifier sets the method/parameters used to combine
intensity and mod textures in the renderer.

Format: IR \RENDER [EMBAND=emband] [METHOD=method] [LEVEL=level]

Syntax (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO) Specifies

Description: emband the emband for following
parameters.
(STANDARD OVERLAY) Specifies the
method
render method.
(0..1) Specifies the modulation level
level used on the OVERLAY render method
(default 0.5).

2.4.77.33 IR \SEASTATE
The \SEASTATE qualifier modifies seastate mod textures at load time.

Format: IR \SEASTATE [EMBAND=emband] [SCALE=scale] [SHIFT=shift]

[CLAMP=clamp]

Syntax (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO) Specifies

emband
Description: the emband for following parameters
scales the histogram width of the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

scale
modified texture (default 1.0)
(-255..255) shifts the histogram
shift mean of the modified texture
(default 0)
(-1..255) clamps the upper end of
the histogram of the modified
clamp
texture (default 255) (-1 => (clamp
== input texture max)

2-192 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.77.34 IR \SHADOW
The \SHADOW qualifier controls the sensor shadow tuning parameters.

Format: IR \SHADOW [EMBAND=emband] [DAYDELTEMP=daydeltemp]

[NIGHTDELTEMP=nightdeltemp] [DAWNDELTIME=dawndeltime]
[DUSKDELTIME=duskdeltime] [DAWNTRANSTIME=dawntranstime]
[DUSKTRANSTIME=dusktranstime] [USAGE=usage]

Syntax (EVS MWIR LWIR) specifies the

Description: emband emband for following tuning
parameters.
- temperature (C) added to a typical
temperature in the calculation of the
shadow intensity after sunrise
daydeltemp (including the effect of the
dawndeltime set below) (negative
temp => shadow intensity < typical
intensity).
The temperature (C) added to a
typical temperature in the calculation
of the shadow intensity after sunrise
nightdeltemp (including the effect of the
dawndeltime set below) (positive
temp => shadow intensity > typical
intensity).
The time (hours) added to the
sunrise time calculated by the RT
dawndeltime
system to determine when dayscale
is applied.
The time (hours) added to the
sunset time calculated by the RT
duskdeltime

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

system to determine when nightscale
is applied.
Specifies the number of hours to
dawntranstime transition from using the nightscale
to the dayscale.
Specifies the number of hours to
dusktranstime transition from using the dayscale to
the nightscale.
Usage index used to calculate the
usage shadow base radiance (to use the
typical usage set -1).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-193

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.77.35 IR \STMOD
The \STMOD qualifier controls the diurnal behavior of the sensor texture
modulation scalar.

Format: IR \STMOD [EMBAND=emband] [MINIMUM=minimum]

[MAXIMUM=maximum] [DELAY=delay] [AUTO=auto]
[DAYSCALE=dayscale] [NIGHTSCALE=nightscale]
[DAWNDELTIME=dawndeltime] [DUSKDELTIME=duskdeltime]
[RAINSOAKSCALE=rainsoakscale] [ENABLE=enable]
[AUTOMIN=automin] [AUTOATTEN=autoAtten]
[EXCLUSION=exclusion] [USAGE=usage]
[NVG_EO_VALUE=nvg_eo_value]

Syntax (NOT_SET EVS NVG MWIR LWIR EO)

Description: emband Specifies the emband for the
following stmod parameters.
(0..2) Sets the value of the sensor
texture modulation scalar at the
minimum
minimum of the ambient
temperature profile.
(0..2) Sets the value of the sensor
texture modulation scalar at the
maximum
maximum of the ambient
temperature profile.
delay Not yet implemented.
auto Enables automatic control of the
(ON/OFF) sensor texture modulation scalar.
Scale factor applied to the sensor
texture modulation scalar calculated
dayscale by the RT after sunrise (possibly
offset by the dawndeltime

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

parameter).
Scale factor applied to the sensor
texture modulation scalar calculated
nightscale by the RT after sunset (possibly
offset by the duskdeltime
parameter).
Time (hours) added to the sunrise
dawndeltime time calculated by the RT to
determine when dayscale is applied.
Time (hours) added to the sunset
time calculated by the RT to
duskdeltime
determine when nightscale is
applied.
Scales the effect of rainsoak on
rainsoakscale
sensor texture modulation.

2-194 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

enable ON enables normal stmod; OFF sets

(ON/OFF) stmod to zero.
(0.0 – 1.0) Sets the minimum value
automin of stmod sent to the scene
processor.
(0..1) Attenuation for stmod when in
autoAtten
automatic mode (all bands).
(add remove print) Add/remove an
exclusion usage index from the stmod average
calculation exclusion list.
Usage index to add/remove from the
usage
exclusion list.
Directly sets the constant value of
the sensor texture modulation scalar
nvg_eo_value for NVG/EO bands. This is the only
parameter supported for reflectance
channels.

2.4.77.36 IR \SUPPORT
The \SUPPORT qualifier provides legacy global support temperatures.

Format: IR \SUPPORT [COOLTEMP=cooltemp] [ROOMTEMP=roomtemp]

[WARMTEMP=warmtemp] [HOTTEMP=hottemp]
[FHOTTEMP=fhottemp]

Syntax Cool support temperature (Celsius,

cooltemp
Description: default 7.0).
Room support temperature (Celsius,
roomtemp
default 20.0).
Warm support temperature (Celsius,
warmtemp

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

default 45.0).
Room support temperature (Celsius,
hottemp
default 60.0).
Room support temperature (Celsius,
fhottemp
default 500.0).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-195

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.77.37 IR \SYMBOL
The \SYMBOL qualifier displays or controls symbols for the
PostProcessor.

Format: IR \SYMBOL [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[NUMBER=number] [ENABLE=enable] [GROUP=group] [X=x] [Y=y]
[ROLL=roll] [XSCALE=xscale] [YSCALE=yscale] [VALUE=value]
[FILE=file] [STRING=string] [CLIPLEFT=clipLeft]
[CLIPRIGHT=clipRight]
[CLIPTOP=clipTop][CLIPBOTTOM=clipBottom] [OFFSETX=offsetX]
[OFFSETY=offsetY] [DISABLEBLUE=disableBlue]

Syntax Either the

Description: (0..63) viewport for a single viewport
or
viewport or (lwir, mwir,evs,nvg,eo,dtv) emband
emband for all viewports of the defined
emband (the PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option)
(0..255) The number of the symbol
number
being controlled.
(0..255) Selects the version of the
enable
symbol to display.
(0..255) Assigns the symbol being
group
controlled to an intensity group.
(0..1) The horizontal position of the
x
symbol on the screen.
(0..1) The vertical position of the
y
symbol on the screen.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(0..360) The clockwise rotation angle
roll
of the symbol in degrees.
(0..256) The horizontal scale factor
xscale
applied to the symbol.
(0..256) The vertical scale factor
yscale
applied to the symbol.
The value that is displayed on a
value
screen for some symbol types.
Causes the named .SSF file to be
file
loaded.
The string that is displayed on a
string
screen for some symbol types.
(0..1) Left clipping plane for
clipLeft
symbology.

2-196 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

(0..1) Right clipping plane for

clipRight
symbology.
(0..1) Top clipping plane for
clipTop
symbology.
(0..1) Bottom clipping plane for
clipBottom
symbology.
(0..1) Horizontal offset for
offsetX
symbology.
offsetY (0..1) Vertical offset for symbology.
(off on) Disable symbology from
disableBlue
writing to the blue channel.

2.4.77.38 IR \TEST
The \TEST qualifier inputs a test parameter.

Format: IR \TEST [p0=p0] [p1=p1] [p2=p2] [p3=p3] [p4=p4] [p5=p5]

[p6=p6] [p7=p7] [p8=p8] [p9=p9] [p10=p10] [p11=p11]
[p12=p12] [p13=p13] [p14=p14] [p15=p15] [p16=p16] [p17=p17]
[p18=p18] [p19=p19] [p20=p20] [p21=p21] [p22=p22] [p23=p23]

Syntax
p0 non-zero p0 enables IR \CALC.
Description:
non-zero p1 enables EVS, MWIR, and
p1
LWIR embands
p2 non-zero p2 runs update every field
non-zero p3 disables environment
p3
layer correlation
non-zero p4 disables environment
p4
layer time correlation

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

p5 non-zero p5 disables poly IR update
non-zero p6 disables sensor texture
p6
IR update
p7 non-zero p7 disables all outputs
non-zero p8 scales the night sky
p8 outputs (fog, skypoly, cloudlayer
intensity) (scale = 1 - p8)
p9 unused
non-zero p10 disables modification
p10
of the sun light source
p11 non-zero p11 enables verbose mode
non-zero p12 displays unclassified
p12
polygons black

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-197

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

non-zero p13 enables sky poly

p13 intensity table tuning (default sky
poly vertex intensity tuning
p14 unused
non-zero p15 enables handling EP1
p15 sensor texture images in .flt models.
default - disabled
non-zero p16 is the scale factor used
to convert detail images to sensor
p16
(scale < 1 narrows histogram; scale
< 0 disables loading detail maps)
non-zero p17 is the output image
p17 mean used to convert detail images
to sensor (default mid-grey 0.5)
p18 unused
p19 unused
non-zero p20 is the scale factor used
to convert visual images to sensor
p20
(scale < 1 narrows histogram;
default 1.0)
non-zero p21 is the output image
p21 mean used to convert visual images
to sensor (default mid-grey 0.5)
p22 unused
p23 unused

2.4.77.39 IR \TEXTURE
The \TEXTURE qualifier controls of sensor-texture-based sensor

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

calculations.

Format: IR \TEXTURE [EMBAND=emband] [MINTEMP=mintemp]

[MAXTEMP=maxtemp] [GAIN=gain] [STPOLYGAIN=stpolygain]
[CTPOLYGAIN=ctpolygain] [LAG=lag] [LINRAD=linRad]

Syntax (evs mwir lwir) Specifies the

Description: emband emband; required for all parameters
but lag.
Sets the temperature (C) for zero
mintemp
sensor texture intensity.
Sets the temperature (C) for 1.0
maxtemp
sensor texture.
Sets the scale for conversion from
gain
radiance to intensity.

2-198 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Scale factor applied to the intensity

stpolygain
of feature-sensor-textured polygons.
Scale factor applied to the intensity
ctpolygain
of CT-sensor-textured polygons.
lag (ON/OFF/DIFFUSION)Enables
thermal lag sensor calculations.
linRad Enables/disables the linear radiance
(ON/OFF) calculation.

2.4.77.40 IR \THERMALCUER
The \THERMALCUER qualifier is used to control the EXG-based
thermalcuer.

Format: IR \THERMALCUER [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[ENABLE=enable] [AREAOFREGARD=areaOfRegard]
[SENSITIVITY=sensitivity] [TARGETSIZE=targetSize]
[SORTMETHOD=sortMethod] [HOTSPOT=hotSpot]
[SYMBOLS=symbols] [PARAMFILE=paramFile]
[MAXHOTSPOTS=maxHotSpots]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
(off on) Enables or disables thermal
enable
cuer operation.
(0..1) Used to run (1.0) or stop (0.0)
areaOfRegard
the thermal cuer.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sensitivity (0..1) Sensitivity scale factor.
targetSize (0..1) Target size scale factor.
(0..8) Method used to sort thermal
sortMethod
cuer hot spots.
(0..119) Used to dump a thermal
hotSpot cuer hot spot to the CLI console
window.
(off on) Enables or disables debug
symbols symbols showing the location of hot
spot.
Specifies a parameter file to be used
paramFile
by the thermal cuer.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-199

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(0..120) Specifies the maximum

maxHotSpots number of thermal cuer hot spots to
be returned to the host each frame.

2.4.77.41 IR \TRACK
The \TRACK qualifier controls the optional EXG-based target tracker.

Format: IR \TRACK [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[AUTOTRACK=autotrack] [DESIGNATE=designate]
[TRACKTYPE=tracktype] [CONTRASTTYPE=contrasttype]
[FOVDELAY=fovDelay] [HPRDELAY=hprDelay]
[TRACKERID=trackerID] [RELOAD=reload]

Syntax Either the

Description: (0..63) viewport for a single viewport
or
viewport or (lwir, mwir,evs,nvg,eo,dtv) emband
emband for all viewports of the defined
emband (the PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option)
(off on) Enables or disables the
autotrack
target tracker.
(off on) Application-specific target
designate
tracker control with two values.
(0..255) Application-specific target
tracktype
tracker control.
(white black either) Desired contrast
contrasttype
of target.
(1..8) Use to specify the delay, in
fields, between an FOV change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fovDelay command arriving at the EXG and
video with the new FOV being used
in the target tracker
(1..8) Use to specify the delay, in
fields, between a heading, pitch, or
roll change command arriving at the
hprDelay
EXG and video with the new
heading, pitch or roll being used in
the target tracker.
(0..14) Identifies which target
trackerID
tracker will be modified.
Causes the target tracker to reload
reload its parameter file and reinitialize
itself.

2-200 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.77.42 IR \TRACKPARAMS
The \TRACKPARAMS qualifier is used to establish parameters for the
optional EXG-based target tracker.

Format: IR \TRACKPARAMS [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[TYPE=type] [MINTARGETSIZEX=minTargetSizeX]
[MINTARGETSIZEY=minTargetSizeY]
[MAXTARGETSIZEX=maxTargetSizeX]
[MAXTARGETSIZEY=maxTargetSizeY]
[MAXTARGETOFFSETX=maxTargetOffsetX]
[MAXTARGETOFFSETY=maxTargetOffsetY]
[MINTARGETCONTRAST=minTargetContrast]
[TARGETTRACKER=targetTracker] [NUMTRACKERS=numTrackers]
[TRACKERDLL=trackerDll] [TRACKERPARAMS=trackerparams]
[TRACKBOXSYMBOL=trackboxSymbol]
[TRACKBOXSIZEX=trackBoxSizeX]
[TRACKBOXSIZEY=trackBoxSizeY] [LOSSYMBOL=losSymbol]
[AUTORESPOND=autorespond]
[AREATRACKMODE=areaTrackMode]
[AREATRACKINTERSECTMODE=areaTrackIntersectMode]
[AREATRACKPROJECTDIST=areaTrackProjectDist]
[AREATRACKBOXSCALAR=areaTrackBoxScalar]
[AREATRACKSCREENCLIP=AreaTrackScreenClip]
[AREATRACKSCREENOFFSETX=areaTrackScreenOffsetX]
[AREATRACKSCREENOFFSETY=areaTrackScreenOffsetY]
[AREATRACKBOXEXTEND=areaTrackBoxExtend]
[AREATRACKBOXOFFSET=areaTrackBoxOffset]
[GETEXTPARAMS=getextparams] [SETEXTPARAM=setextparam]
[GETTRACKTYPES=gettracktypes]
[GETTRACKERMODES=gettrackermodes]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
(break impending) Specifies whether
type
the parameters that follow apply.
(0..1600) Minimum horizontal size of
minTargetSizeX
a trackable target, in pixels.
(0..1200) Minimum vertical size of a
minTargetSizeY
trackable target, in pixels.
(0..1) Maximum horizontal target
maxTargetSizeX
size, in fraction of FOV.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-201

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(0..1) Maximum vertical target size,

maxTargetSizeY
in fraction of FOV.
(0..1) Maximum horizontal
displacement of the far edge of a
maxTargetOffsetX
tracked target from the desired track
position, in fraction of FOV.
(0..1) Maximum horizontal
displacement of the far edge of a
maxTargetOffsetY
tracked target from the desired track
position, in fraction of FOV.
(0..1) Minimum intensity contrast of
minTargetContrast
the target.
targetTracker Enable/Disable the Target Tracker
(ON/OFF) functionality.
(1..15) Specifies the number of
numTrackers Target Trackers available
(implementation specific).
Specifies the DLL file that defines the
trackerDll
Target Tracker.
Specifies the parameter file that
trackerparams
initializes the Target Tracker.
(0..255) Starting symbol number for
trackboxSymbol
the targeting track box.
(0..2048) Width of the trackbox
trackBoxSizeX
symbol.
(0..2048) Height of the trackbox
trackBoxSizeY
symbol.
(0..255) Symbol number for the LOS
losSymbol
symbol.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

autoRespond Enable/Disable the Target Tracker
(ON/OFF) autoRespond feature.
(UpdateMode UpdateNoModels
noUpdateMode) VXG area track
areaTrackMode
mode - indicates whether to update
target area each frame or not.
(CenterPointPlane LOS) VXG area
areaTrackIntersec
track intersect mode - Method to
tMode
calculate area track corners.
(0..1e+006) VXG area track
areaTrackProjectDist
maximum projection distance.
(0..10) VXG area track box size
areaTrackBoxScalar
scalar.

2-202 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

areaTrackScreenClip Enable/Disable the screen clip for the

(ON/OFF) area tracker.
areaTrackScreenOffs (-2048..2048) X Offset for Screen
etX clip
areaTrackScreenOffs (-2048..2048) Y Offset for Screen
etY clip.
areaTrackBoxExtend (0..500) Extend Area Trackbox size.
(0..100000) VXG area track box
areaTrackBoxOffset
projection offset.
List the tracker's extended
getextparams
parameters.
Send an extended parameter to the
setextparam target tracker DLL - enclose name
and values in double quotes.
List the tracker's trackType
gettracktypes
definitions.
gettrackermodes List the tracker's mode definitions.

2.4.77.43 IR \TUNING
The \TUNING qualifier controls the sensor tuning parameters.

Format: IR \TUNING [EMBAND=emband] [FOG=fog] [SKYFOG=skyfog]

[SKYPOLY=skypoly] [AUTOSKY=autosky]
[DAYDELTEMP=daydeltemp] [NIGHTDELTEMP=nightdeltemp]
[DAWNDELTIME=dawndeltime] [DUSKDELTIME=duskdeltime]
[POLYDAYDELTEMP=polydaydeltemp]
[POLYNIGHTDELTEMP=polynightdeltemp]
[ESIGDAYPOLYDELTEMP=esigdaypolydeltemp]
[ESIGNIGHTPOLYDELTEMP=esignightpolydeltemp]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[LAYERDAYDELTEMP=layerdaydeltemp]
[LAYERNIGHTDELTEMP=layernightdeltemp]
[DAWNTRANSTIME=dawntranstime]
[DUSKTRANSTIME=dusktranstime]
[DAWNTRANSANGLE=dawntransangle]
[DAYTRANSANGLE=daytransangle]
[DUSKTRANSANGLE=dusktransangle]
[NIGHTTRANSANGLE=nighttransangle] [ESIGPDAY=esigpday]
[ESIGPNIGHT=esigpnight] [EPDAWNDELTIME=epdawndeltime]
[EPDUSKDELTIME=epduskdeltime]
[EPDAWNTRANSTIME=epdawntranstime]
[EPDUSKTRANSTIME=epdusktranstime]

Syntax (EVS MWIR LWIR) Specifies the

Description: emband emband for following tuning
parameters.

fog (EVS, MWIR, LWIR) Uniformly scales

sensor atmospheric visibility for

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-203

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

thermal emband channels.

(EVS, MWIR, LWIR) Uniformly scales
skyfog sensor fog brightness for thermal
emband channels.
(EVS, MWIR, LWIR) Uniformly scales
skypoly sensor sky polygon brightness for
thermal emband channels.
(off on skypoly) On enables
automatic control of the skyfog
brightness (skyfog value ignored).
Off enables manual control of the
autosky skyfog brightness (skyfog value
used). Skypoly enables automatic
control of the skypoly and
esigcloudpoly brightness (skypoly
value ignored)(EVS, MWIR, LWIR).
Temperature (C) added to the real-
time ambient temperature (set by
the IR \ENV command or calculated
by the IR \DIURNAL command or set
daydeltemp with opcode 3068) in the calculation
of the fog brightness after sunrise
(includes the effect of the offset set
below). Used when autosky == on
for the specified EMBand.
Temperature (C) added to the real-
time ambient temperature (set by
the IR \ENV command or calculated
by the IR \DIURNAL command or set
nightdeltemp with opcode 3068) in the calculation
of the fog brightness after sunset
(includes the effect of the offset set

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

below). Used when autosky == on
for the specified EMBand.
Time (hours) added to the sunrise
time calculated by the RT system to
determine when the transition to
dawndeltime
using daydeltemp offset (above) is
completed. Used when autosky ==
on or autosky == skypoly.
Time (hours) added to the sunset
time calculated by the RT system to
determine when the transition to
duskdeltime
using nightdeltemp offset (above) is
completed. Used when autosky ==
on or autosky == skypoly.

polydaydeltemp Temperature (C) added to the

temperature used to calculate the

2-204 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

sky polygon brightness during the

day. Used when autosky == skypoly
for the specified EMBand.
Temperature (C) added to the
temperature used to calculate the
polynightdeltemp sky polygon brightness during the
night. Used when autosky ==
skypoly for the specified EMBand.
Temperature (C) added to the
temperature used to calculate the
ESIG style cloud layer polygon
esigdaypolydeltemp
brightness during the day. Used
when autosky == skypoly or autosky
== on for the specified EMBand.
Temperature (C) added to the
temperature used to calculate the
esignightpolydeltem ESIG style cloud layer polygon
p brightness during the night. Used
when autosky == skypoly or autosky
== on for the specified EMBand.
Temperature (C) added to the
temperature used to calculate the
cloud layer brightness during the
layerdaydeltemp
day. Used when autosky == skypoly
or autosky == on for the specified
EMBand.
Temperature (C) added to the
temperature used to calculate the
cloud layer brightness during the
layernightdeltemp
night. Used when autosky ==
skypoly or autosky == on for the
specified EMBand.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Specifies the number of hours to
transition from using the
dawntranstime nightdeltemp to the daydeltemp and
from the polynightdeltemp to the
polydaydeltemp.
Specify the number of hours to
transition from using the daydeltemp
dusktranstime to the nightdeltemp and from the
polydaydeltemp to the
polynightdeltemp.
Specifies the number of elevation
degrees below the horizon to
dawntransangle
transition from using the night
intensity to the dawn intensity.

daytransangle Specifies the number of elevation

degrees below the horizon to

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-205

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

transition from using the dawn

intensity to the day intensity.
Specifies the number of elevation
degrees above the horizon to
dusktransangle
transition from using the day
intensity to the dusk intensity.
Specifies the number of elevation
degrees below the horizon to
nighttransangle
transition from using the dusk
intensity to the night intensity.
(-1..1) Day scalar applied to the RT-
calculated cloud/fog-based solar
esigpday
attenuation applied to broken clouds
and regional weather polygons.
(-1..1) Night scalar applied to the
RT-calculated cloud/fog-based solar
esigpnight
attenuation applied to broken clouds
and regional weather polygons.
Time (hours) added to the sunrise
time calculated by the RT system to
epdawndeltime
determine when esigpday is applied.
Used when auto == on.
time (hours) added to the sunset
time calculated by the RT system to
epduskdeltime
determine when esigpnight is
applied. Used when auto == on.
Specifies the number of hours to
epdawntranstime transition from using esigpnight to
esigpday..
Specify the number of hours to
epdusktranstime transition from using esigpday to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

esigpnight.

2.4.77.44 IR \VISIBILITY
The \VISIBILITY qualifier controls the sensor visibility calculations.

Format: IR \VISIBILITY [AVC=avc] [EMBAND=emband] [FEET=feet]

[MILES=miles] [KM=km] [ALTFEET=altfeet] [VIS_SCALE=vis_scale]
[VISGF_SCALE=visgf_scale]
[GROUND_FOG_VIS_SCALE=ground_fog_vis_scale]
[VIS0_SCALE=vis0_scale]
[LOWER_LAYER_VIS_SCALE=lower_layer_vis_scale]
[VIS1_SCALE=vis1_scale]
[UPPER_LAYER_VIS_SCALE=upper_layer_vis_scale]
[VIS2_SCALE=vis2_scale] [INTGF_SCALE=intgf_scale]
[INT0_SCALE=int0_scale] [INT1_SCALE=int1_scale]
[INT2_SCALE=int2_scale]

2-206 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Syntax avc (off on epx) Specifies the sensor

Description: visibility calculation mode – off: use
the entered vis; on: use the RT
calculated vis; epx: entered vis
below specified alt, RT calculated vis
above.
emband (EVS MWIR LWIR) Specifies the
emband for following atmosphere
parameters.
feet (0..1.32e+006) Sensor visibility in
feet.
miles (0.001..250) Sensor visibility in
miles.
km (0.001..402.336) Sensor visibility in
kilometers.
altfeet If avc == epx, max alt for the
entered vis.
vis_scale Global scale on the sensor vis for the
specified emband.
visgf_scale Scales the sensor vis in the ground
fog layer only.
ground_fog_vis_s scales the sensor vis in the ground
cale fog layer only.
vis0_scale Scales the sensor vis in the bottom
cloud layer only.
lower_layer_vis_s scales the sensor vis in the bottom
cale cloud layer only.
vis1_scale Scales the sensor vis in the middle
cloud layer only.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

upper_layer_vis_s scales the sensor vis in the top cloud
cale layer only.
vis2_scale Scales the sensor vis in the top cloud
layer only.
intgf_scale Scales the sensor intensity in the
ground fog layer.
int0_scale Scales the sensor intensity in the
bottom cloud layer.
int1_scale Scales the sensor intensity in the
middle cloud layer.
int2_scale Scales the sensor intensity in the top
cloud layer.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-207

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.77.45 IR \WASH
The \WASH qualifier controls the EXG sensor washout effect.

Format: IR \WASH [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[ENABLE=enable] [DELAYFIELDCNT=delayFieldCnt]
[FADEINFIELDCNT=fadeInFieldCnt]
[FADEOUTFIELDCNT=fadeOutFieldCnt]
[WASHSENSITIVITY=washSensitivity]
[GAINSENSITIVITY=gainSensitivity]
[LEVELSENSITIVITY=levelSensitivity]
[FORCEWASH=forceWash]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
enable (off on) Enables/disables the sensor
wash effect.
delayFieldCnt The number of fields to wait prior to
starting the effect.
fadeInFieldCnt The number of fields it takes to fade
wash to full intensity.
fadeOutFieldCnt The number of fields it takes to fade
out the wash effect.
washSensitivity (0..1) The fraction of over-threshold
pixels required to trigger wash.
gainSensitivity (0..1) The percent the gain will
decrease during wash.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

levelSensitivity (-1..1) The percent the level will
increase/decrease during wash.
forceWash (off on) Enables/disables an on-
command wash effect

2-208 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.77.46 IR \WATER
The \WATER qualifier controls sensor water tuning parameters.

Format: IR \WATER [EMBAND=emband] [AUTO=auto]

[DAYDELTEMP=daydeltemp] [NIGHTDELTEMP=nightdeltemp]
[DAWNDELTIME=dawndeltime] [DUSKDELTIME=duskdeltime]
[DAWNTRANSTIME=dawntranstime]
[DUSKTRANSTIME=dusktranstime] [SCALEDAY=scaleday]
[SCALENIGHT=scalenight] [SDAWNDELTIME=sdawndeltime]
[SDUSKDELTIME=sduskdeltime]
[SDAWNTRANSTIME=sdawntranstime]
[SDUSKTRANSTIME=sdusktranstime]
[WINTERDAYSCALE=winterdayscale] [WATERUSAGE=waterusage]

Syntax (EVS MWIR LWIR) specifies the

Description: emband emband for following water
parameters
auto (on off physical) Controls the water
radiance calculation.
daydeltemp Temperature (C) added to the water
temperature calculated by the RT
after sunrise (includes the effect of
dawndeltime). Used when auto ==
on
nightdeltemp Temperature (C) added to the water
temperature calculated by the RT
after sunset (includes the effect of
duskdeltime). Used when auto ==
on.
dawndeltime Time (hours) added to the sunrise
time calculated by the RT system to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

determine when the daydeltemp
offset above is applied. Used when
auto == on.
duskdeltime Time (hours) added to the sunset
time calculated by the RT system to
determine when the nightdeltemp
offset above is applied. Used when
auto == on.
dawntranstime Specifies the number of hours to
transition from using the
nightdeltemp to the daydeltemp.
dusktranstime Specify the number of hours to
transition from using the daydeltemp
to the nightdeltemp.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-209

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

scaleday (-1..1) Day scalar applied to the RT-

calculated cloud/fog-based solar
attenuation.
scalenight (-1..1) Night scalar applied to the
RT-calculated cloud/fog-based solar
attenuation.
sdawndeltime time (hours) added to the sunrise
time calculated by the RT system to
determine when scaleday is applied.
Used when auto == on.
sduskdeltime time (hours) added to the sunset
time calculated by the RT system to
determine when scalenight is
applied. Used when auto == on.
sdawntranstime Specifies the number of hours to
transition from using scalenight to
scaleday.
sdusktranstime Specify the number of hours to
transition from using scaleday to
scalenight.
winterdayscale (0..1) scale factor applied in winter
to daydeltemp (presumed set
correctly for the date of max solar
heating - jun northern hemisphere;
dec southern hemisphere).
waterusage Use the usage index specified to
calculate the intensity of water
throughout the database. Default is
13.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.78 KEYDEF
The KEYDEF command defines the keypad flight rates.

Format: KEYDEF [RRATE=rrate] [TRATE=trate]

Syntax rrate The rotation rate per key press for a

Description: moving model.
trate Selects the translational rate per key
press for a moving model.

2-210 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.79 KEYPAD
The KEYPAD command defines the rotation rates of a moving model.

Format: KEYPAD [MM=mm] [XVEL=xvel] [YVEL=yvel] [ZVEL=zvel]

[HVEL=hvel] [PVEL=pvel] [RVEL=rvel]

Syntax
mm The moving model number.
Description:
xvel The x velocity.
yvel The y velocity.
zvel The z velocity.
hvel The heading velocity.
pvel The pitch velocity.
rvel The roll velocity.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-211

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.80 KLOD
The KLOD command configures the KLOD geometry level of detail load
management.

Format: KLOD [ENABLE=enable] [TIMEON=timeon] [MIN=min] [MAX=max]

[RATE=rate] [FILTER=filter] [RECOVERY=recovery] [VPG=vpg]

[\SCALE]

Syntax (on off) enable/disable level of detail

enable
Description: load management.
(0..1) kick-in time from start of field
timeon
(in ms)
min (0..1) minimum KLOD value
max (0..1) maximum KLOD value
(0..1) rate of change per field of
rate
KLOD value
(0..1) how much should previous
filter field load effect next fields KLOD
value
recovery (0..1) recovery rate dampener
vpg (0..7) viewport group.
Refer to the following sections for
[\SCALE] details on these qualifiers.

2.4.80.1 KLOD \SCALE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \SCALE qualifier sets the KLOD scalar for a class of scene elements.

Format: KLOD \SCALE [TYPE=type] [SCALE=scale] [VPG=vpg] [LIST=list]

Syntax (airport model terrain cult3d) Scene

type
Description: element type.
scale (0..10) scale
vpg (0..7)viewport group
list List KLOD scene element scalars.

2-212 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.81 KST
The KST command configures KST texture level of detail load
management.

Format: KST [ENABLE=enable] [TIMEON=timeon] [MIN=min] [MAX=max]

[RATE=rate] [FILTER=filter] [RECOVERY=recovery] [MODE=mode]
[TIMEOFF=timeoff] [VPG=vpg]

Syntax enable Enable/disable level of detail load

Description: (ON/OFF) management.
timeon (0..1) Kick-in time from start of field
(in ms).
min (0..1) Minimum KST value.
max (0..1) Maximum KST value.
rate (0..1) Rate of change per field of KST
value.
filter (0..1) How much the previous field
load should effect the next field’s KST
value.
recovery (0..1) Recovery rate dampener.
mode (continuous discrete) Mode of
operation.
timeoff (0..1) discrete mode only: kick-off
time from start of field (in ms) when
KST is 0.
vpg (0..3) Viewport group.

2.4.82 LASERBEAM

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The LASERBEAM command controls a laser beam effect.

Format: LASERBEAM [NUMBER=number] [TYPE=type] [ENABLE=enable]

[BEAMENABLE=beamEnable] [STARTDOTENABLE=startDotEnable]
[ENDDOTENABLE=endDotEnable] [GLOBALENABLE=globalEnable]

[\DEFINE] [\ENDPOSITION] [\MONITOR] [\STARTPOSITION]

Syntax
number (0..127) Laser beam effect identifier
Description:
type (0..127) Laser beam type definition
to use for this effect.
enable Enable or Disable the specified laser
(ON/OFF) beam effect.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-213

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

beamEnable Enable or Disable the specified laser

(ON/OFF) beam effect's beam.
startDotEnable Enable or Disable the specified laser
(ON/OFF) beam effect's start dot.
endDotEnable Enable or Disable the specified laser
(ON/OFF) beam effect's end dot.
globalEnable Allows laser beam effects on a per-RT
(ON/OFF) basis.
[\DEFINE] Refer to the following sections for
[\ENDPOSITION] details on these qualifiers.
[\MONITOR]
[\STARTPOSITION]

2.4.82.1 LASERBEAM \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines (allocates memory for) or modifies a laser
beam type definition.

Format: LASERBEAM \DEFINE [TYPE=type] [MODEL=model]

[BEAMALPHA=beamAlpha] [STARTDOTALPHA=startDotAlpha]
[ENDDOTALPHA=endDotAlpha] [STARTDOTSIZE=startDotSize]
[ENDDOTSIZE=endDotSize] [ENDDOTSHIFT=endDotShift]

Syntax
type (0..127) Laser beam type identifier.
Description:
model Flight model name of the laser beam
flight model to be used for this type
definition.
beamAlpha (0..1) The intensity alpha of the laser
beam.
startDotAlpha (0..1) The intensity alpha of the start

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

dot.
endDotAlpha (0..1) The intensity alpha of the end
dot.
startDotSize (0..10) The size of the start dot scaled
from a 1ft unit diameter.
endDotSize (0..10) The size of the end dot scaled
from a 1ft unit diameter.
endDotShift (0..10) (Advanced Tuning) Specifies
the amount the end dot is shifted
toward the start dot to ensure it is
visible on the target surface.

2-214 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.82.2 LASERBEAM \ENDPOSITION

The \ENDPOSITION qualifier controls the end position of a laser beam
effect. LatLonAlt, Motion System relative and direction/length from start
positions are accepted. Though Motion System relative and
direction/length position modes are typically the easiest to use, the best
precision at long distances will be provided with LatLonAlt position
specification. The system MAX beam length is 81920 feet. Longer
beams will be rendered up to 81920 feet from the end closest to the
eye.
NOTE: Care should be taken when selecting an end position to avoid
defining an unnecessarily long beam. Using the shortest
possible beam will speed up line-of-sight processing and ensure
the best possible end point precision.

Format: LASERBEAM \ENDPOSITION [NUMBER=number]

[LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]
[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude] [MS=ms] [SM=sm] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z]
[AZIMUTH=azimuth] [ELEVATION=elevation] [LENGTH=length]

Syntax
number (0..127) Laser beam effect identifier.
Description:
latdegree (-90..90) In LatLonAlt position mode,
the latitude degrees of the end
position of the specified effect.
latminute (0..60) In LatLonAlt position mode,
the latitude minutes of the end
position of the specified effect.
latsecond (0..60) In LatLonAlt position mode,

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the latitude seconds of the end
position of the specified effect.
longdegree (-180..180) In LatLonAlt position
mode, the longitude degrees of the
end position of the specified effect.
longminute (0..60) In LatLonAlt position mode,
the longitude minutes of the end
position of the specified effect.
longsecond (0..60) In LatLonAlt position mode,
the longitude seconds of the end
position of the specified effect.
altitude (Feet) In LatLonAlt position mode, the
altitude of the end position of the
specified effect.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-215

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

ms (0..65535) In Motion System relative

position mode, the motion system
number for the end position to follow.
sm (0..510) In Motion System relative
position mode, the submodel number
for the end position to follow.
x (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the X motion system
offset for the end position.
y (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Y motion system
offset for the end position.
z (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Z motion system
offset for the end position.
azimuth (Degrees) In Direction/Length mode,
the azimuth of the beam.
elevation (Degrees) In Direction/Length mode,
the elevation of the beam.
length (0..81920) In Direction/Length mode,
the length of the beam.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-216 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.82.3 LASERBEAM \MONITOR

The \MONITOR qualifier specifies which laser beam effect will be
monitored in EP2 statistics output (engineering command).

Format: LASERBEAM \MONITOR [NUMBER=number]

Syntax (0..127) Laser beam identifier for

number
Description: the effect to be monitored.

2.4.82.4 LASERBEAM \STARTPOSITION

The \STARTPOSITION qualifier controls the start position of a laser
beam effect. Both LatLonAlt and Motion System relative positions are
accepted. The default will be LatLonAlt, but specifying any of the Motion
System relative parameters will switch the start position to that mode.

Format: LASERBEAM \STARTPOSITION [NUMBER=number]

[LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]
[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude] [MS=ms] [SM=sm] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z]
[VELLEADFIELDS=velLeadFields]

Syntax
number (0..127) Laser beam effect identifier.
Description:
latdegree (-90..90) In LatLonAlt position mode,
the latitude degrees of the start
position of the specified effect.
latminute (0..60) In LatLonAlt position mode,
the latitude minutes of the start
position of the specified effect.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

latsecond (0..60) In LatLonAlt position mode,
the latitude seconds of the start
position of the specified effect.
longdegree (-180..180) In LatLonAlt position
mode, the longitude degrees of the
start position of the specified effect.
longminute (0..60) In LatLonAlt position mode,
the longitude minutes of the start
position of the specified effect.
longsecond (0..60) In LatLonAlt position mode,
the longitude seconds of the end
position of the specified effect.
altitude (Feet) In LatLonAlt position mode, the
altitude of the start position of the
specified effect.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-217

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

ms (0..65535) In Motion System relative

position mode, the motion system
number for the start position to follow.
sm (0..510) In Motion System relative
position mode, the submodel number
for the start position to follow.
x (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the X motion system
offset for the start position.
y (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Y motion system
offset for the start position.
z (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Z motion system
offset for the start position.
velLeadFields (-10..10) In Motion System relative
position mode, the number of 60Hz
fields to push forward the start motion
system according to the current
velocity (deprecated).

2.4.83 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE
The LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE command has four qualifiers, details
of which are provided in the sections below.

2.4.83.1 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \GROUP

The \GROUP qualifier controls light calibration switches specified by
group.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \GROUP [SET=set] [LIGHT0=light0]
[LIGHT1=light1] [LIGHT2=light2] [LIGHT3=light3] [LIGHT4=light4]

Syntax
set (0..1) The specification set.
Description:
light0 (-1..1023) The first light in the
group.
light1 (-1..1023) The second light in the
group.
light2 (-1..1023) The third light in the
group.
light3 (-1..1023) The fourth light in the
group.
light4 (-1..1023) The fifth light in the group.

2-218 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.83.2 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \LIST

The \LIST qualifier lists the light calibration switches.

Format: LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \LIST [SET=set] [LIST=list]

Syntax
set (0..1) The specification set.
Description:
list The list of lights.

2.4.83.3 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \RANGE

The \RANGE qualifier shows light calibration switches specified by range.

Format: LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \RANGE [SET=set] [LOWER=lower]

[UPPER=upper]

Syntax
set (0..1) The specification set.
Description:
lower (-1..1023) The first light in the range.
upper (-1..1023) The last light in the range.

2.4.83.4 LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \SELECT

The \SELECT qualifier selects the switch specification type and/or
specification set

Format: LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE \SELECT [TYPE=type] [SET=set]

Syntax (group range list) The specification

type
Description: type.
set (0..1) The specification set.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.84 LIGHTPOINT
The LIGHTPOINT command has thirteen qualifiers that are described in
the following sections.

2.4.84.1 LIGHTPOINT \ANIMATION

The \ANIMATION qualifier sets lightpoint animation override parameters
per light switch.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \ANIMATION [LIGHT=light] [LN=ln] [MM=mm]

[CONTROL=control] [OANIMTYPE=oAnimType] [OPERIOD=oPeriod]
[OPHASEDELAY=oPhaseDelay] [OTIMEON=oTimeOn]

Syntax (0..1023) Global light switch

light
Description: number.
ln (0..31) Local light switch number.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-219

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(0..65535) Moving model number for

mm
local light switches.
(asModeled noAnimation override)
control
Animation control.
(none flash rotate) override
oAnimType
Animation type.
(0..10000) Override animation
oPeriod
period (seconds).
(0..10000) Override animation phase
oPhaseDelay
delay (seconds).
(0..10000) Override animation ON
oTimeOn
time (seconds).

2.4.84.2 LIGHTPOINT \COPY

The \COPY qualifier sets one light point control set equal to another.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \COPY [SRCCATEGORY=srcCategory]

[DSTCATEGORY=dstCategory]

Syntax Category name of source light point

srcCategory
Description: control set.
Category name of dest light point
dstCategory
control set.

2.4.84.3 LIGHTPOINT \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier associates a category name with a light point
control set index.
Format: LIGHTPOINT \DEFINE [CATEGORY=category] [N=n]

Syntax Category name of light point control

category
Description: set.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

n (0..64) Light point control set index.

2.4.84.4 LIGHTPOINT \EYEPOINT

The \EYEPOINT qualifier defines the alternate position from which
lightpoint attributes (i.e., range, directionality, etc.) are computed.
Format: LIGHTPOINT \EYEPOINT [MS=ms]

Syntax (0..65535) Motion system used as

Description: ms the alternate lightpoint viewing
position

2-220 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.84.5 LIGHTPOINT \FIXTURES

The \FIXTURES qualifier sets fixture control set fixture options for a
category.
Format: LIGHTPOINT \FIXTURES [CATEGORY=category]
[FIXTUREFORCEMODE=fixtureForceMode]
[STANCHIONMOTIF=stanchionMotif]
[STANCHIONSWITCHIN=stanchionSwitchIn]
[STANCHIONTRANSRANGE=stanchionTransRange]
[STANCHIONHEIGHT=stanchionHeight]
[STANCHIONASPECT=stanchionAspect]
[STANCHIONSCALE=stanchionScale]
[BASEPLATEMOTIF=baseplateMotif]
[BASEPLATESWITCHIN=baseplateSwitchIn]
[BASEPLATETRANSRANGE=baseplateTransRange]
[BASEPLATESIZE=baseplateSize] [LIST=list]

Syntax category Category name of light point

Description: control set.
fixtureForceMode (off stanchions baseplates
asModeled) Enable/disable
fixtures.
stanchionMotif (-1..32) Defines which
halo/fixture texture is used for
stanchions.
stanchionSwitchIn (0..10000) Range at which
stanchions begin to transition in.
stanchionTransRange (0..10000) Stanchion transition
range.
stanchionHeight (0..100) Stanchion size (height
in feet).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

stanchionAspect (0..100) Stanchion aspect ratio
(w/h).
stanchionScale (0..2) Adjusts stanchion size.
baseplateMotif (-1..32) Defines which
halo/fixture texture is used for
baseplates.
baseplateSwitchIn (0..10000) Range at which
baseplates begin to transition in.
baseplateTransRange (0..10000) Baseplate transition
range.
baseplateSize (0..100) Baseplate size
(diameter in feet).
list Lists all the fixtures parameters
for specified category.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-221

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.84.6 LIGHTPOINT \HALOS

The \HALOS qualifier sets light point control set halo options for a
category.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \HALOS [CATEGORY=category]

[REFPLANEFORCEMODE=refPlaneForceMode]
[ZAXISFORCEMODE=ZaxisForceMode]
[HALOPROJECTIONSCALE=haloProjectionScale]
[THICKNESS=thickness] [PERSPHALOMOTIF=perspHaloMotif]
[PERSPHALOFORCEMODE=perspHaloForceMode]
[PERSPHALOSWITCHIN=perspHaloSwitchIn]
[PERSPHALOTRANSRANGE=perspHaloTransRange]
[PERSPHALOSIZE=perspHaloSize]
[PERSPHALOASPECT=perspHaloAspect]
[PERSPHALOINTENSSCALAR=perspHaloIntensScalar]
[FOGHALOMOTIF=fogHaloMotif]
[FOGHALOFORCEMODE=fogHaloForceMode]
[FOGHALOSWITCHIN=fogHaloSwitchIn]
[FOGHALOTRANSRANGE=fogHaloTransRange]
[FOGHALOSWITCHINVIS=fogHaloSwitchInVis]
[FOGHALOTRANSRANGEVIS=fogHaloTransRangeVis]
[FOGHALOSIZE=fogHaloSize]
[FOGHALOASPECT=fogHaloAspect]
[FOGHALOINTENSSCALAR=fogHaloIntensScalar]
[FOGHALOBULGERANGE=fogHaloBulgeRange]
[FOGHALOBULGESIZESCALAR=fogHaloBulgeSizeScalar]
[FOGHALOBULGEPEAKPOS=fogHaloBulgePeakPos]
[FOGHALOSIZEVSVISSCALAR=fogHaloSizeVsVisScalar]
[FOGHALOSIZEVSVISMINATVIS=fogHaloSizeVsVisMinAtVis]
[FOGHALOSIZEVSVISMAXATVIS=fogHaloSizeVsVisMaxAtVis]
[REFLECTIONMOTIF=reflectionMotif]
[REFLECTIONMOTIFADV=reflectionMotifAdv]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[REFLECTIONFORCEMODE=reflectionForceMode]
[REFLECTIONMETHOD=reflectionMethod]
[REFLECTIONPOSMODE =reflectionPosMode]
[REFLECTIONSWITCHIN=reflectionSwitchIn]
[REFLECTIONTRANSRANGE=reflectionTransRange]
[REFLECTIONSIZE=reflectionSize]
[REFLECTIONSIZEADV=reflectionSizeAdv]
[REFLECTIONASPECT=reflectionAspect]
[REFLECTIONASPECTADV=reflectionAspectAdv]
[REFLECTIONINTENSSCALAR=reflectionIntensScalar]
[REFLECTIONINTENSSCALARADV=reflectionIntensScalarAdv]
[REFLECTIONZOFFSET=reflectionZOffset]
[REFLECTIONZOFFSETADV=reflectionZOffsetAdv]
[REFLECTIONBOTSTRETCH=reflectionBotStretch]
[REFLECTIONBOTSTRETCHADV=reflectionBotStretchAdv]
[REFLECTIONRASTERDOTSCALAR=reflectionRasterDotScalar]
[REFLECTIONFORCENEAR=reflectionForceNear]

2-222 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

[UNDERLAYMOTIF=underlayMotif]
[UNDERLAYFORCEMODE=underlayForceMode]
[UNDERLAYSWITCHOUT=underlaySwitchOut]
[UNDERLAYTRANSRANGE=underlayTransRange]
[UNDERLAYINTENSSCALAR=underlayIntensScalar]
[UNDERLAYANGULARRESOLUTION=underlayAngularResolution]
[LIST=list]

Syntax category Category name of light point

Description: control set.
refPlaneForceMode (off on asModeled)
Enable/disable conforming
bottom of halo to ground.
ZaxisForceMode Enable/disable rendering halos
(ON/OFF) as Z-axis stamps.
ZaxisForceMode (0..10) Adjust halo vertex
projection.
thickness (0..10) Halo volumetric
thickness.
perspHaloMotif (-1..32) Defines which
halo/fixture texture is used for
perspective halos.
perspHaloForceMode (off on asModeled)
Enable/disable perspective
halos.
perspHaloSwitchIn (0..10000) Range at which
perspective halos begin to
transition in.
perspHaloTransRange (0..10000) Perspective halo
transition range.
perspHaloSize (0..100) Perspective halo size
(diameter in ft).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

perspHaloAspect (0..100) Perspective halo aspect
ratio (w/h).
perspHaloIntensScalar (0..1000) Adjust perspective
halo intensity.
fogHaloMotif (-1..32) Defines which
halo/fixture texture is used for
fog halos
fogHaloForceMode (off on asModeled)
Enable/disable fog halo.
fogHaloSwitchIn (0..50000) Range at which fog
halos begin to transition in.
fogHaloTransRange (0..10000) Fog halo transition
range.
fogHaloSwitchInVis (0..1e+006) Visibility at which
fog halos begin to transition in.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-223

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

fogHaloTransRangeVis (0..1e+006) Fog halo transition

visibility.
fogHaloSize (0..100) Fog halo size (diameter
in ft).
fogHaloAspect (0..100) Fog halo aspect ratio
(w/h).
fogHaloIntensScalar (0..100) Adjust fog halo
intensity.
fogHaloBulgeRange (0..100) Fraction of switching
range where bulging is allowed.
fogHaloBulgeSizeScalar (0..200) Adjust fog halo size
based on bulge.
fogHaloBulgePeakPos (0..100) Fraction of bulge range
where bulge is maximum.
fogHaloSizeVsVisScalar (0..100) Adjust fog halo size
based on visibility.
fogHaloSizeVsVisMinAt (0..500000) Visibility at which
Vis vis-based fog halo size boost
begins.
fogHaloSizeVsVisMaxAt (0..500000) Visibility at which
Vis vis-based fog halo size boost is
maximum.
reflectionMotif (-1..32) Defines which
halo/fixture texture is used for
reflection halos.
reflectionMotifAdv (-1..32) Defines which
halo/fixture texture is used for
advanced reflection halos
reflectionForceMode (off on asModeled)
Enable/disable reflection halos.
reflectionMethod (legacy advanced asModeled)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Specify reflection halo method
reflectionPosMode (csOffset modHAG modOrig)
Specify mode of the height
above ground Z value.
reflectionSwitchIn (0..10000) Range at which
reflection halos begin to
transition in.
reflectionTransRange (0..10000) Reflection halo
transition range.
reflectionSize (0..100) Reflection halo size
(diameter in ft).
reflectionSizeAdv (0..400) Advanced reflection
halo size (diameter in ft)
reflectionAspect (0..100) Reflection halo aspect
ratio (w/h).

2-224 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

reflectionAspectAdv (0..100) Advanced reflection

halo aspect ratio (w/h)
reflectionIntensScalar (0..100) Adjust reflection halo
intensity.
reflectionIntensScalarA (0..100) Adjust advanced
dv reflection halo intensity
reflectionZOffset (0..100) Lightpoint height above
reflection plane.
reflectionZOffsetAdv (-500..500) Advanced reflection
halo position adjustment scalar.
reflectionBotStretch (0..100) Adjust size of the
bottom half of the reflection
halo.
reflectionBotStretchAdv (0..100) Adjust size of the
bottom half of a advanced
reflection halo
reflectionRasterDot (0..100) Adjust reflected
Scalar lightpoint size.
reflectionForceNear (off on) Enable/disable forcing
the reflection halo forcenear.
underlayMotif (-1..32) Defines which
halo/fixture texture is used for
underlay halos
underlayForceMode Enable/disable underlay halos
(ON/OFF)
underlaySwitchOut (0..10000) Range at which
underlay halos begin to
transition out.
underlayTransRange (0..10000) Underlay halo
transition range.
underlayIntensScalar (0..2) Adjust underlay halo

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

intensity.
underlayAngularResolut (0..1) Underlay angular
ion resolution scale (degrees per
pixel).
list List all the halo parameters for
specified category.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-225

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.84.7 LIGHTPOINT \INTENSITY

The \INTENSITY qualifier sets light point control set intensity options for
a category.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \INTENSITY [CATEGORY=category]

[FORCEOMNI=forceOmni]
[APPLYRANDOMIZATION=applyRandomization]
[APPLYTODINTSCALAR=applyTODIntScalar]
[RANDOMIZEBOOSTSCALAR=randomizeBoostScalar]
[RAINDEFOCUSBOOSTREDUCTION=rainDefocusBoostReduction]
[STEPINTSCALAR=stepIntScalar]
[LIGHTPOINTDISCARDINTENSITY=lightPointDiscardIntensity]
[DIRAMBIENTSCALE=dirAmbientScale]
[ANIMDIRAMBIENT=animDirAmbient]
[LIGHTPOINTSENSORSCALE=lightPointSensorScale]
[SPFORCEMODE=SPForceMode]
[SPACTIVATIONTHRESHOLD=SPActivationThreshold]
[SPBREAKPT=SPBreakPt]
[SPSCALEATBREAKPT=SPScaleAtBreakPt]
[SPMINSCALE=SPMinScale] [SPDIMBOOST=SPDimBoost]
[RAFORCEMODE=RAForceMode]
[RAFORCEMODESIMPLELP=RAForceModeSimpleLP]
[RASTARTDIST=RAStartDist]
[RASTARTDISTSIMPLELP=RAStartDistSimpleLP]
[RAENDDIST=RAEndDist] [RABREAKPT=RABreakPt]
[RASCALEATBREAKPT=RAScaleAtBreakPt]
[RAMINSCALE=RAMinScale]
[RAMINSCALESIMPLELP=RAMinScaleSimpleLP]
[DMFORCEMODE=DMForceMode] [DMBREAKPT=DMBreakPt]
[LOBETUNEMODE=LobeTuneMode] [LOBEHSCALAR=LobeHScalar]
[LOBEVSCALAR=LobeVScalar] [LIST=list]

Syntax category Category name of light point

Description: control set.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

forceOmni Force light point to be omni-
(ON/OFF) directional.
applyRandomization Enable/disable intensity
(ON/OFF) randomization.
applyTODIntScalar Enable/disable TOD intensity
(ON/OFF) scaling.
randomizeBoostScal (0..10) Adjust modeled amount of
ar intensity randomization.
rainDefocusBoostRed (0..10) Adjust intensity based on
uction rain defocus.
stepIntScalar (-10..10) Adjust step intensity
value.
lightPointDiscard (0..1) Intensity below which
Intensity lightpoints are discarded.

2-226 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

dirAmbientScale (0..10) Adjust modeled ambient

intensity of directional lightpoints.
animDirAmbient Enable/disable modeled ambient
(ON/OFF) as the intensity in the animation
OFF state.
lightPointSensor (0..10) Adjust sensor-specific
Scale intensity.
SPForceMode (off on asModeled) Enable/disable
same point test.
SPActivation (0..1) Angular separation where
Threshold same point begins to have effect.
SPBreakPt (0..1) Knee position in same point
curve.
SPScaleAtBreakPt (0..1) Same point scale at knee
position.
SPMinScale (0..1) Minimum same point scale
value.
SPDimBoost (0..1) Adjust minimum same point
scale for already dim lightpoints
RAForceMode (off normal simple) Select range
attenuation mode.
RAForceModeSimpleL (off normal simple) Select range
P attenuation mode for simple
lightpoints.
RAStartDist (0..1e+006) Range at which range
attenuation begins to have effect.
RAStartDistSimpleLP (0..250) Range (miles) at which
range attenuation begins to have
effect for simple lightpoints.
RAEndDist (0..1e+006) Range at which range

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

attenuation is maximum.
RABreakPt (0..1) Knee position in range
attenuation curve.
RAScaleAtBreakPt (0..1) Range attenuation scale at
knee position.
RAMinScale (0..1) Minimum range attenuation
scale value
RAMinScaleSimpleLP (0..1) Minimum range attenuation
scale value for simple lightpoints.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-227

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

DMForceMode (off on) Enable/disable advanced

directionality modification.
DMBreakPt (0..1) Position between inner and
outer direction angle.
LobeTuneMode Enable/disable directional lobe
width tuning.
LobeHScalar (0..10) Scale the horizontal lobe
width.
LobeVScalar (0..10) Scale the vertical lobe
width.
list List all the intensity parameters
for specified category.

2.4.84.8 LIGHTPOINT \MAP

The \MAP qualifier sets light point switch mapping options.
Format: LIGHTPOINT \MAP [GMAP=gmap] [LMAP=lmap]
[MAPOPTOUT=mapOptOut] [LIGHT=light] [LN=ln] MM=mm]
[LISTMAPFROM=listMapFrom] [LISTMAPTO=listMapTo]
[BEGIN=begin] [END=end]

Syntax (none legacy extended) Mapping

gmap
Description: mode for global light switches.
lmap (none legacy extended) Mapping
mode for local light switches.
mapOptOut Mapping opt out flag for individual
(ON/OFF) light switches.
light (0..1023) Global light switch
number.
ln (0..31) Local light switch number.
mm (0..65535) Moving model number for

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

local light switches.
listMapFrom List the map source for each switch.
listMapTo List the map destination(s) for each
switch.
begin (0..1023) Begin list at this switch.
end (0..1023) End list at this switch.

2-228 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.84.9 LIGHTPOINT \POSITION

The \POSITION qualifier sets light point control set position options for a
category.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \POSITION [CATEGORY=category]

[LIGHTLIFTZ=lightLiftZ] [LIGHTLIFTEYE=lightLiftEye]
[VISRANGECULLSCALAR=visRangeCullScalar]
[VISRANGECULLSCALARSKY=visRangeCullScalarSky] [LIST=list]

Syntax category Category name of light point control

Description: set.
lightLiftZ (0..10000) Range at which lightpoint
is lifted in Z by 1ft.
lightLiftEye (0..10000) Range at which lightpoint
is pulled toward eye by 1ft.
visRangeCull (0..1000) Adjust visRange at which
Scalar vis culling occurs.
visRangeCull (0..1000) Adjust visRange at which
ScalarSky vis culling occurs for stars.
list List all the intensity parameters for
specified category.

2.4.84.10 LIGHTPOINT \RENDER

The \RENDER qualifier sets light point control set rendering options for a
category.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \RENDER [CATEGORY=category]

[FORCEBLENDMODE=forceBlendMode] [FORCEFOG=forceFog]
[FORCECOPLANAROVERRIDE=forceCoplanarOverride]
[COPLANARGROUP=coplanarGroup]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[COPLANARLAYER=coplanarLayer] [LPEYESELECT=LPEyeSelect]
[LIST=list]

Syntax category Category name of light point control

Description: set.
forceBlendMode (occulting nonOccultingAdd
nonOccultingMax asModeled) Select
rendering blend mode.
forceFog (off on asModeled) Enable/disable
fog application.
forceCoplanarOver Enable/disable coplanar definition
ride override.
(ON/OFF)
coplanarGroup (0..15) Coplanar override group
number.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-229

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

coplanarLayer (0..31) Coplanar override layer

number.
LPEyeSelect (normal alternate) Select between
normal and alternate eyeposition.
list List all the intensity parameters for
specified category

2.4.84.11 LIGHTPOINT \SIZE

The \SIZE qualifier sets light point control set size options for a
category.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \SIZE [CATEGORY=category]

[APPLYPERSPGROWTH=applyPerspGrowth]
[MINDEFOCUS=minDefocus] [MAXDEFOCUS=maxDefocus]
[MINPIXELSIZE=minPixelSize] [MAXPIXELSIZE=maxPixelSize]
[DOTSIZEBOOSTSTEPLIMIT=dotSizeBoostStepLimit]
[DOTSIZEBOOSTSCALAR=dotSizeBoostScalar]
[DOTSIZEBOOSTVISTHRESHOLD=dotSizeBoostVisThreshold]
[LIST=list]

Syntax category Category name of light point control

Description: set.
applyPerspGrowth (off on asModeled) Enable/disable
perspective growth.
minDefocus (0..1) Minimum defocus value.
maxDefocus (0..1) Maximum defocus value.
minPixelSize (0..16) Minimum pixel size (diameter
in pixels).
maxPixelSize (0..16) Maximum pixel size
(diameter in pixels).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

dotSizeBoostStepL (1..5) Lowest step value where low-
imit vis size boost occurs.
dotSizeBoostScala (0..10) Low-vis size boost scalar.
r
dotSizeBoostVisTh (0..10000) Visibility below which
reshold low-vis size boost occurs.
list List all the intensity parameters for
specified category

2-230 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.84.12 LIGHTPOINT \STEPVALUEOVERRIDES

The \STEPVALUEOVERRIDES qualifier sets the override step intensity
scalars associated with a step number for a category.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \STEPVALUEOVERRIDES [CATEGORY=category]

[STEP=step] [LIGHT_SCALAR=light_scalar] [LIST=list]

Syntax category Category name of light point control

Description: set.
step (0..5) Step number
light_scalar (-1..7.99) Light intensity scalar
list List the override step table for
specified category.

2.4.84.13 LIGHTPOINT \SWITCHES

The \SWITCHES qualifier sets the global switches associated with the
control set.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \SWITCHES [CATEGORY=category]

[SWITCHES=switches] [RUNWAYS=runways]

Syntax category Category name of light point control

Description: set.
switches Defines global switches associated
with the control set.
runways Defines runways included in the
switch definition.

2.4.84.14 LIGHTPOINT \TEXTURE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \TEXTURE qualifier specifies a texture map to load for halo/fixture
textures n.

Format: LIGHTPOINT \TEXTURE [N=n] [TEXTURENAME=textureName]

Syntax n (0..32) Halo/fixture texture map

Description: number.
textureName Full path name of halo/fixture
texture.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-231

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.85 LIGHTSOURCETUNE
The LIGHTSOURCETUNE command sets/gets lightsource diffuse table
tuning parameters.

Format: LIGHTSOURCETUNE [TYPE=type] [BACKSCATTER=backscatter]

[MAGNITUDE=magnitude] [REVERSESCALAR=reverseScalar]
[ENABLEDIRSRC=enableDirSrc] [EMBAND=emband]

[\LATITUDE] [\NDOTERANGEADJUST]

Syntax
type (pos dir) Table select.
Description:
backscatter (0.1..10) NdotL angle adjustment:
how far scattering extends around
an object, smoothing out edge
artifacts. (1.0 = no overlap)
magnitude (0.1..10) NdotL magnitude
adjustment: peaks the scattering
calculation. (1.0 = normal)
reverseScalar (0..1) NdotL back facing brightness
scalar (0.0 = none, 1.0 = front
intensity).
enableDirSrc Directional lightsource tuning enable
(ON/OFF) flag.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
[\LATITUDE] See descriptions below for details.
[\NDOTERANGEA
DJUST]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.85.1 LIGHTSOURCETUNE \LATITUDE
The \LATITUDE qualifier gets and sets latitude-based control of
directional lightsource diffuse table.

Format: LIGHTSOURCETUNE \LATITUDE [ENABLE=enable]

[BEGINLATITUDE=beginLatitude] [ENDLATITUDE=endLatitude]
[BEGINBACKSCATTER=beginBackscatter]
[ENDBACKSCATTER=endBackscatter]
[BEGINMAGNITUDE=beginMaginitude]
[ENDMAGNITUDE=endMagnitude] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax enable (on off) latitude-based directional

Description: lightsource control enable flag
beginLatitude (0..90) latitude where adjustment
begins

2-232 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

endLatitude (0..90) latitude where adjustment

ends
beginBackscatter (0.1..10) NdotL angle adjustment at
begin latitude
beginMaginitude (0.1..10) NdotL magnitude
adjustment at begin latitude
endMagnitude (0.1..10) NdotL magnitude
adjustment at end latitude
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.85.2 LIGHTSOURCETUNE \NDOTERANGEADJUST

The \NDOTERANGEADJUST qualifier views or sets tunable parameters for
range-based adjustment of NdotE intensity reduction.

Format: LIGHTSOURCETUNE \NDOTERANGEADJUST

[NEARRANGE=nearRange] [FARRANGE=farRange]
[RANGEADJUSTENABLE=rangeAdjustEnable]

Syntax nearRange (256..65536) Near range where

Description: adjustment begins.
farRange (256..65536) Far range where
adjustment ends.
rangeAdjustEnable Range-based adjustment enable flag.

2.4.86 LOAD
The LOAD command loads a model.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: LOAD [MODEL=model] [SLOT=slot] [PAGERANGE=pageRange]
[SELECTTEXTURE=selectTexture] [BEHAVIOR=behavior]
[MODELTYPE=modelType] [LIST=list] [PAGED=paged]

[\INSET] [\PROCESSDESCRIPTION]

Syntax model The model name, or path to the

Description: flight file.
slot (0..32767) The model slot number.
pageRange The range at which model is paged
in (-1 means resident). (Integer or
floating point)
selectTexture (on off) Enable/disable texture
loading based on model select
behavior The name of user behavior file.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-233

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

modelType (moving cloud) Specify the model

type.
list Lists all loaded models.
paged Only list paged-in models.
[\INSET] Refer to the section below for details
[\PROCESSDESCR on these qualifiers.
IPTION]

2.4.86.1 LOAD \INSET

The INSET qualifier loads database insets.

Format: LOAD \INSET [PATH=path]

Syntax Path of database inset epin file or

path
Description: root of search path.

2.4.86.2 LOAD \PROCESSDESCRIPTION

The \PROCESSDESCRIPTION qualifier loads a process description file.

Format: LOAD \PROCESSDESCRIPTION [PATH=path]

Syntax Path of database process description

path
Description: file or root of search path.

2.4.87 LOADBRUSH
The LOADBRUSH command loads a brush map.

Format: LOADBRUSH [BRUSHMAPNAME=BrushMapName]

[BRUSHNUM=BrushNum] [LIST=list]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax
BrushMapName Brush map name
Description:
BrushNum (0..100) Controls Filter.
list Lists all the loaded brushes.

2.4.88 LOADDT
The LOADDT command loads a terrain detail map.

Format: LOADDDT [FILE=file] [SIZE=size] [BIAS=bias]

[BIASRATE=biasrate]

Syntax
file The file path to the detail map.
Description:
size Covered area size of one detail map
(in feet).

2-234 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

bias Mipping bias.

biasrate Mipping bias rate.

2.4.89 LOADEMISSIVETEXTURES
The LOADEMISSIVETEXTURES command is used to load emissive
textures in a multi-sensortype configuration.

Format: LOADEMISSIVETEXTURES [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax enable
Enables and disables.
Description: (ON/OFF)

2.4.90 LOBE
The LOBE command enables and disables landing lights.

Format: LOBE [SELECT=select] [FLASHENABLE=flashEnable]

[\DEFINE]

Syntax
Description: select (string of '1's and '0') switches
flashEnable (string of '1's and '0') switches -
1=flash 0=steady
[\DEFINE] Refer to the following description for
more information about this qualifier.

2.4.90.1 LOBE \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines a landing light.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: LOBE \DEFINE [NUMBER =number] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z]
[HEADING=heading] [PITCH=pitch] [BEAM=beam] [RANGE=range]
[FEATHER=feather][INTENSITY=intensity] [SCENE=scene]
[ADJUSTFORTOD=adjustForTOD] [STEERABLE=steerable]
[CHANMASK=chanMask] [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]
[MM=mm] [DIFFTABLE=diffTable] [FLASHPATTERN=flashPattern]
[BEAMENABLE=beamEnable] [BEAMRANGE=beamRange]
[GLARESCALE=glareScale] [ATMOSILLUM=atmosIllum]
[OVERCASTDAYINTENSITY=overcastDayIntensity] [LIST=list]

Syntax The number of the landing light lobe

Description: number (0..31 that is to be defined/displayed.
x The X offset of the light source relative
to moving model zero.
y The Y offset of the light source relative
to moving model zero.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-235

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

z The Z offset of the light source relative

to moving model zero.
heading (-180..180) Heading.
pitch (-90..90) Pitch.
beam (0..89)The light beam width.
range (0..100000) The light range.
feather (0..1) Light roll-off.
intensity Intensity of the light (0..4).
scene (dawn day dusk night) time of day
scene to which the intensity applies.
adjustForTOD enable/disable intensity interpolation
(ON/OFF) based on time of day
steerable
Light steering.
(ON/OFF)
chanMask Unused.
red (0..1) The red color of light.
green (0..1) The green color of light.
blue (0..1) The blue color of light.
mm (0..65535) Moving model to which that
light is chained.
diffTable
Diffuse table selection.
(ON/OFF)
flashPattern Flash pattern to use.
beamEnable Enable/disable rendering of the light
(ON/OFF) beam.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

beamRange (0..100000) Range of the beam in
feet.
glareScale (0..1) Scales the amount of ownship
glare added from this lobe.
atmosIllum Enable/disable illuminating the
(ON/OFF) atmosphere.
overcastDayIntens (0..4) overcast day light intensity - if
ity adjustForTod is enabled.
list List all lobes.

2-236 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.91 LOCKDOWN
The LOCKDOWN command enables the real-time lockdown mode.

Format: LOCKDOWN [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax enable Enables the real-time lockdown

Description: (ON/OFF) mode.

2.4.92 LOD
The LOD command assigns a tunable LOD scalar to a model type.
Format: LOD [MODELNAME=modelname] [LODSCALAR=lodscalar]

Syntax modelname Specifies the base name of the

Description: MultiGen .flt file. Name is case
sensitive. The path and file extension
are not required.
(1e-005..100) Specifies the LOD
lodscalar scalar factor that uniformly scales all
LOD ranges defined in the model.

2.4.92.1 LOD \DBLOADLIST

The \DBLOADLIST qualifier lists all loaded models.

2.4.92.2 LOD \LODLIST

The \LODLIST qualifier lists loaded models that have lod scalars set.

2.4.93 LODTUNE
The LODTUNE command sets parameters for lod node tuning groups:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

value = (value * scalar) + offset.

Format: LODTUNE [GROUP=group] [ENABLE=enable]

[NOZOOMSWITCHINSCALAR=noZoomSwitchInScalar]
[NOZOOMSWITCHOUTSCALAR=noZoomSwitchOutScalar]
[NOZOOMTRANSITIONSCALAR=noZoomTransitionScalar]
[NOZOOMSWITCHINOFFSET=noZoomSwitchInOffset]
[NOZOOMSWITCHOUTOFFSET=noZoomSwitchOutOffset]
[NOZOOMTRANSITIONOFFSET=noZoomTransitionOffset]
[ZOOMSWITCHINSCALAR=zoomSwitchInScalar]
[ZOOMSWITCHOUTSCALAR=zoomSwitchOutScalar]
[ZOOMTRANSITIONSCALAR=zoomTransitionScalar]
[ZOOMSWITCHINOFFSET=zoomSwitchInOffset]
[ZOOMSWITCHOUTOFFSET=zoomSwitchOutOffset]
[ZOOMTRANSITIONOFFSET=zoomTransitionOffset]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-237

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Syntax group (1..1000) Specifies to which tuning

Description: group the parameters apply.
(on off) Enable/disable tuning for
enable
group.
noZoomSwitchInS Non Zoom mode switchIn scalar
calar (multiply).
noZoomSwitchOut Non Zoom mode switchOut scalar
Scalar (multiply).
noZoomTransition Non Zoom mode transition scalar
Scalar (multiply).
noZoomSwitchInO Non Zoom mode switchIn offset
ffset (add).
noZoomSwitchOut Non Zoom mode switchOut offset
Offset (add).
noZoomTransition Non Zoom mode transition offset
Offset (add).
zoomSwitchInScal Zoom mode switchIn scalar
ar (multiply).
zoomSwitchOutSc Zoom mode switchOut scalar
alar (multiply).
zoomTransitionSc Zoom mode transition scalar
alar (multiply).
zoomSwitchInOffs
Zoom mode switchIn offset (add).
et
zoomSwitchOutOff
Zoom mode switchOut offset (add).
set
zoomTransitionOff
Zoom mode transition offset (add).
set

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-238 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.94 LOS
The LOS command defines the line-of-sight test.

Format: LOS [ENABLE=enable] [TP=tp] [PRIORITY=priority] [MM=mm]

[X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]
[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude] [ENDMM=endmm] [ENDX=endx] [ENDY=endy]
[ENDZ=endz] [ENDLATDEGREE=endlatdegree]
[ENDLATMINUTE=endlatminute] [ENDLATSECOND=endlatsecond]
[ENDLONGDEGREE=endlongdegree]
[ENDLONGMINUTE=endlongminute]
[ENDLONGSECOND=endlongsecond] [ENDALTITUDE=endaltitude]
[HEADING=heading] [PITCH=pitch] [LENGTH=length]
[MINLENGTH=minlength] [CLOSEST=closest]
[MATERIALMASKINDEX=materialmaskindex]
[MOVINGMODELMASKINDEX=movingmodelmaskindex]
[BYPASSMFE=bypassmfe] [CLEAR=clear] [LIST=list]

[\CONFIG] [\FIC]

Syntax (off on) Enable or disable all CDL

enable
Description: tests.
tp (0..65536) LOS Testpoint number.
priority Priority of the testpoint.
mm Relative start point moving model or
submodel number.
x Moving Model start point X offset.
y Moving Model start point Y offset.
z Moving Model start point Z offset.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

latdegree (-90..90) Absolute start point latitude
degrees.
latminute (0..60) Absolute start point latitude
minutes.
latsecond (0..60) Absolute start point latitude
seconds.
longdegree (-180..180) Absolute start point
longitude degrees.
longminute (0..60) Absolute start point longitude
minutes.
longsecond (0..60) Absolute start point longitude
seconds.
altitude Absolute start point altitude.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-239

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

endmm Relative end point moving model or

submodel number.
endx Moving model end point X offset.
endy Moving model end point y offset.
endz Moving model end point Z offset.
endlatdegree (-90..90) Absolute end point latitude
degrees.
endlatminute (0..60) Absolute end point latitude
minutes.
endlatsecond (0..60) Absolute end point latitude
seconds.
endlongdegree (-180..180) Absolute end point
longitude degrees.
endlongminute (0..60) Absolute end point longitude
minutes.
endlongsecond (0..60) Absolute end point longitude
seconds.
endaltitude Absolute end point altitude.
heading (-360..360) Line of sight direction
heading.
pitch (-360..360) Line of sight direction
pitch.
length Length of line of sight segment.
minlength Minimum length of intersection.
closest (off on) Return the closest or first
intersection.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

materialmaskindex (0..255) Index of material mask.
movingmodelmaskindex (0..8) Index of moving model mask.
bypassmfe The testpoint is processed by the RT
(ON/OFF) rather than an MFE.
clear Disables a testpoint.
list Lists all LOS testpoints currently
enabled.
[\CONFIG] See the descriptions below for
[\FIC] details.

2-240 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.94.1 LOS \CONFIG

The \CONFIG qualifier has configuration settings for all LOS test points.

Format: LOS \CONFIG [ROTATESTAMPS=rotateStamps] [WEATHER=weather]

[MINCLOUDFADE=minCloudFade]
[CLOUDSPHERESCALE=cloudSphereScale] [BOXSCALE=boxScale]
[THEMELFEATURES=themelFeatures]

Syntax (segment eye) Direction to rotate

rotateStamps
Description: stamps for LOS test.
weather Enables CDL intersections with
(OFF/ON) clouds and fog.
(0..1) Minimum Cloud Particle fade
minCloudFade
value for intersections.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
cloudSphereScale
the particle sphere test.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
boxScale
the particle box test.
themelFeatures Enable LOS to intersect themel
(OFF/ON) features.

2.4.94.2 LOS \DISTSHORE

The \DISTSHORE qualifier allows debug printing of distance to shore
values.

Format: LOS \DISTSHORE [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax enable Enables debug printing of distance to

Description: (ON/OFF) shore values.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.94.3 LOS \FIC
The \FIC qualifier determines whether the material returns FIC.

Format: LOS \FIC [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax enable
Enables FIC LOS responses.
Description: (ON/OFF)

2.4.94.4 LOS \MONITOR

The \MONITOR qualifier monitors a single LOS test point stats.

Format: LOS \MONITOR [TP=tp]

Syntax
tp (-1..65536) Test point ID
Description:

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-241

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.95 LRF
The LRF command defines the laser range-finder cursor.

Format: LRF [ENABLE=enable] [CURSOR=cursor] [VIEWPORT=viewport]

[HEADING=heading] [PITCH=pitch] [ROLL=roll] [LIGHT=light]
[COLOR=color] [CLEAR=clear] [LIST=list]

[\CONFIG] [\DEGRADE] [\LATLON_FORMAT] [\TEXT]

Syntax enable
Enable or disable all LRF cursors.
Description: (ON/OFF)
cursor (0..7) LRF cursor number.
viewport (0..63) Cursor viewport number.
heading (-360..360) Cursor direction heading.
pitch (-360..360) Cursor direction pitch.
roll (-360..360) Cursor direction roll.
[DEPRECATED]
light Enable or disable a cursor light.
(ON/OFF)
color (red yellow green cyan blue magenta
white black) Color used to draw the
cursor.
clear Disables a cursor.
list List all LRF cursors currently enabled.
[\CONFIG] Refer to the following descriptions for
[\DEGRADE] more information about these
[\LATLON_FORMAT] qualifiers.
[\TEXT]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.95.1 LRF \CONFIG
The \CONFIG qualifier configures run-time parameters for laser range-
finder.

Format: LRF \CONFIG [MAXRANGE=maxRange]

[RESPONSEMODE=responseMode] [MINALPHA=minAlpha]
[WEATHER=weather] [MINCLOUDFADE=minCloudFade]
[CLOUDSPHERESCALE=cloudSphereScale] [BOXSCALE=boxScale]
[THEMELFEATURES=themelFeatures]

Syntax The maximum valid range for an LRF

maxRange
Description: test in feet.
responseMode (single continuous) Determines
whether only one response is sent
per request, or whether LRF responds
continuously.

2-242 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

minAlpha (0..1) The minimum polygon alpha

value that is considered an intersect.
weather Enables CDL intersections with
(OFF/ON) clouds and fog.
(0..1) Minimum Cloud Particle fade
minCloudFade
value for intersections.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
cloudSphereScale
the particle sphere test.
(0.001..10) Scale the size used for
boxScale
the particle box test.
themelFeatures Enable LRF to intersect themel
(OFF/ON) features.

2.4.95.2 LRF \DEGRADE

The \DEGRADE qualifier defines LRF degradation due to rain, fog or
visibility.

Format: LRF \DEGRADE [ENABLE=enable] [TYPE=type]

[PERCENT_DEGRADATION=percent_degradation]
[MIN_MULT=min_mult] [MAX_MULT=max_mult]

Syntax enable Enable or disable all cursor

Description: (ON/OFF) degradation.
type (RAIN1 RAIN2 RAIN3 RAIN4 RAIN5
FOG VISIBILITY) Selects the type of
degradation.
percent_degradatio (0..100) Percentage of returns that
n are degraded.
min_mult (0..1) Min. multiplier applied to a
degraded return.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

max_mult (0..1) Max. multiplier applied to a
degraded return.

2.4.95.3 LRF \LATLON_FORMAT

The LATLON_FORMAT qualifier is the lat/lon output format.

Format: LATLON_FORMAT [FORMAT=format]

Syntax (dms decimal) Output format for

format
Description: lat/lon.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-243

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.95.4 LRF \TEXT

The \TEXT qualifier displays cursor distances on the screen.

Format: LRF \TEXT [ENABLE=enable] [CURSOR=cursor] [XOFFSET=xoffset]

[YOFFSET=yoffset]

Syntax enable
Enable or disable LRF text.
Description: (ON/OFF)
cursor (0..7) LRF cursor number.
xoffset LRF horizontal text offset from the
left of the viewport.
yoffset (0..99) LRF vertical text offset from
the bottom of the viewport.

2.4.96 MATERIAL
The MATERIAL command views/sets material palette entry (not
persisted).

Format: MATERIAL [N=n] [AMBIENT=ambient] [DIFFUSE=diffuse]

[SPECULAR=specular] [EMISSIVE=emissive] [SHININESS=shininess]
[RANGEADJUSTENABLE=rangeAdjustEnable]

[\AMBRANGEADJUST] [\CONTAMINANT] [\DIFFRANGEADJUST]

[\SPECRANGEADJUST]

Syntax
n (0..255) material index
Description:
ambient (0..1) ambient scalar
diffuse (0..1) diffuse scalar

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

specular (0..1) specular scalar
emissive (0..1) emissive scalar
shininess (0..480) specular exponent
rangeAdjustEnable Range-based adjustment enable
(ON/OFF) flag.
[\AMBRANGEADJUST] See the descriptions below for
[\CONTAMINANT] details.
[\DIFFRANGEADJUST]
[\SPECRANGEADJUST]

2-244 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.96.1 MATERIAL \AMBRANGEADJUST

The \AMBRANGEADJUST qualifier views or sets tunable parameters for
range-based adjustment of ambient component of material palette
entries.

Format: MATERIAL \AMBRANGEADJUST [NEARRANGE=nearRange]

[FARRANGE=farRange] [FARSCALE=farScale] [SCENE=scene]
[LIST=list]

Syntax (256..65536) Near range where

nearRange
Description: ambient adjustment begins.
farRange (256..65536) Far range where
ambient adjustment ends.
farScale (0..2) Ambient scalar at far range.
scene (dawn day dusk night) Time of day
scene to which the scalar applies.
list List ambient material range adjust
scalars.

2.4.96.2 MATERIAL \CONTAMINANT

The \CONTAMINANT qualifier views/sets tunable material palette
parameters for runway contaminants.

Format: MATERIAL \CONTAMINANT [SELECT=select] [AMBIENT=ambient]

[DIFFUSE=diffuse] [SPECULAR=specular] [EMISSIVE=emissive]
[SHININESS=shininess]

Syntax
select (1..9) contaminant select
Description:
ambient (0..1) ambient scalar

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

diffuse (0..1) diffuse scalar
specular (0..1) specular scalar
emissive (0..1) emissive scalar
shininess (0..480) specular exponent

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-245

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.96.3 MATERIAL \DIFFRANGEADJUST

The \DIFFRANGEADJUST qualifier views/sets parameters for range-
based adjustment of diffuse component of material palette entries.

Format: MATERIAL \DIFFRANGEADJUST [NEARRANGE=nearRange]

[FARRANGE=farRange] [FARSCALE=farScale] [SCENE=scene]
[LIST=list]

Syntax (256..65536) Near range where

nearRange
Description: diffuse adjustment begins.
farRange (256..65536) Far range where diffuse
adjustment ends.
farScale (0..2) Diffuse scalar at far range.
scene (dawn day dusk night) Time of day
scene to which the scalar applies.
list List diffuse material range adjust
scalars.

2.4.96.4 MATERIAL \SPECRANGEADJUST

The \SPECRANGEADJUST qualifier views/sets tunable parameters for
range-based adjustment of specular component of material palette
entries.

Format: MATERIAL \SPECRANGEADJUST [NEARRANGE=nearRange]

[FARRANGE=farRange] [FARSCALE=farScale] [SCENE=scene]
[LIST=list]

Syntax (256..65536) Near range where

nearRange
Description: specular adjustment begins.
farRange (256..65536) Far range where

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

specular adjustment ends.
farScale (0..2) Specular scalar at far range.
scene (dawn day dusk night) Time of day
scene to which the scalar applies.
list List specular material range adjust
scalars.

2-246 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.97 MATERIALMASK
The MATERIALMASK command defines material masks that determine
which polygons can be intersected based on material code.

Format: MATERIALMASK [INDEX=index] [MODE=mode] [CODE0=code0]

[CODE1=code1] [CODE2=code2] [CODE3=code3] [CODE4=code4]
[CODE5=code5] [CODE6=code6] [CODE7=code7] [CODE8=code8]
[CODE9=code9] [INIT=init]

[\PRINT]

Syntax
index (1..255) Material mask index number
Description:
mode (inclusion exclusion) Mask mode or
type
code0 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
code1 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
code2 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
code3 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
code4 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
code5 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
code6 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
code7 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
code8 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
code9 (0..255) Material code to (un)mask
init Initializes the mask based on the
mode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[\PRINT] Refer to the following description for
more information about this qualifier.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-247

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.97.1 MATERIALMASK \PRINT

The \PRINT qualifier prints the existing material mask.

Format: MATERIALMASK \PRINT [INDEX=index] [MODE=mode]

Syntax (1..255) Material mask index

index
Description: number.
(inclusion exclusion) Mask mode or
mode
type.

2.4.98 MESSAGE
The MESSAGE command sends a moving model message.

Format: MESSAGE [PROCESS=process] [MSG=msg] [AUTO=auto]

Syntax (crit fast slow back) The process

process
Description: type.
msg The message to send.
auto Enable/disable auto field rate
(ON/OFF) messages.

2.4.99 MFE
The MFE command has six qualifiers that are described in the sections
below. Refer to the EP2 MF Module User Guide (RCPN 964-5924-016) for
details about using this command and its qualifiers.

2.4.99.1 MFE \BENCHMARK

The \BENCHMARK qualifier enables MFE benchmarking – DEBUG only.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: MFE \BENCHMARK [ENABLE=enable] [MFEID=mfeid] [TYPE=type]
[TP=tp] [DUMP=dump] [LATENCY=latency] [ROUNDTRIP=roundtrip]
[RESET=reset]

Syntax Enables/disables the benchmarking

enable
Description: interface
(1..7) The id for the MFE to
mfeid
benchmark
(hat cdl los lrf hd fjcd) The mission
type
functions type to benchmark
tp (0..255) The test point to track
Dumps the EP time corrected stats
dump for the current test point being
benchmarked

2-248 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Echoes the EP time corrected average

latency response latency for the testpoint
being benchmarked
Echoes the single shot roundtrip
latency from when a host packet is
roundtrip
received to when the results is sent
to the host
reset Resets the benchmarking interface

2.4.99.2 MFE \CLI

The \CLI qualifier sends a CLI command to a specific MFE.

Format: MFE \CLI [ID=id] [CLI=cli] [ALL=all]

Syntax
id (1..7) The ID for the MFE.
Description:
cli The CLI to process “in quotes.”
When present, all MFEs will be sent
all
the CLI.

2.4.99.3 MFE \DROP

The \DROP qualifier is debug only functionality used to simulate an MFE
dropping out of the game.

Format: MFE \DROP [ID=id]

Syntax (1..7) The ID for the MFE dropping

id
Description: out.

2.4.99.4 MFE \EVENTS

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \EVENTS qualifier is debug only functionality used to dump event
files from RT and MFEs.
Format: MFE \EVENTS [DUMP=dump] [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax
dump Dumps the EP Event files
Description:
enable
Enables/disables event collection.
(ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-249

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.99.5 MFE \LIST

The \LIST qualifier instructs the MFE to list test points currently being
processed.

Format: MFE \LIST [TYPE=type] [ID=id]

Syntax (hat cdl los lrf hd fjcd all) The mission

Description: type functions type whose test points are
to be listed.
id (0..7) The id for the MFE.

2.4.99.6 MFE \TRAVERSE

The \TRAVERSE qualifier controls MFE-specific handling during the
mission functions traversal.

Format: MFE \TRAVERSE [HIGHRESFEATRADIUS=HighResFeatRadius]

[HIGHRESMODELRADIUS=HighResModelRadius]

Syntax Radius from the eye to which the MFE

Description: will traverse the highest LOD of
HighResFeatRadius paged features from the Scene
Manager. A zero setting leaves LOD
to follow the visual profile.
Radius from the eye to which the MFE
will traverse the highest LOD of
paged models not from the Scene
HighResModelRadius
Manager (airports, moving models).
A zero setting leaves LOD to follow
the visual profile.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-250 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.100 MIRROR
The MIRROR command selects mirroring type for a viewport.

Format: MIRROR [VIEW=view] [TYPE=type] [DIRECTION=direction]

[LIST=list]

[\MODEL] [\VIEWPORT]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
(normal viewport model) Viewport
type
mirror type.
(off x y both) Viewport mirror
direction
direction.
list List all mirror viewports.
Refer to the following descriptions for
[\MODEL]
more information about these
[\VIEWPORT]
qualifiers.

2.4.100.1 MIRROR \MODEL

The \MODEL qualifier configures modeled mirrors.

Format: MIRROR \MODEL [ENABLE=enable] [EYE=eye] [RANGE=range]

[PMOD=pmod] [RES=res] [CLIP=clip]

Syntax enable
Enable/disable modeled mirroring.
Description: (ON/OFF)
eye (0..31) Eyepoint number.
(0..800) The range at which mirror
range

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

image fades in.
(0..2) Mirror image sharpness
pmod
control.
(32..1024) Resolution of mirror
res
image.
(0..10) The near clip distance from
clip
center of mirror.

2.4.100.2 MIRROR \VIEWPORT

The \VIEWPORT qualifier configures/controls viewport mirrors.

Format: MIRROR \VIEWPORT [VIEW=view] [EYE=eye] [SIZEX=sizeX]

[SIZEY=sizeY] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [H=h] [P=p] [R=r]
[RADIUS=radius] [PAN=pan] [TILT=tilt]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-251

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
(0..31) Eyepoint number that mirror
eye
tracks with.
sizeX (0..100) Mirror size X.
sizeY (0..100) Mirror size Y.
x X offset of mirror.
y Y offset of mirror.
z Z offset of mirror.
h Heading of mirror.
p Pitch of mirror.
r Roll of mirror.
radius (0..100) Radius of mirror (0=flat).
pan Pan of mirror.
tilt Tilt of mirror.

2.4.101 MONOCONVERSIONTUNE
The MONOCONVERSIONTUNE command sets/gets mono-conversion
tuning parameters per EM band.

Format: MONOCONVERSIONTUNE [EMBAND=emband] [REDCOEFF=redCoeff]

[GREENCOEFF=greenCoeff] [BLUECOEFF=blueCoeff]
[TEXTURESCALAR=textureScalar] [TEXTUREOFFSET=textureOffset]

Syntax (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL RADAR

Description: emband DTV) Specifies the emband for mono-
conversion properties (required).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

redCoeff (0..1) Red coefficient for mono-conversion.
greenCoeff (0..1) Green coefficient for mono-
conversion.
blueCoeff (0..1) Blue coefficient for mono-conversion.
textureScalar (0..1) Scalar applied to texture after
monochrome conversion.
textureOffset (-1000..1000) Offset applied to texture
after monochrome conversion.

2-252 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.102 MONOINTENSITY
The MONOINTENSITY command has two qualifiers that are described in
the sections below.

2.4.102.1 MONOINTENSITY \POLYGON

The \POLYGON qualifier loads a polygon mono-intensity palette.

Format: MONOINTENSITY \POLYGON [SENSOR=sensor] [N=n]

[PRIMARY=primary] [SECONDARY=secondary]

Syntax (nvg evs mwir lwir eo dtv) Sensor

sensor
Description: type.
n (-1..4095) Palette index.
primary (0..16) Primary intensity.
secondary (0..16) Secondary intensity.

2.4.102.2 MONOINTENSITY \TEXTURE

The \TEXTURE qualifier loads a texture mono-intensity palette.

Format: MONOINTENSITY \TEXTURE [SENSOR=sensor] [N=n]

[INTENSITY=intensity]

Syntax
sensor (nvg evs mwir lwir eo) Sensor type.
Description:
n (-1..4095) Palette index.
intensity (0..1) Intensity.

2.4.103 MOVINGMODELMASK

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The MOVINGMODELMASK command defines moving models that should
be excluded from mission functions.

Format: MOVINGMODELMASK [INDEX=index] [MM0=mm0] [MM1=mm1]

[MM2=mm1] [MM3=mm3] [MM4=mm4] [MM5=mm5] [MM6=mm6]
[MM7=mm7] [MM8=mm8] [MM9=mm9] [MASTTYPE=maskType]
[REMOVE=remove] [RESET=reset]

[\PRINT]

Syntax (1..8) Moving Model mask index

index
Description: number.
mm0 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.
mm1 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.
mm2 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-253

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

mm3 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.

mm4 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.
mm5 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.
mm6 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.
mm7 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.
mm8 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.
mm9 (0..65535) Moving Model to mask.
maskType (motionSystem modelSlot) Type of
model IDs to mask.
remove Remove the listed models from the
mission functions traversal exclude
mask.
reset Do not exclude any moving models
from this mask.
[\PRINT] Refer to the following description for
more information about this qualifier.

2.4.103.1 MOVINGMODELMASK \PRINT

The \PRINT qualifier prints the existing moving model mask.

Format: MOVINGMODELMASK \PRINT [INDEX=index]

Syntax (1..8) Moving Model mask index

index
Description: number.

2.4.104 NEWPAGER
The NEWPAGER command enables the new pager functionality.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: NEWPAGER [ENABLE=enable]
[ENABLEELEVATIONPAGER=enableElevationPager]

[\CT] [\ELEV] [\TEST]

Syntax enable
Enables new pager.
Description: (ON/OFF)
enableElevationPager
Enables elevation pager.
(ON/OFF)
[\CT] Refer to the following descriptions for
[\ELEV] more information about these
[\TEST] qualifiers.

2-254 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.104.1 NEWPAGER \CT

Format: NEWPAGER \CT [MAXLOD=maxLOD]

[PAGEINTHROTTLE=pageInThrottle]
[PAGEOUTTHROTTLE=pageOutThrottle] [MAXRANGE=maxrange]
[OFFSETCENTERPRIORITYCIRCLERADIUS=offsetCenterPriorityCircleRa
dius] [PROJECTEDPIXELSIZESCALAR=projectedPixelSizeScalar]
[DEBUGDRAW=debugDraw] [TESTPATTERNCT=testPatternCT]
[SLEEPTESTPATTERN=sleepTestPattern]
[BYPASSSTAGE0PAGEINSLEEPINMS=bypassStage0PageInSleepInMS]

Syntax
maxLOD (0..32) max level for CT.
Description:
pageInThrottle (0..1000) page-in queue throttle.
pageOutThrottle (0..10000) page-out queue throttle.
maxRange Max range for CT.
offsetCenterPriority Offset center priority circle radius.
CircleRadius
projectedPixelSizeS projectedPixelSizeScalar
calar
debugDraw (0..1) draw paged cell boundaries for
debug.
testPatternCT Draw test pattern CT maps.
(ON/OFF)
sleepTestPattern Sleep amount for test pattern
bypassStage0PageI Sleep amount for bypassing stage0
nSleepInMS page-in

2.4.104.2 NEWPAGER \ELEV

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: NEWPAGER \ELEV [MAXLOD=maxLOD]
[PAGEINTHROTTLE=pageInThrottle]
[PAGEOUTTHROTTLE=pageOutThrottle]
[HIGHRESRADIUS=highResRadius] [DEBUGDRAW=debugDraw]
[PAGEELEVATIONINSLOWTIME=pageElevationInSlowtime]

Syntax
maxLOD (0..32) max level for Elev.
Description:
pageInThrottle (0..1000) page-in queue throttle.
pageOutThrottle (0..10000) page-out queue throttle.
highResRadius High resolution paging radius
debugDraw (0..1) draw paged cell boundaries for
debug.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-255

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

pageElevationInSlo Page elevation data in slowtime.

wtime
(ON/OFF)

2.4.104.3 NEWPAGER \TEST

Format: NEWPAGER \TEST [MODE=mode]

[TOCIRCLEWITHFALLOFFMAXLEVEL=toCircleWithFalloffMaxLevel]
[TOCIRCLEWITHFALLOFFRADIUS=toCircleWithFalloffRadius]
[TOCIRCLESINGLELODPAGELEVEL=toCircleSingleLODPageLevel]
[TOCIRCLESINGLELODRADIUS=toCircleSingleLODRadius]
[OFFSETCENTERMAXLEVEL=offsetCenterMaxLevel]
[OFFSETCENTERRADIUS=offsetCenterRadius]
VIEWCONEMAXLEVEL=ViewConeMaxLevel]
[PAGEINTHROTTLE=pageInThrottle]
[PAGEOUTTHROTTLE=pageOutThrottle] [DEBUGDRAW=debugDraw]

Syntax (TO_CIRCLE_WITH_FALLOFF
Description: TO_CIRCLE_SINGLE_LOD
mode
OFFSET_CENTER VIEW_CONE) test
pager mode
toCircleWithFalloffM (0..32) To-circle with falloff max level
axLevel Test.
toCircleWithFalloffR Paging radius for to-circle with falloff
adius (feet).
toCircleSingleLODPa (0..32) Page level for to-circle single
geLevel LOD Test.
toCircleSingleLODRa Paging radius for to-circle single LOD
dius (feet).
offsetCenterMaxLev
(0..32) Max level for Test.
el

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

offsetCenterRadius Paging radius in feet.
ViewConeMaxLevel (0..32) Max level for Test.
pageInThrottle (0..1000) Page-in queue throttle.
pageOutThrottle (0..10000) Page-out queue throttle.
debugDraw (0..1) Draw paged cell boundaries for
debug.

2-256 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.105 NVGBLOOM
The NVGBLOOM command specifies the parameters to tune the blooms
and halos around lightpoints in an NVG scene. These parameters include
a threshold for the intensity of a light before blooms and halos are
displayed, which is important for performance. Typically, this command
is used to tune parameters while running, then the tuned parameters
are placed in a reset (.rst) file that is executed at startup.
This applies to EP-80 platforms only.
Format: NVGBLOOM [ENABLE=enable] [THRESHOLD=threshold]
[HALOROLLOFF=halorolloff] [BLOOMROLLOFF=bloomrolloff]
[ATTEN0=a] [ATTEN1=b] [ATTEN2=c]

[\ALPHA] [\DEPTHDELTA] [\DIAMETER] [\HALOALPHA]

[\HALODIAMETER] [\TEXTURE] [\WEIGHT]

Syntax enable
Enable halos.
Description: (ON/OFF)
threshold (0..1) Halo on threshold.
halorolloff (0..1) Start halo rolloff.
bloomrolloff (0..1) Start bloom rolloff.
Real number coefficients used to
control the amount of range
attenuation used on lightpoints.
The intensity of the light is gained by
1.0/(a + b*r + c*r*r), where r is the
range in feet. The intensity then
a, b, c
determines the appearance of blooms
and halos.
The default values of a, b, and c are

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1.0, .0001, .0000001, respectively.
Rendermode controls how halos and
blooms are drawn.
[\ALPHA] Refer to the following descriptions for
[\DEPTHDELTA] more information about these
[\DIAMETER] qualifiers.
[\HALOALPHA]
[\HALODIAMETER]
[\TEXTURE]
[\WEIGHT]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-257

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Example: NVGBLOOM ENABLE=ON THRESHOLD=.01

HALOROLLOFF=.75 BLOOMROLLOFF=.65 ATTEN0=.9
ATTEN1=.001 ATTEN2=.000001
Halos and blooms are enabled when NVG is selected. They
will be drawn on all lightpoints that are brighter than .01.
The Halos will begin to rolloff 75% of the way to the edge
and the blooms will begin to rolloff at 65%. The range
attenuation coefficients are set to .9, .001, and .000001

2.4.105.1 NVGBLOOM \ALPHA

The \ALPHA qualifier specifies the bloom alpha (opacity) as a function of
the lightpoint intensity received at the (NVG) eyepoint. This is specified
as a table of 5 points of intensity and alpha. This table is linearly
interpolated at runtime to determine the bloom diameter. Normally this
CLI command is used at runtime to tune an NVG implementation, then
the tuned parameters are placed in a reset (.rst) file that is executed at
IG startup.
This applies to EP-80 platforms only.

Format: NVGBLOOM \ALPHA [X1=x1] [Y1=y1] [X2=x2] [Y2=y2] [X3=x3]

[Y3=y3] [X4=x4] [Y4=y4] [X5=x5] [Y5=y5]

Syntax A table defining alpha (the y values) as

Description: a function of intensity (the x values).
All values are real.
The alpha units (the y) are between
0.0 and 1.0, where 0.0 means
transparent and 1.0 is fully opaque.
The x values are intensity and range
nominally from 0.0 to 1.0, although
values greater than 1.0 are possible.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The lookup checks intensity against x1,
x2,..x5 in order, and the first time
x1, y1, x2, y2, x3,
intensity is less than the x value, the
y3, x4, y4, x5, y5
interpolation occurs. Because of this,
normally x1<x2<x3<x4<x5.
There is an implicit point (x0, y0)
which is assumed to be 0.0, 0.0, so
normally x1 is specified to be larger
than 0.0.
Intensity larger than x5 results in the
table lookup returning y5.
Default values are x1=0.0, x2=0.2,
x3=0.4, x4=0.6, x5=0.8, and y1=1.0,
y2=1.0, y3=1.0, y4=1.0, y5=1.0

2-258 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Example: NVGBLOOM \ALPHA X1=0.1 X2=0.3 X3=5.0 X4=5.0 X5=5.0

Y1=0.0 Y2=1.0 Y3=1.0 Y4=1.0 Y5=1.0
Define the bloom diameter(y) as a function of intensity(x) by
doing a linear interpolation using the provided table. This
particular table will make the bloom start to appear at
intensity 0.1 and be fully opaque at intensity 0.3.

2.4.105.2 NVGBLOOM \DEPTHDELTA

The \DEPTHDELTA qualifier is a DEBUG COMMAND: This qualifier is
intended to adjust the occulting test for the Blooms and Halos.

Format: NVGBLOOM \DEPTHDELTA [MIN=min] [MAX=max] [START=start]

[END=end]

Syntax Minimum value for the depth delta -

min
Description: used for far objects.
Maximum value for the depth delta –
max
used for close objects.
Start value for the depth delta –
start
lower is farther from eye.
End value for the depth delta –
end
higher is closer to eye.

2.4.105.3 NVGBLOOM \DIAMETER

The \DIAMETER qualifier specifies the bloom diameter as a function of
the lightpoint intensity received at the (NVG) eyepoint. This is specified
as a table of 5 points of intensity and bloom diameter. This table is
linearly interpolated at runtime to determine the bloom diameter.
Normally this CLI command is used at runtime to tune an NVG
implementation, then the tuned parameters are placed in a reset (.rst)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

file that is executed at IG startup.
This applies to EP-80 platforms only.

Format: NVGBLOOM \DIAMETER [X1=x1] [Y1=y1] [X2=x2] [Y2=y2] [X3=x3]

[Y3=y3] [X4=x4] [Y4=y4] [X5=x5] [Y5=y5]

Syntax The bloom diameter units (the y) are

Description: fractions of the halo size, so a value
of 1.0 means the bloom is the same
size as the halo.

x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, The x values are intensity, and range
y3, x4, y4, x5, y5 nominally from 0.0 to 1.0, although
values greater than 1.0 are possible.
The lookup checks intensity against
x1, x2,..x5 in order, and the first
time intensity is less than the x
value, the interpolation occurs.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-259

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Because of this, normally

x1<x2<x3<x4<x5.
There is an implicit point (x0, y0)
which is assumed to be 0.0, 0.0, so
normally x1 is specified to be larger
than 0.0.
Intensity larger than x5 will result in
the table lookup returning y5.
Default values are: x1=0.015,
x2=0.228, x3=0.441, x4=0.673,
x5=1.0 and y1=0.006, y2=0.013,
y3=.025, y4=0.048, y5=0.119.
Example: NVGBLOOM \DIAM X1=0.045 X2=0.192 X3=0.465
X4=0.754 X5=1.0 Y1=.144 Y2=.268 Y3=.344 Y4=0.492
Y5=0.809
Define the bloom diameter (y) as a function of intensity (x)
by doing a linear interpolation using the provided table.

2.4.105.4 NVGBLOOM \HALOALPHA

The \HALOALPHA qualifier specifies the halo alpha (opacity) as a
function of the light point intensity received at the (NVG) eyepoint. This
is specified as a table of 5 points of intensity and alpha. This table is
linearly interpolated at runtime to determine the bloom diameter.
Normally this CLI command is used at runtime to tune an NVG
implementation, then the tuned parameters are placed in a reset (.rst)
file that is executed at IG startup.
This applies to EP-80 platforms only.

Format: NVGBLOOM \HALOALPHA [X1=x1] [Y1=y1] [X2=x2] [Y2=y2]

[X3=x3] [Y3=y3] [X4=x4] [Y4=y4] [X5=x5] [Y5=y5]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax A table defining alpha (the y values)
Description: as a function of intensity (the x
values). All values are real.
The alpha units (the y) are between
0.0 and 1.0, where 0.0 means
transparent and 1.0 is fully opaque.

x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, The x values are intensity and range
y3, x4, y4, x5, y5 nominally from 0.0 to 1.0, although
values greater than 1.0 are possible.
The lookup will check intensity
against x1, x2,..x5 in order, and the
first time intensity is less than the x
value, the interpolation occurs.
Because of this, normally
x1<x2<x3<x4<x5.

2-260 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

There is an implicit point (x0, y0)

which is assumed to be 0.0, 0.0, so
normally x1 is specified to be larger
than 0.0.
Intensity larger than x5 will result in
the table lookup returning y5.
Default values are: x1=0.045,
x2=0.192, x3=0.465, x4=0.754,
x5=1.0, y1=.144, y2=.268, y3=.344,
y4=0.492, y5=0.809.
Example: NVGBLOOM \HALOALPHA X1=0.2 X2=1.0 X3=5.0 X4=5.0
X5=5.0 Y1=0.0 Y2=1.0 Y3=1.0 Y4=1.0 Y5=1.0
This particular table will make the halo start to appear at
intensity 0.2 and be fully opaque at intensity 1.0.

2.4.105.5 NVGBLOOM \HALODIAMETER

The \HALODIAMETER qualifier specifies the size of the halo on a per
viewport basis. It is a real number that is a fraction of the horizontal
field-of-view that should be taken up by the halo. A value of 1.0 would
cause the halo to span the entire viewport.
This applies to EP-80 platforms only.

Format: NVGBLOOM \HALODIAMETER [VIEWPORT=viewport]

[DIAMETER=diameter]

Syntax An integer specifying the viewport in

viewport
Description: which the NVG halos will be adjusted.
A real number specifying the
diameter of the halos. This is a
constant determined by the geometry

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

inside a night vision goggle, so is
specific to a model of night vision
diameter
goggle. The number specifies the size
as a fraction of the horizontal field-
of-view size, so 1.0 would cause the
halo to span the entire viewport.
Default value is 0.05
Example: NVGBLOOM \HALOALPHA VIEW=0 DIAMETER=0.2
For viewport 0 the diameter of the halos will take up .2 of
the width of the viewport.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-261

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.105.6 NVGBLOOM \TEXTURE

The \TEXTURE qualifier specifies textures to be applied to NVG blooms
and/or halos. Separate textures can be specified for blooms and halos,
and either or both can be textured at the same time.
The EP2 model path is searched for the textures, and relative paths can
be specified within these directories, as well as absolute paths. The
maps should be luminance-alpha, but the luminance channel is ignored,
and only the alpha channel is used to create the texture effect. Note
that specifying a bloom texture results in the bloom rolloff being
ignored, and instead the maximum of bloom or halo intensity is applied
to each pixel to provide a better visual blending.

Format: NVGBLOOM \TEXTURE [BLOOMTEXTURE=bloomtexture]

[HALOTEXTURE=halotexture]

Syntax
bloomtexture Bloom texture filename or path.
Description:
halotexture Halo texture filename or path.

2.4.105.7 NVGBLOOM \WEIGHT

The \WEIGHT qualifier specifies the weighting to be applied to convert
light point colors into NVG sensitivity.
This applies to EP-80 platforms only.

Format: NVGBLOOM \WEIGHT [ENABLE=enable] [RED=redweight]

[GREEN=greenweight] [BLUE=blueweight] [CYAN=cyanweight]
[YELLOW=yellowweight] [MAGENTA=magentaweight]
[WHITE=whiteweight] [METHOD=method]

Syntax ON means that the weights are

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Description: applied to the lightpoint colors to
enable determine source intensity for NVG
(ON/OFF) blooms. OFF means that the modeled
NVG intensity (if modeled) is used.
Default is ON.
The weight of the red component of
redweight
the light.
The weight of the green component
greenweight
of the light.
The weight of the blue component of
blueweight
the light.
The weight of the cyan component of
cyanweight
the light.
The weight of the yellow component
yellowweight
of the light.

2-262 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

The weight of the magenta

magentaweight
component of the light.
The weight of the white component of
whiteweight
the light.
(legacy simple) legacy - existing
method calculation; simple - new simplified
calculation (rgb only).
Example: NVGBLOOM \WEIGHT RED=1.0 GREEN=0.35 BLUE=0.0
CYAN=0.10 YELLOW=0.65 MAGENTA=0.00 WHITE=0.80
ENABLE=ON
Use the values above to determine the NVG intensity of the
lightpoint. Enable the application of the weights

2.4.106 OWNSHIPLIGHT
The OWNSHIPLIGHT command controls steerable ownship lights.

Format: OWNSHIPLIGHT [SELECT=select] [HEADING=heading]

[PITCH=pitch] [LIST=list]

Syntax
select (string of '1's and '0') Switches.
Description:
heading (-180..180) Heading.
pitch (-90..90) Pitch.
list List the steerable lights.

2.4.107 PAGER
The PAGER command provides generic pager settings for CT, terrain,
and 3D point feature pagers.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: PAGER [VIEWPORT=viewport] [PITCH=pitch]
[RAYLENGTH=raylength] [CT_FOLLOW_TERRAIN=ct_follow_terrain]
[PF_FOLLOW_TERRAIN=pf_follow_terrain]
[SEASTATE_FOLLOW_TERRAIN=seastate_follow_terrain] [MM=mm]
[FAKEZOOM=fakeZoom] [FAKEHALFANGLE=fakeHalfAngle]
[SMSUBMITRANGELODMODIFIER=smSubmitRangeLODModifier]
[MAXSWITCHINESTIMATE=maxSwitchInEstimate]
[SWITCHINCOMPRESSIONSCALAR=switchInCompressionScalar]

[\CT] [\ELEVDB] [\GBLINSETRANGEDEFS] [\LISTINSETSINRANGE]

[\PFCULL] [\PGPAGE] [\SEASTATE] [\TERRAINSKIN]

Syntax (0..63) Viewport ID that binds to the

viewport
Description: paging center and look-at direction.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-263

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

pitch (0..1) If ray test is used to determine

paging center, this pitches the look-at
ray between the top and bottom clip
planes (from 1.0 to 0.0).
raylength If ray test is used, this sets the
maximum length of the ray test.
ct_follow_terrain Page mode and paging center of CT
(ON/OFF) will follow those of the terrain's,
except the maxLevel parameter.
pf_follow_terrain Page mode and paging center of point
(ON/OFF) features will follow those of the
terrain's, except the maxLevel
parameter.
seastate_follow_terr Page mode and paging center of sea
ain state surface will follow those of the
(ON/OFF) terrain's, except the maxLevel
parameter.
mm Binds the paging center to a moving
model. The model's position and
forward vector will replace the
eyepoint's when calculating paging
center. This is disabled when mm is 0.
fakeZoom Overrides the viewport's zoom factor
for the pagers. This is for debug
purposes. This is disabled when the
value is < 1.0.
fakeHalfAngle Overrides the viewport's half angle for
the pagers. This is for debug
purposes. This is disabled when the
value is 0.0.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

smSubmitRangeLO - (0..132000) Range LOD modifier for
DModifier submitting to scene manager.
maxSwitchInEstima (0..1e+006) Estimate of max switch-
te in range.
switchInCompressio (0..100) Switch-in compression scalar.
nScalar
[\CT] [\ELEVDB] Refer to the sections below for details
[\GBLINSETRANGE on these qualifiers.
DEFS]
[\LISTINSETSINRAN
GE]
[\PFCULL]
[\PFPAGE]
[\SEASTATE]
[\TERRAINSKIN]

2-264 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.107.1 PAGER \CT

The \CT qualifier provides pager settings for CT pager.

Format: PAGER \CT [MODE=mode] [OFFSET_DIST=offset_dist]

[RAY_SCALE=ray_scale] [MAXLEVEL=maxLevel]
[HIGHRESRADIUS=highResRadius] [DISTSCALE=distScale]
[VIEWCONEMAXLEVEL=ViewConeMaxLevel]
[VIEWCONELENGTH=ViewConeLength]
[VIEWCONEGUARDBAND=ViewConeGuardband]
[VIEWCONEDISTSCALE=ViewConeDistScale]
[VIEWCONEUNCAPDISTSCALE=ViewConeUncapDistScale]
[VIEWCONEOVERRIDE=ViewConeOverride]

Syntax (off normal offset raytest viewcone)

mode
Description: Select paging mode.
offset_dist The offset distance (in feet) when in
"offset" and "raytest" mode.
ray_scale (0..1) Move the paging center in the
intersected ray (1.0 at the
intersected point, 0.0 at the eye
point) when in "raytest" mode.
maxLevel (0..31) The max paging level.
highResRadius Page to the maxLevel LOD within a
radius to the paging center. This
applies to all paging mode.
distScale Scalar that applies to Tcell-to-Page-
Center distance. When > 1, will page
less detail.
ViewConeMaxLevel (0..31)The max paging level when a
TCell is inside the view cone.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ViewConeLength (10..132000) The length of the
viewcone. For "viewcone" mode
ViewConeGuardband (0..45) Expand the view cone by this
half angle(degree). For "viewcone"
mode
ViewConeDistScale The same as distScale but applies to
TCells in the view cone. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeUncapDist The same as distScale but applies to
Scale TCells in the view cone but further
than ViewConeLength. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeOverride Keep View Cone mode enabled when
(OFF/ON) zoom == 1.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-265

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.107.2 PAGER \ELEVDB

The \ELEVDB qualifier has pager settings for elevation database.

Format: PAGER \ELEVDB [MODE=mode] [OFFSET_DIST=offset_dist]

[RAY_SCALE=ray_scale] [MAXLEVEL=maxLevel]
[HIGHRESRADIUS=HighResRadius] [DISTSCALE=distScale]
[VIEWCONEMAXLEVEL=ViewConeMaxLevel]
[VIEWCONELENGTH=ViewConeLength]
[VIEWCONEGUARDBAND=ViewConeGuardband]
[VIEWCONEDISTSCALE=ViewConeDistScale]
[VIEWCONEUNCAPDISTSCALE=ViewConeUncapDistScale]
[VIEWCONEOVERRIDE=ViewConeOverride]

Syntax (off normal offset raytest viewcone)

mode
Description: Select paging mode.
offset_dist The offset distance (in feet) when in
"offset" and "raytest" mode.
ray_scale (0..1) Move the paging center in the
intersected ray (1.0 at the
intersected point, 0.0 at the eye
point) when in "raytest" mode.
maxLevel (0..31) The max paging level.
HighResRadius Page to the maxLevel LOD within a
radius to the paging center. This
applies to all paging mode.
distScale Scalar that applies to Tcell-to-Page-
Center distance. When > 1, will page
less detail.
ViewConeMaxLevel (0..31) The max paging level when a
TCell is inside the view cone.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ViewConeLength (10..132000) The length of the
viewCone For "viewcone" mode.
ViewConeGuardband (0..45) Expand the view cone by this
half angle(degree). For "viewcone"
mode.
ViewConeDistScale The same as distScale but applies to
TCells in the view cone. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeUncapDist The same as distScale but applies to
Scale TCells in the view cone but further
than ViewConeLength. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeOverride Keep View Cone mode enabled when
(OFF/ON) zoom == 1.

2-266 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.107.3 PAGER \GBLINSETINRANGEDEFS

The \GBLINSETINRANGEDEFS qualifier defines the global switch-in
paging range parameters used to determine when an elevation or CT
inset layer is a candidate to be paged in.

Format: PAGER \GBLINSETINRANGEDEFS

[GBLINSETSWITCHINRANGE=gblInsetSwitchInRange]
[SUPPRESSINSETBADFACEWARNINGMSG=suppressInsetBadFaceWar
ningMsg]
[DISABLEINSETINRANGECULLING=disableInsetInRangeCulling]

Syntax (0..5.28e+009) The global switch-in

gblInsetSwitchInRa
Description: paging range for elevation/CT inset
nge
layers. Specified in feet.
suppressInsetBadFa (yes no) Suppress the printing of an
ceWarningMsg inset's bad face bounding box
warning messages
disableInsetInRange ( yes no) Disable the inset layer in-
Culling range culling algorithm. The inset
layer in-range culling is enabled by
default.

2.4.107.4 PAGER \LISTINSETSINRANGE

The \LISTINSETSINRANGE qualifier lists the current number of database
inset layers that are designated as inrange for paging.

2.4.107.5 PAGER \PFCULL

The \PFCULL qualifier provides pager settings for 3D Point Feature
culler.

Format: PAGER \PFCULL [MODE=mode] [OFFSET_DIST=offset_dist]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[RAY_SCALE=ray_scale] [MAXLEVEL=maxLevel]
[HIGHRESRADIUS=highResRadius] [DISTSCALE=distScale]
[VIEWCONEMAXLEVEL=ViewConeMaxLevel]
[VIEWCONELENGTH=ViewConeLength]
[VIEWCONEGUARDBAND=ViewConeGuardband]
[VIEWCONEDISTSCALE=ViewConeDistScale]
[VIEWCONEUNCAPDISTSCALE=ViewConeUncapDistScale]
[VIEWCONEOVERRIDE=ViewConeOverride]

Syntax (off normal offset raytest viewcone)

mode
Description: Select paging mode.
offset_dist The offset distance (in feet) when in
"offset" and "raytest" mode.
ray_scale (0..1) Move the paging center in the
intersected ray (1.0 at the
intersected point, 0.0 at the eye
point) when in "raytest" mode.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-267

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

maxLevel (0..31) The max paging level.

highResRadius Page to the maxLevel LOD within a
radius to the paging center. This
applies to all paging mode.
distScale Scalar that applies to Tcell-to-Page-
Center distance. When > 1, will page
less detail.
ViewConeMaxLevel (0..31)The max paging level when a
TCell is inside the view cone.
ViewConeLength (10..132000) The length of the
viewcone. For "viewcone" mode.
ViewConeGuardban (0..45) Expand the view cone by this
d half angle(degree). For "viewcone"
mode.
ViewConeDistScale The same as distScale but applies to
TCells in the view cone. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeUncapDist The same as distScale but applies to
Scale TCells in the view cone but further
than ViewConeLength. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeOverride Keep View Cone mode enabled when
(OFF/ON) zoom == 1.

2.4.107.6 PAGER \PFPAGE

The \PFPAGE qualifier provides pager settings for 3D Point Feature
pager.

Format: PAGER \PFPAGE [MODE=mode] [OFFSET_DIST=offset_dist]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[RAY_SCALE=ray_scale] [MAXLEVEL=maxLevel]
[HIGHRESRADIUS=highResRadius] [DISTSCALE=distScale]
[VIEWCONEMAXLEVEL=ViewConeMaxLevel]
[VIEWCONELENGTH=ViewConeLength]
[VIEWCONEGUARDBAND=ViewConeGuardband]
[VIEWCONEDISTSCALE=ViewConeDistScale]
[VIEWCONEUNCAPDISTSCALE=ViewConeUncapDistScale]
[VIEWCONEOVERRIDE=ViewConeOverride]

Syntax (off normal offset raytest viewcone)

mode
Description: Select paging mode.
offset_dist The offset distance (in feet) when in
"offset" and "raytest" mode.
ray_scale (0..1) Move the paging center in the
intersected ray (1.0 at the
intersected point, 0.0 at the eye
point) when in "raytest" mode.

2-268 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

maxLevel (0..31) The max paging level.

highResRadius Page to the maxLevel LOD within a
radius to the paging center. This
applies to all paging mode.
distScale Scalar that applies to Tcell-to-Page-
Center distance. When > 1, will page
less detail.
ViewConeMaxLevel (0..31)The max paging level when a
TCell is inside the view cone.
ViewConeLength (10..132000) The length of the
viewcone. For "viewcone" mode.
ViewConeGuardband (0..45) Expand the view cone by this
half angle(degree). For "viewcone"
mode.
ViewConeDistScale The same as distScale but applies to
TCells in the view cone. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeUncapDist The same as distScale but applies to
Scale TCells in the view cone but further
than ViewConeLength. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeOverride Keep View Cone mode enabled when
(OFF/ON) zoom == 1.

2.4.107.7 PAGER \SEASTATE

The \SEASTATE qualifier sets Pager settings for a sea state surface.

Format: PAGER \SEASTATE [MODE=mode] [OFFSET_DIST=offset_dist]

[RAY_SCALE=ray_scale] [MAXLEVEL=maxLevel]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[HIGHRESRADIUS=HighResRadius] [DISTSCALE=distScale]
[VIEWCONEMAXLEVEL=ViewConeMaxLevel]
[VIEWCONELENGTH=ViewConeLength]
[VIEWCONEGUARDBAND=ViewConeGuardband]
[VIEWCONEDISTSCALE=ViewConeDistScale]
[VIEWCONEUNCAPDISTSCALE=ViewConeUncapDistScale]
[VIEWCONEOVERRIDE=ViewConeOverride]

Syntax (off normal offset raytest viewcone)

mode
Description: Select paging mode.
offset_dist The offset distance (in feet) when in
"offset" and "raytest" mode.
ray_scale (0..1) Move the paging center in the
intersected ray (1.0 at the
intersected point, 0.0 at the eye
point) when in "raytest" mode.
maxLevel (0..31) The max paging level.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-269

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

HighResRadius Page to the maxLevel LOD within a

radius to the paging center. This
applies to all paging mode.
distScale Scalar that applies to Tcell-to-Page-
Center distance. When > 1, will page
less detail.
ViewConeMaxLevel (0..31)The max paging level when a
TCell is inside the view cone.
ViewConeLength (10..132000) The length of the
viewcone. For "viewcone" mode
ViewConeGuardband (0..45) Expand the view cone by this
half angle(degree). For "viewcone"
mode
ViewConeDistScale The same as distScale but applies to
TCells in the view cone. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeUncapDist The same as distScale but applies to
Scale TCells in the view cone but further
than ViewConeLength. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeOverride Keep View Cone mode enabled when
(OFF/ON) zoom == 1.

2.4.107.8 PAGER \TERRAINSKIN

The \TERRAINSKIN qualifier provides pager settings for the terrainskin
server.
Format: PAGER \CT [MODE=mode] [OFFSET_DIST=offset_dist]
[RAY_SCALE=ray_scale] [MAXLEVEL=maxLevel]
[HIGHRESRADIUS=highResRadius] [DISTSCALE=distScale]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[VIEWCONEMAXLEVEL=ViewConeMaxLevel]
[VIEWCONELENGTH=ViewConeLength]
[VIEWCONEGUARDBAND=ViewConeGuardband]
[VIEWCONEDISTSCALE=ViewConeDistScale]
[VIEWCONEUNCAPDISTSCALE=ViewConeUncapDistScale]
[VIEWCONEOVERRIDE=ViewConeOverride]
Syntax (off normal offset raytest viewcone)
mode
Description: Select paging mode.
offset_dist The offset distance (in feet) when in
"offset" and "raytest" mode.
ray_scale (0..1) Move the paging center in the
intersected ray (1.0 at the
intersected point, 0.0 at the eye
point) when in "raytest" mode.
maxLevel (0..31) The max paging level.

2-270 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

highResRadius Page to the maxLevel LOD within a

radius to the paging center. This
applies to all paging mode.
distScale Scalar that applies to Tcell-to-Page-
Center distance. When > 1, will page
less detail.
ViewConeMaxLevel (0..31)The max paging level when a
TCell is inside the view cone.
ViewConeLength (10..132000) The length of the
viewcone. For "viewcone" mode.
ViewConeGuardban (0..45) Expand the view cone by this
d half angle(degree). For "viewcone"
mode.
ViewConeDistScale The same as distScale but applies to
TCells in the view cone. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeUncapDist The same as distScale but applies to
Scale TCells in the view cone but further
than ViewConeLength. For
"viewcone" mode.
ViewConeOverride Keep View Cone mode enabled when
(OFF/ON) zoom == 1.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-271

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.108 PAGERDEBUG
The PAGERDEBUG command provides a debug pager.
Format: PAGERDEBUG [TARGET=target] [FACE=face] [LEVEL=level] [X=x]
[Y=y] [DUMPACTIVE=dumpActive] [WAITANALYSIS=waitAnalysis]
[REPAGEELEV=repageElev] [BREAKON=breakOn]
[\PAGETOSPEC]
Syntax (ElevationPager TexturePager PFPager all)
target
Description: Specify a certain type of pager to debug.
face 90..50 Face ID.
level level
x x
y y
dumpActive Dump all active requests.
waitAnalysis Analyze WAITING FOR PARENT requests.
repageElev Repage the specified elevation block and its
ancestors.
breakOn (off TCell Pager) Set a break point at the
given FLI.
[\PAGETOSPEC] Refer to the section below for details on this
qualifier.

2.4.108.1 PAGER \PAGETOSPEC

The \PAGETOSPEC qualifier is a debug pagetospec function.
Format: PAGER \PAGETOSPEC [ENABLE=enable] [LAT=lat] [LON=lon]
[RADIUS=radius] [MAXLEVEL_CT=maxLevel_CT]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[MAXLEVEL_TERR=maxLevel_Terr]
[RENDERTERRAIN=renderTerrain]
Syntax enable
enable PageToSpec debugging
Description: (ON/OFF)
lat (-180..180) lat of paging center
lon (-180..180) lon of paging center
radius paging radius in feet
maxLevel_CT max level for CT
maxLevel_Terr max level for terrain
renderTerrain render terrain
(ON/OFF)

2-272 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.109 PARTICLE
The PARTICLE command controls particle effects.
Format: PARTICLE [FUNC=func] [N=n] [DELAY=Delay] [ALL=all]
[\APPEARANCE] [\CHAIN] [\EMITTER] [\MOVEMENT] [\PRINT]
[\SCUD] [\TEXTURE] [\TIMING] [\TYPE]

Syntax
func (start pause stop) Particle control function.
Description:
n (0..255) The particle effect slot number.
delay Number of seconds to wait before starting
the effect.
all Perform function on all current effects.
[\APPEARANCE] Refer to the sections below for details on
[\CHAIN] these qualifiers.
[\EMITTER]
[\MOVEMENT]
[\PRINT]
[\SCUD]
[\TEXTURE]
[\TIMING]
[\TYPE]

2.4.109.1 PARTICLE \APPEARANCE

The \APPEARANCE qualifier defines particle appearance.
Format: PARTICLE \APPEARANCE [N=n] [DEFNAME=defName]
[STARTRED=startred] [STARTGREEN=startgreen]
[STARTBLUE=startblue] [STARTALPHA=startalpha] [RED=red]
[GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue] [ALPHA=alpha]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[ENDRED=endred] [ENDGREEN=endgreen]
[ENDBLUE=endblue] [ENDALPHA=endalpha]
[STARTSCALE=startScale] [ENDSCALE=endScale] [ZSCALE=zScale]
[MINSIZE=minSize] [MAXSIZE=maxSize]
[SPANRATEFILL=spanratefill]
[SPANRATEFILLFARRANGE=spanratefillFarRange]
[DOUBLESIDED=doublesided] [LIGHTING=lighting]
[CLRBLEND=clrblend] [SCENECOLORMASK=sceneColorMask]
[SCENECOLORSCALE=sceneColorScale] [PRIMEFFECTS=primEffects]
[SENSORINDEX=sensorIndex] [NUMDERIVED=numderived]
[DERIVEDRADIUS=derivedradius]
[GROUNDCLIPENABLE=groundClipEnable]

Syntax
n (0..255) The particle effect slot number.
Description:
defName The name of an effect being defined.
startred (0..255) Starting color of a particle.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-273

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

startgreen (0..255) Starting color of a particle.

startblue (0..255) Starting color of a particle.
startalpha (0..255) Starting color of a particle.
red (0..255) Color of a particle.
green (0..255) Color of a particle.
blue (0..255) Color of a particle.
alpha (0..255) Color of a particle.
endred (0..255) Ending color of a particle.
endgreen (0..255) Ending color of a particle.
endblue (0..255) Ending color of a particle.
endalpha (0..255) Ending color of a particle.
startScale Starting scale of a particle.
endScale Ending scale of a particle.
zScale (0.1..10) Width scale of the particle in Z.
minSize Minimum random size of a particle.
maxSize Maximum random size of a particle.
spanratefill (off/on) Enables spanrate fill on quad
based particles.
spanratefillFarR No span fill rate greater than this range.
ange
doublesided Enables double-sided polys on quad based
particles
lighting (0..3) Particle lighting type.
clrblend (0..2) Particle blend type.
sceneColorMask A bitmask defining which TOD scenes are
affected by the sceneColorScale. Specified
as (NIGHT|DUSK|DAY|DAWN) where

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

DAWN is the LSB.
sceneColorScal (0..1) A scalar applied to the final RGB
e particle color in the TOD scenes specified
by sceneColorMask. For quad/polygon
particle types only.
primEffects (0..15) Particle primitive effects select.
sensorIndex (0..4095) Particle sensorIndex.
numderived (0..1024) Number of particles drawn
derived per particle.
derivedradius Radius of sphere over which derived
particles are generated.
groundClipEnab Enables the clipping of particles at the
le ground to hide particle intersections with
(ON/OFF) the ground on OGL systems

2-274 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.109.2 PARTICLE \CHAIN

The \CHAIN qualifier chains a particle effect to a model system.
Format: PARTICLE \CHAIN [N=n] [DEFNAME=defName] [MM=mm]
[OFFSETX=offsetx] [OFFSETY=offsety] [OFFSETZ=offsetz]
[DIRVEC=dirVec] [INHERITVEL=inheritVel]

Syntax
n (0..255) The particle effect slot number.
Description:
defName The name of an effect being defined.
mm (-1..1024) Moving model system to chain
to.
offsetx Offset from the moving model.
offsety Offset from the moving model.
offsetz Offset from the moving model.
dirVec (world model) Determines if the emitter
direction is rotated with the chained model.
inheritVel Determines if the velocity of the chained
(ON/OFF) model is added to that defined for the
emitter.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-275

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.109.3 PARTICLE \EMITTER

The \EMITTER qualifier defines particle effect emitter parameters.
Format: PARTICLE \EMITTER [N=n] [DEFNAME=defName]
[MAXPARTICLES=maxParticles]
[NUMINITIALPARTICLES=numInitialParticles]
[PARTICLESPERSECOND=particlesPerSecond]
[PARTICLESPACING=particleSpacing]
[EMITTERMODELNAME=emitterModelName]
[MINEMITTERRADIUS=minEmitterRadius]
[MAXEMITTERRADIUS=maxEmitterRadius]
[MINCONEANGLE=minConeAngle]
[MAXCONEANGLE=maxConeAngle] [DIRX=dirx] [DIRY=diry]
[DIRZ=dirz] [LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]
[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude] [FADERANGE=fadeRange]
[CULLRANGE=cullRange] [KILLRANGE=killRange]
[LODSTARTRANGE=LODstartRange]
[LODCOMPLETERANGE=LODcompleteRange] [MINLOD=MinLOD]
[CLAMPTOTERRAIN=clampToTerrain]

Syntax (0..255) The particle effect slot

n
Description: number.
defName The name of an effect being defined.
maxParticles Maximum particles of the effect.
numInitialParticles Number of particles the emitter will
instantaneously create at start
particlesPerSecond Number of particles the emitter will
create per second
particleSpacing Number of feet between emitted
particles.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emitterModelName Model name for surface emitter
minEmitterRadius Inner radius of emitter ring
maxEmitterRadius Outer radius of emitter ring
minConeAngle Minimum random angle of emitter
cone
maxConeAngle Maximum random angle of emitter
cone
dirx Direction of emitter
diry Direction of emitter
dirz Direction of emitter
latdegree (-90..90) Emitter position latitude
degrees
latminute (0..60) Emitter position latitude
minutes

2-276 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

latsecond (0..60) Emitter position latitude

seconds
longdegree (-180..180) Emitter position longitude
degrees
longminute (0..60) Emitter position longitude
minutes
longsecond (0..60) Emitter position longitude
seconds
altitude Emitter position altitude
fadeRange Range at which particles fade in/out
cullRange Range at which particles stop drawing
killRange Range at which particles die
LODstartRange Range at which Level Of Detail
processing starts.
LODcompleteRange Range at which Level Of Detail
processing completes.
MinLOD (0.05..1) The minimum LOD factor (1
= No LOD processing, .9 = draw 8
skip 1, .1 = skip 9 draw 1.
clampToTerrain Emits particles at the terrain
(ON/OFF) elevation.

2.4.109.4 PARTICLE \MOVEMENT

The \MOVEMENT qualifier defines how a particle moves.
Format: PARTICLE \MOVEMENT [N=n] [DEFNAME=defName]
[MININITIALVELOCITY=minInitialVelocity]
[MAXINITIALVELOCITY=maxInitialVelocity]
[MINHEADINGVELOCITY=minHeadingVelocity]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[MAXHEADINGVELOCITY=maxHeadingVelocity]
[MINPITCHVELOCITY=minPitchVelocity]
[MAXPITCHVELOCITY=maxPitchVelocity]
[MINROLLVELOCITY=minRollVelocity]
[MAXROLLVELOCITY=maxRollVelocity]
[MINELEVATION=minElevation] [MAXELEVATION=maxElevation]
[GRAVITYSCALAR=gravityScalar] [WINDSCALAR=windScalar]
[WINDRES=windRes]
[RANDOMPATHPERCENTX=randomPathPercent]
[RANDOMPATHPERCENTY=randomPathPercent]
[RANDOMPATHPERCENTZ=randomPathPercent]
[RANDOMMOVEPERCENTX=randomPathPercent]
[RANDOMMOVEPERCENTY=randomPathPercent]
[RANDOMMOVEPERCENTZ=randomPathPercent] [FRICTION=friction]

Syntax
n (0..255) The particle effect slot number.
Description:

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-277

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

defName The name of an effect being defined.

minInitialVeloci Minimum random particle velocity when
ty emitted in feet per second.
maxInitialVeloci Maximum random particle velocity when
ty emitted in feet per second.
minHeadingVel Minimum random particle heading rotation
ocity velocity in degrees per second.
maxHeadingVel Maximum random particle heading rotation
ocity velocity in degrees per second.
minPitchVelocit Minimum random particle pitch rotation
y velocity in degrees per second.
maxPitchVelocit Maximum random particle pitch rotation
y velocity in degrees per second.
minRollVelocity Minimum random particle roll rotation
velocity in degrees per second.
maxRollVelocity Maximum random particle roll rotation
velocity in degrees per second.
minElevation Minimum altitude allowed for a particle.
maxElevation Maximum altitude allowed for a particle.
gravityScalar Amount of gravity applied to a particle.
windScalar Defines how much a particle will move in
response to wind.
windRes Defines how a particle will slow down as a
function of its velocity.
randomPathPer Controls X amount of random positional
centX change.
randomPathPer Controls Y amount of random positional
centY change.
randomPathPer Controls Z amount of random positional
centZ change.
randomMovePe Controls X amount of movement direction

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

rcentX change.
randomMovePe Controls Y amount of movement direction
rcentY change.
randomMovePe Controls Z amount of movement direction
rcentZ change.
friction Defines how a particle bounces off
minElevation or maxElevation.

2.4.109.5 PARTICLE \PRINT

The \PRINT qualifier prints all the parameters of a particle effect.
Format: PARTICLE \PRINT [N=n] [DEFNAME=defName]
Syntax
n (0..255) The particle effect slot number.
Description:
defName The name of an effect being defined.

2-278 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.109.6 PARTICLE \SCUD

The \SCUD qualifier defines the particle scud effect.
Format: PARTICLE \SCUD [N=n] [DEFNAME=defName] [ENABLE=enable]
[RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]
[VOLSCUDMINVIS=volScudMinVis]
[OPACITYRAMPRATE=opacityRampRate] [MAXOPACITY=maxOpacity]
[STARTRANGE=startRange] [FULLRANGE=fullRange]
[AREASCUDOPACITY=areaScudOpacity]
[AREASCUDALPHATHRESHOLD=areaScudAlphaThreshold]
[FOURCORNERS=fourCorners]
[FORCEDMINOPACITY=forcedMinOpacity]

Syntax
n (0..255) The particle effect slot number.
Description:
defName The name of an effect being defined.
enable Enables scud processing for this particle
(ON/OFF) effect.
red (0..1) Red component of scud color.
green (0..1) Green component of scud color.
blue (0..1) Blue component of scud color.
volScudMinVis Minimum scud visibility if volumetric scud
is enabled.
OpacityRampRa (1e-005..1) Defines the rate at which scud
te opacity can change per field.
maxOpacity (0..1) Maximum opacity of the scud.
startRange (0..10000) Sets the range to a particle
where particle proximity scud begins.
fullRange (0..10000) Sets the range to a particle
where particle proximity scud is fully

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

applied.
areaScudOpacit (0..1) Maximum opacity of the area scud
y when activated
areaScudAlpha (0..1) Minimum alpha above which a
Threshold particle is included in the area scud
bounding box
fourCorners Use particle corners rather than the
(ON/OFF) particle center to define the area scud
bounding box.
forcedMinOpacit (0..1) Defines the min opacity when effect
y is enabled regardless of particle proximity
or the area scud bounding box.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-279

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.109.7 PARTICLE \TEXTURE

The \TEXTURE qualifier configures texture parameters for a particle
effect.
Format: PARTICLE \TEXTURE [N=n] [DEFNAME=defName] [PATH=path]
[TEX0=tex0] [TEX1=tex1] [TEX2=tex2] [TEX3=tex3] [TEX4=tex4]
[TEX5=tex5] [TEX6=tex6] [TEX7=tex7] [THICKNESS=thickness]
[DEPTHMODAMP=depthModAmp] [NUMSUBMAPS0=numSubMaps0]

Syntax
n (0..255) The particle effect slot number.
Description:
defName The name of an effect being defined.
path Path to textures.
tex0 Base texture map filename.
tex1 Detail texture map filename.
tex2 Sensor index map filename.
tex3 Sensor mod map filename.
tex4 Bump texture map filename
tex5 Auxiliary texture map filename.
tex6 Specular texture map filename.
tex7 Light texture map filename.
thickness (0..32768) Volumetric thickness.
depthModAmp (0..128) Depth modulation amplitude.
numSubMaps0 (0..16) Number of submaps in tex0.

2.4.109.8 PARTICLE \TIMING

The \TIMING qualifier defines particle effect timings and durations.
Format: PARTICLE \TIMIMG [N=n] [DEFNAME=defName]
[MINPARTICLEDURATION=minParticleDuration]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[MAXPARTICLEDURATION=maxParticleDuration]
[EFFECTDURATION=effectDuration]
[EMITTERDURATION=emitterDuration] [STARTTIME=startTime]
[ENDTIME=endTime]
Syntax
n (0..255) The particle effect slot number.
Description:
defName The name of an effect being defined.
minParticleDura Minimum random particle lifespan in
tion seconds.
maxParticleDur Maximum random particle lifespan in
ation seconds.
effectDuration Total time an effect will last (in seconds).
emitterDuration Total time in seconds that an emitter will
emit particles.

2-280 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

startTime (0..1) Scalar of the particle's total time to

be used during the start transition.
endTime (0..1) Scalar of the particle's total time to
be used during the end transition.

2.4.109.9 PARTICLE \TYPE

The \TYPE qualifier defines a particle effect type.
Format: PARTICLE \TYPE [N=n] [DEFNAME=defName] [TYPE=type]
[RENDER=render]
[MODELNAME=modelName] [MINSELECT=minSelect]
[MAXSELECT=maxSelect] [EYEPOINTMS=eyepointMS]
[BEHAVIOR=behavior]

Syntax
n (0..255) The particle effect slot number.
Description:
defName The name of an effect being defined.
type (lightpoint quadzaxis quadpoint
quadvolume model modelobject
motionSystem) Particle type.
render (crit fast slow) Render priority for the
particle effect.
modelName Model to load for the particle effect.
minSelect (0..1024) Minimum random select for
particles.
maxSelect (0..1024) Maximum random select for
particles.
eyepointMS (0..65536) Motion system used as the
particle viewing position.
behavior Optional user behavior file for
motionSystem particles.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-281

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.110 PATH
The PATH command sets a file search path.
Format: PATH [TYPE=type] [VALUE=value] [LIST=list]

[\APPEND]
[\PREPEND]
[\REMOVE]
Syntax (db model inset texture postprocessor
Description: type viscal route resetfile reset19 reset20) Path
type.
value Path list separated by semicolons.
list List all path values.
[\APPEND] Refer to the following descriptions for more
[\PREPEND] information about these qualifiers.
[\REMOVE]

2.4.110.1 PATH \APPEND

The \APPEND qualifier appends to a file search path.
Format: PATH \APPEND [TYPE=type] [VALUE=value]
Syntax (db model texture postprocessor viscal
type
Description: route resetfile reset19 reset20) Path type.
value Path list separated by semicolons.

2.4.110.2 PATH \PREPEND

The \PREPEND qualifier prepends to a file search path.
Format: PATH \PREPEND [TYPE=type] [VALUE=value]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax (db model texture postprocessor viscal
type
Description: route resetfile reset19 reset20) Path type.
value Path list separated by semicolons.

2.4.110.3 PATH \REMOVE

The \REMOVE qualifier removes from a file search path.
Format: PATH \REMOVE [TYPE=type] [VALUE=value]
Syntax (db model texture resetfile reset19
type
Description: reset20) Path type.
value Path list separated by semicolons.

2-282 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.111 PHYSICSSHIP

2.4.111.1 PHYSICSSHIP \CLEANALL

The \CLEANALL qualifier is for cleaning physics.

2.4.111.2 PHYSICSSHIP \PROPERTIES

The \PROPERTIES qualifier is for adding physics pertoes to a ship.
Format: PHYSICSSHIP \PROPERTIES [MM=mm] [ENABLE=enable]
[DISPLACEMENT=displacement] [DWT=dwt] [DRAG=drag]
[DRAFT=draft] [TPLENGTH=tplength] [TPWIDTH=tpwidth]
[HPRSMOOTHING=hprsmoothing]
Syntax (10..1000) Used to reference a particular
mm
Description: moving model instance.
enable Enable physics.
(ON/OFF)
displacement (1..3.40282e+038) The volume of the ship
below water.
dwt (0..3.40282e+038) The dead weight
tonnage.
drag (0..100) Water drag.
draft (-1000..1000) Idle submerged height.
tplength (0..10000) The length of the ship.
tpwidth (0..10000) The width of ship.
hprsmoothing (1..1000) HPR smoothing

2.4.112 PHYSICSSIM

2.4.112.1 PHYSICSSIM \BALLISTIC

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \BALLISTIC qualifier is for adding ballistic simulation to object.
Format: PHYSICSSHIP \BALLISTIC [MM=mm] [ENABLE=enable] [VELX=velX]
[VELY=velY] [VELZ=velZ] [DURATION=duration] [UNBIND=unbind]
Syntax (10..1000) Used to reference a particular
mm
Description: moving model instance.
enable Enable physics.
(ON/OFF)
velX (-4000..4000) Add x component.
velY (-4000..4000) add Y component.
velZ (-4000..4000) add Z component.
duration (0..3.40282e+038) Simulation duration.
unbind Unbind on timer end.
(ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-283

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.112.2 PHYSICSSIM \CLEANALL

The \CLEANALL qualifier is for cleaning physics.

2.4.112.3 PHYSICSSIM \PROPERTIES

The \PROPERTIES qualifier is for adding physics properties to an object.
Format: PHYSICSSIM \PROPERTIES [MM=mm] [MASS=mass]
[DRAGX=dragx] [DRAGY=dragy] [DRAGZ=dragz]
[ELASTICITY=elasticity] [COLLISION=collision]
[PARENTMM=parentMM]
Syntax (10..1000) Used to reference a particular
mm
Description: moving model instance.
mass (0..400) Add mass
dragx (0..50) Drag coefficient on X axis
dragy (0..50) Drag coefficient on Y axis
dragz (0..50) Drag coefficient on Z axis
elasticity (0..1) Elasticity of object.
collision Check collision.
parentMM (-1..300) Parent moving model number.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-284 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.113 PLUMES
The PLUMES command performs Plumes functions.
Format: PLUMES [NUM=num] [TYPE=type] [MM=mm] [XOFFSET=xoffset]
[YOFFSET=yoffset] [ZOFFSET=zoffset] [LATDEGREE=latdegree]
[LATMINUTE=latminute] [LATSECOND=latsecond]
[LONGDEGREE=longdegree] [LONGMINUTE=longminute]
[LONGSECOND=longsecond] [ALTITUDE=altitude]
[INITXVEL=initxvel] [INITYVEL=inityvel] [INITZVEL=initzvel]
[BEGINTRANS=beginTrans] [ENDTRANS=endTrans] [START=start]
[STOP=stop] [CLEAN=clean] [ALL=all] [SPMASK=spMask]
[VPMASK=vpMask]
[\DEFINE]
Syntax
num (0..191) Plume identifier
Description:
type (0..127) Plume type identifier, defined
using the plumes\define command
mm (-1..65535) Moving model associated with
the effect, -1 means use lat/lon/alt
xoffset X offset from mm origin
yoffset Y offset from mm origin
zoffset Z offset from mm origin
latdegree (-90..90) latitude degrees
latminute 0..60) latitude minutes
latsecond (0..60) latitude seconds
longdegree (-180..180) longitude degrees
longminute (0..60) longitude minutes
longsecond (0..60) longitude seconds
altitude Altitude.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

initxvel Initial X velocity of the plume, when not
using particles.
inityvel Initial Y velocity of the plume, when not
using particles.
initzvel Initial Z velocity of the plume, when not
using particles.
beginTrans Time from creation of a plume polygon to
when its movement will be transitioned to
the wind and rise effects, when not using
particles.
endTrans Time from creation of a plume polygon to
when its movement has been completely
transitioned to the wind and rise effects,
when not using particles.
start Starts the plume.
stop Stops the plume.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-285

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

clean Makes this plume number available for a

different plume.
all Applies the action stop or clean to all
plumes.
spMask Defines which SPs render this plume
(deprecated – use vpMask).
vpMask Defines which viewports render this plume.
[\DEFINE] Refer to the following description for more
information about this qualifier.

2.4.113.1 PLUMES \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines or modifies a plumes effect.

Format: PLUMES \DEFINE [TYPE=type] [DEFNAME=defName]

[WINDSPEEDAUTOADJUSTNUMPARTICLES=windSpeedAutoAdjustNu
mParticles]
[WINDSPEEDAUTOADJUSTPARTICLESIZE=windSpeedAutoAdjustParti
cleSize]
[WINDSPEEDAUTOADJUSTPARTICLEOPACITY=windSpeedAutoAdjust
ParticleOpacity]
[MMVELOCITYAUTOADJUSTNUMPARTICLES=mmVelocityAutoAdjustN
umParticles] [UPDATE=update] [TEXTURE=texture] [WIDTH=width]
[TOLERANCE=tolerance] [SPREAD=spread]
[REPEATTEXTURE=repeatTexture] [BEGINFADE=beginFade]
[ENDFADE=endFade] [SEGMENTMAXLENGTH=segmentMaxLength]
[WINDEFFECT=windEffect] [RISE=rise] [FADEIN=fadeIn]
[SENSORINDEX=sensorIndex] [USEPARTICLES=useParticles]

Syntax
type (0..127) Plume type identifier.
Description:
defName The particle effect definition to use
as a template for the Plumes effect.
windSpeedAutoAd (0..20) Scale the effect of

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

justNumParticles automatically adjusting the number
of particles based on wind speed.
windSpeedAutoAd (0..20) Scale the effect of
justParticleSize automatically adjusting the size of
particles based on wind speed.
windSpeedAutoAd (0..20) Scale the effect of
justParticleOpacity automatically adjusting the opacity
of particles based on wind speed.
mmVelocityAutoA (0..20) Scale the effect of
djustNumParticles automatically adjusting the number
of particles based on MM velocity.
update [useparticles=off] Texture to use for
plume.
texture [useparticles=off] Initial width of
plume (in feet)

2-286 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

width [useparticles=off] Initial width of

plume (in feet).
tolerance [useparticles=off] Specifies how
often to lay down a new polygon
when forming plumes. If the angular
difference between the last two
polygons being drawn is above the
tolerance, a new polygon will be put
down (in degrees).
spread [useparticles=off] Rate at which the
width of the plume spreads (in
feet/second).
repeatTexture [useparticles=off] Effects how often
the texture repeats along the plume.
Larger numbers spread out the
texture.
beginFade [useparticles=off] Amount of time
after a plume polygon's creation that
it will begin to fade out (in seconds).
endFade [useparticles=off] Amount of time
after a plume polygon's creation that
it will be completely faded out (in
seconds).
segmentMaxLength [useparticles=off] Maximum length
of a plume polygon.
windeffect [useparticles=off] Percentage of the
wind speed that is applied to the
motion of the plume.
rise [useparticles=off] Rate at which
plume will rise.
fadeIn [useparticles=off] Amount of time in
which to fade plume.
sensorIndex (0..4095) [useparticles=off] Material

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sensor index defined in the .if file to
use for this plume type.
useParticles Enable/disable the use of particle-
(ON/OFF) based plumes.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-287

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.114 POSITION
The POSITION command positions a moving model.
NOTE: The behavior of the sub-model dot designation is slightly different for
models being controlled from a host sending opcodes. Whereas the sub-
model designator is optional from the CLI, it is required when called inside
an opcode. This is further clarified in Chapter 3 of this manual, in the
specific "Postion OpCodes" sections. To specify that the entire model,
including all sub-models is designated as sub-model =255. Specifying sub-
model=255 from the host OpCode has the same effect as not specifying a
sub-model from the CLI (OpCode Sub-Model=255 is the same as "Position
mm=900" - the CLI command has no dot designator).

Format: POSITION [MM=mm.sub] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [HEADING=heading]

[PITCH=pitch] [ROLL=roll] [LATDEGREE=latdegree]
[LATMINUTE=latminute] [LATSECOND=latsecond]
[LONGDEGREE=longdegree] [LONGMINUTE=longminute]
[LONGSECOND=longsecond] [ALTITUDE=altitude] [SELECT=select]

[\EQUATE] [\JIGGLE] [\WOBBLE]

Syntax The number of the moving model to

Description: mm or optional be positioned. The desired moving
mm.sub model number is specified (mm), or
with an optional dot notation
(mm.sub), where .sub represents
the desired sub-model to control
(valid 0-254). When no sub-model
is specified, the real-time assumes
that the select and position
information is to be applied to the
entire model, including all sub-
models (Position mm=900

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Select=1). In this first instance with
no sub-model designated using the
dot notation the real-time assumes
that all of the sub-models will be
active to the specified select. This is
the standard method for positioning
moving models.
If the dot notation is used (Example:
Position mm=900.0 through
mm=900.254), only the specified
sub-model is controlled. The sub-
model is designated by control nodes
specifically specified when the model
was created (see specific moving
model documentation for what valid
sub-models are available). Typically
if a sub-model zero is specified
(mm=900.0) this controls the main

2-288 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

body of the model. The non-zero

numbers 1-254 can be designated
per model, and typically are used to
control articulated control surfaces,
such as wheel- tyres, or turret, and
is limited to models with pre-defined
sub-model control numbers.
x The moving model’s x position.
y The moving model’s y position.
z The moving model’s z position.
heading The moving model’s heading.
pitch The moving model’s pitch.
roll The moving model’s roll.
latdegree (-90..90) latitude degrees
latminute (0..60) latitude minutes
latsecond (0..60) latitude seconds
longdegree (-180..180) longitude degrees
longminute (0..60) longitude minutes
longsecond (0..60) longitude seconds
altitude altitude
select (0..511) model select
[\EQUATE] Refer to the following descriptions
[\JIGGLE] for more information about these
[\WOBBLE] qualifiers.

2.4.114.1 POSITION \EQUATE

The \EQUATE qualifier is used to place one moving model relative to
another moving model.

Format: POSITION \EQUATE [SOURCE=source] [DESTINATION=destination]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [FEET=feet] [METERS=meters] [KM=km]
[MILES=miles]

Syntax
Description: source Source moving model.
destination Destination moving model.
x X offset.
y Y offset.
z Z offset.
feet Offset is in feet (default).
meters Offset is in meters.
km Offset is in kilometers.
miles Offset is in miles.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-289

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.114.2 POSITION \JIGGLE

The \JIGGLE qualifier is used perturb the position of a moving model.

Format: POSITION \JIGGLE [MM=mm] [ENABLE=enable]

[XAMPLITUDE=xAmplitude] [XSMOOTHING=xSmoothing]
[YAMPLITUDE=yAmplitude] [YSMOOTHING=ySmoothing]
[ZAMPLITUDE=zAmplitude] [ZSMOOTHING=zSmoothing]

Syntax Moving model number.

mm
Description:
enable (on off) enable/disable position
perturbation.
xAmplitude Extent of movement in the X axis.
xSmoothing Rate of movement in the X axis.
yAmplitude Extent of movement in the Y axis.
ySmoothing Rate of movement in the Y axis.
zAmplitude extent of movement in the Z axis.
zSmoothing Rate of movement in the Z axis.

2.4.114.3 POSITION \LATLON_FORMAT

Format: POSITION \LATLON_FORMAT [FORMAT=format]

Syntax (dms decimal) Output format for

format
Description: lat/lon.

2.4.114.4 POSITION \WOBBLE

The \WOBBLE qualifier is used perturb the orientation of a moving
model.

Format: POSITION \WOBBLE [MM=mm] [ENABLE=enable]

[HAMPLITUDE=hAmplitude] [HSMOOTHING=hSmoothing]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[PAMPLITUDE=pAmplitude] [PSMOOTHING=pSmoothing]
[RAMPLITUDE=rAmplitude] [RSMOOTHING=rSmoothing]

Syntax Moving model number.

mm
Description:
enable (on off) Enable/disable orientation
perturbation.
hAmplitude Extent of movement in the heading.
hSmoothing Rate of movement in the heading.
pAmplitude Extent of movement in the pitch.
pSmoothing Rate of movement in the pitch.
rAmplitude Extent of movement in the roll.
rSmoothing Rate of movement in the roll.

2-290 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.115 POWERLINES
The POWERLINES command configures droop calculations for
powerlines.

Format: POWERLINES [DROOP=droop] [DROOPLIMIT=droopLimit]

Syntax (0..10) Scale value for the height of

Description: droop the droop based on the distance
between power poles.
droopLimit (0..10) Scale value for the maximum
height of droop based on the height
of the power pole.

2.4.115.1 POWERLINES \DECORATIONS

The \DECORATIONS qualifier defines powerline decorations.
NOTE: This CLI command must be executed before database load in order
to allow model import to find the powerlineModel (by name) and associate
(by index) the decorationModel. The remainder of the parameters can be
updated after database load for tuning purposes.

Format: POWERLINES \DECORATIONS [NUM=num]

[POWERLINEMODEL=powerlineModel]
[DECORATIONMODEL=decorationModel] [SPACING=spacing]
[COUNT=count] [SELECT=select] [SCALE=scale]

Syntax
num (0..7) Decoration number.
Description:
powerlineModel Powerline model name that has an
associated decoration.
decorationModel Decoration model name.
spacing (1..10000) The spacing between

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

decorations.
count (0..100) The number of decorations
per segment, 0 means not specified.
select (-255..255) Decoration model select.
A negative value means rotating
selects from 1 to absolute value of
select along segment. See note
below.
scale (0.001..1000) Decoration model
uniform scale factor.

NOTE: The rotating select capability (when the select is set to a negative
value) was added to facilitate a common aviation regulation, that
obstruction balls will alternate colors between red and white. Included in
many of these regulations is the specification that the red obstruction balls
be placed nearest the towers / poles. This specification was adhered by

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-291

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

making the number of rotating balls per segment an odd number and
adjusting the spacing. If less than 5 balls fit on a segment, they are all red
(select 1) (no alternating colors).

2.4.116 PP
The PP command has twelve qualifiers that are described in the sections
below.
2.4.116.1 PP \BASELINE
The \BASELINE qualifier provides controls for baseline tuning of the post
processor.

Format: PP \BASELINE [START=start] [END=end] [LIST=list]

[AUTOCOPY=autocopy]

Syntax Indicates the start of baseline

Description: tuning. Current viewport sensor
types will be scanned and the first of
start each sensor type assigned as the
baseline viewport. Also, until an End
is received, commands for unused
embands will be quietly ignored.
end Indicates the end of baseline tuning.
All post processor settings will be
copied from the baseline viewports
to viewports of the same sensor
type. Also, warnings for commands
with unused embands will be
enabled.
list Prints a list of the baseline viewport
IDs for each sensor type in use. The
user can then control the appropriate
baseline viewport from the Post

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Processor Tuning GUI as desired
autocopy Controls an advanced user option for
(ON/OFF) tuning multiple viewports of the
same sensor type whereby an
automatic copy takes place each
second allowing baseline tuning
changes to be automatically
distributed.

2-292 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.116.2 PP \FILE
The \FILE qualifier specifies files used to initialize PostProcessor
functions.

Format: PP \FILE [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[DEADELEMENTFILE=deadElementFile]
[FIXEDPATNOISEFILE=fixedPatNoiseFile]
[MISMATCHFILE=mismatchfile] [TESTPATTERN=testPattern]
[TESTPATTERNFILE=testPatternFile]

Syntax Either the

Description: (0..63) viewport for a single viewport
or
viewport or (lwir, mwir,evs,nvg,eo,dtv) emband
emband for all viewports of the defined
emband (the PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option)
deadElementFile Used to specify file to initialize dead
elements.
fixedPatNoiseFile Used to specify file to initialize Fixed
Pattern Noise.
mismatchfile Used to specify file to initialize
mismatch.
testPattern (16..31) Specifies the index into
which the test pattern file will be
loaded.
testPatternFile Load the file into test pattern
memory on the EXG.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-293

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.116.3 PP \INSETMASK
The \INSETMASK qualifier specifies Inset Mask parameters.

Format: PP \INSETMASK [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[MODE=mode] [MASKL=maskL] [MASKR=maskR] [MASKT=maskT]
[MASKB=maskB] [FILE=file]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir,evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
mode (off box image) Mode of the inset
mask.
maskL (0..1) Starting X value of inset mask.
maskR (0..1) Ending X value of inset mask.
maskT (0..1) Top value of inset mask.
maskB (0..1) Bottom value of inset mask.
file Inset mask file.

2.4.116.4 PP \INTERLACE
The \INTERLACE qualifier specifies the Interlace parameters.

Format: PP \INTERLACE [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[ENABLE=enable] [PIXELS=pixels] [SERRATION=serration]
[FRONTPORCH=frontPorch] [SYNCWIDTHh=syncWidthH]
[BACKPORTCHH=backPorchH] [LINES=lines] [PREEQUAL=preEqual]
[SYNCWIDTHV=syncWidthV] [POSTEQUAL=postEqual]
[BACKPORCHV=backPorchV]

Syntax Either the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Description: (0..63) viewport for a single viewport
or
viewport or (lwir, mwir,evs,nvg,eo,dtv) emband
emband for all viewports of the defined
emband (the PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option)
enable (off on) Enable the interlace
configuration
pixels (1..2048) Horizontal active pixels
(even)
serration (1..2048) Horizontal serration (even,
gt front)
frontPorch (1..2048) Horizontal front porch
(even)
syncWidthH (1..2048) Horizontal sync width
(multiple of 4)

2-294 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

backPorchH (1..2048) Horizontal back porch

(even)
lines (1..2048) Vertical active line
preEqual (1..2048) Vertical pre-equalization
syncWidthV (1..2048) Vertical sync width
postEqual (1..2048) Vertical post-equalization
backPorchV (1..2048) Vertical back porch

2.4.116.5 PP \MESSAGE
The \MESSAGE qualifier controls the PostProcessor messages shown in
the log.

Format: PP \MESSAGE [INFORMATION=information] [WARNING=warning]

[ERROR=error] [FATAL=fatal]

Syntax information Display PostProcessor information

Description: (OFF/ON) messages in the log.
warning Display PostProcessor warning
(OFF/ON) messages in the log.
error Display PostProcessor error
(OFF/ON) messages in the log.
fatal Display PostProcessor fatal messages
(OFF/ON) in the log.

2.4.116.6 PP \OVERLAY
The \OVERLAY qualifier specifies the settings for the overlay planes.

Format: PP \OVERLAY [VIEWPORT=viewport] [EMBAND=emband]

[THROTTLE=throttle] [SIZE=size] [PRIGAIN=priGain]
[PRILEVEL=priLevel] [SECGAIN=secGain] [SECLEVEL=secLevel]

Syntax (0..63) Viewport for which the

viewport
Description: overlay parameters are modified

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL
DTV) Emband for which the overlay
parameters are modified (for
baseline configuration).
enable Enables overlay planes.
(OFF/ON)
throttle (0..1) Throttle value for redrawing
the overlay planes.
size (size_1 size_2 size_4 size_8
size_16) Trickle block size for
redrawing the overlay planes.
priGain (0..2) Primary overlay gain
priLevel (0..1) Primary overlay level
secGain (0..2) Secondary overlay gain
secLevel (0..1) Secondary overlay level

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-295

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.116.7 PP \RESPONSE
The \RESPONSE qualifier controls the PostProcessor response opcodes.

Format: PP \RESPONSE [GAINLEVEL=gainLevel]

[TARGETTRACKER=targetTracker] [THERMALCUER=thermalcuer]
[CONTRASTDIFFERENCE=contrastDifference]
[TRACKERVIEW=trackerView]

Syntax gainLevel Return the Gain, Level and Noise

Description: (OFF/ON) Response (0x3203) to the host.
targetTracker Return the Target Tracker Response
(OFF/ON) (0x3206) to the host.
thermalcuer Return the Thermal Cuer Response
(OFF/ON) (0x3207) to the host.
contrastDifference Return the Contrast Difference
(OFF/ON) Response (0x3208) to the host.
trackerView Return the Tracker View Response
(OFF/ON) (0x3209) to the host.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-296 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.116.8 PP \SWRENDER
The \SWRENDER qualifier allows the settings for software rendering in a
PIP render window.

Format: PP \SWRENDER [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[ENABLE=enable] [X=x] [Y=y] [WIDTH=w] [HEIGHT=h]
[SRCX=srcx] [SRCY=srcy] [CLEARENABLE=clearenable]
[CLEARINTENSITY=clearintensity]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
enable Enables the display of the PIP render
(ON/OFF) window.
x (0..2047) Specifies the position, in
pixels, of the left side of the PIP
render window.
y (0..2047) Specifies the position, in
pixels, of the top of the PIP render
window.
w (1..2048) Specifies the width, in
pixels, of the PIP render window.
Must be > 0.
h (1..2048) Specifies the height, in
pixels, of the PIP render window.
Must be > 0.
srcx (1..2047) Specifies the X position, in
pixels, of the center of the source
data that will be used for the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

software rendering of the PIP
window.
srcy (1..2047) Specifies the Y position, in
pixels, of the center of the source
data that will be used for the
software rendering of the PIP
window.
clearenable Clears the PIP render window to the
(ON/OFF) specified intensity.
clearintensity (0..1) Specifies the intensity to use
in clearing the PIP render window.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-297

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.116.9 PP \VIDEOALIGN
The \VIDEOALIGN qualifier specifies the settings for the video aligner.

Format: PP \VIDEOALIGN [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[ENABLE=enable]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
enable Enable the RVP pixel aligner.
(OFF/ON)

2.4.116.10 PP \VIDEOIN
The \VIDEOIN qualifier specifies the settings for video input format.

Format: PP \VIDEOIN [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[REDCONVERSION=redConversion]
[GREENCONVERSION=greenConversion]
[BLUECONVERSION=blueConversion]
[PIXELFORMATIN=pixelFormatIn]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
redConversion (0..1) Red scale factor for video

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

input.
greenConversion (0..1) Green scale factor for video
input.
blueConversion (0..1) Blue scale factor for video
input.
pixelFormatIn (rgb hiRes1 hiRes2 hiRes3) Video
Input pixel format.

2-298 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.116.11 PP \VIDEOOUT
The \VIDEOOUT qualifier specifies the settings for video output format.

Format: PP \VIDEOOUT [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband] [R=r]

[G=g] [B=b] [GAMMA=gamma]
[PIXELFORMATOUT=pixelFormatOut]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

Description: single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
r (0..1) Red scale factor for video
output.
g (0..1) Green scale factor for video
output.
b 0..1) Blue scale factor for video
output.
gamma (0.5..2) Gamma scale value.
pixelformatout (rgb hiRes1 hiRes2 hiRes3) Video
Output pixel format.

2.4.116.12 PP \VIDEOSYNC
The \VIDEOSYNC qualifier specifies the settings for video sync.

Format: PP \VIDEOSYNC [VIEWPORT=viewport | EMBAND=emband]

[SYNCGREEN=syncGreen] [SYNCCOMPOSITE=syncComposite]
[INVERTVSYNC=invertVSync] [INVERTHSYNC=invertHSync]

Syntax Either the (0..63) viewport for a

single viewport or (lwir, mwir, evs,

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Description:
nvg, eo, dtv) emband for all
viewport or
viewports of the defined emband.
emband
(The PP \Baseline command
describes the proper operational
sequence of this option.)
syncGreen Sync on green.
(OFF/ON)
syncComposite Composite sync.
(OFF/ON)
invertVSync Invert vertical sync.
(OFF/ON)
invertHSync Invert horizontal sync.
(OFF/ON)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-299

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.117 PRIMEFFECTS
The PRIMEFFECTS command controls primitive effects.

Format: PRIMEFFECTS [VIEWPORT=viewport] [ENABLE=enable] [NUM=num]

[NEWRFIELDADJ=nearFieldAdj] [FARFIELDADJ=farFieldAdj]
[RANGE=range] [EQSELECT=eqSelect] [TLSELECT=tlSelect]

Syntax
viewport viewport #/all to set
Description:
enable (on off) primitive effects enable
num (1..15) primitive effects table entry
to set or view
nearFieldAdj (0..16) blur adjustment for
primitives in the near field
farFieldAdj (0..16) blur adjustment for
primitives in the far field
range (0..1.32e+006) range (feet) which
divides near/far field
eqSelect (lens range alpha reflection specular)
blur equation select
tlSelect (default low med high) screendoor
transparency level select

2.4.118 PRINT
The PRINT command has two qualifiers that are described in the
sections below.
2.4.118.1 PRINT \LABEL
The \LABEL qualifier sets a text label.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: PRINT \LABEL [TEXT=text] [MM=mm] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z]
[LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]
[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude] [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]
[ALPHA=alpha] [BACKRED=backred] [BACKGREEN=backgreen]
[BACKBLUE=backblue] [BACKALPHA=backalpha]
[ALIGN=align] [SCALE=scale] [ID=id] [BOLD=bold]

Syntax
Text to use for label.
Description: text
mm (0..4095) Moving model to label.
x Offset from moving model.
y Offset from moving model.
z Offset from moving model.

2-300 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

latdegree (-90..90) Absolute label position

latitude degrees.
latminute (0..60) Absolute label position
latitude minutes.
latsecond (0..60) Absolute label position
latitude seconds.
longdegree (-180..180) Absolute label position
longitude degrees.
longminute (0..60) Absolute label position
longitude minutes.
longsecond (0..60) Absolute label position
longitude seconds.
altitude Absolute label position altitude.
red (0..255) Text red color.
green (0..255) Text green color.
blue (0..255) Text blue color.
alpha (0..255) Text alpha.
backred (0..255) Background red color.
backgreen (0..255) Background green color.
backblue (0..255) Background blue color.
backalpha (0..255) Background alpha.
align (left center right) Label alignment.
scale Character scalar.
id (0..255) Text id.
bold Enables bold text.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.118.2 PRINT \SCREEN
The \SCREEN qualifier is used to print text to the screen.

Format: PRINT \SCREEN [TEXT=text] [X=x] [Y=y] [CHAN=chan] [RED=red]

[GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue] [ALPHA=alpha] [BACKRED=backred]
[BACKGREEN=backgreen] [BACKBLUE=backblue]
[BACKALPHA=backalpha] [SCALE=scale] [ID=id] [BOLD=bold]

Syntax
Text to print
Description: text
x Horizontal text position from the left.
y (0..99) Vertical text position from
the bottom.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-301

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

chan (-1..63) Which visual channel to

print on.
red (0..255) Text red color.
green (0..255) Text green color.
blue (0..255) Text blue color.
alpha (0..255) Text alpha.
backred (0..255) Background red color.
backgreen (0..255) Background green color.
backblue (0..255) Background blue color.
backalpha (0..255) Background alpha.
scale Character scalar.
id (0..255) Text id.
bold Enables bold text.

2.4.119 PROBER
The PROBER command has two qualifiers, PICK and TVERTS, which are
described below.

2.4.119.1 PROBER \PICK

The \PICK qualifier picks a point with LOS test and specifies a range to
test. This is for debug.
Format: PROBER \PICK [ENABLE=enable] [LOS=los] [LOSLENGTH=losLength]
[SIZE=size] [RANGE=range] [LINEWIDTH=lineWidth]
[SEGDEGREE=segDegree] [SEGMAXLEN=segMaxLen]
[LATDEGREE=latDegree] [LATMINUTE=latMinute]
[LATSECOND=latSecond] [LONGDEGREE=longDegree]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[LONGMINUTE=longMinute] [LONGSECOND=longSecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude]
Syntax enable
(off on) Enable selecting.
Description:
los (off lookat mouse) Move the prober
with LOS test from the eyepoint.
losLength The length of the LOS test from the
eyepoint.
size The size of marker.
range The selected range.
lineWidth The width of the line that draws the
boundary of the range.

2-302 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

segDegree (1..45) The degree of the line

seqment that draws the boundary of
the range.
segMaxLen The max length of the line seqment
that draws the boundary of the
range.
latDegree (-90..90) latitude degrees.
latMinute (0..60) latitude minutes.
latSecond (0..60) latitude seconds.
longdegree (-180..180) longitude degrees.
longminute (0..60) longitude minutes.
longSecond (0..60) longitude seconds.
altitude Altitude.

2.4.119.2 PROBER \TVERTS

The \TVERTS qualifier is the prober for terrain vertices.
Format: PROBER \TVERTS [ENABLE=enable] [FACE=face] [LEVEL=level] [X=x]
[Y=y] [BREAK=break] [POSITION=position] [LOS=los]
[LOSLENGTH=losLength] [SIZE=size]
Syntax
enable Turn on or off.
Description:
(-1..5) Manually set the target FLI.
face
Face id.
level Level.
x x

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

y y
break Hit the break point of the target.
Print the marker's position in
position
lat/lon/alt.
(off lookat mouse) Move the prober
los
with LOS test from the eyepoint.
The length of the LOS test from the
losLength
eyepoint.
size The size of the marker.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-303

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.120 PROPERTY
The PROPERTY command sets the value of a module property.
Format: PROPERTY [NAME=name] [VALUE=value] [ROW=row] [COL=col]
Syntax
name The name of property.
Description:
value The value of property.
(0..1024) Row number (defaults to
row
zero).
(0..1024) Column number (defaults
col
to zero).

2.4.121 PROXYPOLYOUTPUT
The PROXYPOLYOUTPUT command sets proxy poly output.
Format: PROXYPOLYOUTPUT [BLOCKSIZE=blocksize]
Syntax (1000..1000000) Proxy poly output
blocksize
Description: block size in floats.

2.4.122 RADAR
The RADAR command specifies radar operation modes.
Format: RADAR [CONTINUOUS=continuous]
[MATERIALCONVERT=materialconvert] [CONVERTFILE=convertfile]
[CAPTUREFILE=capturefile] [TRIGGERCAPTURE=triggercapture]
[WAITFORPAGING=ON|OFF] [ALLOWMODELS=allowmodels]
[\CTLODOVERRIDE] [\DISPLAY] [\RENDERCONTROL]
[\TERRAINLODOVERRIDE]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax continuous
Continuously render output.
Description: (ON/OFF)
materialconvert
The material conversion enable.
(ON/OFF)
ON requires the RTS to wait until
waitForPaging all the paging of Radar data is
(ON/OFF) complete before accepting the
trigger to re-draw the view.
triggerCapture The file capture trigger.
convertfile The material conversion filename.
capturefile The capture filename.
allowmodels Include moving models in output
(ON/OFF) data.

2-304 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

[\CTLODOVERRIDE]
[\DISPLAY] Refer to the following descriptions
[\RENDERCONTROL] for more information about these
[\TERRAINLODOVER qualifiers.
RIDE]

2.4.122.1 RADAR \CTLODOVERRIDE

The \CTLODOVERRIDE qualifier overrides the calculated level of detail
(LOD) for radar.

Format: RADAR \CTLODOVERRIDE [ENABLE=enable] [LEVEL=level]

Syntax enable Enable override or use calculated

Description: (ON/OFF) LODs.
(0..23) Continuous Texture Level of
level Detail (level 14 is roughly 1
meter).

2.4.122.2 RADAR \DISPLAY

The \DISPLAY qualifier specifies radar display modes.
Format: RADAR \DISPLAY [TYPE=type] [HEIGHTSCALE=heightscale]
[MATSCALE=matscale] [SELECTMATERIAL=selectmaterial]
[TOPHEIGHT=topheight] [BOTTOMHEIGHT=bottomheight]
Syntax (material height dvi) Display
type
Description: output mode.
heightscale The height display scalar.
matscale The material display scalar.
selectmaterial (-1..255) The material code select.
topheight The highest elevation for display.
bottomheight The lowest elevation for display.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.122.3 RADAR \RENDERCONTROL
The \RENDERCONTROL qualifier controls request radar data patches.
Format: RADAR \RENDERCONTROL [RANGE=range] [XRANGE=xrange]
[YRANGE=yrange] [XOFFSET=xoffset] [YOFFSET=yoffset]
[LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]
[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]
[LONRANGE=lonrange] [LATRANGE=latrange] [LONOFFSET=lonoffset]
[LATOFFSET=latoffset] [REQUESTID=requestid]
[MAXTSKINPOLYS=maxtskinpolys] [LODRANGESCALE=lodrangescale]
[OVERRIDEPOS=overridepos] [CRACKFILL=crackfill] [TRIGGER=trigger]
Syntax
range The patch range (NM).
Description:
xrange The patch X range (NM).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-305

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

yrange The patch Y range (NM).

The patch X offset (NM)
xoffset
[DEPRECATED]
The patch Y offset (NM)
yoffset
[DEPRECATED]
latdegree (-90..90) patch center lat (degs.)
latminute (0..60) patch center lat (mins.)
latsecond (0..60) patch center lat (secs.)
(-180..180) patch center long
longdegree
(degs.)
longminute (0..60) patch center long (mins.)
longsecond (0..60) patch center long (secs.)
lonrange Patch range (long).
latrange Patch range (lat).
lonoffset Patch offset (long) [DEPRECATED]
latoffset Patch offset (lat) [DEPRECATED]
requestid The patch request ID.
maxtskinpolys The max number of terrain polys.
lodrangescale Scalar for patch to LOD range.
overridepos The ownship center override
(ON/OFF) enable.
crackfill
The crack filler enable.
(ON/OFF)
trigger The patch render trigger.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.122.4 RADAR \TERRAINLODOVERRIDE
The \TERRAINLODOVERRIDE qualifier overrides the calculated terrain
level of detail (LOD) for radar.
Format: RADAR \TERRAINLODOVERRIDE [ENABLE=enable] [LEVEL=level]

Syntax enable Enable override or use calculated

Description: (ON/OFF) LODs.
(0..24) Continuous Texture Level of
level Detail (level 24 is roughly 1
meter).

2-306 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.123 RAINSNOW
The RAINSNOW command has two qualifiers that are described in the
sections below.
2.4.123.1 RAINSNOW \INIT
The \INIT qualifier initializes the rain and snow environment submodule.
Format: RAINSNOW \INIT [ALTENABLE=altEnable] [ALTSPMASK=altSPMask]
[ATLVPMASK=altVPMask] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax altEnable
Alternate rain & snow effect control.
Description: (ON/OFF)
altSPMask DEPRECATED – use altVPMask
Viewport mask where alternate
altVPMask
effect is active.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.123.2 RAINSNOW \UNLOAD

The \UNLOAD qualifier uninitializes the rain and snow environment
submodule.

Format: RAINSNOW \UNLOAD [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)

Description: emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.124 RANGEFOCUS

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The RANGEFOCUS command controls range focus.
Format: RANGEFOCUS [VIEWPORT=viewport] [ENABLE=enable]
[LENSSCALAR=lensScalar] [FOCUSDISTANCE=focusDistance]
Syntax
viewport (0..63) The viewport to set or view.
Description:
(off linear_hybrid on) Range focus
enable
function mode.
(0..1) The narrowness of depth of
lensScalar
field.
focusDistance (0..1) Focus range.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-307

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.125 RATE
The RATE command sets the field rate.
Format: RATE [MULTIPLIER=multiplier]
Syntax (1..4) The number of video fields per
multiplier
Description: update field.

2.4.126 REFLECTIVITYTUNE
The REFLECIVITYTUNE command sets and/or gets a reflectivity scalar.
Format: REFLECTIVITYTUNE [SCALE=scale] [MINZVAL=minZVal]
[REFLECTIVITYSCALEWATER=reflectivityScaleWater] [SCENE=scene]
Syntax
scale (0..1) A global reflectivity scalar.
Description:
(0..0.5) Minimum reflection vector z
minZVal
value.
reflectivityScaleW
(0..1) Water reflectivity scalar.
ater
(dawn day dusk night) The TOD
scene
scene to which the scalar applies.

2.4.126.1 REFLECTIVITYTUNE \AOI

The \AOI qualifier sets/gets the angle-of-incidence reflectivity table
tuning parameters.
Format: REFLECTIVITYTUNE \AOI [TABLE=table] [RMIN=rMin] [RMAX=rMax]
[CURVE=curve]
Syntax
table (0..1) Select table 0 or table 1.
Description:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(0..1) Minimum reflectivity - direct
rMin
view.
(0..1) Maximum reflectivity - edge
rMax
on view.
curve (0.1..10) Curve shaping value.

2-308 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.126.2 REFLECTIVITYTUNE \WIND

The \WIND qualifier sets/gets the wind speed reflectivity tuning
parameters.

Format: REFLECTIVITYTUNE \WIND [WRMIN=wrMin]

[WINDSPEEDATMINREFLECTIVITY=windSpeedAtMinReflectivity]
[CURVE=curve] [REFLECTIVITYENABLE=reflectivityEnable]
[REFLECTIVITYLSENABLE=reflectivityLSEnable]

Syntax (0..1) Minimum reflectivity - max

wrMin
Description: wind effect.
windSpeedAtMinR (0..100) Windspeed (knots) where
eflectivity minimum reflectivity is achieved.
curve (0.1..10) Curve shaping value.
reflectivityEnable Enables/disables wind affecting
(ON/OFF) reflectivity.
reflectivityLSEnable Enables/disables wind affecting
(ON/OFF) reflectivity light scatter.

2.4.127 REGIONALWEATHER
The REGIONALWEATHER command defines a weather region.

Format: REGIONALWEATHER [REGION=region] [ENABLE =ON|OFF]

[COMPONENTMASK=componentMask] [DRAWPROXY=drawProxy]
[X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]
[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude] [RADIUS=radius]
[TRANSITIONRANGE=transitionrange] [HEADING=heading]
[SCALEX=scaleX] [VERTICALDISTABOVETOP=verticaldistabovetop]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[VERTICALTRANSITIONRANGE=verticalTransitionRange] [LIST=list]
[\FILTER] [\FOGVOLUME] [\MODEL] [\PROXY] [\PROXYTEXTURE]
[\TUNE]
Syntax
Description: region The weather region being defined
(1..19).
enable Enable/disable the region. (Default is
(ON/OFF) OFF).
componentMask Set which weather components are
being controlled by this region: fog
color | reserved | runway
contaminants | snow, wind, blowing
snow/sand | visibility | ground fog |
layered clouds | scattered clouds
drawProxy Turn on/off drawing region proxies.
(ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-309

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

x x center of the region.

y y center of the region.
z z center of the region.
latdegree The latitude of the center point in
degrees (geodetic system). (-90..90)
degrees latitude for the center of the
region
latminute The center point latitude minutes
component. (-60..60)
latsecond The center point latitude seconds
component. (-60..60)
longdegree (-180..180) Degrees longitude for the
center of the region.
longminute (-60..60) Minutes longitude for the
center of the region.
longsecond (-60..60) Seconds longitude for the
center of the region.
altitude The altitude of the bottom of the
weather region (ground level or
slightly below ground level).
radius (0..1e+006) The radius of the base
circle that describes the region.
transitionrange (0..50000) The width of the transition
band around the weather region.
heading (0..360) rotation angle, measured
counterclockwise from north, used to
orient the region.
scaleX A scale factor in X applied to the base
circle that describes the region.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

verticaldistabovetop The weather region’s vertical extent
above the highest weather effect.
verticalTransitionRa The height of the transition zone
nge above the weather region.
list List the parameters for all the weather
regions.
[\FILTER] Refer to the following descriptions for
[\FOGVOLUME] more information about these
[\MODEL] qualifiers.
[\PROXY]
[\PROXYTEXTURE]
[\TUNE]

2-310 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.127.1 REGIONALWEATHER \FILTER

The \FILTER qualifier configures filter parameters for a region.

Format: REGIONALWEATHER \FILTER [ENABLE=enable] [INDEX=index]

[TYPE=type] [MODEL=model] [XRADIUS=xRadius]
[YRADIUS=yRadius] [DELTAXY=deltaXY] [DELTAT=deltaT]
[THICKNESS=thickness] [CLOUDTOPOFFSET=cloudtopoffset]
[CLOUDBOTTOMOFFSET=cloudbottomoffset] [AMBRED=ambRed]
[LIST=list]

Syntax enable
Enables the filter
Description: (ON/OFF)
Specifies the filter index. Indexing
index
starts at 0
(lower upper) Type defines the relative
type position of the cloud model (upper or
lower).
Specifies the cloud model to use in the
model
region.
Specifies the max radius in the X
xRadius
direction for the cloud type.
Specifies the max radius in the Y
yRadius
direction for the cloud type.
Specifies the acceptable XY delta for
deltaXY
using this filter in feet.
Specifies the acceptable thickness
deltaT
delta for using this filter in feet.
Specifies the max cloud thickness for
thickness
the cloud type.
Specifies the distance in feet below the
cloudtopoffset cloud top altitude to provide

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

undulation.
Specifies the distance in feet below the
cloudbottomoffset cloud bottom altitude to provide
undulation.
ambRed Specifies the ambient reduction for the
cloud type.
list Lists the parameters for the regional
weather filters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-311

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.127.2 REGIONALWEATHER \FOGVOLUME

The \FOGVOLUME qualifier sets the weather region fogVol of ground fog
parameters.

Format: REGIONALWEATHER \FOGVOLUME [REGION=region]

[ENABLEFOGVOLUME=enableFogVolume]
[NUMBEROFSEGMENTS=numberOfSegments]
[FOGVOLTEX=fogVolTex] [FOGVOLAUXTEX=fogVolAuxTex]
[GFOGFOGVOLTEXUVSCALE=gFogFogVolTexUVScale]
[VISFOGVOLTEXUVSCALE=visFogVolTexUVScale]
[GFOGINTENSITYSCALE=gFogIntensityScale]
[VISINTENSITYSCALE=visIntensityScale]
[GFOGDENSITYSCALE=gFogDensityScale]
[VISDENSITYSCALE=visDensityScale]
[FOGVOLTEXUSCALE=fogVolTexUScale]
[FOGVOLTEXVSCALE=fogVolTexVScale]
[FINALREDSCALE=finalRedScale]
[FINALGREENSCALE=finalGreenScale]
[FINALBLUESCALE=finalBlueScale] [SKIRTNORMAL=skirtNormal]
[ENTRYSCALE=entryScale]
[DEPTHMODAMPLITUDE=depthModAmplitude]
[FOGVOLHEIGHTOFFSET=fogVolHeightOffset] [LIGHTING=lighting]
[THINNING=thinning] [TEXINTREDUCTION=texIntReduction]
[ALPHA=alpha] [SHAFTCOLORSCALE=shaftColorScale]

Syntax
region (1..7) The region to define.
Description:
enableFogVolume
Enable/disable the fog volumes.
(ON/OFF)
numberOfSegments ignored
The procedural intensity alpha texture
fogVolTex
map filename
The procedural dmod Vmod texture

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fogVolAuxTex
map filename.
gFogFogVolTexUVSc ground fog procedural fog volume
ale texture UV Scalar.
visibility procedural fog volume texture
visFogVolTexUVScale
UV Scalar.
The reduction in fog volume color
texIntReduction
intensity due to fog volume texture.
Scale the ground fog volume intensity
gFogIntensityScale
by this percentage.
Scale the visibility fog volume intensity
visIntensityScale
by this percentage.
Scale the ground fog volume density
gFogDensityScale
by this percentage.
Scale the visibility fog volume density
visDensityScale
by this percentage.

2-312 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

fogVolTexUScale ignored
fogVolTexVScale ignored
finalRedScale ignored
finalGreenScale ignored
finalBlueScale ignored
skirtNormal (-1..1) ignored
entryScale (0..1) ignored
depthModAmplitude (0..127) ignored
fogVolHeightOffset Fog volume height offset above the
base of the lower cloud.
lighting (1..10) ignored
thinning ignored
texIntReduction (0..1) The reduction in fog volume
color intensity due to fog volume
texture
alpha ignored
shaftColorScale ignored

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-313

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.127.3 REGIONALWEATHER \MODEL

The \MODEL qualifier configures a region’s proxy settings.

Format: REGIONALWEATHER \MODEL [REGION=region]

[USERWCLOUDMODELS=useRWCloudModels]
[ISECTLINELENGTH=iSectLineLength]
[STARTFADERANGE=startFadeRange]
[FULLYFOGGEDRANGE=fullyFoggedRange]
[SCUDWASHMAX=scudWashMax] [MAXSCUDDELTA=maxScudDelta]
[FLATRADIUS=flatRadius]
[INCLOUDFOGVOLSCALAR=InCloudFogVolScalar]
[INCLOUDSCUDSCALAR=InCloudScudScalar]

Syntax (0..7) Specifies the region to which

region
Description: the command applies.
useRWCloudModels
Use cloud models for clouds.
(ON/OFF)
The line length for testing cloud
iSectLineLength
model intersection.
The range at which to begin scudding
startFadeRange
when entering a cloud model.
The range at which the eye is fully
fullyFoggedRange scudded prior to entering a cloud
model.
(0..1) Max scud wash opacity when
scudWashMax entering. Also for keeping wingman
while transitioning into cloud layer.
(0.001..1) max scud change per field
due to the eye intersecting a regional
maxScudDelta
weather modeled cloud. Defaults to
0.02.
flatRadius Deprecated

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

InCloudFogVolScalar Deprecated
(0..20) In cloud model scudding
InCloudScudScalar
scalar.

2-314 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.127.4 REGIONALWEATHER \PROXY

The \PROXY qualifier configures a region’s proxy settings.

Format: REGIONALWEATHER \PROXY [REGION=region]

[PROXYTYPE=proxyType] [MAPNAME=mapName]
[LODRANGE=lodRange] [FADEBANDPERCENT=fadeBandPercent]
[LIGHTING=lighting] [SPANRATEFILL=spanratefill]
[SPANRATEFILLNEARRANGE=spanratefillnearrange]
[SPANRATEFILLFARRANGE=spanratefillfarrange]
[OPAQUECENTERRANGE=opaquecenterrange]
[PARTICLESCALE=particleScale] [RANDOMSCALE=randomScale]
[NODRAWCULLRANGE=nodrawcullrange] [ZOFFSET=zoffset]
[TOPINTENSITY=topIntensity]
[BOTTOMINTENSITY=bottomIntensity]
[MATERIALINDEX=materialIndex]
[MIPTEXELTHRESHOLD=mipTexelThreshold] [RED=red]
[GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue] [SCUDSTARTRANGE=scudStartRange]
[SCUDFULLRANGE=scudFullRange] [FIXEDMIPLEVEL=fixedMipLevel]
[PRINT=print]

Syntax region (1..8) Specifies the region to which the

Description: proxy settings will apply.
proxyType (top skirt) Specify proxy type
mapName Specifies which texture map to use.
lodRange Distance in feet for 1st LOD transition.
fadeBandPercent Percent overlap of Mip levels.
lighting (0..5) Which lights to apply to clouds 0
= none 1 = sun 2 = phong 3 = sun
and phong 4 = unlit unscaled 5 =
Fixed Shaded
spanratefill Turns span fill rate on for GX.
(ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

spanratefillnearrange No span fill rate less than this range.
spanratefillfarrange No span fill rate greater than this
range.
opaquecenterrange No span fill rate greater than this
range.
particleScale Scale applied to drawn cloud puffs.
randomScale Random Scale applied to drawn cloud
puffs.
nodrawcullrange Range at which no cloud puffs are
drawn.
zoffset Altitude adjustment.
topIntensity Intensity applied to puffs when eye is
above clouds.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-315

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

bottomIntensity Intensity applied to puffs when eye is

below clouds.
materialIndex (0..255) Specifies the material table
index used for the puffs.
mipTexelThreshold (0..255) Controls cloud coverage in
distance, if too big, clouds will not
render.
red (0..1) Specifies the red color used on
cloud polygons.
green (0..1) Specifies the green color used
on cloud polygons.
blue (0..1) Specifies the blue color used on
cloud polygons.
scudStartRange (0..10000) Sets the range to a puff
where scud begins.
scudFullRange (0..10000) Sets the range to a puff
where scud is fully applied.
fixedMipLevel (-1..10) Controls the Mip level used by
cloud puffs.
print Prints out the region proxy definition
parameters.

2.4.127.5 REGIONALWEATHER \PROXYTEXTURE

The \PROXYTEXTURE qualifier configures texture parameters for a
region’s proxy.

Format: REGIONALWEATHER \PROXYTEXTURE [REGION=region]

[PROXYTYPE=proxyType] [PATH=path] [TEX0=tex0] [TEX1=tex1]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[TEX2=tex2] [TEX3=tex3] [TEX4=tex4] [TEX5=tex5] [TEX6=tex6]
[TEX7=tex7] [THICKNESS=thickness]
[DEPTHMODAMP=depthModAmp] [PRINT=print]

Syntax region (1..8) Specifies the region to which the

Description: proxy settings will apply.
proxyType (top skirt) Specify proxy type.
path Path to textures.
tex0 Base texture map filename.
tex1 Detail texture map filename.
tex2 Material map filename.
tex3 Sensor mod map filename.
tex4 Bump texture map filename.
tex5 Auxiliary texture map filename.
tex6 Specular texture map filename.

2-316 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

tex7 Light texture map filename.

thickness (0..32768) Volumetric Thickness.
depthModAmp (0..128) Depth modulation amplitude.
print Prints out the octa texture parameters.

2.4.127.6 REGIONALWEATHER \TUNE

The \TUNE qualifier sets weather region cloud proxy and vis proxy
parameters.

Format: REGIONALWEATHER \TUNE [REGION=region]

[FRONTSKIRTOPACITY=frontSkirtOpacity]
[BACKSKIRTOPACITY=backSkirtOpacity] [RADIUS=radius]
[EARLYTRANSITION=earlyTransition]
[TOPPROXYWIDTH=topProxyWidth]
[SKIRTPROXYWIDTH=skirtProxyWidth]
[SKIRTPROXYTHICKNESS=skirtProxyThickness]
[DRAWSKIRTPROXY=drawSkirtProxy]
[NODRAWCULLTOVIS=noDrawCullToVis]
[HSCUDWASHFT=hScudWashFt]
[VSCUDWASHFT=vScudWashFt]
[USETOPPROXYTRANSITION=useTopProxyTransition]
[MINHWCLOUDTHICKNESS=minHwCloudThickness]
[USEGLOBALINREGION=useGlobalInRegion]

Syntax region (1..7) The region to define.

Description:
frontSkirtOpacity (0..10) ignored
backSkirtOpacity (0..10) ignored.
radius (0..10) ignored
earlyTransition (0..1) ignored

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

topProxyWidth (0..1000) ignored
skirtProxyWidth (0..1000) ignored
skirtProxyThickness (0..1000) ignored
drawSkirtProxy ignored.
noDrawCullToVis (0..1000) Particle cloud puffs with a
distance that is greater than the
noDrawCullToVis value times the
current visibility will not draw. Default
is 0 and means disabled.
hScudWashFt (0..5000) ignored
vScudWashFt (0..5000) ignored
useTopProxyTransiti Enable/disable transition of top proxy
on poly.
(ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-317

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

minHwCloudThickness Minimum proxy thickness for a

regional layered cloud.
useGlobalInRegion Enable/disable transition to global
(ON/OFF) weather inside weather region

2.4.128 REMAP
The REMAP has one qualifier discussed below.

2.4.128.1 REMAP \LIGHTS

The \LIGHTS qualifier controls the global light switch remapping feature.

Format: REMAP \LIGHTS [ENABLE=enable] [NAME=name]

Syntax enable Enables and disables

Description: (ON/OFF)
name Remap file extension suffix.

2.4.129 RENDERMODE
The RENDERMODE command is used to control a wide variety of
rendering options.
The options can be sorted into three different groups: modes, markers,
and enables. Each mode is enabled separately, but they should really be
thought of as a select of one at a time (like a radio button). Markers
highlight certain aspects of the image. The enables allow certain
functions within the hardware to operate. They can be disabled for
debug purposes. Modes and markers all default off, while enables
default on.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: RENDERMODE [WIREFRAME=ON | OFF] [outline=ON | OFF]
[TRANSPARENCY=transparency] [depthcomplexity=ON | OFF]
[phongiteration=ON | OFF] [drawboundingboxes=ON | OFF]
[lightproxy=ON | OFF] [MIP=mip] [CHECKER=checker]
[paneldots=ON | OFF] [texture=ON | OFF]
[ALPHATEXTURE=alphatexture] [antialiasing=ON | OFF]
[AAFILTER=aafilter] [SHAPEDFILTER=shapedfilter]
[BINCULLING=ON | OFF]
[ALPHATRANSPARENCY=alphaTransparency]
[ALPHACULL=alphaCull] [OPAQUECULL=opaqueCull] [spanfull=ON |
OFF] [volumetric=ON | OFF] [spanrate=ON | OFF]
[ADVANCEDSPANRATE=ON | OFF]
[priAnisotropic=ON | OFF] [secAnisotropic=ON | OFF]
[ANISOTROPICITERATION=ON | OFF]
[DYNAMICANISOTROPIC=dynamicAnisotropic]
[DYNAMICANISOTROPICSEC=dynamicAnisotropicSec]
[DIRLIGHT=dirlight] [POSLIGHT=poslight]

2-318 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

[LIGHTSCATTER=lightscatter] [LSREFLECTIONS=lsReflections]
[LSRCALIASREDUCTION=lsrcaliasreduction]
[CONTRASTREDUCTION=contrastreduction]
[SOFTSATURATE=softsaturate] [HWCLOUDS=hwClouds]
[HYBRIDCLOUDS=hybridClouds] [PRIMEFFECTS=primEffects]
[MFLINES=mfLines] [MFBOXES=mfBoxes] [SMC=smc]
[HATVISUAL=hatVisual] [CDVISUAL=cdVisual]
[LOSVISUAL=losVisual] [FORCENEARDEPTH=forceNearDepth]
[FORCEFARDEPTH=forceFarDepth] [SCUD=scud]
[ENHANCEDSEAVIS=enhancedSeaVis] [PARTICLELOD=particleLOD]

[\AFFINITY] [\DEBUG] [\IMPORTCACHE] [\OGL] [\SORTCACHE]

[\STATEDATA] [\TEXTURE] [\THREAD] [\THROTTLETEXCOMPRESSION]
Syntax
Description: wireframe
Enables/disables wireframe mode.
(ON/OFF)
outline
Enables/disables outline mode.
(ON/OFF)
(low med high) Select transparency
transparency
levels.
depthcomplexity Enables/disables depth complexity
(ON/OFF) mode.
phongiteration Enables/disables Phong iteration
(ON/OFF) mode.
drawboundingboxes
Enables/disables bounding boxes.
(ON/OFF)
lightproxy Enables/disables Phong light proxy
(ON/OFF) polygons.
(normal rainbow monochrome white
mip black) Sets diag texture mipping
mode.
checker Sets diag texture mipping to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(ON/OFF) checkboard texels.
paneldots
Enables/disables panel corner dots.
(ON/OFF)
texture
Enables/disables texture.
(ON/OFF)
alphatexture
Enables/disables alpha texture.
(ON/OFF)
antialiasing
Enables/disables anti-aliasing.
(ON/OFF)
(e3t0 e2t1 e1t2 e0t3) Sets edge
antialiasing filter coefficients (e for
aafilter
edge, t for texture: larger numbers
imply better antialiasing).
shapedfilter
Enable/disable shaped AA filter.
(ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-319

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

binCulling (on off a b c ab ac bc abc)

(ON/OFF) Enables/disables bin culling.
alphaTransparency Enables/disables alpha
(ON/OFF) transparency.
alphaCull Enables/disables alpha texture
(ON/OFF) culling.
opaqueCull Enables/disables opaque texture
(ON/OFF) culling.
spanfull
Enables/disables span-full.
(ON/OFF)
volumetric Enables/disables volumetric
(ON/OFF) primitives.
spanrate Enables/disables span-rate
(ON/OFF) rendering.
advancedSpanrate Enables/disables 8100 span-rate
(ON/OFF) rendering.
priAnisotropic Enables/disables anisotropic texture
(ON/OFF) filtering.
secAnisotropic Enable/disable anisotropic texture
(ON/OFF) filtering on secondary map.
anisotropiciteration Enables/disables anisotropic
(ON/OFF) iteration mode.
Enables/disables dynamic
dynamicAnisotropic
anisotropic texture filtering (primary
(ON/OFF)
map). The default is OFF.
dynamicAnisotropic Enables/disables dynamic
Sec anisotropic texture filtering (second
(ON/OFF) map).
dirlight Enables/disables directional light
(ON/OFF) sources.
poslight Enables/disables positional light

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(ON/OFF) sources.
lightscatter Enables/disables atmospheric light
(ON/OFF) scattering.
lsReflections Enables/disables reflections with
(ON/OFF) light scattering.
(off lev0 lev1 lev2 lev3) control
lsrcaliasreduction positional lightsource aliasing
reduction.
(off lev0 lev1 lev2 lev3) control
contrastreduction
runway stripe aliasing reduction.
softsaturate Enables/disables soft saturate
(ON/OFF) function.
hwClouds
Enable/disable hardware clouds.
(ON/OFF)

2-320 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

hybridClouds
Enable/disable hybrid clouds.
(ON/OFF)
primEffects
Enable/disable primitive effects.
(ON/OFF)
mfLines
Enable/disable debugging lines.
(ON/OFF)
mfBoxes
Enable/disable debugging boxes.
(ON/OFF)
smc
Enable/disable SMC visual mode.
(ON/OFF)
hatVisual
Enable/disable HAT visual mode.
(ON/OFF)
cdVisual
Enable/disable CD visual mode.
(ON/OFF)
losVisual
Enable/disable LOS visual mode.
(ON/OFF)
(0..1) Sets the force near value for
forceNearDepth
depth buffer range.
(0..1) Sets the force far value for
forceFarDepth
depth buffer range.
scud
Enable/disable scud.
(ON/OFF)
(0..6) enhanced sea state`s
visualization mod.
0 is to disable.
1 is to visual both dist to shore and
dist to demarcation.
2 is to visual dist to shore gradient.
enhancedSeaVis
3 is for dist to demarcation only.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4 is for dist to shore only.
5 is for x component of dist to shore
gradient.
6 is for y component of dist to shore
gradient.
particleLOD Enable/disable particle LOD
(ON/OFF) processing.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-321

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

[\AFFINITY]
[\DEBUG]
[\IMPORTCACHE]
[\OGL]
[\SORTCACHE] Refer to the following descriptions
[\STATEDATA] for more information.
[\TEXTURE]
[\THREAD]
[\THROTTLETEXCO
MPRESSION]

2.4.129.1 RENDERMODE \AFFINITY

The \AFFINITY qualifier controls OGL-specific thread affinity related to
rendering.
Format: RENDERMODE \AFFINITY [NETWORKFT=networkFT]
[NETWORKST=networkST] [OGLRENDER=oglRender]
[RENDERPARSE=renderParse] [SEASTATES=seaStates]
[TRICKLEPREPST=tricklePrepST] [SORTST=sortST] [SORTFT=softFT]
[SORTCRIT=sortCrit]
Syntax Affinity mask for FT network
networkFT
Description: threads.
Affinity mask for ST network
networkST
threads.
Affinity mask for OGL render
oglRender
thread.
Affinity mask for renderParse
renderParse
threads.
Affinity mask for sea states texture
seaStates
generation threads.
Affinity mask for ST trickle prep
tricklePrepST
thread.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sortST Affinity mask for ST sort threads.
Affinity mask for FT non-critical sort
softFT
threads.
Affinity mask for FT critical sort
sortCrit
threads.

2-322 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.129.2 RENDERMODE \DEBUG

The \DEBUG qualifier controls temporary debug render values.
Format: RENDERMODE \DEBUG [ENABLESENDTOSP=enableSendToSP]
[SHADERCACHEMISS=shaderCacheMiss] [THREADID=threadId]
[PROCESSORID=processorId] [SPARETIMEDELAY=spareTimeDelay]
[VPSPARETIMEDELAY=vpSpareTimeDelay] [IVAL0=ival0] [IVAL1=ival1]
[IVAL2=ival2] [IVAL3=ival3] [IVAL4=ival4] [IVAL5=ival5] [IVAL6=ival6]
[IVAL7=ival7] [IVAL8=ival8] [IVAL9=ival9] [IVAL10=ival10]
[IVAL11=ival11][FVAL0=fval0] [FVAL1=fval1] [FVAL2=fval2]
[FVAL3=fval3]
Syntax Enable/disable sending the debug
Description: render values to the SPs. To
enableSendToSP
disable various options, you must
(ON/OFF)
explicitly set the desired option
values as necessary.
shaderCacheMiss Enable/disable writing of shader
(ON/OFF) cache miss files to c:\EP2\debug.
threadId Enable/disable capture of thread
(ON/OFF) information in the event files.
Enable/disable capture of core
processorId
number information in the event
(ON/OFF)
files.
(0..52) Milliseconds of delay applied
to render field spare time of
spareTimeDelay viewport specified by
vpSpareTimeDelay prior to
swapBuffer call.
(0..63) Viewport to which
vpSpareTimeDelay
spareTimeDelay is applied.
ival0 Specifies temp debug int value0.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ival1 Specifies temp debug int value1.
ival2 Specifies temp debug int value2.
ival3 Specifies temp debug int value3.
ival4 Specifies temp debug int value4.
ival5 Specifies temp debug int value5.
ival6 Specifies temp debug int value6.
ival7 Specifies temp debug int value7.
ival8 Specifies temp debug int value8.
ival9 Specifies temp debug int value9.
ival10 Specifies temp debug int value10.
ival11 Specifies temp debug int value11.
fval0 Specifies temp debug float value0.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-323

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

fval1 Specifies temp debug float value1.

fval2 Specifies temp debug float value2.
fval3 Specifies temp debug float value3.

2.4.129.3 RENDERMODE \IMPORTCACHE

The \IMPORTCACHE qualifier controls options related to the OGL-specific
import cache operation.

Format: RENDERMODE \IMPORTCACHE [MODEL=model] [THEME=theme]

[VECTORFEATURE=vectorFeature] [ALLOCID=allocID]
[CACHEMAT=cachemat] [STAMPCACHEMAT=stampCacheMat]

Syntax model Enable/disable VBO caching of

Description: (ON/OFF) moving models at import time.
theme Enable/disable VBO caching of 3D
(ON/OFF) themels at import time.
vectorFeature Enable/disable VBO caching of
(ON/OFF) vector features at import time.
DEBUG ONLY: enable/disable
allocID
allocation of state data IDs at model
(ON/OFF)
import time.
cachemat DEBUG ONLY: enable/disable
(ON/OFF) caching of matrices.
stampCacheMat DEBUG ONLY: enable/disable
(ON/OFF) caching of stamp matrices.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-324 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.129.4 RENDERMODE \OGL

The \OGL qualifier controls the OGL rendering mode. This command is
used for debugging purposes.

Format: RENDERMODE \OGL [VBOCACHE=vboCache]

[PBOCACHE=pboCache] [EARLYVBOST=earlyVboST]
[FILTERMODE=filtermode] [REPORTDONE=reportDone]
[CLOUDLAYERS=cloudlayers] [ATMOSPHERE=atmosphere]
[SEASTATEBLENDENABLE=seaStateBlendEnable]
[FOGVOLUME=fogVolume] [DEPTHMODULATION=depthModulation]
[REFLECTIONBUFFER=reflectionBuffer]
[PARTICLEBUFFER=particleBuffer] [FOGBUFFER=fogBuffer]
[VOLUMECOUNT=volumeCount] [LIGHTING=lighting]
[FRAGMENTLIGHT=fragmentlight] [AREALIGHT=arealight]
[BACKSCATTER=backscatter]
[CLEARCOLOR=clearColor] [CLEARDEPTH=clearDepth]
[REVERSEDEPTH=reverseDepth] [AASUBSAMPLES=aaSubSamples]
[BITPRECISION=bitPrecision] [INSTANCEST=instanceST]
[INSTANCEFT=instanceFT] [INSTANCEMINPRIM=instanceMinPrim]
[INSTANCEMINGROUPING=instanceMinGrouping]
[DRAWCRITFIRST=drawCritFirst]
[SORTST=sortST] [SORTFT=sortFT] [SORTCRIT=sortCrit]
[ORDEREDOUTPUT=orderedOutput] [SPLITTER=splitter]
[SORTPARTICLEEFFECTS =sortParticleEffects]
[SORTBROKENCLOUDS=sortBrokenClouds] [ONEPRIM=onePrim]
[GEFOVCULL=geFovCull] [TINY=tiny] [VPSIZE=vpsize] [VPW=vpw]
[VPH=vph] [RENDERPARSE=renderParse] [CULLST=cullST]
[CULLFT=cullFT] [GUARDST=guardST] [TESSELLATION=tessellation]
[DELTASCALE=deltaScale] [DITHERSCALE=ditherScale]
[LAYERSCALE=layerScale] [CLAMPLAYEROFFSET=clampLayerOffset]
[DRAWELEMENTFLUSHCOUNT=drawElementFlushCount]
[GPUFANSPEED=gpuFanSpeed]
[LPANTIALIASSCALAR=lpAntiAliasScalar]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[TRACKASSIST=trackAssist]

Syntax vboCache Enable/disable vertex buffer

Description: (ON/OFF) caching.
Enable/disable pixel buffer objects
pboCache for better texture transfer rates.
(ON/OFF) (Must have texture PBOs configured
at startup to enable.)
Enable/disable early vertex buffer
earlyVboST
caching for slow time terrain (split
(ON/OFF)
RT/SP only).
(tri bi none off off16BitTex`)
filterMode Specifies which filtering mode to
use for sensor shader texture.
(preSwap postSwap) specifies when
reportDone SP-done is reported to RT from the
SPs.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-325

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(off textured procedural)

cloudlayers Enable/disable cloud layer shader
code.
atmosphere Enable/disable atmosphere shader
(ON/OFF) code.
Enable/disable blending between
seaStateBlendEnable different water regions in the
(ON/OFF) shaders. (Only for enhanced sea
states)
fogVolume Enable/disable fog volume
(ON/OFF) calculations in the shaders.
depthModulation Enable/disable depth modulation
(ON/OFF) calculations in the shaders.
(0..3) Enable/disable reflection
reflectionBuffer rendering (0 = off, 1-3 = rendering
scale reduction)
(0..3) Enable/disable particle
particleBuffer rendering (0 = off, 1-3 = rendering
scale reduction)
(0..3) Enable/disable fog volume
fogBuffer rendering (0 = off, 1-3 = rendering
scale reduction) (DEPRECATED)
(1..4) Number of simultaneous fog
volumeCount
volumes.
lighting Enable/disable all lighting shader
(ON/OFF) code.
fragmentlight Specify the number of light sources
(ON/OFF) in the fragment shader code.

areaLight Enable/disable area light sources in

(ON/OFF) the shaders.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

backscatter Enables/disables light source
(ON/OFF) backscatter calculation.

clearColor Enable/disable clearing the color

(ON/OFF) buffer.
clearDepth Enable/disable clearing the depth
(ON/OFF) buffer.
reverseDepth Enables\disables reverse depth
(ON/OFF) buffer.
(two four eight) Specify number of
aaSubsamples
anti-aliasing subsamples.
(F32 F16 U12 U10 U8) number of
bitPrecision
bits used for color buffers.
Enable/disable drawElement
instanceST instancing for slow time models
(ON/OFF) (must unload and reload models to
take effect).

2-326 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Enable/disable drawElement
instanceFT instancing for fast time models
(ON/OFF) (must unload and reload models to
take effect).
(1..1024) The minimum number of
instanceMinPrim
primitives per instance.
(1..1024) The minimum number of
items to group when instancing,
instanceMinGrouping
below this items will be rendered
individually.
Enable/disable rendering critical
drawCritFirst
objects to the frame buffer first.
(ON/OFF)
(DEPRECATED)
sortST Enable/disable state sorting of slow
(ON/OFF) time data.
sortFT Enable/disable state sorting of fast
(ON/OFF) time data.
sortCrit Enable/disable state sorting of fast
(ON/OFF) time critical data.
Enable/disable consistently ordered
orderedOutput
output for sorted display lists.
(ON/OFF)
(DEPRECATED)
splitter Enable/disable splitting of long
(ON/OFF) display lists prior to sorting.
(off frontToBack backToFront)
sortParticleEffects Enable/disable sorting and blending
of special effect particles.
(off frontToBack backToFront)
sortBrokenClouds Enable/disable sorting and blending
of broken cloud puffs.
Enable/disable clamping
onePrim glDrawElement calls to a single
(ON/OFF) primitive (i.e., enable/disable

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

reduce verts). Debug only.
geFovCull Enable/disable FOV culling in
(ON/OFF) geOGL. Debug only.
tiny Enable/disable a tiny viewport.
(ON/OFF) Debug only.
vpsize Enable/disable use of viewport size
(ON/OFF) parameters. Debug only.
(1..3840) Debug only: If
vpw
vpsize == on, the viewport width.
(1..2160) DEBUG ONLY: If
vph
vpsize == on, the viewport height.
renderParse DEBUG ONLY: enable/disable field
(ON/OFF) rate render parsing.
TEMP DEBUG ONLY: Enable/disable
cullST
FOV cull during state sorting of slow
(ON/OFF)
time data.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-327

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

TEMP DEBUG ONLY: Enable/disable

cullFT
FOV cull during field-of-delay pass
(ON/OFF)
for fast time non-critical data.
(0..50) DEBUG ONLY: FOV cull
guardST
during state sorting of slow time
(ON/OFF)
data.
tessellation DEBUG ONLY: enable/disable
(ON/OFF) tessellation shaders.
(0..1000) TEMP DEBUG ONLY: To
deltaScale
allow for testing of delta position.
(0..2) To allow for testing of color
ditherScale
dithering. Temp Debug only.
(0.01..10) To allow for adjustment
layerScale of layer offset on non-standard
models.
(0.01..1) To allow for limiting of
clampLayerOffset layer offset on non-standard
models.
(1..1024) Number of drawElement
drawElementFlushC
calls to allow before flushing
ount
commands to hardware.
(25..100) Speed of the video card
gpuFanSpeed
GPU fan as a percentage.
- (0..10) Scalar used to adjust the
lpAntiAliasScalar size of the soft roll off curve used
for lightpoint anti-aliasing.
trackAssist DEBUG ONLY: enable/disable debug
(ON/OFF) mode for area track assist.

2.4.129.5 RENDERMODE \SORTCACHE

The \SORTCACHE qualifier control options related to the OGL-specific
sort and cache operation.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: RENDERMODE \SORTCACHE [TIGHTFOVCULL=tightFovCull]
[TIGHTRADIUSSCALE=tightRadiusScale]
[TIGHTMININSTANCES=tightMinInstances]
[BACKFACECULL=backfaceCull]
[BACKFACETHRESHOLD=backfaceThreshold]

Syntax Enable/disable tight per-instance

tightFovCull
Description: FOV culling
tightRadiusScale (1..100) Tight FOV cull radius scale
tightMinInstances (1..100000) Minimum number of
instances required before allowing
tight per-instance FOV culling
backfaceCull Enables/disables backface culling.
(ON/OFF)

2-328 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

backfaceThreshold (0..1) Threshold for backface culling,

where 0.0 is the most, tightest
culling and 1.0 is essentially no
culling.

2.4.129.6 RENDERMODE \STATEDATA

The \STATEDATA qualifier controls OGL-specific state data.

Format: RENDERMODE \STATEDATA [MAXROWS=maxRows] [PBO=pbo]

Syntax (0..2048) Specify max number of

Description: maxRows state data rows per field (zero
means use original default value).
pbo Enable/disable use of state data
(ON/OFF) PBOs (must have PBO memory
configured at startup to enable).

2.4.129.7 RENDERMODE \TEXTURE

The \TEXTURE qualifier controls OGL texturing.

Format: RENDERMODE \TEXTURE [PRIMARY=primary]

[ALTERNATE=alternate] [SECONDARY=secondary]
[SPECULAR=specular] [COMPRESSION=compression]
[SENSORCOMPRESSION=sensorCompression]
[LOADTIME=loadTime] [SPLITSIZE=splitSize]

Syntax primary Enable/disable the primary texture

Description: (ON/OFF) sampler in the shaders.
alternate Enable/disable the alternate texture
(ON/OFF) sampler in the shaders.
secondary Enable/disable the secondary texture
(ON/OFF) sampler in the shaders.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

specular Enable/disable the specular texture
(ON/OFF) sampler in the shaders.
compression (HW HQ FAST off) Specifies where
real-time compression should take
place.
sensorCompression When enabled, use the compression
(ON/OFF) tailored to sensor texture.
loadTime (0..16) Specifies how long in
milliseconds to spend loading
textures (defaults to 2ms).
splitSize (1024..8192) Specifies the size at
which to start splitting textures.
(defaults to greater than
MAX_TEXTURE_RES).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-329

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.129.8 RENDERMODE \THREAD

The \THREAD qualifier controls OGL-specific threads related to
rendering.

Format: RENDERMODE \THREAD [SORTST=sortST] [SORTFT=sortFT]

[SORTCRIT=sortCrit] [RENDERPARSE=renderParse]
[SUSPENDST=suspendST] [NETWORKFT=networkFT]
[NETWORKST=networkST]

Syntax sortST (1..16) Specify number of ST sort

Description: threads.
sortFT (1..16) Specify number of FT non-
critical sort threads.
sortCrit (1..16) Specify number of FT critical
sort threads.
renderParse (1..8) Specify number of renderParse
threads.
suspendST Enable/disable suspending ST sort
(ON/OFF) threads during per field SP
processing.
networkFT (1..4) specify number of FT network
threads
networkST (1..4) specify number of ST network
threads

2.4.129.9 RENDERMODE \THROTTLETEXCOMPRESSION

The \THROTTLETEXCOMPRESSION qualifier controls OGL texture
compression throttling.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: RENDERMODE \THROTTLETEXCOMPRESSION [ENABLE=enable]
[WORKTIME=workTime] [SLEEPTIME=sleeptime]

Syntax enable enable/disable the throttling of

Description: (ON/OFF) texture compression
workTime (1..1000) specifies how long in
milliseconds to spend compressing
textures before throttling (defaults to
2 ms)
sleeptime (1..100) specifies how long in
milliseconds to sleep the
compression thread(s) between
workTimes (defaults to 1 ms)

2-330 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.130 RIBBON
The RIBBON command displays or controls the state of a moving model
flight ribbon.

Format: RIBBON [MM=mm] [GLOBALMINWIDTH=globalminwidth]

[GLOBALMAXWIDTH=globalmaxwidth] [PERIOD=period]
[ENABLE=enable] [MAXSEGMENTS=maxsegments] [WIDTH=width]
[OFFSETY=offsety] [OFFSETZ=offsetz] [TOPRED=topred]
[TOPGREEN=topgreen] [TOPBLUE=topblue] [TOPALPHA=topalpha]
[BOTTOMRED=bottomred] [BOTTOMGREEN=bottomgreen]
[BOTTOMBLUE=bottomblue] [BOTTOMALPHA=bottomalpha]
[LIST=list]

Syntax mm (0..65535) Moving model number

Description:
globalminwidth The minimum width for all flight
ribbons
globalmaxwidth The maximum width for all flight
ribbons
period The length of time between
segments endpoints in seconds
enable (on off) Enables or disables ribbon
for this moving model.
maxsegments (5..300) The maximum number of
segments allocated to this ribbon
width The width of the flight ribbon in feet
offsety The Y offset in feet from the position
of the moving model
offsetz The Z offset in feet from the position
of the moving model

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

topred (0..1) The red component of the
flight ribbon's top color
topgreen (0..1) The green component of the
flight ribbon's top color
topblue (0..1) The blue component of the
flight ribbon's top color
topalpha (0..1) The alpha component of the
flight ribbon's top color
bottomred (0..1) The red component of the
flight ribbon's bottom color
bottomgreen (0..1) The green component of the
flight ribbon's bottom color
bottomblue (0..1) The blue component of the
flight ribbon's bottom color

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-331

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

bottomalpha (0..1) The alpha component of the

flight ribbon's bottom color
Lists the state of each enabled
list
moving model flight control

2.4.131 ROTORWASH
The ROTORWASH command controls a previously defined rotorwash
effect.

Format: ROTORWASH [NUMBER=number] [ENABLE=enable] [All=all]

[\ALPHA] [\DEFINE] [\LAG] [\MONITOR]

Syntax (0..127) The rotorwash effect

number
Description: identifier.
enable Enables or disables the specified
(ON/OFF) Rotorwash effect.
all When the specified command applied
to all defined Rotorwash effects.
[\ALPHA] Refer to the following description for
[\DEFINE] more information about this qualifier.
[\LAG]
[\MONITOR]
[\TERRAINMODE]

2.4.131.1 ROTORWASH \ALPHA

The \ALPHA qualifier controls how alpha transparency is applied to
rotorwash.

Format: ROTORWASH \ALPHA [MODE=mode]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax (off ownshipOnly all) Sets the alpha
mode
Description: transparency mode for rotorwash.

2.4.131.2 ROTORWASH \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines (allocates memory for) or modifies a
rotorwash effect.
Format: ROTORWASH \DEFINE [NUMBER=number] [PARENTMM=parentmm]
[STARTHEIGHT=startHeight] [COMPLETEHEIGHT=completeHeight]
[MINSPEED=minSpeed] [MAXSPEED=maxSpeed]
[STARTDURATIONSCALE=startDurationScale]
[COMPLETEDURATIONSCALE=completeDurationScale]
[STARTPARTICLESIZESCALE=startParticleSizeScale]
[COMPLETEPARTICLESIZESCALE=completeParticleSizeScale]
[STARTPARTICLESPERSECONDSCALE=startParticlesPerSecondScale]
[COMPLETEPARTICLESPERSECONDSCALE=completeParticlesPerSecond
Scale] [STARTPARTICLEVELOCITYSCALE=startParticleVelocityScale]

2-332 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

[COMPLETEPARTICLEVELOCITYSCALE=completeParticleVelocityScale]
[BLADEZOFFSET=bladeZOffset] [EXPANSIONTIME=expansionTime]
[SCUDENABLE=scudEnable]
[AREASCUDSTARTHEIGHT=areaScudStartHeight]
[AREASCUDCOMPLETEHEIGHT=areaScudCompleteHeight]
[BROWNOUTSTARTHEIGHT=brownoutStartHeight ]
[BROWNOUTCOMPLETEHEIGHT=brownoutCompleteHeight ]
[GROUNDMODELNAME=groundModelName]
[GROUNDMODELMAXSCALE=groundModelMaxScale]
[GROUNDMODELMINSCALE=groundModelMinScale]
[RADIUSSCALE=radiusScale] [FADERAMP=fadeRamp]
[HEIGHTRAMP=heightRamp] [MANUALMODE=manualmode]
[MANUALINDEX=manualindex]
[ADJDIRWITHTHRUST=adjDirWithThrust]

Syntax (0..127) Rotorwash effect identifier.

number
Description:
(0..65535) The parent motion system
parentmm associated with the effect.
Height above terrain where the
startHeight rotorwash effect begins to emit and
fade-in particles.
Height above terrain where the
completeHeight rotorwash effect is completely faded
in.
Minimum speed at which the Rotor
minSpeed Wash effect begins to fade out due to
speed (Knots).
The speed at which the rotorwash
maxSpeed effect is completely faded out due to
speed.
(0..10) Particle duration scalar used

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

when the rotorwash effect is
startDurationScale completely faded out. Multiplied by
type definition particle duration.
(0..10) Particle duration scalar used
completeDuration when the rotorwash effect is
Scale completely faded in. Multiplied by
type definition particle duration.
(0..10) Particle size scalar used when
startParticleSizeSc the rotorwash effect is completely
ale faded out. Multiplied by type
definition particle size.
(0..10) Particle size scalar used when
completeParticleSi the rotorwash effect is completely
zeScale faded in. Multiplied by type definition
particle size.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-333

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(0..10) Particles per second scalar

startParticlesPerS used when the rotorwash effect is
econdScale completely faded out. Multiplied by
type definition particles per second.
(0..10) Particles per second scalar
completeParticlesP used when the rotorwash effect is
erSecondScale completely faded in. Multiplied by
type definition particles per second.
(0..10) Particle velocity scalar used
startParticleVelocit when the rotorwash effect is
yScale completely faded out. Multiplied by
type definition particle velocity.
(0..10) Particle velocity scalar used
completeParticleV when the rotorwash effect is
elocityScale completely faded in. Multiplied by
type definition particle velocity
Z offset from the eyepoint to the
bladeZOffset rotor blade height.
Time in seconds required for the
expansionTime rotorwash effect to build up enough
inertia to fully expand.
Enable/disable the use of scud - also
scudEnable called Range Independent Fog (RIF) -
(ON/OFF) for the Rotor Wash effect.
The height above terrain where area
areaScudStartHeig based scud & ownship recirculation
ht starts.
The height above terrain where area
areaScudComplet based scud & ownship recirculation is
eHeight complete.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

brownoutStartHei The height above terrain where
ght brownout scud starts taking effect.

brownoutComplet The height above terrain where

eHeight brownout scud is completely in effect.
Flight model name of optional
groundModelName modeled part of the ground effect.

groundModelMaxS Ground model max size scale.

cale
groundModelMinS Ground model min size scale.
cale
(0..1) Used to scale down the radius
radiusScale of the rotorwash effect for smaller
helicopters.

2-334 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

(0..1) Manual override for the alpha

fadeRamp used for the rotorwash effect (helpful
for Spin up/down).
(0..1) Manual override for the max
heightRamp height of rotorwash effect particles
(helpful for Spin up/down).
Enable/disable explicit control of the
manualmode rotorwash effect using the
(ON/OFF) manualindex parameter.

manualindex Manual configuration table Index.

If on, the rotor spray emitter's
direction (i.e., normal to the emitter
adjDirWithThrust plane) follows parent model HPR, else
(ON/OFF) the direction is always set to the
ground normal conforming the rotor
spray.

2.4.131.3 ROTORWASH \LAG

The \LAG qualifier controls the rotorwash model/emitter position lag
effect.
Format: ROTORWASH \LAG [NUMBER=number] [TILTLAGSCALE=tiltlagscale]
[DISTANCELAGSCALE=distancelagscale]
[SPEEDLAGSCALE=speedlagscale]

Syntax (0..127) RotorWash effect identifier.

number
Description:
(0..10) Scales the effect parent
tiltlagscale model orientation has on the Rotor
Wash effect center position.
(-10..10) Scales the distance the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

distancelagscale emitter center lags behind the parent
model as a function of velocity.
(0..10) Scales the rate at which the
emitter center reaches and recovers
speedlagscale from full distance lag with velocity
changes.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-335

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.131.4 ROTORWASH \MONITOR

The \MONITOR qualifier specifies which rotorwash effect will be
monitored in EP2 statistics output (engineering command).
Format: ROTORWASH \MONITOR [NUMBER=number]

Syntax (0..127) RotorWash effect identifier

number for the effect to be monitored.
Description:

2.4.131.5 ROTORWASH \TERRAINMODE

The \TERRAINMODE qualifier controls how terrain material types are
used by rotorwash.
Format: ROTORWASH \TERRAINMODE [MODE=mode]

Syntax (TerrainOnly ModTerrAndCTInherit)

Description: mode sets the terrain material mode for
rotorwash.

2.4.132 ROTORWASHTABLE
The ROTORWASHTABLE has three qualifiers described below.

2.4.132.1 ROTORWASHTABLE \FIC

The \FIC qualifier adds to and modifies entries in the rotorwash FIC
Configuration table.
Format: ROTORWASHTABLE \FIC [INDEX=index] [LIST=list] [TYPE=type]
[SELECT=select]

Syntax The FIC configuration table index.

index

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Description:
Triggers print of all defined
list configuration table entries.
(-1..767) Type definition to be used
type for the specified index.
(0..19) Ground model select to use
select for the ground effect model.

2-336 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.132.2 ROTORWASHTABLE \MANUAL

The \MANUAL qualifier adds to and modifies entries in the rotorwash
manual configuration table.
Format: ROTORWASHTABLE \MANUAL [INDEX=index] [LIST=list]
[TYPE=type] [SELECT=select]

Syntax The manual configuration table index.

index
Description:
Triggers print of all defined
list configuration table entries.
(-1..767) Type definition to be used
type for the specified index.
(0..19) Ground Model select to use
select for the ground effect model.

2.4.132.3 ROTORWASHTABLE \MATERIAL

The \MATERIAL qualifier adds to and modifies entries in the Rotorwash
Material (SMC) Configuration Table.
Format: ROTORWASHTABLE \MATERIAL [INDEX=index] [LIST=list]
[TYPE=type] [SELECT=select]

Syntax Material(SMC) Configuration Table

index index.
Description:
Triggers print of all defined
list configuration table entries.
(-1..767) Type definition to be used
type for the specified index.
(0..19) Ground Model select to use
select for the ground effect model.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.133 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF
The ROTORWASHTYPEDEF command has four qualifiers that are
described below.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-337

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.133.1 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \GROUNDEFFECT

The \GROUNDEFFECT qualifier defines rotorwash type ground effect
parameters.
Format: ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \GROUNDEFFECT [TYPE=type]
[PARTICLESYSTEM=particleSystem] [STARTGRAVITY=startGravity]
[COMPLETEGRAVITY=completeGravity]
[STARTPARTICLESPERSECOND=startParticlesPerSecond]
[COMPLETEPARTICLESPERSECOND=completeParticlesPerSecond]
[STARTPARTICLEVELOCITY=startParticleVelocity]
[COMPLETEPARTICLEVELOCITY=completeParticleVelocity]
[STARTALPHA=startAlpha] [COMPLETEALPHA=completeAlpha]

Syntax (0..767) Type number in which to

type store Ground Effect parameter.
Description:
The particle effect definition to use as
particleSystem a template for the optional ground
effect.
(-10..10) Particle gravity scalar used
startGravity when the Ground Effect is completely
faded out.
(-10..10) Particle gravity scalar used
completeGravity when the Ground Effect is
completely faded in.
(0..10) Emitter per second scalar
startParticlesPerS used when the Ground Effect is
econd completely faded out.
(0..10) Emitter per second scalar
completeParticlesP used when the Ground Effect is
erSecond completely faded in.
(0..10) Particle velocity scalar used

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

startParticleVelocit when the Ground Effect is completely
y faded out.
(0..10) Particle velocity scalar used
completeParticleV when the Ground Effect is completely
elocity faded in.
(0..1) Ground Model alpha scalar
startAlpha used when the Ground Effect is
completely faded out.
(0..1) Ground Model alpha scalar
completeAlpha used when the Ground Effect is
completely faded in.

2-338 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.133.2 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \OWNSHIPRECIRCULATION

The \OWNSHIPRECIRCULATION qualifier defines the rotorwash type for
ownship recirculation parameters.
Format: ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \GROUNDEFFECT [TYPE=type]
[PARTICLESYSTEM=particleSystem]

Syntax (0..767) Type number in which to

type store Ground Effect parameter.
Description:
The particle effect definition to use as
particleSystem a template for the optional ground
effect.

2.4.133.3 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \ROTORSPRAY

The \ROTORSPRAY qualifier defines the rotorwash type rotor spray
parameters.
Format: ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \ROTORSPRAY [TYPE=type]
[PARTICLESYSTEM=particleSystem] [STARTALPHA=startAlpha]
[COMPLETEALPHA=completeAlpha] [STARTGRAVITY=startGravity]
[COMPLETEGRAVITY=completeGravity]
[STARTDURATION=startDuration]
[COMPLETEDURATION=completeDuration]
[STARTPARTICLESIZE=startParticleSize]
[COMPLETEPARTICLESIZE=completeParticleSize]
[STARTPARTICLESPERSECOND=startParticlesPerSecond]
[COMPLETEPARTICLESPERSECOND=completeParticlesPerSecond]
[STARTPARTICLEVELOCITY=startParticleVelocity]
[COMPLETEPARTICLEVELOCITY=completeParticleVelocity]

Syntax (0..767) Type number in which to

type store rotor spray parameters.
Description:
The particle effect definition to use as

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

particleSystem a template for the rotor spray effect.
(0..1) Particle alpha scalar used when
startAlpha the rotor spray effect is completely
faded out.
(0..1) Particle alpha scalar used when
completeAlpha the Rotor Spray effect is completely
faded in.
(-10..10) Particle gravity scalar used
startGravity when the rotor spray effect is
completely faded out.
(-10..10) Particle gravity scalar used
completeGravity when the rotor spray effect is
completely faded in.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-339

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(0..10) Particle duration scalar used

startDuration when the rotor spray effect is
completely faded out.
(0..10) Particle duration scalar used
completeDuration when the rotor spray effect is
completely faded in.
(0..10) Particle size scalar used when
startParticleSize the rotor spray effect is completely
faded out.
(0..10) Particle size scalar used when
completeParticleSi the rotor spray effect is completely
ze faded in.
(0..10) Emitter per second scalar
startParticlesPerS used when the rotor spray effect is
econd completely faded out.
(0..10) Emitter per second scalar
completeParticlesP used when the rotor spray effect is
erSecond completely faded in.
(0..10) Particle velocity scalar used
startParticleVelocit when the rotor spray effect is
y completely faded out.
(0..10) Particle velocity scalar used
completeParticleV when the rotor spray effect is
elocity completely faded in.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-340 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.133.4 ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \SCUD

The \SCUD qualifier defines the rotorwash scud parameters.
Format: ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \SCUD [TYPE=type] [RED=red]
[GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue] [OPACITY=opacity]
[INRANGE=inrange] [OUTRANGE=outrange]
[AREASCUDMAXOPACITY=areaScudMaxOpacity]
[AREASCUDALPHATHRESHOLD=areaScudAlphaThreshold]
[BROWNOUTMAXOPACITY=brownoutMaxOpacity]

Syntax (0..767) Type number in which to

type store scud parameters.
Description:
(0..1) Particle scud (RIF) color red
red component.
(0..1) Particle scud (RIF) color green
green component.
(0..1) Particle scud (RIF) color blue
blue component.
(0..1) Rotor spray particle scud (RIF)
opacity max opacity.
Rotor spray particle scud (RIF) full
inrange range.
Rotor spray particle scud (RIF) start
outrange range.

areaScudMaxOpac (0..1) Max opacity for area based

ity scud.
(0..1) Rotor Spray Particles with
areaScudAlphaThr alpha above this value form the
eshold volume for area based scud.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

brownoutMaxOpac (0..1) Max opacity for brownout scud.
ity

2.4.134 ROUTE
The ROUTE command performs route playback functions.
Before reusing a route slot (id), the previous route should be unloaded
(function unload) to ensure clean playback of the new route.

Format: ROUTE [FUNC=func] [ID=id] [ALL=all]

[\DEFINE] [\INFO] [\LIST]

Syntax func (start pause stop unload) Route

Description: playback function.
id Route identifier.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-341

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

all Perform function on all current

routes.
[\DEFINE] Refer to the following descriptions
[\INFO] for more information about these
[\LIST] qualifiers.

2.4.134.1 ROUTE \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines or modifies a route definition.
Format: ROUTE \DEFINE [ID=id] [MM=mm] [FILENAME=filename]
[LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]
[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude]
[X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [SPEED=speed] [CYCLIC=cyclic]
[DIRECTION=direction] [SMOOTH=smooth] [TSTART=tstart]
[TEND=tend]

Syntax Route identifier

id
Description:
Moving model associated with the
mm route.

filename Route file to load.

(-90..90) Route latitude degrees
latdegree offset.

latminute (0..60) Route latitude minutes offset.

latsecond (0..60) Route latitude seconds offset.

(-180..180) Route longitude degrees
longdegree offset.
(0..60) Route longitude minutes
longminute

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

offset.
(0..60) Route longitude seconds
longsecond offset.

altitude Route altitude offset.

x Local route offset in feet.

y Local route offset in feet.

z Local route offset in feet.

speed Route speed scalar.

cyclic Cyclic route.

(ON/OFF)
direction (rev fwd) Route direction.
(off on extra ultra) Smooth route
smooth positions.

2-342 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Trim n seconds from the beginning of

tstart the route.
Trim n seconds from the end of the
tend route.

2.4.134.2 ROUTE \INFO

The \INFO qualifier prints the specified route’s information.
Format: ROUTE \INFO [ID=id]

Syntax Route identifier

id
Description:

2.4.134.3 ROUTE \LIST

The \LIST qualifier lists the current routes.

2.4.135 ROUTERECORD
The ROUTERECORD command performs the route record function.
Format: ROUTERECORD [FUNC=func] [MM=mm] [ALL=all]

[\DEFINE]

Syntax func Route record function.

Description: (ON/OFF)
Moving model associated with the
mm recording.
Perform function on all current
all routes.
Refer to the following description for
[\DEFINE] more information about this qualifier.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.135.1 ROUTERECORD \DEFINE
The \DEFINE qualifier defines new route recordings.
Format: ROUTERECORD \DEFINE [MM=mm] [FILENAME=filename] [Z=z]
[DESCRIPTION=description]

Syntax Moving model associated with the

mm recording.
Description:
filename Route file to save.

z Z offset.

description A short description of the route.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-343

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.136 RUNWAY
The RUNWAY command sets runway contaminants.

Format: RUNWAY [CONTAMINANTS=contaminants] [REGION=region]

[LIST=list] [HELP=help]

Syntax (1..9) Runway contaminant.

contaminants
Description:
(0..7) Specifies the region to which
region the command applies.
Display the contaminants for all
list regions.
Display a description of all
help contaminant values.

2.4.137 SCALE
The SCALE command scales a motion system.
Format: SCALE [MM=mm] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [TX=tx] [TY=ty] [TZ=tz]

Syntax Motion system.

mm
Description:
x X scale value.

y Y scale value.

z Z scale value.

tx (0..3600) transition time for x scale.

ty (0..3600) transition time for y scale.

tz (0..3600) transition time for z scale.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.138 SEASON
The SEASON command displays or controls the system season setting.
Format: SEASON [SCENE=SUMMER | WINTER]

Syntax
Description: SCENE (SUMMER/ Sets the system season to the
WINTER) selected scene.

2-344 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.139 SENSORTEXSCALAR
The SENSORTEXSCALAR command sets a submodel sensor type
intensity scalar.

Format: SENSORTEXSCALAR [MM=mm] [NVG=nvg] [EVS=evs]

[MWIR=mwir] [LWIR=lwir] [EO=eo]

Syntax Motion system

mm
Description:
nvg nvg sensor scale value

evs evs sensor scale value

mwir mwir sensor scale value

lwir lwir sensor scale value

eo eo sensor scale value

2.4.140 SHADOW
The SHADOW command controls moving model shadows.

Format: SHADOW [MM=mm] [BASECONTROLID=baseControlId]

[ENABLE=enable] [INTSCALE=intScale]
[GROUNDLEVEL=groundLevel]
[DISABLETERRAINCONFORMING=disableTerrainConforming]
[HIGHPRECISIONRANGE=highPrecisionRange]
[AIRBASEDZLIFT=airBasedZLift] [LIST=list]

[\CONFIG] [\ENV]

Syntax
mm (0..65535) Moving model number.
Description:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

baseControlId (1..127) Base control ID.
enable Enable/disable moving model
(ON/OFF) shadow.
intScale The shadow intensity scale.
groundLevel On is ground level; off is air based.
(ON/OFF)
disableTerrainConf ON turns off terrain conforming. OFF
orming allows shadows to conform to the
(ON/OFF) terrain.
highPrecisionRang If eye is within this range - compute
e shadow elevation at higher precision.
airBasedZLift Amount an air-based moving model
shadow is offset from the ground.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-345

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

list List all enabled moving model

shadows.
[\CONFIG] Refer to the following descriptions
[\ENV] for more information about these
qualifiers.

2.4.140.1 SHADOW \CONFIG

The \CONFIG qualifier controls the configuration of moving model
shadows.

Format: SHADOW \CONFIG

[MOVINGMODELMASKINDEX=movingmodelmaskindex]
[FORESHORTENDEGREES=foreshortenDegrees]

Syntax movingmodelmas
(0..8) Index of moving model mask.
Description: kindex
foreshortenDegree (0..90) The amount to foreshorten
s MM shadows (in degrees).

2.4.140.2 SHADOW \ENV

The \ENV qualifier controls parameters applied to terrain and cloud
shadows.

Format: SHADOW \ENV [AMBIENTCONTRAST=ambientContrast]

[DIFFUSECONTRAST=diffuseContrast]
[PENUMBRAWIDTH=penumbraWidth] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (0..1) [0,1] Specifies the ambient

ambientContrast
Description: scalar applied to in shadow objects.
diffuseContrast (0..1) [0,1] Specifies the diffuse
scalar applied to in shadow objects.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

penumbraWidth (0..255) Controls the width of the
shadow penumbra, bigger equals
wider.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.141 SIGNBOARDSCALE
The SIGNBOARDSCALE command sets parameters for LOD scale (sign
board scale) groups.
Format: SIGNBOARDSCALE [GROUP=group] [ENABLE=enable]
[NEARRANGE=nearRange] [FARRANGE=farRange] [SCALE=scale]
[OFFSET=offset]

2-346 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Syntax (0..8) Specifies to which group the

group
Description: parameters apply.
enable Enable/disable scaling.
nearRange Scaling occurs between nearRange
and farRange, this specifies near
range.
farRange Scaling occurs between nearRange
and farRange, this specifies far
range.
scale Scaling occurs between nearRange
and farRange, this specifies the
scale.
offset Offset of scaling origin.

2.4.142 SKY
The SKY command is used to set the parameters of the sky dome.
Format: SKY [SELECT=select] [ENABLE=enable] [RADIUS=radius]
[TOP=top] [RINGS=rings] [SLICES=slices] [RED=red]
[GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue] [LIST=list] [EMBAND=emband]

[\REFLECTION] [\TEXTURE]

Syntax select (0..31) Selects the texture for the

Description: sky; 0 is reserved for no texture.
enable Enable/disable rendering of the sky
(OFF\ON) dome.
radius Sets the radius of the sky dome at
MSL.
top Sets the altitude of the sky dome

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

top.
rings (2..64) Sets how many rings of
geometry compose the sky bowl.
slices (4..128) Sets how many slices of
geometry compose the sky bowl.
red (0..1) Sets the red color of the sky.
green (0..1) Sets the green color of the
sky.
blue (0..1) Sets the blue color of the sky.
list List the parameters for all the
texture selects.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
Emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-347

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

[\REFLECTION] Refer to the following descriptions for

[\TEXTURE] more information about these
qualifiers.

2.4.142.1 SKY \REFLECTION

The \REFLECTION qualifier sets the parameters of the reflected sky
dome.
Format: SKY \REFLECTION [SELECT=select] [ENABLE=enable]
[MODE=mode] [SIZESCALEATMINALT=sizeScaleAtMinAlt]
[SIZESCALEATMAXALT=sizeScaleAtMaxAlt]
[SPEEDSCALEATMINALT=speedScaleAtMinAlt]
[SPEEDSCALEATMAXALT=SpeedScaleAtMaxAlt] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (1..31) Manual select of texture for

select
Description: the reflected sky.
enable Enables/disables rendering of the
(ON/OFF) reflected sky dome.
mode (manual auto) Auto/manual control
of texture for the reflected sky.
sizeScaleAtMinAlt Reflection texture size scale at
minimum cloud base altitude.
sizeScaleAtMaxAlt Reflection texture size scale at
maximum cloud base altitude.
speedScaleAtMinAl Reflection texture speed scale at
t minimum cloud base altitude.
speedScaleAtMax Reflection texture speed scale at
Alt maximum cloud base altitude.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
Emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.142.2 SKY \TEXTURE
The \TEXTURE qualifier sets or displays the parameters for a sky
texture.
Format: SKY \TEXTURE [SELECT=select] [INTENSITY=intensity]
[SIZEFEET=sizeFeet] [FILE=file] [UNLOAD=unload] [SCENE=scene]
[APPARENTCLOUDCOVERAGE=apparentCloudCoverage] [LIST=list]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (1..4) Texture select to view or

select
Description: modify.
intensity (0..1) Intensity scale for the texture.
sizeFeet Sets the size of the texture in feet.
file Sets the texture file to load.

2-348 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

scene (dawn day dusk night) The scene to

which the intensity value applies.
apparentCloudCov (0..1) This sky texture's apparent
erage cloud coverge.
list Lists the parameters for all the
texture selects.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
Emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.143 SMCMAP
The SMCMAP command enables/specifies the SMC mapping function
(not persisted).
Format: SMCMAP [N=n] [MAP=map] [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax
n (0..255) SMC index
Description:
map (0..255) mapped SMC value
enable (on off) enable/disable SMC mapping

2.4.144 SMPOLY
The SMPOLY command provides Scene Manager Polygon control.

Format: SMPOLY [PERIMPOLYCONCAVITYREJECTTHRESHOLD=

perimPolyConcavityRejectThreshold]
[SHADINGNORMALSENABLE=shadingNormalsEnable]
[INTERFACEPOLYENABLE=interFacePolyEnable]
[SMALLPOLYREJECTTHRESH=smallPolyRejectThresh]
[EXCLUDERINRANGEDELAYCOUNT=excluderInRangeDelayCount]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[LOGINVALIDFRAGMENTS=LogInvalidFragments]
[DONTEXCLUDECHECK=dontExcludeCheck]
[MORPHRANGE=morphRange]
[POLYSENSORINDEXINVALIDLOGCOUNTMAX=polySensorIndexInvali
dLogCountMax]
[WRITEMODELINSTASMARKER=WriteModelInstAsMarker]
[PERMODELINSTVIEWCONECULLING=perModelInstViewConeCulling]
[HIERMODELINSTVIEWCONECULLING=hierModelInstViewConeCulling
]
[DIAGNOSTICMODELINSTSWITCHINSCALAR=diagnosticModelInstSwi
tchInScalar] [WAKETESTSIZE=wakeTestSize]
[DOOLDCLIPCONFORM=doOldClipConform]

[\ENABLE] [\LATLONGFILTER]

Syntax perimPolyConcavit Perimeter poly concavity reject

Description: yRejectThreshold threshold.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-349

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

shadingNormalsEn Controls whether or not modeled

able shading normals are used for
(ON/OFF) relevant scene manager polygons
such as conformals. If modeled
shading normals are not used, the
shading normal will be set to point
straight up (0, 0, 1). OFF is the
default.
interFacePolyEnable Enable scene-manager interface
(ON/OFF) polygons.
smallPolyRejectThr A size threshold for rejecting
esh potentially degeneratively small
polygons. If a polygon becomes too
small it can result in very noticeable
rendering artifacts.
The value of this parameter is a
floating point value in square feet.
The default value is 0.0001.
excluderInRangeD (0..30) Set the number of slow time
elayCount fields to wait before processing in
range excluders.
LogInvalidFragmen (0..1) Log message if invalid
ts fragments are detected.
dontExcludeCheck (0..1) Do not exclude check.
morphRange Number of feet to morph morphable
polygons.
polySensorIndexIn (0..1000) Number of warning
validLogCountMax messages to log if an undefined
sensor index is encountered.
WriteModelInstAsM debug only

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

arker
perModelInstViewC Perform per model instance view-
oneCulling cone culling.
hierModelInstView This functionality has been disabled,
ConeCulling and this parameter should not be
set.
diagnosticModelIns debug only
tSwitchInScalar
wakeTestSize debug only
doOldClipConform debug only
[\ENABLE] See descriptions below for details.
[\LATLONGFILTER]

2-350 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.144.1 SMPOLY \ENABLE

The \ENABLE qualifier is the Scene Manager enable/disable poly by type
(debug).

Format: SMPOLY \ENABLE [MODELINSTANCE=modelInstance]

[CONFORMAL=conformal] [COPLANAR=coplanar]
[TERRAINTOABSOLUTE=terrainToAbsolute]
[NONCONFORMAL=nonconformal] [TERRAINCUTTER=terrainCutter]
[PERIMETERPOLY=perimeterPoly] [FLATTENER=flattener]
[EXCLUDER=excluder] [PROXYPOLY=proxyPoly]
[CUTANDFILL=cutAndFill] [CUTANDFILLLINEAR=cutAndFillLinear]

Syntax (0..1) Enable drawing of Model

modelInstance
Description: Instances.
conformal (0..1) Enable drawing of Conformal
polygons.
coplanar (0..1) Enable drawing of Coplanar
polygons.
terrainToAbsolute (0..1) Enable drawing of Terrain To
Absolute polygons.
nonconformal (0..1) Enable drawing of Non-
Conformal polygons.
terrainCutter (0..1) Enable drawing of Terrain
polygons.
perimeterPoly (0..1) Enable drawing of Perimeter
polygons.
flattener (0..1) Enable drawing of Flattener
polygons.
excluder (0..1) Enable drawing of excluder

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

polygons.
proxyPoly (0..1) Enable drawing of Proxy
polygons.
cutAndFill (0..1) Enable drawing of Cut And Fill
polygons.
cutAndFillLinear (0..1) Enable drawing of Cut And Fill
Linear polygons.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-351

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.144.2 SMPOLY \LATLONGFILTER

The \LATLONGFILTER qualifier is the Scene Manager lat/longfilter
(debug).
Format: SMPOLY \LATLONGFILTER [ENABLE=enable] [LATITUDE=latitude]
[LONGITUDE=longitude] [LATDEGREE=latdegree]
[LATMINUTE=latminute] [LATSECOND=latsecond]
[LONGDEGREE=longdegree] [LONGMINUTE=longminute]
[LONGSECOND=longsecond] [RADIUS=radius]

Syntax
enable (0..1) enable or disable the filter
Description:
latitude (-90..90) latitude decimal degree
longitude (-180..180) longitude decimal degrees
latdegree (-90..90) latitude degrees
(DEPRECATED)
latminute (0..60) latitude minutes (DEPRECATED)
latsecond (0..60) latitude seconds (DEPRECATED)
longdegree (-180..180) longitude degrees
(DEPRECATED)
longminute (0..60) longitude minutes
(DEPRECATED)
longsecond (0..60) longitude seconds
(DEPRECATED)
radius Radius in feet.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-352 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.145 SNVG
The SNVG command provides SVNG (stimulated NVG) controls.
Format: SNVG [ENABLE=enable] [REDWEIGHT=redweight]
[GREENWEIGHT=greenWeight] [BLUEWEIGHT=blueWeight]
[POLYGAIN=polyGain] [LIGHTGAIN=lightGain]
[\ATM] [\CLD] [\DIR] [\FOG] [\HALO] [\POS] [\VIEWPORT]

Syntax enable
Enable/disable SNVG.
Description: (ON/OFF)
redweight (0..1) Red weight.
greenWeight (0..1) Green weight.
blueWeight (0..1) Glue weight.
polyGain (0..16) Polygon intensity gain.
lightGain (0..16) Light intensity gain.
[\ATM] See descriptions below for details.
[\CLD]
[\DIR]
[\FOG]
[\HALO]
[\POS]
[\VIEWPORT]

2.4.145.1 SNVG \ATM

The \ATM qualifier provides atmosphere control for SNVG (stimulated
NVG).
Format: SNVG \ATM [GAIN=gain] [TRANSSCALE=transScale]

Syntax

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

gain (0..16) intensity gain
Description:
transScale (0..4) transmitance scale

2.4.145.2 SNVG \CLD

The \CLD qualifier provides atmosphere control for SNVG (stimulated
NVG).
Format: SNVG \CLD [GAIN=gain] [TRANSSCALE=transScale]

Syntax
gain (0..16) intensity gain
Description:
transScale (0..4) transmitance scale

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-353

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.145.3 SNVG \DIR

The \DIR qualifier provides sun/moon directional light control for SNVG
(stimulated NVG).

Format: SNVG \DIR [GAIN=gain] [AMBHIGHMOON=ambHighMoon]

[AMBNOMOON=ambNoMoon] [DIFHIGHMOON=difHighMoon]
[DIFNOMOON=difNoMoon] [SPECHIGHMOON=specHighMoon]
[specNoMoon=specNoMoon]

Syntax
gain (0..16) Intensity gain.
Description:
ambHighMoon (0..16) Additive ambient light at high
moon.
ambNoMoon (0..16) Additive ambient light at no
moon.
difHighMoon (0..16) Additive diffuse light at high
moon.
difNoMoon (0..16) Additive diffuse light at no
moon.
specHighMoon (0..16) Additive specular light at high
moon.
specNoMoon (0..16) Additive specular light at no
moon.

2.4.145.4 SNVG \FOG

The \FOG qualifier provides fog volume control for SNVG (stimulated
NVG).
Format: SNVG \FOG [GAIN=gain] [TRANSSCALE=transScale]

Syntax

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

gain (0..16) Intensity gain.
Description:
transScale (0..4) Transmittance scale.

2.4.145.5 SNVG \HALO

The \HALO qualifier provides simple light halo control for SNVG
(stimulated NVG).
Format: SNVG \HALO [ENABLE=enable] [VIEW=view] [RANGE=range]
[THRESHOLD=threshold] [INTENSITY=intensity] [BLOOM=bloom]
[RADIUS=radius] [MAXNUM=maxnum] [MOTIF=motif]
[DRAW=draw]

Syntax enable
Enable/disable SNVG halos on.
Description: (ON/OFF)
view Viewport to enable/disable.

2-354 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

range Cutoff range.

threshold Intensity threshold.
intensity (0..4) Intensity scale.
bloom (0..16) Bloom gain.
radius (1..50) Halo radius in pixels.
maxnum (0..1024) Maximum number of halos to
allow.
motif (0..32) Halo motif index.
draw Halo draw flag.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.145.6 SNVG \POS

The \POS qualifier provides positional light control for SNVG (stimulated
NVG).
Format: SNVG \POS [GAIN=gain] [TRANSSCALE=transScale]

Syntax
gain (0..16) Intensity gain.
Description:

2.4.145.7 SNVG \VIEWPORT

The \VIEWPORT qualifier sets the SNVG (stimulated NVG) video select
for a viewport.
Format: SNVG \VIEWPORT [VIEW=view] [VIDEO=video] [SELECT=select]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
video (0..1) Video ID (0-1).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

select (OTW NVG) SNVG video select.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-355

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.146 SPANRATE
The SPANRATE command enables/disables span rate (engineering
diagnostic).
Format: SPANRATE [SKY=sky] [TERRAIN=terrain] [STEP=step]
[FRAME=frame]

Syntax sky
Span rate sky.
Description: (ON/OFF)
terrain Span rate terrain.
(ON/OFF)
step Set frame count.
frame (0..512) Frame count.

2.4.147 SPXCONFIG
The SPXCONFIG command has four qualifiers discussed in the sections
below.

2.4.147.1 SPXCONFIG \DEBUG

The \DEBUG qualifier is SPX debug information.

2.4.147.2 SPXCONFIG \GENERIC

The \GENERIC qualifier has SPX generic airport configuration.
Format: SPX \GENERIC [ZEROALTITUDEMODE=zeroAltitudeMode]

Syntax zeroAltitudeMode Enables or disables the SPX generic's

Description: (ON/OFF) zero altitude mode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.147.3 SPXCONFIG \HAT
The \HAT qualifier has SPX HAT configuration.
Format: SPX \HAT [HOTREQUIRED=hotRequired]

Syntax (true/false) Enables or disables the

hotRequired
Description: HOT return opcode.

2.4.147.4 SPXCONFIG \STORM

The \STORM qualifier has SPX cloud model configuration.
Format: SPX \STORM [NUMBER=number] [MODEL=model] [SELECT=select]

Syntax
number (1..16) Storm number to be defined.
Description:
model (1..1024) Storm model.
select (1..1024) Storm select.

2-356 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.148 STARS
The STARS command loads a star light point model.

Format: STARS [ENABLE=enable] [REFENABLE=refEnable] [FILE=file]

[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax enable Enable/disable rendering of the star

Description: (ON/OFF) model.
refEnable Enable/disable rendering of the
(ON/OFF) reflected stars model.
file The OpenFlight stars model.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.149 STATISTICS
The STATISTICS command handles statistics.

Format: STATISTICS [CLEAR=clear] [RECORD=record] [FILENAME=filename]

[SPs=SPs] [MULTIPLIER=multiplier]

Syntax
clear Clears high water times.
Description:
record
Turns statistics recording on or off.
(ON/OFF)
The filename to be placed in IG bin
filename
directory.
Scene Processors (SPs) to include in
SPs
statistics record (e.g., SPs 0,1,6,7).
(1..60) how many video fields
multiplier between statistics samples in the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

statistics record.

2.4.150 STATS
The STATS command controls the display of GE statistics. The STATS
command is set as default to OFF, causing many of the EP2 GUI
statistics to show as zero. This minimizes any effects gathering
statistics during active Run Time. If you want to view statistics that are
showing as zero, you will need to enable this command to ON.

Format: STATS [ENABLE=enable] [SP=sp] [NODE=node]

[POLYCOUNTOFFSET=PolyCountOffset]

Syntax enable
Description: (ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-357

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(-1..4) Identifies which scene

sp processor’s statistics to display (-1 =
all).
(-1..32) Identifies which node’s
node
statistics to display. (-1 = all)
(-1000000..1000000) Quantity to
PolyCountOffset offset the polygon output count -
Allows poly-out to be 'zeroed' out.

2.4.151 STGAIN
The STGAIN command sets the emband sensor texture gain.

Format: STGAIN [EMBAND=emband] [GAIN=gain] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (EVS MWIR LWIR) Select the

emband
Description: emband for the specified gain.
gain [intensity = gain * radiance]
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.152 STLEVEL
The STLEVEL command sets the emband sensor device level
temperature.

Format: STLEVEL [EMBAND=emband] [LEVELTEMP=leveltemp]

[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (nvg evs mwir lwir eo) Select the

emband
Description: emband for the specified gain.
sets the level temperature (C)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

leveltemp [intensity = radiance(level temp) +
gain * radiance]
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.153 STORM
The STORM command has ESIG storm controls.

Format: STORM [LEVEL=level] [LIGHTNING=lightning] [RAIN=rain]

[PARTICLERAIN=particleRain] [MM=mm] [FLASHTYPE=flashType]
[EMBAND=emband]
[\LLEVEL] [\LSCENE] [\RLEVEL] [\SDIST] [\SLEVEL] [\SSCENE]

Syntax
level (0..5) Overall storm level.
Description:

2-358 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

lightning (0..5) Lightning level.

rain (0..5) Rain level.
particleRain (0..5) Particle Rain level.
mm (0..65535) Storm moving model.
(glare bolt mixed) The type of
flashType
lightning flash.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
[\LLEVEL]
[\LSCENE]
[\RLEVEL] Refer to the sections below for
[\SDIST] details on these qualifiers.
[\SLEVEL]
[\SSCENE]

2.4.153.1 STORM \LLEVEL

The \LLEVEL qualifier has settings for the lightning levels.
Format: STORM \LLEVEL [LEVEL=level] [FREQUENCY=frequency] [LIST=list]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
level (0..5) The lightning level being set.
Description:
frequency (0..4) Lightning frequency scale.
list List the settings for lightning levels.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.153.2 STORM \LSCENE
The \LSCENE qualifier controls settings for the lightning at different
TODs.
Format: STORM \LSCENE [SCENE=scene] [SCALE=scale] [LIST=list]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (dawn day dusk night) The time of

scene
Description: day being set.
scale (0..4) Scales the lighting brightness
for this TOD.
list List the lightning settings for the
different TODs.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-359

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.153.3 STORM \RLEVEL

The \RLEVEL qualifier controls settings for the rain levels.

Format: STORM \RLEVEL [LEVEL=level] [CDEFOCUS=cdefocus]

[CBUILD=cbuild] [CCLEAR=cclear] [RDEFOCUS=rdefocus]
[RBUILD=rbuild] [RCLEAR=rclear] [LIST=list] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
level (0..5) The rain level being set.
Description:
cdefocus (0..255) The calligraphic defocus
setting for this level of rain.
cbuild (0..255) The build rate for
calligraphic defocus, for this level of
rain.
cclear (0..255) The clear rate for
calligraphic defocus, for this level of
rain.
rdefocus (0..255) The raster defocus setting
for this level of rain.
rbuild (0..255) The build rate for raster
defocus, for this level of rain.
rclear (0..255) The clear rate for raster
defocus, for this level of rain.
list List the defocus settings for the
different levels of rain.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.153.4 STORM \SDIST

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \SDIST qualifier sets the extent of the storm.

Format: STORM \SDIST [MIN=min] [MAX=max] [LIST=list]

[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (0..524272) distance at which storm

min
Description: effects are full on
max (0..524272) distance at which the
storm effects are completely off
list List distance settings.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2-360 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.153.5 STORM \SLEVEL

The \SLEVEL qualifier controls settings for the storm’s overall level.

Format: STORM \SLEVEL [LEVEL=level] [MINSCALAR=minScalar]

[MAXSCALAR=maxScalar] [VIS=vis] [AMB=amb] [LIST=list]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
level (0..5) The storm level being set.
Description:
minScalar (0..4) Minimum storm distance scale.
maxScalar (0..4) Maximum storm distance
scale.
vis (0..4) Visibility reduction scale.
amb (0..4) Ambient reduction scale.
list List the settings for the different
levels.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.153.6 STORM \SSCENE

The \SSCENE qualifier controls settings for the storms at different TODs.

Format: STORM \SSCENE [SCENE=scene] [VIS=vis]

[AMB_REDUCTION=amb_reduction] [LIST=list]

Syntax (dawn day dusk night) The time of

scene
Description: day being set.
(0..4) Visibility reduction scale for
vis
this TOD.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

amb_reduction (0..4) Ambient reduction scale for
this TOD.
list List the settings for the different
TODs.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-361

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.154 STORMCONTROL
The STORMCONTROL command enables, controls, and positions storm
cells.

Format: STORMCONTROL [ENABLE=enable] [NUMBER=number] [CELL=cell]

[SELECT=select] [IMMEDIATELIGHTNING=immediateLightning]
[CLOUDBASE=cloudBase] [HEADING=heading]
[LATDEGREE=latDegree] [LATMINUTE=latMinute]
[LATSECOND=latSecond] [LONGDEGREE=longDegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longMinute] [LONGSECOND=longSecond]
[ALTITUDE=altitude] [EXTRAPOLATE=extrapolate]

[\OWNSHIP] [\SAND]

Syntax enable
Enable/disable a storm.
Description: (ON/OFF)
number (0..7) The storm number.
cell (0..255) The cell used by the storm.
select (0..255) The rain shaft submodel's
select.
immediateLightning Enable lightning strike now.
(OFF ON)
cloudBase Height (feet) of the storm cloud
above the storm origin.
heading (-360..360) The storm's heading.
latDegree (-90..90) Degrees latitude of the
storm.
latMinute (-60..60) Minutes latitude of the
storm.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

latSecond (-60..60) Seconds latitude of the
storm.
longDegree (-360..360) Degrees longitude of
the storm.
longMinute (-60..60) Minutes longitude of the
storm.
longSecond (-60..60) Seconds longitude of the
storm.
altitude The altitude of the storm.
extrapolate Enable/disable extrapolation of the
(ON/OFF) storm's motion.
[\OWNSHIP] Refer to the following section for
[\SAND] information about this qualifier.

2-362 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.154.1 STORMCONTROL\OWNSHIP
The \OWNSHIP qualifier controls storm effects around the ownship.

Format: STORMCONTROL \OWNSHIP [RAINLEVEL=rainlevel]

[LIGHTNINGLEVEL=lightningLevel]
[IMMEDIATELIGHTNING=immediateLightning]
[WIPERSPEED=wiperSpeed] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (0..5) Specifies the level of rain

rainlevel
Description: defocus.
(0..5) Specifies the level of
lightningLevel
lightning.
immediateLightning
Enable lightning now.
(ON/OFF)
wiperSpeed (0..5) Specifies the wiper speed.
(0..5) Specifies the alternate wiper
altWiperSpeed
speed.
(NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.154.2 STORMCONTROL\SAND
The \SAND qualifier controls a sand storm.

Format: STORMCONTROL \SAND [NUMBER=number] [VELOCITY=velocity]

[AUTOBLOWINGSAND=autoBlowingSand]
[BILLOWINGAMPLITUDESCALE=billowingAmplitudeScale]
[BILLOWINGFREQUENCYSCALE=billowingFrequencyScale]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
number (0..7) The storm number.
Description:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(0..500) Sand storm velocity
velocity
(knots).
autoBlowingSand Automatically enable blowing sand
(ON/OFF) with a sand storm.
billowingAmplitude (0..10) Sand storm billowing effect
Scale amplitude scale.
billowingFrequency (0.1..10) Sand storm billowing
Scale effect frequency scale.
(NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-363

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.155 STORMDEFINE
The STORMDEFINE command defines a storm cell for use with the
STORMCONTROL command.

Format: STORMDEFINE [MMBASE=mmbase] [MAXSTORMS=maxStorms]

[CELL=cell] [MODEL=model] [VISIBILITY=visibility] [FADE=fade]
[FADEDISTMAX=fadeDistMax] [FADEDISTMIN=fadeDistMin]
[AMBREDUCT=ambReduct] [CCOR=ccor]
[USEPARTICLES=useParticles] [COLORRED=colorRed]
[COLORGREEN=colorGreen] [COLORBLUE=colorBlue]
[EMBAND=emband]

[\LIGHTNING] [\LLEVEL] [\LTUNE] [\PARTICLECLOUD]

[\PARTICLELIGHTNING] [\PARTICLERAINSHAFT] [\RAIN] [\RLEVEL]
[\RTUNE] [\TUNE]

Syntax (1..65527) Base moving model

mmBase
Description: number to reserve for storms.
(0..8) Maximum number of
maxStorms
simultaneous storms – ignored.
cell (0..255) The storm cell to define.
(0..32768) The model slot into
model which the desired storm flight
model is loaded.
(1..1.32e+006) Visibility (feet) in
visibility
the storm cell core.
fade Enable/disable IG control of
(ON/OFF) visibility & ambient fading.
Distance at which the global
fadeDistMax visibility begins to fade to storm
visibility.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Distance at which the storm
fadeDistMin
visibility is in full effect.
(0..1) Reduction to ambient lighting
ambReduct
in the storm.
Enable/disable correlation of the
ccor
cloud model altitude with system
(ON/OFF)
clouds.
(ON/OFF/HYBRID/sand)
useParticles Enable/disable or use hybrid
particle-based storms.
(0..1) Red color of the storm - used
colorRed to correlate scud color with sand
storm color.
(0..1) Green color of the storm -
colorGreen used to correlate scud color with
sand storm color.

2-364 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

(0..1) Blue color of the storm -

colorBlue used to correlate scud color with
sand storm color.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
[\LIGHTNING]
[\LLEVEL]
[\LTUNE]
[\PARTICLECLOUD]
[\PARTICLELIGHTNI
Refer to the following descriptions
NG]
for more information about these
[\PARTICLERAINSH
qualifiers.
AFT]
[\RAIN]
[\RLEVEL]
[\RTUNE]
[\TUNE]

2.4.155.1 STORMDEFINE \LIGHTNING

The \LIGHTNING qualifier defines a storm cell’s lightning for use with
the STORMCONTROL command.

Format: STORMDEFINE \LIGHTNING [CELL=cell] [LEVEL=level]

[FLASHTYPE=flashType] [GLAREDISTMAX=glareDistMax]
[GLAREDISTMIN=glareDistMin] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
cell (0..255) The storm cell to define.
Description:
(0..5) The storm cell's level of
level
lightning.
(glare bolt mixed) The type of
flashType
lightning flash.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Distance at which the lightning
glareDistMax
glare begins to be seen.
Distance at which the lightning
glareDistMin
glare intensity is at full effect.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-365

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.155.2 STORMDEFINE \LLEVEL

The \LLEVEL qualifier provides settings for the lightning levels for use
with the stormControl command.

Format: STORMDEFINE \LLEVEL [LEVEL=level] [FREQUENCY=frequency]

[LIST=list] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
level (0..5) The lightning level being set.
Description:
(0..100) The lightning frequency
frequency
scale.
Lists the settings for the lightning
list
levels.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.155.3 STORMDEFINE \LTUNE

The \LTUNE qualifier tunes a storm cell’s lightning for use with the
stormControl command.

Format: STORMDEFINE \LTUNE [FIRSTLIGHTNINGTIME=firstLightningTime]

[BETWEENLIGHTNINGTIME=betweenLightningTime]
[SECONDLIGHTNINGTIME=secondLightningTime]
[GLOBALLIGHTNINGGLAREBRIGHTUP=globalLightningGlareBrightUp]
[CLOUDBRIGHTUPWITHCLOUDTOGROUNDBOLT=cloudBrightUpWithC
loudToGroundBolt]
[GROUNDBRIGHTUPWITHCLOUDTOCLOUDBOLT=groundBrightUpWit
hCloudToCloudBolt]
[UPPERCLOUDBRIGHTUPWITHCLOUDTOGROUNDBOLT=upperCloudBr

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ightUpWithCloudToGroundBolt]
[UPPERCLOUDBRIGHTUPWITHCLOUDTOCLOUDBOLT=upperCloudBrig
htUpWithCloudToCloudBolt]
[NOGROUNDBRIGHTUPWITHDAYLIGHTNING=noGroundBrightUpWith
DayLightning] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (0..5000) Time in msec that the

Description: firstLightningTime first part of a lightning strike is
enabled.
(0..5000) Time in msec between
betweenLightningTi
the two parts of a lightning strike
me
during which it is disabled.
(0..5000) Time in msec that the
secondLightningTime second part of a lightning strike is
enabled.
globalLightningGlar (0..1) Glare bright-up with lightning
eBrightUp in percent of maximum.

2-366 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

cloudBrightUpWithC (0..1) cloud bright-up percentage

loudToGroundBolt for cloud-to-ground lightning.
groundBrightUpWit (0..1) Ground bright-up percentage
hCloudToCloudBolt for cloud-to-cloud lightning.
upperCloudBrightUp (0..1) Residual cloud bright-up
WithCloudToGround percentage for cloud-to-ground
Bolt lightning.
upperCloudBrightUp (0..1) Residual cloud bright-up
WithCloudToCloudB percentage for cloud-to-cloud
olt lightning.
(0..1) Flag to disable the ground
noGroundBrightUp
brightening during a daytime
WithDayLightning
lightning flash.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.155.4 STORMDEFINE \PARTICLECLOUD

The \PARTICLECLOUD qualifier defines the particle cloud parameters for
a level of a particle storm cell.

Format: STORMDEFINE \PARTICLECLOUD [CELL=cell] [LEVEL=level]

[GRIDTEXNAME=gridTexName] [PUFFTEXNAME=puffTexName]
[PUFFAUXTEXNAME=puffAuxTexName] [WIDTHMILES=widthMiles]
[THICKNESS=thickness] [BOTTOMINTENSITY=bottomIntensity]
[TOPINTENSITY=topIntensity] [ZOFFSET=zoffset]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
cell (0..255) the storm cell to define
Description:
(0..2) the storm level of the storm
level
cell to define

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Specifies which texture map to use
gridTexName
to identify where puffs are.
Specifies the base texture map for
puffTexName
the puffs in this level.
Specifies the aux texture map for
puffAuxTexName
the puffs in this level.
The width in miles that the grid
widthMiles
map covers.
Thickness of this level in feet
thickness
(Height of clouds).
The relative intensity of the bottom
bottomIntensity
of the puffs in this level.
The relative intensity of the top of
topIntensity
the puffs in this level.
Altitude adjustment of this level
zoffset
forms the base of the cloud.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-367

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)

emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.155.5 STORMDEFINE \PARTICLELIGHTNING

The \PARTICLELIGHTNING qualifier defines the particle storm cell's
lightning models for use with the StormControl command.

Format: STORMDEFINE \PARTICLELIGHTNING [CELL=cell]

[FLASHTYPE=flashType] [NUM=num] [MODEL=model]
[SEQUENCE=sequence] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
cell (0..255) The storm cell to define.
Description:
(glare bolt) The type of lightning
flashType
flash.
(0..19) Enumerate this lightning
num
model.
(0..32767) The model slot into
model which the desired particle storm
lightning model is loaded.
(0..4095) The animation sequence
sequence associated with the lightning
model.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-368 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.155.6 STORMDEFINE \PARTICLERAINSHAFT

The \PARTICLERAINSHAFT qualifier defines the volumetric rain shaft for
a particle storm cell.

Format: STORMDEFINE \PARTICLERAINSHAFT [CELL=cell]

[TEXNAME=texName] [AUXTEXNAME=auxTexName]
[RADIUS=radius] [XSCALE=xScale] [HEADING=heading]
[CORRAIN=corRain] [LOWLODMODELENABLE=lowLODmodelEnable]
[INTENSITYSCALE=intensityScale] [DENSITYSCALE=densityScale]
[TOPZEXTEND=topZextend] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
cell (0..255) the storm cell to define.
Description:
Specifies the base texture map for
texName
the volumetric rain shaft.
Specifies the aux texture map for
auxTexName
the volumetric rain shaft.
radius The radius of the rain shaft in feet.
(0.3..1) Scale the rain shaft by this
xScale
percentage.
Rotate the rain shaft this number of
heading degrees from North/South, -90.0,
90.0.
Enable/disable correlation of the
corRain
falling rain with volumetric rain
(ON/OFF)
shaft.
lowLODmodelEnabl Enable/disable a low LOD model of
e (ON/OFF) the rainshaft.
Scale the rain shaft intensity by
intensityScale
this percentage.
Scale the rain shaft density by this
densityScale

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

percentage.
The amount to extend the rainshaft
topZextend
top into the storm cloud.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-369

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.155.7 STORMDEFINE \RAIN

The \RAIN qualifier defines a storm cell’s rain for use with the
STORMCONTROL command.

Format: STORMDEFINE \RAIN [CELL=cell] [LEVEL=level]

[XSHAFTOFFSET=xShaftOffset] [YSHAFTOFFSET=yShaftOffset]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
cell (0..255) The storm cell to define.
Description:
(0..5) The storm cell's level of
level
lightning.
Rain shaft's x offset from the storm
xShaftOffset
origin.
Rain shaft's y offset from the storm
yShaftOffset
origin.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.155.8 STORMDEFINE \RLEVEL

The \RLEVEL qualifier defines settings for the rain levels for use with the
stormControl command.

Format: STORMDEFINE \RLEVEL [LEVEL=level] [RDEFOCUS=rdefocus]

[LDEFOCUS=ldefocus] [LIST=list] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
level (0..5) The rain level being set.
Description:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

rdefocus (0..100) Raster defocus setting.
ldefocus (0..100) Lightpoint defocus setting.
list List the settings for the rain levels.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2-370 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.155.9 STORMDEFINE \RTUNE

The \RTUNE qualifier tunes a storm cell’s rain for use with the
stormControl command.

Format: STORMDEFINE \RTUNE

[GLOBALDEFOCUSBUILDRATE=globalDefocusBuildRate]
[GLOBALDEFOCUSCLEARRATE=globalDefocusClearRate]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax (0..50) The rate at which all

globalDefocusBuild
Description: defocus effects build when rain is
Rate
enabled.
(0..50) The rate at which all
globalDefocusClear
defocus effects clear when rain is
Rate
disabled or wipers are turned on.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.155.10 STORMDEFINE \TUNE

The \TUNE qualifier provides general tuning of storms for use with the
stormControl command.

Format: STORMDEFINE \TUNE

[FADEOUTSTORMEFFECTSALT=fadeOutStormEffectsAlt]
[SCCDLINELENGTH=sccdLineLength]
[SCCDSTARTFADERANGE=sccdStartFadeRange]
[SCCDFULLYFOGGEDRANGE=sccdFullyFoggedRange]
[SCCDMAXSCUDDELTA=sccdMaxScudDelta]
[PARTICLELIGHTNINGLIGHTSOURCESWITCHNUM=particleLightningLi

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ghtSourceSwitchNum] [TERSHADOWENABLE=terShadowEnable]
[TERSHADOWCONTRAST=terShadowContrast]
[LEGACYVOLUMETRICSCUDMINVIS=legacyVolumetricScudMinVis]
[PARTICLELIGHTNINGGLARERANGESCALE=particleLightningGlareRan
geScale]
[OPTIMIZEDPARTICLESTORMCLOUDRENDERING=optimizedParticleSto
rmCloudRendering] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax fadeOutStormEffect (0..20000) Altitude above a storm

Description: sAlt at which storm effects fade out.
(0..1e+006) Length (ft) of line
sccdLineLength segments used for storm cloud
collision detection.
(0..50000) Distance (ft) from eye
sccdStartFadeRange to storm where fogging effects
start.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-371

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

(0..50000) Distance (ft) from eye

sccdFullyFoggedRan
to storm where visibility is reduced
ge
to zero.
(0.001..1) Maximum scud change
per field due to the eye intersecting
sccdMaxScudDelta
a legacy storm cloud. Defaults to
0.03.
(1..65527) the switch number used
particleLightningLight
for the light sources in the modeled
SourceSwitchNum
particle lightning animations.
terShadowEnable Turns particle storm cloud terrain
(ON/OFF) shadows on and off.
(0..1) Sets the contrast of the
terShadowContrast particle storm cloud terrain
shadows.
legacyVolumetricSc Sets the volumetric scud minimum
udMinVis visibility for legacy storm clouds.
Scales the range at which glare
particleLightningGla occurs from light sources in the
reRangeScale modeled particle lightning
animations.
Turns particle storm optimized
optimizedParticleSt
rendering on and off (requires a
ormCloudRendering
specially build storm cloud to
(ON/OFF)
work).
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.156 SWAPOFFSET
The SWAPOFFSET command control swap offset for multiple heads.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: SWAPOFFSET [SPNODE=spNode] [ENABLE=enable] [OFFSET=offset]
[TOLERANCE=tolerance]

Syntax (0..31) spNode to which the swap

spNode
Description: offset applies.
enable Enable/disable automatic swap
(ON/OFF) offset control.
(0..16) Specify the swap offset in
offset
milliseconds.
(0..16) Specify the tolerance
allowed in the swap offset before
tolerance
corrective action is taken, in
milliseconds.

2-372 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.157 SWITCH
The SWITCH command sets the switch mask index for a motion system.

Format: SWITCH [MM=mm] [MASKINDEX=maskIndex]

Syntax
mm Motion system.
Description:
maskIndex Switch mask index.

2.4.158 SYMBOLOGY
The SYMBOLOGY command sets device number for subsequent
symbology\file commands

Format: SYMBOLOGY [DEVICE=device]

[\FILE] [\OFFSETS] [\OPTIONS] [\PLUGIN] [\VIEWPORT]

Syntax
device (0..63) Symbology device number
Description:
[\FILE]
[\OFFSETS] Refer to the following descriptions for
[\OPTIONS] more information about these
[\PLUGIN] qualifiers.
[\VIEWPORT]

2.4.158.1 SYMBOLOGY \FILE

The \FILE qualifier reads and writes a symbology block data file
(debug).

Format: SYMBOLOGY \FILE [SAVE=save] [RESTORE=restore]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax The symbology block data filename
save
Description: to save.
The symbology block data filename
restore
to read.

2.4.158.2 SYMBOLOGY \OFFSETS

The \OFFSETS qualifier provides symbology X and Y offsets for a
viewport (OGL-based symbology only).

Format: SYMBOLOGY \OFFSETS [VIEW=view] [X=x] [Y=y]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
x (-10000..10000) X offset.
y (-10000..10000) Y offset.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-373

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.158.3 SYMBOLOGY \OPTIONS

The \OPTIONS qualifier is a symbology options file (OGL-based
symbology only).

Format: SYMBOLOGY \OPTIONS [NAME=name]

Syntax
name The symbology options file.
Description:

2.4.158.4 SYMBOLOGY \PLUGIN

The \PLUGIN qualifier is the symbology plug-in DLL to load (OGL-based
symbology only).

Format: SYMBOLOGY \PLUGIN [NAME=name]

Syntax
name Symbology plug-in DLL name.
Description:

2.4.158.5 SYMBOLOGY \VIEWPORT

The \VIEWPORT qualifier associates a symbology device number with a
viewport for OGL-based symbology.

Format: SYMBOLOGY \VIEWPORT [VIEW=view] [DEVICENUM=deviceNum]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
deviceNum (0..63) Symbology device number.

2.4.159 SYSTEM
The SYSTEM command sets the run state of the system.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: SYSTEM [STATE=state]

[\AFFINITY] [\BG] [DIFFTABLEFORCE=difftableforce] [\FASTTIME]

[\MBUS] [\MODULE] [\PROCESS] [\SLOWTIME] [\THREAD]
[\TIMEOUT]

Syntax
state RUN | PAUSE | STEP
Description:
[\AFFINITY]
[\BG]
[DIFFTABLEFORCE]
[\FASTTIME]
Refer to the following descriptions for
[\MBUS]
more information about these
[\MODULE]
qualifiers.
[\PROCESS]
[\SLOWTIME]
[\THREAD]
[\TIMEOUT]

2-374 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.159.1 SYSTEM \AFFINITY

The \AFFINITY qualifier sets the processor affinity for process threads.

Format: SYSTEM \AFFINITY [FT=ft] [ST=st] [BG=bg] [NETWORK=network]

[TEXASYNC=texAsync]

Syntax Processor affinity mask for fast time

ft
Description: pool threads.
Processor affinity mask for slow time
st
pool threads.
Processor affinity mask for
bg
background time pool threads.
Processor affinity mask for network
network
interface threads.
Processor affinity mask for
texAsync
asynchronous texture load threads.

2.4.159.2 SYSTEM \BG

The \BG qualifier sets the run state of the background.

Format: SYSTEM \BG [STATE=state]

Syntax
state (run pause) Run state.
Description:

2.4.159.3 SYSTEM \DIFFTABLEFORCE

The \DIFFTABLEFORCE qualifier forces sending of diffuse lighting tables.

Format: SYSTEM \DIFFTABLEFORCE [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax enable
Enables and disables.
Description: (ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.159.4 SYSTEM \FASTTIME
The \FASTTIME qualifier sets the run state of fasttime.

Format: SYSTEM \FASTTIME [OFFSETBEFOREGO=offsetBeforeGo]

Syntax (0..8) ms to start processing of

Description: offsetBeforeGo fasttime field before the Go (OGL
only)

2.4.159.5 SYSTEM \FILES

The \FILES qualifier sets file configuration.

Format: SYSTEM \FILES [MAXOPENFILES=maxOpenFiles]

Syntax (512..2048) Maximum number of

maxOpenFiles
Description: files that can be open.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-375

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.159.6 SYSTEM \MBUS

The \MBUS qualifier is an mbus engineering diagnostic.
Format: SYSTEM \MBUS [LOG=log]

Syntax log
Enables and disables mbus logging.
Description: (ON/OFF)

2.4.159.7 SYSTEM \MODULE

The \MODULE qualifier controls module execution.

Format: SYSTEM \MODULE [NAME=name] [ENABLE=enable] [LIST=list]

Syntax
name Module name.
Description:
enable
Enable/disable the module.
(ON/OFF
list List all modules.

2.4.159.8 SYSTEM \PROCESS

The \PROCESS qualifier controls module execution.

Format: SYSTEM \PROCESS [PRIORITY=priority]

Syntax (realtime high normal) Sets process

priority
Description: priority.

2.4.159.9 SYSTEM \SLOWTIME

The \SLOWTIME qualifier sets the run state of slowtime.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: SYSTEM \SLOWTIME [STATE=state] [MINFIELDS=minFields]
[EXTRAFIELDS=extrafields][DELAY=delay]

Syntax
state (run pause) run state
Description:
(1..300) minimum number of fields
minFields
per slowtime.
(0..10) number of extra fields to
extrafields
add to slowtime
(0..10000) ms to sleep slowtime
delay
after done.

2.4.159.10 SYSTEM \THREAD

The \THREAD qualifier sets the number of process threads.

Format: SYSTEM \THREAD [FT=ft] [ST=st] [BG=bg]

2-376 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Syntax
ft (1..6) Number of fast time threads.
Description:
(1..8) Number of slow time
st
threads.
(1..7) Number of background
bg
threads.

2.4.159.11 SYSTEM \TIMEOUT

The \TIMEOUT qualifier configures system timeout parameters.

Format: SYSTEM \TIMEOUT [AUTORECOVER=autorecover]

[AUTOWAIT=autowait] [VERBOSE=verbose] [HALT=halt]
[EVENTFILE=eventfile] [RESETONRESUME=resetOnResume]

Syntax autorecover Enable/disable timeout auto

Description: (ON/OFF) recovery.
(20..2000) The amount of time to
autowait wait before attempting autorecover
(MS).
verbose
Enable verbose timeout messages.
(ON/OFF)
halt
Pause the real-time on timeout.
(ON/OFF)
eventfile
Dump event files on timeout.
(ON/OFF)
resetOnResume Enable/disable reset on
(ON/OFF) resume/step.

2.4.160 TERRAIN
The TERRAIN command provides terrain and CT parameters.
Format: TERRAIN [PLAYMINCAPTUREPOLY=playMinCapturePoly]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[PLAYMAXCAPTUREPOLY=playMaxCapturePoly] [TRIGGER=trigger]
[SUBDIVISIONRATIO=subdivisionRatio]
[SUBTRANSITBANDWIDTH=subTransitBandWidth]
[TEXTUREPAGERATIO=texturePageRatio]
[TEXTUREPAGERATIO2=texturePageRatio2]
[TEXTURESELECTRATIO=textureSelectRatio]
[ELEVPAGERATIO=elevPageRatio]
[ROUGHNESSSENSITIVITY=roughnessSensitivity]
[TERMINALLEVEL=terminalLevel] [MAXCTLEVEL=MaxCTLevel]
[MULTIPLETASKS=multipleTasks] [INSETBLENDING=InsetBlending]
[MODELINSTSORTTHRESHOLD =ModelInstSortThreshold]
[MIPTRANSITIONBAND=mipTransitionBand]
[CTMAPRELEASEDELAY=ctMapReleaseDelay]
[PFCELLRELEASEDELAY=pfCellReleaseDelay]
[SUPPRESSMODELINSTANCES=suppressModelInstances]
[FACETRESOLVELEVELTHRESHOLD=facetResolveLevelThreshold]
[FTDELTA=FTDelta]
[TERRAINRAPIDROLLOFFRANGE=terrainRapidRollOffRange]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-377

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

[ERRORTOLERANCE=errorTolerance]
[RANGEREDUCTIONSCALARFORERRORTOLERANCE=rangeReductionSc
alarForErrorTolerance]
[TEXTURELEVELCLAMPFORERRORTOLERANCE=textureLevelClampForE
rrorTolerance]
[TEXTURELEVELCLAMPOVERRIDEFORERRORTOLERANCE=textureLevel
ClampOverrideForErrorTolerance]
[TEXTURELEVELCLAMPOVERRIDERADIUSFORERRORTOLERANCE=Text
ureLevelClampOverrideRadiusForErrorTolerance] [CTPMOD=ctpmod]
[MAXCT=maxCT]
[CTFORMAT=ctFormat] [CTBLENDINGLEVEL=ctBlendingLevel]
[TERRAINBLENDINGLEVEL=terrainBlendingLevel]
[FORCENORMALSTRAIGHTUP=forceNormalStraightUp]
[SHADOWENABLE=shadowEnable]
[SHADOWTESTDISTANCE=shadowTestDistance]
[SHADOWTESTMAXLEVEL=shadowTestMaxLevel]
[SHADOWREPAGEAZIMUTH=shadowRepageAzimuth]
[SHADOWREPAGEDISTANCE=shadowRepageDistance]
[REFLECTIONSPECULARITYTHRESHOLD=reflectionSpecularityThreshol
d] [TIMEBASEDCTFADEENABLE=timeBasedCTFadeEnable]
[NUMTIMEBASEDCTFADEFIELDS=numTimeBasedCTFadeFields]
[HIERRANGECULLMODELINSTTHRESH=hierRangeCullModelInstThresh]
[HIERRANGECULLMODELINSTENABLE=hierRangeCullModelInstEnable]
[VIEWCONECULLERGUARDBAND=viewConeCullerGuardBand]
[STABILITYTHRESHOLD=StabilityThreshold]
[FORCEHIRESELEV=forceHiResElev]
[TERMLEVFORFORCEHIRESELEV=termLevForForceHiResElev]
[\SUBDIVISIONSCALE]

Syntax
playMinCapturePoly (-1..10000000) mincp
Description:
playMaxCapturePoly (-1..10000000) maxcp
trigger Debug trigger.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

subdivisionRatio Range-based subdivision control.
subTransitBandWidth Range-based subdivision
transition band width.
texturePageRatio unused
texturePageRatio2 Texture paging transition range;
larger numbers increase range.
textureSelectRatio unused
elevPageRatio Elevation data paging transition
range.
roughnessSensitivity Roughness-based subdivision
control; larger number for greater
roughness sensitivity.
terminalLevel Terminal subdivision level.

2-378 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

MaxCTLevel (0..31) Do not page CTs greater

than this level.
multipleTasks Enable/disable terrain traversal
multi-threading (diagnostic only).
InsetBlending Turn the terrain inset blending on
(ON/OFF) or off.
ModelInstSortThresh Model Instance Sort Subgraph
old Size Threshold
mipTransitionBand (0..1) Texture transition band to
the highest miplevel; Defined
from 0 to 1.0 of the paging range.
ctMapReleaseDelay Delay releasing an out-of-range
CT after some fields.
pfCellReleaseDelay Delay releasing an out of range PF
cell after some fields.
suppressModelInstan Suppress model instances.
ces
(ON/OFF)
facetResolveLevelThr Facet Resolve Level Threshold
eshold (debug only).
FTDelta Use fast-time delta to move
terrain vertices for smoother
terrain morphing. (OFF is
Deprecated)
terrainRapidRollOffR Terrain rapid roll-off range (in
ange feet).
errorTolerance Zoom terrain error tolerance.
rangeReductionScala Zoom terrain roughness sample

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

rForErrorTolerance size scalar.
textureLevelClampFo Error tolerant terrain skinning for
rErrorTolerance zoom texture-level clamp.
textureLevelClampO Error tolerant terrain skinning for
verrideForErrorToler zoom texture-level clamp override
ance The default value for this
parameter is 0, in which case it
has no effect.
TextureLevelClampO error tolerant terrain skinning for
verrideRadiusForErro zoom texture level clamp override
rTolerance radius The default value is 0.
ctpmod (-1..1) The pmod value of the
CTs.
maxCT (2..16) SuperTexture Sample size
on the CTs.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-379

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

ctFormat (RGB_888 Dual_CT

Dual_CT_Specular Sensor_PM
Sensor_NOPM) CT system format.
ctBlendingLevel (1..31) The CT insets start to
blend at this level.
terrainBlendingLevel The terrain insets start to blend at
this level.
forceNormalStraight Force all normal vectors to be
Up straight up.
(ON/OFF)
shadowEnable Enable terrain self shadowing.
(ON/OFF)
shadowTestDistance Ray test distance for terrain self
shadowing (in feet).
shadowTestMaxLevel The max LOD of terrain used for
shadow ray tracing.
shadowRepageAzimu (1..180) Repage terrain to
th recalculate shadow if
sunrise/sunset azimuth is changed
too much in one field (in degree).
The shadowEnable parameter
must be ON for this to have an
effect.
shadowRepageDistan Repage terrain to recalculate
ce shadow if page center (usually
eyepoint) has jumped too far in
one field (in feet). The
shadowEnable parameter must be
ON for this to have an effect.
reflectionSpecularity (0..255) (0-255) Enable reflection

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Threshold when the specularity of the
texture is higher than the
threshold. Setting this to 255 will
practically disable the reflection
on terrain CT.
timeBasedCTFadeEn Enable time-based CT texture
able fading.
(ON/OFF)
numTimeBasedCTFa (1..3600) The number of fast time
deFields fields to fade in time-based CT
texture.
hierRangeCullModelI (0..1.32e+006) the MODELED
nstThresh transition range for binning for
hierarchical model instance
culling.

2-380 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

hierRangeCullModelI (0..1) hierarchical range-based

nstEnable model instance culling; 0: NoCull
1: hierarchically cull model
instances which are closer than
hierRangeCullModelInstThresh (or
its modified value in helicopter
zoom)
viewConeCullerGuard (0..90) Guard band for
Band hierarchical culling (value > 0
enables view-cone culling mode).
stabilityThreshold (0..1) Threshold of ratio of graph
changes to graph size below which
terrain is declared to be stable.
forceHiResElev Force the elevation grid post facet
(ON/OFF) size of areas outside an inset to
match the resolution defined
within the inset.
termLevForForceHiR (0..31) When forceHiResElev is
esElev enabled, this is the highest
resolution level to which the
elevation grids post will be paged.
[\SUBDIVISIONSCALE] Refer to the following description
for more information about this
qualifiers.

2.4.160.1 TERRAIN \SUBDIVISIONSCALE

The \SUBDIVISIONSCALE qualifier performs linear interpolation of
subdivisionratio based on zoom factor.

Format: TERRAIN \SUBDIVISIONSCALE [ENABLE=enable] [ZOOM=zoom]

[SUBDIVISIONRATIO=subdivisionratio] [LIST=list]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax enable Enable linear interpolation of
Description: (ON/OFF) subdivisionratio based on zoom factor.
(1..512) Zoom Factor for linear
interpolation of subdivisionratio -
zoom
subdivisionRatio must also be
specified.
SubdivisionRatio for the linear
subdivisionratio interpolation of subdivisionratio -
zoom must also be specified.
List the defined Zoom and
list
subdivisionRatio pairs.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-381

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.161 TEXTURE
The TEXTURE command sets or gets texture control parameters.

Format: TEXTURE [MAP=map] [PMOD=pmod] [MAXST=maxST]

[maxNumSTUpdatesPerBGField=maxNumSTUpdatesPerBGField]
[LOD=lod] [LIST=list] [PAUSE=pause] [RESUME=resume]

[\CT] [\REDUCE] [\REFLECTION]

Syntax (2..16383) Map ID - id of texture map

map
Description: to view/modify (diagnostics).
pmod (-1..1) PMOD (projected pixel bias).
(1..8) Maximum number of allowed ST
maxST
samples on any texture.
maxNumSTUpdates (1..100) Maximum number of sensor
PerBGField textures updated per BG field.
lod (0..1) LOD (texture level of detail.
list List textures that match given name.
pause Pause texture paging.
resume Resume texture paging.
[\CT] Refer to the following descriptions for
[\REDUCE] more information about these
[\REFLECTION] qualifiers.

2.4.161.1 TEXTURE \CT

The \CT qualifier sets texture resolution reduction levels.

Format: TEXTURE \CT [CT64=ct64]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax ct64
Enables/disables 64 bit texture on CT.
Description: (ON/OFF)

2-382 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.161.2 TEXTURE \REDUCE

The \REDUCE qualifier sets texture resolution reduction levels.

Format: TEXTURE \REDUCE [FT=ft] [CT=ct] [SEASTATE=seaState]

[MINFT=minFt]

Syntax (0..3) The number of mip levels by

ft
Description: which to reduce the feature texture.
ct (0..3) The number of mip levels by
which to reduce the terrain texture.
seaState (0..3) The number of mip levels by
which to reduce the sea state texture.
minFt (m128 m256 m512 m1024 m2048
m4096) The minimum resolution to
which reduction is applied for feature
texture.

2.4.161.3 TEXTURE \REFLECTION

The \REFLECTION qualifier sets and/or gets texture control parameters
for a reflection scene.
Format: TEXTURE \REFLECTION [PMOD-pmod]

Syntax
pmod (-1..1) PMOD (projected pixel bias)
Description:

2.4.162 TILEPAGER
The TILEPAGER command specifies the tile pager definitions.

Format: TILEPAGER [LODMODE=lodMode] [DBNAME=dbname]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[DBLATITUDE=dbLatitude] [DBLONGITUDE=dbLongitude]
[XDBDIM=xdbdim] [YDBDIM=ydbdim] [XTILEDIM=xtiledim]
[YTILEDIM=ytiledim] [LOLODPGRNG=lolodpgrng]
[HILODPGRNG=hilodpgrng] [LOG=log] [INIT=init]

[\TUNING] [\VISIT]

Syntax lodMode (single dual) Tile LOD mode.

Description:
dbname The base name of the database tile .flt
files.
dbLatitude (-90..90) The latitude of the lower left
hand corner of the rectangular
database.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-383

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

dbLongitude (-180..180) The longitude of the lower

left hand corner of the rectangular
database.
xdbdim The dimension of the x side of the
rectangular database. Specified in
database units.
ydbdim The dimension of the y side of the
rectangular database. Specified in
database units.
xtiledim The dimension of the x side of the
rectangular tiles. Specified in database
units.
ytiledim The dimension of the y side of the
rectangular tiles. Specified in database
units.
lolodpgrng The page range assigned to the low
LOD tile .flt files. Specified in database
units.
hilodpgrng The page range assigned to the high
LOD tile .flt files. Specified in database
units.
log Enables/disables message logging
(ON/OFF) when .flt tiles are loaded/unloaded.
init Re-initialize the tile pager.
[\TUNING] Refer to the following descriptions for
[\VISIT] more information about these
qualifiers.

2.4.162.1 TILEPAGER \TUNING

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \TUNING qualifier sets the tile pager tuning parameters.
Format: TILEPAGER \TUNING [TILESCALAR=tileScalar]

Syntax tileScalar (0.9..1.1) Scale the base xy tile

Description: dimensions.

2.4.162.2 TILEPAGER \VISIT

The \VISIT qualifier positions the eyepoint at a tile by specifying an xy
index.
Format: TILEPAGER \VISIT [XINDEX=xIndex] [YINDEX=yIndex]
[EYEZ=eyeZ] [LOCATION=location]

Syntax
xIndex The x index of the tile to visit
Description:
yIndex The y index of the tile to visit

2-384 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

eyeZ The elevation of the eye point

(center botLeft botRight topLeft
location topRight) Position of the eye point
above tile.

2.4.163 TOD (Time of Day)

The TOD command sets the current time-of-day.
Format: TOD [SCENE=DAY | DAWN | DUSK | NIGHT | STOD | CTOD]
[TIME=time] [ACCELERATE=accelerate] [SUNRISE=sunrise]
[SUNSET=sunset] [SRA=sra] [SSA=ssa] [MAXELEV=maxElev]
[AZIMUTH=azimuth] [ELEVATION=elevation] [INTENSITY=intensity]
[SPECULAR=specular] [GROUND_AMBIENT=ground_ambient]
[SKY_INTENSITY=sky_intensity]
[AMBIENT_SCALAR=ambient_scalar]
[SCENE_AMBIENT_SCALAR=scene_ambient_scalar]
[SCENEMODELDISABLESAUTOCALC=sceneModelDisablesAutoCalc]
[AUTOCALC=autoCalc] [ET=et] [TDAWN=tDawn] [TDUSK=tDusk]
[ETPATHSUMMER=etPathSummer] [ETPATHWINTER=etPathWinter]
[KEEPTOD=keepTod] [ZULUMODE=zuluMode]
[SUNAMBIENT=sunAmbient] [DELDAWN=delDawn]
[DELDUSK=delDusk]

[\CPCADJUST] [\DATE] [\DUOTEXTURE] [\MOON] [\SUN]

[\SUNPOSMODE] [\TIMEZONE]

Syntax Sets the time of day to the selected

Description: scene scene.
(DAY/DAWN/DUSK/NIGHT/STOD/
CTOD)
time Current local time as HH:MM:SS
using a 24-hour clock.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

accelerate The acceleration factor applied in
continuous mode (for demonstration
& test use only; smooth effects not
guaranteed).
sunrise The local time of sunrise as
HH:MM:SS using a 24-hour clock.
sunset The local time of sunset as HH:MM:SS
using a 24-hour clock.
sra (0..360) Sunrise azimuth in degrees
(requires stod/ctod and autocalc off).
ssa (0..360) Sunset azimuth in degrees
(requires stod/ctod and autocalc off).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-385

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

maxElev (-90..90) maximum sun elevation in

degrees (requires stod/ctod and
autocalc off).
azimuth (0..360) Sun azimuth in degrees
(requires scene mode and autocalc
off).
elevation (-90..90) Sun elevation in degrees
(requires scene mode and autocalc
off).
intensity (0..1) Intensity level of the sun.
specular (0..1) Specular level of the sun.
ground_ambient (0..1) Ambient level of the ground.
sky_intensity (0..1) Sets the intensity of the sky for
the selected time of day.
ambient_scalar (0..4) Scales the current ambient of
the system.
scene_ambient_s (0..4) Scales the current scene
calar ambient.
sceneModelDisabl When Scene mode is selected disable
esAutoCalc autocalculate mode.
(ON/OFF)
autoCalc Enable/disable autocalculate mode.
(ON/OFF) When autocalc is enabled, the default
date is correctly selected based on
current season and the latitude of the
latest reposition.
et Enable/disable environment tuning
(ON/OFF) files.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tDawn (0..720) Transition interval from night
to day (minutes).
tDusk (0..720) Transition interval from day
to night (minutes).
etPathSummer Path to summer environment tuning
files.
etPathWinter Path to winter environment tuning
files.
keepTod Sets the state of the specified scene,
but do not switch to that scene.
zuluMode (localTime host cli hostcli) Specify
whether dates and times should be
interpreted as local or zulu.
sunAmbient (0..1) Ambient intensity of the sun.

2-386 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

delDawn (-120..120) dawn time offset from

sunrise (minutes)
delDusk (-120..120) dusk time offset from
sunset (minutes)
[\CPCADJUST] Refer to the following sections for
[\DATE] details about these qualifiers.
[\DUOTEXTURE]
[\MOON]
[\SUN]
[\SUNPOSMODE]
[\TIMEZONE]

2.4.163.1 TOD \CPCADJUST

The \CPCADJUST qualifier adjusts the transition between intensity levels
of CPC adjusted TOD returns.
NOTE: CPC software supporting this feature is required.
Format: TOD \CPCADJUST [ENABLE=enable] [SCENE=scene]
[TRANSLEVEL1=transLevel1] [TRANSLEVEL2=transLevel2]
[MECHANICALPOS=mechanicalPos] [GLAREMODE=glareMode]

Syntax enable Enable/disable CPC adjusted TOD

Description: returns (global - not per scene).
scene (dawn day dusk night) Selects the
time of day scene the transLevel is
associated with (if not specified -
defaults to current scene).
transLevel1 (0..1) Sets the glare intensity
transition point from NORMAL to
LEVEL1 for the specified scene.
transLevel2 (0..1) Sets the glare intensity

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

transition point from LEVEL1 to
LEVEL2 for the specified scene.
mechanicalPos (in out tod) force mechanical edge
blend position.
glareMode (ambient lobes combined) Determines
what scene elements contribute to
scene glare intensity.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-387

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.163.2 TOD \DATE

The \DATE qualifier enables/sets the date for autocalculate mode.
Format: TOD \DATE [ENABLE=enable] [DAY=day] [MONTH=month]
[YEAR=year]

Syntax enable Enable/disable use of a specific date.

Description: (OFF/ON)
day (1..31) The day of the month.
month (1..12) The month of the year.
year (1970..3000) The year.

2.4.163.3 TOD \DUOTEXTURE

The \DUOTEXTURE qualifier adjusts the transition between day and
night texture.
Format: TOD \DUOTEXTURE
[BEGINATTENUATIONSCALE=beginAttenuationScale]
[ENDATTENUATIONSCALE=endAttenuationScale] [SCENE=scene]
[INTENSITY=intensity]

Syntax beginAttenuation (0..2) scale the transition from night

Description: Scale to dawn and day to dusk.
endAttenuationSc (0..2) scale the transition from dawn
ale to day and dusk to night.
scene (dawn day dusk night) Select the time
of day scene for the DuoTexture
intensity value.
intensity (0..1) Set the DuoTexture intensity for
the specified scene.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-388 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.163.4 TOD \MOON

The \MOON qualifier sets the moon parameters for a given time of day
scene.

Format: TOD \MOON [SCALE=scale] [INTENSITYSCALE=intensityScale]

[SPECULARSCALE=specularScale] [AMBIENTSCALE=ambientScale]
[ENABLE=enable] [SPECMINHEIGHT=specMinHeight]
[SPECMAXHEIGHT=specMaxHeight] [SPECMAXFRAC=specMaxFrac]
[SCENE=scene] [REFENABLE=refEnable] [AZIMUTH=azimuth]
[ELEVATION=elevation] [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]
[PHASE=phase] [MOONRISE=moonrise] [MOONSET=moonset]
[MRA=mra] [MSA=msa] [MAXELEV=maxElev] [REFSCALE=refScale]
[SPECFADETIMECM=specFadeTimeCM] [PHASETUNE=phaseTune]
[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax scale Scale factor for the moon model.

Description:
intensityScale (0..1) Set a scale factor for the diffuse
effect of the moon.
specularScale (0..1) Set a scale factor for the
specular effect of the moon.
ambientScale (0..1) set a scale factor for the
ambient effect of the moon.
enable Enable/disable rendering of the moon
(OFF/ON) model.
specMinHeight N/A
specMaxHeight N/A
specMaxFrac N/A
scene (dawn day dusk night) The scene to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

which this moon information applies.
refEnable Enable/disable rendering of the
(OFF/ON) reflected moon model.
azimuth (-360..360) Set the compass angle of
the moon in degrees.
elevation (-360..360) Set the elevation angle of
the moon from horizontal in degrees.
red (0..1) Set the amount of red light
emitted by the moon.
green (0..1) Set the amount of green light
emitted by the moon.
blue (0..1) Set the amount of blue light
emitted by the moon.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-389

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

phase (-1..1) Specifies moon phase starting

with new, moving to 1st quarter, full,
last quarter, etc.
moonrise Time of moonrise.
moonset Time of moonset.
mra (0..360) The moonrise azimuth
(degrees).
msa (0..360) The moonset azimuth
(degrees).
maxElev (-90..90) The maximum elevation the
moon will achieve.
refScale A scale factor for the moon reflection
model.
specFadeTimeCM Enables time-based fading, in seconds,
of the moon's specular light when
blocked by cloud models (CM). When
set to 0, the feature is disabled and
default behavior occurs.
phaseTune (0.0 - 5.0) The power to which the
moon's phase (0.0 - 1.0) is raised in
order to attenuate the moon's specular
and diffuse lighting.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.163.5 TOD \SUN

The \SUN qualifier sets the sun parameters for a given time of day
scene.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: TOD \SUN [SCENE=scene] [RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]
[SCALE=scale] [ENABLE=enable] [HCCNEABLE=hccEnable]
[HCCPERCENT=hccPercent] [SPECMINHEIGHT=specMinHeight]
[SPECMAXHEIGHT=specMaxHeight] [SPECMAXFRAC=specMaxFrac]
[REFENABLE=refEnable] [REFSCALE=refScale] [AZIMUTH=azimuth]
[ELEVATION=elevation] [DIFFUSE=diffuse] [AMBIENT=ambient]
[SPECULAR=specular] [FADE=fade]
[SPECFADETIMECM=specFadeTimeCM] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax scene (dawn day dusk night) The scene to

Description: which this sun information applies.
red (0..1) Set the amount of red light
emitted by the sun.
green (0..1) Set the amount of green light
emitted by the sun.

2-390 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

blue (0..1) Set the amount of blue light

emitted by the sun.
scale Scale factor for the sun model.
enable (off on) Enable/disable rendering of
the sun model.
hccEnable N/A
(OFF/ON)
hccPercent (0..1) N/A
specMinHeight N/A
specMaxHeight N/A
specMaxFrac N/A
refEnable Enable/disable rendering of the
(OFF/ON) reflected sun model.
refScale Scale factor for the sun reflection
model.
azimuth (-360..360) Sun azimuth in degrees
(requires scene mode and autocalc
off). (DEPRECATED)
elevation (-90..90) Set the elevation angle of
the sun from horizontal in degrees.
(DEPRECATED)
diffuse (0..1) Set a scale factor for the diffuse
effect of the sun.
ambient (0..1) Set a scale factor for the
ambient effect of the sun.
specular (0..1) Set a scale factor for the
specular effect of the sun.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fade (0..1) Fade the sun to make it more
transparent
specFadeTimeCM Enables time-based fading, in seconds,
of the sun's specular light when
blocked by cloud models (CM). When
set to 0, the feature is disabled and
default behavior occurs.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-391

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.163.6 TOD \SUNPOSMODE

The \SUNPOSMODE qualifier sets parameters for sunPos mode.

Format: TOD \SUNPOSMODE [EMBAND=emband] [ENABLE=enable]

[MOONFADE=moonFade] [SCENE=scene]
[ILLUMSUNPOS=illumSunPos] [GLARESUNPOS=glareSunPos]
[COLORDAYSUNPOS=colorDaySunPos]
[COLORNIGHTSUNPOS=colorNightSunPos]
[PEAKYELLOWSUNPOS=peakYellowSunPos]
[PEAKREDSUNPOS=peakRedSunPos]
[COLORSATURATION=colorSaturation] [YELLOWHUE=yellowHue]
[REDHUE=redHue] [ILLUMMOONPOS=illumMoonPos]

Syntax emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)

Description: emband(sensor type) for these
parameters.
enable (off on) enable/disable sunPos mode.
moonFade (0..5) fade band (degrees) for
blending between sun and moon.
scene (dawn day dusk night) ToD scene for
the rest of the parameters.
illumSunPos (-20..20) sun elevation for
illumination.
glareSunPos (-20..20) sun elevation for glare size.
colorDaySunPos (-20..20) sun elevation for glare color
start day.
colorNightSunPos (-20..20) sun elevation for glare color
start night.
peakYellowSunPo (-20..20) sun elevation for glare peak

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

s yellow.
peakRedSunPos (-20..20) sun elevation for glare peak
red.
colorSaturation (0..1) color saturation (0.0 - 1.0).
yellowHue (0..80) yellow color (HSV).
redHue (0..80) red color (HSV).
illumMoonPos (-20..20) moon elevation for
illumination.

2-392 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.163.7 TOD \TIMEZONE

The \TIMEZONE qualifier controls settings related to the time zone used
for local time in autocalculate mode.

Format: TOD \TIMEZONE

[ENABLEFIXEDZULUOFFSET=enableFixedZuluOffset]
[FIXEDZULUOFFSET=fixedZuluOffset]

Syntax enableFixedZuluO Enable fixed zulu time (GMT) offset

Description: ffset mode to specify a fixed local time zone
(OFF/ON) time offset from GMT rather than
longitude-based automatic offsets.
Default is disabled.
fixedZuluOffset (-12..12) The offset in whole hours
from zulu time (GMT) to IG local time
in autocalculate mode.

2.4.164 TRACER
The TRACER command defines a tracer.
Format: TRACER [NUM=num] [SIZE=size] [RED=red] [GREEN=green]
[BLUE=blue] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [LATDEGREE=latdegree]
[LATMINUTE=latminute] [LATSECOND=latsecond]
[LONGDEGREE=longdegree] [LONGMINUTE=longminute]
[LONGSECOND=longsecond] [ALTITUDE=altitude] [ENABLE=enable]
[MM=mm] [LIST=list]

Syntax
num (0..63) Tracer number.
Description:
size (1..3) The size of the tracer light point.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

red (0..1) The red component of the tracer
color.
green (0..1) The green component of the
tracer color.
blue (0..1) The blue component of the
tracer color.
x The X position of the tracer bullet if
specifying the position in the Cartesian
system.
y The Y position of the tracer bullet if
specifying the position in the Cartesian
system.
z The Z position of the tracer bullet if
specifying the position in the Cartesian
system.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-393

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

latdegree (-90..90) Degrees latitude where the

tracer is positioned in a Lat/Lon
system.
latminute (0..59) Minutes latitude where the
tracer is positioned in a Lat/Lon
system.
latsecond (0..59.9999) Seconds latitude where
the tracer is positioned in a Lat/Lon
system.
longdegree (-179..179) Degrees longitude where
the tracer is positioned in a Lat/Lon
system.
longminute (0..59) Minutes longitude where the
tracer is positioned in a Lat/Lon
system.
longsecond (0..59.9999) Seconds longitude where
the tracer is positioned in a Lat/Lon
system.
altitude Altitude.
enable Enable/disable the tracer bullet.
(ON/OFF)
mm (0..65535) Model number
list List all active tracers.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-394 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.165 TRACKER
The TRACKER command provides control for the head tracker processes
in the system.
Format: TRACKER [TRACKER=tracker] [ENABLE=enable] [ZERO=zero]
[FREEZE=freeze] [RUN=run] [PAUSE=pause] [EXIT=exit]
[LIST=list]
[\CONFIGURE] [\HARDWIRE] [\MOTIONSYSTEM] [\SEOS]
[\SEOSCONFIG] [\SEOSDISPLAY] [\SEOSPROJECTOR] [\TYPES]

Syntax
tracker (0..2) Tracker ID
Description:
enable Enable/disable this tracker device.
(OFF/ON)
zero Command tracker device to zero
orientation and (if able) to enter zero
mode for setting boresight.
freeze Command tracker device to zero
heading.
run Command tracker device to start
sending runtime data.
pause Command tracker device to stop or
start sending data. This is a toggle on
run.
exit Command tracker device to stop
sending runtime data.
list For each tracker, list the current state
and configuration.
[\CONFIGURE] See the sections below for details on
[\HARDWIRE] these qualifiers.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[\MOTIONSYSTEM]
[\SEOS]
[\SEOSCONFIG]
[\SEOSDISPLAY]
[\SEOSPROJECTOR]
[\TYPES]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-395

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.165.1 TRACKER \CONFIGURE

The \CONFIGURE qualifier configures and assigns a tracker to a tracker
device.
Format: TRACKER \CONFIGURE [TRACKER=tracker]
[APPLICATION=application] [CONFIGFILE=configFile]
[FIELDSYNCOFFSET=fieldSyncOffset]

Syntax
tracker (0..2) Tracker ID
Description:
application Device application filename (path
required if device application is not in
default directory).
configFile Device application config file (path
required if config file is not in default
directory).
fieldSyncOffset (1..15) Integer offset in ms from IG
vertical retrace to HT device data
collection.

2.4.165.2 TRACKER \HARDWIRE

The \HARDWIRE qualifier specifies constant x,y,z and h,p,r.
Format: TRACKER \HARDWIRE [TRACKER=tracker] [ENABLE=enable] [X=x]
[Y=y] [Z=z] [H=h] [P=p] [R=r]

Syntax
tracker (0..2) Tracker ID.
Description:
enable Enable/disable hardwire position for
(ON/OFF) this tracker device.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

x X value to override the device
provided x.
y Y value to override device provided y.
z Z value to override the device
provided z.
h (0..360) h value to override the device
provided h.
p (0..360) p value to override the device
provided p.
r (0..360) r value to override the device
provided r.

2-396 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.165.3 TRACKER \MOTIONSYSTEM

The \MOTIONSYSTEM qualifier is for a head tracker controlled motion
system, typically used when controlling helmet mounted displays.
Format: TRACKER \MOTIONSYSTEM [TRACKER=tracker] [MS=ms]
[XOFFSET=Xoffset] [YOFFSET=Yoffset] [ZOFFSET=Zoffset]

Syntax
tracker (0..2) Tracker ID.
Description:
ms (3..65535) Motion system.
Xoffset X offset of the motion system relative
to an appropriate reference point.
Yoffset Y offset of the motion system relative
to an appropriate reference point.
Zoffset Z offset of the motion system relative
to an appropriate reference point.

2.4.165.4 TRACKER \SEOS

The \SEOS qualifier selects which tracker’s data feeds head tracker
controlled SEOS optimizer calculations.
Format: TRACKER \SEOS [TRACKER=tracker] [ENABLE=enable]

Syntax
tracker (0..2) Tracker ID
Description:
enable Enables and disables.
(OFF/ON)

2.4.165.5 TRACKER \SEOSCONFIG

The \SEOSCONFIG qualifier configures global SEOS specific data needed
for distortion correction processing by the SEOS optimizer.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

TRACKER \SEOSCONFIG [ENABLE=enable] [TELETEXT=teletext]
[BIGTELETEXT=bigTeletext] [CHECKTELETEXT=checkTeletext]
[VIRTUALCOLLIMATION=virtualCollimation]
[BRIGHTNESS=brightness]
[VIRTUALCOLLIMATION=virtualCollimation]
[ANGULARWIDTH=AngularWidth] [ROLLOFFWIDTH=RollOffWidth]
[OPERATIONALSTATE=operationalState] [TIMEOFDAY=timeOfDat]

Syntax enable Enable/disable SEOS optimizer..

Description: (OFF/ON)
teletext Enable/disable teletext.
(OFF/ON)
bigTeletext Enable/disable magnified teletext
(OFF/ON) rendering for visual verification (test
feature).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-397

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

checkTeletext Enable/disable teletext checksum

(OFF/ON) calculations on SPs. (debug feature)
virtualCollimation Enable/disable virtual collimation.
(OFF/ON)
brightness Enable/disable brightness attenuation.
(OFF/ON)
virtualCollimation Enable/disable virtual collimation.
(OFF/ON)
AngularWidth (-360..360) Brightness attenuation
angular width.
RollOffWidth (-360..360) Brightness attenuation roll
off width.
operationalstate (unknown off standby ready operate
playback maintenance) Seos optimizer
operational state.
timeOfDay (unknown morning day dusk night)
Seos optimizer time of day for
projector gamma correction

2.4.165.6 TRACKER \SEOSDISPLAY

The \SEOSDISPLAY qualifier sets SEOS display parameters used in SEOS
optimizer distortion correction.
Format: TRACKER \SEOSDisplay [VIEWPORT=viewport] [CENTERX=centerX]
[CENTERY=centerY] [CENTERZ=centerZ] [EYEPOINTX=eyepointX]
[EYEPOINTY=eyepointY] [EYEPOINTZ=eyepointZ] [RADIUS=radius]
[FOVCOMPENSATE=fovCompensate]

Syntax
viewport Viewport number
Description:
centerX Floating point Display center of

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

curvature X coordinate.
centerY Floating point Display center of
curvature Y coordinate.
centerZ Floating point Display center of
curvature Z coordinate.
eyepointX Floating point Display eyepoint X
coordinate.
eyepointY Floating point Display eyepoint Y
coordinate.
eyepointZ Floating point Display eyepoint A
coordinate.
radius Floating point Display radius.
fovCompensate Floating point Display Field-of-View
Compensation.

2-398 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.165.7 TRACKER \SEOSPROJECTOR

The \SEOSPROJECTOR qualifier configures a SEOS projector with
viewport specific data for SEOS optimizer.
Format: TRACKER \SEOSPROJECTOR [VIEWPORT=viewport]
[PROJECTOR=projector] [LIST=list] [FOVLEFT=fovLeft]
[FOVRIGHT=fovRight] [FOVBOTTOM=fovBottom] [FOVTOP=fovTop]
[HEADING=heading] [PITCH=pitch] [ROLL=roll]

Syntax
view (0..63) viewport.
Description:
projector (0..1) projector ID.
list Lists current SEOS projectors.
fovLeft (-360..360) Projector frustum FOV
left.
fovRight (-360..360) Projector frustum FOV
right.
fovBottom (-360..360) Projector frustum FOV
bottom.
fovTop (-360..360) Projector frustum FOV
top.
heading (-360..360) Projector heading.
pitch (-360..360) Projector pitch.
roll (-360..360) Projector roll.

2.4.165.8 TRACKER \TYPES

The \TYPES qualifier indicates data from the head tracker device needs
to be manipulated.
Format: TRACKER \TYPES [TRACKER=tracker] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[XY=xy][HEADING=heading] [PITCH=pitch] [ROLL=roll]
[COUNTERPITCH=counterpitch] [COUNTERROLL=counterroll]

Syntax
tracker (0..2) Tracker ID.
Description:
x Specify possible ways to modify the X
position returned by the tracker device:
• none(0): leave X position as is - DEFAULT
• negate(1): multiply X position by -1
• zero(2): force the X position to 0

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-399

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

y Specify possible ways to modify the Y

position returned by the tracker device:
• none(0): leave Y position as is - DEFAULT
• negate(1): multiply Y position by -1
• zero(2): force the Y position to 0.
z Specify possible ways to modify the Z
position returned by the tracker device:
• none(0): leave Z position as is - DEFAULT
• negate(1): multiply Z position by -1
• zero(2): force the Z position to 0
xy This is not to be used for new EP2 tracker
configurations, but is left in to support a
legacy combined X and Y control value for
which a number 0-4 was specified. If this is
entered it will be translated into the new
format and that will be output. It is
suggested that reset files are updated to use
the new format. Here are the meanings of
each number that can be specified for this
parameter:
• 0: leave X and Y positions as they are
• 1: multiply X and Y positions by -1
• 2: force X and Y positions to 0
• 3: multiply X position by -1. Leave Y
position as is.
• 4: multiply Y position by -1. Leave X
position as is.
heading Specify possible ways to modify the heading
returned by the tracker device:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

• none(0): leave heading as is - DEFAULT
• negate(1): multiply heading by -1
• zero(2): force the heading to 0
• reverse(3): subtract 180 from the heading
pitch Specify possible ways to modify the pitch
returned by the tracker device:
• none(0): leave pitch as is - DEFAULT
• negate(1): multiply pitch by -1
• zero(2): force the pitch to 0
• reverse(3): subtract 180 from the pitch

2-400 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

roll Specify possible ways to modify the roll

returned by the tracker device:
• none(0): leave roll as is - DEFAULT
• negate(1): multiply roll by -1
• zero(2): force the roll to 0
• reverse(3): subtract 180 from the roll
counterpitch Floating point degrees in range 0 to 89
degrees used to counter errant pitch
introduced with heading changes. Default is
0 degrees.
counterroll Floating point degrees in range 0 to 89
degrees used to counter errant roll
introduced with heading changes. Default is
0 degrees.
location Not yet implemented. No host response is
available.
changesel Not yet implemented. No host response is
available.

2.4.166 TRACKS
The TRACKS command controls a previously defined track. It can also
be used to make ship wakes.
Format: TRACKS [NUM=num] [TYPE=type] [MM=mm] [XOFFSET=xoffset]
[YOFFSET=yoffset] [ZOFFSET=zoffset] [FADE=fade] [START=start]
[STOP=stop] [CLEAN=clean]
[\DEFINE]

Syntax
num (0..127) The track number.
Description:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

type (0..127) The track type id, previously
defined using the TRACKS\DEFINE
command.
mm The moving model to which the track
is to be attached.
xoffset The X offset from the origin of the
moving model specified by "mm"
where the track is to originate.
yoffset The Y offset from the origin of the
moving model specified by "mm"
where the track is to originate.
zoffset The Z offset from the origin of the
moving model specified by "mm"
where the track is to originate. The Z
offset is needed for track templates
that are not conformal.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-401

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

fade (0..1) Dynamically fades out the

Track. Needed for submarine stern
wakes, based on depth.
start Start the track.
stop Stop the track, but do not remove it.
The track will fade out as specified in
the TRACKS\DEFINE command.
clean Stop and remove the track. A cleaned
track number can be reused.
[\DEFINE] See the section below for details on
this qualifier.

2.4.166.1 TRACKS \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines the attributes of a track type. The TRACKS
command is then used to bind and control this type of track.
Format: TRACKS \DEFINE [TYPE=type] [TEMPLATE=template]
[WIDTH=width] [SEGMENTMAXLENGTH=segmentmaxlength]
[TOLERANCE=tolerance] [SPREAD=spread] [FADEIN=fadein]
[BEGINFADE=beginfade] [ENDFADE=endfade]
[LEADINGEDGEFADE=leadingedgefade]

Syntax (0..127) The track type id being

type
Description: defined.
template The template model being used to lay
down the track.
width The initial width of the track (in feet).
segmentmaxlengt The maximum length of a track
h polygon, if the tolerance does not lay

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

down a new one sooner (in feet).
tolerance (0..90) Specifies how often to lay
down a new polygon when forming
tracks. If the angular difference
between the last two polygons being
drawn is above the tolerance, a new
polygon will be put down (in degrees).
spread The rate at which the width of the
track spreads (in feet/second).
fadein The amount of time to fade the track
in. Used to eliminate a hard edge
when starting a track (in seconds).
beginfade The amount of time after a track
polygon’s creation that it will begin to
fade out (in seconds).

2-402 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

endfade The amount of time after a track

polygon’s creation that it will be
completely faded out (in seconds).
leadingedgefade The amount of time to fade the leading
edge of the track in (in seconds).

2.4.167 TRAFFIC
The TRAFFIC command provides advanced traffic control.
Format: TRAFFIC [ENABLE=enable] [MAXSEGLENGTH=maxSegLength]
[NEAR=near] [FAR=far] [MIN=min] [SPEED=speed]
[DENSITY=density] [LANE=lane] [HEIGHT=height]
[REVERSE=reverse] [LOBE=lobe] [ROLLOFF=rolloff]
[AMBIENT=ambient] [CONFORM=conform]
[\DIAG]

Syntax enable
Enable/disable advanced traffic.
Description: (ON/OFF)
maxSegLength (100..500000) Maximum distance
between waypoints (feet).
near (0..100000) Start range of LOD.
far (0..100000) End range of LOD.
min (0..1) Min LOD.
speed (0..10) Global speed scale.
density (0..10) Global density scale.
lane (-3..3) Lane speed delta scale.
height (0..1000) Height adjuster (feet).
reverse Reverse traffic direction.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(ON/OFF)
lobe (0..180) Lobe angle.
rolloff (0..20) Roll off angle.
ambient (0..1) Ambient intensity
conform Conform to terrain models.
(ON/OFF)
[\DIAG] See section below for information on
this qualifier.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-403

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.167.1 TRAFFIC \DIAG

The \DIAG qualifier provides an advanced traffic diagnostic.
Format: TRAFFIC \DIAG [VERBOSE=verbose] [WAYPOINTS=waypoints]

Syntax verbose Enable/disable advanced traffic

Description: (ON/OFF) diagnostic messages.
waypoints Enable/disable advanced traffic
(ON/OFF) waypoint display.

2.4.168 TRAILS
The TRAILS command performs trails functions.
Format: TRAILS [NUM=num] [TYPE=type] [MM=mm] [XOFFSET=xoffset]
[YOFFSET=yoffset] [ZOFFSET=zoffset] [START=start] [STOP=stop]
[CLEAN=clean] [ALL=all] [SPMASK=spMask] [VPMASK=vpMask]
[\DEFINE]

Syntax
num (0..127) Trail identifier.
Description:
type (0..127) Trail type identifier. It is
defined using the TRAILS \DEFINE
command.
mm (0..65535) Moving model associated
with the effect.
xoffset X offset from mm origin.
yoffset Y offset from mm origin.
zoffset Z offset from mm origin.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

start Starts the trail.
stop Stops the trail.
clean Makes this trail number available for a
different trail.
all Applies the action stop or clean to all
trails.
spMask (DEPRECATED) Use vpMask.
vpMask Defines which viewports render this
trail.
[\DEFINE] Refer to the following section for
details about this qualifier.

2-404 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.168.1 TRAILS \DEFINE

The \DEFINE qualifier defines or modifies a Trails effect.
Format: TRAILS \DEFINE [TYPE=type] [DEFNAME=defName]
[WINDSPEEDAUTOADJUSTPARTICLESIZE=windSpeedAutoAdjustParti
cleSize]
[WINDSPEEDAUTOADJUSTPARTICLEOPACITY=windSpeedAutoAdjust
ParticleOpacity] [UPDATE=update] [TEXTURE=texture]
[WIDTH=width] [TOLERANCE=tolerance] [SPREAD=spread]
[REPEATTEXTURE=repeatTexture] [BEGINFADE=beginFade]
[ENDFADE=endFade] [SEGMENTMAXLENGTH=segmentMaxLength]
[WINDEFFECT=windEffect] [RISE=rise] [FADEIN=fadeIn]
[SENSORINDEX=sensorIndex] [USEPARTICLES=useParticles]

Syntax
type (0..127) Trail type identifier.
Description:
defName The particle effect definition to use as
a template for the Trails effect.
windSpeedAutoAd (0..20) Scales the effect of
justParticleSize automatically adjusting the size of
particles based on wind speed.
windSpeedAutoAd (0..20) Scales the effect of
justParticleOpacity automatically adjusting the opacity of
particles based on wind speed.
update Forces an update of the trail
definition.
texture [useparticles=off] Texture to use for
trail.
width [useparticles=off] Initial width of trail
(in feet).
tolerance [useparticles=off] Specifies how often

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

to lay down a new polygon when
forming trails. If the angular
difference between the last two
polygons being drawn is above the
tolerance, a new polygon will be put
down (in degrees).
spread [useparticles=off] Rate at which the
width of the trail spreads (in
feet/second).
repeatTexture [useparticles=off] Effects how often
the texture repeats along the trail.
Larger numbers spread out the
texture.
beginFade [useparticles=off] Amount of time
after a trail polygon's creation that it
will begin to fade out (in seconds).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-405

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

endFade [useparticles=off] Amount of time

after a trail polygon's creation that it
will be completely faded out (in
seconds).
segmentMaxLengt [useparticles=off] Maximum length of
h a trail polygon.
windEffect [useparticles=off] Percentage of the
wind speed that is applied to the
motion of the trail.
rise [useparticles=off] Rate at which trail
will rise.
fadeIn [useparticles=off] Amount of time in
which to fade trail.
sensorIndex (0..4095) [useparticles=off] Material
sensor index defined in the .if file to
use for this trail type.
useParticles Enable/disable use of particle based
(ON/OFF) trails.

2.4.169 TRIGGER
The TRIGGER command has thirteen qualifiers. They are described in
the sections below.

2.4.169.1 TRIGGER \ALTABOVE

The \ALTABOVE qualifier creates a trigger that activates when a moving
model goes above a specified altitude.

Format: TRIGGER \ALTABOVE [NUM=num] [ENABLE=enable] [Z=z]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[TRIGGERING_MM=triggering_mm] [FILE=file] [RERUN=rerun]
[LIST=list]

Syntax
Description: num (0..63) Trigger index.
enable
Enable or disable trigger.
(ON/OFF)
z Trigger elevation.
triggering_mm The moving model to monitor.
file Script to run when going above
altitude.
rerun
Rerun when trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
list Lists all currently active triggers.

2-406 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.169.2 TRIGGER \ALTBELOW

The \ALTBELOW qualifier creates a trigger that activates when a moving
model goes below a specified altitude.

Format: TRIGGER \ALTBELOW [NUM=num] [ENABLE=enable] [Z=z]

[TRIGGERING_MM=triggering_mm] [FILE=file] [RERUN=rerun]
[LIST=list]

Syntax
Description: num (0..63) Trigger index.
enable
Enable or disable trigger.
(ON/OFF)
z Trigger elevation.
triggering_mm The moving model to monitor.
file Script to run when going below
altitude.
rerun
Rerun when trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
list Lists all currently active triggers.

2.4.169.3 TRIGGER \CLEAN

The \CLEAN qualifier clears out all parameters from all triggers.

2.4.169.4 TRIGGER \HAT

The \HAT qualifier creates a trigger that activates when a moving model
goes above or below a specified HAT.

Format: TRIGGER \HAT [NUM=num] [ENABLE=enable] [Z=z]

[TRIGGERING_MM=triggering_mm] [ABOVE=above]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[BELOW=below] [RERUN=rerun] [LIST=list]

Syntax
Description: num (0..127) Trigger index.
enable (ON/OFF) Enable or disable trigger.
z The triggering height above terrain.
triggering_mm The moving model to monitor.
above Script to run when going above HAT
values.
below Script to run when going below HAT
values.
rerun (ON/OFF) Rerun when trigger is reset.
list Lists all currently active triggers.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-407

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.169.5 TRIGGER \LOAD

The \LOAD qualifier creates a trigger that activates when a moving
model is paged in.

Format: TRIGGER \LOAD [ENABLE=enable] [MODEL=model] [FILE=file]

[LIST=list] [RERUN=rerun] [NUM=num]

Syntax enable
Enable or disable trigger.
Description: (ON/OFF)
model The model slot to monitor.
file Script to run when the model is
paged in.
list Lists all currently active triggers.
rerun
Rerun when trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
num (0..63) Trigger index.

2.4.169.6 TRIGGER \PAUSEROUTE

The \PAUSEROUTE qualifier creates a trigger that activates when an MM
goes into and out of a specified range, and pauses the given route.

Format: TRIGGER \PAUSEROUTE [NUM=num] [ENABLE=enable]

[TRIGGERING_MM=triggering_mm] [MM=mm] [RANGE=range]
[XLON=xlon] [YLAT=ylat] [Z=z] [ROUTE=route] [RERUN=rerun]
[RESUME=resume] [LIST=list]

Syntax
Description: num (0..127) Trigger index.
enable
Enable or disable trigger.
(ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

triggering_mm The moving model to monitor.
mm If set, this moving odel will be the
center of the range.
range The range within/without which the
mm will cause the trigger to
activate.
xlon lon coord of trigger location. If mm is
set, x offset from mmTrigger.
ylat lat coord of trigger location. If mm is
set, y offset from mmTrigger.
z z coord of trigger location. If mm is
set, z offset from mmTrigger. If not
set, trigger range is an infinite height
cylinder.

2-408 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

route Route to pause when going into

range.
rerun
Rerun when trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
resume Resume route when going out of
(ON/OFF) range.
list Lists all currently active triggers.

2.4.169.7 TRIGGER \RANGE

The \RANGE qualifier creates a pauseRoute trigger that activates when a
moving model goes into/out of a specified range (not implemented).

Format: TRIGGER \RANGE [NUM=num] [ENABLE=enable]

[TRIGGERING MM=triggering mm] [MM=mm] [RANGE=range]
[XLON=xlon] [YLAT=ylat] [Z=z] [IN=in] [OUT=out] [RTIN=rtIn]
[RTOUT=rtOut] [RERUN=rerun] [LIST=list]

Syntax
Description: num (0..127) Trigger index.
enable
Enable or disable the trigger.
(ON/OFF)
triggering_mm The moving model to monitor.
mm If set, this moving model will be the
center of the range.
range The range within/without which the
mm will cause the trigger to
activate.
xlon The lon coordinate of the trigger
location. If mm is set, this is the x
offset from mmTrigger.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ylat The lat coordinate of the trigger
location. If the mm is set, this is the
y offset from mmTrigger.
z The z coordinate of the trigger
location. If mm is set, this is the z
offset from mmTrigger. If it is not
set, the trigger range is an infinite
height cylinder.
in The script to run when going into
range.
out The script to run when going out of
range.
rtIn Route to run when going into range.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-409

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

rtOut Route to run when going out of

range.
rerun
Rerun when trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
list Lists all currently active triggers.

2.4.169.8 TRIGGER \ROUTE

The \ROUTE qualifier creates a trigger that activates when a route has
completed.

Format: TRIGGER \ROUTE [ROUTE=route] [WATCH=watch] [LIST=list]

Syntax
The route index to run.
Description: route
watch The route index to watch.
list Lists all currently active triggers.

2.4.169.9 TRIGGER \RVR

The \RVR qualifier creates a trigger that activates when runway visibility
range is above or below a specified value.

Format: TRIGGER \RVR [NUM=num] [ENABLE=enable] [RVR=rvr]

[ABOVE=above] [BELOW=below] [RERUN=rerun] [LIST=list]

Syntax
Description: num (0..127) Trigger index.
enable
Enable or disable trigger.
(ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

rvr The triggering RVR.
above Script to run when RVR is greater
than specified value.
below Script to run when RVR is less than
specified value.
rerun
Rerun when the trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
list Lists all currently active triggers.

2.4.169.10 TRIGGER \RVRABOVE

This command has been replaced by TRIGGER \RVR.

2.4.169.11 TRIGGER \RVRBELOW

This command has been replaced by TRIGGER \RVR.

2-410 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.169.12 TRIGGER \SPEED

The \SPEED qualifier creates a trigger that activates when the speed of
the eye or a mm goes above or below a specified speed.

Format: TRIGGER \SPEED [NUM=num] [ENABLE=enable]

[TRIGGERING_MM=triggering_mm] [SPEED=speed] [ABOVE=above]
[BELOW=below] [RERUN=rerun] [LIST=list]

Syntax num
(0..127) Trigger index.
Description:
enable
Enable/disable trigger.
(ON/OFF)
triggering_mm The moving model to monitor; if left
unset or set to 0, the eye will be
monitored.
speed The speed above/below which will
cause the trigger to activate.
above Script to run above specified speed.
below Script to run below specified speed.
rerun
Rerun when trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
list Lists all currently active triggers.

2.4.169.13 TRIGGER \TIME

The \TIME qualifier creates a trigger that activates when a specified
amount of time has elapsed.

Format: TRIGGER \TIME [NUM=num] [ENABLE=enable] [TIME=time]

[FILE=file] [RERUN=rerun] [LIST=list]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax num
(0..127) Trigger index.
Description:
enable
Enable/disable trigger.
(ON/OFF)
time Elapsed time which will cause the
trigger to activate (sec).
speed The speed above/below which will
cause the trigger to activate.
file Script to run when elapsed time has
been reached.
rerun
Rerun when trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
list Lists all currently active triggers.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-411

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.169.14 TRIGGER \UNLOAD

The \UNLOAD qualifier creates a trigger that activates when a moving
model is paged out.

Format: TRIGGER \UNLOAD [ENABLE=enable] [MODEL=model] [FILE=file]

[LIST=list] [RERUN=rerun] [NUM=num]

Syntax enable
Enable or disable trigger.
Description: (ON/OFF)
model The model slot to monitor.
file Script to run when the model is
paged in.
list Lists all currently active triggers.
rerun
Rerun when trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
num (0..63) Trigger index.

2.4.169.15 TRIGGER \VIS

The \VIS qualifier creates a trigger that activates when the visibility is
above or below a specified value.

Format: TRIGGER \VISBELOW [NUM=num] [ENABLE=enable] [VIS=vis]

[ABOVE=above] [BELOW=below] [RERUN=rerun] [LIST=list]

Syntax
Description: num (0..127) Trigger index.
enable
Enable or disable trigger.
(ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

vis The triggering RVR.
above Script to run when going above HAT
value.
Below Script to run when going below HAT
value.
rerun
Rerun when trigger is reset.
(ON/OFF)
list Lists all currently active triggers.

2.4.169.16 TRIGGER \VISABOVE

This command has been replaced by TRIGGER \VIS.

2-412 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.169.17 TRIGGER \VISBELOW

This command has been replaced by TRIGGER \VIS.

2.4.170 UNBIND
The UNBIND command unbinds a model or range of models from a
motion system.

Format: UNBIND [MM=mm] [BOTTOM=bottom] [TOP=top] [ALL=all]

[CLEAN=clean]

Syntax
Description: mm (0..65535) Motion system number.
bottom (0..8191) bottom motion system
number in range
top (0..8191) Bottom motion system
number in range.
all Unbind all models.
clean Reset all control values to default.

2.4.171 UNCHAIN
The UNCHAIN command unchains a motion system.

Format: UNCHAIN [MS=ms] [ALL=all]

[\FOLLOW] [\LOOKAT] [\SPIN] [\TOW]

Syntax
Description: ms (0..65535) Motion system to
unchain.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

all Chain all motion systems.
[\FOLLOW] Refer to the following descriptions
[\LOOKAT] for more information about these
[\SPIN] qualifiers.
[\TOW]

2.4.171.1 UNCHAIN \FOLLOW

The \FOLLOW qualifier unchains a following motion system.

Format: UNCHAIN \FOLLOW [MS=ms]

Syntax
Description: ms Motion system to unchain.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-413

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.171.2 UNCHAIN \LOOKAT

The \LOOKAT qualifier unchains a looking motion system.

Format: UNCHAIN \LOOKAT [MS=ms]

Syntax
Description: ms Motion system to unchain.

2.4.171.3 UNCHAIN \SPIN

The \SPIN qualifier unchains a spinning motion system.

Format: UNCHAIN \SPIN [MS=ms]

Syntax
Description: ms Motion system to unchain.

2.4.171.4 UNCHAIN \TOW

The \TOW qualifier unchains a towed motion system.

Format: UNCHAIN \TOW [MS=ms]

Syntax
Description: ms Motion system to unchain.

2.4.172 UNDEFINE
The UNDEFINE command undefines a variable used in if statements.

Format: UNDEFINE [NAME=name]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax
Description: name variable name

2.4.173 UNLOAD
The UNLOAD command unloads a model or range of models.

Format: UNLOAD [SLOT=slot] [BOTTOM=bottom] [TOP=top] [ALL=all]

[\INSET] [\PROCESSDESCRIPTION]
Syntax slot (0..32767) Model slot number.
Description:
bottom (0..32767) Bottom slot number in
range.
top (0..32767) Top slot number in
range.

2-414 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

all Unload all models.

[\INSET] Refer to the following description for
[\PROCESSDESCR more information about these
IPTION] qualifiers.

2.4.173.1 UNLOAD \INSET

The \INSET qualifier unloads database insets.

Format: UNLOAD \INSET [PATH=path]

Syntax The path of the database inset epin

path
Description: file or the root of the search path.

2.4.173.2 UNLOAD \PROCESSDESCRIPTION

The \PROCESSDESCRIPTION qualifier unloads process description file.

Format: UNLOAD \PROCESSDESCRIPTION [PATH=path]

Syntax Path of database process description

path
Description: file or root of search path.

2.4.174 UNLOADDT
The UNLOADDT command causes the terrain detail map to be unloaded.

2.4.175 VELOCITY
The VELOCITY command sets a motion system position/rotation
velocity.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: VELOCITY [MM=mm] [X=x] [Y=y] [Z=z] [HEADING=heading]
[PITCH=pitch] [ROLL=roll] [BODY=body] [FPS=fps] [KPH=kph]
[MPH=mph] [KNOTS=knots] [MPS=mps] [XTIME=xtime]
[YTIME=ytime] [ZTIME=ztime] [HEADINGTIME=headingtime]
[PITCHTIME=pitchtime] [ROLLTIME=rolltime]

Syntax
mm Motion system.
Description:
x X velocity in units per second.
y Y velocity in units per second.
z Z velocity in units per second.
heading Heading velocity in degrees per
second.
pitch Pitch velocity in degrees per second.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-415

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

roll Roll velocity in degrees per second.

body (on off) Model body coordinates
enable/disable.
fps Set units to feet per second.
kph Set units to kilometers per hour.
mph Set units to miles per hour.
knots Set units to knots.
mps Set units to meters per second.
xtime Time (seconds) to X velocity.
ytime Time (seconds) to Y velocity.
ztime Time (seconds) to Z velocity.
headingtime Time (seconds) to heading velocity.
pitchtime Time (seconds) to pitch velocity.
rolltime Time (seconds) to roll velocity.

2.4.176 VF
The VF command has two qualifiers that are discussed below.

2.4.176.1 VF \CONFIG
The \CONFIG qualifier is the configuration command for vector features.

Format: VF \CONFIG [STAGE2PAGEMODE=stage2PageMode]

[PAGERANGE=pageRange]
[PAGERANGEDISKTORTMEM=pageRangeDiskToRTMem]
[STAGE2PAGETOCIRCLERADIUSFEET=stage2PageToCircleRadiusFeet]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[STAGE2OFFSETCENTERRADIUSFEET=stage2OffsetCenterRadiusFeet]
[STAGE1PAGEINTHROTTLESIZE=stage1PageInThrottleSize]
[STAGE2PAGEINTHROTTLESIZE=stage2PageInThrottleSize]
[STAGE1PAGEOUTTHROTTLESIZE=stage1PageOutThrottleSize]
[STAGE2PAGEOUTTHROTTLESIZE=stage2PageOutThrottleSize]
[ASYNCMODELLOAD=asyncModelLoad]
[TODSHADOWSFORESHORTENDEGREES=todShadowsForeshortenDegrees
]

Syntax VF_TO_CIRCLE_SINGLE_LOD is the

Description: default eyepoint-relative paging
mode.
VF_OFFSET_CENTER uses the view-
stage2PageMode
ray intersection with terrain as
paging center.
VF_VIEW_CONE is page-to-view-
cone mode.

2-416 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Sets both the stage1 DiskToRTMem

and the
pageRange
secondStagePageToCircleRadiusFeet
values. (DEPRECATED)
pageRangeDiskTo Vector feature page range, sets
RTMem DiskToRTMem
stage2PageToCircl Vector feature page range, sets
eRadiusFeet RTMemToSceneManager.
stage2OffsetCente Vector feature page range, sets
rRadiusFeet RTMemToSceneManager.
stage1PageInThro (1..350) Maximum number of items
ttleSize that can be on stage 1 page in list
stage2PageInThro (1..350) Maximum number of items
ttleSize that can be on stage 2 page in list
stage1PageOutThr (1..350) Maximum number of items
ottleSize that can be on stage 1 page out list
stage2PageOutThr (1..350) Maximum number of items
ottleSize that can be on stage 2 page out list
asyncModelLoad Perform asynchronous model loads
(ON/OFF) relative to a cell paging task.
todShadowsFores (0..90) The amount to foreshorten
hortenDegrees tod shadows (in degrees).

2.4.176.2 VF \DEBUG
The \DEBUG qualifier is the debug command for vector features.

Format: VF \DEBUG [POINTS=points] [LINEARS=linears] [AREALS=areals]

[GRID=grid] [LINEARWIDTHS=linearWidths]
[TODSHADOWS=todShadows] [PAGEINFASTTIME=pageInFasttime]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax points (off on highlight) Point feature
Description: rendering.
linears (off on highlight) Linear feature
rendering.
areals (off on highlight) Areal feature
rendering.
grid Draws feature cell grid.
(ON/OFF)
linearWidths Draws linear widths.
(ON/OFF)
todShadows Point feature shadows.
(ON/OFF)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-417

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

pageInFasttime Schedule pager update in fast-time.

(ON/OFF)

2.4.177 VIDEO
The VIDEO command enables or disables video output.

Format: VIDEO [ENABLE=enable]

[\BLANK] [\INTCOMP] [\OGL] [\TRANSPORT]

Syntax enable Enable flag.

Description: (ON/OFF)
[\BLANK] Refer to the following descriptions
[\INTCOMP] for more information about these
[\OGL] qualifiers.
[\TRANSPORT]

2.4.177.1 VIDEO \BLANK

The \BLANK qualifier controls auto-video blanking.

Format: VIDEO \BLANK [TYPE=type] [ENABLE-enable] [TIMEOUT=timeout]

[DISABLESYNCONBLANK=disablesynconblank]
[VPEXCLUDE=vpExclude] [VPINCLUDE=vpInclude]

Syntax (eyepoint host exit) The type of

type
Description: auto-video blanking.
enable
Enable flag.
(ON/OFF)
The time of inactivity before
timeout
blanking (hh:mm:ss).
disablesynconblank
Disable sync on blank flag.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(ON/OFF)
Exclude viewport #/all from auto-
vpExclude
video blanking.
Include viewport #/all in auto-
vpInclude
video blanking.

2.4.177.2 VIDEO \INTCOMP

The \INTCOMP qualifier configures video intensity compensation for the
EP-8000.

Format: VIDEO \INTCOMP [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable] [DAY=day]

[DUSK=dusk] [NIGHT=night] [ALL=all]

Syntax
view (0..63) viewport number
Description:

2-418 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

enable enable/disable
day (0..1) day compensation factor
dusk (0..1) dusk compensation factor
night (0..1) night compensation factor
all select all viewports

2.4.177.3 VIDEO \OGL

The \OGL qualifier controls OGL video options.

Format: VIDEO \OGL

[LOSTVSMGENLOCKBLACKVIDEO=lostVsmGenlockBlackVideo]
[FIELDSVSMINVALIDGENLOCK=fieldsVsmInvalidGenlock]
[FIELDSVSMVALIDGENLOCK=fieldsVsmValidGenlock]

Syntax lostVsmGenlockBlac
Enable/disable set VSM video out
Description: kVideo
black when genlock lost.
(ON/OFF)
(10..600) Number of consecutive
fieldsVsmInvalidGen
fields of invalid genlock until video
lock
out set black.
(10..600) Number of consecutive
fieldsVsmValidGenlo
fields of valid genlock until video
ck
out set full color.

2.4.177.4 VIDEO \TRANSPORT

The \TRANSPORT qualifier enables or disables the transport delay test.

Format: VIDEO \TRANSPORT [ENABLE=enable] [MODE=mode]

[USECOMPORT=UseComPort] [COMPORT=ComPort]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax enable
Enable flag.
Description: (ON/OFF)
mode Deprecated parameter.
UseComPort
Use COM port instead of DDC pin.
(ON/OFF)
COM port to use for Transport
ComPort
Delay.

2.4.178 VIEWPORT
The VIEWPORT command configures viewport parameters.
Format: VIEWPORT [VIEW=view] [NAME=name] [EYE=eye] [H=h] [P=p]
[R=r] [FOVH=fovh] [FOVV=fovv] [OFFH=offh] [OFFV=offv]
[ZOOM=zoom] [SELECT=select] [VISSCALE=visScale] [RIF=rif]
[NEAR=near] [FAR=far]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-419

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

[\CAPTURE] [\EDGEBLEND] [\GAMMA] [\GROUP] [\NLIM]

[\OVERLAY] [\PAGINGOFFSET] [\RENDER]

Syntax
Description: view The viewport number to be controlled
(0 to 63).
name Name of viewport.
eye The eyepoint number to which this viewport
is relative. (0..31)
h The viewport’s heading. (-360..360)
p The viewport’s pitch. (-360..360)
r The viewport’s roll. (-360..360)
fovh Horizontal field of view in degrees.
(0.2..179)
fovv Vertical field of view in degrees. (0.2..179)
offh The horizontal angular offset of the field of
view in degrees. (-179..179)
offv The vertical angular offset of the field of
view in degrees. (-179..179)
zoom (1..512) Zoom factor.
select (0..32) Sets the viewport select.
visScale (0..32767) Visibility range scalar.
rif (-1..1) Range independent fog.
near (0.01..1e+007) near clipping plane (feet)
far (0.01..1e+007) vertical field of view (feet)
[\CAPTURE] For details on these qualifiers, see the
[\EDGEBLEND] sections below.
[\GAMMA]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[\GROUP]
[\NLIM]
[\OVERLAY]
[\PAGINGOFFSET]
[\RENDER]

2.4.178.1 VIEWPORT \CAPTURE

The \CAPTURE qualifier captures the viewport image.

Format: VIEWPORT \CAPTURE [VIEW=view] [FILE=file]

[GAMMACORRECT=gammaCorrect]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
File to save image to (supported
file
image types: bmp or tif).

2-420 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

gammaCorrect Enable/disable gamma correction

(ON/OFF) (default on).

2.4.178.2 VIEWPORT \EDGEBLEND

The \EDGEBLEND qualifier enables or disables viewport edgeblend.

Format: VIEWPORT \EDGEBLEND [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable]

[BLEND=blend]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
enable
Edgeblend enable.
(ON/OFF)
blend
Enable/disable blending.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.178.3 VIEWPORT \GAMMA

The \GAMMA qualifier sets the video gamma for a viewport.

Format: VIEWPORT \GAMMA [VIEW=view] [RED=red] [GREEN=green]

[BLUE=blue] [bt709=bt709]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
red (0.1..10) red gamma exponent
green (0.1..10) green gamma exponent
blue (0.1..10) blue gamma exponent
bt709
Use BT709 gamma.
(ON/OFF)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.178.4 VIEWPORT \GROUP
The \GROUP qualifier control the viewport group level of detail.

Format: VIEWPORT \GROUP [VIEW=view] [GROUP=group] [LIST=list]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
group (0..3) Viewport group number.
list Lists all viewport groups.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-421

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.178.5 VIEWPORT \NLIM

The \NLIM qualifier enables and disables viewport NLIM.

Format: VIEWPORT \NLIM [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable]

[RESTORE=restore]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
enable
NLIM enable.
(ON/OFF)
Filename from which to restore an
restore
NLIM definition.

2.4.178.6 VIEWPORT \OVERLAY

The \OVERLAY qualifier provides controls for a viewport.

Format: VIEWPORT \OVERLAY [VIEW=view] [PLANE=plane]

[ENABLE=enable] [MODE=mode] [TWOPLANE=twoPlane]
[LOAD=load] [SOX=soc] [DOX=dox] [DOY=doy] [SX=sx] [SY=sy]
[CLEAR=clear] [DOTS=dots] [CNT=cnt] [PERFIELD=perField]
[RES=res] [TOGGLE=toggle] [BEGIN=begin] [END=end]
[BOTH=both]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
plane (0..1) Overlay plan selector.
enable
Enable/disable overlay plane.
(ON/OFF)
(noop replace add blend) Set the
mode
blend mode of the overlay plane.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

twoPlane
Enable/disable two plane mode.
(ON/OFF)
load Image file to load from.
sox Source origin X.
soy Source origin Y.
dox Destination origin X.
doy Destination origin Y.
sx Size X.
sy Size Y.
clear Clear the selected overlay plane.
dots Draw dots to the screen.
cnt Number of dots to draw.

2-422 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

perField Number of dots per field.

res (1..4) The dot resolution.
toggle Toggle the given overlay plane.
begin Begin overlay updates.
end End overlay updates.
both Write to both buffers.

2.4.178.7 VIEWPORT \PAGINGOFFSET

The \PAGINGOFFSET qualifier provides generic pager settings for CT,
terrain, and 3D point feature pagers.

Format: VIEWPORT \PAGINGOFFSET [ENABLE=enable] [VIEW=view]

[PITCHSCALAR=pitchscalar]
[CTPAGINGOFFSETSCALAR=ctPagingOffsetScalar]
[CTFIXEDPAGINGOFFSET=ctFixedPagingOffset]
[TERRAINPAGINGOFFSETSCALAR=terrainPagingOffsetScalar]
[TERRAINFIXEDPAGINGOFFSET=terrainFixedPagingOffset]

Syntax Enables (ON) or disables (OFF)

enable
Description: paging offset positioning by ray
(ON/OFF)
testing.
(0..63) The viewport number to
view
be controlled.
(0..1) A clip scalar in the range
0-1, where 0 indicated a ray at
the bottom clip plane and 1
pitchscalar
indicates a ray at the top of the
clip plane with linear
interpolations between.
(0..1) CT paging control for

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

paging offset along the eye point
ctPagingOffsetScalar
and the ray intersected point. The
range is 0 – 1.
(0..20000) CT paging control for
ctFixedPagingOffset
fixed-offset paging center in feet.
(0..1) Terrain paging control for
terrainPagingOffsetS paging offset along the eye point
calar and the ray intersected point. The
range is 0 – 1.
(0..20000) Terrain paging control
terrainFixedPagingOf
for fixed-offset paging center in
fset
feet.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-423

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.178.8 VIEWPORT \RENDER

The \RENDER qualifier provides viewport render control.

Format: VIEWPORT \RENDER [VIEW=view] [ENABLE=enable] [BLANK=blank]

[LPSIZESCALE=lpSizeScale]

Syntax
view (0..63) Viewport number.
Description:
enable
NLIM enable.
(ON/OFF)
blank
Blank when disabled.
(ON/OFF)
lpSizeScale (0..1) Lightpoint size scale.

2.4.179 VISIBILITY
The VISIBILITY command displays or sets visibility.

Format: VISIBILITY [FEET=feet] [KM=km] [MILES=miles] [REGION=region]

[EMBAND=emband]
[LEGACYRVRPRIORITYMODE=legacyRVRpriorityMode]
[\FILE] [\TUNE]

Syntax feet (0..1.32e+006) Sets the visibility in

Description: feet.
km (0..402.336) Sets the visibility in
kilometers.
miles (0...250) Sets the visibility in miles.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

region (0..7) Sets the weather region to
which this visibility applies.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.
legacyRVRpriority Keeps the visibility above the RVR if
Mode enabled.
(ON/OFF)
[\FILE] Refer to the following descriptions
[\TUNE] for more information about these
qualifiers.

2-424 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.179.1 VISIBILITY \FILE

The \FILE qualifier loads or saves visibility calibration files.

Format: VISIBILITY \FILE [SAVE=save] [RESTORE=restore]

[EMBAND=emband]

Syntax save File in which to save current visibility

Description: calibration data.
restore File from which to load visibility
calibration data.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.179.2 VISIBILITY \TUNE

The \TUNE qualifier sets visibility tuning parameters.

Format: VISIBILITY \TUNE [DENSEXP=densExp]

Syntax densExp (1..8) Sets the transmittance density

Description: exponent.

2.4.180 VSM
The VSM command is viewport specific models.
Format: VSM [MM=mm] [ENABLE=enable] [VIEWPORT=viewport]
[MASK=mask] [ALL=all] [LIST=list]

Syntax
mm (0..65535) Moving model number.
Description:
enable enable/disable VSM feature for this
(ON/OFF) moving model

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

viewport 0..31) A list of the viewport IDs that
are to display the model.
mask A viewport mask.
all Set the model to be displayed in all
viewports.
list A list of all moving models with VSM
enabled.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-425

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.181 WAIT
The WAIT command pauses CLI processing.

Format: WAIT [SECONDS=seconds]

[\DB]

Syntax (0..10000) number of seconds to

Description: seconds wait (default is wait forever).
[\DB] Refer to the following description for
more information about this qualifier.

2.4.181.1 WAIT \DB

The \DB qualifier waits for the database to be loaded before processing
queued CLI commands .

Format: WAIT \DB [TIMEOUT=timeout] [BLOCKCLI=blockCLI]

Syntax (0..600) Maximum number of

Description: seconds to wait for the current db to
timeout finish loading before a forced
continue of the CLI commands is
issued (default is 120 seconds).
Pause the CLI processing until the
blockCLI
current db has finished loading
(ON/OFF)
(default is on).

2.4.181.2 WAIT \DBCONFIG

The \DBCONFIG qualifier configures the WAIT \DB behavior.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: WAIT \DBCONFIG [DEFAULTBLOCKCLI=defaultBlockCLI]

Syntax The persistent blockCLI default when

Description: defaultBlockCLI the blockCLI parameter is not
(ON/OFF) entered with the wait\db command
(default is on).

2.4.182 WAM
The WAM command controls wind affected models.

Format: WAM [SNOWFALL=snowfall] [BSNOW_ENABLE=bSnow_enable]

[BSAND_ENABLE=bSand_enable] [WHEADING=wHeading]
[WSPEED=wSpeed] [REGION=region]

[\BREAKPOINT] [\BSAND] [\BSNOW] [\RANGE] [\SELECT]

Syntax snowfall (0..3) Set the severity of falling

2-426 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

Description: snow.
bSnow_enable
Enables or disables blowing snow
(ON/OFF)
bSand_enable
Enables or disables blowing sand.
(ON/OFF)
wHeading (-360..360) Sets the direction in
which the wind is blowing (degrees).
wSpeed Sets the wind speed in knots.
(0..7) Sets the weather region to
region
which this wind applies.
[\BREAKPOINT]
[\BSAND]
Refer to the following sections for
[\BSNOW]
details on these qualifiers.
[\RANGE]
[\SELECT]

2.4.182.1 WAM \BREAKPOINT

The \BREAKPOINT qualifier defines breakpoint speed in knots.

Format: WAM \BREAKPOINT [bp1=bp1] [bp2=bp2]

Syntax Sets the first breakpoint’s speed in

bp1
Description: knots.
Sets the second breakpoint’s speed
bp2
in knots.

2.4.182.2 WAM \BSAND

The \BSAND qualifier sets blowing sand-specific parameters.

Format: WAM \BSAND [VISIBILITY=visibility] [RED=red] [GREEN=green]

[BLUE=blue] [COLORGAIN=colorgain] [EMBAND=emband]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Syntax
visibility (1..10000) Blowing sand visibility.
Description:
(0..1) Blowing sand color, red
red
component.
(0..1) Blowing sand color, green
green
component.
blue (0..1) Blowing sand color, blue
component.
colorgain (0..1) Blowing sand color gain.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-427

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.182.3 WAM \BSNOW

The \BSNOW qualifier sets blowing snow-specific parameters.

Format: WAM \BSNOW [VISIBILITY=visibility] [RED=red] [GREEN=green]

[BLUE=blue] [COLORGAIN=colorgain] [EMBAND=emband]

Syntax
visibility (1..10000) Blowing snow visibility.
Description:
(0..1) Blowing snow color, red
red
component.
(0..1) Blowing snow color, green
green
component.
blue (0..1) Blowing snow color, blue
component.
colorgain (0..1) Blowing snow color gain.
emband (NVG EVS MWIR LWIR EO VISUAL)
emband (sensor type) for these
parameters.

2.4.182.4 WAM \RANGE

The \RANGE qualifier defines ranges of wind affected models.

Format: WAM \RANGE [SET=set] [BOTTOM=bottom] [TOP=top]

[CLEAR=clear] [LIST=list]

Syntax
set (0..15) The set of models to adjust.
Description:
(-1..65535) The first MM in the
bottom range (-1 indicates the set is not
used).
(-1..65535) The last MM in the range

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

top
(-1 indicates the set is not used).
clear Remove the MM numbers from this
set.
list List all the sets.

2.4.182.5 WAM \SELECT

The \SELECT qualifier enables or disables wind-affected model selects.

Format: WAM \SELECT [SET=set] [SELECT_ENABLE=select_enable]

[LIST=list]

Syntax
set (0..15) The set of models to adjust.
Description:

2-428 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

select_enable Enables or disables wind affected

(ON/OFF) model selects.
list List all the sets.

2.4.183 WATCH
The WATCH command initiates the capture of a specific host opcode for
analysis and then allows display of captured opcodes.

Format: WATCH [OPCODE=opcode] [SUBOPCODE=subopcode]

[COUNT=count] [OFFSETA=offsetA] [OFFSETB=offsetB]
[SIZEA=sizeA] [SIZEB=sizeB] [MASKA=maskA] [MASKKB=maskB]
[VALUEA=valueA] [VALUEB=valueB] [NOTVALUEA=notvalueA]
[NOTVALUEB=notvalueB] [AND=and] [NEXT=next] [PREV=prev]

Syntax This is the actual opcode for which to

opcode
Description: look.
If opcode = 0xE000(extended
subopcode opcode) indicates the subopcode to
be watched.
(1..50) Number of repetitions of the
count
opcode for which to look.
If > 0, Enables additional filtering
offsetA based upon the contents of the
opcode.
offsetB If > 0, Enables additional filtering
based upon the contents of the
opcode.
sizeA 8..32) If filtering is enabled, specifies
the fieldsize of the value. Options are

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

8, 16, or 32.
sizeB 8..32) If filtering is enabled, specifies
the fieldsize of the value. Options are
8, 16, or 32.
maskA If specified, masks the data as
offsetA before comparing it to
valueA.
maskB If specified, masks the data as
offsetB before comparing it to
valueB.
valueA The value to compare to the opcode
data at offsetA. Checks for
equivalence.
valueB The value to compare to the opcode
data at offsetB. Checks for

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-429

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

equivalence.
notvalueA The value to compare to the opcode
data at offsetA. Checks for
equivalence.
notvalueB The value to compare to the opcode
data at offsetB. Checks for
equivalence.
and (enable disabled) If this keyword is
specified, combines two filtering test,
using both the A and B filter specs
together. If unspecified, only filter 'A'
spec is tested ( assuming it has been
enabled with a > 0 offset).
next Instructs the CLI to display the next
captured opcode in the list relative to
the one being displayed.
prev Instructs the CLI to display the
previous captured opcode in the list
relative to the one being displayed.

2.4.184 WAVES
The WAVES command defines 3D sea state and wave parameters.

Format: WAVES [LIST=list] [START=start] [TRANSIT=transit]

[BINDHEADINGWITHWIND=bindHeadingWithWind]
[SEA_STATE=sea_state] [INDEX=index] [ENABLE=enable]
[DISABLE=disable] [HEADING=heading] [HEIGHT=height]
[LENGTH=length] [FREQUENCY=frequency] [PHASE=phase]
[TIME_CONSTANT=time_constant] [FORCING=forcing]

[\BUMP] [\INTENSITY] [\LOD] [\ORIGIN] [\SPECULAR] [\TARGET]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[\TUNE] [\WHITECAPS] [\WINDLANE] [\WINDTOBEAUFORT]

Syntax
list List all sea state wave settings.
Description:
start (10..2550) Sea state feature starts
at this distance (in feet) away from
shore.
transit (10..2550) The transition distance
for the sea state feature to fade in.
The distance of start+transit must be
smaller than half mile.
bindHeadingWith Enable/disable wave heading is
Wind locked with the wind heading.
(ON/OFF)
sea_state (-1..12) Sea state number. Set to -1
to disable sea state

2-430 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

(0..4) Wave index in the given sea

index
state.
enable Enable a specific wave if given wave
index parameter.
disable Disable a specific wave if given wave
index parameter.
heading (-360..360) The heading of the wave
in degrees. All waves' heading are
relative to the primary wave. The
primary wave's heading is ignored. If
wave index is not provided, this sets
the global heading.
height The height delta between the wave's
crest and trough (feet).
length Difference between successive wave
crests (feet). Changing the wave
length changes the frequency.
frequency The wave frequency in hertz. When
wavelength is changed, a new
frequency is computed and set.
phase (-360..360) The initial phase in
degrees.
time_constant (1..2) Time constant for phase filter
in seconds. (Not Used)
forcing (0..1) This causes the waves to
appear forced by the wind. (0.0 -
1.0)
[\BUMP] Refer to the following sections for
[\INTENSITY] details on these qualifiers.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[\LOD] [\ORIGIN]
[\SPECULAR]
[\TARGET]
[\TUNE]
[\WHITECAPS]
[\WINDLANE]
[\WINDTOBEAUFO
RT]

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-431

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.184.1 WAVES \BUMP

The \BUMP qualifier controls generation of 3D sea states bump maps
based on proximity of the eye to the nearest sea state vertices.

Format: WAVES \BUMP [ENABLEMINDISTANCE=enableMinDistance]

[MINDISTANCE=minDistance]

Syntax Enable/disable minimum eye-to-sea-

Description: states distance calculation and its
enableMinDistance
subsequent use for controlling
(ON/OFF)
generation of 3D sea states bump
maps.
minDistance (0..1e+038) Sea state vertices must
exist this distance or less from the
eye before sea states bump maps
are generated (unit:feet).

2.4.184.2 WAVES \INTENSITY

The \INTENSITY qualifier modifies the intensity or modulation map. The
Intensity value is between 0..255.

Format: WAVES \INTENSITY [SHIFT=shift] [TRIM=trim] [MIPBIAS=mipBias]

Syntax
shift (-128..128) Shift the sparkle map.
Description:
trim (0..255) Trim the darker part of the
sparkle map.
mipBias (0..255) Intensity/modulation map
mips toward this color.

2.4.184.3 WAVES \LOD

The \LOD qualifier defines the LOD parameters of the sea state.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: WAVES \LOD [GRIDPOSTSPACING=gridPostSpacing]
[HIGH_RANGE=high_range]
[SHOREFADINGSENSITIVITY=shoreFadingSensitivity]
[TRANSITBANDSUBSCALAR=transitBandSubScalar]
[WAVESTART=waveStart] [WAVETRANSIT=waveTransit]
[SUBRATIOCAP=subRatioCap] [HEIGHT2INTSCALE=height2IntScale]

Syntax The shortest grid post spacing. (in

gridPostSpacing
Description: feet).
high_range Sub-divide the terrain up to the
shortest grid post spacing inside this
range.
shoreFadingSensit Scale to sub-divide more along the
ivity shore line (deprecated).

2-432 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

transitBandSubSc Scale to sub-divide more in the sea-

alar state transition band.
WaveStart The starting range of the 3D waves.
WaveTransit The transition bandwidth of the 3D
waves. Wave height is attenuated in
this transition band.
Cap to the sub-divide ratio ( Spacing
SubRatioCap
/ (distance - spacing) )
Height2IntScale Through and crest intensity changed
by wave height.

2.4.184.4 WAVES \ORIGIN

The \ORIGIN qualifier sets the origin of the waves. This is needed to
synchronize multiple RT boxes.

Format: WAVES \ORIGIN [LATDEGREE=latdegree] [LATMINUTE=latminute]

[LATSECOND=latsecond] [LONGDEGREE=longdegree]
[LONGMINUTE=longminute] [LONGSECOND=longsecond]

Syntax
latdegree (-90..90) latitude degrees
Description:
latminute (0..60) latitude minutes
latsecond (0..60) latitude seconds
longdegree (-180..180) longitude degrees
longminute (0..60) longitude minutes
longsecond (0..60) longitude seconds

2.4.184.5 WAVES \SPECULAR

The \SPECULAR qualifier controls the tweaking normal for specular
effects.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: WAVES \SPECULAR [ENABLENORMALTWEAK=enableNormalTweak]
[WIDTHTODISTRATIO=WidthToDistRatio]
[AXIALEXTEND=AxialExtend] [FADEOFFRATE=fadeOffRate]
[SUNELEVFADEOFFSTART=SunElevFadeOffStart]
[SUNELEVFADEOFFEND=SunElevFadeOffEnd]
[NOISESCALE=NoiseScale] [NOISETOINTENSITY=NoiseToIntensity]

Syntax enableNormalTweak Enable/Disable normal vector

Description: (ON/OFF) tweaking.
WidthToDistRatio The width of specular to eye-to-
vertex distance ratio.
AxialExtend The extended specular along the
sun-eye axis.
FadeOffRate How fast the specular fades off
away from the sun-eye axis.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-433

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

SunElevFadeOffStart Start fading off the normal

tweaking when the sun is lower
than this.
SunElevFadeOffEnd Completely turn off the normal
tweaking when the sun is lower
than this.
NoiseScale Scaling the added noise to the
normal vector.
NoiseToIntensity (0..1) Scaling the added noise to
the surface intensity.

2.4.184.6 WAVES \TARGET

The \TARGET qualifier deals with targets on the sea states surface.
These targets will have 3D waves around them.

Format: WAVES \TARGET [MM=mm] [HLODSCALAR=HLODScalar]

[REMOVE=remove] [LIST=list]

Syntax (1..65535) The mm id of the target

mm
Description: being accessed.
(0.1..15) This scalar scales the HLOD
region around a target. If this is set
HLODScalar to 1.0, the radius of the HLOD region
is equal to the extents of the
bounding box of the target.
remove To remove a target from the system.
list To list all the targets in the scene.

2.4.184.7 WAVES \TUNE

The \TUNE qualifier allows tuning of the appearance of the sea state.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Format: WAVES \TUNE [DEPTHMODAMPLITUDE=DepthModAmplitude]
[THICKNESSTOOPACITY=ThicknessToOpacity] [SBUMP=sBump]
SINT=sInt] [WBUMP=wBump] [WINT=wInt] [PERTURB=perturb]
[PAUSE=pause] [RUN=run] [FORCERELOAD=forceReload]

Syntax (0..128) Breakup sea state surface

Description: DepthModAmplitu intersections by adding some depth
de modulation to the near-surface.
(unit:feet).
(0..32768) Soften sea state surface
ThicknessToOpacity by adding some transparency to the
near-surface. (unit:feet).
sBump (0..1) Scale the sparkle bump map.
sInt (0..1) Scale the sparkle intensity
map.

2-434 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

wBump (0..1) Scale the wave modification

into bump map.
wInt (0..1) Scale the wave modification
into intensity map.
perturb (0..1) Scale the wave perturb.
pause Stop wave time.
run Resume wave time.
forceReload Always reload textures (for tuning
(ON/OFF) the load-time modification of sensor
MOD textures to match EP1).

2.4.184.8 WAVES \WHITECAPS

The \WHITECAPS qualifier is used to enable and control the whitecaps
effect.
Format: WAVES \WHITECAPS [TEMPLATE=template] [ENABLE=enable]
[STARTWINDSPEED=startWindspeed] [SIZESCALE=sizeScale]
[COVERAGESCALE=coverageScale] [MOTIONSCALE=motionScale]
[SHORETRANS=shoreTrans]
[NUMRENDERFTTASKS=numRenderFTTasks]
[NUMRENDERSTTASKS=numRenderSTTasks
][PRIORITYRANGE=priorityRange] [FINRANGE=finrange]
[BASERANGE=baserange] [HEIGHTSCALE=heightScale]
[RANGEMAX=rangemax]

Syntax The template model name used for

template
Description: rendering white caps.
enable Enables or disables the whitecaps
(ON/OFF) effect
startWindspeed (0..1000) The wind speed at which
the whitecaps effect starts fading in.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(in knots)
sizeScale (0..10) Scales down the whitecap
model’s geometry.
coverageScale (0..100) Increases or decreases the
number of whitecaps by adjusting
the percentage of the maximum
wave height that is required to form
a whitecap.
motionScale (0..10) Accepts values between 0
and 1 to scale the overall downwind
motion of the whitecap. This allows
the whitecap motion to be tailored to
account for sea state, or to suppress
the motion entirely.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-435

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

shoreTrans (0..1) Based upon the seastate

coastal shore transition distance this
parameter defines how close the
white caps will be generated near
the shore.
numRenderFTTasks (1..4) The number of tasks assigned
to process the fast time rendering of
whitecaps.
numRenderSTTasks (1..8) The number of tasks assigned
to process the slow time rendering of
whitecaps.
priorityRange (0..100000) Whitecaps that start
within this distance from the eye
have their motion updated each
frame. Whitecaps that start beyond
this distance will be updated at a
slower rate. The distance is
specified in feet. The default is
100000 feet
finrange (0..50000) Whitecaps that start
within this distance from the eye will
have fin polygons rendered each
frame. Whitecaps that start beyond
this distance will not have fins
polygons. The distance is specified
in feet. The default is 0 feet.
baserange (0..100000) The base range that
whitecaps will extend from the eye
not considering height. The distance
is specified in feet. The default is
1,200 feet.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

heightScale (-100..100) Scales the impact eye
height above water has on whitecap
range from eye. Zero is no effect,
negative values decrease and
positive values increase range. The
default is +12.0
rangemax (2500..100000) Provides control
over the MAXIMUM radius of the
overall whitecap area. Regardless of
baseRange and heightScale,
whitecaps will NOT be drawn beyond
this range. The default is 30,000
feet.

2-436 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.184.9 WAVES \WINDLANE

The \WINDLANE qualifier defines the wind lane texture.

Format: WAVES \WINDLANE [ENABLE=enable] [TEXTURE=texture]

[SIZE=size] [MOTION_SPEED=motion_speed]

Syntax enable
Enable/Disable wind lane texture.
Description: (ON/OFF)
texture Name of the texture file for wind
lane. It should be an 8-bit intensity
map.
size Size of the texture for wind lane in
feet.
motion_speed Texture motion speed of the wind
lane texture in feet.

2.4.184.10 WAVES \WINDTOBEAUFORT

The \WINDTOBEAUFORT qualifier defines the wind speed threshold and
the texture base name for the Beaufort scales.

Format: WAVES \WINDTOBEAUFORT [LIST=list]

[BEAUFORTSCALE=BeaufortScale] [WIND_SPEED=wind_speed]
[TEX_BASENAME=tex_basename]

Syntax
list List all scale information.
Description:
BeaufortScale (0..12) Beaufort Scale
wind_speed Wind speed (in knots) above this
number will activate the
corresponding Beaufort scale and
load its textures.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tex_basename Base name of the texture files.
Actual texture files should be named
<base_name>_<frame_num>_RGB.
tif and
<base_name>_<frame_num>_BUM
P.tif

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-437

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.185 WAVESENHANCED
The WAVESENHANCED command defines enhanced sea state
parameters.

Format: WAVESENHANCED [SEASTATE=seaState]

[MAXDISTANCETOSHORESHOALING=maxDistanceToShoreShoaling]
[BINDHEADINGWITHWIND=bindHeadingWithWind]
[BINDSPEEDWITHWIND=bindSpeedWithWind]
[LOCALWINDSPEED=localWindSpeed] [START=start]
[TRANSIT=transit] [WATERBLUR=WaterBlur]
[REFLMINLS=reflMinLS] [OCEANENABLE=oceanEnable]
[ENABLE=enable]

[\ANTIALIASING] [\CHOP] [\FROTH] [\GLARE] [\GLOBALNOISE]

[\LOD] [\SHORELINE] [\SPRAY] [\TARGET] [\WAVECONTROL]
[\WAVESHAPE] [\WHITECAP] [\WINDLANE]

Syntax (-1..6) Sea state number. Set to -1

seaState
Description: to disable sea state.
maxDistanceToSh (10..2550) Maximum distance from
oreShoaling the shoreline where shoaling effects
end.
bindHeadingWith Enables abd disables whether the
Wind wave heading is locked with the wind
(ON/OFF) heading.
bindSpeedWithWi Enable/Disable if local wind speed is
nd locked with the global wind speed.
(ON/OFF)
localWindSpeed Local wind speed in knots to be used
as an input local sea state effects.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

start (10..2550) Sea state feature starts
at this distance away from shore
(unit:feet).
transit (10..2550) The transition distance
for the sea state feature to fade in.
The distance of start+transit must be
smaller than half mile.
WaterBlur (0..1) Scalar to control water blur.
reflMinLS (0..1) Minimum amount of light
scatter reflection. For sea state 0,
this should be set to 0 to allow
screen door reflections near the
horizon. For high sea states, it
should be set to 1 so you don’t see
screen door reflections in rough
seas.

2-438 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

oceanEnable Enable/disable the ocean. Disabling

(ON/OFF) ocean turns ocean water into inland
water.
enable Enables or disables enhanced sea
(ON/OFF) states.
[\ANTIALIASING] Refer to the following sections for
[\CATSPAW] details on these qualifiers.
[\CHOP] [\FROTH]
[\GLARE]
[\GLOBALNOISE]
[\LOD]
[\SHORELINE]
[\SPRAY]
[\TARGET]
[\WAVESHAPE]
[\WHITECAP]
[\WINDLANE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-439

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.185.1 WAVESENHANCED \ANTIALIASING

The \ANTIALIASING qualifier controls wave antialiasing properties.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \ANTIALIASING [CONTROLAA=controlAA]

[CHOPAA=chopAA] [GLOBALNOISEAA=globalNoiseAA]
[CATSPAWAA=catsPawAA] [WINDLANEAA=windLaneAA]
[FROTHAA=frothAA] [SHORELINEEFFECTSAA=shorelineEffectsAA]
[WAVESHAPEAA=waveShapeAA] [WAVEHEIGHTAA=waveHeightAA]
[WHITECAPAA=whitecapAA]

Syntax controlAA (0..256.1) Global antialiasing value.

Description:
chopAA (0..16.1) Chop antialiasing value.
globalNoiseAA (0..16.1) Global noise antialiasing
value.
catsPawAA (0..16.1) Cat’s Paws’ antialiasing
value.
windLaneAA (0..16.1) Windlane antialiasing
value.
frothAA (0..16.1) Froth antialiasing value.
shorelineEffectsAA (0..100000) Fade out shoreline
effects in the distance to minimize
distractions from terrain morphing.
waveShapeAA (0.5..10.1) Wave shape antialiasing
value.
waveHeightAA (0.5..10.1) Wave height antialiasing
value.
whitecapAA (0..16.1) Whitecap antialiasing
value.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2.4.185.1 WAVESENHANCED \CATSPAW
The \CATSPAW qualifier controls catspaw properties.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \CATSPAW [GAIN=gain]

[MAPSIZESCALAR=mapSizeScalar] [DENSITY=density]
[PHASE=phase] [SPEEDSCALAR=speedScalar]

Syntax
gain (0..7) Gain on catspaw.
Description:
mapSizeScalar (0..7) Catspaw mapsize scalar.
density (0..4) Catspaw density.
phase (10..200) Catspaw phase.
speedScalar (0..2) Catspaw speed scalar, where
1 means wind speed.

2-440 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.185.2 WAVESENHANCED \CHOP

The \CHOP qualifier controls chop properties.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \CHOP [WATERTYPE=waterType]

[CHOPSTEEPNESS=chopSteepness] [INTENSITY=intensity]
[SIZESCALAR=sizeScalar] [PHASE=phase]

Syntax (0..1) Water type: 0 for inland. 1 for

waterType
Description: ocean.
chopSteepness (0..7) Gain on normal tilt caused by
chop.
intensity (0..7) Chop intensity.
sizeScalar (0..7) Chop size scalar.
phase (1..16) Chop phase time (seconds).

2.4.185.3 WAVESENHANCED \FLATTEN

The \FLATTEN qualifier provides setup parameters for water flattening.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \FLATTEN [STEEP=steep] [WIDTH=width]

[ENABLE=enable]

Syntax
steep (0..5) Steepness of the curve.
Description:
width (0..1) Width of the region where the
function will be applied.
enable Enable/disable water flattening.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.185.4 WAVESENHANCED \FROTH

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \FROTH qualifier controls froth properties.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \FROTH [WATERTYPE=waterType]

[MAPSIZESCALAR=mapSizeScalar] [PHASE=phase]
[INTENSITY=intensity]

Syntax (0..1) Water type: 0 for inland. 1 for

waterType
Description: ocean.
mapSizeScalar (0..7) Froth map size scalar.
phase (1..64) Froth phase time (seconds).
intensity (0..7) Froth intensity.

2.4.185.5 WAVESENHANCED \GLARE

The \GLARE qualifier has setup parameters for reflected glare from sun
& moon.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-441

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

Format: WAVESENHANCED \GLARE [ENABLE=enable] [SCENE=scene]

[WIDTH=width] [HALOWIDTH=haloWidth] [INTENSITY=intensity]
[RED=red] [GREEN=green] [BLUE=blue]

Syntax enable Enable/disable reflected glare from

Description: (ON/OFF) the sun & moon.
scene (dawn day dusk night) ToD scene for
the rest of the parameters.
width (0..90) Width of the full glare
(degrees).
haloWidth (0..90) Width of the glare fade off
(degrees).
intensity (0..100) Full intensity of the glare.
red (0..1) Red color of the glare.
green (0..1) Green color of the glare.
blue (0..1) Blue color of the glare.

2.4.185.6 WAVESENHANCED \GLOBALNOISE

The \GLOBALNOISE qualifier controls global noise properties.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \GLOBALNOISE

[PERTMAPSIZESCALAR=pertMapSizeScalar]
[AMPMAPSIZESCALAR=ampMapSizeScalar] [AMPLITUDE=amplitude]
[PERTURBATION=perturbation] [PHASE=phase]
[SPEEDSCALAR=speedscalar]

Syntax
pertMapSizeScalar (0..7) Global noise map size scalar.
Description:
ampMapSizeScala (0..7) Global noise map size scalar
r for amplitude modulation.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

amplitude (0..7) Global noise amplitude scale.
perturbation (0..7) Global noise normal
perturbation scale.
phase (10..200) Global noise phase.
speedscalar (0..2) Global noise speed scalar,
where 1 means wind speed.

2-442 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.185.7 WAVESENHANCED \LOD

The \LOD qualifier defines the LOD parameters of the seastate.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \LOD [HIGHRANGE=highRange]

[WAVETRANSIT=waveTransit]
[SHORELINESUBDIVISIONSENSITIVITY=
shorelineSubdivisionSensitivity]
[SHORELINESUBDIVISIONDISTANCESCALAR=shorelineSubdivisionDi
stanceScalar] [TARGETSUBDIVISIONSENSITIVITY=
targetSubdivisionSensitivity] [START=start] [TRANSIT=transit]
[PROJECTEDEYEDISTANCE=projectedEyeDistance]
[EYEDISTANCETARGET=eyeDistanceTarget]
[ZOOMTHRESHOLD=zoomThreshold]
[EYESUBDIVISIONROLLOFFSCALAR=eyeSubdivisionRolloffScalar]
[TARGETSUBDIVISIONROLLOFFSCALAR=targetSubdivisionRolloffScal
ar]
[MAXDISTANCETOSHORESHOALING=maxDistanceToShoreShoaling]

Syntax (0..1000) Sub-divide the terrain up

Description: highRange to the shortest grid post spacing
inside this range around the eye.
waveTransit (0..5000) The transition area after
the highRange area used to
attenuate wave height of the 3D
waves.
shorelineSubdivisi Scale to sub-divide more along the
onSensitivity shore line.
(0..1) Scalar to alter the maximum
shoaling range for shoreline
subdivision. If set to 1, the
shorelineSubdivisi
maximum distance considered for
onDistanceScalar
extra subdivision is equal to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

maxDistanceToShoreShoaling set by
WavesEnhanced CLI.
targetSubdivision Scale to sub-divide more around
Sensitivity targets, including the eyepoint.
start (10..2550) Sea state feature starts
at this distance away from shore
(unit:feet). Requires a reposition.
transit (10..2550) The transition distance
for the sea state feature to fade in.
The distance of start+transit must be
smaller than half mile. Requires a
reposition.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-443

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

projectedEyeDista (0..20000) The distance (feet)

nce between a vertex and eye projected
onto the terrain. This distance is to
start ramping down the subdivision
around a target as the vertex moves
away from the interest area of the
eyepoint, as projected on terrain.
Default set to 4000 feet.
eyeDistanceTarget (0..20000) The distance (feet)
between a vertex and eye. This
distance is to start ramping down the
subdivision around a target as the
vertex moves away from the
eyepoint. Default set to 4000 feet.
zoomThreshold Zoom threshold that decides when to
start using the projected eye.
eyeSubdivisionRoll (1..5) Scalar to resize size of a
offScalar vertex to allow a rapid rolloff from
high LOD region. This is set to 2.8 by
defualt which is the sum of tcells of
successive LODs lined up along a
diagonal.
targetSubdivision (1..5) Scalar to resize size of a
RolloffScalar vertex so that when target
subdivision starts to come in as the
eyepoint approaches the target, the
the lower LODs come in range before
the higher ones within a Tcell. This is
set to 1.5 by default as 1.5 is a
number greater than square root of
2, which is the maximum distance
between a vertex of level N and N-1
within a Tcell.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

maxDistanceToSh (10..2550) Maximum distance from
oreShoaling the shoreline where shoaling effects
end.

2-444 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.185.8 WAVESENHANCED \SHORELINE

The \SHORELINE qualifier controls shoreline properties.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \SHORELINE

[WATERTYPEBLENDWIDTH=waterTypeBlendWidth]
[CTBLENDWIDTH=ctBlendWidth] [SURFWIDTH=surfWidth]
[SHOALINGWIDTH=shoalingWidth] [SHOALINGGAIN=shoalingGain]
[CTBLENDGAIN=CTBlendGain] [CATSPAWSWIDTH=catspawsWidth]
[SHORELINEEFFECTSENABLE=shorelineEffectsEnable]

Syntax waterTypeBlendWi (0..7) Water type blend width.

Description: dth
ctBlendWidth (0..7) Width of CT blending near the
shore.
surfWidth (0..7) Shoreline surf width.
shoalingWidth (0..7) Shoaling width.
shoalingGain (0..7) Shoaling gain.
CTBlendGain (0..7) Blend between water color and
land CT.
CTColorSel (0..2) Select shallow water color
along the shoreline.0 = color 14. 1 =
CT color.2 = color 14 modulated by
CT
catspawsWidth (0..7) Cat’s paws’ width.
shorelineEffectsEn Enables and disables shoreline
able effects.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.185.9 WAVESENHANCED \SPRAY

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The \SPRAY qualifier controls the sea spray effect.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \SPRAY [ENABLE=enable]

[PARTICLEEFFECT=particleEffect] [MAXACTIVE=maxActive]
[STARTDELAY=startDelay]

Syntax enable Enable or disable sea spray effect.

Description: (ON\OFF)
particleEffect The particle effect define name.
maxActive (0..300) Maximum active sea sprays
allowed.
startDelay (0..1) The time delay from when a
whitecap starts to form before sea
spray can start (in percent of
whitecap duration).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-445

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.185.10 WAVESENHANCED \TARGET

The \TARGET qualifier deals with targets on the sea states surface.
These targets will have 3D waves around them.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \TARGET [MM=mm] [HLODSCALAR=HLODScalar]

[WAVETRANSITSCALAR=waveTransitScalar] [REMOVE=remove]
[LIST=list] [REMOVEALL=removeAll]

Syntax (1..65535) The mm id of the target

mm
Description: being accessed.
HLODScalar (0.05..10) This scalar scales the
HLOD region around a target. If this
is set to 1.0, the radius of the HLOD
region is equal to the extents of the
bounding box of the target.
waveTransitScalar (0..20) This scalar scales the transit
region around a target. If this is set
to 1.0, the radius of the transit
region is equal to the extents of the
bounding box of the target.
remove To remove a target from the system.
list To list all the targets in the scene.
removeAll To remove all targets in the scene.

2.4.185.11 WAVESENHANCED \WAVESHAPE

The \WAVESHAPE qualifier defines individual wave properties.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \WAVESHAPE [WATERTYPE=waterType]

[WAVENUM=waveNum] [SHAPEFACTOR=shapeFactor]

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

[WAVEHEADING=waveHeading] [LENGTH=length]
[HEIGHTSCALE=heightScale] [SPEEDSCALE=speedScale]
[WIGGLESCALE=wiggleScale] [WIGGLEAMPSCALE=wiggleAmpScale]
[WIGGLESPEEDSCALE=wiggleSpeedScale]
[WIGGLESIZESCALAR=wiggleSizeScalar]
[WIGGLEPHASE=wigglePhase] [WAVESTEEPNESS=waveSteepness]
[WAVEENABLED=waveEnabled]

Syntax (0..1) Water type: 0 for inland. 1 for

waterType
Description: ocean.
waveNum (0..3) Wave number (0-3).
shapeFactor (0..7) Wave shape 0 = sine, 7 =
trochoid.
waveHeading (-180..180) Wave heading in
degrees.

2-446 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

length (2..1180) Wave length in feet.

heightScale (0..2) Wave crest-to-trough height
scale.
speedScale (0..2) Wave speed scale.
wiggleScale (0..7) Wiggle direction scale.
wiggleAmpScale (0..7) Wiggle amplitude scale.
wiggleSpeedScale (0..2) Wiggle speed scale.
wiggleSizeScalar (1..64) Wiggle map size scalar wrt to
wavelength.
wigglePhase (1..200) Wiggle phase.
waveSteepness (0..7) Gain on how much to tilt to
surface normal.
waveEnabled Enables and disables a wave.
(ON/OFF)

2.4.185.12 WAVESENHANCED \WHITECAP

The \WHITECAP qualifier defines individual wave properties.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \WHITECAP [WATERTYPE=waterType]

[DENSITY=density] [INTENSITY=intensity]
[GATESPEEDSCALAR=gateSpeedScalar]
[EDGEMODSCALE=edgeModScale] [DURATIONSCALE=durationScale]
[PHASE=phase]
[EDGEMODSPEEDREPEATTIME=edgeModSpeedRepearTime]

Syntax (0..1) Water type: 0 for inland. 1 for

waterType
Description: ocean.
density (0..7) Whitecap density.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

intensity (0..7) Whitecap intensity.
gateSpeedScalar (0..2) Whitecap gate speed scalar.
edgeModScale (0..7) Whitecap leading edge mod
scale scalar.
durationScale (1..2) Duration for a whitecap wrt to
primary wave’s period.
phase (50..200) Whitecap phase.
edgeModSpeedRe (0..16) Whitecap leading edge mod
pearTime speed repeat time (seconds).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-447

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.185.13 WAVESENHANCED \WINDLANE

The \WINDLANE qualifier defines individual wave properties.

Format: WAVESENHANCED \WINDLANE [WATERTYPE=waterType]

[INTENSITY=intensity] [DENSITY=density]
[MAPSIZESCALAR=mapsizescalar] [PHASE=phase]

Syntax (0..1) Water type: 0 for inland. 1 for

waterType
Description: ocean.
intensity (0..7) Windlane intensity.
density (0..7) Windlane density.
mapsizescalar (0..7) Windlane map size scalar.
phase (1..64) Windlane phase time
(seconds).

2.4.186 WIND
The WIND command defines or displays wind layers.

Format: WIND [LAYER=layer] [ENABLE=enable] [ALTITUDE =altitude]

[HEADING=heading] [SPEED=speed] [REGION=region] [LIST=list]

[\VEGETATION]

Syntax (0..15) Specify the layer to which

Description: layer this wind applies.
enable Enables or disables the specified
(ON|OFF) wind layer.
altitude (-2000..60000) Sets the altitude of
this wind layer in feet.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

heading (-360..360) Sets the compass
heading of the wind in degrees.
speed Sets the speed of the wind in knots.
(0..7) Specify the weather region to
region which this wind applies; if
unspecified, region 0 is used.
list Lists all the wind layers and their
settings for the specified region.
[\VEGETATION] Refer to the following section for
details on this qualifier.

2-448 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.186.1 WIND \VEGETATION

The \VEGETATION qualifier configures wind affected vegetation
parameters.
Format: WIND \VEGETATION [ENABLE=enable]
[ROTORWASHSPEED=rotorWashSpeed]
[ROTORWASHRANGE=rotorWashRange] [TYPE=type] [SIZE=size]
[SPEED=speed] [FLEXIBILITY=flexibility]
[CENTEROFMASS=centerOfMass] [STRETCH=stretch]
[FLUTTERH=flutterH] [FLUTTERV=flutterV] [LIST=list]

Syntax enable Enable/disable wind affected

Description: (ON|OFF) vegetation.
rotorWashSpeed (0..60) Set wind velocity of rotor
wash.
rotorWashRange (1..1000) Set the rotor wash radius
of effect.
type (grass bush bareTree decidTree
pineTree palmTree) Specify
vegetation type.
size (short medium tall) Specify
vegetation size.
speed (0..2) Speed factor.
flexibility (0..1) Flexibility factor.
centerOfMass (0..1) Center of mass (0=base,
1=top).
stretch (0..0.0625) Stretch factor.
flutterH (0..15) Flutter H dampener.
flutterV (0..15) Flutter V dampener.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

list List parameters of all wind affected
vegetation types.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-449

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

2.4.187 ZOOM
The ZOOM command contains zoom settings for CT, terrain, and feature
paging environment.

Format: ZOOM [MODE=mode] [HIGHLODRANGE=highLodRange]

[INTERMEDIATEHIGHLODRANGE=intermediateHighLodRange]
[TERDEFAULTLODRANGE=terDefaultLodRange]
[FEATMODELSWITCHINZOOMSCALAR=FeatModelSwitchInZoomScala
r] [MMSWITCHINZOOMSCALAR=mmSwitchInZoomScalar]
[MAXCTLEVEL=maxCTLevel]
[VIEWCONEMAXCTLEVEL=viewConeMaxCTLevel]
[VIEWCONECTOUTOFRANGESCALE=viewConeCTOutOfRangeScale]
[NUMTIMEBASEDCTFADEFIELDS=numTimeBasedCTFadeFields]
[ZOOMLODTHRESHOLD=zoomLodThreshold]
[ZOOMINTERMEDIATELODTHRESHOLD=zoomIntermediateLodThresh
old] [MODELSWITCHINZOOMSCALAR=modelSwitchInZoomScalar]
[TERRAINOPTOVERRIDERADIUSSCALAR=terrainOptOverrideRadiusS
calar] [THEMELFEATURELODSCALAR=themelFeatureLODScalar]
[THEMELFEATUREFADEBAND=themelFeatureFadeBand]
[OFFSETCENTERPITCHSCALAR=offsetCenterPitchScalar]
[OFFSETCENTERENABLE=offsetCenterEnable]
[FASTJETOFFSETCENTERFEATURECULLERENABLE=fastJetOffsetCente
rFeatureCullerEnable]
[FASTJETLINEORIENTEDLODFEATURECULLERENABLE=fastJetLineOri
entedLODFeatureCullerEnable]
[FASTJETLINEORIENTEDLODFEATURECULLERTHRESHOLD=fastJetLin
eOrientedLODFeatureCullerThreshold]
[NUMCTPAGEOUTDELAYFIELDS=numCTPageOutDelayFields]
[MANUALTERRAINUPDATE=manualTerrainUpdate]
[MANUALELEVATIONUPDATE=manualElevationUpdate]

Syntax (Normal Helicopter Fastjet) Specifies

mode
Description: the zoom mode environment.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

highLodRange (0..500000) When in helicopter
zoom mode this is the distance in
feet from the paging center at which
the highest level of detail CT, terrain
and features are rendered.
intermediateHighL (0..500000) When in helicopter
odRange zoom mode this is the distance in
feet from the paging center at which
the highest level of detail CT, terrain
and features are rendered.

2-450 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

terDefaultLodRange (0..132000) When in helicopter

zoom mode this is the distance in
feet from the paging center at which
the highest level of detail terrain is
rendered when the zoom scalar is
less than or equal to the
zoomLodThreshold
featModelSwitchIn (0..10) When in helicopter zoom
ZoomScalar mode this is the scalar used to
adjust the feature models switch in
range. (default is 0)
mmSwitchInZoom (0..10) When in helicopter zoom
Scalar mode this is the scalar used to
adjust the moving model’s switch in
range. (default is 0)
maxCTLevel (0..31) The CT level outside of the
viewcone but within the
highLodRange range are fixed to this
LOD for 360 degrees.
viewConeMaxCTLe (0..31) The maximum page level of
vel CT when a TCell is inside the view
cone.
For CT blocks in the viewcone but
outside of the highLodRange, we can
viewConeCTOutOf
scale up its distance so that less
RangeScale
detail will be paged in to save
memory.
numTimeBasedCT (0..3600) Number of fast time fields
FadeFields to fade in time based CT texture.
Setting to 0 will use range-based
fading.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

zoomLodThreshold (0..127) When in helicopter mode,
the highLodRange range will be
applied for zoom scalars that are
greater than the
zoomintermediateLodThreshold.
zoomIntermediate (0..127) When in helicopter mode,
LodThreshold the modeled LOD range will be
applied for zoom scalars that are
equal to or less than this value.
modelSwitchInZoo (0..10) DEPRECATED - When in
mScalar helicopter zoom mode this is the
scalar used to adjust the feature
models switch in range. (default is 0)
terrainOptOverrid (0..10) scalar for terrain optimization
eRadiusScalar override radius (default is 0.6)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-451

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

themelFeatureLOD (0.01..100) In FastJet zoom mode,

Scalar controls how themel features
transition relative to eye.
themelFeatureFad (0..1) In FastJet zoom mode, themel
eBand features fade band width as a
fraction of transition range, Range is
0 – 1.
offsetCenterPitchS (0..1) In FastJet zoom mode, offset-
calar center pitch scalar: 0 is frustum
center and 1 is bottom of frustum.
offsetCenterEnable Enables (ON) or disables (OFF)
(ON/OFF) offset-center feature paging.
fastJetOffsetCenter Enables (ON) or disables (OFF)
FeatureCullerEnable offset-center feature culling.
(ON/OFF)
fastJetLineOriented Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) line-
LODFeatureCullerE oriented LOD feature culling.
nable
(ON/OFF)
fastJetLineOriented (float) Default is 200. Model radius
LODFeatureCullerT threshold for line-oriented LOD
hreshold feature culling.
numCTPageOutDel (0..30) Minimum number of fast-
ayFields time fields to delay the paging out of
CT. Applies only when in Fast Jet
mode or the common pager is
enabled.
manualTerrainUpda If Enabled, changing the zoom mode
te will not update the terrain skin pager
(ON/OFF) mode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

manualElevationUp If Enabled, changing the zoom mode
date will not update the elevation pager
(ON/OFF) mode.

2-452 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CLI Commands

2.4.187.1 ZOOM \HIRESCTPAGEMODE

The \HIRESCTPAGEMODE enables and defines the parameters used for
high-resolution CT paging mode.

Format: ZOOM \HIRESCTPAGEMODE [ENABLE=enable]

[CTRANGESCALAR=ctRangeScalar] [CTFOVSCALAR=ctFovScalar]
[CTFOVRANGESCALINGLEVEL=ctFovRangeScalingLevel]
[CTZOOMRANGESCALAR= ctZoomRangeScalar]

Syntax Enables high resolution CT paging

enable
Description: mode. This feature becomes
(ON/OFF)
effective in Helicopter mode.
ctRangeScalar (1..127) When high resolution CT
paging mode is enabled and the
viewport zoom equals 1 this
parameter defines the CT paging
range scalar applied in the view
frustrum (default is 1).
ctFovScalar (0.1..10) When high resolution CT
paging mode is enabled and the
viewport zoom equals 1 this
parameter defines the FOV scalar
applied to the view frustrum (default
is 1).
ctFovRangeScalin (0..31) When high resolution CT
gLevel paging mode is enabled and the
viewport zoom equals 1 this
parameter defines the CT level to
start applying the view frustrum
ctRangeScalar
ctZoomRangeScalar (0.01..10) When high resolution CT

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

paging mode is enabled and the
viewport zoom is greater than 1 this
parameter defines the CT paging
range scalar applied in the view
frustrum (default is 1).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 2-453

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CLI Commands

This page intentionally left blank

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2-454 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
3 Opcodes

3.1 Introduction
This chapter contains the opcodes and extended opcodes that are
available. The opcode descriptions are in numeric order with the
extended opcode descriptions last.

3.2 Opcode Tables

Table 3-1 contains:
• Opcode number and name
• Short description

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Table 3-2 contains:
• Opcode name and number
• Functional group
• Corresponding CLI command

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-1

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
3000 End of data Signals the end of opcode data in both
All
the host packet and the IG packet.
3001 Storm Enables and disables the storm, rain,
All
and lightning features.
3002 Ground fog Specifies the characteristics of the
All
ground-fog feature.
3004 Cloud Specifies characteristics of each cloud
All
layer. (legacy)
3005 Haze correction Specifies the characteristics of the
All
haze-correction feature.
3006 Time of day Specifies the characteristics of the
All
time-of-day feature.
3007 Horizon Controls the directional horizon
All
feature.
3008 Visibility Specifies the basic scene visibility. All
3009 Ambient Modifies the ambient value of the time-
All
of-day scene illumination.
300A Storm (Advanced) Provides advanced controls of multiple
All
storms and storm effects.
300C Defocus Sets the global defocus level. All
300E Advanced clouds Controls cloud Layers 0 and 1, and
(ESIG) controls solid and broken cloud layers. All
(legacy)
300F Clouds EP Controls cloud layers 0 and 1, and
All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

controls solid and broken cloud layers.
3020 Landing lights Specifies the characteristics of the
(ESIG) ownship landing-light switches.
(legacy)
3021 Strobe switch Enables or disables the ownship strobe
All
feature.
3022 Beacon switch Enables or disables the ownship
All
beacon feature.
3023 Light/polygon Specifies an intensity scalar that is to
intensity be applied to a group of lights or All
polygons.
3024 Random lights Enables or disables all lights modeled
All
switch as random-intensity feature on lights.

3-2 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
3025 Database Controls the time of year (native EP2),
or allows the host to select a new
All
database via a reset file for EP legacy
style databases.
3028 Steerable Specifies the characteristics of the
searchlight (ESIG) heading and pitch of the ownship’s
lights. (legacy)
3029 Noise control Controls the noise intensity, gain
All
value, and level value.
302A Fog color control Scales the red, green, and blue
All
components of the fog color.
302B G-level dimming Controls the optional G-level dimming
All
control effect.
3030 Height-above- Enables or disables the height-above-
All
terrain switch terrain feature.
3031 Height-above- Specifies the characteristics of a
All
terrain testpoint height-above-terrain testpoint.
3032 Height-above- Enables or disables the processing of a
terrain testpoint specific height-above-terrain testpoint. All
switch
3036 Laser range-finder Enables or disables the laser range-
All
switch finder feature.
3037 Laser range-finder Specifies the orientation of the cursor,
cursor the viewport in which the cursor is
All
active, and the moving model number
to which the cursor is bound.
3038 Laser range-finder Enables or disables the processing of a

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

All
cursor switch specific laser range-finder cursor.
3039 Fast-jet collision Enables or disables FJCD and sets
detection collision line segment parameters. All
definition
303C Laser range-finder Requests a single laser range-finder
single-response result on the specified cursor. All
request
303D Terrain following Makes a previously defined moving
All
models model follow the terrain.
3040 Moving-model Allows the host to bind a database
definition model to a motion system in order to All
produce an active moving model.
3041 Moving-model Specifies the position and orientation
control of a moving model or one of its All
submodel components.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-3

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
3042 Animation, Specifies the characteristics of the
converging traffic, animation and must be associated with
All
bird strike a moving model or its submodel
components.
3043 Viewport Specifies the characteristics of a
All
viewport.
3044 Eyepoint Specifies the position of an eyepoint. All
3046 Illumination- Enables or disables an illumination
All
source switch source.
3047 Tracer bullet Specifies the position and
All
characteristics of a tracer bullet.
3048 Illumination- Specifies the characteristics of an
All
source definition illumination source.
3049 Static model Allows the host to bind a database
definition model to a motion system in order to All
produce an active model instance.
304C Moving-model Reduces the Ethernet packet size when
update controlling large numbers of moving All
models in X/Y mode.
3050 ASCII Allows the host to specify one or more
command-line-interpreter (CLI)
commands. For network traffic, it is
better to use 3050 if the CLI is fewer
All
than 80 characters because it uses less
network bandwidth. If the user has to
send a +80 char array, the opcode
3250 is better.
3052 Video Enables/disables the video displays. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3056 External device Passes information for additional
operation devices including advanced symbology All
and open GL symbology.
3057 Viewport visibility Sets the visibility parameters for each
All
viewport independently.
3059 Dgamma Initiates the loading of a gamma curve
file (*.gam) or a colorspace matrix file
(*.cs) produced by the System
Manager into a specified channel.
3061 IRPP mode This opcode is deprecated.
All
Defines IRPP mode control data.
3062 IRPP AGC Defines the IR gain-control data for the
All
gain/level control specified IR viewport.
3063 IRPP distortion This opcode is deprecated.
All
Defines IRPP distortion values.

3-4 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
3064 IRPP polarity Defines the IR polarity used to
represent hot objects for a specified IR All
viewport.
3065 IRPP test pattern Causes a test pattern to be displayed. All
3066 EXG symbol Specifies the intensity value to apply to
intensity a specified symbol group in the
All
specified EXG viewport. It requires an
EXG with the SDF symbology option.
3067 EXG symbol Defines the EXG symbol control data,
control symbol on or off, symbol number,
group number, x and y coordinate, and
All
roll for the specified EXG viewport. It
requires an EXG with the SDF
symbology option.
3068 IR environment Sets the IR environment conditions
used to calculate IR intensity values for All
the polygons in the database.
3069 IR visibility control Defines the IR visibility control data for
All
all IR viewports.
306A IRPP configuration This opcode is deprecated.
All
Defines IRPP configuration parameters.
306B IRPP switches Enables or disables the IR response
packet: it enables the return of IRPP All
parameters/IR visibility.
306C IR support Defines the IR support-temperature
All
temperature data of the specified IR viewport.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

306D EXG target tracker This opcode is deprecated.
offset track All
Controls EXG offset target tracking.
306F IRPP viewport This opcode is deprecated.
control data Defines persistence and dead elements All
for the specified IRPP viewport.
307B Script File Specifies which script file to run by
indicating which index in the table All
should be used.
3080 Height-above- Preferred format for HAT data with
All
terrain EP2.
3081 Collision-detection This command returns collision-
response (clouds detection data calculated for a specific All
only) testpoint in collision with a cloud.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-5

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
3082 LRF Response Returns laser range-finder data
All
calculated for a specific cursor.
3084 Height-above- Processes HAT data for backward
All
terrain (ESIG) compatibility. (legacy)
3087 Enhanced laser Returns enhanced laser range-finder
range-finder data that has been calculated for a All
response specific cursor.
308D Animation Reports when an animation sequence
All
complete is completed by the IG.
308F Animation Frame Returns the current animation frame
Number number requested by host opcode All
3042.
3090 Moving-model Gives positional and rotational rates to
All
velocity a moving model.
3091 Wave Equation Command to set the wave equation
All
parameters for 3D sea states.
309A Advanced routed Controls and specifies information to
traffic control the IG concerning route recording and All
playing.
309B Advanced routed Causes the IG to build a series of
traffic request information blocks indicating the
All
routes available in the database
directory.
309C Routed traffic Causes the IG to build a route
status information block detailing the status All
of the route indicated.
309D Wind effects Controls operation of snow capability. All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

309E Generic airport Controls the host-configurable generic
All
control airport model.
309F Scattered Clouds Controls the run-time controlled
attributes associated with scattered All
clouds.
30B0 EXG thermal cuer
Defines EXG thermal cuer parameters. All
parameters
30B1 IR diurnal control Sets the ambience parameters that are
used in calculating a more accurate All
diurnal cycle for the IR intensities.
30B3 EXG symbol value Sets the symbol value for the EXG. It
requires an EXG with the advanced All
symbology option.
30B5 IRPP configuration Causes a configuration reset file to
All
select execute on the EXG post processor.

3-6 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
30B6 EXG tracking type Sets the tracking type for an EXG
select channel. It requires an EXG with All
custom target tracking software.
30B9 IRPP histogram Controls histogram intensity clipping in
All
intensity clip the specified IRPP viewport.
30BA EXG symbol Defines the EXG symbol control data,
update symbol on or off, symbol number, and
group number. It requires an EXG with All
the SDF symbology option.

30BC Target Tracker Used to pass target tracker parameters

Parameters to the TargetTracker module or the All
EXG target tracker.
30D0 Model Chaining Chains or unchains a moving model to
All
or from another moving model.
30D1 Model Switch Sets the mask index for a controllable
All
switch node.
30D4 Character Controls start, stop, and pause
Animation Control functions for animation.
3121 Advanced routed Used to provide a comprehensive list of
traffic information route files in the current database
block directory (IG to host), or used to allow All
the host to alter the route description
field in the route file (host to IG).
3122 Advanced routed Provides all information pertaining to
traffic route status an active route entry to the host. All
block

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3130 DI-Guy Character Specifies which CI-Guy character type
All
is applied to a motion system.
3131 DI-Guy Action Specifies which DI-Guy action type is
All
applied to a motion system.
3132 DI-Guy Aim Sets the DI-Guy character’s weapon
All
Angles aim and head gaze angles.
3133 DI-Guy Model Allows the host to bind a DI-Guy
Definition database model to a motion system in
All
order to produce an active DI-Guy
moving model.
3134 DI-Guy Model Controls the DI-Guy position, actions,
Update weapon selection, and head All
gaze/weapon orientation.
3140 Radar Patch Controls the rendering of the radar EP-80
Request data Desktop

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-7

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
3150 Controls IRPP dynamic noise, white
IRPP noise control All
noise, and fixed-pattern noise.
3151 IRPP AC coupling Controls IRPP AC coupling All
IRPP histogram Provides IRPP histogram collection
3152 All
parameters parameters.
IRPP AGC Provides IRPP automatic gain control
3153 All
parameters parameters.
3154 IRPP blur Controls spatial blurring by the IRPP. All
Controls optional special-function
3155 IRPP spatial filter spatial filter in the IRPP (RVP4 or All
later).
Controls mismatched and dead
IRPP degraded
3156 elements in the selected IRPP All
elements
viewport.
EXG target tracker
3157 Controls the EXG target tracker. All
control
3158 IRPP video control Controls IRPP video input and output. All
3159 IRPP persistence Controls IRPP temporal filtering All
315A IRPP zoom Controls IRPP zoom and panning All
IRPP histogram Controls IRPP histogram clipping
315B All
clipping plane planes
Controls primary and secondary blur
315C IRPP BlurEx All
filters
3166 EXG Video Controls the continuous zoom
All
continuous zoom functionality in the EXG.
3167 EXG Clear Allows the clear data to be specified.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

All
Software Render
3168 EXG Software Specifies size, position and center of
All
Render Position PIP window.
3184 Collision detection Returns collision detection (CD) data
line segment calculated for a specific CD command All
response set.
3190 Time of year Reports completion of database
All
response opcode.
3203 IRPP gain, level, Contains the IRPP gain, level, and
and noise noise values for the specified IRPP All
response viewport.
3206 EXG Target Provides the TargetTracker module
All
Tracker Response response.
3207 EXG Thermal Cuer Returns hot spot information from the
All
Response thermal cuer to the host computer.

3-8 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
302A Range Focus Controls depth of field effect. All
320B Catenary Controls and defines an instance of a
catenary by specifying the endpoints All
and length of the catenary.
320C Mirror Control Controls the pan and tilt of a viewport
All
mirror.
321A Sea States Global Controls global sea state values.
All
Control
3250 ASCIITwo Allows the host to specify one or more
command-line-interpreter (CLI)
commands. This opcode is similar to
All
the 3050 ASCII opcode, but extends
the length to better support the full
range of CLI commands.
Extended Opcodes
E000 sub Number of Requests the number of airports
All
0005/002C Airports Request available.
Number of airports Returns the number of airports
response available in response.
E000 sub Airport information Requests the airport information for
0005/002D request the airport in the index field.
Airport information Uses the index number to determine
response which specific airport data is returned.
E000 sub Load Status Determines whether paging/loading
All
0005/002F Request has completed around the eyepoint.
Load status Returns the information requested.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

response
E000 Moving model Request information on a specified
All
sub 0005/0030 request moving model.
Moving model Returns requested information on
response specified moving model.
E000 sub Tracks Control Controls a previously defined track.
All
0005/0034
E000 sub Bow wake Control Controls a previously defined Bow
All
0005/0035 wake.
E000 sub Rotorwash Controls a rotorwash effect.
All
0005/0036
E000 sub Trails Control Controls a previously defined trail.
0005/0037
E000 Plume Control Controls a previously defined plume.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-9

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
sub 0005/0038
E000 sub Model Scale Specifies a size scale to be applied to a
0005/0039 particular moving model.
E000 sub Countermeasure Controls a previously defined
All
0005/003A Control countermeasure effect.
E000 TOD Date Enables and sets the TOD date.
All
sub 0005/003C
TOD Response Returns to the host on the receipt of a
ToD request. The response is sent to
the host on the next non-crit host field
following the request.
E000 Set Tracer Defines a tracer bullet lightpoint.
All
sub 0005/003F
E000 Line-of-Sight Enables/Disables LOS feature and
sub 0005/004C Switch/Request requests that LOS response opcode be All
sent from IG.
Line-of-Sight Feeds back an LOS result to the host.
Response
E000 Line-of-Sight Defines an LOS testpoint.
All
sub 0005/004D (LOS) Testpoint
E000 Wind Layer Defines a wind layer.
All
sub 0005/0053
E000 Extended Laser Enable or disable the Extended LRF
sub 0005/005C Range-Finder Response opcode. All
Response Enable
Extended Laser Returns extended laser range-finder

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Range-Finder data for the specified cursor.
Response
E000 Extended Collision Enable or disable the Extended CD
sub 0005/005D Detection Response opcode for CDL and FJCD All
Response Enable testpoints.
Extended Collision Returns extended collision detection
Detection data for CDL and FJCD testpoints.
Response
E000 sub Set Rotorwash Simple control (enable/disable) of a
0005/0062 Ramp previously define rotorwash effect, as All
well as spin-up/spin-down.
E000 Shadow Control Controls the state of a moving model
All
sub 0005/0064 shadow.
E000 Set Weather Defines a weather region.
All
sub 0005/0065 Region

3-10 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
E000 sub Set Reference Sets the reference airport.
All
0005/0066 Airport
E000 Vector Fixed Controls the model select for a vector
sub 0005/006B Selectable Feature fixed selectable feature (FSF). All
Control
E000 IR Wavelength Controls the wavelength limits for a
All
sub 0005/006E Limits Control specified IR EMBand.
E000 Crash Indication Controls the crash indication for a
All
sub 0005/0074 Control visual channel.
E000 Ribbon Control Control the state of a moving model
All
sub 0005/007A ribbon.
E000 Sub Auto-Generic Request reposition information from
Opcode Reposition Data the IG.
0005/007D Request

E000 sub CPC Control of This opcode is ONLY supported in

0005/007E Projector Dimmer systems with a CPC device.
Value
E000 sub CPC Control of This opcode is ONLY supported in
0005/007F NVG Mode systems with a CPC device.
E000 sub CPC Control of This opcode is ONLY supported in
0005/0080 Projector Blend systems with a CPC device.
Mask
E000 sub Extended TRACKS Controls a previously defined
All
0005/0081 control track.
E000 sub CPC Control of This opcode is ONLY supported in
0005/0083 Projector Power systems with a CPC device.
E000 sub Runway Position Requests the runway position for an

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

All
0005/0085 Data Request airport and runway.
Runway Position Feeds back the runway position for the
Data Response requested airport and runway ID.
E000 sub Weather Feedback Requests weather feedback
All
0005/0086 Request
Weather Feedback Feeds back weather data to the host.
All
Response
E000 sub CPC Control of This opcode is ONLY supported in
0005/0088 Projector systems with a CPC device.
Shutdown
E000 sub CPC Control of This opcode is ONLY supported in
0005/0089 UTM Function systems with a CPC device.
E000 sub Moving Model Provides a control allowing a model to
0005/0097 Wave Bind Control be attached or detached from a All
moving wave.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-11

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
E000 sub Advanced Light Specifies an intensity scalar that is to
0005/009B and Polygon be applied to a group of lights or All
Intensity polygons.
E000 sub Advanced Light Specifies whether the selected group of
0005/009C and Polygon lights or polygons is enabled or not. All
Enable
E000 sub Advanced Light Specifies the enable, disable, and
0005/009D Animation Control override control of light point All
animation behavior
E000 sub Ground Fire Controls a previously-defined ground
All
0005/009F Control fire.
E000 sub Laser Beam End Allows laser beam demo to be run in
0005/00ED ESIG host mode.
E000 sub Ground Fire Provides additional parameters for
0005/00A0 Control controlling ground fire effects, All
supplementing subopcode 0005/009F.
E000 sub Enhanced water Defines HAT points from specified
All
0005/00A9 HAT request moving model.
Enhanced water
HAT response
E000 sub Catspaw Intensity Defines catspaw intensity from
0005/00AA Request specified moving model.
Catspaw Intensity
Response
E000 sub Laser Beam Origin Allows laser beam demo to be run in
0005/00EE ESIG host mode.
E000 sub Paged Generics Requests which auto-generics airports
All
0005/00FB Request are currently paged in.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Paged Generics Returns airport data.
All
Response
E000 sub Position Equate
All
0005/00FD
E000 Ownship Lights Specifies the characteristics of the
All
sub 000E/0022 ownship landing light lobes.
E000 Ownship Lights Specifies the OFF/ON/FLASH state of
All
sub 000E/0023 Animation the ownship landing light lobes.
E000 Ownship Lights Specifies the characteristics of the
sub 000E/0024 Movement heading and pitch of ownship lights.
All
Only lobes marked as steerable can be
moved.
E000 sub Runway Specifies the runway contamination
000E/002B All
contamination requirement.

3-12 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-1. Opcodes Listed by Number

Hexadecimal Opcode
Number Name Short Description Platform
E000 sub IG Sync Data Used to implement remote IG
Multi-IG
000E/00F9 Request synchronizations of animation effects
enabled
between remote IGs.
E000 sub IG Sync Data Used with the IG Sync Data Request Multi-IG
000E/00FA Response opcode. enabled
E000 sub Num Viewport
0005/00FC Request

Table 3-2. Opcodes Listed by Name with Related CLI Command

Opcode Opcode Related
Name Number Functional Group CLI Command Platform
Advanced Light and E000 sub
Polygon Enable 0005/009C
Advanced Light and E000 sub Lights INTENSITY All
Polygon Intensity 0005/009B
Advanced Light E000 sub Lights LIGHTPOINT All
Animation Control 0005/009D \ANIMATION
Advanced routed traffic 3122 Traffic RTPLAY All
route status block
Airport information E000 sub Airport control AIRPORT All
request/response 0005/002D
Ambient 3009 TOD TOD All
Animation complete 308D Model Control, ANIMATE All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Traffic control
Animation Frame 308F Model control, ANIMATE All
Number Traffic control
Animation, converging 3042 Model Control, ANIMATE, All
traffic, bird strike Traffic control CONVERGE
ASCII 3050 ASCII N/A All
ASCIITwo 3250 ASCII N/A All
Auto-Generic E000 Sub All
Reposition Data Opcode
Request 0005/007D
Beacon switch 3022 Beacon Switch GLARE\BEACON All
BOWWAKE control E000 Sub BOWWAKE All
Opcode
0005/0035
Catenary 320B CATENARY All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-13

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-2. Opcodes Listed by Name with Related CLI Command

Opcode Opcode Related
Name Number Functional Group CLI Command Platform
Catspaw Intensity E000 Sub
request/response Opcode
0005/00AA
Character Animation 30D4
Control
Cloud 3004 Layered Cloud CLOUDS All
Clouds (Advanced, 300E Layered Cloud CLOUDS All
ESIG)
Clouds EP 300F Layered Cloud CLOUD All
Collision-detection line 3184 Collision Detection CDL All
segment response
Collision-detection 3081 Collision Detection CDC All
response (clouds only)
Countermeasure E000 sub Special Effects COUNTERMEASU All
Control 0005/003A ER
CPC Control of NVG E000 sub Projectors CPC
Mode 0005/007F
CPC Control of E000 sub Projectors CPC
Projector Blend Mask 0005/0080
CPC Control of E000 sub Projectors CPC
Projector Power 0005/0083
CPC Control of E000 sub Projectors CPC
Projector Dimmer Value 0005/007E
CPC Control of E000 sub Projectors CPC
Projector Shutdown 0005/0088
CPC Control of UTM E000 sub Projectors CPC

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Function 0005/0089
Crash Indication E000 sub Viewport CRASH All
Control 0005/0074
Database 3025 TOY SEASON All
Defocus 300C Viewport Control DEFOCUS All
Dgamma 3059
DI-Guy character 3130 Moving Model DI-GUY All
DI-Guy action 3131 Moving Model DI-GUY All
DI-Guy aim angles 3132 Moving Model DI-GUY All
DI-Guy model definition 3133 Moving Model DI-GUY All
DI-Guy model update 3134 Moving Model DI-GUY All
End of data 3000 General Host N/A All
Control
Enhanced LRF response 3087 LRF All

3-14 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-2. Opcodes Listed by Name with Related CLI Command

Opcode Opcode Related
Name Number Functional Group CLI Command Platform
Enhanced water HAT E000 sub
request 0005/00A9
EXG clear software 3167 PP PP \SWRENDER
render
EXG continuous zoom 3166 IR IR \CONTZOOM All
EXG software render 3168 PP PP \SWRENDER
position
EXG symbol intensity 3066 IR IR \INTENSITY All
EXG symbol control 3067 IR IR |SYMBOL All
EXG symbol update 30BA IR IR \SYMBOL All
EXG target tracker 306D IR IR All
offset track
EXG target tracker 3206 Tracker Module TARGETTRACK All
response
EXG thermal cuer 30B0 IR IR \THERMALCUER All
parameters
EXG thermal cuer 3207 IR
response
Extended collision E000 sub FJCD All
detection response 0005/005D
enable
External device 3056 Symbology SYMBOLOGY All
operation
Eyepoint 3044 EYEPOINT All
Fast-jet collision 3039 Collision detection FJCD All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

detection
Fog color control 302A Visibility, Fog, Haze FOGCOLOR All
G-level dimming 302B GLEVEL All
Generic airport 309E Generic airport GENERICAIRPORT All
Ground Fire Control E000 sub GROUNDFIRE
0005/009F
Ground Fire Control E000 sub GROUNDFIRE
0005/00A0
Ground fog 3002 Visibility, Fog, Haze GFOG All
HAT switch 3030 HAT HAT ON All
HAT TP switch 3032 HAT HAT TP ENABLE All
HAT testpoint 3031 HAT HAT All
Haze correction 3005 Visibility, Fog, Haze HAZE All
Height-above-terrain 3080 HAT HAT, All
COLLISIONMASK

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-15

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-2. Opcodes Listed by Name with Related CLI Command

Opcode Opcode Related
Name Number Functional Group CLI Command Platform
Height-above-terrain 3084 HAT HAT, All
(ESIG) COLLISIONMASK
Horizon 3007 Horizon HORIZON, TOD All
Illumination-source 3048 Visibility, Fog, Haze ILLUMINATION All
definition
IG Sync Data Request E000 sub Multi-IG
000E/00F9 enabled
IG Sync Data Response E000 sub Multi-IG
000E/00FA enabled
Illumination-source 3046 Visibility, Fog, Haze ILLUMINATION All
switch
IR diurnal control 30B1 IR IR All
IR environment 3068 IR IR
IR support temperature 306C IR IR All
IR visibility control 3069 IR IR All
IR wavelength limits E000 sub Controls the All
control 0005/006E wavelength limits
IR \LIMITS
for a specified IR
EMBand.
IRPP spatial filter 3155 IR IR \CONTROL All
IRPP AC coupling 3151 IR IR All
IR \CONFIGURE
IRPP AGC gain/level 3062 IR IR All
control
IRPP AGC parameters 3153 IR IR All
IR \CONFIGURE
IRPP blur 3154 IR IR All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

IRPP blurEx 315C IR IR \CONTROL All
IRPP clipping plane 315B IR IR \CONTROL All
IRPP configuration 306A IR IR All
IRPP configuration file 30B5 IR IR \CONTROL All
select
IR All
IRPP degraded
3156 IR IR \CONFIGURE
elements
IR \CONTROL
IRPP distortion 3063 IR IR All
IRPP gain, level, and 3203 IR IR All
noise response
IRPP histogram
30B9 IR IR \CONFIGURE All
intensity clip
IRPP histogram All
3152 IR IR \CONFIGURE
parameters

3-16 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-2. Opcodes Listed by Name with Related CLI Command

Opcode Opcode Related
Name Number Functional Group CLI Command Platform
IRPP noise control 3150 IR IR All
IR \CONFIGURE
IR \CONTROL
IRPP mode 3061 IR IR All
IRPP polarity 3064 IR IR All
IRPP switches 306B IR IR All
IRPP test pattern 3065 IR IR All
IR All
IRPP video control 3158 IR
IR \CONTROL
IRPP zoom 3159 IR IR \CONTROL All
IRPP zoom pan 315A IR IR \CONTROL All
IRPP viewport control 306F IR IR All
data
Landing lights (ESIG) 3020 Ownship light
Laser Beam End E000 sub
0005/00ED
Laser Beam Origin E000 sub
0005/004D
Laser range-finder 3037 LRF All
cursor
Laser range-finder 3038 LRF All
cursor switch
Laser range-finder 3082 LRF All
response
Laser range-finder 3036 LRF All
switch

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Laser range-finder 303C LRF All
single-response request
Light and polygon 3023 Airport Controls INTENSITY, All
intensity CULTLIGHTS,
LIGHTPOINT
Line-of-Sight Testpoint E000 sub LOS All
definition 0005/004D
Load Status E000 sub Environment All
Request/Response 0005/002F
Mirror Control 320C Viewports MIRROR All
Model Chaining 30D0 Model Control BIND, UNBIND, All
CHAIN
Model switch 30D1 Model Control SWITCH All
Moving-model 3040 Model Control BIND, UNBIND, All
definition CHAIN
Moving-model control 3041 Model Control POSITION All

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-17

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-2. Opcodes Listed by Name with Related CLI Command

Opcode Opcode Related
Name Number Functional Group CLI Command Platform
Moving model E000 sub Model Control POSITION All
request/response 0005/0030
Moving-model update 304C Model Control POSITION All
Moving-model velocity 3090 Model Control VELOCITY All
Moving-Model wave E000 sub Model Control BIND All
bind 0005/0097
Noise control 3029 IR IR \CONFIGURE All
Num Viewport Request E000 sub Viewport Controls
0005/00FC
Number of Airports E000 sub Airport Controls AIRPORT All
Request/Response 0005/002C
Ownship lights E000 sub Ownship light LOBE All
000E/0022
Ownship lights E000 sub Ownship light LOBE All
000E/0023
Ownship light E000 sub Ownship light LOBE \DEFINE All
movement 000E/0024
Paged Generics E000 sub Generic Airport GENERICAIRPOR All
Request/Response 0005/00FB T
Position Equate E000 sub
0005/00FD
Radar Patch Request 3140 Radar RADAR EP-80
Desktop
Random lights switch 3024 Airport controls INTENSITY All
RANDOM
Range focus 320A Viewport Control All
Ribbon control E000 sub Special Effects RIBBON All
0005/007A

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Rotorwash E000 sub Special Effects ROTORWASH All
0005/0036
Routed traffic control 309A Traffic RTPLAY, All
(advanced) RTRECORD
Routed traffic request 309B Traffic RTPLAY All
(advanced)
Routed traffic 3121 Traffic RTPLAY All
information block
(advanced)
Routed traffic status 309C Traffic RTPLAY All

Runway contamination E000 sub Airport controls AIRPORT All

000E/002B
Runway Position Data E000 sub Generic Airport GENERICAIRPOR All
Request/Response 0005/0085 T

3-18 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-2. Opcodes Listed by Name with Related CLI Command

Opcode Opcode Related
Name Number Functional Group CLI Command Platform
Sea States 321A Sea States WAVES All
Scattered clouds 309F Layered Cloud CLOUDS All
Script file 307B Script File @, TRIGGER All
Set Reference Airport E000 sub Generic Airport GENERICAIRPOR All
0005/0066 T
Set rotorwash ramp E000 sub Special Effects ROTORWASH All
0005/0062
Set tracer E000 sub Special Effects TRACER All
0005/003F
Set weather region E000 sub Storm and Weather REGIONAL All
0005/0065 WEATHER
Shadow Control E000 sub Model Controls SHADOW
0005/0064
Static model definition 3049 Model Controls ALTER, BARY- All
CENTRIC, BIND,
CATEGORY,
CHAIN, DB,
EXTRAPOLATE,
EYEPOINT, FADE,
UNBIND,
UNCHAIN,
Steerable searchlight 3028 Ownship Light
Storm 3001 Storm and Weather STORM All
Storm (advanced) 300A Storm and Weather STORM All

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Strobe switch 3021 Ownship lights GLARE\STROBE All
Target tracker IR
30BC IR
parameters \TRACKPARAMS
Terrain following 303D Model Control BIND All
models
Time of day 3006 TOD TOD All
Time of year response 3190 Time of year SEASON All
response
Tracer bullet 3047 Special Effects
TOD Date E000 sub TOD TOD All
0005/003C
TOD response E000 sub TOD TOD All
0005/003C
TRACKS control E000 Sub Special Effects TRACKS All
Opcode
0005/0034

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-19

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Table 3-2. Opcodes Listed by Name with Related CLI Command

Opcode Opcode Related
Name Number Functional Group CLI Command Platform
TRACKS control E000 Sub Special Effects TRACKS All
Opcode
0005/0081
Vector fixed selectable E000 sub Model Control FIXED \VF All
features control 0005/006B
Video 3052 Viewport & Video VIDEO All
Viewport 3043 Viewport & Video VIEWPORT All
Viewport visibility 3057 Visibility, Fog, Haze VISIBILITY All
Visibility 3008 Visibility, Fog, Haze VISIBILITY All
Wave Equation 3091 3D Sea States WAVES All
Weather Feedback E000 sub Storm and Weather STORM
request/response 0005/0086
Wind Effects 309D Wind WIND All
Wind Layer E000 sub Wind WIND All
0005/0053

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-20 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3.3 Opcode Descriptions

Opcodes are listed numerically by number in this section. Each
opcode description consists of the following:
• Number
• Name
• Description
• Format (the opcode number is always bits 15–0 in word 0)
• Information on each field in the opcode excluding unused fields
and the opcode number
Unless otherwise stated, all distances are measured in feet and all
angles are measured in degrees.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-21

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3000
End of Data

This command signals the end of opcode data in both the host
packet and the IG packet.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000

Formats and ranges are not applicable.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-22 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3001
Storm

This command provides backward compatibility with the previous

ESIG storm command and enables and disables the storm, rain, and
lightning features.
The storm feature reduces visibility and scene ambience as the
eyepoint nears the storm center. The lightning effect produces
lightning-glare flashes at pseudorandom intervals. Since the RTS
initiates a lightning sequence immediately after lightning is enabled,
the host may completely control the occurrence of lightning by
enabling the feature for one field time whenever it is desired. The
rain (defocus) effect requires a display device that can support raster
defocus to simulate rain on the windshield. The particle rain feature
produces a falling rain effect around the eyepoint.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 P_LEVEL S_LEVEL D_LEVEL L_LEVEL 0011 0000 0000 0001

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

P_LEVEL 0–5 Specifies the particle rain level.
0 = disabled If particle rain effects are required
1 = slight without a storm, then P_LEVEL should
to be set between 1 and 5 with S_LEVEL
5 = severe set to 0.
S_LEVEL 0–5 Specifies the storm level.
0 = disabled When set to 0, both rain and lightning
1 = slight may still be selected independently,
to but no associated storm-cell models
5 = severe will be loaded.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

D_LEVEL 0–5 Specifies the rain defocus level.
0 = disabled If rain effects (without rain shafts) are
1 = slight required without a storm, then
to D_LEVEL should be set between 1 and
5 = severe 5 with S_LEVEL set to 0.
L_LEVEL 0–5 Specifies the lightning level.
0 = disabled If lightning effects (without forks) are
1 = slight required without a storm, then
to L_LEVEL should be set between 1 and
5 = severe 5 with S_LEVEL set to 0.
In order to provide correlation with
radio static, the host should toggle
L_LEVEL intensity between 0 and
1through 5 in subsequent frames each
time a lightning effect is required.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-23

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3002
Ground Fog
This command specifies the characteristics of the ground-fog
feature.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS unused 0011 0000 0000 0010
1 TRANSITION RANGE UNUSED REGION
2 RESERVED/THICKNESS THICKNESS
3 RVR

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31: Enables or disables the ground-
0 = disable fog feature.
1 = enable
bit 30: Enables or disables patchy
0 = disable ground-fog characteristics.
1 = enable
bit 29 Unused.
bit 28: Enables scaled distance format
0 = disable for thickness parameters to allow
1 = enable for negative value.
bits 27 – 24 Unused.
TRANSITION unscaled distance (16 bit) Specifies the width of the
RANGE transition range above the
ground-fog layer.
REGION 0–7 The region to which this setup of
ground fog applies. Region 0 is

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

global weather.
THICKNESS If FLAGS bit 28 is Specifies the distance from MSL
disabled, then THICKNESS to the top of the fog layer.
is only bits 15–0 of word
2, unscaled distance (16
bit) value with range 0 to
32,768 ft.
If FLAGS bit 28 is
enabled, then THICKNESS
is all 32 bits of word 2,
scaled distance (32 bit),
SB (22, –9)
RVR unscaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the runway visual range
(effective range: in the ground-fog layer
2,640,000 ft.) (maximum 250 miles).

3-24 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3004
Cloud
This command specifies the characteristics of each cloud layer.
WARNING: Clouds that are thicker than 15,000 feet may cause
an anomalous visibility / RVR below the cloud.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS LAYER 0011 0000 0000 0100
1 TOP
2 BOTTOM

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31: Enables or disables a cloud layer.
0 = disable
1 = enable
bit 30: Enables or disables scud at the
0 = disable top of the cloud layer.
1 = enable
bit 29: Enables or disables scud at the
0 = disable bottom of the cloud layer.
1 = enable
bit 28 Reserved.
Bit 27: Enables scaled distance formats
0 = disable for top and bottom parameters to
1 = enable allow for negative values.
bits 2624 Unused.
LAYER 0 1 2 Specifies which cloud layer is

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0 = cloud layer 0 selected.
1 = cloud layer 1 • Layer 0 is bottom cloud layer.
2 = cloud layer 2
• Layer 1 is middle cloud layer.
• Layer 2 is top cloud layer.
NOTE: The top of the layer must be defined above the bottom, including
the defined transition range and a five-foot buffer. If not, the IG
shifts the bottom of the lower cloud layer down, or the top of the
upper cloud layer up to guarantee a layer depth of at least five.

TOP If FLAGS bit 27 is disabled, Specifies the altitude of the top

BOTTOM unscaled distance (32 bit) or bottom of the cloud layer
(range: 0–50,000 ft) measured from mean sea level.
If FLAGS bit 27 is enabled,
scaled distance (32 bit SB
(22 –9) ) (range –2,000 to
50,000 ft)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-25

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3005
Haze Correction

This command specifies the characteristics of the haze–correction

feature.
NOTE: It is not expected that the simulator host would use this
command since the values would normally be preset in the
initialization file.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS unused 0011 0000 0000 0101
1 HAZE TOP
2 VISIBILITY RANGE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31: Enables or disables haze
0 = disable correction.
1 = enable
bit 30 Reserved.
bit 29: Specifies whether word 2
0 = invalid contains a valid visibility range
1 = valid value.
bits 28–24 Unused.
HAZE TOP unscaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the altitude of the top
(effective range: 100,000 of the haze layer measured
feet) from mean sea level.
VISIBILITY unscaled distance (32 bit) The visibility range, in feet, at

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RANGE the atmospheric ceiling when
haze correction is enabled.
This value is overridden by the
CLOUDS VISABOVE value when
a cloud layer is enabled.

3-26 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3006
Time of Day

This command specifies the characteristics of the static time-of-day

feature.
NOTE: If autocalc is turned on (see the CLI TOD command), the
sunrise/sunset times, azimuths, and max elevation are
ignored and computed using an ephemeris function instead.
The date used for this calculation is based on the Time of
Year setting (Summer or Winter as set in opcode 3025 or
the CLI SEASON command) if the TOD date is not enabled
(see the CLI TOD \DATE command). If the TOD date is
enabled, the ephemeris function will use the date specified.

NOTE: The inverse is not true. The TOD \DATE setting does not
affect the SEASON database processing (i.e., setting the
TOD /DATE to December does not set the SEASON setting
to Winter). In order to select a seasonal CT or database,
the CLI SEASON command or Opcode 3025 must be used.
The TOD /DATE command is only used in the TOD
autocalculate results.

31 30 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MODE SCENE 0011 0000 0000 0110
1 CT unused CURRENT HOUR CURRENT MIN CURRENT SEC
2 SRT unused SUNRISE HOUR SUNRISE MIN SUNRISE SEC
3 SUNRISE AZIMUTH
4 SST unused SUNSET HOUR SUNSET MIN SUNSET SEC
5 SUNSET AZIMUTH

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6 MAXIMUM ELEVATION

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MODE 0–2 Specifies whether scene, static-
0 = scene time, or continuous-time mode is
1 = static selected.
2 = continuous
SCENE 0–3 Specifies the default time of day
0= dawn when scene mode is selected.
1= day
2= dusk
3= night

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-27

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CT 0–1 Enables or disables the current
0 = disable time function for static-time and
1 = enable continuous-time modes.
CURRENT 0 – 23 Specifies the hour of the current
HOUR time.
CURRENT 0 – 59 Specifies the minute of the
MIN current time.
CURRENT 0 – 59 Specifies the second of the
SEC current time.
SRT 0–1 Enables or disables the sunrise
0 = disable time function for static-time and
1 = enable continuous-time modes.
SUNRISE 0 – 23 Specifies the hour of the sunrise
HOUR time.
SUNRISE 0 – 59 Specifies the minute of the
MIN sunrise time.
SUNRISE 0 – 59 Specifies the second of the
SEC sunrise time.
SUNRISE angle (32-bit) Specifies the azimuth angle of the
AZIMUTH sun at sunrise when static-time or
continuous-time mode is selected.
SST 0–1 Enables or disables the sunset
0 = disable time function for static-time and
1 = enable continuous-time modes.
SUNSET 0 – 23 Specifies the hour of the sunset
HOUR time.
SUNSET MIN 0 – 59 Specifies the minute of the sunset
time.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SUNSET SEC 0 – 59 Specifies the second of the sunset
time.
SUNSET angle (32-bit) Specifies the azimuth angle of the
AZIMUTH sun at sunset when static-time or
continuous-time mode is selected.
MAXIMUM angle (32-bit) Specifies the maximum sun
ELEVATION elevation angle when static-time
or continuous-time mode is
selected.

3-28 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3007
Horizon

This command controls the directional horizon feature.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 BAND INENSITY 0011 0000 0000 0111
1 HEADING
2 unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables directional
0 = disable horizon.
1 = enable
BAND bit 27: Sets intensity values for channels
0 = band ignored rendering the selected emband.
1 = use bits 24–26
Possible embands include NVG,
bits 24–26 define the
EVS, MWIR, LWIR, and EO.
emband
0 = NVG A single heading value (the last
1 = EVS one entered) applies to all
2 = MWIR embands.
3 = LWIR
4 = EO
INTENSITY 0–6 Specifies horizon intensity values
0 = zero intensity of 0–5. (0=off, 5=bright)
1 = dim intensity
to
5 = bright intensity

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

HEADING angle (32 bit) Defines heading of the directional
horizon.

NOTE: If the TOD autocalc

feature is enabled (see
CLI command TOD for
more details), this
heading is ignored and
the horizon heading is
determined by an
ephemeris function.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-29

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3008
Visibility

This command specifies the basic scene visibility.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused REGION 0011 0000 0000 1000
1 DISTANCE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

REGION 0–7 The region to which this visibility
setting applies. Region 0 is global
weather.
DISTANCE unscaled distance (32 bit) Specifies visibility distance
(effective range: (maximum 250 miles).
1.320,000 ft)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-30 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3009
Ambient
This command modifies the ambient value of the time-of-day scene
illumination.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused 0011 0000 0000 1001
1 AMBIENT SCALAR

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

AMBIENT scalar A (32 bit) Fine-tunes the ambient level of
SCALAR (range 0.0-4.0) the time-of-day scene
illumination.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-31

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

300A
Storm (Advanced)

This command provides advanced controls of multiple storms and

storm effects, as well as control over global/ownship storm effects.
• The host can request that the IG control visibility, lightning and
scene ambience as the eyepoint nears the storm center or the
host can control these features itself.
• The lightning level effect produces lightning flashes at
pseudorandom intervals. The immediate lightning flag should be
used to correlate lightning with radio static.
• The rain defocus effect requires a display device that can support
raster defocus to simulate rain on the windshield.
31 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS RAIN LVL LIGHTNING 0011 0000 0000 1010
1 WIPER SPEED STORM # CELL # RAINSHAFT SELECT
2 RESERVED
3 LATITUDE LATITUDE
4 X OFFSET/LATITUDE X OFFSET/UNUSED
5 LONGITUDE LONGITUDE
6 Y OFFSET/LONGITUDE Y OFFSET/UNUSED
7 Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE
8 STORM CLOUD BASE
9 HEADING

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31: storm Enables or disables the specified storm.
0 = disable NOTE: This field is ignored if ownship
1 = enable effect (FLAGS bit 27) is

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

enabled.
bit 30: extrapolation Enables or disables extrapolation of
0 = disable storm cell movement.
1 = enable NOTE: This field is ignored if ownship
effect (FLAGS bit 27) is
enabled.
bit 29: immediate If this flag transitions from disable to
lightning enable, an immediate lightning effect
0 = disable occurs.
1 = enable • If ownship effect (FLAGS bit 27) is
set, the lightning effect is a glare-
only effect around the eyepoint. If
not set, it is a lightning bolt sequence
associated with the specified storm.
• Use this flag to correlate radio static.

3-32 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 28: lat/long Enables or disables latitude/longitude
(CONT) 0 = disable placement of the specified storm cell.
1 = enable NOTE: This field is ignored if ownship
effect (FLAGS bit 27) is
enabled.

bit 27: ownship effect Determines which parts of the opcode

0 = apply around storm are interpreted and how they are
cell interpreted.
1 = apply around
• If the ownship flag is set, only the
ownship
rain level, lightning level, immediate
lightning flag and the wiper speed
are processed and applied in the
immediate vicinity of the ownship.
The rest of the opcode is ignored.
• If the ownship effect flag is not set,
the rest of the opcode is processed,
along with the immediate lightning
flag.
• The rain and lightning effects for a
storm cell are defined by its
STORMDEF command (a storm’s rain
level and lightning level cannot be
modified with this opcode).
bits 26-24 Unused
RAIN LEVEL 0–5 Specifies the level of rain defocus and
0 = disabled particle rain around the ownship. This
1 = slight value indexes into tables defined in the
to configuration file that fully define the rain
5 = severe effect. The rain level for a particular
storm is defined by its STORMDEF

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

command.
NOTE: This field is only used if
ownship effect (FLAGS bit 27)
is enabled.

LIGHTNING 0–5 Specifies the sustained lightning level

LEVEL 0 = disabled around the ownship. This should only be
1 = slight used if no radio static correlation is
to required. This level indexes into a table
5 = severe defined in the configuration file. The
lightning level for a particular storm is
defined by its STORMDEF command.
If lightning effects (without forks) are
required without a storm, then LIGHTING
LEVEL should be set between 1-5 with
ownship effect (FLAGS bit 27) enabled. If
radio static correlation is required, the

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-33

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

LIGHTING LEVEL should be set to 0
(disabled) and the immediate lightning
flag (FLAGS bit 29) should be used.

NOTE: This field is only used if

ownship effect (FLAGS bit 27)
is enabled.

WIPER 0–5 Specifies the wiper speed. This is used by

SPEED the IG to reduce the amount of rain
defocus from either/both storm rain or
ownship rain.
Typically there are only two wiper
speeds; the value sent should be chosen
to get the required defocus reduction.
Each step in wiper speed reduces the rain
defocus level by one step.

NOTE: This field is only used if

ownship effect (FLAGS bit 27)
is enabled.

NOTE: All of the remaining fields are ignored if ownship effect (FLAGS bit 27 is
enabled.

STORM # 0–7 Specifies the storm # for this storm. Up

to eight storms can be active at one
time—IG capacity permitting.
The IG attaches the specific storm cell
models, as defined by the Storm Cell #,
to this STORM # automatically.
CELL # 0–255 The storm cell (0–255) predefined by the
CLI STORMDEF command.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RAINSHAFT 0–255 The select value for the rainshaft
SELECT submodel.
0 disables the rainshaft, while 1-255 can
be used to select between different
rainshafts (if they are modeled).
X OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x offset of the origin of the
storm motion system from the origin of
the database (if operating in X/Y mode).
Y OFFSET Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset of the origin of the
storm motion system from the origin of
the database (if operating in X/Y mode).
Z OFFSET Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset f the origin of the
storm motion system from the origin of
the database (if operating in X/Y mode).
LATITUDE Angle (36 bit) Specifies the latitude of the storm motion

3-34 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

system relative to the ground motion
system.
LONGITUDE Angle (36 bit) Specifies the longitude of the storm
motion system relative to the ground
motion system.
ALTITUDE Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the altitude of the storm motion
system relative to MSL.
STORM Scaled distance (32 bit) If cloud correlation is not on, this
CLOUD BASE parameter specifies the height of the
storm cloud above the storm’s origin.
HEADING Angle (32 bit) Specifies the storm motion system
heading relative to the 0 if the system is
in x/y mode; or the heading relative to
true north if in latitude/longitude mode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-35

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

300C
DEFOCUS

This command sets the global defocus level. The raster and
calligraphic defocus values associated with each level are set using
the CLI DEFOCUS \LEVEL command. This defocus setting is not
directly related to the storm’s rain feature; this control sets the
defocus directly. Defocus and rain should not be used
simultaneously. This defocus applies to all channels.
NOTE: The defocus effect is only applicable to display devices that
support defocus.

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 LEVEL unused unused 0011 0000 0000 1100
1 channelmask unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

LEVEL 0–2 The global defocus level.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-36 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

300E
Advanced Clouds (ESIG)

This opcode controls cloud layers 0 and 1 and controls solid and
broken cloud layers, and is supported for legacy compatibility
reasons. For new EP2 systems, use 300F.
WARNING: Clouds that are thicker than 15,000 feet may cause an
anomalous visibility / RVR below the cloud.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS LAYER 0011 0000 0000 1110
1 unused unused
2 CLOUD VIS
3 unused TRANSITION LAYER
4 unused unused
5 RESERVED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bits 27–31 Unused.
bit 26 Specifies whether the cloud
0 = not valid transition layer is valid.
1 = valid
bit 25 Unused.
bit 24 Specifies whether the cloud
0 = not valid visibility field is valid.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1 = valid
LAYER 0–2 Specifies which cloud layer is
0 = bottom layer selected.
1 = middle layer
2 = top layer
CLOUD VIS unscaled distance (32 bit) Specifies visibility within the
Range: 10 – 1,320,000 ft cloud layer.
TRANSITION unscaled distance (16 bit) Specifies the width of the
LAYER Range: 0 – 10,000 transition zone within the top and
bottom of the selected cloud
layer.
EP2 uses the same value for both
layers, with the bottom layer
thickness always overriding the
top layer.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-37

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

300F
Clouds EP

NOTE: Only the 300F cloud opcode has been updated with the
region field, since the 3004 and 300E cloud opcodes are
only supported for legacy reasons.

WARNING: Clouds that are thicker than 15,000 feet may cause an
anomalous visibility / RVR below the cloud.

This opcode controls cloud layers 0 and 1 and controls solid and
broken cloud layers, and should be used in place of 300E and 3004
for new EP2 systems.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS LAYER 0011 0000 0000 1111
1 REGION DENSITY VISABOVE
2 CLOUD VIS
3 TOP TRANSITION LAYER BOTTOM TRANSITION LAYER
4 TOP
5 BOTTOM

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31: Enables or disables a cloud layer.
0 = disable
1 = enable
bit 30: Enables or disables scud at the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0 = disable top of the cloud layer.
1 = enable
bit 29: Enables or disables scud at the
0 = disable bottom of the cloud layer.
1 = enable
bit 28: Specifies whether the visibility
0 = invalid value in VISABOVE is valid.
1 = valid
bit 27: Enables scaled distance formats
0 = disable for top and bottom parameters to
1 = enable allow for negative values.
bit 26–24 Unused.
LAYER 0–2 Specifies which cloud layer is
0 = bottom layer selected.
1 = middle layer

3-38 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

2 = top layer
REGION Bit 31–28 The region to which this setup of
layered clouds applies. Region 0
is global weather.
DENSITY 1–8 octas The density of the broken cloud
5–7 = 5–7 octas according to octa definitions.
(broken)
NOTE: A value of 0 is invalid
cloud
and does NOT disable
8 = 8 octas (solid
the cloud layer.
overcast) cloud
VISABOVE 24 bit unscaled word Sets the between cloud and
above cloud visibility, provided
FLAG bit 28 is set.
CLOUD VIS unscaled distance (32 bit) Specifies visibility within a cloud
Range: 10–1,320,000 ft layer (maximum 250 miles).
TOP unscaled distance (16 bit) Specifies the width of the
TRANSITION Range: 0–1000 transition zone within the top and
LAYER bottom of the selected cloud
layer.
BOTTOM
TRANSITION EP2 uses the same value for both
LAYER layers, with the bottom layer
thickness always overriding the
top layer.
TOP If FLAGS bit 27 is Specifies the altitude of the
BOTTOM disabled, unscaled top/bottom of the cloud layer
distance (32 bit) measured from mean sea level.
(range: 0–50,000 ft)
If FLAGS bit 27 is
enabled, scaled distance

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(32 bit SB (22 –9) )
(range –2,000 to 50,000
ft)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-39

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3020
Landing Lights (ESIG)

This command specifies the characteristics of the landing-light

switches.
NOTE: This opcode is retained for compatibility with ESIG systems;
new systems should use extended opcode E000 sub opcode
000E/0022, Ownship Lights.

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused NUM SELECT 0011 0000 0010 0000

Field Scaling and Ranges Explanation

NUM bit 24 The lobe set to process.
0 = primary lobe set (0–7)
1 = secondary lobe set
(8–15)
SELECT 0–1 A bit mask that specifies the
0 = off active landing-light lobes.
1 = on

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-40 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3021
Strobe

This command enables or disables the ownship strobe feature. The

ownship strobe feature is represented as a white-glare effect seen in
low-visibility conditions.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0010 0001

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables the ownship
0 = disable strobe.
1 = enable

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-41

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3022
Beacon

This command enables or disables the ownship beacon feature. The

ownship beacon feature is represented as a red-glare effect seen in
low-visibility conditions.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0010 0010

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables the ownship
0 = disable beacon.
1 = enable

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-42 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3023
Light and Polygon Intensity

This command specifies an intensity scalar that is to be applied to a

group of lights or polygons. The scalar is applied to the modeled
intensity of lights or polygons. The generic airfield light group
number assignments follow the pattern of Table 2-5 and must have
FLAG bit 16 set to global (0).
NOTE: Behavior of this opcode relative to local light and poly
switches is independent of the state of the parameter
op3023EnableDisable (see Section 2.4.67.4 INTENSITY
\MASK_POLICY). In either case, the individual switch
specified by the GROUP parameter is enabled and set to the
specified intensity value. The enable/disable state and the
current intensity values of the other 31 local switches
remains unaltered.

NOTE: This opcode can only handle global light or poly switches
from 0 to 511. For new systems or direct access to global
light or poly switches 512 and above, use of E000 Sub
Opcode 0005/009B Advanced Light and Polygon Intensity is
recommended.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS 0011 0000 0010 0011
1 GROUP TYPE INTENSITY
2 MOVING MODEL NUMBER INTENSITY SCALAR

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

FLAGS bit 31 If set to 0, the GROUP will
0 = group range 0–255 control lights 0-255. If set to 1,
1 = group range 256– the GROUP will control lights
511 256-511.
bits 30–17 Unused.
bit 16 Specifies whether the light or
0 = global polygon groups to be modified
1 = local are global or local.
GROUP 0–255 Specifies which light group's or
polygon group's intensity is being
modified.
If FLAGS bit 31 = 0 the range of
lights or polygons being
controlled will be 0-255.
If FLAGS bit 31 = 1 the range of

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-43

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

lights or polygons being
controlled will be 256-511.
TYPE 1–2 Specifies whether light or
1 = lights polygon intensity scalar is to be
2 =polygons used.
INTENSITY 0–6 Intensity values 0–5 specify
0 = zero intensity generalized levels of intensity.
1 = dim intensity
Intensity value 6 specifies that
.
the value in the intensity scalar
.
field is to be used.
.
5 = bright intensity
6 = use scalar field
MOVING Integer Indicates the moving model
MODEL whose local light or polygon
NUMBER group intensity is to be modified.
Used only when bit 16 of FLAGS
is set to local (1).
INTENSITY scalar A (16 bit) Specifies the intensity scalar
SCALAR when the INTENSITY field is set
to 6.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-44 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3024
Random-Light Switch

This command enables or disables random-intensity feature on

lights. When enabled, lights having the random-intensity flag set will
be rendered at random intensity.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0010 0100

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables random
0 = disable intensity on lights that use the
1 = enable random-intensity feature.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-45

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3025
Database

This command allows the host to control the season for native EP2
style databases, or allows the host to select a new database via a
reset file for EP2 legacy style databases.

31 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS unused 0011 0000 0010 0101
1 unused SEASON INDEX unused
2 RESETFILENAME
3 RESETFILENAME
4 RESETFILENAME
5 RESETFILENAME

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS Bits 29-31 Unused.
Bit 28: Enables or disables database
0 = disable loaded response block
1 = enable processing. Entering a 1 in this
field will cause a 3190 response
block to be sent to the host when
the database has loaded.
Bit 27 Unused
Bit 26: Specifies whether RESETFILE
0 = not valid NAME is valid. This field is only
1 = valid valid for legacy EP2 style
databases.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Bits 24-25 Unused
SEASON INDEX bits 16–23 Season index
0 = summer
1 = winter
2 = spring (reserved)
3 = autumn (reserved)
4–15 = reserved

NOTE: This field is only valid

for native EP2 style
databases.

3-46 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

RESETFILENAME 16-character ASCII Specifies which reset file to load.
string The ASCII string must end with 0
(null) so that the RTS can detect
the end of the string. A file
extension of .rst is assumed.
These fields are only valid for
legacy style databases.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-47

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3028
Steerable Searchlight (Optional)

This command specifies the characteristics of the heading and pitch

of the ownship’s searchlight.
NOTE: This opcode is retained for compatibility with ESIG systems;
new systems should use extended opcode E000 sub opcode
000E/0024.

31 25 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS NUM SELECT 0011 0000 0010 1000
1 HEADING
2 PITCH

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31–25 Reserved.
NUM bit 24: The lobe set to process.
0 = primary lobe set (0–
7)
1 = secondary lobe set
(8–15)
SELECT 0–1 Specifies the active steerable
0 = off lobes. There is one bit for each
1 = on steerable lobe.
HEADING angle (32 bit) Specifies the heading or pitch of
PITCH a steerable light emanating from
the ownship.

NOTE: If a lobe has not been marked as steerable (see CLI LOBE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

\DEFINE command for more details), these two parameters
(HEADING and PITCH) are ignored.

3-48 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3029
Noise Control (Optional)

This command controls the noise intensity, gain value, and level
value for the specified viewport. Opcode 3029 is only applicable to
systems with an IRPP (XG or EXG).

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 0010 1001
1 VIEWPORT FLAGS NOISE
2 GAIN LEVEL

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the current viewport to
which the noise will be applied.
FLAGS bits 23–17 Unused
bit 16: Secondary flag: indicates that
0 = primary the opcode is directed to primary
1 = secondary gain/level/noise functions
(secondary = 0 or secondary
gain/level functions (secondary =
1).
NOISE scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the noise intensity for
0 = no noise the specified viewport. Not
1 = maximum noise applicable when the secondary
flag is set.
GAIN fraction B (16 bit) Specifies how much gain to use
(effective range: 0.0 to in the specified viewport (0.0 =
64.0) minimum gain) for primary gain

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(secondary = 0) or secondary
gain (secondary = 1)
LEVEL fraction B (16 bit) Specifies how much level to use
(effective range: –32.0 to in the specified viewport (–32.0
32.0) = minimum level) for primary
level (secondary = 0) or
secondary level (secondary = 1)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-49

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

302A
Fog Color Control

This command scales the red, green, and blue components of the
fog color.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 REGION 0011 0000 0010 1010
1 RED SCALE FACTOR GREEN SCALE FACTOR
2 BLUE SCALE FACTOR unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

REGION 0–7 The weather region to which this
setup of fog color applies. Region
0 is global weather.
RED SCALE 0–1023 Specifies the RED scale factor for
FACTOR the fog color. 0 allows no red,
and 1023 allows the full value of
the red component.
GREEN 0–1023 Specifies the GREEN scale factor
SCALE for the fog color. 0 allows no
FACTOR green, and 1023 allows the full
value of the green component.
BLUE SCALE 0–1023 Specifies the BLUE scale factor
FACTOR for the fog color. 0 allows no
blue, and 1023 allows the full
value of the blue component.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-50 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

302B
G-level Dimming Control
This opcode controls the optional G-Level Dimming effect. The
opcode provides controls for the tables defining ambient intensity
scud and fog color as a function of G-Level and control of the
current system G-Level.
NOTE: Though host updates to scalars will be stored regardless,
the G-level dimming effect will not have any effect on the
scene until enabled using the GLEVEL CLI Command.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS AMBIENT INDEX 0011 0000 0010 1011
1 COLOR INDEX SCUD INDEX UNUSED
2 AMBIENT INTENSITY SCALAR
COLOR SCALAR
SCUD SCALAR
G-LEVEL SCALAR

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 27: Specifies whether the ambient
0 = not valid intensity table field is valid. If this
1 = valid bit is set, the value specified in
the ambient intensity scalar field
is loaded into the ambient
intensity curve indicated by the
ambient intensity index field.
bit 26: Specifies whether the scud table
0 = not valid field is valid. If this bit is set, the
1 = valid value specified in the scud scalar

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

field is loaded into the scud curve
indicated by the scud index field.
bit 25: Specifies whether the color table
0 = not valid field is valid. If this bit is set, the
1 = valid value specified in the color scalar
field is loaded into the color curve
indicated by the color index field.
bit 24: Specifies whether the g-level
0 = not valid scalar field is valid. If this bit is
1 = valid set, the g-level dimming effect
will be set according to the level
specified in the g-level scalar
field.
AMBIENT 8-Bit Integer (0–10) Specifies at which point on the
INDEX ambient intensity curve the
intensity scalar should be loaded.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-51

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

COLOR 8-Bit Integer (0–10) Specifies at which point on the
INDEX color curve the color scalar should
be loaded.
SCUD INDEX 8-Bit Integer (0–10) Specifies at which point on the
scud curve the scud scalar should
be loaded.
AMBIENT scalar A (32 bit) (0.0–1.0) Specifies the ambient intensity
INTENSITY scalar value to be loaded into the
SCALAR ambient intensity table at the
location pointed to by the ambient
index.
COLOR scalar A (32 bit) (0.0–1.0) Specifies the color scalar value to
SCALAR be loaded into the color table at
the location pointed to by the
color index.
SCUD scalar A (32 bit) (0.0–1.0) Specifies the scud scalar value to
SCALAR be loaded into the scud table at
the location pointed to by the
scud index.
G-LEVEL scalar A (32 bit) (0.0–1.0) Specifies the percentage of g-
SCALAR level dimming to be applied.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-52 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3030
Height-Above-Terrain Switch

This command enables or disables the height-above-terrain feature

and requests the type of height-above-terrain response to be sent
(opcode 3080 or opcode 3084) from the IG.

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 0000 RESPONSE TYPE 0011 0000 0011 0000

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables height above
0 = disable terrain.
1 = enable
RESPONSE bit 16: Requests the regular height-
TYPE 0 = regular above-terrain response packet
1 = enhanced (opcode 3080) or the enhanced
height-above-terrain response
packet (opcode 3084).
• The regular response should
normally be used.
• The enhanced response is
supported for compatibility
reasons.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-53

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3031
Height-Above-Terrain Testpoint Request

This command specifies the characteristics of a height-above-terrain

testpoint.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 TESTPOINT # FLAGS 0011 0000 0011 0001
1 MOVING MODEL # MATERIALMASKINDEX SUBMODEL #
2 X OFFSET
3 Y OFFSET
4 Z OFFSET

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

TESTPOINT # 0–255 Specifies which testpoint is being
defined.
FLAGS bit 16 (priority) The priority bit specifies the
0–1 frequency of processing the testpoint.
0 = In the default The maximum number of testpoints
proactive mode, testpoint that may be processed per field is
processed whenever specified in the configuration file
possible. (default = 4).
1 = In the default
proactive mode, testpoint
processed every field.
bits 17–21 Unused
bit 22 (rotate) The rotate bit specifies if the x,y,z
offset is model-relative (rotated with
0–1
the model) or not.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0 = offset remains fixed.
1 = offset rotated with
the moving model.
bit 23 (MFE bypass) The MFE bypass bit controls where
0–1 the testpoint is processed when an
0 = defaults test process MFE is in the system.
to an existing MFE
The host might want to bypass an
1 = process testpoint on
MFE if it wants a result off a visual-
GP even if MFE on
generated terrain skin rather than a
system
constant-LOD MFE generated terrain
skin.
MOVING Integer Specifies the moving model to which
MODEL # the testpoint is relative.
MATERIAL 0-255 The index of a material mask setup in
MASK 0 = no material filtering the configuration file that excludes

3-54 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

INDEX 1–255 = mask index from testing polygons with certain
material values (surface material
codes).
SUBMODEL # 0–2 Specifies whether the testpoint is
0 = primary model relative to the primary model or
1–2 = secondary secondary submodel.
submodels
Secondary submodels can be used
only with the ownship (moving model
0).
X OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x offset from the origin
of the primary model or secondary
submodel to the testpoint.
Y OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset from the origin
of the primary model or secondary
submodel to the testpoint.
Z OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset from the origin
of the primary model or secondary
submodel to the testpoint.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-55

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3032
Height-Above-Terrain Testpoint Switch

This command enables or disables the processing of a specific

height-above-terrain testpoint.

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 0000 TESTPOINT # 0011 0000 0011 0010

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables an individual
0 = disable height-above-terrain testpoint.
1 = enable
TESTPOINT # 0–255 Specifies the testpoint being
enabled or disabled.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-56 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3036
Laser Range-Finder Switch

This command enables or disables the laser range-finder feature,

and requests the type of laser range-finder response to be sent
(opcode 3082 or opcode 3087) from the IG.

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 0000 RESPONSE TYPE 0011 0000 0011 0110

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables the laser
0 = disable range-finder function.
1 = enable
RESPONSE bit 16: Requests a regular laser-range-
TYPE 0 = regular finder response packet (opcode
1 = enhanced 3082) or an enhanced laser-
range-finder response packet
(opcode 3087).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-57

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3037
Laser Range-Finder Cursor

This command specifies the orientation of the cursor, the viewport in

which the cursor is active, and the moving model number to which
the cursor model is bound.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 CURSOR VIEWPORT # 0011 0000 0011 0111
1 MODEL (deprecated) FLAGS unused
2 HEADING
3 PITCH
4 ROLL (deprecated)

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CURSOR 0–7 Specifies which cursor is being
defined.
VIEWPORT # 0–15 Specifies the viewport in which to
place the cursor.
MODEL 0–511255 This field is deprecated.
FLAGS bits 15–10 Unused.
bit 9: Enables or disables the visible
0 = disable lightpoint cursor.
1 = enable
bit 8: Enables or disables the database
0 = disable image. This field is deprecated.
1 = enable

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

HEADING angle (32 bit) Specifies the heading of the
cursor.
PITCH angle (32 bit) Specifies the pitch of the cursor.
ROLL angle (32 bit) This field is deprecated.

3-58 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3038
Laser Range-Finder Cursor Switch

This command enables or disables the processing of a specific laser

range-finder cursor. When the specified cursor is enabled, laser
range-finder results are returned continually until it is disabled.

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 0000 CURSOR # 0011 0000 0011 1000

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables an individual
0 = disable laser range-finder cursor.
1 = enable
CURSOR # 0–7 Selects which cursor is enabled
or disabled.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-59

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3039
Fast-Jet Collision Detection Definition
This command enables or disables the fast jet collision detection (FJCD)
and collision detection with line segments (CDL) option. This command also
specifies the characteristics of collision detection line segment definitions.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS CMD # 0011 0000 0011 1001
1 MOVING MODEL SEGMENT # CONTROL MATERIALMASKINDEX
# MASK
2 BEGIN X OFFSET
3 BEGIN Y OFFSET
4 BEGIN Z OFFSET
5 END X OFFSET
6 END Y OFFSET
7 END Z OFFSET

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31: Enables or disables fast-jet or line
0 = disable segment collision detection
1 = enable processing.
bit 30: Clears or activates specified
0 = active command.
1 = clear
bit 29: Clears or activates specified
0 = active segment
1 = clear number.
bit 28: Enables or disables automatic

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0 = disable display
1 = enable of the collision detection indicator
(not currently available).
Bits 27–24 Unused.
CMD # 0–255 Specifies which testpoint/command
is being defined.
MOVING 0–255 Specifies the moving model to
MODEL # which the command / line segment
is relative.
SEGMENT # 0–31 Specified the line segment number
that is being defined.
CONTROL bit 15: Specifies whether to traverse only
MASK 0 = terrain the terrain model or all models (not
1 = all models currently functional).

3-60 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 14: The MFE bypass bit controls where
0 = if MFE exists, allow the testpoint is processed when an
IG to default the test MFE is in the system. The host may
processing to MFE. want to bypass an MFE if it wants a
1 = if MFE exists, make result off a visual-generated terrain
test bypass it and skin rather than a constant-LOD
instead process the MFE generated terrain skin.
testpoint on a GP.
bit 13: This bit determines whether all data
0 = enable sweep (FJCD) in this opcode applies to FJCD or
1 = no sweep (CDL) CDL. If the specified command
number was previously CDL and is
now specified as FJCD, the
command and all its associated
segments are converted to FJCD.
An FJCD command can likewise be
converted to a CDL test.
bit 12: Enables or disables the traversal of
0 = disable secondary coordinate systems (not
1 = enable currently available).
bit 11: Enables or disables animation mesh
0 = disable traversal (not currently available).
1 = enable
bits 10–8 Unused.
MATERIAL 0-255 The index of a material mask setup
MASK 0 = no material filtering in the configuration file that
INDEX 1–255 = mask index excludes from testing polygons with
certain material values (surface
material codes).
BEGIN X scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x offset from the
OFFSET origin of the moving model to the
beginning endpoint.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

BEGIN Y scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset from the
OFFSET origin of the moving model to the
beginning endpoint.
BEGIN Z scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset from the origin
OFFSET of the moving model to the
beginning endpoint.
END X scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x offset from the
OFFSET origin of the moving model to the
ending endpoint.
END Y scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset from the
OFFSET origin of the moving model to the
ending endpoint.
END Z scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset from the origin
OFFSET of the moving model to the ending
endpoint.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-61

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

303C
Laser Range-Finder Single-Response Request

This command requests a single laser range-finder result on the

specified cursor. If the enhanced laser range-finder response was
specified in opcode 3036 when laser range-finder was enabled, the
tag specified here is returned in the opcode 3087 packet. The
regular laser range-finder response (opcode 3082) does not contain
the tag field, but if specified, is returned as a single response with
valid values.
The IG responds to this request with one laser range-finder result,
after which the specified cursor is disabled.
NOTE: Specifying a single-response request on a cursor that is
currently enabled under opcode 3038 produces
unpredictable results.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused CURSOR # 0011 0000 0011 1100
1 unused TAGS

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CURSOR # 0–7 Cursor for which laser range-
finder result is to be returned.
TAGS 0–65,535 Tag to be returned in host
opcode 3087.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-62 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

303D
Terrain Following Models (TFM)
This command makes a previously defined moving model follow the
terrain. The moving model can maintain a constant orientation to
the terrain polygon directly beneath it (matching pitch and roll as
well as z), or it can keep a constant relationship to the terrain using
only z for smoother movement.
NOTE: When this opcode is sent to the IG, the z value of any
positional update opcodes (i.e., 3041, 304A, 3046) must be
invalidated by setting the z value flag to invalid (0). In
addition, if the model is being conformed, the roll and pitch
flags must be set to invalid.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 ID # RESERVED 0011 0000 0011 1101
1 MOVING MODEL # CONFORM FLAG SMOOTHING
2 Z
3 unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

ID # 0–255 Specifies an identifier for use in
enabling/disabling terrain
following.
MOVING Integer Specifies the moving model that
MODEL # will be made terrain following.

NOTE: Entering –1 disables

terrain following for the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

moving model.

CONFORM 0–1 Specifies whether the moving

0 = not conform to model uses the pitch and roll of
terrain the polygon directly beneath the
1 = conform to terrain testpoint.
When active, the user cannot
control pitch and roll of the
moving model.
SMOOTHING 1–255 The 1/x multiplier that is applied
to the delta between the previous
and current field's pitch and roll
values. A value of 10 gives a
10% correction of the delta in a
field. A value of 4 gives a 25%
correction of the delta in a field.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-63

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Z Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the Z offset from the
terrain that the model will
maintain.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-64 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3040
Moving-Model Definition
This command allows the host to bind a database model to a motion
system in order to produce an active moving model. The active
moving model can then be controlled using the 3041 opcode. The
moving model command also allows the unbinding of a moving
model, which frees the motion system. A model’s characteristics are
specified in this opcode. Fields not implemented should be filled with
zeros.
NOTE: This opcode also includes local light control, so replaces the
need for opcode 302C.

NOTE: This opcode sets all active local light groups to the same
intensity and all active local polygon groups to the same
intensity. Use host opcode 3023 to set individual local light
or polygon groups to different intensities.

Behavior of this opcode relative to local light and poly

switches is dependent on the state of the parameter
op3040EnableDisable (see Section 2.4.67.4 INTENSITY
\MASK_POLICY) as follows:

op3040EnableDisable ON - All switches specified (i.e. "1")

in the 16-bit light or poly mask are enabled and set to the
specified intensity value. All switches not specified (i.e. "0")
in the 16-bit light or poly mask are disabled but retain their
current intensity value. The other 16 switches of the 32
local switches not specified (see bits 9 and 10 of the
FLAGS2 field) are left in their current enable/disable state
and unaltered intensity values.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

op3040EnableDisable OFF - Only switches specified (i.e.
"1") in the 16-bit mask are enabled and set to the specified
intensity value. All switches not specified (i.e. "0") in the
16-bit mask and the other 16 switches not specified (see
bits 9 and 10 of the FLAGS2 field) are unaltered.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-65

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00

0 unused FLAGS 0011 0000 0100 0000

1 MODEL SLOT NUMBER MOTION SYSTEM #
2 PARENT MM # unused FLAGS2
3 LOCAL-LIGHT MASK LOCAL-LIGHT INTENSITY
4 LOCAL-POLYGON MASK LOCAL-POLYGON INTENSITY
5 RESERVED
6 RESERVED
7 RESERVED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 27 Can be used to force the model
1 = bind slow to be bound slow.
0 = Use bit 26 to select
between crit/non-crit.
bit 26: If set, instructs the RT moving
0 = foreground critical model layer to process this
model during foreground non-
1 = foreground non- critical time. This will result in
critical (default) a one field delay in the update
for this model on the GP(s).
Foreground critical bound
moving models should be
used sparingly on mission
critical models that may be
positioned close to the
eyepoint (formation models,

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

booms etc.). All other models
should be bound foreground
non-critical by default.
Bit 25 Unused. Must be set to 0.
Bit 24 Unused. Must be set to 0.
Bit 23 Unused. Must be set to 0.
bit 22: Specifies whether local-light
0 = scalar intensity is set by the scalar
1 = step or by the steps in the LOCAL-
LIGHT INTENSITY field.
FLAGS bit 21: Specifies whether local-
(CONT.) 0 = scalar polygon intensity is set by the
1 = step scalar or by the steps in the
LOCAL-POLYGON INTENSITY
field.

3-66 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 20: Enables or disables rotational
0 = disable extrapolation for a secondary
1 = enable submodel. Bit 18 or bit 19
must be enabled in order for
this bit to be enabled.
bit 19: Enables or disables rotational
0 = disable extrapolation for a primary
1 = enable model.
bit 18: Enables or disables
0 = disable translational extrapolation for
1 = enable a primary model.
bit 17: Specifies whether to bind a
0 = unbind model and a motion system.
1 = bind
bit 16: Specifies whether to process
0 = do not process bit 17.
1 = process
MODEL SLOT 0–2048 Specifies the database image
NUMBER bound to the motion system.
MOTION SYSTEM Integer Specifies the motion system
# used for this moving-model
definition.
PARENT MM # 0 = ownship Specifies the moving model to
1 = ground which this moving model is
2 = sky chained. The moving model
will be positioned relative to
the parent moving model.
Regular moving models are
valid for a parent moving
model number.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

FLAGS2 bits 1–8 and 11 Reserved.
bit 0 Specifies moving model state
0 = normal will be initialized. If this bit is
1 = clean set to clean, the control
values of the moving model
(i.e., select, submodel
rotations, submodel positions,
etc.) will be initialized to their
modeled values. The state of
the main moving model (i.e.
position, rotation and velocity)
is not affected.
FLAGS2 bit 9 The status of bit 9 determines
(CONT.) 0=lower 16 local light whether the upper or lower 16
groups bits of the 32 bit word of
1=upper 16 local light LOCAL-LIGHT MASK are used.
groups

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-67

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 10 The status of bit 10
0=lower 16 local determines whether the upper
polygon groups or lower 16 bits of the 32-bit
1=upper 16 local word of LOCAL-POLYGON
polygon groups MASK are used.

NOTE: To resolve the entire 32-bit mask, use the CLI INTENSITY
\MASK_POLICY command and set the parameter
op3040ENABLEDISABLE to ON and the parameter
USEEXTENDEDSWITCHFLAGINOPCODES to ON. In this mode, the 16
upper or lower switches not specified (see bits 9 and 10 of the
FLAGS2 field) are not altered in any way. See Note above.

LOCAL-LIGHT 0 = off Specifies the active local-light

MASK 1 = on groups for this moving model.
There is one bit for each of
the 32 local-light groups.
The status of FLAGS2 bit 9
determines whether the upper
or lower 16 bits of the 32-bit
word are used.
LOCAL-LIGHT scalar A (16 bit) or If bit 22 in the flag field = 0,
INTENSITY 16-bit integer (0–5) this field specifies the scalar
applied to the lights’ modeled
intensity. If bit 22 in the flag
field = 1, this field specifies
the light step scalar applied to
the lights’ modeled intensity.
LOCAL-POLYGON 0 = off Specifies the active local-
MASK 1 = on polygon groups for this
moving model. There is one
bit for each of the 32 local-

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

polygon groups.
The status of FLAGS2 bit 10
determines whether the upper
or lower 16 bits of the 32-bit
word are used.
LOCAL-POLYGON scalar A (16 bit) or If bit 21 in the flag field = 0,
INTENSITY 16-bit integer (0–5) this field specifies the scalar
applied to the polygons’
modeled intensity. If bit 21 in
the flag field = 1, this field
specifies the polygon step
scalar applied to the polygons’
modeled intensity.

3-68 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3041
Moving-Model and Eyepoint Control
This command specifies the position and orientation of a moving
model or one of its submodel components. A moving model does not
necessarily contain any submodel components.
31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0000 0100 0001
1 FLAGS MODEL SELECT SUBMODEL #
2 LATITUDE LATITUDE
3 X OFFSET/LATITUDE X OFFSET/unused
4 LONGITUDE LONGITUDE
5 Y OFFSET/LONGITUDE Y OFFSET/unused
6 ALTITUDE ALTITUDE
7 Z OFFSET Z OFFSET
8 HEADING
9 PITCH
10 ROLL
11 unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING Integer Specifies the primary model.
MODEL #
FLAGS bits 31–25 Unused.
bit 24: Specifies whether the roll value in
0 = invalid word 10 is valid for this primary
1 = valid model or secondary submodel.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 23: Specifies whether the pitch value
0 = invalid in word 9 is valid for this primary
1 = valid model or secondary submodel.
bit 22: Specifies whether the heading
0 = invalid value in word 8 are valid or invalid
1 = valid for this primary model or
secondary submodel.
bit 21: Specifies whether the z offset
0 = invalid values in words 6 and 7 or the
1 = valid altitude value in word 6 are valid
or invalid for this primary model or
secondary submodel. Bit 17
specifies whether this bit applies
to z offset or altitude.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-69

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 20: Specifies whether the y offset
(CONT.) 0 = invalid values or longitude values in
1 = valid words 4 and 5 are valid or invalid
for this primary model or
secondary submodel. Bit 17
specifies whether this bit applies
to y offset or longitude.
bit 19: Specifies whether the x offset
0 = invalid values or latitude values in words
1 = valid 2 and 3 are valid or invalid for this
primary model or secondary
submodel. Bit 17 specifies whether
this bit applies to x offset or
latitude.
bit 18 Reserved (set to 0)
bit 17: Specifies the translational mode. If
0 = x,y,z the flag is set to 0, words 2–7 are
1 = latitude, longitude, used as x, y, and z offsets. If the
altitude flag is set to 1, words 2–6 are
used as latitude, longitude, and
altitude values.
bit 16: If set to 0, the current
0 = extrapolation extrapolation setting is
1 = disable maintained. If set to 1,
extrapolation will be temporarily
disabled.
MODEL 0–255 Specifies the active model select.
SELECT
SUBMODEL 0–255 Specifies the secondary submodel
# 0 = primary model number. Valid submodel numbers

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1–254 = secondary are 0 to 254. The number 255 is
submodels reserved for setting of all of a
255 = Set entire model, model’s submodels to the same
both primary and model select number.
secondary to the
Note: The default in almost all
specified select.
instances should be 255, the only
time this parameter should be any
other value is when a specific sub-
model is being controlled. Please
see the information about sub-
model control in the POSITION CLI
command.
X OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x offset from the
origin of the parent moving model
to the primary model or secondary
submodel.

3-70 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Y OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset from the
origin of the parent moving model
to the primary model or secondary
submodel.
Z OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset from the
origin of the parent moving model
to the primary model or to the
secondary submodel.
LATITUDE angle (36 bit) Specifies the latitude of the
primary model or secondary
submodel relative to the ground
motion system.
LONGITUDE angle (36 bit) Specifies the longitude of the
primary model or secondary
submodel relative to the ground
motion system.
ALTITUDE scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the altitude of the
primary model or secondary
submodel relative to the ground
motion system.
HEADING angle (32 bit) Specifies the heading relative to
the +y axis of the current motion
system if the host data transfer is
in x/y mode; or the heading
relative to true north if in
latitude/longitude mode.
PITCH angle (32 bit) Specifies the pitch of the primary
model or secondary submodel.
ROLL angle (32 bit) Specifies the roll of the primary
model or secondary submodel.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-71

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3042
Animation, Converging Traffic, and Bird Strike
This command specifies the characteristics of the animation and
must be associated with a moving model or its submodel
components.
31 28 27 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 TYPE FLAGS 0011 0000 0100 0010
1 MOVING MODEL # FRAME # SUBMODEL #
2 ID ANIMATE FLAGS unused PAUSE FRAME 3
3 SCALAR

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

TYPE 1–3 Specifies which ACR feature is being
1 = animation controlled.
2 = converging traffic
3 = routed traffic
FLAGS bits 27–25 Unused.
bit 24: Specifies whether pause frame is
0 = paused frame not set identified for the animation.
1 = pause frame set
bit 23 Reserved
bit 22: Specifies the direction of an animation
0 = reverse sequence.
1 = forward
bit 21 = unload Specifies the operation animation
bit 20 = resume sequence.
bit 19 = suspend
Not all combinations of bits can be
bit 18 = stop

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

active in the same opcode; i.e., load
bit 17 = start
or unload; start, stop, or quit; and
bit 16 = load
pause or suspend combinations are
0= inactive
not compatible. For example, when
1= active
starting converging traffic it is
necessary to send one opcode with the
load flag set followed by another
opcode with the start flag set. This is
different from EP where it was possible
to send both load and start in one
opcode.
MOVING Integer Specifies the moving model.
MODEL #
FRAME # 0–255 Specifies the frame number in an
animation sequence. This field can be
used only when the animation
sequence is suspended.

3-72 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SUBMODEL # 0–255 Specifies the secondary submodel.
ID 0–63 Specifies the animation sequence or
0–3 Air Traffic converging traffic ID. If the TYPE is
0 = converging from right routed traffic, then the ID is
1 = converging from left interpreted as the routed traffic
2 = converging from above number.
3 = converging from below
4–7 Birds
4 = converging from right
5 = converging from left
6 = converging from above
7 = converging from below
8–11 Missile
8 = converging from right
9 = converging from left
10 = converging from above
11 = converging from below
12–63 Unallocated
ANIMATE bit 23–22 Unused.
FLAGS bit 21 = seq notify on Enable opcode 308F returns (current
animation sequence) each field.
bit 20 = seq notify off Disable opcode 308F returns.
bit 19 = quit Quit the animation but leave it loaded.
bit 18 = notify host end Notify the host (opcode 308D) when
the animation sequence is completed.
NOTE: The maximum # of animation responses to the host in a given frame is 32.
The responses are requested by setting bit 21 or bit 18 of the ANIMATE
FLAGS.
bit 17 = automatic unload Unload the animation when the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

animation sequence is completed.
bit 16 = step flag Specifies the operation for stepping a
0 = inactive frame in the animation sequence.
1 = active
PAUSE 0–255 Specifies on which animation frame to
FRAME # pause. Used only when FLAGS bit 24 is
set.
SCALAR scalar A (32 bit) If the TYPE is animation then the
SCALAR will increase or decrease the
speed of the animation sequence.
If the TYPE is routed traffic then the
SCALAR will increase or decrease the
time the route takes. i.e. 1 will use
the nominal time for the route, 2 will
make the route take twice as long (i.e.
it will run at half the speed).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-73

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3043
Viewport

This command specifies the characteristics of a viewport.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT # EYEPOINT # 0011 0000 0100 0011
1 FLAGS unused VIEWPORT COLOR PALETTE
SELECT
2 ZOOM SCALAR
3 HEADING
4 PITCH
5 ROLL

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT # 0–31 Specifies the viewport that is
being controlled.
EYEPOINT # 0–5 Specifies the eyepoint to which
the viewport is attached.
FLAGS bits 31–30 Unused.
bit 29 Specifies whether the VIEWPORT
0 = use VIEWPORT SELECT SELECT field should be used or
1 = ignore VIEWPORT SELECT ignored.

bit 28
0 = No blanking change Specifies whether to use bits 26
1 = Blanking change and 27 to set the blank-on-
disable for the viewport.
bit 27 Specifies whether to change the
0 = Change only this blank-on-disable on all viewports

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

viewport or only on the specified viewport.
1 = Change all viewports
bit 26 Specifies whether blank-on-
0 = off disable is enabled or disabled.
1 = on
bit 25 Specifies whether to use bit 24 to
0 = No mirror change set the mirror status for the
1 = Mirror change viewport.
bit 24 Specifies whether to mirror the
0 = not mirrored viewport. Bit 25 must be set for
1 = mirrored this bit to be valid.
VIEWPORT 0–15, 255 Specifies the viewport select, 0–
SELECT 15, to be activated for the
viewport. A value of 255 in this
field indicates that the viewport is
to be disabled.
NOTE: CIGI will only be able to support 0–7 via the CIGI view definition

3-74 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

packet (packet ID 21) since there are only 3 bits in the packet
for View Type which maps to EP2 channel (viewport) select.
COLOR 0–3 Specifies which color palette
PALETTE applies to this viewport.
• Must be 0 for EP2.
ZOOM scalar A (32 bit) Increases or decreases the
SCALAR magnification of the viewport. A
scalar of less than one increases
magnification. This number
represents one divided by the
magnification.
HEADING angle (32 bit) Specifies the viewport heading.
PITCH angle (32 bit) Specifies the viewport pitch.
ROLL angle (32 bit) Specifies the viewport roll.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-75

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3044
Eyepoint

This command specifies the position of an eyepoint.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0000 0100 0100
1 unused SUBMODEL # EYEPOINT #
2 X OFFSET
3 Y OFFSET
4 Z OFFSET

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING Integer Specifies the moving model to
MODEL # which the eyepoint is relative.
SUBMODEL 0–255 Specifies whether the eyepoint is
# 0 = primary model relative to the primary model or
1 – 255 = secondary secondary submodel. Secondary
submodels submodels can be used only with
the ownship.
EYEPOINT # 0–31 Specifies the eyepoint to which
the viewport is attached.
X OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x offset from the
origin of the parent moving
model to the primary model or
secondary submodel.
Y OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset from the
origin of the parent moving

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

model to the primary model or
secondary submodel.
Z OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset from the
origin of the parent moving
model to the primary model or
secondary submodel.

3-76 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3046
Illumination-Source Switch

This command enables or disables an illumination source.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 0000 0000 ILLUM 0011 0000 0100 0110
#

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables the
0 = disable illumination source.
1 = enable
ILLUM # 0–11 Specifies the illumination source.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-77

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3047
Tracer Bullet

This command specifies the position and characteristics of a tracer

bullet.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 BULLET # 0011 0000 0100 0111
1 X OFFSET
2 Y OFFSET
3 Z OFFSET
4 FLAGS LIGHT SIZE COLOR INDEX

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

BULLET # 0–39 Specifies the tracer bullet
number.
X OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x offset relative to
the desired motion system.
Y OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset relative to
the desired motion system.
Z OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset relative to
the desired motion system.
FLAGS bit 31: Enables or disables the tracer
0 = disable bullet.
1 = enable
bit 30: Specifies the motion system to
0 = eye which the tracer is relative.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1 = ground

bits 29–24 Unused.

LIGHT SIZE 1–3 Specifies the tracer bullet light
1 = 1.0×1.0 pixel size.
2 = 1.5×1.5 pixel
3 = 2.0×2.0 pixel
COLOR 0–1,023 Specifies the tracer color index in
INDEX the color palette.

3-78 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3048
Illumination-Source Definition (Optional)
This command specifies the characteristics of an illumination source.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 TYPE CURVE# unused ILLUM# 0011 0000 0100 1000
1 unused MOVING MODEL #
2 AZIMUTH
3 ELEVATION
4 INTENSITY SCALAR
5 HALF ANGLE
6 X OFFSET
7 Y OFFSET
8 Z OFFSET

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

TYPE 1–2 Specifies the illumination source
1 = point type (point=omni-directional,
2 = positional and positional=coned light).
CURVE # 0–15 Specifies the range attenuation
curve that is to be used by the
illumination source. See the CLI
ILLUMINATION \CURVE
command.
ILLUM # 0–11 Specifies the illumination source
that is to be defined.
MOVING Integer Specifies the moving model to
MODEL # which the illumination source is
relative.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

AZIMUTH angle (32 bit) Specifies the heading of the
illumination source.
ELEVATION angle (32 bit) Specifies the pitch of the
illumination source.
INTENSITY Fraction B (32-bit) Intensity of the illumination
SCALAR source (0.0-1.0). Positive values
only.
HALF ANGLE angle (32 bit) Specifies the half angle of this
positional illumination source in
degrees.
X OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x, y, or z offset
Y OFFSET from the moving model to the
Z OFFSET point or positional illumination
source.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-79

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3049
Static Model Definition

This command allows the host to bind a database model to a motion

system in order to produce an active model instance. The active
moving model can then be controlled using the 3041 opcode. The
opcode also allows the unbinding of a model, thus freeing the
motion system. A model’s characteristics are specified in this
opcode. Fields not implemented should be filled with zeros.
• This opcode also includes local light control, so replaces the need
for opcode 302C.
• This opcode sets all active local light groups to the same
intensity and all active local polygon groups to the same
intensity. Use host opcode 3023 to set individual local light or
polygon groups to different intensities.
This opcode is similar to 3040 in that it associates a model with a
motion system; however, the difference is that defining a model
instance as a static model is a hint to the real time that the model is
statically positioned, usually as a terrain feature, rather than being
typically in motion. (Equivalent to the BIND RENDER=SLOW CLI
command.)
Certain models, such as airports, MUST be bound with the
slow/static option; however, airplanes and other models that
typically move around should be bound with the fast/moving option
to indicate to the real time that the model’s position may be
updated more frequently. If a parked model is not going to be
moved by the host, it can optionally be bound with the slow/static
setting, for a small increase in efficiency.
NOTE: Behavior of this opcode relative to local light and poly
switches is dependent on the state of the parameter

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

op3040EnableDisable (see Section 2.4.67.4 INTENSITY
\MASK_POLICY) as follows:

op3040EnableDisable ON - All switches specified (i.e. "1")

in the 16-bit light or poly mask are enabled and set to the
specified intensity value. All switches not specified (i.e. "0")
in the 16-bit light or poly mask are disabled but retain their
current intensity value. The other 16 switches of the 32
local switches not specified (see bits 25 and 26 of the
FLAGS field) are left in their current enable/disable state
and unaltered intensity values.

op3040EnableDisable OFF - Only switches specified (i.e.

"1") in the 16-bit mask are enabled and set to the specified
intensity value. All switches not specified (i.e. "0") in the

3-80 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

16-bit mask and the other 16 switches not specified (see

bits 25 and 26 of the FLAGS field) are unaltered

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS 0011 0000 0100 1001
1 MODEL SLOT NUMBER MOTION SYSTEM #
2 LOCAL-LIGHT MASK LOCAL-LIGHT INTENSITY
3 LOCAL-POLYGON MASK LOCAL-POLYGON INTENSITY

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bits 31–27, 24-20 Reserved
bit 25 The status of bit 25 determines
0=lower 16 local light grps whether the upper or lower 16 bits
1=upper 16 local light grps of the 32 bit word of LOCAL-LIGHT
MASK are used.
bit 26 The status of bit 26 determines
0=lower 16 local polygon whether the upper or lower 16 bits
groups of the 32-bit word of LOCAL-
1=upper 16 local polygon POLYGON MASK are used.
groups
NOTE: To resolve the entire 32-bit mask, use the CLI INTENSITY
\MASK_POLICY command and set the parameter op3040EnableDisable
to ON and the parameter useExtendedSwitchFlagInOpcodes to ON. In
this mode, the 16 upper or lower switches not specified (see bits 25 and
26 of the FLAGS field) are not altered in any way. See Note above.

FLAGS bit 19: Specifies whether local-polygon

(continued) 0 = scalar intensity is set directly by scalar or
1 = step indirectly by step value in the
LOCAL-POLYGON INTENSITY field.
bit 18: Specifies whether local-light

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0 = scalar intensity is set directly by scalar or
1 = step indirectly by step value in the
LOCAL-LIGHT INTENSITY field.
bit 17: Specifies whether to bind or unbind
0 = unbind the model from the motion system.
1 = bind
bit 16: Specifies if bit 17 should be
0 = do not process processed.
1 = process
MODEL SLOT 0–2048 Specifies the database image bound
NUMBER to the motion system.
MOTION 0-999 Specifies the motion system used
SYSTEM # for this moving-model definition.
LOCAL- 0 = off Specifies the active local-light
LIGHT MASK 1 = on groups for this moving model.
There is one bit for each of the 16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-81

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

local-light groups.
LOCAL- scalar A (16 bit) or If bit 22 in the flag field = 0, this
LIGHT 16-bit integer (0–5) field specifies the scalar applied to
INTENSITY the lights’ modeled intensity. If bit
22 in the flag field = 1, this field
specifies the light step scalar
applied to the lights’ modeled
intensity.
LOCAL- 0 = off Specifies the active local-polygon
POLYGON 1 = on groups for this moving model.
MASK There is one bit for each of the 16
local-polygon groups.
LOCAL- scalar A (16 bit) or If bit 21 in the flag field = 0, this
POLYGON 16-bit integer (0–5) field specifies the scalar applied to
INTENSITY the polygons’ modeled intensity. If
bit 21 in the flag field = 1, this field
specifies the polygon step scalar
applied to the polygons’ modeled
intensity.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-82 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

304C
Moving-Model Update
This opcode is a streamlined version of opcode 3041 for moving
models and submodels in xy mode. Opcode 304C is used to reduce
the host packet size when large numbers of moving models in xy
mode are being controlled.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL# 0011 0000 0100 1100
1 FLAGS MODEL SELECT SUBMODEL #
2 X OFFSET
3 Y OFFSET
4 Z OFFSET
5 HEADING
6 PITCH
7 ROLL

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING Integer Specifies the primary model.
MODEL #
FLAGS bits 31–25 Unused.
bit 24: Specifies whether the roll value in
0 = invalid word 7 is valid for this primary
1 = valid model or secondary submodel.
bit 23: Specifies whether the pitch value in
0 = invalid word 6 is valid for this primary
1 = valid model or secondary submodel.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 22: Specifies whether the heading value
0 = invalid in word 5 is valid or invalid for this
1 = valid primary model or secondary
submodel.
bit 21: Specifies whether the z offset value
0 = invalid in word 4 is valid or invalid for this
1 = valid primary model or secondary
submodel.
bit 20: Specifies whether the y offset value
0 = invalid is valid or invalid for this primary
1 = valid model or secondary submodel.
bit 19: Specifies whether the x offset value
0 = invalid is valid or invalid for this primary
1 = valid model or secondary submodel.
bits 18–17 Unused.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-83

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 16: If set to 0, the current extrapolation
(cont.) 0 = extrapolation setting is maintained. If set to 1,
1 = disable extrapolation is temporarily
disabled.
MODEL 0–255 Specifies the active model select.
SELECT
SUBMODEL 0–255 Specifies the submodel number.
# 0 = primary model Valid submodel numbers are 0 to
1–255 = secondary 254. The number 255 is reserved
submodels for setting of all of a model’s
submodels to the same model
select number.
X OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x offset from the
origin of the parent moving model
to the primary model or secondary
submodel.
Y OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset from the
origin of the parent moving model
to the primary model or secondary
submodel.
Z OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset from the origin
of the parent moving model to the
primary model or secondary
submodel.
HEADING angle (32 bit) Specifies the heading of the primary
model or secondary submodel
relative to the +y axis of the
current motion system if the host
data transfer is in x/y mode; or the
heading relative to true north if in

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

latitude/longitude mode.
PITCH angle (32 bit) Specifies the pitch of the primary
model or secondary submodel.
ROLL angle (32 bit) Specifies the roll of the primary
model or secondary submodel.

3-84 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3050
ASCII
This command allows the host to specify one or more command-
line-interpreter (CLI) commands. The size of the opcode supports
the full range of CLI commands. The final character in an ASCII
command must be a null character (0). Any unused character fields
in the ASCII command for CLI commands shorter than 79 characters
must also be filled with the null character.
For network traffic, it is better to use 3050 if the CLI is fewer than
80 characters because it uses less network bandwidth. If the user
has to send a +80 char array, the opcode 3250 is better.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused 0011 0000 0101 0000
1 CHAR [1] CHAR [2] CHAR [3] CHAR [4]
↨↨ ↨↨ ↨↨ ↨↨ ↨↨
20 CHAR [77] CHAR [78] CHAR [79] CHAR [80]

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CHAR[N] Valid ASCII character Specifies a character in a CLI
command.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-85

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3052
VIDEO

This command enables or disables the video displays.

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X000 0000 RESERVED 0011 0000 0101 0010

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X bit 31: Enables or disables video output.
0 = disable
1 = enable

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-86 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3056
External Device Operation (Optional)

This command passes information for additional devices. These

devices include radar cards, advanced symbology generators, and
the mission functions processor cards. The devices can be either
internal or external.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 LENGTH 0011 0000 0101 0110
1 DEFINED BY THE APPLICATION DEVICE OPCODE
• •
• •
• •

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

LENGTH Length of the entire opcode The length of this opcode varies.
in bytes. Therefore, the length must be
specified by the host.
DEVICE OPCODE The external device type to
which this opcode applies.
DEFINED BY THE Refer to the EP2 OGL
APPLICATION Symbology Plugin Interface for
EP-80 manual (RCPN 964-5924-
027) for more information about
the external device controlled by
this opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-87

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3057
Viewport Visibility

This command specifies a viewport’s range, visibility scalar, range-

independent fog or scud (RIF), and MIS turn and pitch rate limits.
Other viewport parameters are specified in opcode 3043.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT # unused 0011 0000 0101 0111
1 RANGE
2 VISIBILITY SCALAR
3 RIF unused
4 RESERVED RESERVED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT # 0–31 Specifies the viewport that is being
controlled.
RANGE –1, 1000-far clip If set, this range will be used
instead of the far clip plane for
flight models, such as legacy
databases, moving models, etc. The
range must be ≥ 1000 database
units and < far clip plane. The
default is -1, disabled.
VISIBILITY scalar A (32 bit) Specifies the visibility scalar applied
SCALAR to the global visibility. Scalars
greater than one increase the
visibility. A scalar of 1.0 does not
alter the visibility.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RIF –1, 0–1023 Specifies the amount of RIF in the
0 = no fog. viewport. This value applies to all
1023 = fully fogged viewport viewports on all valid system types.
–1 = disabled feature; the
RTS-generated value is
used instead.

3-88 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3059
dGamma

This command initiates the loading of a gamma curve file (*.gam)

or a colorspace matrix file (*.cs) produced by the System Manager
into a specified channel.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 CURVE/MATRIX CHANNEL # 0011 0000 0101 1001
#
1 TYPE unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CURVE # 0–255 Selects a gam/.cs file (e.g.,
1.gam, 27.cs) to be loaded.
The following paths are searched
in order to locate the specified
file:
C:\EAS\configs,
C:\EAS\IGTuning,
C:\EAS\"release"\bin
CHANNEL # 0–31 The channel into which the file is
loaded.
TYPE 0–1 The type of file being loaded.
0 = gamma file
1 = colorspace file

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-89

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3061
IRPP Mode - deprecated

The functions in this opcode have been replaced by opcodes 3150 IRPP
Noise Control, 3151 IRPP AC Coupling, 3156 IRPP Degraded Elements,
3158 IRPP Video Control, and 3157 EXG Target Tracker Control. While this
opcode functions as it has in the past, it is recommended that new
applications use the new opcodes instead of this one.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused 0011 0000 0110 0001
1 VIEWPORT unused unused MODE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the IRPP
viewport.
MODE bits 7–0 Each bit enables or disables a
specific IRPP functionality every time
the opcode is sent. Be sure that
each bit is set for all modes that
should be enabled. If any bit is clear,
the corresponding IRPP functionality
is disabled.
bit 7: Specifies whether noise is correlated
0 = off with gain or not for the specified
1 = on IRPP viewport. Is set, manual noise
gain is overridden.
bit 6 Obsolete—do not use.
bit 5: Specifies whether AC coupling is on
0 = off or off for the specified IRPP
1 = on viewport.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 4: Specifies whether IRPP sensor pixel
0 = off mismatch is on or off for the
1 = on specified IRPP viewport.
bit 3: IRPP video on or off bit. Specifies
0 = off whether IRPP video is on or off for
1 = on the specified IRPP viewport.
bit 2: Designate target bit—application-
0 = disable specific. Bit applies only for an IRPP
1 = enable configured with hot-spot tracking.

3-90 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 1: Autotrack bit—application-specific.
0 = disable This bit is applicable only with hot-
1 = enable spot tracking hardware.
bit 0 Controls the video switcher, if
0 = no effect included (e.g., Sister RVP card), by
1 = switch to this video causing it to switch to the video from
this viewport. If the video from this
viewport is already selected, it has
no effect.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-91

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3062
IRPP AGC/Gain/Level

This command defines the IR gain–control data: auto or manual

gain, gain value, and level value for the specified IR viewport.
Opcode 3062 is only applicable to systems with an IRPP (XG or
EXG).

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 0110 0010
1 VIEWPORT FLAGS unused MODE
2 GAIN LEVEL

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the IR
viewport.
FLAGS bits 23–17 Unused
bit 16: Secondary flag: indicates that
0 = primary the opcode is directed to primary
1 = secondary gain/level/mode functions
(secondary = 0) or secondary
gain/level functions (secondary =
1).
MODE 0–2 Specifies whether automatic or
0= manual manual gain mode is used in the
1= automatic gain/level specified viewport. Not applicable
2= automatic gain only when secondary = 1.
3= automatic fast gain/
level

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

GAIN fraction B (16 bit) Specifies the gain value to use in
(effective range: 0.0 to the specified viewport (0.0 =
64.0) minimum gain) for primary gain
(secondary = 0) or secondary
gain (secondary = 1).
LEVEL fraction B (16 bit) Specifies the level value to use in
(effective range: –32.0 to the specified viewport (–32.0 =
32.0) minimum level) for primary level
(secondary = 0) or secondary
level (secondary = 1).

3-92 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3063
IRPP Distortion - deprecated

The functions in this opcode have been replaced by opcodes 3154

IRPP Blur, 3150 IRPP Noise Control, and 3156 IRPP Degraded
Elements. While this opcode functions as it has in the past, it is
recommended that new applications use the new opcodes instead of
this one.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 0110 0011
1 VIEWPORT unused FOCUS
2 FIXED PATTERN NOISE LENGTH PIXEL MISMATCH
NOISE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the IRPP
viewport.
FOCUS scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the focus value to use in
0.0–1.0 the specified IRPP viewport. If
sharpening is not enabled, 0.0 is no
blur and 1.0 is maximum blur. If
sharpening is enabled, 0.0 is
maximum sharpening, 0.5 is no
sharpening / no blur, and 1.0 is
maximum blur.
FIXED 0–100 Controls the amount of fixed-
PATTERN pattern noise displayed by the post
NOISE processor.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

NOISE 0–3 (unsigned character) Specifies the pixel length of the
LENGTH 0 = noise length of one pixel noise for the specified IRPP
1 = noise length of two viewport.
pixels
2 = noise length of four
pixels
3 = noise length of eight
pixels
PIXEL 0–100 (unsigned character) Specifies the percentage of the
MISMATCH sensor pixel mismatch variance for
the specified IRPP viewport,
representing the percentage of
maximum.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-93

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3064
IRPP Polarity

This opcode defines the IRPP polarity used to represent hot objects
for a specified IR viewport. Hot objects may be represented as
either white or black. Because thermal images are rendered white
hot, polarity inversion converts them to black hot. This opcode
controls pre-track polarity inversion, post-track polarity inversion,
and pre-gain polarity inversion.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 reserved Opcode = 0x3064
1 Viewport reserved Flags C B A

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Viewport Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number.
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
Flags bits 07 – 03: reserved
bit 02: Pre-gain Polarity (C) Controls pre-gain polarity inversion
0 = don’t invert (white hot) (EXG with RVP4 or later).
1 = invert (black hot)
bit 01: Post-track Polarity (B) Controls post-track polarity
0 = don’t invert (white hot) inversion (EXG with RVP4 or later).
1 = invert (black hot)
bit 00: Pre-track Polarity (A) Controls pre-track polarity inversion
0 = don’t invert (white hot) (XG and EXG).
1 = invert (black hot)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-94 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3065
IRPP Test Pattern
This command is used to display test patterns in the IRPP output
video. Systems with RVP4-based or later EXGs may preload and
display up to 16 customer-provided test patterns (numbers 16-31)
in addition to the built-in test patterns (numbers 1-15).

This command is used to display a test pattern on the IRPP output

video.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 reserved Opcode = 0x3065
1 Viewport reserved Pattern reserved

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Viewport Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number.
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
Pattern Integer (0 – 255) Controls the display of test
0: no test pattern patterns.
1: 8 gray bars
2: 8 gray bars reverse order
3: 10 gray bars
4: black screen
5: white screen
6-15: reserved
16-31: customer-provided test
patterns (optional)
32-255: reserved

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-95

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3066
EXG Symbol Intensity

This command specifies the intensity value to apply to a specified

symbol group in the specified EXG viewport. Opcode 3066 is only
applicable for systems with an EXG-type sensor generator with the
SDF symbology option.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 0110 0110
1 VIEWPORT unused GROUP INTENSITY

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the IRPP
viewport.
GROUP 0–255 (unsigned Specifies the number of the
character) symbol group affected by this
packet.
INTENSITY scalar A format (8 bit) Specifies the brightness of the
symbology on the IRPP display.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-96 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3067
EXG Symbol Control

This command defines the EXG symbol control data, symbol on or

off, symbol number, group number, x and y coordinate, and roll for
the specified EXG viewport. Opcode 3067 is only applicable for
systems with an EXG-type sensor generator with the SDF
symbology option.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 0110 0111
1 VIEWPORT ENABLE SYMBOL # GROUP #
2 X Y
3 ROLL
4 XSCALE
5 YSCALE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the IRPP
viewport.
ENABLE 0–255 (unsigned Selects which representation of
character) the symbol to display, with 0 =
disable.
SYMBOL # 0–255 (unsigned Symbol number, refers to a set
character) of symbols predefined on the
IRPP. Symbol 0 is reserved –
displaying symbol 0 causes all
displayed symbols to be cleared.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

GROUP # 0–255 (unsigned Group number.
character)
X scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the x coordinate (left to
right).
Y scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the y coordinate (top to
bottom).
ROLL angle (32 bit) Specifies the roll.
XSCALE scalar A (32 bit) Symbol size scale factor in x
direction.
YSCALE scalar A (32 bit) Symbol size scale factor in y
direction.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-97

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3068
IR Environment

This command sets the IR environment conditions that are used to

calculate IR intensity values for the polygons in the database.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 GROUND TEMPERATURE 0011 0000 0110 1000
1 YEAR MONTH DAY
2 LATITUDE
3 LATITUDE ATM EMBAND
4 LONGITUDE
5 LONGITUDE ATM MODEL ATM AEROSOL
6 TEMPERATURE WIND SPEED
7 HUMIDITY RAINSOAK

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

GROUND Fraction B (16-bit) The temperature of the ground
TEMPERATURE (effective range: –60.0 to in degrees Celsius.
100.0) Generally the ground
temperature will remain
constant throughout the 24-
hour period so once set, the
value need not change.
YEAR 0–2025 Specifies the year of the
simulation for IR ephemeris
effects (Local).
MONTH 1–12 Specifies the month of the
simulation for IR ephemeris
effects (Local).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

DAY 1–31 Specifies the day of the
simulation for IR ephemeris
effects (Local).
LATITUDE angle (36 bit) Specifies the latitude or
LONGITUDE longitude position of the
simulation for IR ephemeris
effects.
ATM EMBAND 1–3 Sets the EMBand. The default
1 = EVS is EVS.
2 = MWIR
3 = LWIR
ATM MODEL 1–6 These are atmospheric
1 = Tropical MODTRAN-derived model. The
2 = Mid-latitude Summer default is mid-latitude summer.
3 = Mid-latitude Winter
4 = Sub-arctic Summer
5 = Sub-arctic Winter
6 = 1976 US Std

3-98 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

ATM AEROSOL 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9 These are atmospheric
0 = None MODTRAN-derived aerosol
1 = Rural extinction types. The default is
4 = Maritime urban.
5 = Urban
8 = Fog1
9 = Fog2
TEMPERATURE fraction B (16 bit) Air temperature at ground level
(effective range: –60.0 to in degrees Celsius.
100.0)
WIND SPEED fraction B (16 bit) Wind velocity at ground level in
(effective range: 0.0 to meters per second.
75.0)
HUMIDITY fraction B (16 bit) Specifies the relative humidity.
(effective range: 0.0 to
100.0)
RAINSOAK 0–1 Rainsoak flag.
0 = no rainsoak condition
1 = rainsoak condition

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-99

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3069
IR Visibility Control

This command defines the IR visibility control data: auto or manual

visibility and a visibility value for all of the IR viewport(s). These
parameters apply to all IR viewports and are not viewport specific.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 0110 1001
1 unused unused unused MODE
2 DISTANCE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MODE 0–1 Specifies whether automatic or
0 = manual manual visibility mode is used in
1 = automatic the IR viewport(s).
DISTANCE unscaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the IR visibility distance.
(effective range: 0 to
2,640,000 feet)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-100 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

306A
IRPP Configuration - deprecated

The functions in this opcode have been replaced by opcodes 3150

IRPP Noise Control, 3152 IRPP Histogram Parameters, and 3153
IRPP AGC Parameters. While this opcode will function the same as it
has in the past, it is recommended that new applications use the
new opcodes instead of this one.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 0110 1010
1 VIEWPORT SELECT NOISE
2 XSTART XEND
3 YSTART YEND
4 unused DECAY
5 MAXIMUM GAIN DELTA MAXIMUM LEVEL DELTA
6 DISTRIBUTION CENTER INTENSITY BINS
7 LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the IR
viewport.
SELECT 0–2 Specifies the IR spectrum
0 = no bandwidth bandwidth to be used in the IR
1 = 3–5 micron bandwidth sensor simulation.
2 = 8–12 micron bandwidth
A value of 0 enables the standard
IR simulation, where a bandwidth

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

is not specified.
A value of 1 simulates an IR
sensor operating within the 3–5
micron bandwidth.
A value of 2 simulates an IR
sensor operating within the 8–12
micron bandwidth.
NOISE scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the detector–noise gain
for the specified IR viewport. A
value of 0.0 turns noise off.
XSTART scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the x starting position in
relative screen space for AGC
sampling in the specified IR
viewport. The starting coordinates
represent the upper-left corner of
the sampling area.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-101

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

XEND scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the x ending position in
relative screen space for AGC
sampling in the specified IR
viewport. The ending coordinates
represent the lower-right corner of
the sampling area.
YSTART scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the y starting position in
relative screen space for AGC
sampling in the specified IR
viewport. The starting coordinates
represent the upper-left corner of
the sampling area.
YEND scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the y ending position in
relative screen space for AGC
sampling in the specified IR
viewport. The ending coordinates
represent the lower-right corner of
the sampling area.
DECAY scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the ac coupling decay
rate for the specified IR viewport.
MAXIMUM GAIN unscaled distance (16 bit) Specifies the maximum gain delta
DELTA for AGC in the specified IR
viewport.
MAXIMUM unscaled distance (16 bit) Specifies the maximum level delta
LEVEL DELTA for AGC in the specified IR
viewport.
DISTRIBUTION scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the distribution center for
CENTER AGC in the specified IR viewport.
INTENSITY scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the number of intensity
BINS bins that will be summed together

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

to determine the gain in the
specified IR viewport.
LOWER GAIN scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the lower limit for the
LIMIT white and black areas that are
used in the calculation of gain in
the specified IR viewport.
UPPER GAIN scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the upper limit for the
LIMIT white and black areas that are
used in the calculation of gain in
the specified IR viewport.

3-102 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

306B
IRPP Switches

This command enables or disables the IR response packet; it

enables the return of IRPP parameters/IR visibility. Opcode 306B is
only applicable to systems with an IRPP (XG, IXG, or EXG).
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 0110 1011
1 unused unused unused FLAGS

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 7: Specifies whether the Extended
0 = disable EXG Thermal Cuer response
1 = enable packet (opcode 3207) is returned
to the host. This bit is applicable
only for systems with EXG
configured with thermal cuer
software.
bit 6: Specifies whether the Extended
0 = disable EXG TargetTracker response
1 = enable packet (opcode 3206) is returned
to the host. This bit is applicable
only for systems with a
TargetTracker Module or with
EXG configured with target
tracker software.
bit 2: Specifies whether the IRPP gain,
0 = disable level, and noise response packet
1 = enable (opcode 3203) is returned to the
host. This bit is only applicable

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

only for systems with an IRPP.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-103

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

306C
IR Support Temperature

This command defines the IR support–temperature value data: auto

or manual support temperature, support temperature value, and
level value for the specified IR viewport.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 0110 1100
1 SUPPORT TEMPERATURE CODE TEMPERATURE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SUPPORT 3–7 Specifies the support
TEMPERATURE 3= cool support temperature temperature code for the
CODE 4= room support temperature support temperature that is
5= warm support temperature being defined.
6= hot support temperature
7= forced–hot support
temperature
TEMPERATURE fraction B (16 bit) The support temperature of
(effective range: –60.0 to 500.0) the support-temperature
code in degrees Celsius.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-104 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

306D
EXG Target Tracker Offset Track Data - deprecated

The functions in this opcode have been replaced by opcode 3157 EXG
Target Tracker Control. While this opcode will function the same as it
has in the past, it is recommended that new applications use the new
opcode instead of this one.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS unused 0011 0000 0110 1101
1 VIEWPORT CONTRAST TYPE unused unused
2 HORIZONTAL OFFSET COORDINATES
3 VERTICAL OFFSET COORDINATES

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31–26 Unused.
bit 25: Master/slave viewport bit –
0 = disable obsolete.
1 = enable
bit 24: Offset track enable/disable bit.
0 = disable When enabled, the offset
1 = enable coordinates are specified and the
hot-spot tracker attempts to
acquire/track a target at the
specified location. When
disabled, the hot-spot tracker
attempts to acquire/track a
target at the center of the
display.
VIEWPORT 0–15 (unsigned char) Specifies the number of the IRPP

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

viewport.
CONTRAST 0–255 (unsigned char) Specifies in part what the hot-
TYPE 0 = white spot tracker attempts to
1 = black acquire/track.
2 = auto When WHITE is selected, the hot-
3–255 = unused spot tracker acquires/tracks
targets which are brighter than
the average background.
When BLACK is selected, the hot-
spot tracker acquires/tracks
targets which are darker than the
average background.
When AUTO is selected, the hot-
spot tracker acquires/tracks
either black or white targets
based on which it finds first.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-105

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CONTRAST The contrast type is independent
TYPE (cont.) of the target’s polarity. If the
polarity is black hot and contrast
type WHITE is selected, a cold
target (white polarity) is tracked.
HORIZONTAL Scalar E (32 bit) Specifies the horizontal offset in
OFFSET percent of screen space, where
COORDINATES target acquisition/tracking is
attempted.
When offset track enable (OTE) is
disabled, or a horizontal offset of
zero percent is entered, the
tracker attempts to acquire/track
a target at the horizontal center
of the display.
With OTE enabled and a nonzero
horizontal offset, the tracker
attempts to acquire/track a
target at the specified horizontal
offset.
The range is ±50.0 percent (left
to right), with −50.0 being the
left edge, +50.0 the right edge,
and 0.0 percent the horizontal
center of the display.
VERTICAL Scalar E (32 bit) Specifies the vertical offset in
OFFSET percent of screen space, where
COORDINATES target acquisition/tracking is
attempted.
When OTE is disabled, or a
vertical offset of zero percent is
entered, the tracker attempts to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

acquire/track a target at the
vertical center of the display.
With OTE enabled and a nonzero
vertical offset, the tracker
attempts to acquire/track a
target at the specified vertical
offset.
The range is ±50.0 percent
(bottom to top), with −50.0 being
the bottom edge, +50.0 the top
edge, and 0.0 percent the
vertical center of the display.

3-106 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

306F
IRPP Viewport Control Data - deprecated

The functions in this opcode have been replaced by opcodes 3064

IRPP Polarity, 3156 IRPP Degraded Elements, 3159 IRPP
Persistence, and 315A IRPP Zoom. While this opcode will function
the same as it has in the past, it is recommended that new
applications use the new opcodes instead of this one.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS unused 0011 0000 0110 1111
1 VIEWPORT SENSOR SELECT DEAD ELEMENT PERSISTENCE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bits 31–28 Unused
bit 27–26: Zoom select bits.
0 = 1x (no zoom) When enabled, the IRPP performs
1 = 2x zoom a power of 2 zoom function that
2 = 4x zoom is implemented by repeating lines
3 = 8x zoom and pixels.
bit 25: Output polarity invert bit.
0 = don’t invert When set, post-tracker polarity is
1 = invert polarity inverted. This allows a polarity
change to occur that is
transparent to the tracker and
with freeze frame enabled.
This differs from the polarity
command, which inverts polarity
prior to the tracker.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Output polarity does not disable
the polarity command; however,
only one or the other of the
polarity commands should be
used.
bit 24: Freeze frame enable/disable bit.
0 = disable When enabled, the video data in
1 = enable the output frame buffer is
displayed as fixed, despite
changing input.
VIEWPORT 0–15 (unsigned char) Specifies the number of the IRPP
viewport.
SENSOR 0–255 (unsigned char) Specifies the selected sensor
SELECT 0 = TV type for the viewport.
1 = IR
2–255 = unused

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-107

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

DEAD 0–255 (unsigned char) Specifies the number of lines to
ELEMENT 0 = off (no lines blanked) blank in the image in order to
• give the appearance of a broken
• or damaged sensor.
•
This represents the proportion of
255 = all lines blanked
the screen that is covered by
dead elements, ranging from 0%
(0) to 100% (255).
PERSISTENCE 0−255 (unsigned char) Specifies the persistence function
decay rate according to the
following formula, where F is the
number of frames for decay to
5% and P is the persistence
value:
P = 256×(0.05 ↑(1/F) )

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-108 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

307B
Script File

This opcode allows the host to specify which script file (formally
known as a reset file) to run simply by indicating which index in the
table below should be run.
The actual filename for the file is computed using a path indicated
with the CLI PATH command in entries 19 or 20. The base filename
is computed with entries 19 or 20 in the CLI FILE command. These
are combined with the actual index number to build the entire
filename.
An example is the following statements to indicate the directory and
base filename for the script file:
path 19 ..\scriptFiles
file 19 E&S.
Then, when this opcode is issued specifying index 135, the file to
run would have the following filename: ..\scriptFiles\E&S135.rst.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SCRIPT FILE INDEX 0011 0000 0111 1011

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SCRIPT FILE Integer (bits 16–31) Index of script files to run.
INDEX
Ranges 0–199 are for paths and
file specified in PATH 19 and FILE
19 respectively.
Ranges 200–999 are for paths
and files specified in PATH 20

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

and FILE 20 respectively.
Ranges 1000–1099 are for paths
and files specified in PATH 21
and FILE 15 respectively.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-109

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3080
Height Above Terrain

31 30 29 24 23 16 15 14 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 P V FLAGS MODEL TYPE 0011 0000 1000 0000
1 MESSAGE TESTPOINT # MOVING MODEL #
NUMBER
2 DISTANCE (D)
3 X NORMAL (A) Y NORMAL (B)
4 Z NORMAL (C) L MATERIAL CODE
5 HEIGHT ABOVE TERRAIN
6 HEIGHT OF TERRAIN

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

P bit 31 Proactive HAT mode. EP2 sends HAT
0 = disabled data every field without host request
1 = enabled when this mode is set in the
configuration file.
V bit 30 HAT valid flag. The host should only
0 = invalid use the data when this flag is set.
1 = valid
FLAGS bit 29 Vector feature flag. When invalid, the
0 = invalid HAT test is in an area where vector
1 = valid features may not have been valid. The
host may use this data at its discretion.
bit 28 HAT invalid due to terrain or model still
1 = HAT invalid paging over HAT testpoint.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 27 HAT invalid due to data warning:
1 = HAT invalid altitude outside valid range (typically –
2000 to 33,350) or bad Z on plane
equation.
FLAGS bit 26 HAT invalid due to reposition.
(CONT) 1 = HAT invalid
bit 25 Unused.
bit 24 HAT held flag. When “HAT held” this
indicates that the HAT return is being
1 = HAT held
held at the last value prior to the
0 = normal HAT
season changing. This is only valid
when the CLI>HAT \CONFIG
hatSeasonHold flag is enabled.
MODEL TYPE bits 17–16: In EP2, everything is a moving model.
0 = moving model

3-110 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MESSAGE 0–255 The eight least-significant bits of the
NUMBER message number from the host packet
that most recently made a HAT request
for this testpoint ID.
This only has meaning when the P (bit
31) value is not set.
NOTE: Depending on Host
request and IG processing timing, the
message number coming back will not
necessarily correspond to the host
message that requested the test
leading to this result. It is only the
most recent request message number
for this testpoint ID.

TESTPOINT 0–255 Specifies which testpoint is associated

# with the height-above-terrain data
being returned.
MOVING EP: Integer Specifies the moving model found
MODEL # 0 = ownship directly below the testpoint.
1 = terrain
2 & above = moving
model
DISTANCE scaled distance (32 bit) This is the perpendicular distance D
used in the plane equation from the
plane of the polygon directly below the
testpoint, to the origin of the
coordinate system.
The origin of the equation is the local
origin of the moving model.
X NORMAL fraction A (16 bit) Specifies the x component of the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

polygon normal.
Y NORMAL fraction A (16 bit) Specifies the y component of the
polygon normal.
Z NORMAL fraction A (16 bit) Specifies the z component of the
polygon normal.
L 1 = polygon In EP2, all data is returned at the
polygon level.
MATERIAL 0–511 Specifies the type of polygon that the
CODE testpoint is directly above.
HEIGHT scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the vertical distance from the
ABOVE polygon to the testpoint.
TERRAIN
HEIGHT OF scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the height of the polygon
TERRAIN relative to mean sea level.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-111

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3081
Collision-Detection Response (Clouds only)
This command returns collision-detection data calculated for a
specific testpoint in collision with a cloud. The testpoints will be
defined and set up in the initialization file.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0000 1000 0001

1 HOST MESSAGE TESTPOINT # CD CODE

#

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING Integer Specifies the moving model that
MODEL # contains the object with which the
testpoint collided.
HOST 0–255 Specifies the eight least significant
MESSAGE # bits of the message number from
the last host packet received.
TESTPOINT 0 For EP2, the testpoint # is always
# 0 and corresponds to the eyepoint.
CD CODE 0–2048 Specifies the type of cloud with
0 = no collision which the testpoint collided.
1–2048 = cloud type
• Cumulus moderate
• Cumulus severe
• Cumulus congestus moderate
• Cumulus congestus severe
• Cirrus
• Cumulonimbus moderate

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

• Cumulonimbus severe
• Stratus

3-112 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3082
Laser Range-Finder Response
This command returns laser range-finder data calculated for a
specific cursor.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0000 1000 0010
1 unused CURSOR # unused
2 RANGE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING Integer Specifies the moving model that
MODEL # 0 = ownship was hit by the cursor.
1 = terrain
2 & above = moving model
CURSOR # 0–7 Specifies which cursor is
associated with the laser range-
finder data being returned.
RANGE Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the distance from the
eyepoint to the moving model that
was hit by the cursor. If the
RANGE is set to –1, the data being
returned is invalid.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-113

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3084
Height-Above-Terrain (ESIG)

Height above/of terrain should preferably be sent to the host in the

3080 form; however, for backward compatibility this opcode is
supported.

31 24 23 16 15 14 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS MODEL TYPE 0011 0000 1000 0100
1 MESSAGE # TESTPOINT # MOVING MODEL #
2 DISTANCE (D)
3 X NORMAL (A) Y NORMAL (B)
4 Z NORMAL (C) L MATERIAL CODE
5 HEIGHT ABOVE TERRAIN
6 HEIGHT OF TERRAIN
7 unused
8 unused
9 unused
10 unused
11 unused
12 unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31 Proactive HAT mode. EP2 sends
0 = disabled HAT data every field without host

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1 = enabled request when this mode is set in
the configuration file.
bit 30 HAT valid flag. The host should
0 = invalid only use the data when this flag
1 = valid is set.
bit 29 Vector feature flag. When invalid,
0 = invalid the HAT test is in an area where
1 = valid vector features may not have
been valid. The host may use
this data at its discretion.
bit 28 HAT invalid due to terrain or
1 = HAT invalid model still paging over HAT
testpoint.
bit 27 HAT invalid due to data warning:
1 = HAT invalid altitude outside valid range
(typically –2000 to 33,350) or
bad Z on plane equation.

3-114 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 26 HAT invalid due to reposition.
(CONT) 1 = HAT invalid
bits 25–24 Unused
MODEL TYPE bits 17–16 All models are moving models in
0 = moving model EP2.
MESSAGE # 0–255 The eight least-significant bits of
the message number from the
host packet that contained x, y, z
positional data.
TESTPOINT 0–255 Specifies which testpoint is
# associated with the height-
above-terrain data being
returned.
MOVING EP: Integer Specifies the moving model
MODEL # 0 = ownship found directly below the
1 = terrain testpoint.
2 & above = moving model
DISTANCE scaled distance (32 bit) This is the perpendicular distance
D used in the plane equation
from the plane of the polygon
directly below the testpoint, to
the origin of the coordinate
system.
The origin of the equation is the
local origin of the moving model.
X NORMAL fraction A (16 bit) Specifies the x component of the
polygon normal.
Y NORMAL fraction A (16 bit) Specifies the y component of the
polygon normal.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Z NORMAL fraction A (16 bit) Specifies the z component of the
polygon normal.
L 1 = polygon In EP2, data is always returned
at the polygon level.
MATERIAL 0–511 Specifies the type of polygon that
CODE the testpoint is directly above.
HEIGHT scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the vertical distance
ABOVE from the polygon to the
TERRAIN testpoint.
HEIGHT OF scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the height of the
TERRAIN polygon relative to mean sea
level.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-115

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3087
Enhanced Laser Range-Finder Response
This command returns enhanced laser range-finder data that has
been calculated for a specific cursor. The command is activated
when the host requests the enhanced laser range-finder response in
opcode 3036.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0000 1000 0111
1 FLAGS CURSOR # EYEPOINT # VIEWPORT #
2 RANGE
3 HEADING VIEWPORT
4 PITCH VIEWPORT
5 ROLL VIEWPORT
6 unused/LATITUDE
7 X OFFSET/LATITUDE
8 unused/LONGITUDE
9 Y OFFSET/LONGITUDE
10 TAG/ALTITUDE
11 Z OFFSET/TAG

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING Integer Specifies the moving model found
MODEL 0 = ownship directly below the testpoint.
NUMBER 1 = terrain
2 & above = moving model

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

FLAGS bit 31: Specifies whether the eyepoint
0 = xy position is in xy or lat/lon mode.
1 = lat/lon
CURSOR # 0–7 Specifies which cursor is associated
with the laser range–finder data
being returned.
EYEPOINT # 0–15 The eyepoint number to which the
viewport is tied.
VIEWPORT # 0–15 The viewport number that is tied to
the cursor.
RANGE scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the distance from the
eyepoint to the moving model that
was hit by the cursor. If the range
is set to –1, the data being returned
is invalid.

3-116 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

HEADING angle (32 bit) Specifies the heading of the
VIEWPORT viewport that the LRF cursor is tied
to relative to moving model 1
(terrain).
PITCH angle (32 bit) Specifies the pitch of the viewport
VIEWPORT that the LRF cursor is tied to
relative to moving model 1
(terrain).
ROLL angle (32 bit) Specifies the roll of the viewport
VIEWPORT that the LRF cursor is tied to
relative to moving model 1
(terrain).
LATITUDE angle (36 bit) Latitude of the eyepoint for which
the range was calculated.
X OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the extrapolated x offset
of the eyepoint that the LRF cursor
is tied to, relative to moving-model
1 (terrain).
LONGITUDE angle (36 bit) Longitude of the eyepoint for which
the range was calculated.
Y OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the extrapolated y offset
of the eyepoint that the LRF cursor
is tied to, relative to moving-model
1 (terrain).
ALTITUDE scaled distance (32 bit) Altitude of the eyepoint for which
the range was calculated.
Z OFFSET scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the extrapolated z offset
of the eyepoint that the LRF cursor
is tied to, relative to moving-model

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1 (terrain).
TAG 0–65,535 Tag that was specified in opcode
303C.
Occupies the two least significant
bytes of word 10 for a Cartesian
database or word 11 for a lat/lon
database.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-117

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

308D
Animate
This command reports when an animation sequence is completed by
the IG. The maximum number of animation responses (opcodes
308D and 308F) in a return block is 32.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused 0011 0000 1000 1101
1 MOVING MODEL # SUBMODEL #
2 ID UNLOADED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING Integer Specifies the moving model
MODEL # number for which information is
being returned.
SUBMODEL # 0–2 Specifies the secondary
submodel.
ID 0–63 Specifies the converging-traffic
scenario, routed-traffic scenario,
or animation sequence.
UNLOADED 0 = not unloaded Indicates that the animation
1 = unloaded sequence was unloaded upon
completion.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-118 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

308F
Animate Frame Number

This command returns the current animation frame number

requested by host opcode 3042. The maximum number of animation
responses (opcodes 308D and 308F) in a return block is 32.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 CURRENT ANIM FRAME 0011 0000 1000 1111
1 MOVING MODEL # SUBMODEL #
2 SEQ # TYPE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CURRENT 0–255 Specifies the frame number in an
FRAME animation sequence.
MOVING OR Integer Specifies the model number.
STATIC
MODEL #
SUBMODEL # 0–2 Specifies the secondary
submodel.
SEQ # 0–63 Specifies animation sequence.
TYPE 1 = moving model Specifies the model type; this
value is always 1 in EP2.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-119

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3090
Moving-Model Velocity
This command gives positional and rotational rates to a moving
model. It also provides a time constant for smooth correction of
positional errors for the next time a position opcode arrives.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0000 1001 0000
1 TIME CONSTANT FLAGS Reserved SUBMODEL #
2 X VELOCITY
3 Y VELOCITY
4 Z VELOCITY
5 HEADING RATE
6 PITCH RATE
7 ROLL RATE
8 Reserved

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING Integer Specifies the primary model.
MODEL #
TIME Unsigned byte, 0–255 tenths Specifies time constant, in tenths of
CONSTANT of seconds (0.0–25.5 s) seconds, for smooth removal of
positional errors. When a new
position is specified, the model
smoothly moves to the new position
in the time specified. Zero, the
default, causes the model to jump to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the new position.
FLAGS bit 23 Reserved, set to 0 for future
compatibility.

3-120 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 16 (bit 0 of the byte) Specifies coordinate system used for
0 = parent coordinate velocity. If the bit is set, the x, y, z
system rates are in the direction given by
1 = model body coordinate the model body coordinate system
system and angular rates are for rotations
about model axes.
In this coordinate system, a constant
heading rate and y velocity causes
the model to move in a circle.
If the bit is clear then the parent
coordinate system, which is usually
the earth coordinates, is used. In
this coordinate system, a constant
heading rate and y velocity causes
the model to move due north while
performing a flat spin.
If set, indicates that the X velocity
component is invalid and the IG
bit 17 (bit 1 of the byte)
should preserve the current value.
If set, indicates that the Y velocity
bit 18 (bit 2 of the byte) component is invalid and the IG
should preserve the current value.
If set, indicates that the Z velocity
bit 19 (bit 3 of the byte)
component is invalid and the IG
should preserve the current value.
If set, indicates that the heading
bit 20 (bit 4 of the byte) velocity component is invalid and the
IG should preserve the current
value.
If set, indicates that the pitch

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 21 (bit 5 of the byte) velocity component is invalid and the
IG should preserve the current
value.
If set, indicates that the roll velocity
bit 22 (bit 6 of the byte) component is invalid and the IG
should preserve the current value.

RESERVED bits 8–15 Set to zero for future compatibility.

SUBMODEL integer Specifies the submodel.
X VELOCITY Scalar D (32 bit) Specifies the x velocity. Feet/second
are the units. Refer to the Scaled
Velocity format description for
format information.
Y VELOCITY Scalar D (32 bit) Specifies the y velocity in database
feet/second.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-121

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Z VELOCITY Scalar D (32 bit) Specifies the z velocity in database
feet/second.
HEADING Scaled angular rate (32 bit) Specifies the heading rate in
RATE revolutions/second. Refer to the
Scaled Angular Rate format
description for format information.
PITCH RATE Scaled angular rate (32 bit) Specifies the pitch rate in
revolutions/second.
ROLL RATE Scaled angular rate (32 bit) Specifies the roll rate in
revolutions/second.
RESERVED 32-bit integer Should be set to zero for future
compatibility.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-122 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3091
Wave Equation

This command is used to set the wave equation parameters for 3D

sea states.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused 0011 0000 1001 0001
1 WAVE INDEX FLAGS unused SEA STATE
2 HEIGHT
3 LENGTH
4 HEADING
5 FREQUENCY
6 PHASE
7 FORCING
8 unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

WAVE INDEX 0–9 Specifies the wavefront number.
FLAGS bits 23–16 Specifies which wave equation
0–1 parameters are changing.
0 = disabled
1 = enabled
bit 16 = height Each of these bits has a value of
bit 17 = length either 0 (disabled) or 1
bit 18 = heading (enabled).
bit 19 = frequency

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Setting any of these parameters
bit 20 = phase
also automatically enables the
bit 21 = forcing
corresponding wave component.
bits 22 – 23 Unused.
SEA STATE Sea state number SeaState of 255 or 0xFF sets the
wave heading relative to the
wind direction. SeaState of 0 sets
the wave heading the absolute
direction (0° heading is due
north along the positive y-axis,
90° heading is due east along the
positive x-axis).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-123

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SEA STATE 1–13 = specifies a sea state Specifies a sea state level, which
(CONT) level is ONE LESS THAN this value,
which causes an associated script
file to be executed, the wave
headings to be modified by wind
direction, and the sea state
model (if any) to be controlled by
wind speed and direction.
If Sea State is non-zero, then all
other parameters are ignored.
NOTE: If all of the enable flags AND the sea state numbers are zero, then the
wave component specified by WAVE INDEX is disabled.
HEIGHT Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the wave height from
trough to crest.
LENGTH Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the wavelength.
Changing the wavelength causes
the frequency to change (see
FREQUENCY)
HEADING Angle format (32 bit) The heading of the wave.
FREQUENCY Scaled distance (32 bit) The wave frequency in hertz, set
to a default value. When
wavelength is changed, a new
default value is computed.
Specifying the frequency
overrides the default.
PHASE angle format (32 bit) The initial wave phase in
degrees. The range is –360 to
+360, and the default is zero.
Allows starting wavefronts at
different phase angles. This value

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

can be set at any time during the
simulation.
FORCING fraction format (32 bit) A parameter between 0.0 and
1.0 that causes the waves to look
forced by the wind. The default
value of 0.0 makes sinusoidal
wave functions, while a value of
1.0 causes a forced wave (one
that has a flatter trough and a
more peaked crest).

3-124 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

309A
Advanced Routed Traffic Control
This command is used to control and specify information to the IG
concerning route recording and playing.

Before reusing a route slot (id), the previous route should be

unloaded (function unload) to ensure clean playback of the new
route.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SUBMODEL ROUTE NUMBER 0011 0000 1001 1010
1 ITERATIONS COMMAND FLAGS
2 MM FILE NUMBER
3 Z
4 SELECT TRIGGER TYPE TRIGGER MM/TRIGGER ROUTE #
5 TRIGGER RANGE
6 X
7 Y

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SUBMODEL bits 31-24 Specifies the submodel to be used
on playback. The submodel bit,
select bit, and moving model bit in
the flags must all be enabled for this
field to be used.
ROUTE Integer (0–255) Specifies the active route number to
NUMBER control for play mode.
ITERATIONS bits 31–24 Specifies the number of iterations for

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

a triggered route to run when based
on proximity (range or point).
This field is used when the iteration
flag is set.
The maximum number of iterations
is 255.
This field must be set to 0 to halt a
proximity trigger before the iteration
count is completed.
COMMAND bits 23–16 Used to send a specific command to
0 = off the indicated route. By setting the
1 = on associated bit, a corresponding
command is sent to the route.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-125

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Record bits: Terminates advanced route traffic
bit 23 = record stop recording, closes the file, and makes
it ready to use for playback.
COMMAND bit 22 = record start Turns on recording to the file
(CONT) indicated by the file number.
• The position of moving model 0
is recorded.
• If the file already exists, the old
file is renamed with a .bak
extension and recording
commences.
Play bits:
bit 21 = resume the route Resumes playing a paused route at
the point it was paused.
bit 20 = pause the route Stops the route but leaves the data
pointers in the buffer at the point
they were paused.
bit 19 = stop the route Stops the route and reinitializes the
data pointers in the buffer to the
beginning of the route.
bit 18 = play the route If a route is already loaded, this bit
starts the playback.
If a route has not been loaded, this
bit loads the route and then starts
playback.
If a route has been paused, this bit
starts the route from the beginning
rather than from the point it was
paused.
bit 17 = load the route Initializes the route with the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

indicated file, fills the buffers with as
much data as possible, and positions
the associated moving model to the
initial position.
bit 16 = unload the route Initializes the indicated route.
FLAGS bits 15–0
bits 15 Unused.
bit 14 Use default motion system and
0 = disabled vehicle select (in which case MM and
1 = enabled SELECT are ignored by EP2).
bits 13, 12 Unused, set to 0.
bit 11 Specifies whether the iteration field
0 = continuous of word 1 is used. If this bit is set to
1 = use iteration field 0, the default iteration of continuous
is used.

3-126 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 10 Indicates whether the submodel field
0 = disabled is enabled or disabled. Bits 1, 9, and
1 = enabled 10 must all be set for the feature to
function properly.
FLAGS bit 9 Indicates whether the select field is
(CONT) 0 = disabled enabled or disabled. Bits 1, 9, and
1 = enabled 10 must all be set for the feature to
function properly.
bit 8 Indicates whether the route played
0 = forward back is played back as recorded or
1 = reverse reversed.
bit 7 Unused, set to 0.
bit 6 Indicates whether trigger fields are
0 = disabled enabled or disabled.
1 = enabled
bit 5 Indicates whether the command field
0 = disabled is enabled or disabled.
1 = enabled
bit 4 Indicates whether the cyclic bit (bit
0 = disabled 3) is enabled or disabled.
1 = enabled
bit 3 Sets the cyclic bit status to stop at
0 = route stops at end the end of the route, or to reset and
1 = route restarts at end start again from the beginning at the
end of the route.
bit 2 Indicates whether the z field is
0 = disabled enabled or disabled.
1 = enabled
bit 1 Indicates whether the moving model

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0 = disabled field is enabled or disabled.
1 = enabled
bit 0 Indicates whether the file number
0 = disabled field is enabled or disabled.
1 = enabled
MM Integer Moving model to drive when playing
back routed traffic.
When recording, if this field is set to
non-zero, that number is used as the
default model number for this route
when being played back.
If set to 0, this field has no effect
when recording.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-127

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FILE NUMBER integer (0–2048) This is the number of the file that
contains the route.
This number is used to construct the
actual filename used on the IG by
appending the number to the name
specified in FILE INDEX 15, then
adding the .rt extension.
This file is located in the database
directory indicated by DB PATH
INDEX 1.
Z Scaled distance (32 bit) This is the z offset to be added to
the z position in the route. This is
used to adjust the height of models.
SELECT bits 31–24 Specifies the select to be used on
playback. The submodel bit, select
bit, and moving model bit in the
flags must all be enabled for this
field to be used.
TRIGGER Integer (0–3) Sets the type of trigger for a
TYPE 0 = no trigger specified route.
1 = route trigger
The route trigger starts the route
2 = range to moving
when the last one has completed.
model
trigger The range to moving model trigger
3 = range to point trigger starts the specified route when the
eyepoint comes within range of the
specified moving model.
The range to point trigger starts the
specified route when the eyepoint
comes within range of the specified

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

point.
TRIGGER Integer Specifies either the moving model
MM/ Moving model Integer number or the route number to be
TRIGGER Route numbers: 0–63 used when the corresponding trigger
ROUTE type is designated.
NUMBER
TRIGGER Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the range to be used for
RANGE either a moving model or specified
point when the corresponding trigger
type is designated.
X,Y Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies a distance in the x,y
domain. These are standard distance
values and are used when the
trigger type is set on a range to
point trigger.

3-128 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

309B
Advanced Routed Traffic Request
This opcode is sent from the host to the IG. It causes the IG to build
a series of advanced route information blocks indicating the routes
that are available in the database directory. This only includes files
that are usable through the host interface; files that conform to the
host compatible filename format (nameX.rt where X is a file number
from 0–65535 and name is the filename specified in FILE INDEX
15).

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused FLAGS 0011 0000 1001 1011

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS Bits 23–17 Unused
bit 16 Indicates what type of
0 = Routed traffic information is requested (Routed
1 = SMGCS traffic or SMGCS).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-129

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

309C
Routed Traffic Status

This opcode is sent from the host to the IG and causes the IG to
build a route information block (opcode 3122) detailing the status of
the route number indicated in the opcode.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 ROUTE NUMBER 0011 0000 1001 1100

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

ROUTE bits 31–16 Specifies the active route number
NUMBER for which to provide the status.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-130 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

309D
Wind Effects

This command is used to control the operation of real-time

controlled snow in the image generator.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SNOW unused REGIO FLAGS 0011 0000 1001 1101
N
1 WIND DIRECTION WIND SPEED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SNOW bits 28–31 0 = Falling snow is off.
1–3 = (binary) Falling snow
severity
REGION bits 23–20 The weather region to which this
setup of wind effects applies.
Region 0 is global weather.
FLAGS bits 19–18 Reserved
bit 17 Blowing snow enable
bit 16 Blowing sand enable
WIND bits 16–31 The wind direction, and is
DIRECTION 0–359 specified in direction the wind is
coming from in whole numbers.
For instance, a wind direction of
175 degrees would be specified
as 175.
WIND bits 0–15 The wind speed in knots specified
SPEED in whole numbers.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0–300

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-131

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

309E
Generic Airport Control
This opcode controls the configuration of the civil airlines-compatible
generic airport model.
Some of the possible configurations can result in items being
superimposed, e.g. terminal buildings on a runway. To avoid these
anomalies, the following rules should be followed:
1. Always place the terminal building on the same side as the
taxiway.
2. Don’t select both taxiways if a parallel runway is selected.
If these two rules are followed, then the terminal and taxiway will
both be on the opposite side to the parallel runway. Any other
combination can result in an unacceptable generic airfield display.
If the auto-generic feature is enabled and a host placed generic
runway is required then this opcode can be sent to alter the position
(latitude, longitude, altitude and heading) of the reference runway
(previously sent using opcode 0005/0066). In this case, all other
entries in this opcode will be ignored.

31 22 21 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS1 RW NUM 0011 0000 1001 1110
1 FLAGS2 TERRAIN RUNWAY WIDTH RUNWAY
FEATURE LENGTH
2 TER POS TER TYPE APPROACH TYPE VLA TYPE VLA ANGLE
3 LATITUDE
4 LATITUDE (cont) unused
5 LONGITUDE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6 LONGITUDE (cont) unused
7 ALTITUDE OF THR POINT
8 SLOPE INSTANCE
9 RUNWAY HEADING

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS1 bits 31-22
bit 31 Reserved
bit 30, 29 Determines runway contaminant.
0, 0 = dry runway
0, 1 = wet runway
1, 0 = snow runway
1, 1 = ice runway

3-132 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS1 bit 28 Determines whether there are
(CONT) 0 = British markings British or international standard
1 = international markings runway markings.
bit 27 Determines on which side of the
0 = buildings. on left airport the airport buildings
1 = buildings on right appear.
bit 26 Enables or disables the left
0 = taxiway left off taxiway.
1 = taxiway left on
bit 25 Enables or disables the right
0 = taxiway right off taxiway.
1 = taxiway right on
bit 24 Enables or disables the generic
0 = generic off model.
1 = generic on
bit 23 Reserved
bit 22 Enables or disables the parallel
0 = parallel off runway.
1 = parallel on
RUNWAY 0–37 Two-digit runway numeral. 0
NUMBER turns the numeral off, 37 selects
numeral 00.
This parameter is specified
independent of the heading
parameter because runway
headings specified between two
primary directions (like 345
degrees) can legitimately be
marked runway 34 or 35

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

depending on local requirements.
Therefore, the runway number
cannot easily be inferred so must
be specified.
FLAGS2 bits 31–24
bit 31 JCAB standard runway markings
0 = Use FLAGS1 bit 28 to
determine runway
markings
1 = JCAB markings
bit 30 Enables or disables the Distance
0 = DTG boards off To Go boards.
1 = DTG boards on
bit 29 Enables or disables the arresting
0 = Arresting gear off gear.
1 = Arresting gear on

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-133

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 28 Enables or disables the carrier
0 = Carrier markings off markings.
1 = Carrier markings on
bit 27 Determines which type of airport
0 = Civil beacon beacon to use.
1 = Military beacon
Bit 26 Unused
bits 25 and 24 Reserved
TERRAIN 1=hot irrigated crop-plane Specifies the underlay for the
FEATURE 2=corn field/cool irrigated airport. The numbering allows for
crop-plane legacy ESIG compatibility where
3=grass possible.
4=scrub
If the host sends an invalid or
5=tundra reserved terrain feature (i.e., 0, 6-30
6–30 reserved or 33-255) then the underlay will be
31=desert determined automatically based on
32=snow the underlying FIC.

RUNWAY sel 1 = 30 meters Runway width in meters.

WIDTH sel 2 = 45 meters
sel 3 = 60 meters
RUNWAY sel 0=0m Runway lengths in meters.
LENGTH sel 15 = 1500 m
If 0 is selected, a helipad only
sel 20 = 2000 m
scene is displayed with no
sel 25 = 2500 m
runway. The center of the helipad
sel 30 = 3000 m
is placed at the airport
sel 35 = 3500 m
latitude/longitude.
sel 40 = 4000 m
sel 45 = 4500 m
TERMINAL sel 1 = Close to primary end Position of terminal building.
POSITION sel 2 = Further down runway

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

TERMINAL sel 0 = European Type of terminal buildings.
TYPE sel 1 = USA
APPROACH sel 1 = SALS Approach light type
LIGHT TYPE sel 2 = ALSF1
sel 3 = ALSF2
sel 4 = CALVERT1
sel 5 = CALVERT2
sel 6 = ALCL1
sel 7 = ALCL2
sel 8 = MALSR1
sel 9 = ALCL5
sel 10 = REILS
sel 11 = SALSF
sel 12 = SSALR
sel 13 = ODALS
VLA TYPE sel 1 = PAPI both sides Visual landing aid type used.

3-134 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

sel 2 = PAPI left only
sel 3 = PAPI right only
sel 5 = VASI 2-bar
sel 9 = VASI 3-bar
sel 10 = T-VASI both sides
sel 11 = T-VASI left only
sel 12 = T-VASI right only
sel 13 = VASI 3-bar left
only
sel 14 = VASI 3-bar right
only
sel 15 = VASI 2-bar left
only
sel 16 = VASI 2-bar right
only

VLA ANGLE sel 24 = 2.4 degrees Visual landing aid angle used.
sel 25 = 2.5 degrees
sel 26 = 2.6 degrees
sel 27 = 2.7 degrees
sel 28 = 2.8 degrees
sel 29 = 2.9 degrees
sel 30 = 3.0 degrees
sel 31 = 3.1 degrees
sel 32 = 3.2 degrees
sel 33 = 3.3 degrees
sel 34 = 3.4 degrees
sel 35 = 3.5 degrees
sel 40 = 4.0 degrees
LATITUDE angle (36-bit) In ‘normal’ mode this is the
LONGITUDE latitude/longitude of the
touchdown point of the reference

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

runway. In ‘auto-generic’ mode
this is the latitude/longitude of the
threshold of the reference
runway.
ALTITUDE OF scaled distance (32-bit) Height of the reference runway
THR POINT THR at the primary (landing/take
off) end.
SLOPE angle (16-bit) Specifies the slope of the runway.
range –0.5 to +0.5 degrees
INSTANCE 0–7, default = 0 Instance of the generic airfield. Up
to 8 generic airfields can be
defined.
RUNWAY angle (32-bit) Heading of the reference runway.
HEADING

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-135

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

309F
Scattered Clouds

Allow a host to control the run-time controlled attributes associated

with scattered clouds.
NOTE: The assignment of moving models for clouds is considered
to be a setup time capability, rather than a run-time
capability. Therefore, it is not intended to be part of the
host interface, but is part of the CLI.
3130 28 27 24 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 X REGION DENSITY RESERVED 0011 0000 1001 1111
1 ALTITUDE (Z)
2 unused reserved FLAGS

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X Bit 31 Enables or disables the scattered
0 = disable cloud feature.
1 = enable
REGION Bit 28–30 The region to which this setup of
0–7 scattered clouds applies. Region 0
is global weather.
DENSITY bit 24–27 The density of the scattered cloud
1 = 1 octa (few) cloud layer according to octa definitions.
2 = 2 octas (few) cloud • * 5, 6, and 7 are only used for
3 = 3 octas (scattered) cloud legacy systems.
4 = 4 octas (scattered) cloud
5 = 5 octas (broken) cloud *
6 = 6 octas (broken) cloud *
7 = 7 octas (broken) cloud *

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ALTITUDE If FLAGS bit 0 = 0, Specifies the altitude of the
(Z) unscaled distance (32 bits) scattered cloud layer. This is
range: 0 to 50,000 ft relative to MSL.
If FLAGS bit 0 =1,
scaled distance
(32 bit SB (22, –9) )
range –2000 to 50,000 ft
FLAGS bits 1–7 Unused
bit 0 Enables scaled distance format for
0 = disable ALTITUDE parameter to allow for
1 = enable negative values.

3-136 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

30B0
EXG Thermal Cuer Parameters

This command defines the EXG thermal cuer parameters for the
specified IRPP viewport. These parameters are program-specific and
are defined in the program’s interface control document (ICD).
Opcode 30B0 is applicable to systems with an EXG-type sensor
effects generator configured with thermal cueing software.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 TEST POINT SORT METHOD 0011 0000 1011 0000
1 AREA OF
VIEWPORT SENSITIVITY TARGET SIZE
REGARD

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

TEST POINT Integer Obsolete – do not use
0 – 255
SORT Integer (0 – 255) Sorting order for returned hot spots
METHOD 0: none
1: bottom to top
2: center outward
3: top down
4: large to small
5: small to large
6: highest total energy
7: highest peak intensity
8: highest average intensity
9 – 255: reserved
VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

32 – 255: reserved
SENSITIVITY Integer Interpolant for sensitivity
0 – 255
TARGET SIZE Integer Interpolant for target size
0 – 255
AREA OF Integer (0 – 255) Determines screen extent processed
REGARD 0: disable thermal cuer by thermal cuer
1: full screen
2 – 255: reserved

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-137

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

30B1
IR Diurnal Control

This opcode sets ambient temperature diurnal profile parameters.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused 0011 0000 1011 0001
1 unused PEAK HOURS PEAK MINUTES
2 MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE MINIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
3 unused
4 unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

PEAK HOURS 0–23 (unsigned char) Specifies the hour. This is the
hour that the peak ambient
temperature occurs for the
specified day.
PEAK MINUTES 0–59 (unsigned char) Specifies the minutes. This is the
minute that the peak ambient
temperature occurs for the
specified day.
MAXIMUM fraction B (16 bit) Specifies the maximum ambient
AMBIENT temperature, in degrees Celsius,
TEMPERATURE that occurs for the specified day.
MINIMUM fraction B (16 bit) Specifies the minimum ambient
AMBIENT temperature, in degrees Celsius,
TEMPERATURE that occurs for the specified day.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-138 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

30B3
EXG Symbol Value

This command sets the symbol value for the EXG. Opcode 30B3 is
only applicable to systems with an EXG-type sensor generator with
custom target tracking software. .

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused 0011 0000 1011 0011
1 unused VIEWPORT SYMBOL
NUMBER
2 SYMBOL VALUE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the EXG
viewport.
SYMBOL 0–255 Specifies the symbol number.
NUMBER
SYMBOL IEEE float (32-bit) Application-specific symbol value.
VALUE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-139

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

30B5
IRPP Configuration File Select
This command runs the specified IRPP configuration file. This
provides a mechanism for setting IRPP parameters that are
otherwise not accessible using host opcodes or CLI commands.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT SELECT 0011 0000 1011 0101

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the IR
viewport.
SELECT 0–255 Number of the configuration file
to be executed. The name of the
file to be executed must follow
the pattern config_nnn.txt,
where nnn is the select number
with leading zeroes. Note that
the maximum select number is
255, not 999.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-140 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

30B6
EXG Tracking Type Select

This command sets the tracking type (0–255) for an EXG channel.
This ID number identifies the type of target tracking, such as area
tracking or point tracking. Number assignment to the types is
application dependent. Opcode 30B6 is only applicable to systems
with an EXG-type sensor generator with custom target tracking
software.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT TRACKING 0011 0000 1011 0110

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0–15) Specifies the number of the EXG
viewport.
TRACKING Integer (0–255) The IRPP tracking type.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-141

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

30B9
IRPP Histogram Intensity Clip

This command controls clipping of the histogram collected by the

EXG sensor effects generator. Clipping can be performed on the low
or black end of the histogram and/or the high or white end. The
fractions of pixels specified are eliminated from the histogram prior
to computing gain and level.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT reserved 0011 0000 1011 1001
1 CLIP LOW CLIP HIGH

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
CLIP LOW Scalar B (16 bit) Fraction of histogram pixels to ignore at
0.000 – 0.999 the high end of the intensity spectrum
CLIP HIGH Scalar B (16 bit) Fraction of histogram pixels to ignore at
0.000 – 0.999 the low end of the intensity spectrum

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-142 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

30BA
EXG Symbol Update

This command defines the EXG symbol control data, symbol on or

off, symbol number, and group number for the specified IRPP
viewport. Opcode 30BA is only applicable for systems with an EXG-
type sensor generator containing the SDF symbology option.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0000 1011 1010
1 VIEWPORT ENABLE SYMBOL # GROUP #

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the IRPP
viewport.
ENABLE 0–255 (unsigned character) Selects which representation of
the symbol to display, with 0 =
disable.
SYMBOL # 0–255 (unsigned character) Symbol number, refers to a set
of symbols predefined on the
IRPP. Symbol 0 is reserved –
displaying symbol 0 causes all
displayed symbols to be cleared.
GROUP # 0–255 (unsigned character) Intensity group number.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-143

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

30BC
EXG TargetTracker Parameters

This command is used to set breaklock and impending breaklock

conditions for the EXG-based target tracker.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT FLAGS A
0011 0000 1011 1100
1 MINIMUM TARGET SIZE X MINIMUM TARGET SIZE Y
2 MAXIMUM TARGET SIZE X
3 MAXIMUM TARGET SIZE Y
4 MAXIMUM TARGET OFFSET X
5 MAXIMUM TARGET OFFSET Y
6 MINIMUM TARGET CONTRAST

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 23 – 17: reserved
bit 16: ImpendingBreak (A) Selects whether parameters in this
0: breaklock packet apply to impending breaklock
1: impending breaklock or breaklock
MINIMUM Integer Minimum horizontal target size, in
TARGET SIZE pixels
X
MINIMUM Integer Minimum vertical target size, in pixels

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

TARGET SIZE
Y
MAXIMUM IEEE float Maximum horizontal target size, in
TARGET SIZE fraction of horizontal FOV
X
MAXIMUM IEEE float Maximum vertical target size, in
TARGET SIZE fraction of vertical FOV
Y
MAXIMUM IEEE float Maximum horizontal excursion of
TARGET target from center of screen, in
OFFSET X fraction of horizontal FOV; measured
horizontally to the edge of the target
furthest from the screen center

3-144 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MAXIMUM IEEE float Maximum vertical excursion of target
TARGET from center of screen, in fraction of
OFFSET Y vertical FOV; measured vertically to
the edge of the target furthest from
the screen center
MINIMUM IEEE float Minimum target contrast, measured
TARGET 0.0 to 1.0 as:
CONTRAST
contrast = targetPeak – background
where peak and background are
normalized to range from 0.0 to 1.0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-145

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

30D0
Model Chaining
This opcode is used to chain or unchain a moving model to or from
another moving model. In lieu of the chaining behavior, the moving
model can also be set in a behavior as if it were being towed by
another moving model.
NOTE: If chaining is requested without specifying an explicit offset,
then EP2 will compute the relative position based upon the
parent and child positions currently committed to the
system. Any position updates for the parent/child sent in
the same host field will not be committed until all opcodes
are processed, so the desired relative positions should be
set at least one field prior to requesting the chain.
Alternatively, the chain can be requested with an explicit
offset.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL 0011 0001 1101 0000
1 unused FLAGS
2 PARENT MM PARENT SUBMODEL
3 X OFFSET/DISTANCE
4 Y OFFSET
5 Z OFFSET
6 HEADING
7 PITCH
8 ROLL

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation
MOVING 0–2047 Specifies the primary model.
MODEL
FLAGS bits 15 Unused.
bit 14 Specifies whether the child moving
0 = disable model is stabilized with respect to the
1 = enable parent moving model for the roll
angle.
The default is disable (do not
stabilize), which means the child
moving model inherits the parent
moving model’s accumulated roll
angle.

3-146 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 13 Specifies whether the child moving
0 = disable model is stabilized with respect to the
1 = enable parent moving model for the pitch
angle.
The default is disable (don’t
stabilize), which means the child
moving model inherits the parent
moving model’s accumulated pitch
angle.
FLAGS bit 12 Specifies whether the child moving
(CONT) 0 = disable model is stabilized with respect to the
1 = enable parent moving model for the heading
angle.
The default is disable (do not
stabilize), which means the child
moving model inherits the parent
moving model’s accumulated heading
angle.
bit 11 Specifies whether the child moving
0 = disable model is stabilized with respect to the
1 = enable parent moving model for the z offset.
The default is disable (do not
stabilize), which means the child
moving model inherits the parent
moving model’s accumulated z offset.
bit 10 Specifies whether the child moving
0 = disable model is stabilized with respect to the
1 = enable parent moving model for the y offset.
The default is disable (do not
stabilize), which means the child
moving model inherits the parent

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

moving model’s accumulated y offset.
bit 9 Specifies whether the child moving
0 = disable model is stabilized with respect to the
1 = enable parent moving model for the x offset.
The default is disable (do not
stabilize), which means the child
moving model inherits the parent
moving model’s accumulated x offset.
bit 8: Specifies whether the roll value in
0 = invalid word 8 is valid or invalid for this
1 = valid chained moving model.
bit 7: Specifies whether the pitch value in
0 = invalid word 7 is valid or invalid for this
1 = valid chained moving model.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-147

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 6: Specifies whether the heading value
0 = invalid in word 6 is valid or invalid for this
1 = valid chained moving model.
bit 5: Specifies whether the z offset value
0 = invalid in word 5 is valid or invalid for this
1 = valid chained moving model.
bit 4: Specifies whether the y offset value
0 = invalid in word 4 is valid or invalid for this
1 = valid chained moving model.
FLAGS bit 3: Specifies whether the x offset value
(CONT) 0 = invalid in word 3 or distance value is valid
1 = valid or invalid for this chained or towed
moving model
bit 2: Specifies whether the moving model
0 = invalid should be towed.
1 = valid
bit 1: Specifies whether the moving model
0 = invalid should be unchained.
1 = valid
bit 0: Specifies whether the moving model
0 = invalid should be chained.
1 = valid
PARENT MM 0-999F Specifies the moving model number
to which this moving model is
chained.
PARENT 0-999 Specifies the submodel number of
SUBMODEL the parent moving model to which
the moving model is chained.
X OFFSET Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset from the origin

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

of the parent submodel to the
primary model.
Y OFFSET Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset from the origin
of the parent submodel to the
primary model.
Z OFFSET Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset from the origin
of the parent submodel to the
primary model.
HEADING angle (32 bit) Specifies the heading with respect to
the parent submodel to the primary
model.
PITCH angle (32 bit) Specifies the pitch with respect to
the parent submodel to the primary
model.

3-148 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

ROLL angle (32 bit) Specifies the roll with respect to the
parent submodel to the primary
model.
DISTANCE Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the distance the moving
model is to be towed from the
parent model. The distance must be
greater than 0.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-149

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

30D1
Model Switch

This opcode sets the mask index for a controllable switch node. The
switch node is a Multigen style switch node where the user sets an
index to a mask. The mask defines which children will be traversed
in the switch node.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0001 0011 0000
1 unused SUBMODEL MASK INDEX

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING 0–2047 Specifies the primary model.
MODEL
SUBMODEL 1–255 Specifies the submodel number.
A controllable switch node cannot
be assigned to submodel 0.
Therefore submodel 0 is an
invalid number.
MASK INDEX 0–255 Specifies the mask index.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-150 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

30D4
Character Animation Request
31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 Unused 30D4
1 Unused ENTITY ID
2 FLAGS
3 SEQUENCE
4 RATE
5 ENTRY TIME
6 BLEND TIME
Mode :
1 – start animation
2 – stop animation
3 – pause animation
4 – resume animation
5 – blend animations
6 – clean animation controller

Flags :
0 – loop toggle

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-151

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3121
Advanced Routed Traffic Information Block

This command can be sent from the IG to the host, or from the host
to the IG. It has different meanings depending upon whether it is
sent by the IG or the host.
When the opcode is sent from the IG to the host, it is in response to
opcode 309B. It is used to provide a comprehensive list of route files
in the current routeFiles directory PATH 15 for the airport in
question.
Once the request is made by the host, the IG builds a list of
available route files and begins sending them back to the host, one
per field. Any new requests made while a previous request is being
serviced are ignored.
When the opcode is sent from the host to the IG, it is a way to allow
the host to alter the route description field in the route file. The
flags field is ignored. The file number field is used to locate the file
which must already exist. The route description block is copied to
the description block in the header of the route file indicated.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused FLAGS 0011 0001 0010 0001
1 unused FILE NUMBER
2 ROUTE DESCRIPTION
↕↕
↕↕
↕↕

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

41 (160 characters)

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bits 23–16 These bits are used only for IG to
host transfers and are ignored
when the block is sent by the
host.

3-152 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bits 23–19 Unused.
bit 18 Indicates what type of
0 = Routed traffic information is being sent (Routed
1 = SMGCS traffic or SMGCS).
bit 17 Indicates whether there are any
0 = route available routes available on the IG for the
1 = no route files available current database for use by the
host.
bit 16
0 = more blocks follow Indicates whether the indicated
1 = end of route list block is the last block in the
route list or if there are still other
blocks to follow.
FILE NUMBER Integer (0–65535) This is the number of the file that
contains the route. This number
is used to construct the actual
filename used on the IG by
appending the number to the
name specified in FILE INDEX 15,
then adding the .rt extension.
This file is located in the
routeFiles directory indicated by
PATH INDEX 1.
ROUTE Character string, 160 This 160-character field contains
DESCRIPTION characters, NULL terminated the comment section copied
directly from the header of the
specified route file. This is a
user-specified comment section
and is copied verbatim.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-153

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3122
Advanced Routed Traffic Route Status Block

This opcode is sent from the IG to the host and provides all
information pertaining to an active route entry.
31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 STATU FLAGS ROUTE NUMBER 0011 0001 0010 0010
S
1 MM FILE NUMBER
2 Z
3 unused TRIGGER TYPE TRIGGER MM/TRIGGER ROUTE #
4 TRIGGER RANGE
5 X
6 Y

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

STATUS Integer (0–5) Reports the status of the active
0 = Unloaded route entry.
1 = Loaded
2 = Playing
3 = Stopped
4 = Paused
5 = Resuming
FLAGS bit 24 The cyclic flag for the route.
0 = off If the flag is off, the route does
1 = on not cycle at completion.
If the flag is on, the route resets
and starts playing again upon
completion of the route.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ROUTE Integer The active route for which status
NUMBER range = 0–63 is being returned.
MM Integer The mm being driven by this
route.
FILE NUMBER Integer This number is used to construct
the actual file name used by the
IG by appending the number to
the name specified in FILE INDEX
15, then adding the .rt extension.
Z scaled distance (32 bit) The z offset currently being used
for this route. This is used to
adjust the height of models.
TRIGGER Integer (0–3) Reports the trigger type being
TYPE 0 = no trigger used on the route (see opcode
1 = route trigger 309A).
2 = range to mm trigger
3 = range to point trigger

3-154 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

TRIGGER Integer Reports either the moving model
MM/ROUTE number or the route number
NUMBER being used when the
corresponding trigger type is
being used.
TRIGGER scaled distance (32 bit) Reports the range used for either
RANGE a moving model or specified point
when the corresponding trigger
type is being used.
X,Y scaled distance (32 bit) Reports a position when the
trigger type is set on a range to
point trigger.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-155

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3130
DI-Guy Character Type

This opcode specifies which DI-Guy character type is applied to a

motion system. This opcode should only be used on those models
that have been specifically configured with DI-Guy characteristics.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0001 0011 0000
1 CHARACTER TYPE FLAGS
unused APPEARANCE INDEX

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING 0–2047 Specifies the primary model.
MODEL
FLAGS bits 3–15 Unused.
bit 2: Specifies whether the DI-Guy
0 = invalid appearance index is valid.
1 = valid
bit 1: Specifies whether the DI-Guy
0 = invalid character type associated with the
1 = valid moving model should be
destroyed.
bit 0: Specifies whether the DI-Guy
0 = invalid character type associated with the
1 = valid moving model should be created.
CHARACTER 0-999 Specifies the index of the character
TYPE type assigned to the primary

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

model.
APPEARANCE 1–255 Specifies the index of the DI-Guy
INDEX appearance that is applied to the
DI-Guy character.

3-156 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3131
DI-Guy Action Type

This opcode specifies which DI-Guy action type is applied to a

motion system. This opcode should only be used on those models
that have been specifically configured with DI-Guy characteristics.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0001 0011 0001
1 ACTION TYPE FLAGS
2 SPEED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING 0–2047 Specifies the primary model.
MODEL
FLAGS bits 3–15 Unused.
bit 2: Specifies whether the speed is valid
0 = invalid or invalid for this primary model.
1 = valid
bit 1: Specifies if the transition is smooth
0 = smooth or abrupt when changing actions.
1 = abrupt
bit 0: Specifies whether the action type is
0 = invalid valid or invalid for this primary
1 = valid model.
ACTION 0-999 Specifies the index of the action
TYPE assigned to the DI-Guy character.
For instance, the character type

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

soldier could have the following
action indices defined.
0 – stand_ready 1 – kneel_ready
2 – prone_ready 3 – stand_aim
4 – kneel_aim 5 – prone_aim
6 – walk 7 – walk_lo
8 – walk_back 9 – crawl
10 – walk_lo_back 11 – jog
12 – run 13 – dead
SPEED Scalar D (32 bit) Specifies the speed of the character
motion in database units/second.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-157

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3132
DI-Guy Aim Angles

This opcode sets the current azimuth and elevation of the DI-Guy
character's weapon aim angles and sets the current azimuth and
elevation of the DI-Guy character's head gaze angles. The angles
are in character-local coordinates. Zero values mean straight ahead
and level.
31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 MOVING MODEL # 0011 0001 0011 0010
1 unused FLAGS
2 WEAPON AZIIMUTH
3 WEAPON ELEVATION
4 HEAD GAZE AZIMUTH
5 HEAD GAZE ELEVATION

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING 0–2047 Specifies the primary model.
MODEL
FLAGS bits 4–15 Unused.
bit 3: Specifies whether the head gaze
0 = invalid elevation angle in word 5 is valid
1 = valid or invalid for this primary model.
bit 2: Specifies whether the head gaze
0 = invalid azimuth angle in word 4 is valid
1 = valid or invalid for this primary model.
bit 1: Specifies whether the weapon
0 = invalid elevation angle in word 3 is valid
1 = valid or invalid for this primary model.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 0: Specifies whether the weapon
0 = invalid azimuth angle in word 2 is valid
1 = valid or invalid for this primary model
WEAPON angle (32 bit) Specifies the azimuth angle for
AZIMUTH aiming a weapon. Rotation about
z (vertical) axis, in degrees;
positive rotates to character's
left.
WEAPON angle (32 bit) Specifies the elevation angle for
ELEVATION aiming a weapon. Rotation about
y (horizontal) axis, in degrees;
positive rotates down
HEAD GAZE angle (32 bit) Specifies the azimuth angle for
AZIMUTH the head gaze.
HEAD GAZE angle (32 bit) Specifies the elevation angle for
ELEVATION the head gaze.

3-158 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3133
DI-Guy Model Definition
This opcode allows the host to bind a DI-Guy database model to a
motion system in order to produce an active DI-Guy moving model. The
active moving model can then be controlled using the 3134 Opcode
(DI-Guy Model Update). This command also allows the unbinding of a
DI-Guy moving model, which frees the motion system.
31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS 0011 0001 0011 0011
1 MOTION SYSTEM MODEL SLOT
2 LOCAL POLYGON INTENSITY LOCAL LIGHT INTENSITY
3 LOCAL LIGHT MASK
4 LOCAL POLYGON MASK
5 RESERVED
6 RESERVED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bits 24–31 Unused.
bit 23: If set, instructs the RT moving
0 = RT foreground non- model layer to process this model
critical processing during foreground critical time.
(default). This will result in the update for
1 = RT foreground this model on the GP(s) to occur
critical the same field the RT processes
processing. an update. If there are many DI
models active, the RT foreground
critical processing could be
dramatically increased degrading
expected system performance.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 22: Specifies moving model
0 = normal parameters will be cleaned up.
1 = clean Clean resets model selects,
position and velocity of the
model being unbound.
bit 21: Specifies whether local-light
0 = scalar intensity is set by the scalar or
1 = step by the steps in the LOCAL-LIGHT
INTENSITY field.
bit 20: Specifies whether local-polygon
0 = scalar intensity is set by the scalar or
1 = step by the steps in the LOCAL-
POLYGON INTENSITY field.
bit 19: Enables or disables rotational
0 = disable extrapolation for the primary
1 = enable model.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-159

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 18: Enables or disables translational
(CONT) 0 = disable extrapolation for the primary
1 = enable model.
bit 17: Specifies whether to bind a
0 = unbind model and a motion system.
1 = bind
bit 16: Specifies whether to process bit
0 = do not process 17.
1 = process
MODEL SLOT 0–2047 Specifies the database image
bound to the moving model.
MOTION 0-2047 Specifies the motion system used
SYSTEM for this moving-model definition.
LOCAL-LIGHT scalar A (16 bit) or If bit 21 in the flag field = 0, this
INTENSITY 16-bit integer (0–5) field specifies the scalar applied
to the lights’ modeled intensity.
If bit 21 in the flag field = 1, this
field specifies the polygon step
scalar applied to the polygons’
modeled intensity.
LOCAL- scalar A (16 bit) or If bit 20 in the flag field = 0, this
POLYGON 16-bit integer (0–5) field specifies the scalar applied
INTENSITY to the polygons’ modeled
intensity. If bit 20 in the flag field
= 1, this field specifies the
polygon step scalar applied to the
polygons’ modeled intensity.
LOCAL-LIGHT 0 = off Specifies the active local-light
MASK 1 = on groups for this moving model.
There is one bit for each of the
32 local-polygon groups.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

LOCAL- 0 = off Specifies the active local-polygon
POLYGON 1 = on groups for this moving model.
MASK There is one bit for each of the
32 local-polygon groups.

3-160 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3134
DI-Guy Model Update

This opcode is used to control the DI-Guy position, actions, weapon

selection, head gaze orientation, and weapon orientation.
31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS 0011 0001 0011 0100
1 MOVING MODEL ACTION TYPE MODEL/WEAPON
SEL
2 X OFFSET
3 Y OFFSET
4 Z OFFSET
5 HEADING
6 PITCH
7 ROLL
8 WEAPON AZIMUTH
9 WEAPON ELEVATION
10 HEAD GAZE AZIMUTH
11 HEAD GAZE ELEVATION
12 SPEED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bits 29–31 Unused.
bit 28: Specifies whether the speed in
0 = invalid word 12 is valid or invalid for this
1 = valid primary model.
bit 27: Specifies whether the head gaze
0 = invalid elevation angle in word 11 is
1 = valid valid or invalid for this primary
model.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 26: Specifies whether the head gaze
0 = invalid azimuth angle in word 10 is valid
1 = valid or invalid for this primary model.
bit 25: Specifies whether the weapon
0 = invalid aim elevation angle in word 9 is
1 = valid valid or invalid for this primary
model.
bit 24: Specifies whether the weapon
0 = invalid aim azimuth in angle word 8 is
1 = valid valid or invalid for this primary
model.
bit 23: Specifies whether the action type
0 = invalid value is valid or invalid for this
1 = valid primary model.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-161

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 22: Specifies whether the pitch value
0 = invalid in word 7 is valid or invalid for
1 = valid this primary model.
FLAGS bit 21: Specifies whether the roll value
(CONT) 0 = invalid in word 6 is valid or invalid for
1 = valid this primary model.
bit 20: Specifies whether the heading
0 = invalid value in word 5 is valid or invalid
1 = valid for this primary model.
bit 19: Specifies whether the z offset
0 = invalid value in word 4 is valid or invalid
1 = valid for this primary model.
bit 18: Specifies whether the y offset
0 = invalid value in word 3 is valid or invalid
1 = valid for this primary model.
bit 17: Specifies whether the x offset
0 = invalid value in word 2 is valid or invalid
1 = valid for this primary model.
bit 16: If set to 0, the current
0 = extrapolation extrapolation setting is
1 = disable maintained. If set to 1,
extrapolation will be temporarily
disabled.
MOVING 0-2047 Specifies the primary model
MODEL number.
ACTION TYPE 0-255 Controls the motions of the DI
Guy (i.e., Stand_ready,
kneel_ready, prone_ready, and
others). The actions are defined
in the Model Spec Sheet.
MODEL/ 0-255 Specifies the current selected

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

WEAPON weapon (i.e., No weapon, M16,
SELECT M24, and others). The value 0
means no model is rendered, 1
means render only main model,
2 through 255 means render
main model along with weapon
type selected. The available
weapons are defined in the Model
Spec Sheet.
X OFFSET Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the x offset from the
origin of the parent moving
model to the primary model.
Y OFFSET Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the y offset from the
origin of the parent moving
model to the primary model.

3-162 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Z OFFSET Scaled distance (32 bit) Specifies the z offset from the
origin of the parent moving
model to the primary model.
HEADING angle (32 bit) Specifies the heading of the
primary model.
PITCH angle (32 bit) Specifies the pitch of the primary
model.
ROLL angle (32 bit) Specifies the roll of the primary
model.
WEAPON angle (32 bit) Specifies the azimuth angle for
AZIMUTH aiming a weapon.
WEAPON angle (32 bit) Specifies the elevation angle for
ELEVATION aiming a weapon.
HEAD GAZE angle (32 bit) Specifies the azimuth angle for
AZIMUTH the head gaze.
HEAD GAZE angle (32 bit) Specifies the elevation angle for
ELEVATION the head gaze.
SPEED scalar D (32bit) Specifies the speed of the
character motion in database
units/second.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-163

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3140
Radar Patch Request
This opcode contains parameters to control the rendering of the
radar data, and its presence is a trigger to generate a new dataset.
The radar output mode and other modes are configured via the
RADAR CLI command. Note that as with other EP opcodes, the data
is in big endian format.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 FLAGS VIEWPORT # 0011 0001 0100 0000
1 REQUEST ID
2 RANGE X / LONGITUDE
3 RANGE Y / LATITUDE
4 CENTERPOINT LONGITUDE
5 CENTERPOINT LONGITUDE (CONT)
6 CENTERPOINT LATITUDE
7 CENTERPOINT LATITUDE (CONT)
8 PATCH X / LONGITUDE OFFSET
9 PATCH Y / LATITUDE OFFSET

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS Bit 31: Specifies whether to use the
0 = use specified position position that is a part of this
1 = use ownship (mm 0) as opcode as the center point for
patch center point the patch, or whether to just use

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the current ownship position.

Bit 30: Specifies whether the input is in

nautical miles or degrees
0 = range and offset values
longitude/latitude.
are in nautical miles.
1 = range and offset values
are in degrees longitude &
latitude.

Bit 29: Specifies paging center update,

0 = radar data as normal without radar data.
1 = update the center point,
and corresponding
paging center without
generating new radar
data.

3-164 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT # 0-31 Specifies the radar viewport to
which this request applies.
Currently the ep2Radar system
only supports 1 viewport so this
should be 0. *DEPRECATED*
REQUEST ID 32-bit integer An identifier that is output with
the requested patch when it is
complete.
RANGE X / IEEE float (32-bit) The range in nautical miles or
LONGITUDE degrees longitude from the patch
center point to the patch edge in
the X (east-west) direction. Thus
the total patch side size is
actually twice the range
specified.
RANGE Y / IEEE float (32-bit) The range in nautical miles or
LATITUDE degrees latitude from the patch
center point to the patch edge in
the Y (north-south) direction.
Thus the total patch side size is
actually twice the range specified.
CENTER IEEE float (64-bit) Specifies the longitude of the
POINT center point for the radar data
LONGITUDE patch.

CENTER IEEE float (64-bit) Specifies the latitude of the center

POINT point for the radar data patch.
LATITUDE

PATCH X / IEEE float (32-bit) An X offset of the patch from the

LONGITUDE center point, in nautical miles or
OFFSET degrees longitude.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

*DEPRECATED*
PATCH Y / IEEE float (32-bit) A Y offset of the patch from the
LATITUDE center point, in nautical miles or
OFFSET degrees latitude.
*DEPRECATED*

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-165

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3150
IRPP Noise Control

This command controls several types of post processor noise:

dynamic noise, white noise or scintillation, and fixed-patter noise. It
supersedes portions of opcodes 3029 Noise Control, 3061 IRPP
Mode, 3063 IRPP Distortion, and 306A IRPP Configuration.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT E D C B A
0011 0001 0101 0000
1 NOISE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 23 – 22: reserved (E)
bits 21 – 20: Target (D) Specifies the noise feature that is the
0 = primary noise target of this packet
1 = secondary noise
2 = white noise
3 = fixed-pattern noise
bit 19: GainCorrelation (C) Controls gain-correlated noise
0 = don’t correlate noise
1 = correlate noise to gain
bit 18: NoiseEnable (C) Applies only to white noise
0 = disable
1 = enable

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bits 17 – 16: NoiseLength (A) Controls the average pixel length of
0 = 1 pixel random dynamic noise; has no effect
1 = 2 pixels on white noise
2 = 4 pixels
3 = 8 pixels
NOISE IEEE Float Dynamic noise
0.0 to 1.0

3-166 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3151
IRPP AC Coupling

This command controls IRPP AC coupling. It supersedes portions of

opcodes 3061 IRPP Mode and 306A IRPP Configuration.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT FLAGS B A 0011 0001 0101 0001
1 AC COUPLING DECAY

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 23 – 19: reserved
bit 18: Microseconds (B) Specifies whether AC coupling decay
0 = decay in native units is in native units or microseconds
1 = decay in microseconds
bits 17 – 16: Mode (A) Controls AC coupling mode
0 = off
1 = field
2 = line
3 = field
NOISE IEEE Float AC coupling decay
Positive real value

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-167

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3152
IRPP Histogram Parameters

This command controls IRPP histogram collection. It supersedes a

portion of opcode 306A IRPP Configuration.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT reserved 0011 0001 0101 0010
1 HISTOGRAM START X
2 HISTOGRAM END X
3 HISTOGRAM STARTY
4 HISTOGRAM END Y
5 HISTOGRAM THRESHOLD

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
HISTOGRAM START IEEE float Left edge of rectangular
X 0.0 to 1.0 histogram collection region
(0.000 is left edge of screen)
HISTOGRAM END X IEEE float Right edge of rectangular
0.0 to 1.0 histogram collection region
(1.000 is right edge of screen)
HISTOGRAM START IEEE float Top edge of rectangular
Y 0.0 to 1.0 histogram collection region
(0.000 is top of screen)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

HISTOGRAM END Y IEEE float Bottom edge of rectangular
0.0 to 1.0 histogram collection region
(1.000 is bottom of screen)
HISTOGRAM IEEE float Input intensity below which
THRESHOLD 0.0 to 1.0 pixels will be omitted from the
histogram collection (0.000 is
black, 1.000 is white)

3-168 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3153
IRPP AGC Parameters

This command controls IRPP automatic gain and level control. It

supersedes portions of opcode 306A IRPP Configuration.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT FLAGS A 0011 0001 0101 0011
1 GAIN FILTER ALPHA
2 LEVEL FILTER ALPHA
3 DISTRIBUTION CENTER
4 INTENSITY BINS
5 LOWER GAIN LIMIT
6 UPPER GAIN LIMIT

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 23 – 18: reserved
bits 17-16: AgcMode (A) Controls the AGC mode
0 = Manual gain/level
1 = Automatic gain/level
2 = Automatic gain
3 = reserved
GAIN FILTER IEEE Float Controls the rate of gain changes
ALPHA 0.0 to 1.0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

LEVEL FILTER IEEE Float Controls the rate of level changes
ALPHA 0.0 to 1.0
DISTRIBUTION IEEE Float Desired position of histogram
CENTER 0.0 to 1.0 weighted average after
application of gain and level
INTENSITY BINS IEEE Float Fraction of intensity bins in
0.0 to 1.0 histogram skirt for AGC using
Skirt algorithm
LOWER GAIN LIMIT IEEE Float Used by Skirt AGC algorithm
0.0 to 1.0
UPPER GAIN LIMIT IEEE Float Used by Skirt AGC algorithm
0.0 to 1.0

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-169

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3154
IRPP Blur

This command controls the spatial blur filter of the XG and EXG
sensor effects generators. BlurSelect mode, in which a customer-
supplied blur kernel is selected, is only available on RVP4 or later-
based versions of the EXG sensor effects generators. This opcode
supersedes portions of opcode 3063 Distortion.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT FLAGS B A 0011 0001 0101 0100
1 BLUR / BLUR H / BLUR SELECT
2 BLUR V

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 07 – 03: reserved
bit 02: SharpenEnable (B) Enables or disables edge
0 = disable edge enhancement enhancement. When
1 = enable edge enhancement SharpenEnable is set, blur
values range from 0.0 =
maximum sharpening through
0.5 = pass-through to 1.0 =
maximum blur.
bits 01 – 00: BlurMode (A) Specifies blur mode.
0 = isotropic Gaussian blur BlurSelect mode is available

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1 = anisotropic Gaussian blur only on RVP4 or later-based
2 = Blur select (RVP4 or later) versions of EXG.
3 = reserved
BLUR / IEEE float Controls all blur for isotropic
BLUR H / blur mode, or horizontal blur
BLUR SELECT BlurMode = 0: 0.0 to 1.0
for anisotropic blur mode, or
BlurMode = 1: 0.0 to 1.0
blur kernel selection in blur
BlurMode = 2: 0.0 to 255.0
select mode.
BLUR V IEEE float Controls vertical blur for
0.0 to 1.0 anisotropic blur

3-170 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3155
IRPP Spatial Filter

This command controls the optional 11x11 asymmetrical spatial

filter.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT reserved 0011 0001 0101 0101
1 reserved KERNEL SELECT FLAGS B A

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 07 – 02: reserved
bit 01: SpatialFilterToTracker (B) Selects the input for the target
0 = disable tracker – either the normal
1 = spatial filter output to tracker input or the output of the
spatial filter
bit 00: SpatialFilterEnable (A) Enables or disables the spatial
0 = disable filter.
1 = enable
KERNEL Integer Selects a preloaded filter
SELECT 0 – 255 kernel to be loaded into the
spatial filter; if the selected
kernel is invalid, the spatial

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

filter is automatically disabled

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-171

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3156
IRPP Degraded Elements

This command is used to control the display of sensor element

degradation. At present, types of element degradation are
mismatched elements and dead elements. This opcode supersedes
portions of opcodes 3061 IRPP Mode, and 3063 IRPP Distortion.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT FLAGS A 0011 0001 0101 0110
1 DEGRADED ELEMENTS

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 23 – 17: reserved
bit 16: Type (A) Selects the type of element
0 = mismatched elements degradation being controlled.
1 = dead elements
DEGRADED IEEE Float Controls the amount of
ELEMENTS 0.0 to 1.0 element degradation.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-172 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3157
EXG Target Tracker Control

This command controls aspects of the EXG target tracker. It

supersedes portions of opcodes 3061 Mode and 306D EXG Target
Tracker Offset Track Data.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT TRACKER ID 0011 0001 0101 0111
1 reserved FLAGS C B A
2 OFFSET X
3 OFFSET Y

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
TRACKER ID Integer(0-14) Specifies the target tracker
number.
FLAGS bits 07 – 04: reserved
bits 03 – 02: ContrastSelect Sets desired target contrast –
0 = white must be set prior to target
1 = black acquisition
2 = auto
3 = reserved
bit 01: Autotrack Enables and disables the
0 = tracker disabled target tracker
1 = tracker enabled

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 00: Designate Application-specific target
0 = Designate inactive tracker control
1 = Designate active
OFFSET X IEEE float (-0.5 to +0.5) Horizontal screen location of
desired track position in
fraction of horizontal FOV;
center of the screen is the
origin, left edge of screen is -
0.5 and right edge of screen is
+0.5
OFFSET Y IEEE float (-0.5 to +0.5) Vertical screen location of
desired track position in
fraction of vertical FOV; center
of the screen is the origin,
bottom edge of screen is -0.5
and top edge of screen is +0.5

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-173

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3158
IRPP Video Control

This command controls input video switching and output video

control.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT FLAGS 0011 0001 0101 1000

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 23 – 20: reserved
bit 19: VideoSwitch Controls the video switcher, if
0 = no action included, by causing it to
1 = switch to “me” switch to the video from this
viewport. If the video from
this viewport is already
selected, it has no effect.
bit 18: SymbologyDisableBlue Disables symbology on the
0 = symbology on all colors blue channel.
1 = disable symbology on blue
bit 17: SymbologyDisable Disables all symbology.
0 = symbology on
1 = symbology off
bit 16: VideoDisable Disables or blanks the video;
0 = video on sync signals are unaffected.
1 = video off

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-174 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3159
IRPP Persistence

This command controls temporal filtering of the video. It supersedes

portions of opcode 306F IRPP Viewport Control Data.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT FLAGS B A 0011 0001 0101 1001
1 PERSISTENCE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 23 – 18: reserved
bit 17: BiasWhite Controls whether temporal
0 = don’t bias white filtering is biased to highlight
1 = bias white the motion of white targets.
The default is to disable the
bias.
bit 16: Freeze Used to freeze the video.
0 = don’t freeze
1 = freeze current frame
PERSISTENCE IEEE float Specifies the persistence
0.0 to 1.0 function decay rate according
to the following formula,
where F is the number of
frames for decay to 5% and P
is the persistence value:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

P = 256×(0.05↑(1/F) )

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-175

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

315A
IRPP Zoom

This command controls digital zoom, which is implemented by

repeating lines and pixels. Digital zoom is centered in the viewport,
but panning controls are provided to allow all portions of the image
to be displayed using digital zoom. This opcode supersedes portions
of opcode 306F IRPP Viewport Control Data.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT FLAGS 0011 0001 0101 1010
1 PAN X
2 PAN Y

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 23 – 16 bit 23: Zoom Factor
0 – The zoom value in the
remaining bits will be a power
of 2.
1 – Use the value in the
remaining bits to specify the
zoom factor.
When Zoom Factor is 0
bits 22 – 16: Zoom
0 = 1x (no zoom)
1 = 2x zoom

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2 = 4x zoom
3 = 8x zoom
When Zoom Factor is 1
bits 22 – 16: Zoom
1 = 1x (no zoom)
2 = 2x zoom
3 = 3x zoom
4 = 4x zoom
8 = 8x zoom.
PAN X IEEE Float Pans the image to the left
-0.5 to +0.5 (negative value) or right
(positive value) by a fraction
of the unzoomed FOV.

3-176 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

PAN Y IEEE Float Pans the image up (negative
-0.5 to +0.5 value) or down (positive
value) by a fraction of the
unzoomed FOV.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-177

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

315B
IRPP Histogram Clipping Plane
This command controls up to four clipping planes that can be used
to modify the histogram collection region defined by opcode 3152
IRPP Histogram Parameters.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT FLAGS B A 0011 0001 0101 1011
1 POSITION X
2 POSITION Y
3 NORMAL X
4 NORMAL Y

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
FLAGS bits 23 – 17: reserved
bit 18: PlaneEnable (B) Use to enable or disable the
0 = disable selected histogram clipping
1 = enable plane
bits 17 – 16: PlaneSelect (A) Selects one of four available
0 = plane 0 histogram clipping planes
1 = plane 1
2 = plane 2
3 = plane 3
POSITION X IEEE float Specifies the x coordinate of a
0.0 to 1.0 point on the clipping plane;
the origin is the upper left
corner of the screen, x is to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the right
POSITION Y IEEE float Specifies the y coordinate of a
0.0 to 1.0 point on the clipping plane;
the origin is the upper left
corner of the screen, y is down
NORMAL X IEEE float The x component of a unit
-1.0 to 1.0 vector perpendicular to the
clipping plane and pointing
into the collection region
NORMAL Y IEEE float The y component of a unit
-1.0 to 1.0 vector perpendicular to the
clipping plane and pointing
into the collection region

3-178 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

315C
IRPP BlurEx
This command controls the spatial blur filters of the XG and EXG
sensor effects generators. KernelSelect mode, in which a customer-
supplied blur kernel is selected, is only available on RVP4 or later-
based versions of the EXG sensor effects generators. This opcode
supersedes portions of opcode 3063 Distortion, as well as opcodes
0x3154 IRPP Blur and 0x3155 IRPP Spatial Filter.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 Viewport Flags Opcode = 0x315C
1 Blur / Blur H / Blur Select
2 Blur V

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Viewport Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
Flags bit 23 – 22: reserved
bit 21: ToTracker (A) Routes the output of the filter
to the target tracker when set.
0 = Not routed to target tracker
1 = Output routed to target tracker

bits 20-19: Filter Select (A) Indicates which blur filter is

being controlled. Only RVP4 or
0 = primary blur filter
later supports secondary blur
1 = secondary blur filter
filter.
2 = software spatial filter
3 = reserved

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bits 18 – 16: BlurMode (Mode) Specifies blur mode.
BlurSelect mode is available
0 = off
only on RVP4 or later-based
1 = isotropic Gaussian blur
versions of EXG sensor effects
2 = isotropic sharpen/blur
generators.
3 = anisotropic Gaussian blur
4 = kernel select
5-7 = reserved
Blur / Blur H IEEE float Controls all blur for isotropic
/ Blur Select blur mode and isotropic
BlurMode = 0: N/A
sharpen/blur mode, horizontal
BlurMode = 1: 0.0 to 1.0
blur for anisotropic blur mode,
BlurMode = 2: 0.0 to 1.0
and blur kernel selection in
BlurMode = 3: 0.0 to 1.0
kernel select mode.
BlurMode = 4: 0.0 to 255.0
Blur V IEEE float Controls vertical blur for
0.0 to 1.0 anisotropic blur

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-179

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3166
EXG Video Continuous Zoom Control
This command controls the continuous zoom functionality in the
EXG. The software continuous zoom is only supported as part of the
software rendering used for the PIP functionality.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT unused C E Opcode = 0x3166
1 Zoom Value

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Viewport Integer 8 bit Specifies the viewport number.
24-31
C Bits 17-18 Zoom control
1-SW Continuous Zoom.
E Bit 16 Enable/Disable Continuous Zoom. (0-
Disable, 1 – Enable).
Zoom Value 0-31 Defines Zoom Value used to scale the
video. [1.0 – 16.0] – IEEE float
(32 bit)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-180 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3167
EXG Clear Software Render

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 Viewport Flags 0x3167
1 Intensity

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Viewport Integer 8 bit Specifies the viewport number.
24-31
Flags Bits 16-23 bit 16: Clear Enable
0 – The image will be selected
from the DMA.
1 – Set the image to the given
intensity.
Intensity 0-31 Specifies the intensity to use in
clearing the image.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-181

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3168
EXG Software Render Position

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 Viewport Flags 0x3168
1 Y X
Height Width
Source Center Y Source Center X

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Viewport Integer 8 bit Specifies the viewport number.
24-31
Flags Bits 16-23 bit 16: PIP Enable
0 – The PIP image will not be
displayed.
1 – The PIP image will be
displayed.
bits 17-23: Reserved.
X Bits 0-15 Specifies the position, in pixels, of the
left side of the PIP render window.
Y Bits 16-31 Specifies the position, in pixels, of the
top of the PIP render window
Width Bits 0-15 Specifies the width, in pixels, of the
PIP render window
Height Bits 16-31 Specifies the height, in pixels, of the
PIP render window
Source Bits 0-15 Specifies the X position, in pixels, of

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Center X the center of the source data that will
be used for the software rendering of
the PIP window
Source Bits 16-31 Specifies the Y position, in pixels, of
Center Y the center of the source data that will
be used for the software rendering of
the PIP window.

3-182 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3184
Collision-Detection Line Segment Response
This command returns collision-detection data calculated for a
specific CD command set. This version assumes that the testpoints
will have been set up in the initialization file and that the host will
not be requesting line segments each field.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 TEST MOVING MODEL 0011 0001 1000 0100
1 HOST # SEGMENT # RESERVED
2 CMD # C MATERIAL CODE
3 RESERVED
4 RESERVED
5 RESERVED
6 RESERVED
7 RESERVED
8 RESERVED
9 X NORMAL
10 Y NORMAL
11 Z NORMAL

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

TEST Integer Specifies the moving model with
MOVING which the CD command set is in
MODEL collision.
HOST # Integer Specifies the Host Message Number.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SEGMENT # 0–31 Specifies which line segment of the
CD command set is in collision.
CMD # 0–255 Specifies the CD command set for this
response.
C bit 15: Specifies whether the command set is
0 = no in collision or not.
1 = yes
MATERIAL integer Material type index code. The value
CODE specified is the type of material with
which the CD command set collided
(0–2048). At present, only 3 and 4
are used.
X, Y, Z Scaled distance format Specifies the x, y and z components
NORMALS (32 bit) of the collision normal.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-183

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3190
Time of Year Response
Legacy hosts expect a response to a 3025 TOY opcode, so the IG
sends the DB loaded response opcode 3190 with no parameters
back to the host.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 reserved 0011 0001 1001 0000
1 reserved

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

None

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-184 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

3203
IRPP Gain, Level, and Noise Response

This command contains the IRPP gain, level, and noise values for
the specified IRPP viewport. Opcode 3203 is only applicable to
systems with an IRPP (XG, IXG, or EXG).

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused unused 0011 0010 0000 0011
1 VIEWPORT unused NOISE
2 GAIN LEVEL

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT 0–15 Specifies the number of the IRPP
viewport for which gain and level
values are being returned.
NOISE scalar B (16 bit) Specifies the detector noise gain
for the specified IRPP viewport. A
value of 0.0 represents no noise
(noise off).
GAIN fraction B (16 bit) Specifies the gain value for the
(effective range: 0 to 64) specified IRPP viewport.
(Minimum gain = 0.0.)
LEVEL fraction B (16 bit) Specifies the level value for the
(effective range: –32 to specified IRPP viewport.
32) (Minimum level = –32.0.)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-185

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3206
EXG Target Tracker Response

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 Confidence Tracker ID 3206
1 VIEWPORT Sensor ID POLARITY MODE
2 FRAME COUNT
3 ERROR AZIMUTH
4 ERROR ELEVATION
5 GATE AZIMUTH
6 GATE ELEVATION
7 GATE SIZE HORIZONTAL
8 GATE SIZE VERTICAL

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Confidence 0 – No confidence Confidence that the target
255 – Full tracker is tracking the target.
confidence
Tracker ID 0 – 255 ID of the target tracker
0 0-15 Opcode # 3206
Viewport 0 – 31 Specifies the viewport number

Sensor ID 0 – 255 ID of source sensor device

POLARITY 0–1 (integer) Track polarity; if a target is being
0 = white target tracker, shows the polarity of the
1 = black target target.
MODE 0 – 255 Application-specific tracker state

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

FRAME COUNT 0–0xffffffff Frame count corresponding
to the tracker results in this
packet
ERROR AZIMUTH –1.0 to 1.0 Horizontal tracking error relative to
horizontal offset, specified as a
fraction of horizontal screen size; left
is negative, right is positive
ERROR ELEVATION –1.0 to 1.0 Vertical tracking error relative to
vertical track offset; specified as a
fraction of vertical screen size; up is
positive, down is negative
GATE AZIMUTH –0.5 to 0.5 Horizontal screen position of the track
gate center relative to screen center,
specified as a fractions of horizontal
screen size; left is negative, right is
positive.

3-186 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

GATE ELEVATION –0.5 to 0.5 Vertical screen position of the track
gate center, relative to the screen
center, specified as a fraction of
vertical screen size; up is positive,
down is negative.
GATE SIZE 0 to 1.0 Track gate horizontal size, specified as
HORIZONTAL a fraction of horizontal screen size.
GATE SIZE 0 to 1.0 Track gate vertical size, specified as a
VERTICAL fraction of vertical screen size.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-187

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3207
EXG Thermal Cuer Response

This response packet is used to report hot spots found by the EXG
Thermal Cuer. One packet is returned per hot spot. This opcode is
only applicable to systems with an EXG configured with thermal cuer
software.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT reserved 0011 0010 0000 0111
1 POSITION X POSITION Y
2 SIZE X SIZE Y
3 PEAK INTENSITY CONTRAST

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Integer (0 – 255) Specifies the viewport number
0 – 31: valid viewports
32 – 255: reserved
POSITION X Fraction A (16 bit) Horizontal position of the hot spot
–0.5 to +0.5 center in fraction of horizontal FOV;
positive X is to the right
POSITION Y Fraction A (16 bit) Vertical position of the hot spot
–0.5 to +0.5 center in fraction of vertical FOV;
positive Y is up
SIZE X Scalar B (16 bit) Horizontal size of the hot spot in
0.0000 – 0.999 fraction of horizontal FOV
SIZE Y Scalar B (16 bit) Vertical size of the hot spot in fraction
0.0000 – 0.999 of vertical FOV

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

PEAK Scalar B (16 bit) Peak relative intensity of the hot spot,
INTENSITY 0.0000 – 0.999 where 0.000 is black and 1.000 is
white
CONTRAST Scalar B (16 bit) Difference in relative intensity
0.0000 – 0.999 between the peak and the average
background, where 0.000 is black and
1.000 is white

3-188 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

320A
Range Focus

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 Viewport Mode 0011 0010 0000 1010
1 Lens Scalar
2 Lens Scalar – (cont)
3 Focus Distance
4 Focus Distance - (cont)
5 unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MODE Integer (0-3)
0=off 0 - turns off the depth field
1=linear effect.
2=hybrid 1 - means Focus Distance will be
3=on treated as a linear control.
2 - means Focus Distance will be
treated as non-linear control.

VIEWPORT 0-63 Specifies the viewport that is

being controlled.
LENS IEEE double (64 bit) A composite user-tunable
SCALAR number representing the
0.0 – 1.0
combined effects of the lens
aperture and focal length. This
will control the depth of field

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

about the selected focus
distance.
FOCUS IEEE double (64 bit) A host-controlled number
DISTANCE representing the current focus
0.0 – 1.0
distance setting commanded by
the operator. A low number
means to focus near the
eyepoint. 1.0 assumes a focus
distance of infinity.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-189

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

320B
Catenary
Controls and defines an instance of a catenary by specifying the
endpoints and length of the catenary. Endpoints are relative to a
moving model.
31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 Unused 0011 0010 0000 1011
1 Cable Number Cable Type Unused Flags
2 Start MM Start SubModel
3 Start Offset X
4 Start Offset Y
5 Start Offset Z
6 End MM End SubModel
7 End Offset X
8 End Offset Y
9 End Offset Z
10 Length
11 Unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CABLE NUMBER 0 - 255 The number of the catenary
being controlled
CABLE TYPE 0 - 31 The previously defined catenary
type
FLAGS bit 0: Enable Enable or Disable the specified

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0 = disable catenary cable
1 = enable
bits 7 - 1: reserved
START MM Integer The motion system to which the
catenary start point is attached
START 0 - 255 The submodel to which the
SUBMODEL catenary start point is attached
(Not Implemented)
START OFFSET X Float The x offset from the origin of
the mm to the catenary start
point
START OFFSET Y Float The y offset from the origin of
the mm to the catenary start
point
START OFFSET Z Float The z offset from the origin of

3-190 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

the mm to the catenary start

point
END MM Integer The motion system to which the
catenary end point is attached
END SUBMODEL 0 - 255 The submodel to which the
catenary end point is attached
(Not Implemented)
END OFFSET X Float The x offset from the origin of
the mm to the catenary end
point
END OFFSET Y Float The y offset from the origin of
the mm to the catenary end
point
END OFFSET Z Float The z offset from the origin of
the mm to the catenary end
point
LENGTH Float The length of the catenary in
feet. If this length is less than
the distance between the
endpoints, a straight line will be
drawn between the endpoints.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-191

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

320C
Mirror Control
This command is used to control the pan and tilt of a viewport mirror.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 VIEWPORT reserved 0011 0010 0000 1100
1 PAN
2 TILT

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

VIEWPORT Bit 31-24 Mirror viewport ID
PAN IEEE 32 bit float Mirror pan angle (degrees)
TILT IEEE 32 bit float Mirror tilt angle (degrees)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-192 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

321A
Sea States Global Control
Controls global sea state values like the sea state number and enable\disable sea
states.

31 28 27 24 23 20 19 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 Unused 0011 0010 0001 1010
1 Sea State Flags
2 Unused

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SEA STATE 0 Disassociates wave motion and
texture from wind direction and
speed.

Specifies a Sea State Level,

1 … 13 which will cause an associated
script file to be executed, the
wave heading to be controlled by
wind direction, and the sea state
motion and texture to be
controlled by wind speed and
direction.

FLAGS bit 0: Waves Enable Disassociates wave motion and

0 = disable texture from wind direction and
1 = enable speed.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 1: Force Update Force update on Wave Control
Parameters
bits 7 - 1: Unused

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-193

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

3250
ASCIITwo
This command allows the host to specify one or more command-
line-interpreter (CLI) commands. This Opcode is similar to the 3050
ASCII opcode, but extends the length to better support the full
range of CLI commands. The final character in an ASCII command
must be a null character (0). Any unused character fields in the
ASCII command for CLI commands shorter than 255 characters
must also be filled with the null character.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 unused 0011 0010 0101 0000
1 CHAR [1] CHAR [2] CHAR [3] CHAR [4]
↨↨ ↨↨ ↨↨ ↨↨ ↨↨
64 CHAR [253] CHAR [254] CHAR [255] CHAR [256]

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CHAR[N] Valid ASCII character Specifies a character in a CLI
command.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-194 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Extended Opcodes
This section contains the EP2 extended opcodes. Extended opcodes
are an EP2 mechanism for exposing real-time functions to the host
writer in an automated manner.
NOTE: Extended opcodes replace the ESIG table commands, and
also obviate the need to introduce new opcode types in the
future.
All extended opcodes essentially consist of a header containing
addressing information that specifies the intended module/function
within the EP2 real-time code that handles the opcode. For opcodes
that request information to be returned to the host, this header also
contains user addressing fields to be filled out by the host writer so
that the host can detect/route the returned information (which will
be returned in the form of an extended opcode, with the user-
specified addressing information as the header of the returned
opcode.)
NOTE: Where a request has a corresponding response, the
response opcode directly following the request opcode (on
the following page).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-195

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/002C

Number of Airports Request
This command requests the number of airports available. The
airport data is returned via Number of Airports Response opcode.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x002C
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 RESPONSE PROCESS = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (24)
EXECUTION 0x0002 = Background IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x002C Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from the EP2. Copied
into the RESPONSE PRIORITY

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

of the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.
USER DATA Data echoed back in Additional data can be entered
response here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.

3-196 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000
Number of Airports Response
The opcode returns the number of airports available in response to
the Number of Airports request opcode.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0014 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 COUNT

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0014 Length of opcode in bytes (20)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 = Background Copied from the RESPONSE
PRIORITY of the request
opcode.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP2 to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.
COUNT 1–255 Airport Index (number of
airports) provides the
maximum number that are

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

available.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-197

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/002D

Airport Information Request

This command requests the airport information for the airport in the
index field. The host requests information for each airfield by
incrementing the index field from 0 through to the value given in the
‘count field’ in the Number of Airfields Response minus 1 or by
requesting information about a particular ICAO.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x002D
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 RESPONSE PROCESS = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA
6 INDEX/ICAO [0..3]

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x001C Length of opcode in bytes (28)
EXECUTION 0x0002 = Background IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x002D Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from the EP2. Copied
into the RESPONSE PRIORITY
of the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user-supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.

3-198 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

USER DATA Data echoed back in Additional data can be entered
response here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.
INDEX/ICAO [0..3] 0–65535 for index or 4 If a number between 0–65535
valid ASCII characters for is entered, EP2 interprets this
ICAO as an airport index number.
If 4 valid ASCII characters are
entered, EP2 interprets them
as an ICAO code.
Example: San Francisco =
KSFO

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-199

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000
Airport Information Response
This response uses the index number or ICAO set in the
INDEX/ICAO field of request sub opcode 0005/002D to determine
which specific airport data is returned.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 AIRPORT FLAGS
5 NUM RUNWAY CONTAMINANTS = 4
6 SPRING CONTAMINANTS
7 SUMMER CONTAMINANTS
8 AUTUMN CONTAMINANTS
9 WINTER CONTAMINANTS
10 AIRPORT INDEX
11 ICAO [0] ICAO [1] ICAO [2] ICAO [3]
12 GATE COUNT
13 RUNWAY COUNT
14 GATE ID ARRAY SIZE
15 FIRST GATE ID
16 ↕ ↕ ↕
17 LAST GATE ID
18 END A RUNWAY ID ARRAY SIZE
19 END A RWY 1 ID
20 ↕ ↕ ↕

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

21 END A RWY n ID
22 END B RUNWAY ID ARRAY SIZE
23 END B RWY 1 ID
24 ↕ ↕ ↕
25 END B RWY n ID
26 RUNWAY LIGHT GROUP ARRAY SIZE
27 LIGHT GROUP RWY 1
28 ↕ ↕ ↕
29 LIGHT GROUP RWY n
NOTE: The ARRAY SIZE fields are variable length depending on the
number of available gates and runways (A, B, and LIGHT
GROUP).

3-200 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE Hexadecimal number Total length of opcode in bytes
(variable)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 = Background Copied from the RESPONSE
PRIORITY of the request
opcode.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP2 to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.
AIRPORT FLAGS bits 31 – 7 Reserved

bit 6 – SMGCS SMGCS available.

0 = Not available
1 = Available
bit 5 – Surface material Surface material codes
code available.
0 = Not available
1 = Available
bit 4 – Sloping runways Sloping runways available.
0 = Not modeled If the runway is sloped in the
1 = Modeled real world but has been
modeled flat, then the host can
adjust the altimeter to give the
impression of a sloping
runway.
Bit 3 – Winter Airport Winter version of the Airport
0 = Not available available.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1 = Available
Bit 2 – Autumn Airport Autumn version of the Airport
0 = Not available available.
1 = Available
Bit 1 – Summer Airport Summer version of the Airport
0 = Not available available.
1 = Available
Bit 0 – Spring Airport Spring version of the Airport
0 = Not available available.
1 = Available
NUM RUNWAY 4 Number of runway contaminant
CONTAMINANTS seasons.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-201

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SPRING bits 31-9 Reserved
CONTAMINANTS,
bit 8 – Dry runway Dry runways available
SUMMER
0 = Not available
CONTAMINANTS,
1 = Available
AUTUMN
CONTAMINANTS, bit 7 – Wet runway Wet runways available
WINTER 0 = Not available
CONTAMINANTS, 1 = Available
bit 6 – Patchy wet Patchy wet runways available
runway
0 = Not available
1 = Available
bit 5 - Ice runway Ice runways available
0 = Not available
1 = Available
bit 4 – Patch ice runway Patchy ice runways available
0 = Not available
1 = Available
bit 3 – Snow runway Snow (75-100%) runways
0 = Not available available
1 = Available
bit 2 – Patchy snow Patchy snow (25%) runways
0 = Not available available
1 = Available
bit 1 – Partially cleared Partially cleared snow (50%)
0 = Not available runways available
1 = Available
bit 0 – Sand /dust Sand / dust, static
0 = Not available contamination available
1 = Available

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

AIRPORT INDEX 0–65535 Index number of airport for
which data is being returned
ICAO [0–3] Valid ASCII characters This field identifies the ICAO
code of the airfield in question.
For example San Francisco
would be KSFO.
GATE COUNT Integer (0–15) Identifies the number of gates
available on the airport
RUNWAY COUNT Integer (0–15) Identifies the number of
runways available on the
airport
GATE ID ARRAY Integer (0–256) Number of elements in the
SIZE GATE ID array. Each character
is included. Value will equal
GATE COUNT * 4

3-202 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

GATE ID 4 ASCII Characters Identifies the 4 letter
identification of each gate
END A RUNWAY ID Integer (0–256) Number of elements in the END
ARRAY SIZE A RUNWAY ID array. Each
character is included. Value will
equal RUNWAY COUNT * 4
END A RWY 1 ID 4 ASCII Characters If there are 2 runways, then 2
runway end Ids will be entered
to
in consecutive words.
END A RWY n ID
The field will always be left
justified and may include null
characters, for example:
[2][7][L][NULL] =27L
[1][7][NULL][NULL] =17
END B RUNWAY ID Integer (0–256) Number of elements in the END
ARRAY SIZE B RUNWAY ID array. Each
character is included. Value will
equal RUNWAY COUNT * 4
END B RWY 1 ID 4 ASCII Characters These are the reciprocal
runway end Ids, for example:
to
[0][9][R][NULL] = 09R
END B RWY n ID
[3][5][NULL][NULL] = 35
RUNWAY LIGHT Integer (0–256) Number of elements in the
GROUP ARRAY SIZE RUNWAY LIGHT GROUP array.
Value will equal RUNWAY
COUNT
LIGHT GROUP RWY 1 1–511 The light group for a runway is
the same for each end of that
to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

runway, so for two runways
LIGHT GROUP
there will be a light group
RUNWAY n
number entered in two
consecutive words

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-203

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/002F

Load Status Request
This feedback request may be sent to the IG at any time to determine
whether paging/loading has completed around the eyepoint. A set of
flags will be returned in the response describing the current
load/paging status. This request is typically used by hosts that blank
the video during repositions to mask distracting visuals while airports
page in, etc. The response is returned via an extended opcode
“callback.” The request accepts a set of 32 flags indicating the desired
information, and returns a similar set of flags to describe the result.
The flags argument is a set of 32 flags, with bit 0 being the “models
done” and bit 1 being the “terrain done” bit. Pass in flags with the
desired bits set, and get a response callback with the status indicated
in the same bits. (Note: input “done?” bits that are left clear are not
tested.) This command supports both a polling and non-polling mode.
If bit 31 is clear, the response is returned immediately as described
above, with any input “done?” bits reset appropriately. If bit 32 is
set, the response will only be returned when paging is complete (i.e.,
when each input “done?” flag has become true.)
NOTE: There are a number of ‘unused’ entries in this opcode to
allow for backward compatibility with EP1000. These
entries were used to specify the position of the area being
queried for load status and were always set to the eyepoint.
It is now assumed that the eyepoint is the position required
and so it is no longer necessary to enter the data from the
host.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0038 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0003

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x002F
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 RESPONSE PROCESS ID = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA
6 UNUSED
7 UNUSED
8 UNUSED
9 UNUSED
10 UNUSED
11 UNUSED
12 UNUSED
13 FLAGS

3-204 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0038 Length of opcode in bytes (56)
EXECUTION 0x0002 = Background IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x002F Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from the EP2. Copied
into the RESPONSE PRIORITY
of the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.
USER DATA 32 bit value Will be echoed back in the
response opcode as the first
“argument”
FLAGS Bit 0 set = models done? Flag bits that determine what is
Bit 1 set = Terrain done? being queried about the area.
Bit 2 set = Continuous If the non-polled mode is
Texture done selected then the IG makes a
Bit 31 set = Non-polled return as each of the 3
mode conditions are done

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-205

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000
Load Status Response

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0014 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 FLAGS

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0014 Total length of opcode in bytes
(variable)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 = Background Copied from the RESPONSE
PRIORITY of the request
opcode.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP2 to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.
FLAGS bit 0 Flag bits indicating the load
0 = Models not loaded status of the area queried.
1 = Models loaded

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bit 1
0 = Terrain not loaded
1 = Terrain loaded
bit 2
0 = Cont texture not loaded
1 = Cont texture loaded

3-206 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0030

Moving Model Request

This command requests information on a specified moving model.

The data is returned via a Moving Model Response opcode. A single
request can result in a single response or in a proactive or
continuous response, where the response is sent every Nth field, as
explained in the mode setting below. A request can also disable
responses from a previous request for proactive responses. If
multiple requests are issued over time for a moving model and
submodel, the last request always replaces former requests.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0024 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0030
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 RESPONSE PROCESS ID = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA
6 MOVING MODEL #
7 SUBMODEL #
8 FLAGS MODE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0024 Length of opcode in bytes (36)
EXECUTION 0x0002 = Background IG execution priority.
PRIORITY

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0030 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from EP2. Copied into
the RESPONSE PRIORITY of the
response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data transfer
set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-207

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

USER DATA One user-supplied 32-bit Additional data can be entered
value here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.
MOVING MODEL # 32-bit integer, Integer Moving model number for
which information is being
returned.
SUBMODEL # 32-bit integer, 0–255 Secondary submodel.
0 = primary model
1–255 = secondary
submodel
FLAGS bit 16 range is 0–1 Determines whether HAT/HOT
0 = do not return is returned with moving model
HAT/HOT information.
1 = return HAT and HOT
with moving model
information
bit 17 range is 0-1 If an MFE exists on the system,
0 = HAT test defaults to the associated HAT test will
MFE bypass the MFE when set to 1.
1 = HAT test bypasses When set to 0, the HAT test
MFE will default to an MFE.
bit 18 range is 0-1 If 1, a current time timestamp
0 = no timestamp is returned with the response.
1 = provide timestamp
bit 19 range is 0-1 For chained and sub-models,
0 = return relative setting bit 19 to 0 results in
position the model’s position being
1 = return world-space returned relative to its parent.
position Setting the bit to 1 returns the
model’s position in world

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

space.
Bits 20–31 Unused.
MODE 16-bit integer Mode of response:
–1 to N –1 = Disable proactive moving
model responses for this
moving model and
submodel.
0 = Send single response.
1 = Send proactive response
every field where possible.
N>1 = Send proactive
response every Nth field
where possible.

3-208 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000
Moving Model Response

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0044 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 MOVING MODEL
5 SUBMODEL
6 LONGITUDE
7 LONGITUDE (cont)
8 LATITUDE
9 LATITUDE (cont)
10 ALTITUDE
11 ALTITUDE (cont)
12 HEADING
13 PITCH
14 ROLL
15 HAT
16 HOT

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0044 Total length of opcode in bytes
(68)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 = Background Copied from the RESPONSE
PRIORITY of the request opcode.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP2 to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from the
& values request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA 32 bit value Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.
MOVING MODEL # 32-bit integer: Integer Moving model number for which
information is being returned.
SUBMODEL 32-bit integer: 0–255 Secondary submodel.
0 = primary model
1–255 = secondary
submodel

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-209

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

LONGITUDE IEEE double (64-bit) Specifies the current longitude of
the primary model or secondary
submodel (for sub- and chained
models, this is the x-position
relative to the parent, unless the
geodetic request flag bit was
set).
LATITUDE IEEE double (64-bit) Specifies the current latitude of
the primary model or secondary
submodel (for sub- and chained
models, this is the y-position
relative to the parent, unless the
geodetic request flag bit was
set).
ALTITUDE IEEE double (64-bit) Specifies the current altitude of
the primary model or secondary
submodel (for sub- and chained
models, this is the z-position
relative to the parent, unless the
geodetic request flag bit was
set).
HEADING IEEE float (32-bit, Specifies the heading of the
degrees) primary model or secondary
submodel, relative to true north
(for sub- and chained models,
this is relative to the parent,
unless the geodetic request flag
bit was set).
PITCH IEEE float (32-bit, Specifies the pitch of the primary
degrees) model or secondary submodel
(for sub- and chained models,

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

this is relative to the parent,
unless the geodetic request flag
bit was set).
ROLL IEEE float (32-bit, Specifies the roll or the primary
degrees) model or secondary submodel
(for sub- and chained models,
this is relative to the parent,
unless the geodetic request flag
bit was set).
HAT IEEE float (32-bit, feet) Specifies the height above
terrain of the specified model.
HOT IEEE float (32-bit, feet) Specifies the height of terrain
below the model, relative to
mean sea level.

3-210 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0034

Tracks Control
This command controls a previously defined track (See the CLI
TRACKS \DEFINE command for information on how to define a
track). Tracks control can also be used to implement ship wakes.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0024 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0034
3 TRACK NUMBER
4 TRACK TYPE
5 MM
6 X OFFSET
7 Y OFFSET
9 MODE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0024 Length of opcode in bytes (40).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0034 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
TRACK NUMBER 32-bit Integer The track to control.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0–127
TRACK TYPE 32-bit Integer The track type (See the CLI
0–127 TRACKS \DEFINE command).
MM 32-bit Integer The moving model to which the
Integer track is attached.
X OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The X offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the track is to originate.
Y OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Y offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the track is to originate.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-211

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MODE 32-bit Integer The desired mode of the track.
–1 = no change
0 = start
1 = stop (drawing)
2 = clean (stop and
remove)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-212 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0035

Bow Wake Control
This command controls a previously defined bow wake (See the CLI
BOWWAKE \DEFINE command for information on how to define a
bow wake). Bow wake control can also be used to implement ship
wakes.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0024 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0035
3 BOWWAKE NUMBER
4 BOWWAKE TYPE
5 MM
6 X OFFSET
7 Y OFFSET
9 MODE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0024 Length of opcode in bytes (40).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0035 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

BOWWAKE NUMBER 32-bit Integer The bow wake to control.
0–127
BOWWAKE TYPE 32-bit Integer The bow wake type (See the
0–127 CLI BOWWAKES \DEFINE
command).
MM 32-bit Integer The moving model to which the
Integer bow wake is attached.
X OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The X offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the bow wake is to
originate.
Y OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Y offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the bow wake is to
originate.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-213

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MODE 32-bit Integer The desired mode of the bow
–1 = no change wake.
0 = start
1 = stop (drawing)
2 = clean (stop and
remove)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-214 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0036

Rotorwash

This command controls a rotorwash effect. For more detailed

information on rotorwash see the Rotor Wash User Guide (RC 964-
5924-016).
NOTE: Because memory for rotorwash effects is only allocated
with the ROTORWASH \Define CLI Command, CLI definition
of the effect must take place before the host can control an
effect. Customers may wish to allocate these slots in a site
startup reset file.

NOTE: The rotorwash “washmm” host control has been

depreciated because models are now loaded in reserved
model space by name and not the responsibility of the host
to load and bind. A warning will print the first time a non-
zero washmm is received for an effect that does not have a
groundModelName specified. Customers should specify a
groundModelName in a startup reset file.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0040 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0036
3 ROTORWASH NUMBER
4 ENABLE
5 UNUSED (PREVIOUSLY WASH MM)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6 PARENT MM
7 START HEIGHT
8 COMPLETE HEIGHT
9 EXPANSION TIME
10 SCALE
11 MAX SPEED
12 MIN SPEED
13 MANUAL MODE
14 MANUAL INDEX
15 RIF ENABLE

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-215

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0040 Length of opcode in bytes (64)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0036 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
ROTORWASH 32-bit integer The rotorwash to control.
NUMBER 0–127
ENABLE 32 bit integer Enables/disables the specified
0 = disable rotorwash number.
1 = enable
PARENT MM 32-bit integer The moving model number of
0–4,095 the helicopter to which this
rotorwash is attached.
START HEIGHT IEEE float (32 bit) The height above the earth’s
surface where the rotorwash
begins to fade in as well as
expand.
COMPLETE HEIGHT IEEE float (32 bit) The height above the earth’s
surface where the rotorwash is
completely faded in and fully
expanded.
EXPANSION TIME IEEE float (32 bit) The time (in seconds) required
for the rotorwash to build up
enough inertia to expand.
If the parent MM is below the
start height, the rotorwash
expands in the number of

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

seconds specified, if the
rotorwash has not already
expanded based on the parent
MM’s height.

NOTE: This gives the effect

of expansion when
approaching the ground/water,
but the rotorwash will not
shrink as it moves away from
the ground/water—it will only
fade.

3-216 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SCALE IEEE float (32 bit) Used to scale down the size of
0.0 to 1.0 the rotorwash effect. The
system rotorwash effect was
created to represent the
rotorwash of the largest known
helicopter.
MAX SPEED IEEE float (32 bit) The speed of the parent model
1.0 … (knots) at which its rotorwash effect is
completely faded out due to
speed.
MIN SPEED IEEE float (32 bit) The speed of the parent model
0.0 … (knots) at which its rotorwash effect
starts to fade out due to speed.
MANUAL MODE 32 bit integer Enables/disables the explicit
0 = disable control of the rotorwash effect.
1 = enable If manual mode is enabled, the
manual index is used to index
into the manual rotorwash
table.
MANUAL INDEX 32 bit integer If manual mode is selected,
0… this is the index used to index
into the manual rotorwash
table.
If manual mode is disabled this
value is ignored.
RIF ENABLE 32 bit integer Enables/disables the use of
0 = disable Range Independent Fog (RIF)
1 = enable when the eyepoint is within the
RIF out range of an active rotor
wash.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-217

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0037

Trails Control

This command controls a previously defined trail (See the CLI

TRAILS \DEFINE command for information on how to define a trail).

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0028 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0037
3 TRAIL NUMBER
4 TRAIL TYPE
5 MM
6 X OFFSET
7 Y OFFSET
8 Z OFFSET
9 MODE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0028 Length of opcode in bytes (40).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0037 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

TRAIL NUMBER 32-bit Integer The trail to control.
0–127
TRAIL TYPE 32-bit Integer The trail type (See the CLI
0–127 TRAILS \DEFINE command).
MM 32-bit Integer The moving model to which the
Integer trail is attached.
X OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The X offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the trail is to originate.
Y OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Y offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the trail is to originate.
Z OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Z offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the trail is to originate.

3-218 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MODE 32-bit Integer The desired mode of the trail.
–1 = no change
0 = start
1 = stop (drawing)
2 = clean (stop and
remove)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-219

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0038

Plume Control

This command controls a previously defined smoke plume (See the

CLI PLUMES \DEFINE command for information on how to define a
plume).

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0054 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0038
3 PLUME NUMBER
4 PLUME TYPE
5 MM
6 X OFFSET/LONGITUDE
7 X OFFSET/LONGITUDE (cont)
8 Y OFFSET/LATITUDE
9 Y OFFSET/LATITUDE (cont)
10 Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE
11 Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE (cont)
12 MODE
13 INITIAL X VELOCITY
14 INITIAL X VELOCITY (cont)
15 INITIAL Y VELOCITY
16 INITIAL Y VELOCITY (cont)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

17 INITIAL Z VELOCITY
18 INITIAL Z VELOCITY (cont)
19 BEGIN TRANSITION
20 END TRANSITION

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0054 Length of opcode in bytes (84).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0038 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.

3-220 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

PLUME NUMBER 32-bit Integer The plume to control.
0–191
PLUME TYPE 32-bit Integer The plume type (See the CLI
0–127 PLUMES \DEFINE command).
MM 32-bit Integer The moving model to which the
–1, Integer plume is attached.
If the MM is –1, then the plume
will not be attached to a MM,
but will be drawn at a Latitude/
Longitude/Altitude.
X OFFSET/ IEEE float (64-bit) The X offset from the origin of
LONGITUDE the MM specified to where the
plume is to originate.
If MM=–1, then this field
specifies the longitude.
Y OFFSET/ LATITUDE IEEE float (64-bit) The Y offset from the origin of
the MM specified to where the
plume is to originate.
If MM=–1, then this field
specifies the latitude.
Z OFFSET/ ALTITUDE IEEE float (64-bit) The Z offset from the origin of
the mm specified to where the
plume is to originate.
If MM=–1, then this field
specifies the altitude.
MODE 32-bit Integer The desired mode of the
–1 = no change plume.
0 = start
1 = stop (drawing)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

2 = clean (stop and
remove)
INITIAL X VELOCITY IEEE float (64-bit) The initial X velocity of the
feet/second smoke at the point of origin.
The movement of the smoke is
transitioned from the initial
velocities to the wind and rise
effects (specified in the CLI
PLUMES /DEFINE command)
over the time period defined by
BEGIN TRANSITION and END
TRANSITION.
INITIAL Y VELOCITY IEEE float (64-bit) The initial Y velocity of the
feet/second smoke at the point of origin.
INITIAL Z VELOCITY IEEE float (64-bit) The initial Z velocity of the
feet/second smoke at the point of origin.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-221

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

BEGIN TRANSITION IEEE float (32-bit) The time from the creation of a
seconds smoke polygon to when its
movement will begin to be
transitioned to the wind and
rise effects (specified in the CLI
PLUMES/DEFINE command)
END TRANSITION IEEE float (32-bit) The time from the creation of a
seconds smoke polygon to when its
movement has completely
transitioned to the wind and
rise effects (specified in the CLI
PLUMES/DEFINE command)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-222 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0039

Model Scale

This command specifies a size scale to be applied to a particular

moving model.
NOTE: At runtime, models should only be scaled downward (scale
<= 1.0) from their default modeled size, as they may be
culled from the scene based upon their original bounding
volume.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0020 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0039
3 MOVING MODEL #
4 SUBMODEL #
5 X SCALE
6 Y SCALE
7 Z SCALE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0020 Length of opcode in bytes (32).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0039 Object ID and function ID that

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
MOVING MODEL # 32-bit Integer The motion system ID for the
model to be scaled.
SUBMODEL # 32-bit Integer The submodel to be scaled.
X SCALE IEEE float (32-bit) Scale in the rightward
direction.
Y SCALE IEEE float (32-bit) Scale in the forward direction.
Z SCALE IEEE float (32-bit) Scale in the vertical direction.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-223

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/003A

Countermeasure Control

This command controls a previously defined countermeasure effect

(See the CLI COUNTERMEASURE \DEFINE command for information
on how to define a countermeasure effect).

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x002C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x003A
3 NUMBER FLAGS
4 PARENT MODEL PARENT SUBMODEL
5 X OFFSET
6 Y OFFSET
7 Z OFFSET
8 X DIRECTION
9 Y DIRECTION
10 Z DIRECTION

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x002C Length of opcode in bytes (44).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x003A Object ID and function ID that

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
NUMBER 16-bit Integer The countermeasure effect to
0–127 control.
FLAGS bit 0: Triggers one launch of
0 = don’t start countermeasures for this
1 = start (trigger) effect. Note if the clean bit 1 is
set, then the start is ignored.
bit 1: Stops all launched and still
0 = don’t clean active countermeasures for this
1 = clean effect.
bit 2: Specifies whether the PARENT
0 = invalid MODEL and PARENT
1 = valid SUBMODEL fields are valid.
bit 3: Specifies whether the X, Y and
0 = invalid Z OFFSET fields are valid.

3-224 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

1 = valid
bit 4: Specifies whether the X, Y and
0 = invalid Z DIRECTION fields are valid.
1 = valid
bits 5-15 Unused
PARENT MODEL 16-bit Integer The moving model to which the
countermeasures are attached.
0-65535
PARENT SUBMODEL 16-bit Integer The submodel to which the
countermeasures are attached.
0–255
0 = primary model
1–254 = secondary
submodels
X OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The X offset from the origin of
the PARENT SUBMODEL
specified above to where the
countermeasures originate.
Y OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Y offset from the origin of
the PARENT SUBMODEL
specified above to where the
countermeasures originate.
Z OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Z offset from the origin of
the PARENT SUBMODEL
specified above to where the
countermeasures originate.
X DIRECTION IEEE float (32-bit) The X component of the vector
specifying the direction the
countermeasures are emitted.
Y DIRECTION IEEE float (32-bit) The Y component of the vector
specifying the direction the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

countermeasures are emitted.
Z DIRECTION IEEE float (32-bit) The Z component of the vector
specifying the direction the
countermeasures are emitted.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-225

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/003C

TOD Date

This command enables and sets the Time of Day (TOD) date.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x003C
3 ENABLE
4 DAY
5 MONTH
6 YEAR

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x001C Length of opcode in bytes (28).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x003C Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
ENABLE 32-bit integer Enables or disables the use of
0–1 the TOD date in autocalculate
mode.
If disabled, the date used in
the autocalculate routine

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

comes from the SEASON
setting (Summer or Winter; as
set in the Database opcode
[3025] or CLI SEASON
command).
DAY 32-bit integer The day of the month.
1–31
MONTH 32-bit integer The month of the year.
1–12
YEAR 32-bit integer The year.
1970–2025

3-226 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/003C

TOD Date Response
This command returns to the host on the receipt of a TOD request
opcode.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0020 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0002
2 OBJ ID = 0X0005 FUNC ID = 0X003C
3 USER DATA = 0
4 YEAR MONTH
5 DAY HOUR
6 MINUTE SECOND
7 UNUSED = 0

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0020 Total length of the opcode in
bytes.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001 = Non-Critical The TOD response is sent to
the Host in the next non-
critical field after the TOD
request is received.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP to Host Direction of data transfer.
Obj ID 0x0005 Host Interface.
Func ID 0x003C ToD Response.
USER DATA 32 Bit value Optional additional data here is

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

echoed from the same field in
the request.
YEAR 16 Bit Integer Current RTS Year
MONTH 16 Bit Integer Current RTS Month
DAY 16 Bit Integer Current RTS Day
HOUR 16 Bit Integer Current RTS ToD Hour
MINUTE 16 Bit Integer Current RTS ToD Minute
SECOND 16 Bit Integer Current RTS ToD Second
UNUSED 32 Bit Integer Padding to enforced 64 bit
alignment.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-227

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/003F

Set Tracer

This command defines a tracer bullet lightpoint.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x003C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x003F
3 TRACER NUMBER
4 ENABLE
5 X OFFSET/LONGITUDE
6 X OFFSET/LONGITUDE (cont)
7 Y OFFSET/LATITUDE
8 Y OFFSET/LATITUDE (cont)
9 Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE
10 Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE (CONT)
11 SIZE
12 RED
13 GREEN
14 BLUE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x003C Length of opcode in bytes (60).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x003F Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
TRACER NUMBER 32-bit Integer The tracer bullet to define.
0–39
ENABLE 32-bit Integer Enable or disable the tracer.
0–1
X OFFSET/ IEEE float (64-bit) The X position of the tracer if
LONGITUDE in a Cartesian system or the
Longitude position of the tracer
if in a Lat/Lon system.

3-228 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Y OFFSET/ LATITUDE IEEE float (64-bit) The Y position of the tracer if in
a Cartesian system or the
Latitude position of the tracer if
in a Lat/Lon system.
Z OFFSET/ ALTITUDE IEEE float (64-bit) The altitude of the tracer.
SIZE 32-bit Integer The size of the tracer
1, 2, 3 lightpoint.
• 1 = 1.0×1.0 pixels
• 2 = 1.5×pixels
• 3 = 2.0×2.0 pixels
RED IEEE float (32-bit) The red component of the
tracer color.
GREEN IEEE float (32-bit) The green component of the
tracer color.
BLUE IEEE float (32-bit) The blue component of the
tracer color.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-229

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/004C

Line-of-Sight Switch

This command enables or disables the line-of-sight feature and

requests that the LOS response opcode be sent from the IG.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x004C
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0001 RESPONSE PROCESS ID = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA
6 LOS ENABLE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x001C Length of opcode in bytes (28).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground Non- IG execution priority.
PRIORITY critical
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x004C Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001 Can be used to put a priority for
the host process in the response
from the EP2. Copied into the
RESPONSE PRIORITY of the
response opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data transfer
set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned in
& values the response opcode, they can be
USER SUBOPCODE B used to set up pointers to host
response handler object and
function IDs.
USER DATA One user-supplied 32-bit Additional data can be entered
value here to enable the host to
manage the response data more
easily.
LOS ENABLE bit 0 (LOS enable) Enable or disable LOS testing.
0 = disable LOS tests and Enabling LOS testing activates all
responses defined testpoints, while disabling
1 = enable LOS testing LOS turns off responses and
and responses deactivates the testpoints.

3-230 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000
Line-of-Sight Response
This opcode feeds back an LOS result to the host. The frequency of
the responses depends upon the number of testpoints activated and
their associated priority.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x004C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 FLAGS TESTPOINT NUMBER
5 MESSAGE NUMBER
6 MM
7 RANGE
8 RANGE (CONT)
9 MATERIAL
10 X / LONGITUDE
11 X / LONGITUDE (CONT)
12 Y / LATITUDE
13 Y / LATITUDE (CONT)
14 Z / ALTITUDE
15 Z / ALTITUDE (CONT)
16 X NORMAL
17 Y NORMAL
18 Z NORMAL

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation
SIZE 0x004C Total length of opcode in bytes
(76)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001 = Foreground Copied from the RESPONSE
Non-critical PRIORITY of the request
opcode.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP2 to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA 32 bit value Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-231

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

FLAGS bit 31 (LOS flag) The LOS flag. The host should
0 = invalid only use the data when this
1 = valid flag is set.
bit 30 (vector feature The vector feature flag. The VF
flag) Valid flag means VF paging is
0 = invalid complete though the extent of
1 = valid the test is not checked against
the VF paging range.
bits 29–16 Unused.
TESTPOINT NUMBER The LOS testpoint number.
Integer (16-bits) (0–255)
MESSAGE NUMBER Integer (32-bits) The message number from the
host packet that contained
positional data.
MM Integer (32-bits) Specified the moving model hit
by the LOS testpoint. If –1,
then the LOS was not occulted
by anything.
RANGE IEEE float (64-bits) The distance from the LOS
start point to the reported
intersection. If no intersection
was found, this is the total
distance checked by the LOS.
MATERIAL Integer (32-bits) This is the material code at the
detected intersection point.
X / LONGITUDE IEEE float (64-bits) The x coordinate of the
intersection point or the
longitude if the database is
geodetic.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Y / LATITUDE IEEE float (64-bits) The y coordinate of the
intersection point or the
latitude if the database is
geodetic.
Z / ALTITUDE IEEE float (64-bits) The z coordinate, or altitude, of
the intersection point.
X NORMAL IEEE float (32-bits) The x component of the
polygon normal at the
intersection point.
Y NORMAL IEEE float (32-bits) The y component of the
polygon normal at the
intersection point.
Z NORMAL IEEE float (32-bits) The z component of the
polygon normal at the
intersection point.

3-232 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/004D

Define Line-of-Sight (LOS) Testpoint
This command defines an LOS testpoint.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0054 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x004D
3 TESTPOINT NUMBER
4 PRIORITY
5 MATERIALMASKIND FLAGS
EX
6 MM
7 X OFFSET/LONGITUDE
8 X OFFSET/LONGITUDE (CONT)
9 Y OFFSET/LATITUDE
10 Y OFFSET/LATITUDE (CONT)
11 Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE
12 Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE (CONT)
13 ENDMM
14 END X OFFSET/LONGITUDE OR HEADING
15 END X OFFSET/LONGITUDE OR HEADING (CONT)
16 END Y OFFSET/LATITUDE OR PITCH
17 END Y OFFSET/LATITUDE OR PITCH (CONT)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

18 END Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE OR LENGTH
19 END Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE OR LENGTH(CONT)
20 MINIMUM LENGTH

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0054 Length of opcode in bytes (84).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY Non-critical
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x004D Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-233

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

TESTPOINT NUMBER 32-bit Integer The LOS testpoint to define.
0–255
PRIORITY 32-bit Integer A -1 priority value disables the
testpoint. A priority of 0
indicates the test should be
performed just once. A priority
of N (> 0) indicates the LOS
test should be evaluated every
N frames.
MATERIAL MASK 0-255 The index of a material mask
INDEX 0 = no material setup in the configuration file
filtering that excludes from testing
1–255 = mask index polygons with certain material
values (surface material
codes).
FLAGS 24-bit Integer If bit 0 is set to 1, the LOS test
bitmask will return the closest
intersection to the start point,
if any. Otherwise the first
intersection found during
traversal, if any, is returned
(intervisibility).
If bit 1 is set to 1, the LOS test
will bypass an MFE if one is in
the system, and instead be
processed by a GP. When bit 1
is 0, the LOS test will be
handled by an MFE if there is
one in the system, and
otherwise by a GP.
MM 32-bit Integer The motion system to which
the LOS start point is attached.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

X OFFSET/ IEEE float (64-bit) The X offset of the start of the
LONGITUDE LOS from the designated MM
origin. If the MM is the terrain
(MM 1), the X position must be
specified by a longitude if the
database is geodetic, or by a
world X coordinate when using
a Cartesian system.
Y OFFSET/ LATITUDE IEEE float (64-bit) The Y offset of the start of the
LOS from the designated MM.
If the MM is the terrain (MM 1),
the Y position must be
specified by a latitude if the
database is geodetic, or by a
world Y coordinate when using
a Cartesian system.

3-234 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Z OFFSET/ ALTITUDE IEEE float (64-bit) The Z offset of the start of the
LOS from the designated MM.
If the MM is the terrain (MM 1),
this is an altitude value.
ENDMM 32-bit Integer The motion system to which
the LOS end point is attached.
If this is set to -1, then the
LOS line segment is expected
to be defined with a direction
(heading and pitch) and length.
END X OFFSET/ IEEE float (64-bit) The X offset of the end of the
LONGITUDE OR LOS from the designated
HEADING ENDMM origin. If the ENDMM
is the terrain (MM 1), the X
position must be specified by a
longitude if the database is
geodetic, or by a world X
coordinate when using a
Cartesian system. When
ENDMM is -1, this field
represents the heading of the
LOS relative to the parent
motion system.
END Y OFFSET/ IEEE float (64-bit) The Y offset of the end of the
LATITUDE OR PITCH LOS from the designated
ENDMM. If the ENDMM is the
terrain (MM 1), the Y position
must be specified by a latitude
if the database is geodetic, or
by a world Y coordinate when
using a Cartesian system.
When ENDMM is -1, this field

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

represents the pitch of the LOS
relative to the parent motion
system.
END Z OFFSET/ IEEE float (64-bit) The Z offset of the end of the
ALTITUDE OR LOS from the designated
LENGTH ENDMM. If the ENDMM is the
terrain (MM 1), this is an
altitude value. When ENDMM is
-1, this field represents the
length of the LOS testpoint.
MINIMUM LENGTH IEEE float (32-bit) Intersections closer to the start
point than this minimum length
are ignored.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-235

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0053

Wind Layer

This command defines the wind speed and direction for a particular
altitude. Up to 16 wind layers can be defined, with speed and
direction being interpolated between the altitudes.
NOTE: Wind layer altitudes of all active wind layers must be
monotonically increasing.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0024 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0053
3 LAYER
4 ENABLE
5 ALTITUDE
6 HEADING
7 SPEED
8 REGION

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0024 Length of opcode in bytes (36).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0053 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
LAYER 32-bit Integer Wind Layer Number

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0–15
ENABLE 32-bit Integer Enable or Disable this wind
0–1 layer. Layer zero can not be
disabled.
ALTITUDE IEEE float (32-bit) The altitude of the wind layer
-2000 – 60,000 (feet). At altitudes between
layers the speed and heading
are interpolated.
HEADING IEEE float (32-bit) The heading of the wind
-359.999 – 359.999 (degrees).
SPEED IEEE float (32-bit) The velocity of the wind
0… (knots).
REGION 32-bit Integer The region to which this wind
0-7 layer setup applies. Region 0 is
global weather.

3-236 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/005C

Extended Laser Range-Finder Response Enable

Enable or disable the Extended LRF Response opcode. This response

opcode provides more data than the standard 3082 or 3087
opcodes.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x005C
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0001 RESPONSE PROCESS ID = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA
6 LRF EXTENDED RESPONSE ENABLE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x001C Length of opcode in bytes (28).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY Non-critical
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x005C Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

response from EP2. Copied
into the RESPONSE PRIORITY
of the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.
USER DATA One user-supplied 32-bit Additional data can be entered
value here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-237

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

LRF EXTENDED bit 0 = LRF extended Enable or disable the LRF
RESPONSE ENABLE response enable extended response. This
0 = disable extended applies to all LRF cursors. This
responses extended response is sent in
1 = enable extended place of the LRF response
responses specified in opcode 3036.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-238 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000
Extended Laser Range-Finder Response
This command returns extended laser range-finder data for the
specified cursor. This response type is activated by the Extended
Laser Range-finder Response Enable (E000 Sub Opcode
0005/005C).

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0070 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 FLAGS CURSOR # EYEPOINT # VIEWPORT #
5 HOST MESSAGE NUMBER
6 TAG
7 MOVING MODEL NUMBER
8 RANGE
9 MATERIAL
10 X / LONGITUDE
11 X / LONGITUDE (CONT)
12 Y / LATITUDE
13 Y / LATITUDE (CONT)
14 Z / ALTITUDE
15 Z / ALTITUDE (CONT)
16 X NORMAL
17 Y NORMAL

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

18 Z NORMAL
19 EYE X / LONGITUDE
20 EYE X / LONGITUDE (CONT)
21 EYE Y / LATITUDE
22 EYE Y / LATITUDE (CONT)
23 EYE Z / ALTITUDE
24 EYE Z / ALTITUDE (CONT)
25 VIEWPORT ROLL
26 VIEWPORT HEADING
27 VIEWPORT PITCH

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-239

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0070 Total length of opcode in bytes
(112)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001 = Foreground Copied from the RESPONSE
Non-critical PRIORITY of the request
opcode.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP2 to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA 32 bit value Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.
FLAGS Bit 31: Specifies the coordinate
0 = xy system of the returned position
1 = lat/lon data.
CURSOR # 0–7 The cursor from which this
response has been generated.
EYEPOINT # 0 – 15 The eyepoint number to which
the viewport is tied.
VIEWPORT # 0 – 15 The viewport number that is
tied to the cursor.
HOST MESSAGE Integer (32-bits) The message number from the
NUMBER host packet that contained
positional data.
TAG Integer (32-bits) The tag if this LRF request
came via opcode 303C.
MOVING MODEL Integer (32-bits) Specified the moving model hit
NUMBER by the LRF laze. If -1, then the
LRF was not occulted by
anything within its range.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RANGE IEEE float (32-bits) The distance from the LRF start
point (eye) to the reported
intersection.
MATERIAL Integer (32-bits) This is the material code at the
detected intersection point.
X / LONGITUDE IEEE float (64-bits) The x coordinate of the
intersection point or the
longitude if the database is
geodetic.
Y / LATITUDE IEEE float (64-bits) The y coordinate of the
intersection point or the
latitude if the database is
geodetic.
Z / ALTITUDE IEEE float (64-bits) The z coordinate, or altitude, of
the intersection point.

3-240 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

X NORMAL IEEE float (32-bits) The x component of the
polygon normal at the
intersection point.
Y NORMAL IEEE float (32-bits) The y component of the
polygon normal at the
intersection point.
Z NORMAL IEEE float (32-bits) The z component of the
polygon normal at the
intersection point.
EYE X / LONGITUDE IEEE float (64-bits) The extrapolated x coordinate
of the eyepoint the LRF cursor
is tied to, or the longitude if
the database is geodetic.
EYE Y / LATITUDE IEEE float (64-bits) The extrapolated y coordinate
of the eyepoint to which the
LRF cursor is tied or the
latitude if the database is
geodetic.
EYE Z / ALTITUDE IEEE float (64-bits) The extrapolated z coordinate,
or altitude of the eyepoint to
which the LRF cursor is tied.
VIEWPORT ROLL IEEE float (32-bits) Specifies the roll of the
viewport to which the LRF
cursor is tied.
VIEWPORT HEADING IEEE float (32-bits) Specifies the heading of the
viewport to which the LRF
cursor is tied.
VIEWPORT PITCH IEEE float (32-bits) Specifies the pitch of the
viewport to which the LRF
cursor is tied.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-241

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/005D

Extended Collision Detection Response Enable

Enable or disable the Extended CD Response opcode for CDL and

FJCD testpoints. This response opcode provides more data than is
given by the 3184 response opcode.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x005D
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0001 RESPONSE PROCESS ID = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA
6 CD EXTENDED RESPONSE ENABLE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x001C Length of opcode in bytes (28).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground Non- IG execution priority.
PRIORITY critical
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x005D Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from the EP. Copied

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

into the RESPONSE PRIORITY
of the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.
USER DATA One user-supplied 32-bit Additional data can be entered
value here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.

3-242 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

CD EXTENDED bit 0 = CD extended response Enable or disable the CD
RESPONSE ENABLE enable extended response. This applies
0 = disable extended to all CDL and FJCD testpoints.
responses This extended response is sent
1 = enable extended in place of FJCD/CDL response
responses opcode 3184.
bit 1 = enable model-relative
response
Enable or disable a model-
0 = disable model-relative relative intersection response.
response If enabled then the intersection
1 = enable model-relative coordinate will be an XYZ offset
response from the moving model origin in
model-relative space. If the
intersected moving model is
terrain, mm 1, then the point is
still world-relative. When
disabled, all responses are world
relative.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-243

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0062

Set Rotorwash Ramp

This command can be used to simply control (enable/disable) a

previously defined rotorwash effect, as well as produce a spin-
up/spin-down effect. For more detailed information on rotorwash,
see the Rotorwash User Guide (RCPN 964-5924-015).
NOTE: Because memory for rotorwash effects is only allocated
with the ROTORWASH \Define CLI Command, CLI definition
of the effect must take place before the host can control an
effect. Customers may wish to allocate these slots in a site
startup reset file.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0062
3 WASH NUMBER
4 WASH ENABLE
5 FADE RAMP
6 HEIGHT RAMP

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x001C Length of opcode in bytes (28).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0062 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
WASH NUMBER 32-bit Integer The rotorwash number.
0–127
WASH ENABLE 32-bit Integer Enable or Disable the specified
0–1 rotorwash effect.
FADE RAMP IEEE float (32-bit) Direct control of the
0.0 – 1.0 transparency of the rotorwash
effect. Typically used in the
spin-up and spin-down effect.
0.0=completely faded out.
1.0=completely faded in.

3-244 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

HEIGHT RAMP IEEE float (32-bit) Direct control of the gravity of
0.0 – 1.0 the rotor wash effect. Typically
used in the spin-up effect.
0.0=effect uses computed
gravity scaled to start value.
1.0=effect uses computed
gravity not scaled.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-245

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0064

Shadow Control

The Shadow command is used to control the state of a moving

model shadow.
NOTE: In order for moving model shadows to render properly,
they must be modeled according to a specific set of rules
outlined in the EP2 Modelers Reference Guide.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0020 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0064
3 MM
4 BASECONTROLID
5 ENABLE
6 GROUND LEVEL
7 INTENSITY SCALE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0020 Length of opcode in bytes (32).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0064 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

MM 32-bit Integer Moving model number.
0–2048
BASECONTROLID 32-bit Integer This number corresponds to
–1 = No Change the first ID of three
consecutive controllable nodes
0–127 in the model that are used by
the real time system to render
the moving model shadow. The
default is 20. Entering a “-1”
will leave the current
BaseControlID for this moving
model shadow un-effected.
ENABLE 32-bit Integer Enables or disables the shadow
0–1 for this moving model.

3-246 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

GROUND LEVEL 32-bit Integer Enables or disables ground-
–1 = No Change based processing of this
moving model’s shadow.
0 = Air Based
If groundLevel is OFF, the
1 = Ground Based shadow is rendered as if air-
based. See the EP2 Modelers
Reference Guide for the
differences in modeling for
ground-based versus air-based
shadows.
Entering a “–1” will leave the
current Ground Level flag for
this moving model shadow un-
effected.
INTENSITY SCALE IEEE float (32-bit) Scales up (darker) or down
–1.0 = No Change (lighter) the intensity of the
shadow. The default is 1.0.
0.0 … Entering a “–1.0” will leave the
current Intensity Scale for this
moving model shadow un-
effected.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-247

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0065

Set Weather Region

This command defines a weather region.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0050 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0065
3 REGION
4 ENABLE
5 COMPONENT MASK
6 DRAW WEATHER PROXY
7 POSITION MODE
8 X OFFSET/LONGITUDE
9 X OFFSET/LONGITUDE (CONT)
10 Y OFFSET/LATITUDE
11 Y OFFSET/LATITUDE (CONT)
12 Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE
13 Z OFFSET/ALTITUDE (CONT)
14 RADIUS
15 TRANSITION RANGE
16 HEADING
17 X SCALE
18 VERTICAL DISTANCE ABOVE TOP
19 VERTICAL TRANSITION RANGE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation
SIZE 0x0050 Length of opcode in bytes (80).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY Non-critical
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0065 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
REGION 32-bit Integer The region that is being defined.
1–7
ENABLE 32-bit Integer Enables (1) or disables (0) this
0–1 region.

3-248 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

COMPONENT MASK 32-bit Unsigned Integer A binary mask indicating which
bitmask weather components are being
controlled by this region.
Bit 0: scattered clouds
Bit 1: layered clouds
Bit 2: ground fog
Bit 3: visibility
Bit 4: snow, wind, blowing
snow/sand
Bit 5: runway contaminants
Bit 6: reserved
Bit 7: fog color
Bits 8-31: Reserved for
expansion
DRAW WEATHER 32-bit Integer Enables or disables the drawing
PROXY 0–1 of the weather proxy model.
POSITION MODE 32-bit Integer Mode of position data.
0–1 0: Latitude / Longitude / Altitude
1: X / Y / Z
X OFFSET/ IEEE float (64-bit) The X offset (Cartesian system) /
LONGITUDE longitude (geodetic system) of
the center point of the region.
Y OFFSET/ LATITUDE IEEE float (64-bit) The Y offset (Cartesian system) /
latitude (geodetic system) of the
center point of the region.
Z OFFSET/ ALTITUDE IEEE float (64-bit) The Z offset (Cartesian system) /
altitude (geodetic system) of the
base of the region.
RADIUS IEEE float (32-bit) 0.0 … The radius of the region.
TRANSITION RANGE IEEE float (32-bit) The range over which the
0.0 … weather transitions between
global weather and regional

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

weather.
HEADING IEEE float (32-bit) The heading rotation of the
–359.9999 – 359.9999 weather region.
X SCALE IEEE float (32-bit) Scales down the weather region
0.1 – 1.0 in the X direction before the
heading is applied.
VERTICAL DISTANCE IEEE float (32-bit) The weather region’s vertical
ABOVE TOP 1.0 … extent, defined as this distance
above the top of the highest
weather effect (cloud top or haze
top).
VERTICAL IEEE float (32-bit) Defines a transition zone above
TRANSITION RANGE 1.0 … the weather region’s vertical
extent in which the weather
transitions between global and
regional weather.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-249

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0066

Set Reference Airport

This command sets the reference airport. It is used to define which

runway will be used to land on when using an automatic generic
airport, or sets FILE INDEX 15 when specifying a custom airport.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0014 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0066
3 ICAO [0] ICAO [1] ICAO [2] ICAO [3]
4 UNUSED RUNWAY [0] RUNWAY [1] RUNWAY [2]

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0014 Length of opcode in bytes (20)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0066 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
ICAO [0..3] 4 valid ASCII characters This field identifies the ICAO
for ICAO code of the reference airfield.
Example: Frankfurt = EDDF
RUNWAY [0..2] 3 valid ASCII characters This field identifies the runway
for runway identifier identifier of the reference

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

runway.
Example: Runway 25R = 25R

NOTE: Sending this opcode will set FILE INDEX 15 to the three
letter IATA code corresponding to the four letter ICAO code
contained in the opcode. All CLI FILE INDEX 15 commands
will then be ignored. When the host sets the ICAO code to
“XXXX” the system will revert to using the “CLI file index
15” commands.

3-250 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/006B

Vector Fixed Selectable Feature Control
This opcode is used to control the model select for a vector fixed
selectable feature (FSF). It supplements existing opcode 304F, the
difference being that FSFs controllable by this command are defined
by a custom Shape file attribute.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0014 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x006B
3 FSF ID
SELECT #

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0014 Length of opcode in bytes (20)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY Non-critical
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x006B Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
FSF ID 32-bit integer ID of feature to control
SELECT # 32-bit integer New model select value
0–255

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-251

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/006E

IR Wavelength Limits Control
This opcode is used to control the wavelength limits of a specified IR
EMBand (NVG, EVS, MWIR, LWIR, EO).

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x006E
3 EM BAND
4 MINIMUM WAVELENGTH
5 MAXIMUM WAVELENGTH

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (24)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY Non-critical
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x006E Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
EM Band 32-bit integer EM BAND Index:
NVG – 0, EVS – 1, MWIR – 2,
LWIR – 3, EO – 4

Minimum IEEE float (32-bit) Minimum wavelength (microns)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Wavelength 0.0 … for the specified EMBand

Maximum IEEE float (32-bit) Maximum wavelength

Wavelength 0.0 … (microns) for the specified
EMBand (greater than
Minimum)

3-252 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0074

Crash Indication Control
This opcode is used to control the crash indication for a visual
channel. It supplements the existing global, nonchannelized collision
indicator. The crash indication blanks of the channel. The blanking
color may be specified.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0074
3 CHANNEL ID
4 INDICATION STATE
5 RED GREEN BLUE unused
6 FLASH RATE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x001C Length of opcode in bytes (28)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority
PRIORITY Non-critical
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0074 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
CHANNEL ID 32-bit integer ID of channel to control
INDICATION STATE 32-bit integer State of crash indication

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0 = Off
1 = On (solid)
2 = Flash
COLOR 8-bit integers Crash indication color
(RED/GREEN/BLUE) 0-255 components

FLASH RATE 32-bit integer # of fields flash on, then # of

fields flash off (ignored if
INDICATION STATE not set to 2)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-253

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/007A

Ribbon Control

The Ribbon command is used to control the state of a moving model flight
ribbon. Flight ribbons are typically used by a stealth eyepoint to monitor the
motion path of a model. The flight ribbon is drawn in the horizontal domain of
the moving model and tracks the orientation of the moving model.
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0044 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x007A
3 MM
4 ENABLE
5 PERIOD
6 MAXIMUM SEGMENTS
7 WIDTH
8 Y OFFSET
9 Z OFFSET
10 TOP COLOR RED
11 TOP COLOR GREEN
12 TOP COLOR BLUE
13 TOP COLOR ALPHA
14 BOTTOM COLOR RED
15 BOTTOM COLOR GREEN
16 BOTTOM COLOR BLUE
17 BOTTOM COLOR ALPHA

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation
SIZE 0x0044 Length of opcode in bytes (68).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x007A Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used to
dispatch the opcode.
MM 32-bit Integer Moving model number.
0–2048
ENABLE 32-bit Integer Enables or disables the flight
0–1 ribbon for this moving model.
PERIOD IEEE float (32-bit) The length of time between
0.017 … segment endpoints in seconds.

3-254 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MAXIMUM 32-bit Integer The maximum number of
SEGMENTS 5-300 segments allocated to this ribbon.
Once this maximum has been
reached, the oldest segments
disappear off the end.
WIDTH IEEE float (32-bit) The width of the flight ribbon in
0.0 = Model width feet. If the width is set to 0.0,
then the model width (if it is
0.0 … loaded and bound) will be used.
If the model is not loaded and
bound then a width of 10 feet is
used. All widths, set or read from
the model, are subject to the
limits set by the globalMinWidth
(defaults to 5 feet) and
globalMaxWidth (defaults to 50
feet) parameters of the RIBBON
CLI command.
Y OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Y offset in feet from the
0.0 = back of model position of the moving model (i.e.,
the model origin) to the start of
the flight ribbon. If the Y offset is
set to 0.0, then the horizontal
back of model (if it is loaded and
bound) will be used. If the model
is not loaded and bound then a Y
offset of -1 foot is used.
Z OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Z offset in feet from the
position of the moving model (i.e.,
the model origin) to the start of
the flight ribbon. If the Z offset is
set to 0.0, then the vertical back

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

of model (if it is loaded and
bound) will be used. If the model
is not loaded and bound then a Z
offset of -1 foot is used.
TOP COLOR RED IEEE float (32-bit) The red component of the flight
0.0 – 1.0 ribbon’s top color.

TOP COLOR GREEN IEEE float (32-bit) The green component of the flight
0.0 – 1.0 ribbon’s top color.

TOP COLOR BLUE IEEE float (32-bit) The blue component of the flight
0.0 – 1.0 ribbon’s top color.

TOP COLOR ALPHA IEEE float (32-bit) The alpha component of the flight
0.0 – 1.0 ribbon’s top color.

BOTTOM COLOR IEEE float (32-bit) The red component of the flight
RED 0.0 – 1.0 ribbon’s bottom color.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-255

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

BOTTOM COLOR IEEE float (32-bit) The green component of the flight
GREEN 0.0 – 1.0 ribbon’s bottom color.

BOTTOM COLOR IEEE float (32-bit) The blue component of the flight
BLUE 0.0 – 1.0 ribbon’s bottom color.

BOTTOM COLOR IEEE float (32-bit) The alpha component of the flight
ALPHA 0.0 – 1.0 ribbon’s bottom color.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-256 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/007D

Auto-Generic Reposition Data Request

This command requests the reposition data for the reference airport
and runway sent in the “Set Reference Airport” opcode. Data can be
requested for gate, hold or taxi repositions. The response in the
“Auto-generic reposition data Response” opcode is sent as two
formats; 1. Absolute lat/lon and 2. Relative x/y offset from the
runway origin.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x007D
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 RESPONSE PROCESS = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA
6 TYPE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x001C Length of opcode in bytes (28)
EXECUTION 0x0002 = Background IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x007D Object ID and function ID that

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from the EP. Copied
into the RESPONSE PRIORITY
of the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-257

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

USER DATA Data echoed back in Additional data can be entered
response here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.
TYPE 0 = gate Type of reposition for which
1 = hold data is required. Only a single
position request can be
2 = taxi acknowledged at a time.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-258 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000
Auto-generic Reposition Data Response

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x003C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 TYPE
5 LONGITUDE
6 LONGITUDE (cont)
7 LATITUDE
8 LATITUDE (cont)
9 ALTITUDE
10 ALTITUDE (cont)
11 HEADING
12 X OFFSET
13 Y OFFSET
14 HEADING OFFSET

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x003C Total length of opcode in bytes
(68)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 = Background Copied from the RESPONSE
PRIORITY of the request
opcode.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA 32 bit value Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.
TYPE 32-bit integer: Integer Type of reposition for which
data is being returned. Only a
single position request can be
acknowledged at a time.
LONGITUDE IEEE double (64-bit) Specifies the longitude of the
reposition point.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-259

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

LATITUDE IEEE double (64-bit) Specifies the latitude of the
reposition point.
ALTITUDE IEEE double (64-bit) Specifies the altitude of the
reposition point.
HEADING IEEE float (32-bit, Specifies the heading of the
degrees) reposition point relative to true
north.
X OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit, feet) Specifies the x offset from the
runway threshold of the
reposition point.
Y OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit, feet) Specifies the y offset from the
runway threshold of the
reposition point.
HEADING OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit, Specifies the heading of the
degrees) reposition point relative to the
runway.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-260 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/007E

CPC Control of Projector Dimmer Value
This opcode is ONLY supported in systems with a CPC device.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x007E
3 DISPLAY
4 PROJECTOR
5 VALUE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (24).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x007E Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
DISPLAY 32-bit Integer Specifies the display sub-
0–7 system. Valid range is 0–7.
PROJECTOR 32-bit Integer Specifies the projector to be
-1-9 affected by the opcode. Valid
range is –1–9 where –1
indicates to apply to all
projectors.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

VALUE 32-bit Integer Specifies which preset value
0-7 applies to the dimmer control.
Valid range is 0–7, 0 indicating
darkest preset position and 7
indicating brightest preset
position.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-261

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 sub 0005/007F

CPC Control CPC Control of NVG Mode
This opcode is ONLY supported in systems with a CPC device.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x007F
3 DISPLAY
4 PROJECTOR
5 MODE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (24).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x007F Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
DISPLAY 32-bit Integer Specifies the display sub-
0–7 system. Valid range is 0–7.
PROJECTOR 32-bit Integer Specifies the projector to be
-1-9 affected by the command. Valid
range is –1–9 where –1
indicates to apply to all
projectors.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

MODE 32-bit Integer Enables (ON = 1) or disables
0-1 (OFF= 0) the NVG mode.

3-262 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 sub 0005/0080

CPC Control of Projector Blend Mask
This opcode is ONLY supported in systems with a CPC device.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0080
3 DISPLAY
4 PROJECTOR
5 STATE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (24).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0080 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
DISPLAY 32-bit Integer Specifies the display sub-
0–7 system. Valid range is 0–7.
PROJECTOR 32-bit Integer Specifies the projector to be
-1-9 affected by the opcode. Valid
range is –1–9 where –1
indicates to apply to all
projectors.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

STATE 32-bit Integer Set projector blend state to on
0-1 or off.
(0 = OFF, 1 = ON)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-263

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0081

Extended Tracks Control
This command controls a previously defined track (See the CLI
TRACKS \DEFINE command for information on how to define a
track). This opcode is an extended version of the Tracks Control
opcode, a Z offset was added for non-conformal templates.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0028 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0081
3 TRACK NUMBER
4 TRACK TYPE
5 MM
6 X OFFSET
7 Y OFFSET
8 MODE
9 Z OFFSET

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0024 Length of opcode in bytes (40).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0034 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

to dispatch the opcode.
TRACK NUMBER 32-bit Integer The track to control.
0–127
TRACK TYPE 32-bit Integer The track type (See the CLI
0–127 TRACKS \DEFINE command).
MM 32-bit Integer The moving model to which the
Integer track is attached.
X OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The X offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the track is to originate.
Y OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Y offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the track is to originate.

3-264 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MODE 32-bit Integer The desired mode of the track.
–1 = no change
0 = start
1 = stop (drawing)
2 = clean (stop and
remove)
Z OFFSET IEEE float (32-bit) The Z offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the track is to originate.
The Z offset is needed for track
templates that are not
conformal.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-265

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 sub 0005/0083

CPC Control of Projector Power
This opcode is ONLY supported in systems with a CPC device.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0083
3 DISPLAY
4 PROJECTOR
5 STATE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (24).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0083 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
DISPLAY 32-bit Integer Specifies the display sub-
0–7 system. Valid range is 0–7.
PROJECTOR 32-bit Integer Specifies the projector to be
-1-9 affected by the opcode. Valid
range is –1–9 where –1
indicates to apply to all
projectors.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

STATE 32-bit Integer Set the power state to on or off.
0-1 (0 = OFF, 1 = ON)

3-266 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0085

Runway Position Data Request

This command requests the runway position for an airport and runway. The
“Runway Position Data Response” opcode contains data for both the
requested runway and for the opposite end.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0×0020 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0×0002 PROCESS ID = 0×0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0×0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0×0085
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0×0002 RESPONSE PROCESS = 0×0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function ID)
5 USER DATA
6 ICAO [0] ICAO [1] ICAO [2] ICAO [3]
7 UNUSED RUNWAY [0] RUNWAY [1] RUNWAY [2]

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0×0020 Length of opcode in bytes (32)
EXECUTION 0×0002 = Background IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0×0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0×0005/ 0×007D Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RESPONSE PRIORITY 0×0002 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from EP2. Copied
into the RESPONSE PRIORITY
of the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0×0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.
USER DATA Data echoed back in Additional data can be entered
response here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-267

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

ICAO [0..3] 4 valid ASCII characters ICAO code of the requested
for ICAO airfield.
Example: Frankfurt = EDDF
RUNWAY [0..2] 3 valid ASCII characters Runway identifier of the
for runway identifier requested runway. If only two
characters are required then a
‘blank’ followed by the two
characters should be sent.
Example: Runway 25R = 25R

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-268 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000
Runway Position Data Response
This command feeds back the runway position for the requested airport and
runway ID. The requested runway is RUNWAY A and the opposite end is
RUNWAY B.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0×0054 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0×0002 PROCESS ID = 0×0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 ICAO [0] ICAO [1] ICAO [2] ICAO [3]
5 VALID FLAG RUNWAY A [0] RUNWAY A [1] RUNWAY A [2]
6 LONGITUDE A
7 LONGITUDE A (cont)
8 LATITUDE A
9 LATITUDE A (cont)
10 ALTITUDE A
11 ALTITUDE A (cont)
12 HEADING A
13 UNUSED RUNWAY B [0] RUNWAY B [1] RUNWAY B [2]
14 LONGITUDE B
15 LONGITUDE B (cont)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

16 LATITUDE B
17 LATITUDE B (cont)
18 ALTITUDE B
19 ALTITUDE B (cont)
20 HEADING B

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0×0054 Total length of opcode in bytes
(84)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0×0002 = Background Copied from the RESPONSE
PRIORITY of the request
opcode.
PROCESS ID 0×0002 = EP2 to Host Direction of data transfer

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-269

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA 32 bit value Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.
ICAO [0..3] 4 valid ASCII characters ICAO code of the requested
for ICAO Example: Frankfurt = EDDF
airfield.
VALID FLAG Bits 31-25 reserved Indicates whether the data is
Bit 24 – data valid valid. If the host requests
information for an airport that
1 = valid doesn’t exist then this flag will
0 = invalid be invalid and all the position
data will be set to zero. Note:
This will occur if the host sends
either the wrong ICAO or
RUNWAY ID or because the
model does not exist.
RUNWAY A [0..2] 3 valid ASCII characters Runway identifier for runway A.
for runway identifier If only two characters are
required then a ‘blank’ followed
by the two characters will be
sent.
Example: Runway 25R = 25R
LONGITUDE A IEEE double (64-bit) Threshold longitude of runway
A.
LATITUDE A IEEE double (64-bit) Threshold latitude of runway A.
ALTITUDE A IEEE double (64-bit) Altitude of runway A.
HEADING A IEEE float (32-bit, Heading of runway A relative to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

degrees) true north.
RUNWAY B [0..2] 3 valid ASCII characters Runway identifier for runway B.
for runway identifier Example: Runway 07L = 07L
LONGITUDE B IEEE double (64-bit) Threshold longitude of runway
B.
LATITUDE B IEEE double (64-bit) Threshold latitude of runway B.
ALTITUDE B IEEE double (64-bit) Altitude of runway B.
HEADING B IEEE float (32-bit, Heading of runway B relative to
degrees) true north.

3-270 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0086

Weather Feedback Request
This command requests weather feedback. The data is returned via
a weather feedback response opcode. If weather feedback is
enabled, a weather feedback response is sent continuously to the
host every frame until weather feedback is disabled.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0×001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0×0001 PROCESS ID = 0×0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0×0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0×0086
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0×0002 RESPONSE PROCESS ID = 0×0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA
6 FEEDBACK ENABLE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0×001C Length of opcode in bytes (28).
EXECUTION 0×0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0×0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0×0005/ 0×0086 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RESPONSE PRIORITY 0×0002 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from the EP. Copied
into the RESPONSE PRIORITY
of the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0×0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-271

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

USER DATA One user-supplied 32-bit Additional data can be entered
value here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.
FEEDBACK ENABLE bit 0=Feedback enable Enable or disable weather
0=disable feedback feedback. A response is
1=enable feedback returned every frame once
enabled. To stop the response,
send a disable feedback
request.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-272 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000
Weather Feedback Response

This opcode feeds back weather data to the host. The response is
sent continuously if enabled by the host with the Weather Feedback
request opcode.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0×0054 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0×0002 PROCESS ID = 0×0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 FLAGS REGION
5 VISIBILITY
6 RVR
7 LAYER 0 TOP
8 LAYER 0 BOTTOM
9 DENSITY LAYER 0
10 LAYER 1 TOP
11 LAYER 1 BOTTOM
12 DENSITY LAYER 1
13 SCATTERED CLOUD ALTITUDE
14 SCATTERED CLOUD DENSITY

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

15 GROUND FOG HEIGHT
16 RESERVED
17 RESERVED
18 RESERVED
19 RESERVED
20 RESERVED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0×0054 Total length of opcode in bytes
(84)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0×0002 = Background Copied from the RESPONSE
PRIORITY of the request
opcode.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-273

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

PROCESS ID 0×0002 = EP2 to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA 32 bit value Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.
FLAGS Bit 31: Ground fog Ground fog enabled
0 = off
1 = on
Bit 30: Patchy fog Patchy fog enabled
0 = off
1 = on
Bit 29: Cloud Layer 0 Cloud Layer 0 enabled
0 = off
1 = on
Bit 28: Cloud Layer 1 Cloud Layer 1 enabled
0 = off
1 = on
Bit 27: Scattered cloud Scattered cloud enabled
0 = off
1 = on
Bit 26: Transition zone Eye point is in the transition
zone of the current region
0 = false
1 = true
Bit 25: Overlapped region Eye point in overlapped region
– this is a warning flag, regions
0 = false (including transition zones)
1 = true should be defined so that they
do not overlap.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Bits 24-04: Unused Reserved
REGION Bits 03-00 The region in which the eye
point is currently located.
0-7
VISIBILITY Integer (32 bits) Visibility distance (feet)
RVR Integer (32 bits) Runway Visual Range in the fog
layer (feet)
LAYER 0 TOP Integer (32 bits) Altitude of the top of cloud layer
0 measured from mean sea
level (feet)
LAYER 0 BOTTOM Integer (32 bits) Altitude of the bottom of cloud
layer 0 measured from mean
sea level (feet)
DENSITY LAYER 0 5-8 (octas) The density of cloud layer 0 in
5 = 5 octas broken cloud octas (eighths) of cloud layer
6 = 6 octas broken cloud
7 = 7 octas broken cloud
8 = solid cloud layer

3-274 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

LAYER 1 TOP Integer (32 bits) Altitude of the top of cloud layer
1 measured from mean sea
level (feet)
LAYER 1 BOTTOM Integer (32 bits) Altitude of the bottom of cloud
layer 1 measured from mean
sea level (feet)
DENSITY LAYER 1 5-8 (octas) The density of cloud layer 1 in
5 = 5 octas broken cloud octas (eighths) of cloud layer
6 = 6 octas broken cloud
7 = 7 octas broken cloud
8 = solid cloud layer
SCATTERED CLOUD Integer (32 bits) Altitude of the bottom of the
ALTITUDE scattered cloud layer measured
from mean sea level (feet)
SCATTERED CLOUD 1-7 (octas) The density of the scattered
DENSITY cloud layer in octas (eighths) of
cloud layer
GROUND FOG Integer (32 bits) Altitude of the top of the ground
HEIGHT fog layer measured from mean
sea level (feet)
RESERVED Reserved for future additions

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-275

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 sub 0005/0088

CPC Control of Projector Shutdown
This opcode is ONLY supported in systems with a CPC device.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0010 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0088
3 POWER_STATE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0010 Length of opcode in bytes (16).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0088 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
POWER_STATE 32-bit Integer Shuts down the CPC. Valid
0-2 range is 0-2.
(0 = Shutdown w/ Power Off,
1 = Shutdown w/ Power On,
2 = Shutdown w/ Reboot)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-276 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 sub 0005/0089

CPC Control of UTM Function
This opcode is ONLY supported in systems with a CPC device.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x001C 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0089
3 DISPLAY
4 PROJECTOR
5 FUNCTION_PARAMETERS
6 FUNCTION

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x001C Length of opcode in bytes (28).
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer.
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x0089 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
DISPLAY 32-bit Integer Specifies the display sub-
0–7 system. Valid range is 0–7.
PROJECTOR 32-bit Integer Specifies the projector to be
-1-9 affected by the opcode. Valid
range is –1–9 where –1
indicates to apply to all

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

projectors.
FUNCTION 32-bit Integer Set the UTM Function Specific
PARAMETERS 0-31 Parameter values.
(For Function = Day Edge Blend
(0), Function Parameter = 0–1
(0 = OFF, 1 = ON))
FUNCTION 32-bin Integer Set the UTM Function value.
Valid range is 0-31.
0-31
(0 = Day Edge Blend,
1-31 = TBD Functions)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-277

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/0097

Moving Model Wave Bind Control
This command provides a control allowing a model to be attached or detached
from a moving wave.

31 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0×0024 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0×0000 PROCESS ID = 0×0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0×0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0×0097
3 MOVING MODEL #

4 Z

5 DETACH
6 LENGTH
7 WIDTH
8 DRAFT

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0024 Length of opcode in bytes (36
bytes).
EXECUTION 0x0000=Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003= Host to EP Direction of data transfer.

SUB OPCODE 0x0005 / 0x0097 Object ID and function ID that

define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
MOVING MODEL# 32-bit Integer Specifies the model to bind to

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

wave

Z IEEE Float (32-bit) Specifies Z offset to the wave

DETACH 0–1 1 = Detach model from wave
0 = Attach model to wave
LENGTH IEEE float(32-bit) Length of model bound to wave
WIDTH IEEE float(32-bit) Width of model bound to wave
DRAFT IEEE float(32-bit) Currently unused

3-278 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00FB

Paged Generics Request
This command requests which auto-generics airports are currently
paged in. The airport data is returned via the Paged Generics
Response opcode.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x00FB
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 RESPONSE PROCESS = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (24)
EXECUTION 0x0002 = Background IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x00FB Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from the EP. Copied

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

into the RESPONSE PRIORITY
of the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.
USER DATA Data echoed back in Additional data can be entered
response here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-279

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000
Paged Generics Response
Returns the number and ICAO for auto-generic airports currently
paged in in response to the Paged Generics request opcode.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0064 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0002
2 USER SUBOPCODE A/Obj ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ Func ID
(Copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA
4 COUNT
5 ICAO1 [0..3]
↕ ↕ ↕ ↕
24 ICAO20 [0..3]

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0064 Length of opcode in bytes (20)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 = Background Copied from the RESPONSE
PRIORITY of the request
opcode.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the request.
COUNT 0-20 The number of auto-generic
airports currently paged in. If
more than 20 airports are
paged in only the closest 20
will be returned.
ICAO1-ICAO20 4 valid ASCII characters List of ICAO codes for currently
for the ICAO code paged in auto-generic airports
listed in order of distance from
the eyepoint. ICAO1 is the
closest up to ICAO20 being
furthest away. Only ‘COUNT’
number of ICAOs are valid. If
COUNT = 0 then there are no
auto-generic airports paged in.

3-280 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00FD

Position Equate

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SIZE=0x0020 1110 0000 0000 0000
EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x00FD
SRC (32-bit Integer)
DST (32-bit Integer)
X-OFFSET (32-bit Float)
Y-OFFSET (32-bit Float)
Z-OFFSET (32-bit Float)

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0020 Length of opcode in bytes (32)
EXECUTION 0x0002 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x00FD Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
SRC 32-bit integer
DST 32-bit integer
X-offset 32-bit float
Y-offset 32-bit float
Z-offset 32-bit float

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-281

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 000E/0022

Ownship Lights

This command specifies the characteristics of the ownship landing

light lobes.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0010 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x000E SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0022
3 SELECT

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0010 Length of opcode in bytes (16)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x000E/ 0x0022 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
SELECT bits 0-15 A bit mask that specifies the
active landing-light lobes. A 0
in a bit disables a lobe, while a
1 in a bit enables a lobe.
bits 16–31 Reserved.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-282 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 000E/0023

Ownship Light Animation

This command specifies the OFF/ON/FLASH state of the ownship landing

light lobes.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0014 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x000E SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0023
3 SELECT
4 FLASHENABLE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0014 Length of opcode in bytes (20)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x000E/ 0x0023 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
SELECT bits 0-15 A bit mask that specifies the
active landing-light lobes. A 0
in a bit disables a lobe, while a
1 in a bit enables a lobe.
bits 16–31 Reserved.
FLASHENABLE bits 0-15 A bit mask that specifies the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

flash state landing-light lobes.
A 0 in a bit means steady,
while a 1 in a bit enables
flashing.
bits 16–31 Reserved.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-283

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 000E/0024

Ownship Light Movement

This command specifies the characteristics of the heading and pitch

of ownship lights. Only lobes that are marked as steerable can be
moved (See the CLI command LOBES \DEFINE for more
information).

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x000E SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x0024
3 SELECT
4 HEADING
5 PITCH

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (24)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x000E/ 0x0024 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
SELECT bits 0-15 A bit mask that specifies to
which landing light lobe the
heading and pitch apply. This

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

select does not enable or
disable the lobes.
bits 16–31 Reserved.
HEADING IEEE float (32-bit) Specifies the heading of a
steerable light emanating from
the ownship.
PITCH IEEE float (32-bit) Specifies the pitch of a
steerable light emanating from
the ownship.

3-284 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 000E/002B

Runway Contamination

This command specifies the runway contamination requirement.

NOTE: This feature is independent of the time of year feature. It is
possible to select snow runways on a summer DB if that is
what the instructor wants to do and the contaminant is built
into the current database.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0010 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0001 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x000E SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x002B
3 REGION SCENE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0010 Length of opcode in bytes (16)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x000E/ 0x002B Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
REGION 0–7 The weather region to which
this setup of runway
contaminants applies. Region 0
is global weather.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SCENE 1–9 Runway Contaminations
1= Dry/Normal
NOTE: Sand/dust
2= Wet
contaminant is also
3= Patchy wet
implemented as
4= Ice
blowing sand in
5= Patchy ice
opcode 309D (Wind
6= Snow (75–100%)
Effects).
7= Patch snow (25%)
8= Partially cleared
snow (50%)
9 = sand

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-285

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/009B

Advanced Light and Polygon Intensity
This command specifies an intensity scalar that is to be applied to a
group of lights or polygons. The scalar is applied to the modeled
intensity of lights or polygons. It should be used in place of the
3023 opcode where a greater range of group numbers is required.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0020 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0000 PROCESS ID-0x0003
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0x0005 SUBOPCODE/FUNCID=0x009B
3 GROUP NUMBER
TYPE
INTENSITY
MOVING MODEL NUMBER
INTENSITY SCALAR

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0020 Length of opcode in bytes (32)
EXECUTION 0x0000 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x009B Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
GROUP NUMBER 32-bit Integer Specifies which light or polygon

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0-1023 group’s intensity is being
modified.
TYPE 32-bit Integer Specifies which type of light or
1-4 polygon is being modified.
1= global lights
2 = global polygons
3 = local lights
4 = local polygons
INTENSITY 32-bit Integer Intensity values 0-5 specify
0-6 generalized levels of intensity.
0 = zero intensity Intensity value 6 specifies that
1 = dim intensity the value in the intensity scalar
5 = bright intensity field is to be used.
6 = use scalar field

3-286 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

MOVING MODEL 32-bit Integer Indicates which moving
NUMBER 0 – 4095 model’s local light or polygon
group intensity should be
modified. Used only when the
TYPE field is 3 or 4.
INTENSITY SCALAR IEEE float (32-bit) Specifies the intensity scalar
when the INTENSITY field is 6.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-287

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/009C

Advanced Light and Polygon Enable
This command specifies whether the selected group of lights or
polygons is enabled or not.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00

0 SIZE=0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000

1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID=0x0003
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0X0005 SUBOPCODE/FUNCID=0X009C
3 GROUP NUMBER
4 TYPE
5 ENABLE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (32)

EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority

PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x009C Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode

GROUP NUMBER 32-bit Integer Specifies which light or polygon

group is being enabled
0-1023

TYPE 32-bit Integer Specifies which type of light or

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1-2 polygon is being modified

1 = global lights
2 = global polygons
ENABLE 32-bit Integer Specifies if the light type is
0-1 enabled or not

0 = False
1 = True

3-288 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/009D

Advanced Light Animation Control
This command specifies the enable/disable/override control of light
point animation behavior. Typically, a light point’s animation
behavior is specified by the model. At times it is desirable to turn
modeled animation off (i.e. the light set to the “ON” condition
relative to animation) or adjust the modeled animation definition.
This command provides such control and applies to both global and
local light groups.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0024 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID-0x0003
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0x0005 SUBOPCODE/FUNCID=0x009D
3 GROUP NUMBER
4 ANIMTYPE CONTROL TYPE FLAGS
5 PERIOD
6 PHASEDELAY
7 TIMEON
8 MOVING MODEL NUMBER

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0024 Length of opcode in bytes (32)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x009D Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
GROUP NUMBER 32-bit Integer Specifies which light group’s
0-1023 animation state is being
modified.
FLAGS bits 7-5 Unused

bit 4: Specifies whether the

0 = invalid CONTROL value in word 4 is
1 = valid valid.
Specifies whether the
bit 3:
ANIMTYPE value in word 4 is
0 = invalid
valid.
1 = valid

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-289

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 2: Specifies whether the PERIOD
0 = invalid value in word 5 is valid.
1 = valid

bit 1: Specifies whether the

0 = invalid PHASEDELAY value in word 6 is
1 = valid valid.
bit 0:

0 = invalid Specifies whether the TIMEON

1 = valid value in word 7 is valid.
TYPE 8-bit Integer Specifies whether a global or
1-2 local light group is being
1 = global lights modified..
2 = local lights
CONTROL 8-bit Integer Specifies the animation control
0-2 mode for this light group.
0 = asModeled
1 = noAnimation
2 = override
ANIMTYPE 8-bit Integer Specifies the override
1-4 animation type value for this
1 = none light group.
2 = flash
4 = rotate (soft flash)
MOVING MODEL 32-bit Integer Specifies the moving model
NUMBER number to which a local light
group applies. This must be
supplied when TYPE = 2.
PERIOD IEEE float (32-bit) Specifies the override animation
period value (in seconds) for
this light group.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

PHASEDELAY IEEE float (32-bit) Specifies the override
animation phase delay value
(in seconds) for this light
group.
TIMEON IEEE float (32-bit) Specifies the override
animation timeOn value (in
seconds) for this light group.

3-290 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/009F

Ground Fire Control
This command controls a previously defined ground fire (See the CLI
GROUNDFIRE \DEFINE command for information on how to define a
ground fire).

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00

0 SIZE=0x0028 1110 0000 0000 0000

1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID=0x0003
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0X0005 SUBOPCODE/FUNCID=0X009F
3 NUMBER
4 TYPE
5 MM
6 X OFFSET
7 Y OFFSET
8 Z OFFSET
9 MODE

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0028 Length of opcode in bytes (32)
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x009F Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode

NUMBER 32-bit Signed Integer Specifies the ground fire to

control
-1-127
TYPE 32-bit Signed Integer Specifies the ground fire type
0-127
MM 32-bit Signed Integer The moving model to which the
0-8191 ground fire is attached

X OFFSET Float (Feet) The X offset from the origin of

the MM specified above to
where the ground fire is to
originate

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-291

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

Y OFFSET Float (Feet) The Y offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the ground fire is to
originate
Z OFFSET Float (Feet) The Z offset from the origin of
the MM specified above to
where the ground fire is to
originate
MODE 32-bit Signed Integer The different modes that the
-1 = No change ground fire control could be in

0 = Start
1 = Stop (drawing)
2 = Clean (stop and
remove)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-292 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00A0

Ground Fire Control
This command controls a previously defined ground fire (See the CLI
GROUNDFIRE \DEFINE command for information on how to define a
ground fire). This opcode provides additional parameters for
controlling ground fire effects, supplementing subopcode
0005/009F.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00

0 SIZE=0x0020 1110 0000 0000 0000

1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID=0x0003
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0X0005 SUBOPCODE/FUNCID=0X00A0
3 GROUND FIRE NUMBER
4 HEIGHT SCALE
5 LIFETIME SCALE
6 UNUSED = 0
7 UNUSED = 0

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0020 Length of opcode in bytes (32)

EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground IG execution priority

PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer

SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x00A0 Object ID and function ID that

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode
GROUND FIRE 32-bit Signed Integer Specifies the ground fire to
NUMBER control
0-127
HEIGHT SCALE IEEE Float (32-bit) Specifies the ground fire
particle height scalar
LIFETIME SCALE IEEE Float (32-bit) Scalar specifying alternate
particle size scaling, ignoring
the particle system start and
end scale parameters. Particles
scale from their emitted size to
the emitted size multiplied by
the lifetime scalar over their
lifetime (e.g., a lifetime scale

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-293

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

of 2.0 results in particles slowly
doubling in size over their
lifetime). -1 disables this
alternate scaling.
RESERVED 2 32-bit Unsigned Integer 0
RESERVED 3 32-bit Unsigned Integer 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-294 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00A9

Enhanced Water HAT Request
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0X00E0 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID-0x0003
(FT NON CRIT)
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0x0005 SUB OPCODE/ FUNCID = 0X00A9
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0X0001 RESPONSE PROCESS = 0X0002
4 RESPONSE ID A RESPONSE ID B
5 USER DATA
6 MOVING MODEL FLAGS
7 LATENCY
8 OFFSET X1
9 OFFSET Y1
10 OFFSET Z1
Similarly, 15 more x,y and z offsets. A total of 16 offsets can fit in a
packet. 1 offset takes up 3 words. Hence 16 offsets will take up 48
words. The packet before that is 8 words. That makes a total of 56
words, which makes the overall size of the packet equal to 224
bytes or E0 in HEX.

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0X00E0 Length of opcode in bytes (32)
EXECUTION 0x0001 (FT non crit) IG execution priority.
PRIORITY

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x00A9 Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002
MOVING MODEL 32-bit Integer The moving model from where
the offsets will be defined
FLAGS bits 0-3 Number of control points (0-15
number of control points) being
sent as HAT points. You send
num control points-1. Real
time will add 1 when
processing the data. This is to
fit 1-16 number in 4 bits.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-295

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 4:
0 = invalid Active Packet. This, when true,
1 = valid makes the HAT points defined
by this opcode active.
Packet number. This can be 0,
bits 5-6: 1, 2 or 3. Hence, the total
number of HAT points that can
be defined is 64.

sendContinuousResponse. If
bit 7: this is turned false, then the
responses will be sent only
once per request, else they will
be sent every FAST TIME NON
CRIT field. Send continuous
response is a global setting and
affects all the HAT points
defined using this opcode.
bits 8-15 Unused.
LATENCY IEEE float (32 bit) The estimated delay in seconds
seconds between host and IG.
Offset X1 X offset of the first HAT point
defined by this opcode.
Offset Y1 Y offset of the first HAT point
defined by this opcode.
Offset Z1 Z offset of the first HAT point
defined by this opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-296 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000
Enhanced Water HAT Response

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0X0054 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 RESPONSE PRIORITY PROCESS ID (copied from request)
(copied from request)
2 RESPONSE ID A RESPONSE ID B
(copied from request) (copied from request)
3 USER DATA USER DATA (copied from request)
4 MOVING MODEL FLAGS
5 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1
Similarly, 15 more heights. A total of 21 words (84 bytes).

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0X0054 Length of opcode in bytes (32)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001 copied from request
PROCESS ID copied from request
RESPONSE ID A copied from request
RESPONSE ID B copied from request
USER DATA copied from request
MOVING MODEL 32-bit Integer The moving model from where
the offsets will be defined
FLAGS bits 0-3 Number of control points (0-15
number of control points) being

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sent as HAT points. You send
num control points-1. Real
time will add 1 when
processing the data. This is to
fit 1-16 number in 4 bits.
bit 4:
0 = invalid Active Packet. This, when true,
1 = valid makes the HAT points defined
by this opcode active.
Packet number. This can be 0,
bits 5-6: 1, 2 or 3. Hence, the total
number of HAT points that can
be defined is 64.

sendContinuousResponse. If
bit 7: this is turned false, then the
responses will be sent only

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-297

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

once per request, else they will
be sent every FAST TIME NON
CRIT field. Send continuous
response is a global setting and
affects all the HAT points
defined using this opcode.

bits 8-15 Unused.

HEIGHT1 Height of the first HAT point.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-298 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sup Opcode 0005/00AA

Catspaw Intensity Request
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
− SIZE = 0X0020 1110 0000 0000 0000
− EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID-0x0003
(FT NON CRIT)
− SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0x0005 SUB OPCODE/ FUNCID = 0X00AA
− RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0X0001 RESPONSE PROCESS = 0X0002
USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
−
(User’s response-handler function
(USER’S RESPONSE-HANDLER
OBJECT ID) ID)
− USER DATA
− MOVING MODEL FLAGS
− LATENCY

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0X0020 Length of opcode in bytes (32)
EXECUTION 0x0001 (FT non crit) IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x00AA Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from the EP2. Copied
into the RESPONSE PRIORITY of

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data
Transfer set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.
USER DATA 32 bit value USER DATA 32 bit value Will be
echoed back
MOVING MODEL 32-bit Integer The moving model whose
position will be used to
compute Catspaw intensity.
FLAGS bit 0 Active Request. This, when
0 = invalid true, triggers the Catspaw
1 = valid response from EP2 to Host.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-299

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

bit 1-15 Unused

LATENCY IEEE float (32 bit) The estimated delay in seconds

seconds between host and IG.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-300 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000
Catspaw Intensity Response

− SIZE = 0X0014 1110 0000 0000 0000

− RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0X0001 RESPONSE PROCESS = 0X0002
− USER SUBOPCODE A/OBJ ID USER SUBOPCODE B/ FUNC ID
(COPIED FROM REQUEST) (COPIED FROM REQUEST)
− USER DATA
− INTENSITY

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0X0014 Length of opcode in bytes (20)
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0001 = FT Non Crit Copied from the RESPONSE
PRIORITY of the request
opcode.
PROCESS ID 0x0002 = EP2 to Host Direction of data transfer
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values are copied from
& values the request.
USER SUBOPCODE B
USER DATA Optional additional data here is
echoed from the same field in
the request.
INTENSITY FLOAT The Catspaw intensity based
on the moving model and
latency specified in the
request.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-301

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00ED

Laser Beam End
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x28 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID-0x0003
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0x0005 SUBOPCODE/FUNCID=0x00ED
3 NUM UNUSED FLAGS
4

5 LATITUDE OR X OFFSET OR ELEVATION

6 LONGITUDE OR Y OFFSET OR LENGTH
7 LONGITUDE OR Z OFFSET OR UNUSED
8 ALTITUDE OR UNUSED
9 ALTITUDE OR UNUSED

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x30 Length of opcode in
bytes.
EXECUTION 0x0001 = IG execution priority.
PRIORITY Foreground
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to Direction of data transfer.
EP2
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/0x00EE Object ID and function ID
that define the opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

FLAGS Byte • Bit 0 – 0: Disable Effect.
1: Enable Effect.
• Bit 1 – 0: Disable End
Dot. 1: Enable End Dot.
• Bit 2 – (Valid if bit 3 is
NOT set) 0: Use
LatLonAlt Position. 1:
Use MM Relative
Position.
• Bit 3 – 0: Use Position
1: Use Direction.
• Bits 4-7 –
Reserved/Unused.

3-302 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

NUM Unsigned Short Laser beam effect
(0..127) identifier.
MM Unsigned Short In Motion System relative
(0..8191) position mode, the
motion system number
for the end position to
follow.
SM Unsigned Short In Motion System relative
(0..254) position mode, the
submodel number for the
end position to follow.
X OFFSET Float (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the X
motion system offset for
the start position.
Y OFFSET Float (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Y
motion system offset for
the start position.
Z OFFSET Float (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Z
motion system offset for
the start position.
LATITUDE Double Precision Float In LatLonAlt position
mode, the latitude of the
end position of the
specified effect.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

LONGITUDE Double Precision Float In LatLonAlt position
mode, the longitude of
the end position of the
specified effect.
ALTITUDE Double Precision Float In LatLonAlt position
(Feet) mode, the altitude of the
end position of the
specified effect.
AZIMUTH Float (Degrees) In Direction/Length
mode, the azimuth of the
beam.
ELEVATION Float (Degrees) In Direction/Length
mode, the elevation of
the beam.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-303

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

LENGTH Float (Feet) In Direction/Length
mode, the length of the
beam.

NOTE: Fields that contain multiple formats, swap bytes on the

largest field format boundaries up to 4 bytes.

NOTE: Care should be taken when selecting an end position to

avoid defining an unnecessarily long beam. Using the
shortest possible beam will speed up line-of-sight
processing and ensure the best possible end point
precision. The system MAX beam length is 81920 feet.
Longer beams will be rendered up to 81920 feet from the
end closest to the eye.

NOTE: Some hosts may wish to implement a designate or flashing

laser beam. Though the Enable/Disable Effect flag may be
used, the best implementation is to leave the effect enabled
and simply disable the Beam and Dots. This is the
equivalent of changing a model select as compared to
unbinding and binding a model.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-304 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00EE

Laser Beam Origin
31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x28 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID-0x0003
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0x0005 SUBOPCODE/FUNCID=0x00EE
3 MM OR TYPE MM OR NUM UNUSED FLAGS
4 SM OR LATITUDE TYPE OR NUM OR
LATITUDE LATITUDE
X OFFSET or LATITUDE
5
Y OFFSET or LONGITUDE
6
Z OFFSET or LONGITUDE
7
UNUSED or ALTITUDE
8
UNUSED or ALTITUDE
9

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x30 Length of opcode in
bytes.
EXECUTION 0x0001 = IG execution priority.
PRIORITY Foreground
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to Direction of data transfer.
EP2
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/0x00EE Object ID and function ID
that define the opcode.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

FLAGS Byte • Bit 0 – 0: Disable Beam.
1: Enable Beam.
• Bit 1 – 0: Disable Origin
Dot. 1: Enable Origin Dot.
• Bit 2 – 0: Use MM
Relative Position. 1: Use
LatLonAlt Position.
• Bits 3 - 7 –
Reserved/Unused.
TYPE Byte (0..127) Laser beam type
definition to use for this
effect.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-305

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

NUM Byte (0..127) Laser beam effect
identifier.
MM Unsigned Short In Motion System relative
(0..8191) position mode, the
motion system number
for the start position to
follow.
SM Unsigned Short In Motion System relative
(0..254) position mode, the
submodel number for the
start position to follow.
X OFFSET Float (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the X
motion system offset for
the start position.
Y OFFSET Float (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Y
motion system offset for
the start position.
Z OFFSET Float (Feet) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Z
motion system offset for
the start position.
LATITUDE Double Precision Float In LatLonAlt position
mode, the latitude of the
start position of the
specified effect.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

LONGITUDE Double Precision Float In LatLonAlt position
mode, the longitude of
the start position of the
specified effect.
ALTITUDE Double Precision Float In LatLonAlt position
(Feet) mode, the altitude of the
start position of the
specified effect.

NOTE: Fields that contain multiple formats, swap bytes on the

largest field format boundaries up to 4 bytes

3-306 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 000E/00F9

IG Sync Data Request
This command is used in conjunction with the IG Sync Data
Response command to implement remote IG synchronization of
scattered clouds and other animation effects between remote IGs
(IGs that only the Host has access to).
Through this command the Host tells each IG if it is the master or
one of the slaves in the synchronization group. This master/slave
selection is done by sending this command to each IG with the
mode flag set to master or slave, and a synchronization data length
of zero. Once a master IG is selected, the master IG will send
multiple IG Sync Data response packets to the Host each field, and
it is then the Hosts responsibility to relay that data to all slave IGs
using the IG Sync Data Request opcode.
CIGI Hosts have access to this functionality by wrapping these EP IG
Sync Data opcodes inside the CIGI 201/202 User Defined (EP
request/response) opcodes. To stop this synchronization mode, the
Host must send this command to the master IG and tell it that it is
now a slave. Once synchronization is disabled, all IGs will then
master themselves.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID-0x0003
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0x000E SUBOPCODE/FUNCID=0x00F9
3 MODE SYNC DATA SIZE
4

IG SYNC DATA

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

n

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE Number of bytes in this Opaque data passed from
variable length opcode master IG to Host, and then
to slave IGs.
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground Opaque data passed from
PRIORITY master IG to Host, and then
to slave IGs.
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Opaque data passed from
master IG to Host, and then
to slave IGs.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-307

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SUB OPCODE 0x000E / 0x00F9 Opaque data passed from
master IG to Host, and then
to slave IGs.
MODE 0 = slave The (master/slave) mode
1 = master that the receiving IG is to
assume.
SYNC DATA SIZE 0-n bytes (may be Size of the IG synch data in
smaller than IG SYNC bytes.
DATA block due to
round up)`
IG SYNC DATA Opaque data passed Variable length
from master IG to Host, synchronization data block
and then to slave IGs. (opaque to Host).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3-308 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 000E/00FA

IG Sync Data Response
This command is used in conjunction with the IG Sync Data Request
opcode. (See full description above.)

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY=0x0001 PROCESS ID-0x0002
2 SUBOPCODE/OBJID=0x000E SUBOPCODE/FUNCID=0x00FA
3 UNUSED (0) SYNC DATA SIZE
4

IG SYNC DATA

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE Number of bytes in this Opaque data passed from
variable length opcode master IG to Host, and then
to slave IGs.
EXECUTION 0x0001 = Foreground Opaque data passed from
PRIORITY master IG to Host, and then
to slave IGs.
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP Opaque data passed from
master IG to Host, and then
to slave IGs.
SUB OPCODE 0x000E / 0x00F9 Opaque data passed from

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

master IG to Host, and then
to slave IGs.
MODE 0 = slave The (master/slave) mode
1 = master that the receiving IG is to
assume.
SYNC DATA SIZE 0-n bytes (may be Size of the IG synch data in
smaller than IG SYNC bytes.
DATA block due to
round up)`
IG SYNC DATA Opaque data passed Variable length
from master IG to Host, synchronization data block
and then to slave IGs. (opaque to Host).

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 3-309

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Opcodes

E000 Sub Opcode 0005/00FC

Number of Viewport Controls
This command requests the number of viewports defined on the
system. The number of viewports data is returned via Number of
Viewports Response opcode.

31 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00
0 SIZE = 0x0018 1110 0000 0000 0000
1 EXECUTION PRIORITY = 0x0002 PROCESS ID = 0x0003
2 SUB OPCODE/ObjID = 0x0005 SUB OPCODE/FuncID = 0x00FC
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY = 0x0002 RESPONSE PROCESS = 0x0002
4 USER SUBOPCODE A USER SUBOPCODE B
(User’s response-handler object ID) (User’s response-handler function
ID)
5 USER DATA

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

SIZE 0x0018 Length of opcode in bytes (24)
EXECUTION 0x0002 = Background IG execution priority.
PRIORITY
PROCESS ID 0x0003 = Host to EP2 Direction of data transfer
SUB OPCODE 0x0005/ 0x00FC Object ID and function ID that
define the opcode and are used
to dispatch the opcode.
RESPONSE PRIORITY 0x0002 Can be used to put a priority
for the host process in the
response from EP2. Copied into

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the RESPONSE PRIORITY of the
response opcode.
RESPONSE PROCESS 0x0002 Direction of return data
transfer
set to 2 (EP2 to Host)
USER SUBOPCODE A Two user supplied 16 bit These values will be returned
& values in the response opcode, they
USER SUBOPCODE B can be used to set up pointers
to host response handler object
and function IDs.
USER DATA Data echoed back in Additional data can be entered
response here to enable the host to
manage the response data
more easily.

3-310 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
4 Transfer Protocols
and Opcode
Formats

4.1 Introduction
This chapter provides the protocol and opcode information necessary for
communication between the host computer and the image generator.
Details of Host Communications configuration are included in chapter 6.

4.1.1 Host/IG Data Transfer Protocol

13B

The communication protocol between the host computer (the computer

driving the simulator) and the EP2 IG is described. The information

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

presented is relevant regardless of the type of interface between the
host and the IG.
The actual opcodes are in chapter 3 and the CLI commands in chapter 2.
U U U

A cross-reference of opcodes to CLI commands is also contained in

chapter 3. U U

Information on the following subjects is contained in this chapter:

• General protocol
• Asynchronous-specific protocol
• Synchronous-specific protocol
• Motion systems
• Extrapolation and non-extrapolation
• Host /IG interface—Ethernet
• UDP interface operation and description
• Opcode/Extended opcode formats and descriptions

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-1

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.2 General Protocol

The data interface between the host computer and the IG is based
on an update-only philosophy. This means that only changed data
needs to be sent from the host to the IG. The IG retains data until
either the host or the local interface, which is called the command
line interface (CLI), requests an update.
The Real-Time System (RTS) controls data transfer to the IG by
acting as a mediator between the host and the IG. The host sends
information in the form of a host packet to the RTS, which runs on
the Real-Time (RT) computer in the IG. The host packet contains
information about the ownship and dynamic motion systems,
atmospheric and environmental conditions, and other special effects.
A packet, whether host or IG, contains a data field, which is
common to all interface types, surrounded by control fields that are
interface-specific as shown below:
Data field
Interface Header block Opcode Interface
-specific Message number Status code Reserved block -specific
control (4 bytes) (4 bytes) (4 bytes) (34–1,488 control
fields bytes) fields

The data field contains a header block followed by an opcode block.

The header block is fixed length and contains a message number,
and a status code. The opcode block contains a variable number of
opcodes. Each type of opcode is identified by a unique number
contained in the least significant 16 bits of the first word of the
opcode. Data contained in the header and opcode blocks is
organized into 32-bit words. Optional values in each word that do
not require input must be filled in with zeros.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The interface hardware places the host packet directly into RT
computer memory. When the host packet arrives, an interrupt-
service routine records the time of receipt. The IG immediately
returns an IG packet to the host to acknowledge that the
host packet was received. The host data remains in RT memory
until it is processed at the beginning of the next RT field.
Information from the RT is returned to the host in the form of an IG
packet. The IG packet typically contains information such as collision-
detection, height-above-terrain, and laser-range-finding data.

4-2 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.2.1 Host Packet Data Field

14B

The host packet data field contains a header block and an opcode
block. The header block consists of three 32-bit words as follows:
• Word 0 contains the host packet message number. Message
numbers start at 0, go to (232 –1), and wrap around to 0.
• Word 1 contains the status code. Status codes used in the host
packet header block are listed in Table 4-1.
XU UX

• Word 2 is reserved.
Table 4-1. Status Codes for Host Packet Header Block
Hexadecimal Description
00000000 Normal operation, host data appended
00000001 Normal operation, no host data appended
00000002 Request data, host data appended
00000003 Request data, no host data appended
00000004 Restart acknowledged, host data appended
00000005 Unassigned
00000006 Restart acknowledged, request data, host data appended

4.2.2 IG Packet Data Field

The IG packet data field contains a header block and an opcode
block. The header block consists of three 32-bit words, as follows:
• Word 0 contains the message number from the latest host
packet. Message numbers start at 0, go to (232 –1), and wrap
around to 0.
• Word 1 contains the status code. Status codes for the IG packet

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

header block are listed in Table 4-2.
XU UX

• Word 2 is reserved.
Table 4-2. Status Codes for IG Packet Header Block
Hexadecimal Description
00000000 Normal acknowledgment, no IG data appended
00000001 Unassigned
00000002 Normal acknowledgment, IG data appended
00000003 Unassigned
00000004 IG restarted, no IG data appended
00000005 Unassigned
00000006 IG restarted, IG data appended
FFFFFFFF IG sync, no IG data appended

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-3

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.2.3 Status Codes

This section describes the functions of the status codes that are
contained in the header block of the host and IG packets.
Status codes are used to convey control information, supplementing
the data that is contained in the opcode block. Status codes are
exchanged as part of the communication protocol in order to report
the operational conditions of the host and the IG. In addition, the
host can use some of the status codes to instruct the IG to change
its current operating state or to supply requested data.

4.2.3.1 Initialization
3B

During IG initialization following a power-up or restart sequence,

the IG ignores any communication from the host. When
initialization is complete, the IG accepts communication from the
host by responding appropriately to a received host packet. If the
host is not sending packets to the IG, the IG can wait indefinitely in
its initialized condition. When the first host packet is received, the
IG sets its message number to the same number contained in the
host packet and proceeds with normal communication.

4.2.3.2 Normal Operation

34B

During normal, error-free communication, the IG responds

immediately to every packet that it receives from the host by
returning an IG packet to the host. The IG packet has the same
message number as the host packet.
When the host packet contains a normal operation status code
(0x00000000 or 0x00000001 hexadecimal), the IG responds with a
normal acknowledgment status code (0x00000000 or 0x00000002
hexadecimal).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The only exception to this is when the IG has restarted and
receives a host packet without a restart acknowledged status code
(0x00000004 or 0x00000006 hexadecimal). The IG acknowledges
the host packet with the proper message number and with an IG
restarted status code (0x00000004 or 0x00000006 hexadecimal)
instead of a normal acknowledgment status code. The IG continues
to send an IG restarted status code in response to each host packet
it receives until the host sends a packet containing a restart
acknowledged status code.
When the host sends a restart acknowledged status code, the IG
clears its restart condition. The IG then proceeds into normal
acknowledgment mode.
When the host sends a request data status code (0x00000002,
0x00000003, or 0x00000006 hexadecimal), the IG acknowledges

4-4 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

the host packet immediately. The IG logs the request and sends the
requested information as soon as it is available.

4.2.3.3 Error Handling

35B

There is a timeout parameter associated with extrapolation which

can be set using the CLI EXTRAPOLATION command. By default
this is set to –1 which means that the IG will extrapolate forever if
no further host messages are received. If a value is specified then
extrapolation will be carried out for the specified time, after which
the model will stop moving. The IG does not print any messages
when the host stops or starts transmitting opcodes.
If any messages are received with non-sequential message
numbers, the IG does not send any error messages back to the
host except for a CIGI host where the IG will indicate a possible
lost of packet. The IG will carry on working correctly for all
subsequent opcodes.
If any unknown or unhandled opcodes are received, the IG will
print an error message in the log window of the EP2 Application
User Interface. If the opcode is “unknown,” then the IG will ignore
all the opcodes in the packet following the unknown opcode. If an
opcode is “unhandled,” then the IG will ignore that opcode but will
process all other opcodes in the packet—this will be the case for
legacy systems that send opcodes which are no longer necessary
for EP2.

NOTE: Status code of 1 or 2 instructs the RTS to not process the

host data packet even if the packet contains host opcodes.
Status code 0, 2, 4, or 6 should be used if there is host
data appended that the RTS must process.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4.2.4 Multiple Packet Operation
17B

It is possible to send several packets of data within one frame of

operation, however, there are some points to note when doing this.
If a response is required from the IG then this should only be
requested for the last packet of the frame. So all packets except
the last one should contain a status of 0, 1 or 4 and the last packet
should have a status of 3, 4 or 6. Additionally, the EP2
configuration parameter EthernetResponseMode must be set to 1
so that EP2 only responds when a request data status is sent.
The number of opcodes that can be sent in one packet is limited by
the opcode block size (i.e., 1488 for RAW Ethernet and up to 64KB
including header information for UDP), other than this any number
of opcodes can be packed into one packet.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-5

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.3 Asynchronous-Specific Protocol

3B

During asynchronous data transfers between the host and the IG,
the IG acts as a slave to the host. As a slave the IG neither
demands a response from the host nor controls the physical
transmission of data between the host and itself.
During asynchronous communication, host data is received by the
IG anytime during an RT field. At the start of an RT field,
extrapolation can be applied to previously received motion systems
and viewport data to time-correct it for the current field. The
extrapolation routine uses the difference between the current time
and the time the host information was received to calculate the
time-corrected data.

4.4 Synchronous-Specific Protocol

4B

When transferring data synchronously, the IG is the master that

controls data transmission. The IG initiates the communication
sequence by transmitting a sync packet. The sync packet format is
identical to the format of an IG packet. The RT generates a message
number that increments each time a sync packet is sent. The status
code is a –1, which indicates that the packet is a sync packet.
Synchronous host mode is enabled by setting the following variable
to a value of TRUE in the EP2 Application User Interface host
configuration properties:

When host communication is enabled, the RT transmits a sync

packet for each field. When the host receives the sync packet, it
must return current data to the IG, within a fixed interval,

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

immediately before the beginning of the RT field.
Using synchronous protocol has two advantages: shorter transport
delay since data comes to the IG at the beginning of a real-time
field, and faster processing since no extrapolation is required.

4-6 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.5 Motion Systems

5B

The IG uses several types of three-dimensional (3D) motion systems

when generating an image. The motion systems that are available are:
• Motion system 0: Ownship motion system
• Motion system 1: Ground motion system
• Motion system 2: Sky motion system
• Motion system 3: Dynamic motion system
•
•
•
• Motion system 4095: Dynamic motion system 4095
The eyepoint is normally defined at the origin of motion system 0
for the out-the-window (OTW) viewports. Motion system 1 is used
internally by the IG for the ground (generic or 3D) and motion
system 2 is used internally by the IG for the sky. Neither of these
should be controlled from the host. Motion systems 3 through 2047
are used for moving models.

4.5.1 Motion System Positioning

18B

The coordinates of the ownship motion system and all nonchained

motion systems can be defined using either Cartesian or geodetic
coordinates. The specific coordinate system is defined in the EP2
system configuration file as follows:
CoordSys "Cartesian"
where Cartesian would replace geodetic for a Cartesian coordinate
system.
When Cartesian coordinates are specified, the ownship motion
system and all-nonchained motion systems used to place moving

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

models are defined in x, y, z, heading, pitch, and roll. When
geodetic coordinates are specified, the motion systems are defined
in latitude, longitude, altitude, heading, pitch, and roll. Chained
models are always positioned using x, y, z, heading, pitch, and roll
relative to its parent model.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-7

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Table 4-3 lists scaling values and resolutions for the motion system
XU U U U UX

parameters that the IG expects from the host.

Table 4-3. Motion System Parameter Scaling Values and Resolutions

Positive
Parameter Description Direction Format
x Lateral (east/west) displacement of East Scaled distance
current motion system (32 bit)
y Longitudinal (north/south) North Scaled distance
displacement of current motion system (32 bit)
z Vertical (up/down) displacement of Up Scaled distance
current motion system (32 bit)
Latitude Latitude in geocentric coordinates North Angle (36 bit)
Longitude Longitude in geocentric coordinates East Angle (36 bit)
Altitude Altitude above and below the model Up Scaled distance
origin (32 bit)
Heading Heading relative to the current motion Clockwise Angle (32 bit)
system for x and y, heading relative to
true north for latitude and longitude
Pitch Pitch relative to the current motion Nose up Angle (32 bit)
system
Roll Roll relative to the current motion Left wing Angle
system up (32 bit)

4.5.2 Moving Models

19B

In addition to the ownship, the IG can address up to 4096 dynamic

motion systems. Moving models are controlled by associating the
model with one or more of the available dynamic motion systems
and allowing either the host or the IG to control that motion system

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

dynamically. All moving models have at least one dynamic motion
system assigned to them.
Each dynamic motion system is independently controllable, with six
degrees of freedom. The Route Record feature of the IG allows the
RT to control airborne or surface moving models along predefined
paths, thus minimizing the host control requirement. Alternatively,
the airborne moving models and surface moving models may be
dynamically positioned under host control.
If a primary moving model requires additional articulated parts that
move independently, then it can include up to 255 secondary
submodels. Articulated parts can also be created by chaining
primary moving models together. Instead of being defined relative
to the database origin, a chained dynamic motion system is defined
relative to its parent motion system. The position and orientation of
the chained motion system can track the movements of its parent
motion system, or they can be controlled independently as well.

4-8 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

The actual number of moving models that can be simultaneously

accommodated by the IG depends on many factors, such as the
complexity of each moving model, the complexity of the
background scene, and the polygon-capacity option.

4.6 Extrapolation and Non-Extrapolation

6B

The IG can operate the ownship motion system and the dynamic
motion systems in either an extrapolated or a non-extrapolated
mode. Extrapolation may be necessary for the proper real-time
movement of motion systems that are dynamically updated using
asynchronous communication. The absence of extrapolation in this
instance can result in irregular and distracting movement of the
motion system. However, if a motion system is placed in the
database and then stays in the position in which it is placed;
extrapolation is a waste of IG resources. If a motion system
with extrapolation enabled is to remain in the position at which it
was placed, the position must be sent at least twice to avoid
extrapolating the motion system from the desired location.
Extrapolation is performed at the beginning of each RT field for all
motion systems that request it. The extrapolation algorithm uses the
positional information in the last two host packets received to predict
the current time-corrected position. If an opcode value in the most
recently received host packet is flagged invalid, then the latest valid
information received for that opcode value is used in the
extrapolation algorithm for calculating the time-corrected position.

4.7 Host/IG Interface

The standard interface between the host and the IG is Ethernet.
Other types of interfaces are available as options.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4.7.1 Ethernet Interface
20B

A dedicated Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) interface using level 2, chip level

standards is the standard interface between the host and the IG.
The Ethernet network must be collision-free when the host and the
IG are communicating.

4.7.1.1 Physical Link Layer Interface

36B

The physical link layer interface consists of an Ethernet transceiver

and a cable that connects the Ethernet transceiver to the receiving
station of the host’s transceiver. This interface is RJ45 Twisted Pair
crossover cable. An alternative interface consisting of a standard
RJ45 twisted pair cable and an Ethernet switch or an Ethernet hub
is also supported.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-9

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.7.1.2 Ethernet Standards and Descriptions

37B

The Ethernet follows these industry standards for its type of interface:
• Hardware Standard: IEEE 802.3
• Software Standards: IEEE 802.3 and Bluebook Ethernet
The format for the host and IG packets when using an Ethernet
interface is as follows:
Length field
Preamble SFD sync Destination Source (IEEE 802.3)
field field address address or type field Data field CRC field
field field (Bluebook)
56 bits 8 bits 6 bytes 6 bytes 2 bytes 46–1,500 4 bytes
bytes

The preamble, start-of-frame delimiter (SFD) sync, and cyclic

redundancy check (CRC) fields are generated by the Ethernet
interface circuit; the rest of the fields are software-generated.
The destination address, source address, and length or type fields
are required by Ethernet 802.3 protocol.
The data field has a minimum of 46 bytes and includes a header
block and an opcode block. The data field of the host and IG
packets is configured as follows:
Data field
Header block
Message number Status code Reserved Opcode block
4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 34–1,488 bytes

A 00003000 (hexadecimal) opcode indicates the end of the usable

information being sent in the data field. Although the receiving
software does not use any data beyond the 00003000 opcode, the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

transmitting software must still pad the data field with zeros
following the 00003000 if the information being sent does not use
at least 46 bytes. IEEE 802.3 allows for this situation. The
maximum number of bytes the data field can handle is 1,500 for
the host packet and 1,006 bytes for the IG packet.
When a packet is transmitted, the most significant byte is
transferred first, followed by the other bytes. The least significant
byte is transferred last.

4.7.2 Examples of Ethernet Host and IG Packets

21B

The following examples show a host packet and an IG packet as

they would be seen on an Ethernet analyzer. The analyzer strips
the preamble, SFD sync, and CRC fields. The destination address,
source address, length/type, and data fields show on the Ethernet
analyzer as follows:

4-10 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Data field
Destination Source Length Header block
address address field or Message Status Opcode
field field type field block
number code Reserved
6 bytes 6 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 34–1,488
bytes

Host Packet Example:

NOTE: Values are in hexadecimal. Each pair of hexadecimal
numbers equals one byte.
08 00 3E 20 B7 FD 02 60 8C 2E A4 A7 0E 55 00 00
00 2A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 41 01 F8
01 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 00
Where:
08 00 3E 20 B7 FD is the destination address.
02 60 8C 2E A4 A7 is the source address.
0E 55 is the length/type.
00 00 00 2A is the message number.
00 00 00 00 is the status code.
00 00 00 00 is reserved.
00 00 30 41 is the first opcode
01 F8 01 02 is the second 32-bit word in the first opcode.
00 00 00 00 is the third 32-bit word in the first opcode.
•
•

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

•
00 00 00 00 is the twelfth 32-bit word in the first opcode.
00 00 30 00 is the end of data opcode.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-11

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

IG Packet Example
NOTE: Values are in hexadecimal. Each pair of hexadecimal
numbers equals one byte.
02 60 8C 2E A4 A7 08 00 3E 20 B7 FD 0E 55 00 00
00 2A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Where:
02 60 8C 2E A4 A7 is the destination address.
08 00 3E 20 B7 FD is the source address.
0E 55 is the length/type.
00 00 00 2A is the message number.
00 00 00 00 is the status code.
00 00 00 00 is reserved.
00 00 30 00 is the end of data opcode.
00 00 00 00 is padding to meet the minimum of 46 bytes required
in the data field.
•
•
•
00 00 00 00 is padding to meet the minimum of 46 bytes required
in the data field.
8B8B 8B8B

4.8 UDP Interface

This section describes the communications protocol using the IG
and the UDP interface. This optional interface allows a connection
via UDP sockets. An IG can be plugged into an existing UDP

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

network and the host program run on any machine on the network.
The drawback of this interface is that network traffic will interfere
with the timely delivery of information to and from the IG. If
guaranteed delivery time is required, then dedicated hardware is
required. This is a simple way to interface to the IG, as no special
drivers or hardware are necessary other than the UDP, which
comes standard on most workstations.

4.8.1 UDP-Specific Operation

25B

The IG should have UDP communications enabled via the

ConnectionType parameter in the host section of the configuration
properties. The host port number and IP address are also specified
via the host properties. HU

The host connects to the specified IG port number to establish a

socket connection. After this, normal communication can

4-12 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

commence, with the host sending opcodes and the IG sending back
responses. The host may close the socket when it wishes to
disconnect.

4.8.2 UDP–General Protocol

The data interface between the host and the IG is based on an
update-only philosophy. This means that only changed data needs
to be sent from the host to the IG. The IG retains data until either
the host or the local interface, which is called the command line
interface (CLI), requests an update.
The host sends information in the form of a host packet to the RTS.
The host packet contains information about the ownship and
dynamic motion systems, atmospheric and environmental
conditions, and other special effects.
A packet, whether host or IG, contains a data field, which is
common to all interface types, surrounded by control fields that are
interface-specific as shown below:
Data field
Interface- Header block Opcode Interface-
specific Message Status Response block specific
control (34–1,488 control
number code Reserved Count inhibit
fields bytes) fields
(4 bytes) (4 bytes) (2 bytes) (1 byte) (1 byte)

The data field contains a header block followed by an opcode block.

The header block is a fixed length and contains a message number,
a status code, a count of the number of host packets this frame,
and a null response inhibit code. The count and response inhibit
apply only to some interfaces. The opcode block contains a variable
number of opcodes. Each type of opcode is identified by a unique
number contained in the least significant 16 bits of the first word of

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

the opcode. Data contained in the header and opcode blocks is
organized into 32-bit words. Optional values in each word that do
not require input must be filled in with zeros.
The interface hardware places the host packet directly into RTS
memory. When the host packet arrives, an interrupt-service routine
records the time of receipt. The IG immediately returns an IG
packet to the host to acknowledge that the host packet was
received. The host data remains in RTS memory until it is
processed at the beginning of the next RTS field.
Information from the RTS is returned to the host in the form of an IG
packet. The IG packet typically contains information such as collision-
detection, height-above-terrain, and laser-range-finding data.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-13

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.8.2.1 UDP Host to IG Interface-Specific Control Field

38B

For the UDP interface, the control field consists of five longwords
that precede the data field. These are:
udpmagic
byteCount
seconds
microseconds
reserved
The first longword, named udpmagic, has the value 0x20756470. This
is the ASCII code for “ udp”, and indicates the start of a UDP packet.
This allows both the host and IG to recognize the start of a packet. Its
omission indicates a problem has occurred with the data stream.
The second longword, named byteCount, is the total number of
bytes in the opcode block of the packet including the 4 bytes for
the end of data opcode at the end of the packet. ByteCount does
not include the 12 bytes for the header block. It allows both host
and IG to recognize when the entire packet has been received.
Note that software reading the packet should verify that the entire
interface-specific control field has been read, and then should use
the byteCount to see if the entire packet has yet been read.
The third and fourth longwords, named seconds and microseconds,
are the host time stamp in seconds and microseconds.
The fifth longword is reserved for future enhancements. It should be
set to zero.

UDP Host to IG Opcode Example

20 75 64 70 00 00 00 1C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 28 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00
14 00 30 25 00 00 00 00 66 75 73 65 62 6F 78 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 00

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Where:
20 75 64 70 is udpmagic
00 00 00 1C is the byte count
00 00 00 00 is the seconds
00 00 00 00 is the microseconds
00 00 00 00 is reserved
00 00 00 28 is the message number
00 00 00 01 is the status code
00 00 00 00 is reserved, count, response inhibit
14 00 30 25 is the start of database load opcode 0x3025

4-14 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.8.2.2 UDP IG to Host Interface-Specific Control Field

For the UDP IG to host interface, the control field consists of three
longwords that precede the data field. These are:
udpmagic
byteCount
reserved
The first longword, named udpmagic, has the value 0x20756470. This
is the ASCII code for “ udp”, and indicates the start of a UDP packet.
This allows both host and IG to recognize the start of a packet. Its
omission indicates a problem has occurred with the data stream.
The second longword, named byteCount, is the total number of
bytes in the opcode block of the packet including the 4 bytes for
the end of data opcode at the end of the packet. ByteCount does
not include the 12 bytes for the header block. It allows both host
and IG to recognize when the entire packet has been received.
Note that software reading the packet should verify that the entire
interface-specific control field has been read, and then should use
the byteCount to see if the entire packet has yet been read.
The third longword is reserved for future enhancements. It should be
set to zero.

UDP IG to Host Opcode Example

20 75 64 70 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 20
00 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 00

Where:
20 75 64 70 is udpmagic
00 00 00 04 is the byte count
00 00 00 00 is reserved

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

00 00 00 20 is the message number
00 00 00 02 is the status code
00 00 00 00 is reserved, count, response inhibit
00 00 30 00 is the end of data opcode 0x3000

NOTE: The byte order of the UDP header is little endian. The byte
order of data in the opcode block is network order (big
endian) including the end of data packet.

4.9 Formats and Descriptions

12B

Opcodes and extended opcodes identify the contents of the data

items sent between the host and the IG. This section provides
descriptions of the standard formats used by the opcodes and the
extended opcodes/subopcodes. Chapter 3 contains the opcodes
themselves.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-15

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.9.1 EP2 Opcode Data Formats

31B

The opcodes use standard formats for converting distance, angles,

and fractions from decimal to hexadecimal.
The ESIG opcode data format has been followed for functions that
are the same or very similar to those used in ESIG systems;
however, where new opcodes were added an extended opcode
format has been introduced. This has been introduced to improve
the opcode handling process within the IG.
The formats that follow are presented using these conventions:
• Each format is presented as 32-bit words. Bit numbering reflects
the actual length of the word.
• Bit numbers are marked along the top of the word. Bit values,
when they are given, are marked on top of the corresponding
bit number.
• Sign bits are marked by an S.
• The offset from the starting address is written within each byte.
• The most significant byte and the least significant byte of each
word are marked below the applicable byte.
• The format, resolution, range, formula, and examples are given
in list form just below the word format
• All opcode fields and flag bits that are labeled unused must be
set to zero.
• If a field in an opcode uses one of these standard formats, it is
noted in the information on that field. The following standard
formats are presented in this section:
The B format notation is a shorthand method used to express the
range and resolution of a fixed-point format. It consists of an
uppercase B followed by two numbers in parentheses, such as

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

B(n, m). The first number, n, defines the power of two that the
most significant bit represents. The second number, m, defines the
power of two that the least-significant bit represents. The formats
can be either signed or unsigned and usually correspond to an
internal format that is used in the EP2 graphics systems.
• Scaled distance format (32 bit)
• Unscaled distance format (32 bit)
• Unscaled distance format (16 bit)
• Angle format (36 bit)
• Angle format (32 bit)
• Angle format (16 bit)
• Scaled angular rate format (32 bit)
• Fraction B format (32 bit)
• Fraction A format (16 bit)

4-16 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

• Fraction B format (16 bit)

• Scalar A format (32 bit)
• Scalar D format (32 bit)
• Scalar E format (32 bit)
• Scalar A format (16 bit)
• Scalar B format (16 bit)
• Scalar A format (8 bit)
• Integer format (16 bit)
• IEEE Float format (32 bit)
• IEEE format (64 bit)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-17

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Scaled distance format (32 bit)

221
31 30 24 23 16

S address n address (n+1)

most significant byte

20 2–1 2–9
15 9 8 7 0

address (n+2) address (n+3)

least significant byte

Format: 32-bit, two’s complement, fixed-point B(22,–9)

Resolution: 2–9 database unit
Range: –222 through 222–2–9
Formula: units × 29+scaled distance (32-bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
5,000 × 29 = 2,560,000 = 00271000
9
–7,777 × 2 = –3,981,824 = FFC33E00
0.5 × 29 = 256 = 00000100

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Applications: 3002 Ground fog thickness
3004 Cloud top, bottom
300A Storm (Advanced) x,y,z formats, altitude,
storm cloud base
300F Clouds (EP) top, bottom
3031 Height-above-terrain testpoint x offset, y
offset, z offset
303D Terrain following models z offset
3041 Moving Model and Eyepoint Control x,y,z
offsets, altitude
3044 Eyepoint x,y,z offsets

4-18 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Applications: 304C Moving-model update x offset, y offset, z

offset
3080 Height-above-terrain response distance,
height above terrain, height of terrain
3084 Height-above-terrain (ESIG)
distance, height above terrain, height of
terrain
309A Advanced routed traffic control x, y, z, trigger
range
309E Generic airport control altitude of TD point
309F Scattered clouds altitude
3122 Advanced routed traffic route status
block x, y, z, trigger range
3134 DI-Guy model update x offset, y offset, z
offset

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-19

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Unscaled distance format (32 bit)

231
31 24 23 16
address n address (n+1)
most significant byte
20
15 8 7 0
address (n+2) address (n+3)
least significant byte

Format: 32-bit, unsigned, fixed-point B(31,0)

Resolution: 20 database unit
Range: 0 through 232–20
Formula: units×20+unscaled distance (32-bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
5,280×20 = 5,280 = 000014A0
0
25,768×2 = 25,768 = 000064A8

Applications: 3002 Ground fog RVR

3004 Cloud top, bottom

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3008 Visibility distance
300E Advanced clouds cloud visibility
300F Clouds (EP) cloud visibility, top, bottom
3069 IR visibility control distance
309F Scattered cloud layer altitude

4-20 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Unscaled distance format (16 bit)

215 20
15 8 7 0
address n address (n+1)
most significant byte least significant byte

Format: 16-bit, unsigned, fixed-point B(15,0)

Resolution: 20 database unit
Range: 0 through 216–20
Formula: units×20+unscaled distance (16-bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
5,000×20 = 5,000 = 1388
0
50×2 = 50 = 0032

Applications: 3002 Ground fog transition range, thickness

300E Advanced clouds (ESIG) transition layer
300F Clouds (EP) top and bottom transition layer
306A IRPP configuration maximum gain delta,
maximum level delta

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-21

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Angle format (36 bit)

0 0 0 0 180° 90° 45° 22.5° 11.25°
47 40 39 37 36 35 34 33 32
address n address (n+1)
most significant byte

0 5.625°
31 30 24 23 16
address (n+2) address (n+3)

2–36 360°
15 8 7 0
address (n+4) address (n+5)
least significant byte

Format: 36-bit, unsigned, fixed-point B(–1, –36)

Resolution: 2–36×360°
Range: 0° through 360°–(2–36×360)°
Formula: (degrees/360)(236) = angle (36-bit)

NOTE: Only 36 of the 48 bits are used: bits 36–32 and 30–0 are
used for data; bits 47–37 and bit 31 are set to 0 since
they are not used. Bit 31 must be 0. In order to insert 0
into bit 31, all the higher order bits must be shifted up one

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

position. For example, bit 31 is shifted to bit 32, bit 32 is
shifted to bit 33 and so on. Bits 30–0 are not shifted.

The resolution of this format is equivalent to the resolution

of the scaled distance format. This resolution matches the
database resolution, which is 1/512 of a foot for a
feet/miles type database.
In the examples below, the numbers being converted have not
been shifted to reflect a zero in bit 31.
Examples:
Conversion = Results (decimal) = Results (hexadecimal)
36
(36.46171111/360)(2 ) = 6,960,082,523 = 19EDA6E5B
36
(40.26701944/360)(2 ) = 7,686,468,072 = 1CA2631E8

4-22 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Applications: 300A Storm (advanced) latitude, longitude

3041 Moving-model control latitude, longitude
3068 IR environment latitude, longitude
309E Generic airport control latitude, longitude,

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-23

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Angle format (32 bit)

180° 90° 45° 22.5° 11.25°
31 30 29 28 27 24 23 16
address n address (n+1)
most significant byte
2–32×360°
15 8 7 0
address (n+2) address (n+3)
least significant byte
Format: 32-bit, unsigned, fixed-point B(–1, –32)
Resolution: 2–32×360°
Range: 0° through 360°–(2–32×360)°
Formula: (degrees/360)(232)=angle (32-bit)

NOTE: Negative angles can also be converted to this format. For

example, the conversions of –90° and 270° result in the
same hexadecimal value.
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
(2/360)(232) = 23,860,929 = 016C16C1
32
(270/360)(2 ) = 3,221,225,472 = C0000000
32
(*90/360)(2 ) = –1,073,741,824 = C0000000

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Applications: 3006 Time of day sunrise azimuth, sunset azimuth,
maximum elevation
3007 Horizon heading
300A Storm (advanced) heading
3041 Moving-model and eyepoint control heading,
pitch, roll, altitude
3043 Viewport heading, pitch, roll

Applications: 304C Moving-model update heading, pitch, roll

3067 EXG symbol control roll

4-24 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

3078 Articulated parts three submodels moving-

model control submodel 0 heading, submodel
0 pitch, submodel 0 roll, rotation angle A,
rotation angle B, rotation angle C
3083 Moving-model response heading, pitch, roll
309E Generic airport control runway heading
3132 DI-Guy Aim Angles weapon/head gaze
azimuth and elevation
3134 DI-Guy model update heading, pitch, roll,
weapon/head gaze azimuth and elevation

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-25

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Angle format (16 bit)

180° 90° 45° 22.5° 11.25° 2–16×360°
15 14 13 12 11 8 7 0
address n address (n+1)
most significant byte least significant byte

Format: 16-bit, unsigned, fixed-point B(–1, –16)

Resolution: 2–16×360°
Range: 0° through 360°–(2–16×360)°
Formula: (degrees/360)(216)=angle (16-bit)

NOTE: Negative angles can also be converted to this format. For

example, the conversions of –90° and 270° result in the
same hexadecimal value.
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
(0.5/360)(216) = 91 = 005B
16
(-0.25/360)(2 ) = –45 = FFD3

Applications: 309E Generic Airport Control slope

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4-26 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Scaled angular rate format (32 bit)

25 2–9
31–30 24 23 16

S address n address (n + 1)
most significant byte

2–10 2–25
15 8 7 0
address (n+2) address (n + 3)
least significant byte

Format: 32-bit, two’s complement, fixed-point B(6,–25)

Resolution: 2–25 revolutions/second
Range: –26 through 26–2–25 revolutions/second
Formula: units×225 = scaled distance (32 bit)
units are revolutions, where 1 revolution is 360 degrees.
Examples:
10 degrees per second×(1 rev/360 degrees)×225) = 932068 = 0xE38E4
180 degrees per second×(1 rev/360 degrees)×225) = 16777216 =
0x01000000
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
–0.5×225 = –16777216 = FF000000

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

25
0.5×2 = 16777216 = 01000000

Applications: 3090 Moving Model Velocity h, p, r rate

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-27

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Fraction B format (32 bit)

2–1
31 30 24 23 16

S address n address (n+1)

most significant byte
2–31
15 8 7 0
address (n+2) address (n+3)
least significant byte
Format: 32-bit, two’s complement, fixed-point B(0,–31)
Resolution: 2–31
Range: –1 through 1–2–31
Formula: fraction×231=fraction (32-bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
0.75×231 = 1,610,612,736 = 60000000
31
–0.50×2 = –1,073,741,824 = C0000000

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4-28 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Fraction A format (16 bit)

2–1 2–15
15 14 8 7 0

S address n address (n+1)

most significant byte least significant byte
Format: 16-bit, two’s complement, fixed-point B(0,–15)
Resolution: 2–15
Range: –1 through 1–2–15
Formula: fraction 215+fraction (16-bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
0.75×215 = 24,576 = 6000
15
–0.50×2 = –16,384 = C000

Applications: 3080 Height-above-terrain response x normal, y

normal, z normal
3084 Enhanced height-above-terrain response x
normal, y normal, z normal

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-29

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Fraction B format (16 bit)

28 2–6
15 14 8 7 0

S address n address (n+1)

most significant byte least significant byte
Format: 16-bit, two’s complement, fixed-point B(9, –6)
Resolution: 2–6
Range: –29 through 29–2–6
Formula: fraction×26 = fraction (16-bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
0.500×26 = 32 = 0020
6
–15.250×2 = –976 = FC30
6
100.000×2 = 6,400 = 1900
6
–1.125×2 = –72 = FFB8
6
500.000×2 = 32,000 = 7D00

Applications: 3029 Noise control gain, level

3062 IRPP gain control gain, level
3068 IR environment temperature, wind speed,
humidity

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

306C IR support temperature temperature
30B1 IR diurnal control maximum and minimum
ambient temperature
3203 IRPP gain, level, and noise response gain,
level

4-30 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Scalar A format (32 bit)

215 20
31 24 23 16
address n address (n+1)
most significant byte
2–1 2–16
15 8 7 0
address (n+2) address (n+3)
least significant byte
Format: 32-bit, unsigned, fixed-point B(15,–16)
Resolution: 2–16
Range: 0 through 216–2–16
Formula: scalar×216+scalar A (32-bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
2×216 = 131,072 = 00020000
16
0.5×2 = 32,768 = 00008000

Applications:
3042 Animation, converging traffic, and bird strike
speed scalar
3043 Viewport zoom scalar

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3057 Viewport parameters visibility scalar
3067 EXG symbol control xscale, yscale
306E IRPP HST turret azimuth and elevation slew
rate, azimuth and elevation acceleration
3139 Binocular View, zoom

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-31

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Scalar D format (32 bit)

215 2–1
31–30 24 23 16

S address n address (n + 1)
most significant byte

20 2–15
15 8 7 0
address (n+2) address (n + 3)
least significant byte
Format: 32-bit, two’s complement, fixed-point B(16,–15)
Resolution: 2–15 database units/second
Range: –216 through 216–2–15 database units/second
Formula: units×215 = scaled distance (32-bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
5000×215 = 163,840,000 = 09C40000
15
–7777×2 = –254,836,700 = F0CF8000
0.5×215 = 16384 = 00004000

Applications: 3090 Moving Model Velocity x, y, z velocity

3131 DI-Guy Action Type speed

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3131 DI-Guy Model Update Type scalar D

4-32 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Scalar E format (32 bit)

214 20
31–30 24 23 16

S address n address (n + 1)
most significant byte

2–1 2–16
15 8 7 0
address (n+2) address (n + 3)
least significant byte

Format: 32-bit, two’s complement, fixed-point B(15,–16)

Resolution: 2–16
Range: –215 through 215–2–16
Formula: scalar×216 = scalar E (32 bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
2.0×216 = 131,072 = 0x20000
16
0.5×2 = 32,768 = 0x8000
16
–0.5×2 = –32,768 = 0xFFFF8000

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Applications: 306D EXG Target Tracker Offset Track horizontal
and vertical offset coordinates

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-33

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Scalar A format (16 bit)

24 20 2–11
15 11 8 7 0
address n address (n+1)
most significant byte least significant byte

Format: 16-bit, unsigned, fixed-point B(4, –11)

Resolution: 2–11
Range: 0 through 25 –2–11
Formula: scalar×211+scalar A (16-bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
0.75 → 0.75×211 = 1,536 = 0600
11
0.50 → 0.50×2 = 1,024 = 0400

Applications: 3023 Light/polygon intensity intensity scalar

3040 Moving-model definition local-light and local-
polygon intensities
3049 Static-model definition local-light and local-
polygon intensities
3133 DI-Guy model definition local-light and local-
polygon intensities

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

NOTE: For a modeled intensity of 1.0, the maximum scalar is
0×7FFF which represents 24 –2–11 or 15.99. If the modeled
intensity is 0.5 or less, then the maximum scalar is
0×FFFF, which represents 25 –2–11 or 31.99.

4-34 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Scalar B format (16 bit)

2–1 2–16
15 8 7 0
address n address (n+1)
most significant byte least significant byte

Format: 16-bit, unsigned, fixed-point B(–1, –16)

Resolution: 2–16
Range: 0 through 20–2–16
Formula: scalar×216+scalar B (16-bit)
Examples:

Conversion = Results = Results

(decimal) (hexadecimal)
0.98×216 = 64,225.28 = FAE1
0.5×216 = 32,768 = 8000

Applications: 3029 Noise control noise

3063 IRPP distortion focus
3067 EXG symbol control x, y
306A IRPP configuration noise, xstart, xend, ystart,
yend, decay, distribution center, intensity
bins, lower gain limit, upper gain limit

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-35

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Scalar A format (8 bit)

7 0
address n

Format: 8-bit, unsigned, fixed-point B(–1, –8)

Resolution: 2–8
Range: 0 through 20–2–8
Formula: scalar×28+scalar A (8 bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
0.50×28 = 128 = 80
8
0.75×2 = 192 = C0
8
0.996×2 = 255 = FF

Applications: 3066 EXG symbol intensity intensity

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4-36 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

Integer format (16 bit)

215 20
15 8 7 0
address n address (n + 1)
most significant byte least significant byte

Format: 16-bit, unsigned, fixed point B(15, 0)

Resolution: 20
Range: 0 through 216–20
Formula: units×20+integer (16 bit)
Examples:
Conversion = Results = Results
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
5000×20 = 5,000 = 1388
0
50×2 = 50 = 0032

Applications: 3049 Static-model definition local light intensity,

local polygon intensity
3133 DI-Guy model definition local-light and local-
polygon intensities

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-37

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

IEEE float format (32 bit)

31–30 23 22 16

S Exponent Fractional Component

most significant byte

15 0
Fractional Component
least significant byte

Format: ANSI IEEE 754-1985 standard.

Bits Name Content

31 Sign 1: if false, number is negative
23–30 Exponent 8-bit exponent, biased by 127.
Values of all zeros, and all ones,
reserved.
0–22 Fraction 23-bit fractional component of
normalized significance. Bit
number 1 is hidden.

Examples:
Value (decimal) = Value (hexadecimal)
0.0003 = 399D4952
0.150

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

= 3E19999A
1.0 = 3F800000
360.0 = 43B40000

Applications: 30B3 EXG symbol value symbol value

4-38 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

IEEE float format (64 bit)

The first bit is the sign bit, S, the next eleven bits are the exponent
bits, 'E', and the final 52 bits are the mantissa 'M':

------------------------exponent-------------------- ----mantissa-----
63 62 56 55 52 51 48
S address n address (n+1)
most significant byte

-------------------------------------mantissa----------------------------------
47 32
address (n+2) address (n+3)
16

--------------------------------------mantissa---------------------------------
31 16
address (n+4) address (n+5)

--------------------------------------mantissa---------------------------------
15 0
address (n+6) address (n+7)
least significant byte

Format: 64-bit, IEEE float

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Examples:

decimal = Results (hexadecimal)

2.0 = 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
8.75 = 40 21 80 00 00 00 00 00
5.375 = 40 15 80 00 00 00 00 00

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-39

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.9.2 EP2 Extended Opcode Data Formats

32B

Extended opcodes formats are used for new features in EP2 and are
additional to the ESIG-style opcodes. Extended opcodes are an EP2
mechanism for exposing real-time functions to the host writer in an
automated manner. They replace the ESIG table commands, and
also obviate the need to introduce wholly new opcode types in the
future.
All extended opcodes essentially consist of a header containing
addressing information that specifies the intended module/function
within the EP2 real-time code that handles the opcode. For opcodes
that request information to be returned to the host, this header
also contains user addressing fields to be filled out by the host
writer so that the host can detect/route the returned information
(which will be returned in the form of an extended opcode, with the
user-specified addressing information as the header of the returned
opcode.)
The data format features of the EP2 extended opcodes are:
1. All extended opcodes have an opcode field of 0xE000 with an
additional unique subopcode field identifying the particular
operation. Within EP2, the subopcode is used as an object
ID+function ID pair (shown as 0xaaaa and 0xbbbb in the
following examples) which allows EP2 to dispatch the opcode
directly to a target function within a specified object, thus
eliminating the need for an intermediate interface layer.
This addressing feature is also available to the host when
requesting return data; i.e., the host can specify a Response
ID A & B, which it can then detect in the response packet. This
enables the host to identify any responses to requests it sends

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

to EP2. In addition, the host can pass an additional 32 bits of
user data, which will be returned with and can be used to
further distinguish the response.
2. ESIG had a number of type fields, which mostly translated to
some kind of float. The extended opcode consists of a
simplified set of types including standard IEEE floats rather
than the scaled B formats of ESIG. Should further types
become necessary these will be added as required.
3. The size is included in the opcode itself, making it possible to
have a variable sized opcode. This means that when decoding
opcodes the user can look at the size field to determine the
opcode length rather than add up all the bytes and work it out
manually.
4. The priority at which an opcode is processed by the IG is
decided by the real time. Due to the generic nature of

4-40 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

extended opcode processing, all responses (which are

themselves extended opcodes) also contain a priority, which
determines when they are returned. In some cases, these
response priorities may be selected by the host. The
documentation for a particular extended opcode indicates the
priority requirements for that opcode.
There are three types of extended opcodes:
• Where the host is telling EP2 to do something (and doesn’t
expect a response).
• Where the host is requesting information from EP2 (this includes
cases where a continuous response has been requested either
by the host or in the initialization file at startup).
• Where the EP2 is responding to a request for information or
sending information for which no specific request has been
made.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-41

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.9.2.1 Send Data Format (Host to IG)

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00

0 SIZE = total #bytes in opcode 1110 0000 0000 0000

1 EXECUTION PRIORITY PROCESS ID = 0x0003(IG – i.e. data
= 0x0000 = Critical Foreground sent from host to IG)
= 0x0001 = Foreground
= 0x0002 = Background
2 SUB OPCODE 0xaaaa SUB OPCODE 0xbbbb
(target object id) (target function id)
3 ARG 0
...
ARG N

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4-42 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.9.2.2 Request Data Format (Host to IG)

43B

This format is the same as the previous, with the addition of a

return address section. Note that the user-supplied addressing info
(response priority+response process+response IDA&B) will become
the header of the returned data packet (also in extended opcode
format) and the USER DATA field will be its first argument. The
remaining arguments will be the requested data.

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00

0 SIZE = total #bytes in opcode 1110 0000 0000 0000

1 EXECUTION PRIORITY PROCESS ID = 0x0003
= 0x0000 = Critical Foreground (IG)
= 0x0001 = Foreground
= 0x0002 = Background
2 Sub opcode 0xaaaa Sub opcode 0xbbbb
(object ID) (function ID)
3 RESPONSE PRIORITY RESPONSE PROCESS = 0x0002
= 0x0000 = Critical Foreground (Host – i.e. data sent from IG to Host)
= 0x0001 = Foreground
= 0x0002 = Background
4 RESPONSE ID A RESPONSE ID B
(Unique, user supplied ID (e.g., ObjID)) (Unique, user supplied ID (e.g., ObjID))

5 USER DATA (will be echoed back in the response as the first “argument”)
6 ARG 0
...

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ARG N

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-43

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.9.2.3 Response Data Format (IG to Host)

4B

31 28 27 24 23 16 15 12 11 08 07 04 03 00

0 SIZE = total #bytes in opcode 1110 0000 0000 0000

1 RESPONSE PRIORITY (from original PROCESS ID = 0x0002 (IG to Host)
request)
2 RESPONSE ID A RESPONSE ID B
(Copied from RESPONSE ID B
(Copied from RESPONSE ID A in the
in the request opcode)
request opcode)
5 USER DATA (copied from original request)
ARG 0
...
ARG N

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4-44 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.9.2.4 Field Explanation

45B

Argument Types:
• flags (32 bits of flags)
• integer (32 bit signed integer)
• float (IEEE 32 bit float)
• double (IEEE 64 bit float)
• It is also possible to have array types.
Process Types:
• 3 (RT) Indicates an opcode going from the simulator host to the
EP2 real-time
• 2 (SIM_HOST) Indicates an opcode going from the EP2 real-time
to the simulator host.
Priority:
• 0 = Critical Foreground
• 1 = Non-critical Foreground
• 2 = Background
User data:
This field can be filled by the host in the request and will be echoed
in the response. It can be used to help the host process the opcode
more efficiently.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-45

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.9.2.5 IEEE Format (32 bit)

46B

The first bit is the sign bit, S, the next eight bits are the exponent
bits, 'E', and the final 23 bits are the mantissa 'M':
--------------exponent---------------- ------------mantissa------------
31 30 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
S address n address (n+1)
most significant byte

------------------------------------mantissa-----------------------------------
15 0
address (n+2) address (n+3)
least significant byte
Format: 32-bit, IEEE float
Example:
Decimal Number: 5.375

Convert to binary representation:

5.375 = 4 + 1 + 0.25 + 0.125 =
(1 * 22) + (0 * 21) + (1 * 20) + (0 * 2-1) + (1 * 2-2) + (1 * 2-3) =
101.011 (binary)
Prepare three parts of 32-bit IEEE floating-point format:
Sign: positive => 0
Exponent: 101.011 = 1.01011 * 22 => 2 + 127 (exponent bias) =
129 = 10000001

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Mantissa: 1.01011 with first 1 and point (1.M) implicit => 01011

IEEE 32-bit: 0 10000001 01011000000000000000000

Hex: 40AC0000

Examples:

decimal = Results (hexadecimal)

2.0 = 40 00 00 00
8.75 = 41 0C 00 00
5.375 = 40 AC 00 00

4-46 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

4.9.2.6 IEEE Format (64 bit)

47B

The first bit is the sign bit, S, the next eleven bits are the exponent
bits, 'E', and the final 52 bits are the mantissa 'M':

------------------------exponent-------------------- ----mantissa-----
63 62 56 55 52 51 48
S address n address (n+1)
most significant byte

-------------------------------------mantissa----------------------------------
47 32
address (n+2) address (n+3)
16

--------------------------------------mantissa---------------------------------
31 16
address (n+4) address (n+5)

--------------------------------------mantissa---------------------------------
15 0
address (n+6) address (n+7)
least significant byte

Format: 64-bit, IEEE float

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Examples:

decimal = Results (hexadecimal)

2.0 = 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
8.75 = 40 21 80 00 00 00 00 00
5.375 = 40 15 80 00 00 00 00 00

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 4-47

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Transfer Protocols and Opcode Formats

This page intentionally left blank

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

4-48 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
5 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.1 Introduction
NOTE: Several of the opcodes have been updated with CIGI 3.2
information; these opcodes will show both the CIGI 3.0 and 3.2
implementations.
NOTE: CIGI 2 and CIGI 3 L3 are placeholders and are not currently
supported in EP2.
Some CIGI opcode packets have parameters that show “Not
implemented,” or incomplete implementation in the EP2 Functionality
column of the tables. These parameters also indicate whether the
parameter is EP2-supported or has no underlying EP2 functionality.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

There are several CIGI opcode packets for which there is no underlying
EP2 functionality. These are:
Maritime Surface Conditions Control Packet ID 13
Motion Tracker Control Packet ID 18 (however EP2
does support target tracker)
Earth Reference Model Definition Packet ID 19
Trajectory Definition Packet ID 20
Collision Detection Volume Definition Packet ID 23
Sensor Response Packet ID 106
Sensor Extended Response Packet ID 107
Aerosol Concentration Response Packet ID 110
Terrestrial Surface Conditions Response Packet ID 112
Collision Detection Volume Notification Packet ID 114
Event Notification Packet ID 116
Image Generator Message Packet ID 117

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-1

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.2 Rockwell Collins EP2 CIGI Interface

Compliance Statement
Rockwell Collins supports the Common Image Generator Interface
(CIGI) as an open interface to promote commonality in the visual
simulation industry. CIGI is designed with the intent to assist suppliers
and integrators of image generator systems with ease of integration,
code reuse, and overall cost reduction.
Rockwell Collins has participated in the committee to define and develop
this interface. We intend to remain current with the latest version of the
CIGI standard. We make every attempt to be compliant with CIGI
commands that correlate with EP2 image generator features and
capabilities.
The CIGI SSG at SISO adopted the following CIGI compliance
statement:
“A CIGI implementer shall, as much as possible, package all data
necessary for a particular application using standard CIGI packets while
retaining the intended use as described in the ICD. If further
functionality is required by the application, the interface may be
supplemented through the use of user-defined packets.”
The standards group also adopted the following rules for CIGI behavior:
1. A device should be able to accept all core CIGI packets (may
ignore them but must accept them).
2. A device should be configurable to ignore user-defined packets.
Rockwell Collins interprets these statements to mean that if we have an
EP2 image generator capability that can be accessed via CIGI it should
be implemented. Furthermore, that it is not the intent of the CIGI

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

specification to force image generator developers to implement
everything that the CIGI standard supports. Hence, the CIGI standard
may contain commands that are not supported by the EP2 image
generator features and capabilities. In addition, user-defined codes may
be developed to meet program-specific requirements. User-defined
codes can be developed to access image generator functionality that is
not explicitly addressed by the current CIGI standard.

5-2 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3 Host To IG Packets

5.3.1 IG Control [1] (3.0 Implementation)
Packet Id = 1 EP2 Functionality
Data Base Number Implemented
Will call out reset file cigiDb with the number
appended to the end
• Number of 1 will call cigiDb1.rst
NOTE: If the db\CIGI CLI command's
skipUnload switch is off (default), then any
current insets will be unloaded prior to
running the cigiDB reset file.
IG Mode Implemented
Byte Swapping Implemented
Frame Counter Implementation Incomplete (EP2-supported)
Time Stamp Implementation Incomplete (EP2-supported)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-3

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.1.1 IG Control [1] (3.2 Implementation)

Packet Id = 1 EP2 Functionality
Major Version Major version of the CIGI Interface that is
currently being used by the host.
Minor Version Minor version of the CIGI Interface that is
currently being used by the host.
Data Base Number Implemented
Will call out reset file cigiDb with the number
appended to the end
• Number of 1 will call cigiDb1.rst
NOTE: If the db\CIGI CLI command's
skipUnload switch is off (default), then any
current insets will be unloaded prior to
running the cigiDB reset file.
IG Mode Implemented
0 Reset / Standby
1 Operate
2 Debug
Byte Swapping Implemented
0x8000 No Byte Swap
0x0080 Byte Swap
Host Frame Number Unique data frame identifier generated by host.
Time Stamp Number of 10 microsecond “ticks” since some
initial reference time. (EP2-supported)
Last IG Frame Number IG Frame Number value from SOF packet.
(EP2- supported)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 1 Packet Size = 24 Major Version = 3 Database Number
Minor Version *3 *2 *1 Reserved Byte Swap Number
Host Frame Number
Timestamp
Last IG Frame Number
Reserved = 0
*1
IG Mode
*2
Timestamp Valid
*3
Reserved

5-4 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.2 Entity Control [2] (3.0 Implementation)

Packet Id = 2 EP2 Functionality
Entity Id Motion System
NOTE: Entity ID 1 assigned to Ground and Entity
ID 2 assigned to Sky. Neither ID 1 nor 2
are to be used for Motion Control.
Entity Type Model Slot Number
Parent Id Parents Motion System to which this Entity motion
system will be chained
Alpha Alpha fade value to be applied to the entity’s
geometry (0 = fully transparent, 255 = fully
opaque).
Entity State Bound / Hide, Bound / Show, Unbound
Attach State Chained to Parent Motion System
Collision Detection Request Not Implemented via this packet (EP2-supported)
Inherit Alpha Not Implemented (No underlying EP2 support)
Ground/Ocean Clamp Terrain conformal ( See Status below )
If Enabled: Altitude will be Z conformal offset
Pitch / Roll Conformal Offset Implementation
Incomplete
Animation Direction Not Implemented
Animation Loop Mode Not Implemented
Animation State Not Implemented
Roll / Pitch / Yaw Roll / Pitch / Heading

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Lat / Lon / Altitude Lat / Lon, based on WGS84
X / Y / Z Offsets Offset Position from Parent, if Chained

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-5

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 2 Packet Size = 48 Entity ID
*6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 Reserved *9 *8 *7 Alpha Select
Entity Type Parent ID
Roll
Pitch
Yaw
Latitude/X Offset

Longitude/Y Offset

Altitude/Z Offset

*1
Entity State
*2
Attach State
*3
Collision Detection Enable
*4
Inherit Alpha
*5
Ground/Ocean Clamp
*6
Reserved
*7
Animation Direction (not implemented)
*8
Animation Loop Mode (not implemented)
*9
Animation State (not implemented)
STATUS
• For Ground Clamping the host should make sure and send a valid
position, including alt prior to enabling ground clamp, this can be on
the initial creation. Clamping can not be enabled until terrain paging

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

is complete.
• Entity Id ( 1 ), Runway Contamination will be Airport Model
dependent, so that the Airport model needs to be modeled with the
selected conditions.
• Entity Id ( 2 ), Sky Texture select will be used to select the sky
textures as defined in the config file <Environment Layer>
SkyTextures

5-6 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.2.1 Entity Control [2] (3.2 Implementation)

Packet Id = 2 EP2 Functionality

Entity Id Motion System
NOTE: Entity ID 1 assigned to Ground and Entity
ID 2 assigned to Sky. Neither ID 1 nor 2
are to be used for Motion Control.
Entity Type Model Slot Number
Parent Id Parents Motion System to which this Entity motion
system will be chained
Alpha Alpha fade value to be applied to the entity’s
geometry (0 = fully transparent, 255 = fully
opaque).
Entity State 0 InActive / Standby (Bound / Hide)
1 Active (Bound / Show)
2 Destroyed (UnBound)
3 Active (Active with Select)
Select ifState = 3, Entity Select = Select
Attach State Chained to Parent Motion System
Collision Detection Request Not Implemented via this packet (EP2-supported)
Inherit Alpha Not Implemented (No underlying EP2 support)
Ground/Ocean Clamp Terrain conformal ( See Status below )
If Enabled: Altitude will be Z conformal offset
Pitch / Roll Conformal Offset

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Implementation Incomplete
Animation Direction Not Implemented
Animation Loop Mode Not Implemented
Animation State Not Implemented
Roll / Pitch / Yaw Roll / Pitch / Heading
Lat / Lon / Altitude Lat / Lon, based on WGS84
X / Y / Z Offsets Offset Position from Parent, if Chained

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-7

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 2 Packet Size = 48 Entity ID
*6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 Reserved *9 *8 *7 Alpha Select
Entity Type Parent ID
Roll
Pitch
Yaw
Latitude/X Offset

Longitude/Y Offset

Altitude/Z Offset

*1
Entity State
*2
Attach State
*3
Collision Detection Enable
*4
Inherit Alpha
*5
Ground/Ocean Clamp
*6
Reserved
*7
Animation Direction (not implemented)
*8
Animation Loop Mode (not implemented)
*9
Animation State (not implemented)

STATUS
• For Ground Clamping the host should make sure and send a valid
position, including alt prior to enabling ground clamp, this can be on
the initial creation. Clamping cannot be enabled until terrain paging
is complete.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

• Entity Id ( 1 ), Runway Contamination will be Airport Model
dependent, so that the Airport model needs to be modeled with the
selected conditions.
• Entity Id ( 2 ), Sky Texture select will be used to select the sky
textures as defined in the configuration file <Environment Layer>
SkyTextures.

5-8 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.3 Conformal Clamped Entity Control [3]

Packet Id = 3 EP2 Functionality
Entity Id Motion System
Yaw Heading in degrees
Latitude –90 to 90 degrees
Equator
Longitude –180.0 to 180.0 degrees
Prime Meridian

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 3 Packet Size = 24 Entity ID
Yaw
Latitude/X Offset

Longitude/Y Offset

STATUS
• Packet is fully functional, Entity must first be set as Terrain
conformal via the Entity Control packet ( 2 ).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-9

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4 Component and Short Component Control [4/5]

Packet Id = 4/5 EP2 Functionality
Component Class 0 Entity Component Control
1 View Component Control
2 View Group Component Control
3 Sensor Component Control
4 Regional Sea Surface Component Control
6 Regional Weather Component Control
7 Global Sea Surface Component Control
8 Global Terrain Surface Component Control
9 Global Layered Weather Component Control
10 Atmosphere Component Control
11 Celestial Sphere Component Control
12 Event Control
13 System Component Control

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-10 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1 Entity Component Control

Entity Component Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 0
Component Id 65535 Scale Control
65534 Scale All Control
65533 Light / Poly Mask Control
65532 Light / Poly Specific Control
65531 Entity Tracks Control
65530 Entity Trails Control
65529 Entity Plume Control
65528 Entity Rotor Wash Control
65527 Entity Bow Wake Control
65526 Entity Collision Mask Control
65525 Entity Tracer Control
65522 Entity Light/Poly Mask Specific Control
65521 Entity Switch Control
65519 Entity Shadow Control
65518 Laserbeam Control Origin
65517 Laserbeam Control End
65515 Entity Bind Control
65514 Entity Countermeasure Control
0x303D Entity Terrain Following Control
0x3040 Entity Model Definition Control
0x3045 Entity Viewport-Dependent Mode
Control
0x3049 Entity Static Model Definition Control
0x325C Entity Class Viewport Specific Model
Control
12360 Entity Wave Bind

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

If ( Component Id < 12288 ) Switch Node Control
And NOT ( Data1 & 0x8xxxxxxx )
If ( Component Id < 12288 ) Entity Animation Control
And ( Data1 & 0x8xxxxxxx )

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-11

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.1 Entity Scale Control

NOTE: The CIGI North-East-Down (NED) to EP Right-Handed
Coordinate system conversions do not apply to this opcode.
The X, Y and Z scales specified in this opcode are interpreted
using the EP Right-Handed Coordinated System.

Entity Scale Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65535
Entity Id Motion System
Scale Flags Which Axis will be modified
X / Y / Z Enable 0x01 X Enable
0x02 Y Enable
0x04 Z Enable
0x08 Enable submodel scaling
X / Y / Z Scale Factor Scale to be applied to Axis
If the Axis is not Enabled then the Scale
for that Axis will not be changed

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65535

Entity ID Reserved A=0 Scale Flags
X Scale Factor ( 32 bit packed float )
Y Scale Factor ( 32 bit packed float )
Z Scale Factor ( 32 bit packed float )

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Component Submodel ID = 0
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

5-12 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.2 Entity Scale All Control

Entity Scale All Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65534
Entity Id Motion System
Scale Factor Scale to be applied to X / Y / Z Axis
Channel Mask (Optional) A channel mask where bits 0 - 31
represent a bit for each of the 0 –
31 parent (non-select) viewports
allowed in EP2.
If the value is 0, then all viewports
and any MFE on the system will
process the scale.
If at least one bit is set, then each
RT/MFE in the system will compare
the mask against defined viewports
and, if at least one of the viewports
it is controlling has the scale bit
set, then all viewports controlled by
that RT will process the scale.
This allows a Multi-IG system to
scale in only OTW or only Sensor
channels while leaving the MFE and
other channels unchanged.
Scale of individual viewports under
the same RT is not EP2 Supported.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

This can be achieved using the
Viewport Specific Model function as
required. A warning message is
logged the first time a scale mask
is sent enabling scale on only part
of the viewports defined for a given
RT.
Note that a mask of 0xffffffff is
similar to a value of 0, but MFEs on
the system are not associated with
channel IDs, so the scale will be
applied to the MFE in the case of a
0 mask, but not in the case of a
0xffffffff mask as the MFE has no
viewports.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-13

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 65534
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Reserved
Component Data 1 = Scale Factor ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = Channel Mask
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-14 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.3 Entity Light/Poly Mask Control

Light / Poly Mask Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65533
Entity Id Motion System
Light / Poly Intensity–Step If Flags bit 7 field is 0 then (16 bit) Poly
/ Light Intensity will be used for both
Scalar & Step
• Scalar Type value represents 0 to
100% of range.
• Step value range 0 to 5.
If Flags bit 7 field is 1 then (16 bit) Poly
/ Light Intensity will be used for Step.
• Step value range 0 to 5
Light / Poly Mask 32 bit binary representation of selected
mask. Use a zero mask to turn the
light/poly off, because a negative
intensity will NOT turn off switches with
this opcode.
Light / Poly Intensity–Scalar If Flags bit 7 field is 1 then values
represent scalar value to be used.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65533
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Flags

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Poly Intensity / Step Light Intensity / Step
Light Mask
Poly Mask
Poly Intensity Scalar ( 32 bit packed float )
Light Intensity Scalar ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class
Flags
0 …. update light mask 0 = disable, 1 = enable
1 …. update light intensity 0 = disable, 1 = enable
2 …. light intensity type 0=scalar, 1=step
3 …. update poly mask 0 = disable, 1 = enable
4 …. update poly intensity 0 = disable, 1 = enable
5 …. poly intensity type 0=scalar, 1=step
7 …. enable intensity scalars 1 = uses data 4 /5 for scalar values

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-15

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.4 Entity Light/Poly Specific Control

Light / Poly Specific Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65532
Entity Id Motion System
Light / Poly 0–31
Intensity–Step If Flags bit 7 field is 0 then (16 bit)
Intensity will be used for both Scalar &
Step
• Scalar Type value represents 0 to
100 % of range.
• Step value range 0 to 5.
If Flags bit 7 field is 1 then (16 bit) Poly
/ Light Intensity will be used for Step
• Step value range 0 to 5.
Intensity–Scalar If Flags bit 7 field is 1 then values
represent scalar value to be used. A
negative scalar will NOT disable the
switch; use Lp switch val flag. Note,
however, that a positive intensity will
enable the switch regardless of this flag.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 65532

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Entity ID Reserved A=0 Flags
Light / Poly Intensity–Step
Intensity Scalar ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class
Flags
0 control type must be 1 = local
1 lp type 0 = poly, 1 = light
2 update lp switch 0 = disable, 1 = enable
3 update intensity 0 = disable, 1 = enable
4 Intensity type 0=scalar, 1=step
5 Lp switch val 0 = off, 1 = on
7 enable intensity scalar 1 = uses data 2 for scalar value

NOTE: Flags bit 5 will be the actual bit value to which the lp is set, if
Flags bit 2 is set to enable.

5-16 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.5 Entity Tracks Control

Tracks Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65531
Entity Id Motion System to which Track belongs
Mode –1 No Change
0 Start
1 Stop
2 Clean
Track Type 0–127
As declared in CLI TRACKS /DEFINE command
Track Number 0–127
Track to Control
X / Y Offset Meters

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65531
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Mode
Track Type Track Number
X Offset ( 32 bit packed float )
Y Offset ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 4 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-17

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.6 Entity Trails Control

Trails Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65530
Entity Id Motion System to which Trail belongs
Mode –1 No Change
0 Start
1 Stop
2 Clean
Trail Type 0–127
As declared in CLI TRAILS /DEFINE command
Trail Number 0–127
Trail to Control
X / Y / Z Offset Meters

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65530
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Mode
Trail Type Trail Number
X Offset ( 32 bit packed float )
Y Offset ( 32 bit packed float )
Z Offset ( 32 bit packed float )

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

5-18 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.7 Entity Plume Control

Plume Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65529
Entity Id Motion System to which Plume belongs
Mode –1 No Change
0 Start
1 Stop
2 Clean
Plume Type 0-191
As declared in PLUMES /DEFINE command
Plume Number 0-127
Plume to Control
X / Y / Z Initial Meters Per Second, with 8 bits we will have a max of
Velocity ( mps ) 256 mps and this will give us a max of 572 mph.
The initial X/Y/Z velocity of the smoke at the point of
origin.
The movement of the smoke is transitioned from the initial
velocities to the wind and rise effects (specified in the CLI
PLUMES /DEFINE command) over the time period defined
by BEGIN TRANSITION and END TRANSITION.
X /Y/ Z Negative Bits 0, 1, 2 specify a negative init velocity for each init
Initial Velocity velocity X, Y, Z, respectively. A bit value 0 is for positive
init velocity, a bit value 1 is for negative init velocity.
Begin Transition The time from the creation of a smoke polygon to when its

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

( seconds ) movement will begin to be transitioned to the wind and rise
effects (specified in the CLI PLUMES/DEFINE command)
End Transition The time from the creation of a smoke polygon to when its
( seconds ) movement has completely transitioned to the wind and rise
effects (specified in the CLI PLUMES/DEFINE command)
X / Y / Z Offset Meters

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-19

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65529
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Mode
Plume Type Plume Number
X Init Velocity Y Init Velocity Z Init Velocity 0, 1
Begin Transition End Transition
X Offset ( 32 bit packed float )
Y Offset ( 32 bit packed float )
Z Offset ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-20 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.8 Entity Rotor Wash Control

The rotor wash ‘Wash MM’ host control has been deprecated because
models are now loaded in reserved model space by name and not the
responsibility of the host to load and bind. A warning will print the first
time a non-zero Wash MM is received for an effect that does not have a
groundModelName specified. Customers should specify a
groundModelName in a startup reset file.

Rotor Wash Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65528
Entity Id Parent Motion System
Flags BIT
0 Enable
1 Manual Mode
2 RIF Enable
Rotor Wash Number 0–127
The Rotor Wash to be controlled
Expansion Time The time (in seconds) required for the rotorwash to
( seconds ) build up enough inertia to expand.
Manual Index If manual mode is selected, this is the index used to
index into the manual rotorwash table.
Min Speed ( knots ) The speed of the parent model at which its rotorwash
effect starts to fade out.
Max Speed ( knots ) The speed of the parent model at which its rotorwash
effect is completely faded out.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Start Height ( meters ) The height above the earth’s surface where the
rotorwash begins to fade in as well as expand
Complete Height The height above the earth’s surface where the
( meters ) rotorwash is completely faded in and fully expanded.
Scale ( 0.0 … 1.0 ) Used to scale down the size of the rotorwash effect. The
system rotorwash effect was created to represent the
rotorwash of the largest known helicopter.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-21

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65528
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Flags
UNUSED (previously Wash MM) Rotor Wash Number
Expansion Time Manual Index
Minimum Speed Maximum Speed
Start Height ( 32 bit packed float )
Complete Height ( 32 bit packed float )
Scale ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-22 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.9 Entity Bow Wake Control

Bow Wake EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 0
Component Id 65527
Entity Id Motion System to which Bow Wake belongs
Mode –1 No Change
0 Start
1 Stop
2 Clean
Bow Wake Type 0–127
As declared in CLI BOWWAKE /DEFINE command
Bow Wake Number 0–127
Bow wake to Control
X / Y Offset Meters

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65527
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Mode
Bow Wake Type Bow Wake Number
X Offset ( 32 bit packed float )
Y Offset ( 32 bit packed float )

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Component Data 4 = 0
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-23

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.10 Entity Collision Mask Control

Entity Collision Mask Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 0
Component Id 65526
Entity Id Motion System to which Mask will be applied
Collision Mask Flags BITS
0 Hat Enable Hat Testing
1 NoHat Disable Hat Testing
2 Line Enable Collision Detection Testing
3 NoLine Disable Collision Detection Testing
4 LOS Enable Line Of Sight Testing
5 NoLOS Disable Line Of Sight Testing
6 HD Enable Hit Detection Testing
7 NoHD Disable Hit Detection Testing
For each mask control flag set, if neither of the
bits are set then no action will be taken for
that specific control mask.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 65526
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Reserved
Collision Mask Flags
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-24 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.11 Entity Tracer Control

Entity Tracer Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Moving Model Number Moving Model Number
Tracer Size Size of the tracer (1-3)
Component Id 65525
Enable Tracer Boolean to enable tracer
Enable Lat/Lon Mode Boolean to enable Lat/Lon position. If not
enabled, x, y, z Cartesian coordinates will be
used.
Tracer Number The tracer number value (0-64).
Tracer Color RGB Color (0-255 per component)

X Offset (Meters) In Motion System relative position

mode, the X motion system offset for the start
position. Unused if the Entity ID is labeled as
-1, and uses Lat/Lon position.
Y Offset (Meters) In Motion System relative position
mode, the Y motion system offset for the start
position. Unused if the Entity ID is labeled as
-1, and uses Lat/Lon position.
Z Offset (Meters) In Motion System relative position
mode, the Z motion system offset for the start
position. Unused if the Entity ID is labeled as

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

-1, and uses Lat/Lon position.
Latitude (Float) In LatLonAlt position mode, the latitude
of the start position of the specified effect.
Longitude (Float) In LatLonAlt position mode, the
longitude of the start position of the specified
effect.
Altitude (Float; Meters) In LatLonAlt position mode, the
altitude of the start position of the specified
effect.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-25

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65525
Moving Model Number Tracer Size
*1 *2 Tracer Number Blue Green Red
colorIndex Reserved
X Offset or Latitude
Y Offset or Longitude
Z Offset or Altitude
Unused

*1 – Enable Tracer
*2 – Enable Lat/Lon Mode

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-26 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.12 Entity Light / Poly Mask Specific Control

Light/Poly Mask Specific Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65522
Entity Id Motion System
Light / Poly Mask 32-bit binary representation of
selected mask. Only mask bits set to
one will be altered.
Light / Poly Intensity - Scalar Scalar Value to be applied to
associated mask bits.
Negative scalar value can be used to
turn light/poly of the mask off.
Flags Bits Value
0 …. 0 = apply light scalar to light
mask bits.
…. 1 = turn lights associated with
mask bits ON, using the current IG
scalar value that is assigned to the
light.
1 …. 0 = apply poly scalar to poly
mask bits.
…. 1 = turn polys associated with
mask bits ON, using the current IG
scalar value that is assigned to the
poly.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65522
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Flags
Component Data 1 = 0
Light Mask
Poly Mask
Poly Intensity Scalar (32 bit packed float)
Light Intensity Scalar (32 bit packed float)
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-27

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.13 Entity Switch Control

Entity Switch Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65521 (FFF1)
Entity Id Motion System
Sub Model Sub Model
Mask Index Specifies the mask index applied to
the controllable switch node.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 65521
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Not Used
Sub Model (32 bit Integer)
Mask Index (32 bit Integer)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-28 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.14 Entity Shadow Control

Entity Shadow Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0
Component Id 65519
Moving Model The Moving Model Number (0 - 2048 )
Enable Enables or disables the shadow for this moving
model.
Base Control ID –1 = No Change
0–127
This number corresponds to the first ID of three
consecutive controllable nodes in the model that
are used by the real-time system to render the
moving model shadow. The default is 20. Entering
a "–1" will leave the current Base Control ID for
this moving model shadow unaffected.
Ground Level –1 = No Change
0 = Air Based
1 = Ground Base
Enables or disables ground-based processing of
this moving model's shadow. If ground level is
OFF, the shadow is rendered as if air-based. See
the EP2 Modeler’s Reference Guide for the
difference in modeling for ground-based versus air-
based shadows. Entering a "–1" will leave the
current Ground Level flag for this moving model

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

shadow unaffected.
Intensity Scalar –1.0 = No Change
0.0 ….
Scales up (darker) or down (lighter) the intensity
of the shadow. The default is 1.0. Entering a "-1"
will leave the current Intensity Scale for this
moving model shadow unaffected.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-29

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65519
Moving Model Number Reserved A=0 Enable
BaseControl ID (32-bit Integer)
Ground Level (32-bit Integer)
Intensity Scalar (32-bit Packed Float)
Component Data 4 = 0
Component Data 5 = 0

A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-30 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.15 Laserbeam Control Origin

Entity Laserbeam Control Origin EP2 Functionality

Component Class (CC) 0
Component Id 65518
NUM (0..127) Laser beam effect identifier
TYPE (0..127) Laser beam type definition to
use for this effect
MM (0..8191) In Motion System relative
position mode, the motion system
number for the start position to follow
SM (0..254) In Motion System relative
position mode, the submodel number
for the start position to follow
X OFFSET (Meters) In Motion System relative
position mode, the X motion system
offset for the start position
Y OFFSET (Meters) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Y motion system
offset for the start position
Z OFFSET (Meters) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Z motion system
offset for the start position
LATITUDE (Double Precision Float) In LatLonAlt
position mode, the latitude of the start
position of the specified effect
LONGITUDE (Double Precision Float) In LatLonAlt
position mode, the longitude of the
start position of the specified effect

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ALTITUDE (Double Precision Float; Meters) In
LatLonAlt position mode, the altitude
of the start position of the specified
effect
FLAGS • N –0: Use Legacy Opcode
Definition 1: Use New Opcode
Definition
• 1 – (Valid if N is set) 0: Disable
Beam 1: Enable Beam
• 2 – (Valid if N is set) 0: Disable
Origin Dot 1: Enable Origin Dot
• 3 – (Valid if N is set) 0: Use MM
Relative Position 1: Use
LatLonAlt Position
• X – Reserved/ Unused

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-31

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

NOTE: For backwards compatibility the location of the TYPE and NUM
parameters differs between MM relative and LatLonAlt position
modes. Take care to pack these in the correct location.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65518
MM or TYPE MM or NUM Reserved CC = 0 N X X X X 3 2 1
SM or LATITUDE TYPE or LATITUDE NUM or LATITUDE
X OFFSET or LATITUDE
Y OFFSET or LONGITUDE
Z OFFSET or LONGITUDE
UNUSED or ALTITUDE
UNUSED or ALTITUDE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-32 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.16 Laserbeam Control End

Entity Laserbeam Control End EP2 Functionality

Component Class (CC) 0
Component Id 65517
NUM (0..127) Laser beam effect identifier
MM (0..8191) In Motion System relative
position mode, the motion system
number for the end position to follow
SM (0..254) In Motion System relative
position mode, the submodel
number for the end position to follow
X OFFSET (Meters) In Motion System relative
position mode, the X motion system
offset for the end position
Y OFFSET (Meters) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Y motion system
offset for the end position
Z OFFSET (Meters) In Motion System relative
position mode, the Z motion system
offset for the end position
LATITUDE (Double Precision Float) In LatLonAlt
position mode, the latitude of the
end position of the specified effect
LONGITUDE (Double Precision Float) In LatLonAlt
position mode, the longitude of the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

end position of the specified effect
ALTITUDE (Double Precision Float; Meters) In
LatLonAlt position mode, the altitude
of the end position of the specified
effect
AZIMUTH (Degrees) In Direction/Length mode,
the azimuth of the beam
ELEVATION (Degrees) In Direction/Length mode,
the elevation of the beam
LENGTH (0.0..81920.0) In Direction/Length
mode, the length of the beam
FLAGS • N –0: Use Legacy Opcode
Definition 1: Use New
Opcode Definition

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-33

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

• 1 – 0: Disable Effect 1:
Enable Effect
• 2 – (Valid if N is set) 0:
Disable End Dot 1: Enable
End Dot
• 3 – (Valid if N is set & 4 is
NOT set) 0: Use LatLonAlt
Position 1: Use MM Relative
Position
• 4 – (Valid if N is set) 0: Use
Position Per Flag 3 1: Use
Direction
• X – Reserved/Unused

NOTE: Care should be taken when selecting an end position to avoid

defining an unnecessarily long beam. Using the shortest
possible beam will speed up line-of-sight processing and ensure
the best possible end point precision. The system MAX beam
length is 81920 feet. Longer beams will be rendered up to
81920 feet from the end closest to the eye.

NOTE: Some hosts may wish to implement a designate or flashing

laser beam. Though the Enable/Disable Effect flag may be
used, the best implementation is to leave the effect enabled
and simply disable the Beam and Dots. This is the equivalent
of changing a model select as compared to unbinding and
binding a model.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65517
NUM Reserved CC = 0 N X X X 4 3 2 1
LATITUDE or MM or AZIMUTH LATITUDE or SM or AZIMUTH
LATITUDE or X OFFSET or ELEVATION
LONGITUDE or Y OFFSET or LENGTH
LONGITUDE or Z OFFSET or UNUSED
ALTITUDE or UNUSED
ALTITUDE or UNUSED

5-34 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.17 Entity Bind Control

CIGI Entity Bind Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 0 – Entity
Packet ID 5
Packet Size 16
Component ID 65515
Entity ID This parameter specifies the entity to which
this packet is applied to. A value of zero(0)
corresponds the ownship.
Entity Render Priority 0 – Slow Time
1 – Fast Time Critical
2 – Fast Time Non-Critical
3 – Background
Entity Select Specifies the active entity select.
Entity Type This parameter specifies the type for the
entity. A value of zero (0) indicates a “null”
type with no associated geometry. Such an
entity might be used to represent the
Ownship or a floating camera..

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 65515
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Entity Render Priority
Entity Select Entity Type
Component Data 2 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-35

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.18 Entity Countermeasure Control

The CIGI Entity Countermeasure Control is a Component Control Opcode
used to trigger or clean a Countermeasure effect that has been
previously defined using the COUNTERMEASURE \DEFINE CLI Command.
The Parent model/submodel and offset can also be controlled.
NOTE: Due to Component Control packet size limitations, the direction
parameter is not supported on the CIGI interface. If real-time
direction control is needed, then the parent submodel can be
rotated by the host and the countermeasure effect will follow.

CIGI Entity Countermeasure EP2 Functionality

Control
Packet ID 4 – Component Control
Packet Size 32
Component ID 65514
Parent Entity ID The moving model number of the entity to
which the countermeasures are attached.
(0-65535)
Ignored if Parent Valid Flag 3 is set to 0.
Component Class (CC) 0 – Entity Class
Flag 1 (Start) Triggers one launch of countermeasures for
this effect.
0 = don’t start
1 = start (trigger)
Ignored if Clean Flag 2 is set to 1.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Flag 2 (Clean) Stops all launched and still active
countermeasures for this effect.
0 = don’t clean
1 = clean
Flag 3 (Parent Valid) Specifies whether the Parent Entity ID and
Parent Submodel Number fields are valid.
0 = invalid
1 = valid
Flag 4 (Offset Valid) Specifies whether the X, Y and Z Offset
fields are valid.
0 = invalid
1 = valid

5-36 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Flag X Reserved / Unused (Set to 0)

Effect Number The previously defined Countermeasure
effect number that is being controlled. (0-
127)
Parent Submodel Number The submodel to which the countermeasures
are attached.
0 = primary model
1–254 = secondary submodels
Ignored if Parent Valid Flag 3 is set to 0.
Offset X The X offset from the origin of the Parent
Submodel specified above to where the
countermeasures originate. (meters)
Ignored if Offset Valid Flag 4 is set to 0.
Offset Y The Y offset from the origin of the Parent
Submodel specified above to where the
countermeasures originate. (meters)
Ignored if Offset Valid Flag 4 is set to 0.
Offset Z The Z offset from the origin of the Parent
Submodel specified above to where the
countermeasures originate. (meters)
Ignored if Offset Valid Flag 4 is set to 0.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 65514
Parent Entity ID Reserved CC*=0 X X X X 4 3 2 1

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Effect Number Parent Submodel Number
Offset X ( 32 bit packed float )
Offset Y ( 32 bit packed float )
Offset Z ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
*CC Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-37

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.19 Entity Terrain Following Control

Entity Terrain Following EP2 Functionality
Control
Component Class 0
Component Id 0x303D
Instance ID Motion System
C 0 Not Conform to Terrain
1 Conform to Terrain
Specifies whether the moving model uses the
pitch and roll of the polygon directly beneath
the testpoint.
When active, the user cannot control pitch
and roll of the moving model.
Conform ID Specifies an identifier for use in
enabling/disabling terrain following.
Smoothing The 1/x multiplier that is applied to the delta
between the previous and current field’s pitch
and roll values. A value of 10 gives a 10%
correction of the delta in a field. A value of 4
gives a 25% correction of the delta in a field.
Z Offset Specifies the Z offset from the terrain that
the model will maintain.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x303D

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Instance ID Reserved A=0 C
Conform ID Smoothing
Z Offset ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class

5-38 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.20 Entity Model Definition Control

Entity Model EP2 Functionality
Definition Control
Component Class 0
Component Id 0x3040
Motion System Specifies the motion system used for this moving-model
definition.
Parent Motion System Specifies the moving model to which this moving model is
chained. The moving model will be positioned relative to the
parent moving model.
Model Slot Number Specifies the database image bound to the motion system.
Flags BIT
0 clean flag
1 process bit 2
2 bind flag
3 enable trans extrap for primary model
4 enable rot extrap for primary model
5 enable rot extrap for secondary submodel
6 scalar / step polygon flag 0 = scalar, 1 = step
7 scalar / step light flag 0 = scalar, 1 = step
Local Light Mask Specifies the active local-light groups for this moving model.
There is one bit for each of the 32 local-light groups. The status of
Flags2 bit 0 determines whether the upper or lower 16 bits of
the 32 bit word are used
Local Polygon Mask Specifies the active local-polygon groups for this moving model.
There is one bit for each of the 32 local-polygon groups. The
status of Flags2 bit 1 determines whether the upper or lower 16
bits of the 32 bit word are used
Local Light Intensity If bit 22 in the flag field = 0, this field specifies the scalar applied
to the lights’ modeled intensity. If bit 22 in the flag field = 1, this

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

field specifies the light step scalar applied to the lights’ modeled
intensity. A negative intensity turns off the light.
Local Polygon Intensity If bit 21 in the flag field = 0, this field specifies the scalar applied
to the polygons’ modeled intensity. If bit 21 in the flag field = 1,
this field specifies the polygon step scalar applied to the polygons’
modeled intensity. A negative intensity turns off the polygon.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3040
Motion System Reserved A=0 Flags
Parent Motion System Model Slot Number
Local Polygon Mask Local Light Mask
Local Light Intensity ( 32 bit packed float )
Local Polygon Intensity ( 32 bit packed float )
Unused Flags2
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-39

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.21 Entity Viewport Dependent Model Control

The Entity Viewport Dependent Model (VDM) Control Opcode is similar
to a Viewport Specific Model but with the added feature that it also
chains the model to the specified viewport. If the model is not already
bound the opcode will bind the model, if the model is bound it will
update the specified select and X/Y/Z offset and mark the model as a
VSM.

Entity Viewport EP2 Functionality

Model Definition
Control
Component Class 0
Component Id 0x3045
Viewport ID Viewport in which the request is applied.
CIGI Model Number Model
CIGI Entity ID CIGI ID allocated for the model.
Heading Degrees
-180.0 – 180.0
Pitch Degrees
-90.0 – 90.0
Roll Degrees
-180.0 – 180.0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3045
Viewport ID Reserved Class Flags
CIGI Model Number CIGI Entity ID

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Heading
Pitch
Roll
Reserved
Reserved

• Packet ID:
o Type: unsigned int8
o Value: 4 (Component Control)
• Packet Size:
o Type: unsigned int8
o Units: Bytes
o Value: 32
• CIGI Component ID
o Type: unsigned int16

5-40 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

o Value: 0x3045
Specifies a viewport dependent model request
• Viewport ID (CIGI Instance ID)
o Type: unsigned int16
o Specifies which viewport to apply the request to
• Select (CIGI Component State):
o Size: 8-bit bit-field
o 0 = Requests the IG to disable the specified model
o 1- 254 = Requests the IG to set the select for the specified model
• CIGI Component Class:
o Type: unsigned 4-bit field
o Value: 0 (Entity)
• CIGI Model Number:
o Size: unsigned int16
o Specifies which model to bind to the viewport
o Value: [0-65535]
• CIGI Entity ID:
o Size: unsigned int16
o Specifies the CIGI ID that will be allocated to this model instance
o Value: [0-65535]
• X/Y/Z Offset:
o Size: signed float32
o Specifies the X/Y/Z offset from the specified viewport
o Value: min-max float32
• Flags (CIGI Component State):
o Size: 8-bit bitfield
0x01 = Enable / Disable Flag
• 0 = Requests the IG to disable the specified model
• 1 = Requests the IG to enable the specified model
0x80 – 0x02 = future growth
• CIGI Component Class
o Type: unsigned 4-bit field

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

o Value: 0 (Entity)
• CIGI Model Number
o Size: unsigned int16
o Specifies which model to bind to the viewport
o Value: [0-65535]
• CIGI Entity ID
o Size: unsigned int16
o Specifies the CIGI ID that will be allocated to this model instance
o Value: [0-65535]
• Heading
o Type: single float
o Units: degrees
o Value: -180.0 – 180.0
Heading relative to the +x (fuselage) ownship axis

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-41

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

• Pitch
o Type: single float
o Units: degrees
o Value: -90 - 90
• Roll
o Type: single float
o Units: degrees
o Value: -180 - 180

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-42 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.22 Entity Static Model Definition Control

Entity Static Model EP2 Functionality
Definition Control
Component Class 0
Component Id 0x3049
Motion System Specifies the motion system used for this moving-
model definition.
Model Slot Number Specifies the database image bound to the motion
system.
Flags BIT
0 process_bit_1
1 bind flag
2 scalar / step light flag , 0 = scalar, 1 = step
3 scalar / step polygon flag, 0 = scalar, 1 = step
5 0=lower 16 bits of the light mask, 1=upper 16 bits
light mask
6 0=lower 16 bits of the poly mask, 1=upper 16 bits
poly mask
Local Light Mask Specifies the active local-light groups for this moving
model. There is one bit for each of the 32 local-light
groups. The status of FLAGS2 bit 5 determines whether
the upper or lower 16 bits of the 32 bit word are used
Local Polygon Mask Specifies the active local-polygon groups for this
moving model. There is one bit for each of the 32 local-
polygon groups. The status of FLAGS bit 6 determines
whether the upper or lower 16 bits of the 32 bit word
are used
Local Light Intensity If bit 2 in the FLAGS field = 0, this field specifies the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

scalar applied to the lights’ modeled intensity. If bit 2 in
the FLAGS field = 1, this field specifies the light step
scalar applied to the lights’ modeled intensity. A
negative intensity turns off the light.
Local Polygon Intensity If bit 3 in the FLAGS field = 0, this field specifies the
scalar applied to the polygons’ modeled intensity. If bit
3 in the FLAGS field = 1, this field specifies the polygon
step scalar applied to the polygons’ modeled intensity.
A negative intensity turns off the polygon.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-43

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3049
Motion System Reserved A=0 Flags
Not Used Model Slot Number
Local Polygon Mask Local Light Mask
Local Light Intensity ( 32 bit packed float )
Local Polygon Intensity ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-44 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.23 Entity Class Viewport Specific Model Control

Entity Class Viewport Specific EP2 Functionality
Model Control
Component Class 0
Component Id 0x325C
Specifies the EP IG motion system
Instance ID used for this moving model. Valid
range 0-8191.
Component State Enable 1, disable 0.
Viewport mask. A set bit will
enable/disable the model in the
Component Data 1
corresponding channel. Bit 0 ==
viewport 0.
Component Data 2 Unused, must be 0.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x325C
Instance ID Reserved A=0 Component State
Component Data 1 = viewport mask
Component Data 2 = 0 (unused)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-45

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.24 CIGI4 Entity Wave Bind

CIGI4 Entity Wave Bind EP2 Functionality
Component Class 0
Component Id 12360
This parameter specifies the entity
to which this packet is applied. A
Entity ID
value of zero(0) corresponds the
ownship
0 - enable/disable wave slope
conforming
Flags
1 - enable/disable wave following
2-7- Unused
Z Offset Z offset in meters.
Smoothpr (1..10000) Pitch/roll smooth factor.
Upsmooth (1..10000) Up smooth factor.
Downsmooth (1..10000) Down smooth factor.
(1..5000) Length of testpoint
TP_length
pattern in meters.
(1..5000) Width of testpoint pattern
TP_width
in meters.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 12360
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Flags
Z Offset
Smoothpr

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Upsmooth
Downsmooth
TP_Length
TP_Width
A Component Class

5-46 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.25 Entity Character Animation Control

Entity Character Animation EP2 Functionality
Control
Component Class 0
Component Id 12500
Entity ID Motion System
1 – start animation
2 – stop animation
3 – pause animation
Mode
4 – resume animation
5 – blend animations
6 – clean animation controller
Flags 0 – animation loop toggle
Sequence Animation sequence to play
Rate Animation time scale (default is 1)
When to enter to the next animation
EntryTime (default is 0, Only relevant when
mode is 5-blending)
Time it takes to blend two
BlendTime animations in seconds (Only
relevant when mode is 5-blending)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 12500
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Mode
Flags
Sequence

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Rate
EntryTime
BlendTime
Component Data 6 = 0

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-47

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.26 Entity Switch Node Control

Entity Switch Node Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 0
Component Id Sub Model
Entity Id Motion System
Switch Node State Select value to apply to Sub Model

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Switch Node State
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-48 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.1.27 Entity Animation Control

Entity Animation EP2 Functionality
Control
Component Class 0
Component Id Sub Model
Entity Id Motion System
Sequence Id Sequence Id for Animation
Frame Frame Number in animation sequence to go to.
Used only when Animation is Paused
Pause Frame Specifies the animation frame to pause on.
Used with “Pause Frame Set” flag
Speed Scalar Increases or decreases speed of the animation sequence
Flags 0 Start Animation
1 Stop Animation
2 Pause Animation
3 Resume Animation
4 Pause Frame Set ( Pause Frame identified )
5 Forward ( 0 = reverse, 1 = forward )
Animation Flags 0 Step a Frame in Animation (animation must be
paused)
1 not used
2 notify host (when animation sequence is completed )
3 quit animation
4 sequence notify off (disable host notify of current
sequence)
5 sequence notify on (enable host notify of current

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sequence)
6 not used
7 Entity Animation Component Control flag = 1
Bit 7 must be set to 1 for Entity Animation Component
Control

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID
Entity ID Reserved A=0 Flags
Sequence ID Frame Pause Frame Animation Flags
Speed Scalar ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-49

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.2 View

View Component Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 1
Component Id 0 View Port Mask Control
1 View Port Zoom Control
2 View Port Crash Indication Control
3 View Port Paging Offset

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-50 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.2.1 View Port Mask Control

View Port Mask Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 1
Component Id 0
View Id Ig Channel
View State On / Off

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0
View ID Reserved A=1 Reserved B
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class
B View State
STATUS
• If the View Channel is switched off then software is set to enable the
“BlankonDisable” feature, which is normally an option when blanking
the video but in this case the video will go blank when the channel is
disabled.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-51

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.2.2 View Port Paging Offset 0

View Port Paging Offset EP2 Functionality

Component Class 1
Component Id 3
Viewport Number Viewport Number
Enable Enable/Disable the paging offset
feature
ctPagingOffsetScalar CT layer control for paging offset.
The range is 0 – 1.

mmPagingOffsetScalar Moving model layer control for

paging offset. The range is 0 – 1.
(Not implemented yet.)
terrainPagingOffsetScalar Terrain layer control for paging
offset. The range is 0 – 1.

vfPagingOffsetScalar VF layer control for paging offset.

The range is 0 – 1.
(Not implemented yet.)
ctLODCenterScalar CT layer control for the LOD center.
The range is 0 – 1.
(Not implemented yet.)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 3
Viewport Number Reserved *1 A Component State(0)
Pitch Scalar (32 bit Packed Float)
ctPagingOffsetScalar (32 bit Packed Float)
mmPagingOffsetScalar (32 bit Packed Float)
terrainPagingOffsetScalar (32 bit Packed Float)
vfPagingOffsetScalar (32 bit Packed Float)
ctLODCenterScalar (32 bit Packed Float)
*1 Component Class (view=1)
A Enable (0: off, 1: on)

5-52 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.2.3 View Port Paging Offset 1

View Port Paging Offset EP2 Functionality

Component Class 1
Component Id 3
Viewport Number Viewport Number
Enable Enable/Disable the paging offset
feature
mmLODCenterScalar Moving model layer control for the
LOD center. The range is 0 – 1.
(Not implemented yet.)
terrainLODCenterScalar Terrain layer control for the LOD
center. The range is 0 – 1.
(Not implemented yet.)
vfLODCenterScalar VF layer control for the LOD center.
The range is 0 – 1.
(Not implemented yet.)
ctFixedPagingOffset CT layer control for fixed-offset
paging origin. In database units
(typically feet). The range is 0 to
20000.0.
mmFixedPagingOffset Moving Model layer control for
fixed-offset paging origin. In
database units (typically feet). The
range is 0 to 20000.0.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(Not implemented yet.)
terrainFixedPagingOffset Terrain layer control for fixed-offset
paging origin. In database units
(typically feet). The range is 0 to
20000.0.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-53

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 3
Viewport Number Reserved *1 A Component State(1)
mmLODCenterScalar (32 bit Packed Float)
terrainLODCenterScalar (32 bit Packed Float)
vfLODCenterScalar (32 bit Packed Float)
ctFixedPagingOffset (32 bit Packed Float)
mmFixedPagingOffset (32 bit Packed Float)
terrainFixedPagingOffset (32 bit Packed Float)
*1 Component Class (view=1)
A Enable (0: off, 1: on)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-54 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.2.4 View Port Paging Offset 2

View Port Paging Offset EP2 Functionality

Component Class 1
Component Id 3
Viewport Number Viewport Number
Enable Enable/Disable the paging offset
feature
vfFixedPagingOffset Vector Feature layer control for
fixed-offset paging origin. In
database units (typically feet). The
range is 0 to 20000.0.
(Not implemented yet.)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 3
Viewport Number Reserved *1 A Component State(2)
vfFixedPagingOffset (32 bit Packed Float)
Component Data ( = 0)
Component Data ( = 0)
Component Data ( = 0)
Component Data ( = 0)
Component Data ( = 0)
*1 Component Class (view=1)
A Enable (0: off, 1: on)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-55

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.2.5 View Port Crash Indication Control

View Port Crash Indication EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 1
Component Id 2
View Id IG Channel ID
Indication State 0 = Off
1 = On (solid)
2 = On (flash)
Indication Color RGB Color (0-255 per component)
(Red/Green/Blue)
Indication Flash Rate # of Fields Flash On, then # of
Fields Flash Off
(ignored if Indication State not set
to 2)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 2
View ID Reserved A=1 Reserved B
Red Green Blue Reserved
Indication Flash Rate Reserved
A Component Class
B Indication State

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-56 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.2.6 View Port Zoom Control

View Port Zoom Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 1
Component Id 1
View Id IG Channel
Zoom 0.01 ---- 127
Zoom Magnification Power

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 1
View ID Reserved A=1 Reserved
Zoom ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

5.3.4.3 View Group Component Control

View Group EP2 Functionality

Component Control
Component Class 2
Component Id 0 View Port Group Mask Control
1 View Port Group Zoom Control
2 View Port Group Crash Indication Control

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-57

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.3.1 Viewport Group Mask Control

View Port Group Mask Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 2
Component Id 0
Group Id View Group created via View Def Packet.
Note: EP2 supports group ID from 0-7
only.
View State On / Off

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0
Group ID Reserved A=2 Reserved B
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class
B View State

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-58 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.3.2 View Port Group Zoom Control

View Port Group Zoom EP2 Functionality
Control
Component Class 2
Component Id 1
Group Id View Group created via View Def Packet
Note: EP2 supports group ID from 0-7
only.
Zoom 0.01 ---- 127
Zoom Magnification Power

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 1
Group ID Reserved A=2 Reserved
Zoom ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-59

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.3.3 View Port Group Crash Indication Control

View Port Group Crash EP2 Functionality
Indication Control
Component Class 2
Component Id 2
View Group Id View Group ID
From View Definition packet. Note:
EP2 supports group ID from 0-7
only.
Indication State 0 = Off
1 = On (solid)
2 = Auto Flash (flashes on collision)
Indication Color RGB Color (0-255 per component)
(Red/Green/Blue)
Indication Flash Rate # of Fields Flash On, then # of
Fields Flash Off
(ignored if Indication State not set
to 2)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 2
View Group ID Reserved A=2 Reserved B
Red Green Blue Reserved
Indication Flash Rate Reserved
A Component Class
B Indication State

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-60 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4 Sensor Component Control

Sensor Component Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x0001 IRPP Video Switch Select Control
0x3029 Noise Control
0x3062 IRPP AGC/Gain/Level
0x3063 IRPP Distortion - deprecated
0x3064 IRPP Polarity
0x3065 IRPP Test Pattern
0x3066 Sensor Symbol Intensity
0x3067 Sensor Symbol Control
0x3068 Sensor IR Environment
0x3069 Sensor IR Visibility
0x306B IRPP Switches
0x306F Sensor IRPP Viewport Control
0x30B0 Sensor EXG Thermal Cuer Parameters
0x30B1 Diurnal Control
0x30B3 Sensor Symbol Value
0x30B5 Sensor IRPP Config File Select Control
0x30B6 Sensor EXG Tracking Type Select
0x30B9 Sensor IRPP Histogram Intensity Clip
0x30BA Sensor Symbol Update
0x30BC Sensor EXG Target Tracker Parameters
0x3150 IRPP Noise Control
0x3151 Sensor IRPP AC Coupling
0x3152 IRPP Viewport Number
0x3153 Sensor IRPP AGC Parameters
0x3154 IRPP Blur
0x3155 IRPP Spatial Filter

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0x3156 IRPP Degraded Elements
0x3157 Sensor EXG Target Tracker Control
0x3158 Sensor IRPP Video Output Control
0x3159 Sensor IRPP Persistence Control
0x315A IRPP Zoom
0x315B IRPP Histogram Clipping Plane
0x315C IRPP BlurEx
0x3166 Sensor EXG Video Continuous Zoom
0x3167 Sensor EXG Clear Software Render
0x3168 Sensor EXG Software Render Position

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-61

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.1 Sensor Noise Control

Sensor Noise Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x3029
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags BITS
0 Secondary
0 = Apply to primary
gain/level
1 = Apply to secondary
gain/level
1 – 7 Reserved
Noise Specifies the quantity of dynamic
noise for the specified viewport.
Not applicable if the Secondary flag
is set.
Gain Specifies the amount of primary
(Secondary = 0) or secondary
(Secondary = 1) manual gain to
apply to the specified viewport.
Range: 0.0 – 64.0.
Level Specifies the amount of primary
(Secondary = 0) or secondary
(Secondary = 1) manual level to
apply to the specified viewport.
Range: -32.0 – 32.0.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3029

Viewport Reserved A=3 Flags
Component Data 1 = 0
Noise ( 32 bit packed float )
Gain ( 32 bit packed float )
Level ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0

5-62 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.2 Sensor IRPP AGC/Gain/Level Control

Sensor IRPP Mode Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x3062
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Mode Bits 0-3: AGC Mode
0 Manual
1 Automatic gain and level
2 Automatic gain, fixed level
3 Automatic fast gain and level
Bit 4: Primary/Secondary Flag
0 Primary gain and level
1 Secondary gain and level
Bits 5..7: unused
Gain Gain value to use in the specified viewport
( 0.0 to 64.0 )
Level Level value to use in the specified viewport
(–32.0 to +32.0)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3062

Viewport Reserved A=3 Mode
Gain ( 32 bit packed float )
Level ( 32 bit packed float )

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-63

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.3 Sensor IRPP Distortion Control

Sensor IRPP Distortion Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x3063
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Noise Length Pixel Length of the Noise
0 noise length of one pixel
1 noise length of two pixels
2 noise length of four pixels
3 noise length of eight pixels
Pixel Mismatch Percentage of the Sensor pixel mismatch
variance
0 – 100
Fixed Pattern Noise Amount of fixed pattern noise displayed by
the post processor
0 – 100
Focus Focus value to be used (0.0 to 1.0).
If sharpening is disabled, 0 indicates no
blurring.
If sharpening is enabled, 0.0 is maximum
sharpening, 0.5 is no sharpening and no
blur, and 1.0 is maximum blur.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3063

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Viewport Reserved A=3 Reserved
Pixel Mismatch Reserved Fixed Pattern Noise Noise Length
Focus ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class

5-64 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.4 Sensor IRPP Polarity

Sensor IRPP Polarity Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x3064
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Polarity Bits
0 Pre-track Polarity Inversion
0 = do not invert (white hot)
1 = invert (black hot)
1 Post-track Polarity Inversion
0 = do not invert (white hot)
1 = invert (black hot)
2 Pre-gain Polarity Inversion
0 = do not invert (white hot)
1 = invert (black hot)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3064

Viewport Reserved A=3 Polarity
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-65

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.5 Sensor IRPP Test Pattern

Sensor IRPP Test Pattern EP2 Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x3065
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Pattern Displays the selected test pattern:
0 = no test pattern
1 = gray bars (8)
2 = gray bars (8 reversed)
3 = gray bars (10)
4 = black screen
5 = white screen
6-15 = reserved
16-31 = customer-provided test
patterns (optional)
32-255 = reserved

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3065

Viewport Reserved A=3 Pattern
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-66 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.6 Sensor Symbol Intensity

Sensor Symbol Intensity EP2 Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x3066
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Group Specifies number of the symbol group
affected
0–255
Intensity Specifies brightness of the symbology
0–255

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3066

Viewport Reserved A=3 Not Used
Group Intensity
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-67

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.7 Sensor Symbol Control

Sensor Symbol Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x3067
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Enable Select display representation of symbology.
0 – 255, 0 = disable by convention
Group Group Number
0 – 255
Symbol Symbol Number
0 – 255, symbol 0 is reserved for clearing all
symbols
X X Coordinate (0.0 – 1.0)
Y Y Coordinate (0.0 – 1.0)
Roll Roll Orientation
X Scale Symbol size scale factor in X direction
Y Scale Symbol size scale factor in Y direction

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3067

Viewport Reserved A=3 Enable
Group Symbol

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

X ( 32 bit packed float )
Y ( 32 bit packed float )
Roll ( 32 bit packed float )
X Scale ( 32 bit packed float )
Y Scale ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class

5-68 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.8 Sensor IR Environment

Sensor IR Environment EP2 Functionality
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3068
Rain Soak Rain soak flag
0 = no rainsoak condition
1 = rainsoak condition
Ground Temperature The temperature of the ground in
degrees Celsius.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3068
Instance ID = 0 Reserved A=3 Rain Soak
Ground Temperature
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

5.3.4.4.9 Sensor IR Visibility Control

Sensor IR Visibility Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x3069
Mode Visibility mode
0 manual
1 automatic
2 EPX

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Distance IR Visibility distance
0 to 2,640,000 units

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3069

Not Used Reserved A=3 Mode
Distance ( 32 bit long )
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-69

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.10 Sensor IRPP Switches Control

Sensor IRPP Switches EP2 Functionality
Control
Component Class 3
Component Id 0x306B
Flags BITS
0 - 1 Reserved
2 Gain, level, noise response packet
(opcode 3203) enable
3 – 5 Reserved
6 Extended EXG TargetTracker response
packet (opcode 3206) enable
7 Extended EXG Thermal Cuer response
packet (opcode 3207) enable

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x306B

Not Used Reserved A=3 Flags
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-70 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.11 Sensor IRPP Viewport Control

Sensor IRPP Viewport EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 3
Component Id 0x306F
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Flags BITS
0 Freeze frame enable
1 Output polarity invert
2–4 Zoom Select bits
0 = 1x ( no zoom )
1 = 2x zoom
2 = 4x zoom
3 = 8x zoom
Sensor Select Selected Sensor Type
Dead Element Number of lines to blank the image in order
to give the appearance of a broken or
damaged sensor
0 = off ( no lines blanked )
….
….
255 = all lines blanked
Persistence Persistence function decay rate
0–255

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x306F
Viewport Reserved A=3 Flags
Sensor Select Not Used
Dead Element Persistence
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-71

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.12 Sensor EXG Thermal Cuer Parameters

Sensor EXG Thermal Cuer EP2 Functionality
Parameters
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x30B0
Viewport Viewport number
Sort Method 0: none
1: bottom to top
2: center outward
3: top down
4: large to small
5: small to large
6: highest total energy
7: highest peak intensity
8: highest average intensity
9 – 255: reserved
Sensitivity Interpolant for sensitivity
(0.0 – 1.0)
Target Size Interpolant for target size
(0.0 – 1.0)
Area of Regard Determines screen extent processed
by thermal cuer
0.0: disable thermal cuer
1.0: full screen

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x30B0
Viewport Reserved A=3 Sort Method

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Area of Regard
Sensitivity
Target Size
Component Data 4 = 0
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

5-72 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.13 Diurnal Control

Diurnal Control EP Functionality
Component Class 3
Component Id 0x30B1
Peak Minutes Specifies the minutes ( 0 – 59 ). This is the
minute that the peak ambient temperature
occurs for the specified day.
Peak Hours Specifies the hour (0 – 23). This is the
hour that the peak ambient temperature
occurs for the specified day.
Minimum Ambient Specifies the minimum ambient
Temperature temperature, in degrees Celsius, that
occurs for the specified day.
Maximum Ambient Specifies the maximum ambient
Temperature temperature, in degrees Celsius, that
occurs for the specified day.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x30B1

unused Reserved A=3
Peak Minutes Peak Hours
Minimum Ambient Temperature ( 32 bit packed float )
Maximum Ambient Temperature ( 32 bit packed float )
unused

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-73

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.14 Sensor Symbol Value Control

Sensor Symbol Value Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 3
Component Id 0x30B3
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Symbol Symbol Number
0–255
Symbol Value Application specific Symbol value

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x30B3

Viewport Reserved A=3 Symbol
Symbol Value ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

5.3.4.4.15 Sensor IRPP Config File Select Control

Sensor IRPP Config File Select EP Functionality

Component Class 3
Component Id 0x30B5
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Select Config file select

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x30B5

Viewport Reserved A=3 Select
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

5-74 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.16 Sensor EXG Tracking Type Select

EXG Track Type Select EP Functionality
Component Class 3
Component Id 0x30B6
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Track Type Application-specific track type

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x30B6
Viewport Reserved A=3 Track Type
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0

5.3.4.4.17 Sensor IRPP Histogram Intensity Clip

Sensor IRPP Histogram Intensity EP2 Functionality
Clip
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x30B9
Viewport Specifies the viewport number
Clip Low Fraction of histogram pixels to ignore at
the low end of the intensity spectrum
(0.0 – 0.999)
Clip High Fraction of histogram pixels to ignore at
the high end of the intensity spectrum
(0.0 – 0.999)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x30B9

Viewport Reserved A=3 Component State
Clip Low
Clip High
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-75

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.18 Sensor Symbol Update

EXG Symbol Update EP Functionality
Component Class 3
Component Id 0x30BA
Viewport IR Viewport Number
Enable Select display representation of symbology.
0 – 255, 0 = disable by convention
Group Intensity group number.
Symbol Symbol Number
0 – 255, symbol 0 is reserved for clearing
all symbols.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x30BA
Viewport Reserved A=3 Enable
Group Symbol
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

5.3.4.4.19 Sensor EXG Target Tracker Parameters

Sensor EXG Target EP Functionality
Tracker Parameters
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x30BC

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags Bits
0 Impending Breaklock
0 = applies to breaklock
1 = applies to impending breaklock
1 – 7 Reserved
Minimum Target Size X Minimum horizontal target size, in pixels
Minimum Target Size Y Minimum vertical target size, in pixels
Maximum Target Size X Maximum horizontal target size, in fraction of
horizontal FOV (0.0 to 1.0)
Maximum Target Size Y Maximum vertical target size, in fraction of vertical
FOV (0.0 to 1.0)

5-76 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Maximum Target Offset X Maximum horizontal target offset, in fraction of

horizontal FOV; measured from the center of the
screen to the left or right edge of the target
furthest from the screen center (0.0 to 0.5).
Maximum Target Offset Y Maximum vertical target offset, in fraction of
vertical FOV; measured from the center of the
screen to the top or bottom edge of the target
furthest from the screen center (0.0 to 0.5).
Minimum Target Contrast Minimum target contrast (0.0 to 1.0), measured as:
contrast = targetPeak – background
where peak and background are normalized to
range from 0.0 to 1.0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x30BC

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Minimum Target Size X Minimum Target Size Y
Maximum Target Size X
Maximum Target Size Y
Maximum Target Offset X
Maximum Target Offset Y
Minimum Target Contrast

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-77

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.20 Sensor IRPP Noise Control

Sensor IRPP Noise EP2 Functionality
Control
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3150
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags Bits
0 – 1 Noise Length (random noise only):
0=1 pixel
1=2 pixels
2=4 pixels
3=8 pixels
2 Noise Enable (white noise only):
0 = disable
1 = enable
3 Correlation with gain
0 = don’t correlate with gain
1 = automatically correlate with gain
4 – 5 Target of this packet
0 = primary random noise
1 = secondary random noise
2 = white noise
3 = fixed-pattern noise
6 – 7 reserved
Noise Amount of noise to display (0.0 to 1.0) –
ignored if gain-correlation is enabled.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3150

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Noise (32-bit packed float)
Component Data 2 = 0

5-78 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.21 Sensor IRPP AC Coupling

Sensor IRPP AC Coupling Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3151
Viewport Specifies the viewport number
Flags Bits
0 – 1 AC coupling mode:
0 = off
1 = on, field mode
2 = on, line mode
3 = on, field mode
2 Decay Mode:
0 – decay in microseconds
1 – decay in native units
3 – 7 Reserved
AC Coupling Decay AC coupling decay, in microseconds

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3151

Viewport Reserved A=3 Flags
AC Coupling Decay
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-79

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.22 Sensor IRPP AGC Parameters

Sensor IRPP AGC EP2 Functionality
Parameters
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3153
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags Bits
0 – 1 AGC Mode
0 = manual gain and level
1 = automatic gain and level
2 = automatic gain with fixed level (NVG)
3 = reserved
2 – 7 reserved
Gain Filter Alpha Controls the rate of gain changes, from the minimum
(0.0) to the maximum (1.0)
Level Filter Alpha Controls the rate of level changes, from the minimum
(0.0) to the maximum (1.0)
Distribution Center Desired position of histogram weighted average after
application of gain and level
Intensity Bins Fraction of intensity bins in histogram skirt for AGC
using Skirt algorithm
Lower Gain Limit Used by Skirt AGC algorithm
Upper Gain Limit Used by Skirt AGC algorithm

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3153

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Gain Filter Alpha (32-bit packed float)
Level Filter Filter Alpha (32-bit packed float)
Distribution Center (32-bit packed float)
Intensity Bins (32-bit packed float)
Lower Gain Limit (32-bit packed float)
Upper Gain Limit (32-bit packed float)

5-80 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.23 Sensor IRPP Histogram Parameters

Sensor IRPP EP2 Functionality
Histogram Parameters
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3152
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Histogram Start X Left edge of rectangular histogram collection
region (0.000 is left edge of screen)
0.0 to 1.0
Histogram End X Right edge of rectangular histogram collection
region (1.000 is right edge of screen)
0.0 to 1.0
Histogram Start Y Top edge of rectangular histogram collection
region (0.000 is top of screen)
0.0 to 1.0
Histogram End Y Bottom edge of rectangular histogram collection
region (1.000 is bottom of screen)
0.0 to 1.0
Histogram Threshold Input intensity below which pixels will be omitted
from the histogram collection (0.000 is black,
1.000 is white)
0.0 to 1.0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3152

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Component State = 0
Histogram Start X (32-bit packed float)
Histogram End X (32-bit packed float)
Histogram Start Y (32-bit packed float)
Histogram End Y (32-bit packed float)
Histogram Threshold (32-bit packed float)
Component Data 6 = 0

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-81

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.24 Sensor IRPP Blur

Sensor IRPP EP2 Functionality
Blur
Component 3
Class
Component ID 0x3154
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bits
0 – 1 BlurMode
0 = isotropic Gaussian blur
1 = anisotropic Gaussian blur
2 = blur select
3 = reserved
2 Sharpen
0 = do not sharpen
1 = sharpen
3 – 7 reserved
Blur / Blur H / The range and interpretation of this field depend on
Blur Select BlurMode and Sharpen:
BlurMode = 0 Sharpen = Range is from 0.0 (no blur)
Blur 0 to 1.0 (maximum blur)
Sharpen = Range is from 0.0
1 (maximum sharpening) to
0.5 (no blur, no sharpening)
to 1.0 (maximum blur)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

BlurMode = 1 Sharpen = Range is from 0.0 (no
Blur H 0 horizontal blur) to 1.0
(maximum horizontal blur)
Sharpen = Range is from 0.0
1 (maximum horizontal
sharpening) to 0.5 (no
horizontal blur, no horizontal
sharpening) to 1.0
(maximum horizontal blur)
BlurMode = 2 Range is from 0.0 to 255.0 –
Blur Select the integer portion is used
to select a preloaded blur
kernel

5-82 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Sensor IRPP EP2 Functionality

Blur
Blur V The range and interpretation of this field depend on
BlurMode and Sharpen:
BlurMode = 0 Not used
BlurMode = 1 Sharpen = 0 Range is from 0.0
(no vertical blur)
to 1.0 (maximum
vertical blur)
Sharpen = 1 Range is from 0.0
(maximum
vertical
sharpening) to
0.5 (no vertical
blur, no vertical
sharpening) to
1.0 (maximum
vertical blur)
BlurMode = 2 Not used

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3154

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Blur / Blur H / Blur Select (32-bit packed float)
Blur V (32-bit packed float)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-83

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.25 Sensor IRPP Spatial Filter

Sensor IRPP Spatial EP2 Functionality
Filter
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3155
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bits
0 SpatialFilterEnable
0 = disable spatial filter
1 = enable spatial filter
1 SpatialFilterToTracker
0 = tracker receives normal input
1 = tracker input is spatial filter output
2 – 7 reserved
Kernel Select Selects 1 of 256 preloaded filter kernels (0 – 255)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3155

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Kernel Select (32-bit unsigned integer)
Component Data 2 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-84 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.26 Sensor IRPP Degraded Elements

Sensor IRPP EP2 Functionality
Degraded Elements
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3156
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bits
0 Type
0 = mismatched elements
1 = dead elements
Degraded Elements Amount of degradation, ranging from 0.0 (none) to
1.0 (maximum available)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3156

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Degraded Elements (32-bit packed float)
Component Data 2 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-85

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.27 Sensor EXG Target Tracker Control

Sensor EXG Target EP2 Functionality
Tracker Control
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3157
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bits
0 Designate (application-specific control)
1 Autotrack
0 = disable target tracker
1 = enable target tracker
2 ContrastSelect
0 = white
1 = black
2 = auto
3 = reserved
4 – 7 reserved
Offset X Horizontal screen location of desired track position
in fraction of horizontal FOV; center of the screen is
the origin, left edge of screen is -0.5 and right edge
of screen is +0.5
Offset Y Vertical screen location of desired track position in
fraction of vertical FOV; center of the screen is the
origin, bottom edge of screen is -0.5 and top edge
of screen is +0.5

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3157

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Offset X (32-bit packed float)
Offset Y (32-bit packed float)

5-86 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.28 Sensor IRPP Video Output Control

Sensor IRPP EP2 Functionality
Video Output
Control
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3158
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bits
0 VideoDisable
0 = video on
1 = video off
1 SymbologyDisable
0 = symbology on
1 = symbology off
2 SymbologyDisableBlue
0 = symbology on all colors
1 = symbology disabled on blue
3 VideoSwitch
0 = no action
1 = switch to “me”
4 – 7 reserved

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3158

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-87

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.29 Sensor IRPP Persistence Control

Sensor IRPP EP2 Functionality
Persistence
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3159
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bits
0 Freeze
0 = don’t freeze
1 = freeze current frame
1 BiasWhite
0 = don’t bias white
1 = enable white bias
2 – 7 reserved
Persistence Amount of persistence, ranging from 0.0 (none) to
1.0 (freeze frame)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3159

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Persistence (32-bit packed float)
Component Data 2 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-88 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.30 Sensor IRPP Zoom

Sensor IRPP Zoom EP2 Functionality
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x315A
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bit 7: Zoom Factor
0 – The zoom value in the remaining bits will
be a power of 2.
1 – Use the value in the remaining bits to
specify the zoom factor.
When Zoom Factor is 0
bits 6 - 0: Zoom
0 = 1x (no zoom)
1 = 2x zoom
2 = 4x zoom
3 = 8x zoom
When Zoom Factor is 1
bits 6 - 0: Zoom
1 = 1x (no zoom)
2 = 2x zoom
3 = 3x zoom
4 = 4x zoom
8 = 8x zoom
Pan X Horizontal offset from center of screen, in fraction
of horizontal FOV; left is negative and right is
positive; range is -0.5 to +0.5, limited by amount
of zoom

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Pan Y Vertical offset from center of screen, in fraction of
vertical FOV; up is positive and down is negative;
range is -0.5 to +0.5, limited by amount of zoom

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x315A

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Pan X (32-bit packed float)
Pan Y (32-bit packed float)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-89

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.31 IRPP Histogram Clipping Plane

Sensor IRPP Histogram EP Functionality
Clipping Plane
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x315B
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bits
0 – 1 PlaneSelect
0 = plane 0
1 = plane 1
2 = plane 2
3 = plane 3
2 Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
Position X Specifies the x coordinate of a point on the clipping
plane; the origin is the upper left corner of the
screen, x is to the right; range is 0.0 to 1.0
Position Y Specifies the y coordinate of a point on the clipping
plane; the origin is the upper left corner of the
screen, y is down; range is 0.0 to 1.0
Normal X The x component of a unit vector perpendicular to
the clipping plane and pointing into the collection
region; range is -1.0 to 1.0
Normal Y The y component of a unit vector perpendicular to
the clipping plane and pointing into the collection

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

region; range is -1.0 to 1.0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x315B

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Position X (32-bit packed float)
Position Y (32-bit packed float)
Normal X (32-bit packed float)
Normal Y (32-bit packed float)
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0

5-90 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.32 Sensor IRPP BlurEx

Sensor IRPP BlurEx EP2 Functionality
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x315C
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bits
0 – 2 Blur Mode
0 = off
1 = isotropic Gaussian blur
2 = isotropic blur with edge enhancement
3 = anisotropic Gaussian blur
4 = kernel select
5 – 7 = reserved
3 – 4 Filter Select
0 = primary blur filter
1 = secondary blur filter (RVP3 only)
2 = software spatial filter
3 = reserved
5 To Tracker (secondary filter only)
0 = output not routed to target tracker
1 = output routed to target tracker input
6 – 7 Reserved
Blur / Blur H / Kernel Controls blur for isotropic blur mode 0.0 – 1.0),
Select isotropic blur with edge enhancement mode (0.0 – 1.0),
horizontal blur for anisotropic blur mode (0.0 – 1.0),
and blur kernel selection in blur select mode (0.0 –
255.0, fractional part ignored).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Blur V Controls vertical blur for anisotropic blur (0.0 – 1.0).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x315C

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Blur / Blur H / Kernel Select (32-bit packed float)
Blur V (32-bit packed float)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-91

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.33 Sensor EXG Video Continuous Zoom Control

Sensor EXG Video EP2 Functionality
Continuous Zoom
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3166
Viewport Viewport number
Flags bits
0 - Enable/Disable Continuous Zoom.
(0- Disable, 1 – Enable)
1-2 – Zoom Control
(1 – SW Continuous Zoom)
Zoom Value Zoom Value used to scale the video. [1.0 – 16.0 ] –
IEEE float (32 bit).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3166
Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Zoom Value
Reserved

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-92 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.34 Sensor EXG Clear Software Render

Sensor EXG Clear EP2 Functionality
Software Render
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3167
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bit 0: Clear Enable
0 – The image will be selected from the DMA.
1 – Set the image to the given intensity.
Intensity 0.0 to 1.0
Specifies the intensity to use in clearing the image.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3167
Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Intensity (32-bit packed float)
Reserved

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-93

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.4.35 Sensor EXG Software Render Position

Sensor EXG EP2 Functionality
Software Render
Position
Component Class 3
Component ID 0x3168
Viewport IRPP Viewport number
Flags bit 0: PIP Enable
0 – The PIP image will not be displayed.
1 – The PIP image will be displayed
X Specifies the position, in pixels, of the left side of the
PIP render window.
Y Specifies the position, in pixels, of the top of the PIP
render window.
Width Specifies the width, in pixels, of the PIP render window.
Height Specifies the height, in pixels, of the PIP render window
Source Center X Specifies the X position, in pixels, of the center of the
source data that will be used for the software rendering
of the PIP window.
Source Center Y Specifies the Y position, in pixels, of the center of the
source data that will be used for the software rendering
of the PIP window.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3168

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Viewport Reserved Class=3 Flags
Y X
Height Width
Source Center Y Source Center X
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

5-94 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.5 Regional Sea Surface Component Control

Regional Sea Surface Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 4
Component Id 0 Regional Sea State Control
1 Regional 3dWaves LOD Control

5.3.4.5.1 Regional Sea State Control

Regional Sea State Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 4
Component Id 0
Instance ID Motion System corresponding to Sea State
model used to represent the sea surface
texture
Waves Enable Enable / Disable 3D Waves
Region ID Region to which settings will be applied
Sea State 0 Disassociates wave motion and texture
from wind direction and speed
1 … 13 Specifies a Sea State Level, which
will cause an associated script file to
be executed, the wave heading to be
controlled by wind direction, and the
sea state model (if any) to be
controlled by wind speed and
direction.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Grid Spacing 0 do not update
>0 set 3d waves grid post spacing meters

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0
Instance ID Reserved A=4 B Sea State
Grid Spacing ( 32 bit packed float )
Region ID
A Component Class
B Waves Enable

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-95

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.5.2 Regional 3d Waves LOD Component Control

Regional 3D Waves LOD EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 4
Component Id 1
Instance ID Motion System corresponding to Sea State
model used to represent the sea surface
texture
Waves Enable Enable / Disable 3D Waves
Sea State 0 Disassociates wave motion and
texture from wind direction and
speed
1 … 13 Specifies a Sea State Level, which
will cause an associated script file
to be executed, the wave heading
to be controlled by wind direction,
and the sea state model (if any) to
be controlled by wind speed and
direction.
Grid Spacing 0 do not update
> 0 set 3D waves grid post spacing
Meters
Low / Medium / High LOD Radius of Circle in which LOD holds
0 do not update
Meters

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-96 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 1

Instance ID Reserved A=4 B Sea State
Grid Spacing ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = 0
Low Lod Range ( 32 bit packed float )
Medium Lod Range ( 32 bit packed float )
High Lod Range ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class
B Waves Enable

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-97

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.6 Regional Layered Weather Component Control

Regional Sea Surface Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 6
Component Id 0 Regional Wind Control
0x3008 Regional Visibility Control
0x302A Regional Fog Color Control
0x302C Regional Scene Reduction

5.3.4.6.1 Regional Wind Control

Regional Wind Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 6
Component Id 0
Instance ID Region ID
Component State Enable
Wind Direction Direction of Wind
Wind Velocity Velocity of Wind

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0
Region ID Reserved A=6 Enable
Wind Direction Wind Velocity
Component Data 2 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-98 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.6.2 Regional Visibility Component Control

Visibility Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 6
Component Id 0x3008
Instance ID Region ID
Component State Enable
Visibility Visibility for Region in meters

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3008
Region ID Reserved A=6 Enable
Visibility ( 32 bit packed float)
Component Data 2 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-99

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.6.3 Regional Fog Color Component Control

Fog Color Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 6
Component Id 0x302A
Instance ID Region ID
Component State Enable
Red Scale Factor Specifies the RED scale factor for the fog color. 0
allows no red, and 1023 allows the full value of the
red component.
Green Scale Factor Specifies the GREEN scale factor for the fog color. 0
allows no green, and 1023 allows the full value of the
green component.
Blue Scale Factor Specifies the BLUE scale factor for the fog color. 0
allows no blue, and 1023 allows the full value of the
blue component.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x302A
Region ID Reserved A=6 Enable
Green Scale Factor Red Scale Factor
Not Used Blue Scale Factor

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-100 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.6.4 Regional Scene Reduction (EP2 Incomplete)

NOTE: This opcode will not return an error; however, there is no
underlying functionality.

Regional Scene Reduction EP2 Functionality

Component Class 6
Component Id 0x302C
Region Type (Instance Id) 0 = Regional Weather Region
1 = Regional Storm Region
Region Index (Component State) 1 – 7: For Weather Region ID
0 – 7: For Storm Region ID
Brightness Reduction 0.0 – 1.0: Region’s Brightness Reduction
Contrast Reduction 0.0 – 1.0: Region’s Contrast Reduction

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x302C
Region Type Reserved A=0 Region Index
Brightness Reduction (32 bit packed float)
Contrast Reduction (32 bit packed float)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-101

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.7 Global Sea Surface Component Control

Global Sea Surface Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 7
Component Id 0 Global Sea State Control
1 Global 3d Waves LOD Control
2 3D Wave Control

5.3.4.7.1 Global Sea State Control

Global Sea State Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 7
Component Id 0
Instance ID Unused
Waves Enable Enable / Disable 3D Waves
Force Update Force update on Wave Control Parameters
Sea State 0 Disassociates wave motion and texture
from wind direction and speed
1 … 13 Specifies a Sea State Level, which
will cause an associated script file to
be executed, the wave heading to be
controlled by wind direction, and the
sea state motion and texture to be
controlled by wind speed and
direction.
Grid Spacing 0 do not update

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

> 0 set the 3d wave grid post spacing at the
highest resolution. This number is provided as
a hint. The actually spacing may be limited by
eye-point distance and performance.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0
Instance ID Reserved A=7 B C Sea State
Grid Spacing ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 =0
A Component Class
B Waves Enable
C Force Update

5-102 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.7.2 Global 3D Waves LOD Control

Global 3D Waves LOD Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 7
Component Id 1
Instance ID Unused
Waves Enable Enable / Disable 3D Waves
Force Update Force update on Wave Control Parameters
Sea State 0 Disassociates wave motion and
texture from wind direction and
speed
1 … 13 Specifies a Sea State Level, which
will cause an associated script file
to be executed, the wave heading
to be controlled by wind direction,
and the sea state motion and
texture to be controlled by wind
speed and direction.
(ignored if Waves Enable and Force Update
set to 0 )
Grid Spacing 0 do not update
> 0 set the 3d wave grid post spacing at
the highest resolution in meters. This
number is provided as a hint. The actually
spacing is limited by eye-point distance and
performance.
(ignored if Waves Enable and Force Update

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

set to 0 )
Low / Medium / High LOD 0 do not update
Radius of Circle in which LOD holds. High
LOD sets the range in which the Grid
Spacing will hold if allowed. Medium and
Low LOD radius are not used.
(ignored if Waves Enable and Force Update
set to 0 )

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-103

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 1

Instance ID Reserved A=7 B C Sea State
Grid Spacing ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = 0
Low Lod Range ( 32 bit packed float )
Medium Lod Range ( 32 bit packed float )
High Lod Range ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class
B Waves Enable
C Force Update

5.3.4.7.3 Global 3D Waves Control

Global 3D Waves Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 7
Component Id 2
Instance ID Unused
Waves Enable Enable / Disable 3D Waves
Force Update Force update on Wave Control Parameters
Sea State 0 Disassociates wave motion and
texture from wind direction and

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

speed
1 … 13 Specifies a Sea State Level, which
will cause an associated script file
to be executed, the wave heading
to be controlled by wind direction,
and the sea state motion and
texture to be controlled by wind
speed and direction.
(ignored if Waves Enable and Force Update
set to 0 )
X Size Unused
Y Size Unused

5-104 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Lat Origin 64 bit double

(ignored if Waves Enable and Force Update
set to 0 )
Lon Origin 64 bit double
(ignored if Waves Enable and Force Update
set to 0 )

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 2

Instance ID Reserved A=7 B C Sea State
X Size
Y Size
Lat Origin (msw) (64 bit packed double)
Lat Origin (lsw)
Lon Origin (msw) (64 bit packed double)
Lon Origin (lsw)
A Component Class
B Waves Enable
C Force Update

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-105

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.8 Global Terrain Surface Component Control

Global Terrain Surface EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 8
Component Id 65532 Group Specific Control
65535 Vector Fixed Selectable Feature
Control

5.3.4.8.1 Group Specific Control

Group Specific Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 8
Component Id 65532
Group 0 ….. 512
Intensity If Scalar Type
% value represents 0 ….. 100 %
If Step Value
0 ….. 5

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 65532
Instance ID=0 Reserved A=8 Flags
Group Data Word 2=0 or scalar intensity value
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Flags
0 control type must be 0 = group
1 lp type 0 = poly, 1 = light
2 update lp switch 0 = disable, 1 = enable
3 update intensity 0 = disable, 1 = enable
4 Intensity type 0=scalar, 1=step
5 lp switch val 0 = off, 1 = on
NOTE: Flags bit 5 will be the actual bit value for the lp to be set to, if
Flags bit 2 is set to enable.

NOTE: If flags bit 4 equals 1 indicating step and step is equal to 6 then
the IG will use a scalar value in Data Word 2 as the intensity.

5-106 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.8.2 Vector Fixed Selectable Feature Control

Vector Fixed Selectable Feature EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 8
Component ID 65535
Select # 0–255
FSF ID 32-bit integer ID

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 65535
Instance ID=0 Reserved A=8 Select #
FSF ID
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-107

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.9 Global Layered Weather Component Control

Global Layered Weather Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 9
Component Id 4 Rain Intensity Control
5 Snow Intensity Control
8 Sand Intensity Control
10 Wind Effects Control
0x3001 Storm Effects Control

5.3.4.9.1 Rain Intensity Control

Rain Intensity Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 9
Component Id 4
Intensity 0.0 to 1.0 Intensity will be percentage of max level

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 4
Not Used Reserved A=9 Not Used
Intenity ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-108 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.9.2 Snow Intensity Control

Snow Intensity Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 9
Component Id 5
Intensity 0.0 to 1.0 Intensity will be percentage of max
level

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 5
Not Used Reserved A=9 Not Used
Intensity ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

5.3.4.9.3 Sand Intensity Control

Sand Intensity Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 9
Component Id 8
Intensity 0.0 to 1.0 Intensity will be percentage of max level

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 8
Not Used Reserved A=9 Not Used

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Intensity ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-109

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.9.4 Wind Effects Control

Wind Effects Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 9
Component Id 10
Instance ID Layer ID 0 ….. 15
Wind Flags Bit
0 ….. enable / disable wind
Altitude Altitude at which effects begin, and will
continue up to the next enabled layers
altitude ( Layers must be monotonically
increasing)
meters
Heading Direction of Wind 0 …. 359
Speed Wind speed in knots

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 10
Instance ID Reserved A=9 Wind Flags
Altitude ( 32 bit packed float )
Heading ( 32 bit packed float )
Speed ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 4 = 0
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-110 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.9.5 Storm Effects Control

Storm Effects EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 9
Component Id 0x3001
Lightning Severity 0–5
0 disabled, 1 = slight To 5 = severe
Specifies the lightning level.
If lightning effects (without forks) are required without
a storm, then L_LEVEL should be set between 1 and 5
with S_LEVEL set to 0. In order to provide correlation
with radio static, the host should toggle L_Level
intensity between 0 and 1 through 5 in subsequent
frames each time a lightning effect is required.
Defocus Severity 0–5
0 disabled, 1 = slight To 5 = severe
Specifies the rain defocus level.
If rain effects (without rain shafts) are required without
a storm, then D_LEVEL should be set between 1 and 5
with S_LEVEL set to 0.
Storm Severity 0–5
0 disabled, 1 = slight To 5 = severe
Specifies the storm level.
When set to 0, both rain and lightning may still be
selected independently, but no associated storm-cell

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

models will be loaded.
Rain Severity 0–5
0 disabled, 1 = slight To 5 = severe
If particle rain effects are required without a storm,
then P_LEVEL should be set between 1 and 5 with
S_LEVEL set to 0.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3001
Not Used Reserved A=9 Not Used
Lightning Severity Defocus Severity Storm Severity Rain Severity
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-111

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.10 Atmosphere Component Control

Atmosphere Component Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 10
Component Id 0x3005 Haze Correction
Control
0x302A Fog Color Control

5.3.4.10.1 Haze Correction Control (EP2 Incomplete)

NOTE: This opcode will not return an error; however, there is no
underlying functionality.

Haze Correction EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 10
Component Id 0x3005
Haze Flags Bit
0 Enables or disables haze correction.
1 Visibility Range value valid
Haze Top Specifies the altitude of the top of the
haze layer measured from mean sea
level.
Visibility Range The visibility range, at the atmospheric
ceiling when haze correction is enabled.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3005
Not Used Reserved A=10 Haze Flags
Haze Top ( 32 bit packed float )
Visibility Range ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class

5-112 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.10.2 Fog Color Control

Fog Color Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 10
Component Id 0x302A
Red Scale Factor Specifies the RED scale factor for the fog
color. 0 allows no red, and 1023 allows
the full value of the red component.
Green Scale Factor Specifies the GREEN scale factor for the
fog color. 0 allows no green, and 1023
allows the full value of the green
component.
Blue Scale Factor Specifies the BLUE scale factor for the
fog color. 0 allows no blue, and 1023
allows the full value of the blue
component.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x302A
Not Used Reserved A=10 Not Used
Green Scale Factor Red Scale Factor
Blue Scale Factor
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-113

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.11 Celestial Sphere Component Control

Celestial Sphere Component Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 11
Component Id 0x3006 Time Of Day Control
0x3007 Horizon Control
0x3009 Ambient Control
0x3010 Celestial Position
Request
0x3025 Time Of Year Control
0x30BD Sun & Moon Position
Request

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-114 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.11.1 Time of Day

Time Of Day Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 11
Component Id 0x3006
Scene ID 0–3
0 = dawn
1 = day
2 = dusk
3 = night
Mode 0–2
0 = scene
1 = static
2 = continuous
C 0–1
Enables or disables the current time function for static-time
and continuous-time modes.
R 0–1
Enables or disables the sunrise time function for static-time
and continuous-time modes.
S 0–1
Enables or disables the sunset time function for static-time
and continuous-time modes.
Current Hour:Min:Sec Hour: 0..23, Min 0..59, Sec0..59
Specifies the current time
Sunrise Hour:Min:Sec Hour: 0..23, Min 0..59, Sec0..59
Specifies the sunrise time
Sunset Hour:Min:Sec Hour: 0..23, Min 0..59, Sec0..59
Specifies the sunset time
Sunrise Azimuth Specifies the azimuth angle of the sun at sunrise when
static time or continuous time mode is selected.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Sunset Azimuth Specifies the azimuth angle of the sun at sunset when static
time or continuous time mode is selected.
Maximum Elevation Specifies the maximum sun elevation angle when static
time or continuous time mode is selected.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 3006
Scene ID Reserved A=11 Mode
Current Sec Current Min Current Hour Unused C
Sunrise Sec Sunrise Min Sunrise Hour Unused R
Sunrise Azimuth ( 32 bit packed float )
Sunset Sec Sunset Min Sunset Hour Unused S
Sunset Azimuth ( 32 bit packed float )
Maximum Elevation ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-115

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.11.2 Horizon Control

Horizon Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 11
Component Id 0x3007
Horizon Enable Enables or disables directional horizon
Horizon Intensity Specifies horizon intensity values of 0 – 5. (0 = off, 5
= bright)
Heading Defines heading of the directional horizon.
NOTE: If the TOD autocalc feature is enabled (See
CLI command TOD for more details) this
heading will be ignored and the horizon
heading will be determined by an ephemeris
function.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3007
Horizon Intensity Reserved A=11 Horizon Enable
Heading ( 32 bit packed float )
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-116 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.11.3 Ambient Control

Ambient Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 11
Component Id 0x3009
Component State Flags (bit 0 = process Moon Intensity)
Ambient Scalar Fine-tunes the ambient level of the
(Component Data 1) current time-of-day scene illumination
Moon Intensity Scalar (0..1) Set a scale factor for the diffuse
(Component Data 2) effect of the moon. This is applied to
the current Time-of-day.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3009
Not Used Reserved A=11 Flags
Ambient Scalar ( 32-bit float )
Moon Intensity Scalar (32-bit float)
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-117

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.11.4 Celestial Position Request

This opcode is for the host to request the position of the sun or the
moon’s azimuth and elevation. The host should expect one response
from the IG per request. The IG will return a User Defined Celestial
Position Response [206]
Celestial Position EP2 Functionality
Request
Packet ID 5 – Short Component Control
Packet Size 16
Component ID 0x3010
Component Class 11 – Celestial Sphere Class
Body Specifies which position to return
0 – Moon
1 - Sun

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3010
Not Used Reserved Class=11 Body
Not Used
Not Used

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-118 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.11.5 Time Of Year Control

Time Of Year Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 11
Component Id 0x3025
Scene Index Time of year Index
0 = Summer
1 = Winter
2 = Spring (Reserved)
3 = Autumn (Reserved)
4 – 15 = Reserved
R Specifies whether RESETFILE NAME is
valid. This field is only valid for legacy EP2
style databases.
RESETFILE NAME 16 Character ASCII string
Specifies which reset file to load. The ASCII
string must end with 0 (null) so that the
RTS can detect the end of the string. A file
extension of .rst is assumed.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3025
Scene Index Reserved A=11 R
RESETFILE NAME
RESETFILE NAME
RESETFILE NAME

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

RESETFILE NAME
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-119

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.11.6 Sun & Moon Position Request

This Opcode is for the host to request the sun and moon’s azimuth and
elevation. The host should expect one response from the IG per request.

Sun & Moon Position Request EP2 Functionality

Packet ID 4 – Component Control
Packet Size 32
Component Class 11 – Celestial Sphere Class
Component Id 0x30BD

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x30BD

Unused Unused A=11 Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-120 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12 System Component Control

System Component Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 13
Component Id 0x0000 SEOS Projector Operational State Control
0x0001 SEOS Projector Time Of Day Control
0x0002 Rotor Wash Ramp Control
0x0003 Environment Tuning File Control
0x0004 SEOS Display Radius Control
0x3020 Ownship Lights Control
0x3021 Ownship Strobe Control
0x3022 Ownship Beacon Control
0x3026 Color Control
0x3036 Laser Range Finder Switch Control
0x3037 Laser Range Finder Cursor Control
0x3038 Laser Range Finder Cursor Switch Control
0x303C Laser Range Finder Single Response Request
Control
0x3050 ASCII Control
0x307B Script File Index Control
0x3060 Illumination 1
0x3061 Illumination 2
0x3062 Illumination 3
0x3063 IG Information and Event Control
0x320A Sensor System Range Focus

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-121

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.1 SEOS Projector Operational State Control

SEOS Projector EP2 Functionality
Operational State Control
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x0000
Component State The projector state to set:
0 = Unknown
1 = Off
2 = Stand by
3 = Ready
4 = Operate
5 = Playback
6 = Maintenance
A Component Class
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0
Not Used Reserved A=13 Component State
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class
NOTE: The operational state applies to all projectors in the display
system; it cannot be directed to individual projectors.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-122 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.2 SEOS Projector Time of Day Control

SEOS Projector Time Of EP2 Functionality
Day Control
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x0001
Component State The Projector time of day state to set:
0 = Unknown
1 = Dawn
2 = Day
3 = Dusk
4 = Night

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 1
Not Used Reserved A=13 Component State
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class
The Time of Day value controls the gamma table loaded by the SEOS projector.
Valid integer values equate to modes defined by SEOS.
NOTE: The time of day state applies to all projectors in the display
system; it cannot be directed to individual projectors.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-123

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.3 Rotor Wash Ramp Control

Rotor Wash Ramp Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x0002
Wash Number Rotor Wash Number (0 .. 127)
Wash Enable Enable / Disable Effect 0 = disable, 1 = enable
Fade Ramp Direct control of the transparency of the rotor
wash effect. Typically used in the spin-up and
spin-down effect.
0.0=completely faded out.
1.0=completely faded in.
Height Ramp Direct control of the gravity of the rotor wash
effect. Typically used in the spin-up effect.
0.0=effect uses computed gravity scaled to
start value.
1.0=effect uses computed gravity not scaled.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x0002
Wash Number Reserved A=13 Wash Enable
Fade Ramp ( 32 bit packed float )
Height Ramp ( 32 bit packed float )

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-124 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.4 Environmental Tuning File Control

Environment Tuning Files (.et) files are automatically executed by the
real-time in response to changes in time of day (TOD) and cloud
conditions. The mechanism is needed since the host may not be aware
of the exact time the IG transitions from dusk to night etc. when the IG
is operating in continuous time of day mode. The .et files contain CLI
commands that the host needs to have executed on its behalf as the IG
makes the environmental transitions.
The intent of this CIGI 3 short component control packet is to provide a
host with a mechanism to command the IG to execute the .et file for the
current IG conditions.
Environmental Tuning File EP2 Functionality
Control
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x0003
Instance ID 0 - unused
Component state 1 – execute current .et file
Component data 1 0 - unused
Component data 2 0 - unused
Component state value of 1 is the only state value currently defined.
All reserved and unused fields must be zero (0).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x0003
Instance ID = 0, unused Reserved Class = 13 Component State
Component Data 1 = 0, unused

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Component Data 2 = 0, unused

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-125

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.5 SEOS Display Radius Control

This CIGI 3.2 short component control is unique to EP systems
configured with SEOS display projectors and utilizing the SEOS optimizer
DLL for distortion correction. This packet allows a CIGI 3.2 host to set a
display radius to be applied to one or more of the 32 possible visual
channels by setting the corresponding bit in the channel mask. Bits 0 –
31 affect each of channels 0 – 31 respectively.
SEOS Display Radius EP2 Functionality
Control
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x0004
Component state 0
Component data 1 Display Radius – 32-bit float
Component data 2 Channel Mask – 32- bit unsigned long bits set
will affect corresponding configured visual
channels.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x0004
not used Reserved A = 13 Component State =0
Display Radius
Channel Mask
A = component class, 13 = system class.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-126 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.6 Ownship Lights Control

Ownship Lights Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x3020
Lobe Select Mask A bit mask that specifies the active landing-light
lobes.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3020
Lobe Select Mask Reserved A=13 Not Used
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-127

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.7 Ownship Strobe Control

Ownship Strobe Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x3021
G Enable/disable control of the Global Light from
glare (0-disable / 1-enable)
E Strobe Enable
Intensity Index Index for the glare intensity. (0-255)
Pattern Index Index for the glare pattern (0-255)
Global Light Identifier for the Global Light that will be
controlled by the glare. (0-1023)
Global Light Intensity Intensity value for the global light. (0.0 – 1.0)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID =0x3021
Not Used Reserved A=13 Not Used G E
Global Light Intensity Index Pattern Index
Global Light Intensity
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-128 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.8 Ownship Beacon Control

Ownship Beacon Control EP2 Functionality
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x3022
E Beacon Enable

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3022
Not Used Reserved A=13 Not Used E
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-129

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.9 Color Control

The color control opcode provides the host with the ability to change
the RGB values of a color table entry.

Color Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 13 (system)
Component Id 0x3026
Color Table Entry Number Color table entry to be changed
Red Red value (0-255)
Green Green Value (0-255)
Blue Blue Value (0-255)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 12326
Reserved Reserved *1 Reserved
Color Table Entry Number
Red Green Blue Reserved
*1 Component Class = 13 System

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-130 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.10 Laser Range Finder Switch Control

Laser Range Finder Switch Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 13
Component Id 0x3036
E Enables or disables the laser rangefinder
function.
R Requests a Laser-Range-Finder response
packet
0 Regular 0x3082 Regular Response
1 Enhanced 0x3087 Enhanced Response
2 Extended User Def 204 Extended
Response
LRF Regular / Enhanced Response
Packet s are sent back to the Host via
the EP User Defined Packet 202.
Extended User Data Additional data can be entered here to
enable the host to manage the response
data more easily. For use with User
Defined 204 Extended Response type
only.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID =0x3036
Not Used Reserved A=13 Not Used R E
Extended User Data
Component Data 2 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-131

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.11 Laser Range Finder Cursor Control

Laser Range Finder Cursor Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 13
Component Id 0x3037
Model This field is deprecated.
D Enables or disables the database image.
This field is deprecated.
C Enables or disables the visible lightpoint
cursor.
Viewport Specifies the viewport in which to place
the cursor.
Cursor Specifies which cursor is being defined.
Heading Specifies the heading of the cursor.
Pitch Specifies the pitch of the cursor.
Roll This field is deprecated.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID =0x3037
Model (deprecated) Reserved A=13 Not Used C D
Viewport Cursor
Heading ( 32 bit packed float )
Pitch ( 32 bit packed float )
Roll (deprecated)
Component Data 5 = 0
Component Data 6 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-132 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.12 Laser Range Finder Cursor Switch Control

Laser Range Finder Cursor Switch EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x3038
E Enables or disables an individual
laser range-finder cursor.
Cursor Selects which cursor is enabled or
disabled.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3038
Cursor Reserved A=13 Not Used E
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

5.3.4.12.13 Laser Range Finder Single Response Request

Control

Laser Range Finder Single EP2 Functionality

Response Request Control
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x303C
Cursor Cursor for which laser range-

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

finder result is to be returned.
Tag Tag to be returned to host in
response

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x303C
Tag Reserved A=13
Cursor
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-133

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.14 Ownship Steerable Lights Control

Ownship Steerable Lights EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x3028
Lobe Select Mask A bit mask that specifies which landing
light lobe the heading and pitch apply to.
This select does not enable or disable the
lobes.
NOTE: Each Lobe is made steerable via
the CLI LOBE \DEFINE command.
(See CLI LOBE command for
more details)

Heading Specifies the heading of a steerable light

emanating from the ownship
Pitch Specifies the pitch of a steerable light
emanating from the ownship.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3028
Lobe Select Mask Reserved A=13 Not Used
Heading ( 32 bit packed float )
Pitch ( 32 bit packed float )
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-134 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.15 ASCII Control

ASCII Control EP2 Functionality

Component Class 13
Component Id 0x3050
CHAR[N] Valid ASCII character Specifies a character in a CLI
command.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3050
Not Used Reserved A=13 Not Used
CHAR [1] CHAR [2] CHAR [3] CHAR [4]
CHAR [5] CHAR [6] CHAR [7] CHAR [8]
CHAR [9] CHAR [10] CHAR [11] CHAR [12]
CHAR [13] CHAR [14] CHAR [15] CHAR [16]
CHAR [17] CHAR [18] CHAR [19] CHAR [20]
CHAR [21] CHAR [22] CHAR [23] CHAR [24]
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-135

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.16 Script File Index Control

Script File Index EP2 Functionality

Control
Component Class 13
Component Id 0x307B
Index Index of script files to run.
Ranges 0–199 are for paths and file specified
in PATH 19 and FILE 19 respectively.
Ranges 200–999 are for paths and files
specified in PATH 20 and FILE 20
respectively.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x307B
Index Reserved A=13 Not Used
Component Data 1 = 0
Component Data 2 = 0
A Component Class

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-136 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.17 Illumination 1

System Control–Illumination–1 EP2 Functionality

Component Class 13
Component ID 0x3060
Moving Model ID Moving model to which the light source is to
be chained.
Illumination # Illumination light source number (0-11)
Intensity Scalar Intensity of the light (0.0 - 1.0)
Half Angle The light beam half angle in degrees. A
beam width of zero indicates an omni-
directional light source.
Heading The heading of the light source relative to
the selected moving model, in degrees.
Pitch The pitch of the light source relative to the
selected moving model, in degrees.
Range Range in feet of a light source that uses the
given curve.
Band Index An integer to indicate which emband the
INTENSITY field above applies. The default
is 5-Visual
Band Mask A binary bit mask that indicates which
embands are to display the given light
source Each bit in the mask corresponds to
an emband (0=NVG, 1=EVS, 2=MWIR,
3=LWIR, 4=EO,5=Visual), and can be 0 or
1.
Curve # ID of the attenuation curve to be used for
the light.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Illumination #1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID (=0x3060)
Moving Model ID Reserved *1 Illum #
Intensity Scalar (32 bit packed float)
Half Angle (32 bit packed float)
Heading (32 bit packed float)
Pitch (32 bit packed float)
Range
Band Index Band Mask Curve # Reserved 3 2
*1 Component Class = System.
*2 Enable
*3 Enable SNVG
0 - Disable Light Source, 1 - Enable Light Source

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-137

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.18 Illumination 2

System Control - EP2 Functionality

Illumination - 2
Component Class 13
Component ID 0x3061
Moving Model ID Moving model to which the light source is to be
chained.
Illumination # Illumination light source number (0-11)
X Offset The X offset of the light source relative to the selected
moving model
Y Offset The Y offset of the light source relative to the selected
moving model
Z Offset The Zoffset of the light source relative to the selected
moving model
Red The red component of the light color (0.0 - 1.0)
Green The green component of the light color (0.0 - 1.0)
Blue The blue component of the light color (0.0 - 1.0)

Illumination #2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3061
Moving Model ID Reserved *1 Illum #
X Offset (32 bit packed float)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Y Offset (32 bit packed float)
Z Offset (32 bit packed float)
Red (32 bit packed float)
Green (32 bit packed float)
Blue (32 bit packed float)
*1 Component Class = System.

5-138 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.19 Illumination 3

System Control - EP2 Functionality

Illumination - 3
Component Class 13
Component ID 0x3062
Moving Model ID Moving model to which the light source is to be chained.
Illumination # Illumination light source number (0-11)
Feather Defines how hard or soft of an edge the light has (0.0 -
1.0. A value of 0.0 gives the light hard edge
Channel Mask A binary bit masks indicating which viewport channels are
to display the given light source. Each bit in the mask
corresponds to a viewport, and can be a 0 or 1. The
default is for all lights to be displayed in all viewports

Illumination #3

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x3062
Moving Model ID Reserved *1 Illum #
Feather (32 bit packed float)
Channel Mask
Component Data 3 = 0
Component Data 4 = 0
Component Data 5 = 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Component Data 6 = 0
*1 Component Class = System.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-139

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.20 IG Information and Events

The intent of this CIGI 3 short component control packet with class type
system (13) is implemented to provide a CIGI 3 host with a mechanism
to command the IG to send a CIGI 3 Event Notification packet (ID 116)
with IG specific information. For the EP IG this component control may
be used to enable or disable the generation of defined and supported
event notification packets with IG information. All of the event
notification packets enabled with this component control will be
generated every IG field. The event notification packet generation will
remain enabled until the host explicitly disables the feature via this
same short component control.

IG Information and EP2 Functionality

Events
Component Class 13
Component ID 0x3063
Instance ID 0 - unused
Component State see table below
Component data 1 0 – unused
Component data 2 0 - unused

Component State Values

0 Disable paging complete notify
1 Enable paging complete notify
2 Disable RT process times reporting

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

3 Enable RT process times reporting
4 Disable GP memory usage reporting
5 Enable GP memory usage reporting
6 - 255 Reserved for future use
All reserved and unused fields must be zero (0).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 5 Packet Size = 16 Component ID = 0x3063
Instance ID = 0, unused Reserved Class = 13 Component State
Component Data 1 = 0, unused
Component Data 2 = 0, unused

5-140 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.21 IG Information and Events Response

The EP IG currently generates 3 different CIGI 3 event notification
packets, for each of IDs 1, 2, and 3. The table below defines the IDs
and additional information defines the usage of event data 1, 2, and 3 in
the generated packets.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 116 Packet Size = 16 Event ID = see table
Event Data 1
Event Data 2
Event Data 3

Event ID
0 Not used
1 Report paging status
2 Report RT process times
3 Report SP process times
4 - 65535 Reserved for future use

Paging Status Packet with Event ID 1

Event Data 1 paging status, where bits set (1) indicate done state
Bit 0 model layer
Bit 1 terrain layer (native database)
Bit 2 CT layer (native database)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Bit 3 Tile Pager layer (legacy terrain tiled database only
Bit 4 Vector Feature Layer (native database)
Bit 5 Sensor Texture Paging
Event Data 2 not used
Event Data 3 not used

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-141

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

RT Process Time Packet with Event ID 2

Event Data 1 RT field time (floating point)

Event Data 2 SP time (floating point)
Event Data 3 RT FG critical time (floating point)

The SP time is the time for all SPs to complete the processing field.
SP Memory Usage Packet with Event ID 3

Event Data 1 SP physical memory (integer)

Event Data 2 SP virtual memory (integer)
Event Data 3 SP OGL frame buffer integer

The SP memory usage packet reports a minimum value for all SPs in the
IG for each of the three data values supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-142 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.4.12.22 Sensor System Range Focus

Sensor System EP2 Functionality

Range Focus
Component ID 0x320A
Class (A) System (13)
Mode 0 = off
1 = linear
2 = hybrid
3 = on
Lens Scalar Range (0.0 - 01.0)
A composite user tunable number representing the
combined effects of the lens aperture and focal length.
This will control the depth of field about the selected focus
distance
Focus Distance Range (0.0 – 1.0)
A host controlled number representing the current focus
distance setting commanded by the operator. A low
number focus near to the eyepoint. 1.0 assumes a focus
distance of infinity.
Viewport (0 – 63)
Specifies the viewport that is being controlled.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 4 Packet Size = 32 Component ID = 0x320A
Unused Reserved A = 13 Mode
Lens Scalar
LENS SCALAR – (64 bit double)
FOCUS DISTANCE
FOCUS DISTANCE – (64 bit double)
Viewport (32-bit Unsigned Integer)
Component Data 6 = 0

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-143

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.5 Articulated Parts Control [6]

Packet Id = 6 EP2 Functionality
Entity Id Motion System
Articulated Part Id Sub Model
0xF3

0xF1 (Weapon Aiming - Primary) –

EP2 Incomplete: this will not return
an error; however, there is no
underlying functionality.

0xF2 (Weapon Aiming - Secondary)

EP2 Incomplete: this will not return
an error; however, there is no
underlying functionality.
Articulated Part Enable Sub Model Select Enable
If flag is enabled then the EP2 will
set the Select to 1, if disabled then
the Select will be set to 0. ( see
Status 1, below)
X / Y / Z Enable Implemented
Roll / Pitch / Yaw Enabled Implemented
X / Y / Z Offset Position Implemented
Roll / Pitch / Yaw Position Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-144 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

STATUS
• There is not a Select variable for the SubModel, so the software uses
a default of select=1, and any sub model that does not use select of
1, will not come on.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 6 Packet Size = 32 Entity ID
Articulated Part ID *8 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 Reserved
X Offset
Y Offset
Z Offset
Roll
Pitch
Yaw
*1
Articulated Part Enable
*2
X Offset Enable
*3
Y Offset Enable
*4
Z Offset Enable
*5
Roll Enable
*6
Pitch Enable
*7
Yaw Enable
*8
Reserved

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-145

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.5.1 Articulated Parts Short Control [7]

Packet Id = 7 EP2 Functionality

Entity Id Motion System
Articulated Part Id 1 Part 1 Sub Model
Articulated Part Id 2 Part 2 Sub Model
DOF Select 1 DOF Axis to which the DOF 1 Var is
applied.
DOF Select 2 DOF Axis to which the DOF 2 Var is
applied.
Articulated Part Enable 1 Part 1 Sub Model Select Enable
If flag is enabled then EP2 will set the
Select to 1, if disabled then the Select
will be set to 0.
( see Status 1, below)
Articulated Part Enable 1 Part 2 Sub Model Select Enable
If flag is enabled then EP2 will set the
Select to 1, if disabled then the Select
will be set to 0.
( see Status 1, below)
DOF 1 Axis value for Part 1 SubModel
DOF 2 Axis value for Part 2 SubModel

STATUS

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

• Same as Opc 6, no Select for the Sub Models. The DOF Select
variables, within this packet, are used to indicate which AXIS is being
controlled (CIGI 3 ICD page 64) and have nothing to do with EP2
Sub Model selects.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 7 Packet Size = 16 Entity ID
Articulated Part ID Articulated Part ID 2 *4 *3 *2 *1 Reserved
DOF 1
DOF 2
*1
DOF Select 1
*2
DOF Select 2
*3
Articulated Part Enable 1
*4
Articulated Part Enable 2

5-146 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.6 Rate Control [ 8 ] (3.0 Implementation)

Packet Id = 8 EP2 Functionality

Entity Id Motion System
Articulated Part Id Sub Model
0xF4
X / Y / Z Linear Rate Implemented
Roll / Pitch / Yaw Angular Rate Implemented

5.3.6.1 Rate Control [ 8 ] (3.2 Implementation)

Packet Id = 8 EP2 Functionality
Entity Id Motion System
Articulated Part Id Sub Model
Coordinate System 0 ….. World/Parent
1 ….. Local
X / Y / Z Linear Rate Implemented
Roll / Pitch / Yaw Angular Rate Implemented

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 8 Packet Size = 32 Entity ID
Articulated Part ID Reserved *2 *1 Reserved
X Linear Rate
Y Linear Rate

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Z Linear Rate
Roll Angular Rate
Pitch Angular Rate
Yaw Angular Rate
*1
Apply to Articulated Part
*2
Coordinate System

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-147

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.7 Celestial Sphere Control [ 9 ]

Packet Id = 9 EP2 Functionality
Hour, Minute TOD Time
Date TOD Date
Ephemeris Model Enable Static / Continuous Time Of Day
Sun / Moon Enable Enable Sun / Moon for display
Star Field Enable Enabled :
Set Global Light Group 47 to Intensity
Disabled :
Set Global Light Group 47 to Intensity=0
Star Field Intensity Scalar Intensity for Global Light 47

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 9 Packet Size = 16 Hour Minute
Reserved *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 Reserved
Date
Star Field Intensity
*1
Ephemeris Model Enable
*2
Sun Enable
*3
Moon Enable
*4
Start Field Enable
*5
Date/Time Valid

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-148 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.8 Atmosphere Control [ 10 ]

Packet Id = 10 EP2 Functionality
Atmospheric Model Enable Thermal Sensor Effect
Humidity Global Thermal Sensor Humidity
(as percentage of 100)
Air Temperature Global Thermal Sensor Ambient
Temperature
Visibility Implemented Environment Effect
Horizontal Wind Speed Implemented Environment Effect
Vertical Wind Speed Implementation Incomplete (No
underlying EP2 support)
Wind Direction Implemented Environment Effect
Barometric Pressure Implementation Incomplete (No
underlying EP2 support)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 10 Packet Size = 32 Reserved *1 Global Humidity
Global Air Temperature
Global Visibility Range
Global Horizontal Wind Speed
Global Vertical Wind Speed
Global Wind Direction
Global Barometric Pressure
Reserved

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

STATUS
• Vertical Wind Speed, implementation incomplete (No underlying EP2
support)
• Barometric Pressure, implementation incomplete (No underlying EP2
support)
• Currently, wind direction / speed only effect wind layer 0
• Humidity, implementation incomplete (No underlying EP2 support)
• Air Temperature, implementation incomplete (No underlying EP2
support)

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-149

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.9 Environmental Region Control [ 11 ]

Packet Id = 11 EP2 Functionality
Region ID Environmental Region
Region State State of Region
0 Inactive
1 Active
2 Destroyed
Merge Weather Properties Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP2
support)
Merge Aerosol Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP2
Concentrations support)
Merge Maritime Surface Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP2
Conditions support)2
Merge Terrestrial Surface Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP2
Conditions support)
Latitude / Longitude Origin of Environmental Region
Size X / Size Y The larger of the size X, size Y variables will be the
diameter used to create the radius of the region.
The smaller divided by the larger variable make up
the EP2 specific X scale parameter.
Corner Radius Not used
Rotation Yaw Angle of the Region
Transition Parameter Width of Transition parameter around the region

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Base Altitude Base Altitude of the Region

NOTE: The spatial position of a weather region starts at the center point, latitude
/ longitude / altitude for geodetic systems or X / Y / Z for Cartesian
systems. The altitude or Z of the center point is important if a weather
proxy is being displayed. It determines where the bottom of the vertical
sides of the weather proxy will be drawn.
• The EP2 CIGI Interface makes use of the reserved word in the last part of
the Environment Region Control Packet for the regions base altitude. The
CIGI Standard can still be maintained by not making use of this option, in
which case the base altitude will always be zero.

The horizontal size of the weather region starts from the center point and
extends to the radius. If the X scale is 1.0, then the weather region is
circular and the heading has no effect. If the X scale is not 1.0 then the

5-150 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

weather region is scaled down from the radius in the X direction (east
/west) and then the heading is applied clockwise when looking from above
the weather region. The weather region becomes a thinner and thinner
oval as the X scale is reduced. The heading goes from -180 to 180
degrees and the X scale minimum is .1 or 10 percent.
• The EP2 CIGI Interface will use the size X & size Y variables, within the
Environmental Region Control Packet, to create the region areas, and the
Lat / Lon variables will make up the origin. The larger of the size X, size Y
variables will be the diameter used to create the radius. The smaller
divided by the larger variable make up the X scale parameter.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 11 Packet Size = 48 Region ID
F ED C B A Reserved
Latitude
Latitude (cont)
Longitude
Longitude (cont)
Size X
Size Y
Corner Radius
Rotation
Transition Parameter
Base Altitude
A Region State
B Merge Weather Properties
C Merge Aerosol Concentration
D Merge Maritime Surface Conditions
E Merge Terrestrial Surface Conditions

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

F Reserved

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-151

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.10 Weather Control [12]

WARNING: Clouds that are thicker than 15,000 feet may cause an
anomalous visibility / RVR below the cloud.

Weather Control—Packet Id=12 EP2 Functionality

Scope 0 Global Weather Layer
1 Regional Weather Layer
2 Weather Entity
Entity Id ( Weather Entity ) ( If Scope is set to 2 )
1 Global Runway Contamination ( Status 2 below )
( Severity setting )
0 Dry
1 Wet
2 Patchy Wet
3 Ice
4 Patchy Ice
5 Snow
6 Patchy Snow
7 Patchy Cleared Snow
2 Sky Texture ( Status 3 below )
(Severity setting )
0 Sky hazy
1 Sky blue
2 Sky wispy
3 Sky cotton
3 – 9 Regional Runway Contamination (region
Id=EntityId–2)
( Severity setting )
0 Dry

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

1 Wet
2 Patchy Wet
3 Ice
4 Patchy Ice
5 Snow
6 Patchy Snow
7 Patchy Cleared Snow
Region Id ( Regional Weather ( If Scope is set to 1 )
Layer ) The region to which the conditions should be applied

5-152 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Weather Control—Packet Id=12 EP2 Functionality

Layer Id ( Global Weather Layer ) ( If Scope is set to 0 )
0 Ground Fog
1 Cloud Layer 1
2 Cloud Layer 2
3 Cloud Layer
4 Rain
5 Snow
6 Sleet (Implementation Incomplete)
(No underlying EP support)
7 Hail (Implementation Incomplete)
(No underlying EP support)
8 Sand
9 Dust (Implementation Incomplete)
(No underlying EP support)
10 Broken Clouds ( Ig Defined )
Scud Enable For Layer ID = 0 ( Ground Fog )
Enable Patchy Fog ( Coverage = patchy select )
For Layer ID = 1 or 2 ( Cloud Layer 1 or 2 )
Apply Transition Band to Top / Bottom of Cloud Layer
Random Winds Enable Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP sup)
Random Lightning Enable Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP sup)
Cloud Type 0 – Procedural
1 – Altocumulus
2 – Altostratus
3 – Cirrocumulus
4 – Cirrostratus
5 – Cirrus (Not Implemented)
6 – Cumulonimbus (Not Implemented)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 – Pseudo Cumulus
8 – Nimbostratus (Not Implemented)
9 – Stratocumulus
10 – Stratus
Humidity Thermal Sensor Humidity (No underlying EP support)
Air Temperature Thermal Sensor Ambient Temperature
(No underlying EP support)
Visibility Range In layer visibility. Minimum value 0.3048 m (1 foot)
Scud Frequency Frequency of scud, as a percentage of 100. (No
underlying EP support)
Coverage Layer coverage, as a percentage of 100.
Base Elevation Altitude of the bottom of the cloud layer. The base
elevation of the cloud layer does not include the
transition band.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-153

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Weather Control—Packet Id=12 EP2 Functionality

Thickness Ground Fog, Cloud Layers, minimum value 1.524 m
(5 feet)
Transition Band Ground Fog, Cloud Layers, minimum value 1.524
meters (5 feet)
Horizontal Wind Speed Wind Velocity
Vertical Wind Speed Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP
support)
Wind Direction Wind Direction
Barometric Pressure Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP
support)
Aerosol Concentration Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP
support)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 12 Packet Size = 56 Entity ID / Region ID
Layer ID Humidity 5 4 3 2 1 Reserved 7 6
Air Temperature
Visibility Range
Scud Frequency
Coverage
Base Elevation
Thickness
Transition Band
Horizontal Wind Speed
Vertical Wind Speed

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Wind Direction
Barometric Pressure
Aerosol Concentration

1 Weather Enable
2 Scud Enable
3 Random Winds Enable
4 Random Lightning Enable
5 Cloud Type
6 Scope
7 Severity

STATUS

5-154 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

• Entity Id ( 1 ), Runway Contamination will be Airport Model

dependent, so that the Airport model needs to be modeled with the
selected conditions.
• Entity Id ( 2 ), Sky Texture selected via CLI SKY command.
• Coverage is supported for clouds and ground fog.
• Cloud Layer 3 will be treated as Broken Clouds if the ‘clouds
cigiLayerThreeBrokenClouds=on” flag is set via CLI.
• If the cloud layer OGL render mode is TEXTURED, Cloud Layer 3 is
not supported unless the ‘cigiLayerThreeBrokenClouds’ has been set
to ON. If the cloud layer OGL render mode is PROCEDURAL, Cloud
Layer 3 is supported.
• Layer Id ( 4 ), Rain is used to set the Horizontal Wind Speed and the
Wind Direction.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-155

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.11 Terrestrial Surface Conditions Control [15]

Packet Id = 15 EP2 Functionality
Entity/Region ID 0 to 19

This parameter specifies the region to

which surface conditions are confined.
Region 0 is the global region.
Environmental entities are not
supported in EP2.

Surface Conditions ID 0 to 9
This parameter identifies a surface
condition or contaminant. Currently
only runway contaminants are
supported by EP2.
When this parameter is set to Dry (0),
all existing surface conditions will be
removed within the specified region.
The runway contaminants are defined
as follows:
1 – dry
2 – wet
3 – patchy wet
4 – icy
5 – patchy ice
6 – snow
7 – patchy snow
8 – partially cleared snow

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

9 – sand
Surface Conditions Enable Conditions entered in the Surface
Conditions ID parameter will only be
applied if this bit is set.
Scope This parameter is ignored in EP2
Severity This parameter is ignored in EP2
Coverage This parameter is ignored in EP2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 15 Packet Size = 8 Entity ID/Region ID
Surface condition ID Severity 2 1 Coverage
1 Surface Condition Enable
2 Scope

5-156 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.12 View Control [ 16 ]

Packet Id = 16 EP2 Functionality
Group ID 0 to 7 (EP2 supports group ID from 0-7 only).
Group to which this packets should be applied.
If non-zero then View Id is ignored and packet
will be applied to all Views (Channels) that
belong to this Group.
If zero then this variable is ignored and View Id
will be used.
View ID 0 to 32
Channel to which packet should be applied.
Ignored if Group Id is non-zero value
Entity Id Motion System to which Eye is attached
X / Y / Z Offset Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD.
Enable
Roll / Pitch / Yaw Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD.
Enable

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 16 Packet Size = 32 View ID
Wave ID *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 Entity ID
X Offset
Y Offset
Z Offset

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Roll
Pitch
Yaw

*1
X Offset Enable
*2
Y Offset Enable
*3
Z Offset Enable
*4
Roll Enable
*5
Pitch Enable
*6
Yaw Enable
*7
Reserved

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-157

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

STATUS
• The Eyepoint for each channel will be assigned when the Channel is
defined via the View Definition packet.
• The Eye Point, for each view, will default to the current settings, for
the channel, if the View Control is used without first applying the
View Definition.
• Entity Id will be applied to EP2 Eye point, which will be assigned to
the View when View is defined, via the View Definition packet.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-158 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.13 Sensor Control [ 17 ]

Packet Id = 17 EP2 Functionality
View Id Sensor Channel
Sensor Id Id used by Sensor Response Packet (No
underlying EP2 support)
Track Mode Implementation Incomplete
Sensor On / Off Post Processor Video Enable
Polarity 0 White Hot
1 Black Hot
Line-by-Line Dropout Enable Implementation Incomplete
(EP-supported, dead elements)
Automatic Gain Will automatically adjust Gain & Level
PP has the ability to adjust :
None
Gain & Level Used by this flag
Gain Only
Track White / Black Implementation Incomplete
(EP-supported)
Response Type Implementation Incomplete
(EP-supported)
Gain 0.0–1.0
Level 0.0–1.0
AC Coupling Not implemented (EP2-supported)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Noise 0.0–1.0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 17 Packet Size = 24 View ID
Sensor ID Trackmode *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 Reserved *6 Reserved
Gain
Level
AC Coupling
Noise
*1
Sensor On/Off
*2
Polarity
*3
Line-by-Line Dropout Enable
*4
Automatic Gain
*5
Track White/Black
*6
Response Type

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-159

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.14 View Definition [ 21 ]

Packet Id = 21 EP2 Functionality
Group Id 0 to 7 (EP2 supports group ID from 0-7 only).
Group to which View is to be assigned
If value is zero (0), then the view is not assigned
to a group, and will be removed from any group it
has previously been assigned to.
View Id 0 to 32
Channel to which packet will be applied
View Type 0 to 7
Channel Select
Near, Far Enable Change Clipping plane to incoming values
Left, Right, Top, Bottom Change FOV to incoming values
Enable
Mirror Mode Enable EP2 Mirror Mode, only one mode available
in EP. If 0 then disable. If non-zero then enable.
Pixel Replication Mode 0 = 1x
4, 5, and 6 are IG defined modes
4 = 2x
5 = 4x
6 = 8x

EP2 Incomplete: This will not return an error;

however, there is no underlying functionality.
Projection Type Implementation Incomplete: this will not return an
error; however, there is no underlying
functionality.
ReOrder Implementation Incomplete: this will not return an
error; however, there is no underlying

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

functionality.
Near / Far Channels Near / Far Clipping Plane
EP2 Incomplete: this will not return an error;
however, there is no underlying functionality.
Left / Right Left and Right combined values will create the
Horizontal
Field of View within EP2, the EP2 FOV Horizontal
Offset will center the channel between the two
values
Top / Bottom Top and Bottom combined values will create the
Vertical Field of View within EP2, the EP2 FOV
Vertical Offset will center the channel between the
two values

5-160 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 21 Packet Size = 32 View ID
Group ID *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 View Type*10 *9 *8 Reserved
Near
Far
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
*1
Near Enable
*2
Far Enable
*3
Left Enable
*4
Right Enable
*5
Top Enable
*6
Bottom Enable
*7
Mirror Mode
*8
Pixel Replication Mode
*9
Projection Type
*10
Reorder
STATUS
• The Eyepoint for each channel will be assigned when the Channel is
defined via this packet. The Eye Point, for each view, will default to
the current settings if the View Control is used without first applying
the View Definition.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-161

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.15 Collision Detection Segment Definition [22]

Packet Id = 22 EP2 Functionality
Entity ID Motion System
Segment ID Command / Segment Id combined
0x00000038 Command bits
0x00000007 Segment bits
8 Commands with 8 Segments each = 64 total
Material Mask The following flags can be combined for this field:
0x80000000 Include Vector Features Traversal
0x40000000 Enable Fast Jet Collision Detection for this TP
0x00010000 This is a Cloud Collision Detection TP type
0x00020000 CCD type response priority (high) every frame
0 – 255 Specifies the material mask index to use with this
command.
X1, Y1, Z1 Offset position of segment start
X2, Y2, Z2 Offset position of segment end

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 22 Packet Size = 40 Entity ID
Segment ID Reserved 3 2 1 Reserved
X1
Y1
Z1
X2
Y2

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Z2
Material Mask
Reserved
1 Segment Enable
2 Cmd Disable
3 ByPass MFE

5-162 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.16 Hat/Hot Request [ 24 ] (3.0 Implementation)

Packet Id = 24 EP2 Functionality
Hat / Hot ID Hat Test Point Number ( 0 to 31 )
Entity ID Motion System to which the x/y/z offset
refers
Not used if Coordinate System variable is
0
Request Type 0 HAT
1 HOT
2 Extended
Coordinate System 0 Geodetic – Incomplete in EP2 (no
underlying functionality)
1 Entity
Lat / Lon / Altitude Geodetic location for request
X / Y / Z Offset Entity offset location for request

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 24 Packet Size = 32 HAT/HOT ID
Reserved *2 *1 Reserved Entity ID
Latitude/X Offset

Longitude/Y Offset

Altitude/Z Offset

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

*1
Request Type
*2
Coordinate System

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-163

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.16.1 Hat/Hot Request [24] (3.2 Implementation)

Packet Id = 24 EP2 Functionality
Hat / Hot ID Hat Test Point Number ( 0 to 31 )
Entity ID Motion System to which the x/y/z offset refers
Not used if Coordinate System variable is 0
Request Type 0 HAT
1 HOT
2 Extended
Coordinate System 0 Geodetic -- Incomplete in EP2 (no underlying
functionality)
1 Entity
Update Period 0 One Shot Request
> 0 Continuous Response
This parameter specifies the interval between
successive responses to this request. A value of zero
(0) indicates that the IG should return a single
response. A value of n > 0 indicates that the IG should
return a response every nth frame.
ByPass MFE If bit is set to 1, the HAT test will bypass an MFE if one
is in the system, and instead be processed by a GP.
When bit is 0, the HAT test will be handled by an MFE
if there is one in the system, and otherwise by a GP.
Rotate TP Offset The rotate bit specifies if the x,y,z offset is model
relative (rotated with the model) or not.
Lat / Lon / Altitude Geodetic location for request
X / Y / Z Offset Entity offset location for request

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Packet ID = 24 Packet Size = 32 Hat / Hot ID
Reserve *4 *3 *2 *1 Update Period Entity ID
Latitude / X Offset
Latitude / X Offset
Longitude / Y Offset
Longitude / Y Offset
Altitude / Z Offset
Altitude / Z Offset

*1 Request Type
*2 Coordinate System
*3 ByPass MFE
*4 Rotate TP Offset

5-164 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.17 Line Of Sight Segment Request [ 25 ]

(3.0 Implementation)
Packet Id = 25 EP2 Functionality
LOS ID LOS Testpoint
Entity ID Motion System for Source Entity if Source
Coordinate System is Entity
Alpha Threshold Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP2
support)
Request Type 0 Basic, 1 Extended
Source Point Coordinate 0 Geodetic, 1 Entity
System
Destination Coordinate 0 Geodetic, 1 Entity
System
Response Coordinate System 0 Geodetic, 1 Entity
Material Mask Implementation Incomplete (EP2-supported)
Continuous Response Enable Continuous responses to single request
Enable Destination Entity Id Enable the use of the Destination ID variable
When enabled then the Destination X/Y/Z
Offsets will be from the Destination Entity ID
Origin
Destination Entity ID Motion System for Destination Entity if
Destination Coordinate System is Entity

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 25 Packet Size = 64 LOS ID
Res. * 6 * 5 * 4 * 3 * 2 * 1 Alpha Threshold Source Entity ID
Source Latitude / X Offset

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Source Longitude / Y Offset

Source Altitude / Z Offset

Destination Latitude / X Offset

Destination Longitude / Y Offset

Destination Altitude / Z Offset

Material Mask
Destination Entity ID

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-165

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

*1 Request Type
*2 Source Point Coordinate System
*3 Destination Point Coordinate System
*4 Response Coordinate System
*5 Continuout Response
*6 Enable Destination Entity ID

STATUS
• Added Continuous Response mode
• Added the Destination Entity ID ( was reserved word ) and the
Enable Destination Entity ID.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-166 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.17.1 Line Of Sight Segment Request [ 25 ]

(3.2 Implementation)
Packet Id = 25 EP2 Functionality
LOS ID LOS Testpoint
Entity ID Motion System for Source Entity if Source
Coordinate System is Entity
Alpha Threshold Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP2
support)
Request Type 0 Basic, 1 Extended
Source Point Coordinate System 0 Geodetic, 1 Entity
Destination Point Coordinate 0 Geodetic, 1 Entity
System
Response Coordinate System 0 Geodetic, 1 Entity
Destination Entity ID Valid Enable the use of the Destination ID variable.
When enabled, then the Destination X/Y/Z
offsets will be from the Destination Entity ID
Origin.
Material Mask Implementation Incomplete (EP-supported)
Update Period This parameter specifies the interval between
successive responses to this request.
Destination Entity ID Motion System for Destination Entity if
Destination Coordinate System is Entity.
ByPassMFE If bit is set to 1, the LOS test will bypass an MFE
if one is in the system, and instead be
proceeded by a GP. When bit is 0, the LOS test
will be handled by an MFE if there is one in the
system, and otherwise by a GP.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Find Closest IF If bit is set to 1, the LOS test will return the
closest intersection to the start point, if any.
Otherwise the first intersection found during
traversal, if any, is returned.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-167

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 25 Packet Size = 64 LOS ID
*7 * 6 * 5 * 4 * 3 * 2 * 1 Alpha Threshold Source Entity ID
Source Latitude / X Offset

Source Longitude / Y Offset

Source Altitude / Z Offset

Destination Latitude / X Offset

Destination Longitude / Y Offset

Destination Altitude / Z Offset

Material Mask
Update Period Reserved Destination Entity ID

*1 Request Type
*2 Source Point Coordinate System
*3 Destination Point Coordinate System
*4 Response Coordinate System
*5 Destination Entity ID Valid
*6 Bypass MFE
*7 FindClosestIF

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-168 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.18 Line Of Sight Vector Request [ 26 ]

(3.0 Implementation)
Packet Id = 26 EP2 Functionality
Los ID Los Testpoint
Entity ID Motion System
Alpha Threshold Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP
support)
Request Type 0 Basic
1 Extended
Source Point Coordinate 0 Geodetic
System 1 Entity
Response Coordinate 0 Geodetic
System 1 Entity
Continuous Response Enable Continuous responses to single request
Material Mask Implementation Incomplete (EP-supported)
Lat / Lon / Alt Implemented for Geodetic Coordinate Type
X / Y / Z Offsets Implemented for Entity Coordinate Type

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 26 Packet Size = 64 LOS ID
4 3 2 1 Alpha Threshold Entity ID

4 Continuous Response

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5.3.18.1 Line of Sight Vector Request [ 26 ]
(3.2 Implementation)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 26 Packet Size = 56 LOS ID
5 4 3 2 1 Alpha Threshold Entity ID
• Only the first 2 words of the packet are shown here.
1 Request Type
2 Source Point Coordinate System
3 Response Coordinate System
4 Bypass MFE
5 FindClosestIF

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-169

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

Packet Id = 26 EP Functionality
Los ID Los Testpoint
Entity ID Motion System
Alpha Threshold Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP
support)
Request Type 0 Basic
1 Extended
Source Point Coordinate 0 Geodetic
System 1 Entity
Response Coordinate 0 Geodetic
System 1 Entity
ByPass MFE If bit is set to 1, the LOS test will bypass an MFE
if one is in the system, and instead be
processed by a GP. When bit is 0, the LOS test
will be handled by an MFE if there is one in the
system, and otherwise by a GP.
Find Closest IF If bit is set to 1, the LOS test will return the
closest intersection to the start point, if any.
Otherwise, the first intersection found during
traversal, if any, is returned.
Material Mask Implementation Incomplete (EP-supported)
Update Period This parameter specifies the interval between
successive responses to this request.
Source Lat / Lon / Alt Implemented for Geodetic Coordinate Type
Source X / Y / Z Offsets Implemented for Entity Coordinate Type

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-170 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.19 Position Request [ 27 ]

Packet Id = 27 EP2 Functionality
Object Class 0 Entity
1 Articulated Part (Sub Model)
2 View (Implementation Incomplete)
(No underlying EP2 support)
3 View Group (Implementation Incomplete)
(No underlying EP2 support)
4 Motion Tracker (Implementation Incomplete)
(No underlying EP2 support)
Object Id For Object Class of Entity, and Articulated Part
this will be the Motion System
Articulated Part For Object Class of Articulated Part this will be the
Sub Model
Coordinate 0 Geodetic
System 1 Parent Entity
2 Sub Model
Update Mode 1 One Shot
2 Continuous

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 27 Packet Size = 8 Object ID
Articulated Part ID *4 *3 *2 *1 Reserved
*1 Update Mode
*2 Object Class
*3 Coordinate System
*4 Reserved

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-171

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.20 Environmental Conditions Request [28]

(EP2 Incomplete)
NOTE: This opcode will not return an error; however, there is no
underlying functionality.

Packet Id = 28 EP2 Functionality

Packet Size This parameter indicated the number of bytes in this data
packet. The value of this parameter must be 32.
Type: unsigned int8
Units: bytes
Value: 32
Request Type This parameter specifies the desired response type for the
request. The numerical values listed may be combined by
addition or bit-wise OR. The resulting value may be any
combination of the following:
Maritime Surface Conditions: The IG will respond with a
maritime Surface Conditions Response packet.
Terrestrial Surface Conditions: The IG will respond with
Terrestrial Surface Conditions Response packet.
Aerosol Concentrations: The IG will send exactly one
Aerosol Concentration Response packet for each weather
layer (regardless of scope) that encompasses that location.
Type: unsigned 4-bit field
Units: N/A
Values: 1 Maritime Surface Conditions
2 Terrestrial Surface Conditions (not supported)
4 Weather Conditions
8 Aerosol Concentrations (not supported)
Latitude This parameter specifies the geodetic latitude at which the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

environmental state is requested.
Type: double float
Units: degrees
Values: –90.0–90.0
Datum: Equator

5-172 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Packet Id = 28 EP2 Functionality

Longitude This parameter specifies the geodetic longitude at which the
environmental state is requested.
Type: double float
Units: degrees
Values: –180.0–180.0
Datum: Prime Meridian
Altitude This parameter specifies the geodetic altitude at which the
environmental state is requested.
NOTE: This parameter is used only for weather
conditions and aerosol concentrations requests.

Type: double float

Units: meters
Datum: Mean Sea Level

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 28 Packet Size = 32 Reserved Request Type Request ID
Reserved
Latitude

Longitude

Altitude

*1 Request Type

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-173

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.21 User Defined ( EP2 Opcodes Packet ) [ 201 ]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 201 Packet Size = XX Data
EP2 Opcode Data Block
*
*
*
*
*
Data Block n

STATUS
• Any of the EP2 Opcode packets can be transferred via the CIGI 3
User Defined packet 201.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-174 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.22 User Defined IRPP 0x306A Configuration Packet

[ 203 ]
Packet Id = 203 EP2 Functionality

ViewPort IR Viewport
Select Specifies the IR spectrum bandwidth to be used in
the IR sensor simulation.
0 = no bandwidth
1 = 3–5 micron bandwidth
2 = 8–12 micron bandwidth
Noise Specifies the detector–noise gain for the specified
IR viewport.
A value of 0.0 turns noise off.
X Start Specifies the x starting position in relative screen
space for AGC sampling in the specified IR
viewport. The starting coordinates represent the
upper left corner of the sampling area.
X End Specifies the x ending position in relative screen
space for AGC sampling in the specified IR
viewport. The ending coordinates represent the
lower right corner of the sampling area.
Y Start Specifies the y starting position in relative screen
space for AGC sampling in the specified IR
viewport. The starting coordinates represent the
upper left corner of the sampling area.
Y End Specifies the y ending position in relative screen

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

space for AGC sampling in the specified IR
viewport. The ending coordinates represent the
lower right corner of the sampling area.
Decay Specifies the ac coupling decay rate for the
specified IR viewport.
Maximum Gain Delta Specifies the maximum gain delta for AGC in the
specified IR viewport.
Maximum Level Delta Specifies the maximum level delta for AGC in the
specified IR viewport.
Distribution Center Specifies the distribution center for AGC in the
specified IR viewport.
Intensity Bins Specifies the number of intensity bins that will be
summed together to determine the gain in the
specified IR viewport.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-175

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Packet Id = 203 EP2 Functionality

Lower Gain Limit Specifies the lower limit for the white and black
areas that are used in the calculation of gain in
the specified IR viewport.
Upper Gain Limit Specifies the upper limit for the white and black
areas that are used in the calculation of gain in
the specified IR viewport.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 203 Packet Size = 56 Not Used
ViewPort Select
Noise (32 bit float)
X Start (32 bit float)
X End (32 bit float)
Y Start (32 bit float)
Y End (32 bit float)
Decay (32 bit float)
Maximum Gain Delta (32 bit float)
Maximum Level Delta (32 bit float)
Distribution Center (32 bit float)
Intensity Bins (32 bit float)
Lower Gain Limit (32 bit float)
Upper Gain Limit

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-176 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.23 User Defined Entity Chain/Tow 0x30D0 Control

Packet [ 207 ]
NOTE: If chaining is requested without specifying an explicit offset,
then EP2 will compute the relative position based upon the
parent and child positions currently committed to the system.
Any position updates for the parent/child sent in the same host
field will not be committed until all opcodes are processed, so
the desired relative positions should be set at least one field
prior to requesting the chain. Alternatively, the chain can be
requested with an explicit offset.
Packet Id = 207 EP2 Functionality

Entity ID Motion System

Entity Select Motion System Select
Parent Entity ID Parents Motion System
Parent Articulated Parents Sub Model to which Entity is to be chained /
Part ID towed.
Control Flags Bit
bit 0 1 = valid
Specifies whether the moving model should be chained.
bit 1 1 = valid
Specifies whether the moving model should be unchained.
bit 2 1 = valid
Specifies whether the moving model should be towed.
bit 3 1 = valid
Specifies whether the x offset / distance value in word 3

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

valid or invalid for this chained or towed moving model.
bit 4 1 = valid
Specifies whether the y offset value in word 4 is valid or
invalid for this chained moving model.
bit 5 1 = valid
Specifies whether the z offset value in word 5 is valid or
invalid for this chained moving model.
bit 6 1 = valid
Specifies whether the heading value in word 6 is valid or
invalid for this chained moving model.
bit 7 1 = valid
Specifies whether the pitch value in word 7 is valid or
invalid for this chained moving model.
bit 8 1=valid, 0 = invalid

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-177

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

Packet Id = 207 EP2 Functionality

Specifies whether the roll value in word 8 is valid or
invalid for this chained moving model.
bit 9 1=enable, 0 = disable
Specifies whether the child moving model is stabilized
with respect to the parent moving model for the x offset.
The default is disable (do not stabilize), which means the
child moving model inherits the parent moving model’s
accumulated x offset.
bit 10 1=enable, 0 = disable
Specifies whether the child moving model is stabilized
with respect to the parent moving model for the y offset
The default is disable (do not stabilize), which means the
child moving model inherits the parent moving model’s
accumulated y offset.
bit 11 1=enable, 0 = disable
Specifies whether the child moving model is stabilized
with respect to the parent moving model for the z offset
The default is disable (do not stabilize), which means the
child moving model inherits the parent moving model’s
accumulated z offset.
bit 12 1=enable, 0 = disable
Specifies whether the child moving model is stabilized
with respect to the parent moving model for the heading
angle. The default is disable (do not stabilize), which
means the child moving model inherits the parent moving
model’s accumulated heading angle.
bit 13 1=enable, 0 = disable
Specifies whether the child moving model is stabilized

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

with respect to the parent moving model for the pitch
angle. The default is disable (do not stabilize), which
means the child moving model inherits the parent moving
model’s accumulated pitch angle.
bit 14 1=enable, 0 = disable
Specifies whether the child moving model is stabilized
with respect to the parent moving model for the roll
angle. The default is disable (do not stabilize), which
means the child moving model inherits the parent moving
model’s accumulated roll angle.
X / Y / Z Offset Offset, in Meters, of Entity from Origin of Parents Sub
Model Applicable only when model is being chained.

5-178 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Packet Id = 207 EP2 Functionality

Distance Specifies the distance, in Meters, the moving model is to

be towed from the parent model. The distance must be
greater than 0. Applicable only when model is being
towed.
Heading Heading of Entity relative to Parents Sub model heading,
applicable only when model is being chained.
Pitch Pitch of Entity relative to Parents Sub model pitch,
applicable only when model is being chained.
Roll Roll of Entity relative to Parents Sub model roll, applicable
only when model is being chained.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 207 Packet Size = 36 Control Flags
Entity ID Entity Select
Parent Entity Id Parent Articulated Part Id
X Offset / Distance (32 bit float)
Y Offset (32 bit float)
Z Offset (32 bit float)
Heading (32 bit float)
Pitch (32 bit float)
Roll (32 bit float)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-179

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.24 User Defined CPC Control Packet [215]

*This packet is ONLY supported in systems with a CPC device*
Packet Id = 215 EP2 Functionality

Unused_Short Specifies a 1- bit space holder.

Command Specifies the opcode / command for the given packet.
DisplayId Specifies the unique numerical identifier of the display that
the given command in the packet is directed towards. (0 – 7)
ProjectorId Specifies the unique numerical identifier of the projector
within the display system that the given command in the
packet is directed towards. (–1 – 9)
Value Specifies any values associated with the given command
(i.e., On/Off).
Arg4_Spare Specifies a 32-bit spare argument slot to be used in case the
given CPC command requires an additional argument to be
passed.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 215 Packet Size = 24 Unused_Short (16 bit unsigned short)
Command (32 bit long)
DisplayId (32 bit long)
ProjectorId (32 bit long)
Value (32 bit long)
Arg4_Spare (32 bit long)

5.3.24.1 CPC Command Control Packet Parameters

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Command DisplayId ProjectorId Value Arg4_Spare
4 (Dimmer) 0-7 –1-9 0-7 (PRESET 0 – PRESET 7) NULL

5-180 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.25 User Defined Pause Resume Opcode [216]

This opcode allows the host to pause and resume the IG.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 216 Size = 8 Reserved
Pause On/Off

Pause Resume (216) EP2 Functionality

Packet ID 216
Size 8
Pause On/Off 0 = Resume IG
1 = Pause IG

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-181

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.26 User Defined Symbology Control [ 217 ]

Symbology is controlled via the user-defined external device opcode,
specifying a symbology device opcode of 0xFF00. Block numbers and
block data are program-specific.
Field Formats and Ranges Explanation
PACKET ID 217 User-defined packet ID for the
external device opcode
PACKET variable Packet size in bytes. The length of
SIZE the symbology packet varies.
Therefore, the length must be
specified by the host. The length is
determined by the byte count of the
symbology packet, including this
word. The length is assumed to be
exactly divisible by four.
SYMBOLOGY Device Number, 0-31 Indicates which symbology device is
DEVICE to receive the data.
NUMBER
DEVICE 0xFF00 The opcode for the symbology
OPCODE device.
LENGTH OF Length of the entire data The block length is the byte length
BLOCK block in bytes. of the data block plus the four bytes
that contain the Length of Block and
Block Opcode information. The
length of the data being transferred
is assumed to be exactly divisible by
four.
BLOCK 0xFE00 – 0xFE3B The ordinal value, expressed as a
NUMBER hexadecimal number, that is
assigned to the block opcode.
DATA The block data being transferred.
The block data length is variable.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

NOTE: All block data will be swapped/unswapped by the EP2 software
interface along 32-bit boundaries, including Length of Block and
Block opcode.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 217 Packet Size Reserved
Symbology Device Number Device Opcode: 0xFF00
Length of Block Block Opcode
Data (start of variable length block data)
Data
°°°

5-182 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.27 User Defined CIGI Advanced Storm Opcode

Advanced Storm Control (219) EP2 Functionality
Packet ID 219
Size 48
Flags Bit: 7 storm
0 = disable
1 = enable
Enables or disables the specified storm.
Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect (FLAGS bit
3) is enabled.

Bit: 6 extrapolation
0 = disable
1 = enable
Enables or disables extrapolation of storm cell
movement.
Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect (FLAGS bit
3) is enabled.

Bit: 5 immediate lightning

0 = disable
1 = enable
If this flag transitions from disable to enable, an
immediate lightning effect occurs.
• Use this flag to correlate radio static.
• If ownship effect (FLAGS bit 3) is set, the lightning
effect is a glare-only effect around the eyepoint. If
not set, it is a lightning bolt sequence associated
with the specified storm.
Bit: 4 lat/lon
0 = disable
1 = enable

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Enables or disables latitude/longitude placement of the
specified storm cell.
Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect (FLAGS bit
3) is enabled.

Bit: 3 ownship effect

0 = apply around storm cell
1 = apply around ownship
Determines which parts of the opcode are interpreted
and how they are interpreted.
• If the ownship flag is set, only the rain level,
lightning level, immediate lightning flag and the
wiper speed are processed and applied in the
immediate vicinity of the ownship. The rest of the
opcode is ignored.
• If the ownship effect flag is not set, the rest of the
opcode is processed, along with the immediate

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-183

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Advanced Storm Control (219) EP2 Functionality

lightning flag.
• The rain and lightning effects for a storm cell are
defined by its STORMDEF command (a storm’s rain
level and lightning level cannot be modified with this
opcode).

Bits: 26-24
Unused.
Rain Level 0-5
0 = disable
1 = slight to 5 = severe
Specifies the level of rain defocus and particle rain
around the ownship. This value indexes into tables
defined in the configuration file that fully define the rain
effect. The rain level for a particular storm is defined by
its STORMDEF command.
Note: This field is only used if ownship effect (FLAGS
bit 3) is enabled.
Rainshaft Select 0 - 255
The storm cell (0–255) predefined by the CLI
STORMDEF command.
Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect (FLAGS bit
3) is enabled.
Lightning Level 0-5
0 = disabled
1 = slight to 5 = severe
• Specifies the sustained lightning level around the
ownship.
• This should only be used if no radio static correlation
is required. This level indexes into a table defined in
the configuration file. The lightning level for a
particular storm is defined by its STORMDEF

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

command.
• If lightning effects (without forks) are required
without a storm, then LIGHTING LEVEL should be set
between 1-5 with ownship effect (FLAGS bit 27)
enabled.
• If radio static correlation is required, the LIGHTING
LEVEL should be set to 0 (disabled) and the
immediate lightning flag (FLAGS bit 29) should be
used.
Note: This field is only used if ownship effect
(FLAGS bit 3) is enabled.

5-184 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Advanced Storm Control (219) EP2 Functionality

Wiper Speed 0-5
Specifies the wiper speed. This is used by the IG to
reduce the amount of rain defocus from either/both
storm rain or ownship rain.
• Typically there are only two wiper speeds; the value
sent should be chosen to get the required defocus
reduction. Each step in wiper speed reduces the rain
defocus level by one step.
Note: This field only used if ownship effect
(FLAGS bit 3) is enabled.
Storm # 0-7
Specifies the storm # for this storm. Up to eight storms
can be active at one time—IG capacity permitting.
• The IG attaches the specific storm cell models, as
defined by the Storm Cell #, to this STORM #
automatically.
Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect
(FLAGS bit 3) is enabled.
Cell # 0 - 255
The storm cell (0–255) predefined by the CLI
STORMDEF command.
Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect
(FLAGS bit 3) is enabled.
Storm Cloud Base Integer (32 bit)
If cloud correlation is not on, this parameter specifies
the height of the storm cloud above the storm’s origin.
Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect
(FLAGS bit 3) is enabled.
Heading Angle (32 bit)
Specifies the storm motion system heading relative to
the 0 if the system is in x/y mode; or the heading
relative to true north if in latitude/longitude mode.
Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

(FLAGS bit 3) is enabled.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-185

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Advanced Storm Control (219) EP2 Functionality

Latitude - Xoffset Latitude- Angle (64 bit)
Specifies the latitude of the storm motion system
relative to the ground motion system.

Xoffset- (64 bit double)

Specifies the x offset of the origin of the storm motion
system from the origin of the database (if operating in
X/Y mode).

Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect

(FLAGS bit 3) is enabled.
Longitude - Yoffset Longitude- Angle (64 bit)
Specifies the longitude of the storm motion system
relative to the ground motion system.

Yoffset- (64 bit double)

Specifies the y offset of the origin of the storm motion
system from the origin of the database (if operating in
X/Y mode).

Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect

(FLAGS bit 3) is enabled.
Altitude - Zoffset Altitude- scaled distance (64 bit)
Specifies the altitude of the storm motion system
relative to MSL.

Zoffset- (64 bit double)

Specifies the z offset f the origin of the storm motion
system from the origin of the database (if operating in
X/Y mode).
Note: This field is ignored if ownship effect
(FLAGS bit 3) is enabled.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 219 Size = 48 Reserved
Flags Rain Level Rainshaft Select Lightning Level
Wiper Speed Storm # Cell # Reserved
Reserved ( padding)
Storm Cloud Base
Heading
Latitude / Xoffset

Longitude / Yoffset

Altitude / Zoffset

5-186 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.28 Third Party Reserved Opcode [224]

This opcode is used by a specific third party host. As such it is reserved
and should not be used for any other purpose.

5.3.29 Third Party Reserved Opcode [225]

This opcode is used by a specific third party host. As such it is reserved
and should not be used for any other purpose.

5.3.30 Image Capture Request [250]

This opcode is used to request an image capture from the IG.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 Packet ID = 250 Size = XX Unused

1 ViewPort Capture ID
File
Unused
2 Format
3 Capture Count
4 Capture Interval
5 UNC Base Filename
… …
n

Packet Id = 250 EP2 Functionality

Size 24 - 248
This parameter indicates the number of bytes in

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

this data packet, including the filename. The size will be in
the range of 24 <= Size <= 248. This value must be
divisible by eight (8).
Viewport 0 - 63
Specifies the viewport that is being captured.
Capture ID Identifier for this set of image captures. This value will be
returned in the Image Capture Response Packet(s).
File Format 0 - 15
Type of image format to use for the Image Capture.
0 - PNG (Not Supported)
1 - TIF
Capture Count This parameter defines how many consecutive screenshots
the IG will capture. A length of 0 signifies a request for a
single screenshot.
Capture Interval This parameter defines the interval between two consecutive
image captures in 10 microsecond units.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-187

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

UNC Base Filename This is used to store the full UNC Path to the base image
capture filename including the extension (i.e.,
\\MyUNCPath\FolderName\capture.tif).

NOTE: The maximum length of the string, including a

terminating NULL, is 228 bytes. If the terminating byte is
not the last byte of the eight-byte double-word, then the
remainder of the double-word will be padded with zeroes.
The Packet Size parameter shall contain the total number of
bytes within the message, including the terminating NULL
and any padding, and must be an even multiple of eight
(8).
Size 24 - 248
This parameter indicates the number of bytes in
this data packet, including the filename. The size will be in
the range of 24 <= Size <= 248. This value must be
divisible by eight (8).

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-188 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.31 Long String ASCII Command [255]

This opcode is used to send 244 character ASCII strings to the IG.

Field Formats and Ranges Explanation

PACKET ID 255
PACKET 252 Packet size in bytes.
SIZE
DATA ASCII Start of string of 244 characters.
DATA ASCII End of string of 244 characters.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 255 Size = 252 Reserved Reserved
Reserved (padding)
Data - Start of string of 244 characters – first four characters (0, 1, 2, 3)
…
Data - End of string of 244 characters – last four characters (240, 241, 242, 243)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-189

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.32 IG To Host Packets

5.3.33 Start Of Frame [ 101 ] (3.0 Implementation)

Packet Id = 101 EP2 Functionality
IG Mode Implemented
Earth Reference Model Implementation Incomplete
(No underlying EP2 support)
Byte Swapping Implemented
Frame Counter Implemented
Time Stamp Implemented

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 101 Packet Size = 24 Major Version = 3 Database Number
IG Status Code Minor Ver. *3 *2 *1 Byte Swap Number
IG Frame Number
Time Stamp
Last Host Frame Number
(Reserved)

*1 IG Mode
*2 Timestamp Valid
*3 Earth Reference Model

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-190 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.33.1 Start Of Frame [ 101 ] (3.2 Implementation)

Packet Id = 101 EP2 Functionality

IG Mode Current IG Mode
0 Reset / Standby
1 Operate
2 Debug
3 Offline Maintenance
Major Version Major version of the CIGI Interface that is currently being
used by the IG.
Minor Version Minor version of the CIGI Interface that is currently being
used by the IG.
DataBase Number Indicator as to which database is currently in use and if that
database is being loaded into primary memory.
IG Status Code 0 Normal Operation
Bit 0 = 1 if GE Timeout, 0 for no GE Timeout detected
Bit 1 = 1 if PP Timeout, 0 for no PP Timeout detected
Bit 2 = 1 if RT Timeout, 0 for no RT Timeout detected
Bit 3 = 1 if MFE Timeout, 0 for no MFE Timeout detected
Bit 4 = 1 if Comm off is detected, 0 if Comm is on
Bit 5 = 1 if RT is paused, 0 if RT resumes normal operation
Bit 6 = 1 if an EXG is unavailable
Bit 7 = Extended (Unused but labeled as extended)
Earth Reference Model Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP2 support)
Byte Swapping Implemented
0x8000 No Byte Swap
0x0080 Byte Swap

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

IG Frame Number Uniquely identifies IG Data Frame
Time Stamp Number of 10 microsecond “ticks” since some initial
reference time.
Last Host Frame Value of Host Frame Number parameter in the last IG
Number Control packet received from the host.
Short IG Response The last word (Reserved) of the Start of Frame packet is
being used for short responses to the CIGI Host. These
responses will be YES or NO responses. For instance, the IG
will response to a paging complete request with YES (1) or
NO (0). The bit position of the response will correspond with
the bit position of the request. Bits…
0x1 Paging Complete

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-191

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 101 Packet Size = 24 Major Version = 3 Database Number
IG Status Code Minor Ver. *3 *2 *1 Byte Swap Number
IG Frame Number
Time Stamp
Last Host Frame Number
Short IG Response (Reserved)

*1 IG Mode
*2 Timestamp Valid
*3 Earth Reference Model

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-192 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.34 HAT/HOT Response [ 102 ]

(3.0 Implementation)
Packet Id = 102 EP2 Functionality
HAT / HOT Id HAT Test Point Number ( 0 to 31 )
Valid Data is accurate and useable
Response Type 0 HAT
1 HOT
Height Meters

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 102 Packet Size = 16 HAT/HOT ID
*4 *3 *2 *1 Reserved
Height

*1 Valid
*2 Response Type
*3 Reserved
*4 Host Frame Number LSN

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-193

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.34.1 Hat/Hot Response [ 102 ] (3.2 Implementation)

Packet Id = 102 EP2 Functionality

Hat / Hot Id Hat Test Point Number ( 0 to 31 )
Valid Data is accurate and useable
Response Type 0 HAT
1 HOT
Host Frame Number This parameter contains the least
LSN significant nibble of the Host Frame
Number parameter of the last IG
Control packet received before the
HAT or HOT is calculated.
Height Meters

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 102 Packet Size = 16 HAT/HOT ID
*4 *3 *2 *1 Reserved
Height

*1 Valid
*2 Response Type
*3 Reserved
*4 Host Frame Number LSN

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-194 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.35 Hat/Hot Extended Response [ 103 ]

(3.0 Implementation)
Packet Id = 103 EP2 Functionality
Hat / Hot Id Hat Test Point Number ( 0 to 31 )
Valid Data is accurate and useable
Material Code EP2 returns valid material codes in the
range of 0-255. The entire 32-bit word is
not used for material codes.
Unless otherwise specified, the default
values for material codes are as follows:
Code 0 = Non valid code ( ignore )
Code 3 = Hard Surface
Code 4 = Soft Surface
Code 5 = Centerline
Normal Vector Azimuth Implementation Incomplete
Normal Vector Elevation Implementation Incomplete

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 103 Packet Size = 40 HAT/HOT ID
*2 Reserve *1 Reserved
HAT

HOT

Material Code

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Normal Vector Azimuth
Normal Vector Elevation
Reserved

*1 Valid
*2 Host Frame Number LSN

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-195

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.35.1 HAT/HOT Extended Response[ 103 ]

(3.2 Implementation)

Packet Id = 103 EP2 Functionality

HAT / HOT ID HAT Test Point Number ( 0 to 31 )
Valid Data is accurate and useable
Host Frame Number LSN This parameter contains the least
significant nybble of the Host Frame
Number parameter of the last IG Control
packet received before the HAT or HOT is
calculated.
Material Code EP2 returns valid material codes in the
range of 0-255. The entire 32-bit word is
not used for material codes.
Unless otherwise specified, the default
values for material codes are as follows:
Code 0 = Non valid code ( ignore )
Code 3 = Hard Surface
Code 4 = Soft Surface
Code 5 = Centerline
Normal Vector Azimuth This value is the horizontal angle from True
North to the vector.
Normal Vector Elevation This value is the vertical angle from the
geodetic reference plane to the vector.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 103 Packet Size = 40 HAT/HOT ID
*2 Reserve *1 Reserved
HAT

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

HOT

Material Code
Normal Vector Azimuth
Normal Vector Elevation
Reserved

*1 Valid
*2 Host Frame Number LSN

5-196 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.36Line Of Sight Response [ 104 ]

(3.2 Implementation)
Packet Id = 104 EP2 Functionality
Los ID Los Test Point
Entity ID Motion System
0 or 2 will be invalid
1 will represent the Terrain
2 through 2048 will be an Entity ID
Response Count Implementation Incomplete
(will always be 1)
(No underlying EP support)
Valid Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD
Entity Id Valid Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD
Visible 0 Not Visible (Occluded)
1 Visible
Host Frame Number LSN This parameter contains the least significant
nybble of the Host Frame Number
parameter of the last IG Control packet
received before the Light of Sight is
calculated.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-197

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.37Line Of Sight Extended Response [ 105 ]

(3.0 Implementation)
Packet Id = 105 EP2 Functionality
Los ID Los Test Point
Entity ID Motion System
0 or 2 will be invalid
1 will represent the Terrain
> 2 < 2000 will be an Entity ID
Response Count Implementation Incomplete ( will always be
1 ) (No underlying EP support)
Valid Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD
Entity Id Valid Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD
Range Valid Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD
Visible 0 Not Visible ( Occluded )
1 Visible (No intersections along test line)
Intersection Point Coordinate Implementation Incomplete ( default to
System Geodetic )
0 Geodetic
1 Entity
Range Meters from Source position
Latitude / Longitude / Altitude Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

X / Y / Z Offset Implementation Incomplete (No underlying
EP support)
Red / Green / Blue / Alpha Implementation Incomplete (No underlying
EP support)
Material Code Unless otherwise specified, the default
values for material codes are as follows:
Code 0 = Non valid code ( ignore )
Code 3 = Hard Surface
Code 4 = Soft Surface
Code 5 = Centerline
Normal Vector Azimuth/Elevation Implementation Incomplete

5-198 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.37.1 Line Of Sight Extended Response [ 105 ]

(3.2 Implementation)

Packet Id = 105 EP2 Functionality

LOS ID LOS Test Point
Entity ID Motion System
0 or 2 will be invalid
1 will represent the Terrain
> 2 < 2000 will be an Entity ID
Response Count Implementation Incomplete ( will always be 1 )
(No underlying EP support)
Valid Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD
Entity Id Valid Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD
Range Valid Implemented as per CIGI 3 ICD
Visible 0 Not Visible ( Occluded )
1 Visible (No intersections along test line)
Host Frame Number LSN This parameter contains the least significant
nybble of the Host Frame Number parameter of
the last IG Control packet received before the
HAT or HOT is calculated.
Range Meters from Source position
Latitude / Longitude / Altitude Implemented
X / Y / Z Offset Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP
support)
Red / Green / Blue / Alpha Implementation Incomplete (No underlying EP

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

support)
Material Code Unless otherwise specified, the default values
for material codes are as follows:
Code 0 = Non valid code ( ignore )
Code 3 = Hard Surface
Code 4 = Soft Surface
Code 5 = Centerline
Normal Vector Azimuth This value is the horizontal angle from True
North to the segment or vector.
Normal Vector Elevation This value is the vertical angle from the
geodetic reference plane to the segment or
vector.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-199

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.38 Position Response [ 108 ]

Packet Id = 108 EP2 Functionality
Object Class 0 Entity
1 Articulated Part ( Sub Model )
2 View (Implementation Incomplete*)
3 View Group (Implementation Incomplete*)
4 Motion Tracker (Implementation Incomplete*)
* (No underlying EP2 support for 2, 3, or 4)
Object Id For Object Class of Entity, and Articulated Part this
will be the Motion System
Articulated Part For Object Class of Articulated Part this will be the
Sub Model
Coordinate System 0 Geodetic
1 Parent Entity
2 Sub Model

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 108 Packet Size = 48 Object ID
Articulated Part ID Reserved *2 *1 Reserved
Latitude/X Offset

Longitude/Y Offset

Altitude/Z Offset

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Roll
Pitch
Yaw
Reserved

*1 Object Class
*2 Coordinate System
STATUS
• The responding Coordinate System type will be determined based on the type
of Object Class and condition of Model within the EP2 environment. So that,
chained motion systems will report back as Parent Entity, and Sub Models will
report back as Sub Model, Primary Models will always report back as Geodetic
for the Entity and Articulated Part Object Classes. Chained and submodel
positions can be requested in geodetic space, in which case the Coordinate
System field will be Geodetic.

5-200 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.39 Collision Detection Segment Notification [113]

Packet Id = 113 EP2 Functionality
Entity ID Motion System
Contacted Entity ID Motion System with which Entity has
Collided
0 Ownship
1 Ground
> 2 Entity Motion System
Segment ID Command / Segment Id combined
0x0038 Command bits
0x0007 Segment bits
8 Commands with 8 Segments each = 64
total
Collision Type 0 Terrain Type ( Non Entity )
1 Entity Type
Material Code Unless otherwise specified, the default
values for material codes are as follows:

Code 0 = Non valid code ( ignore )

Code 3 = Hard Surface
Code 4 = Soft Surface
Code 5 = Centerline
Intersection Distance Intersection Distance in meters (float).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 113 Packet Size = 16 Entity ID

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Segment ID Reserved *1 Contacted Entity ID
Material Code
Intersection Distance
*1 Collision Type

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-201

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.40 Animation Stop Notification [ 115 ]

Packet Id = 115 EP2 Functionality
Entity Id Motion System
Sub Model Animation Sub Model Id
Sequence Id Animation Sequence Id

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 115 Packet Size = 8 Entity ID
Sub Model Sequence ID

STATUS
• The CIGI 3 ICD shows the 2nd Word of Packet 115 to be assigned as
Reserved, but because the EP system will also return the Sub Model
and Sequence Id, these variables have been added to the 2nd Word
of the packet as shown above.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-202 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.41 User Defined Response Packet

(EP Response Opcodes) [202]
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 115 Packet Size = 8 Entity ID
EP Opcode Data Block
*
*
*
*
*
Data Block n

STATUS
• Some EP Response Opcode packets will be transferred via the
CIGI 3 User Defined Response packet 202.
• EP Opcodes included in Response Packet 202 are listed below.
Please refer to Chapter 3 for more specific information about each
opcode.
o 0x3082 Laser Range Finder Response
o 0x3087 Laser Range Finder Enhanced Response
o 0x3203 IRPP Gain, Level, and Noise Response
o 0x3206 Target Tracker Response
o 0x3207 EXG Thermal Cuer Response

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-203

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.42 User Defined LRF Extended Response [ 204 ]

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 204 Packet Size = 112 Not Used
User Data
Viewport Eyepoint Cursor Flags
Host Message Number
Tag
Moving Model Number
Range (32 bit float)
Material
X / Longitude (64 bit double)
X / Longitude (cont)
Y / Latitude (64 bit double)
Y / Latitude (cont)
Z / Altitude (64 bit double)
Z / Altitude (cont)
X Normal (32 bit float)
Y Normal (32 bit float)
Z Normal (32 bit float)
Buffer (4 byte)
Eye X / Longitude (64 bit double)
Eye X / Longitude (cont)
Eye Y / Latitude (64 bit double)
Eye Y / Latitude (cont)
Eye Z / Altitude (64 bit double)
Eye Z / Altitude (cont)
Viewport Heading (32 bit float)
Viewport Pitch (32 bit float)

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Viewport Roll (32 bit float)
Buffer (4 byte)

Packet Id = 204 EP Functionality

User Data Optional additional data here is echoed from the same field
in the request.
Viewport (0-31) The viewport number that is tied to the cursor.
Eyepoint (0-15) The eyepoint number the viewport is tied to.
Cursor (0 – 7 ) The cursor from which this response has been
generated.

5-204 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

Packet Id = 204 EP Functionality

Flags Specifies the coordinate system of the returned position
data.
0 = xy
1 = lat/lon
Host Message Number The message number from the host packet that contained
positional data.
Tag The tag, if this LRF request came via the LRF Single
Response Request Component Control Packet
Moving Model Number Specified the moving model hit by the LRF laze. If 0, then
the LRF was not occulted by anything within its range.
Range The distance from the LRF start point (eye) to the reported
intersection.
Material This is the material code at the detected intersection point.
X / Longitude The x coordinate of the intersection point, or the
longitude if the database is geodetic
Y / Latitude The y coordinate of the intersection point, or the latitude if
the database is geodetic.
Z / Altitude The z coordinate, or altitude, of the intersection point.
X, Y, Z Normal The X, Y, and Z components of the polygon normal at the
intersection point
Buffer Unused.
Eye X / Longitude The extrapolated x coordinate of the eyepoint the LRF
cursor is tied to, or the longitude if the database is
geodetic.
Eye Y / Latitude The extrapolated y coordinate of the eyepoint the LRF
cursor is tied to, or the latitude if the database is geodetic.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Eye Z / Altitude The extrapolated z coordinate, or altitude, of the eyepoint
the LRF cursor is tied to.
Viewport Heading The heading of the viewport to which the LRF cursor is tied.
Viewport Pitch The pitch of the viewport to which the LRF cursor is tied.
Viewport Roll The roll of the viewport to which the LRF cursor is tied.
Buffer Unused.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-205

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.43User Defined Celestial Position Response [206]

This opcode is returned in response to a CIGI Celestial Position Request.
Celestial Position Request EP2 Functionality
Packet ID 206
Packet Size 16
Body Position returned
0 – Moon
1 - Sun
Azimuth Azimuth in degrees (float)
Elevation Elevation in degrees (float)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 206 Packet Size = 16 Not Used Body
Azimuth
Elevation
Not Used

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-206 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.44 Sun & Moon Position Response [218]

This opcode reports the azimuth and elevation of the sun and moon.
This is a response to the Sun and Moon Position Request component
control CIGI Opcode 4 with component class 11 and component ID
12477 (0x30BD). The response returns four 32-bit floats that contain
the azimuth and elevation for the sun and moon respectively. There is
also a 32-bit spare/unused word returned.

Sun & Moon Position Response EP2 Functionality

Packet ID 218
Packet Size 24
Sun Azimuth Current azimuth of the Sun in degrees
Sun Elevation Current elevation of the Sun in degrees
Moon Azimuth Current azimuth of the Moon in degrees
Moon Elevation Current elevation of the Moon in degrees
32-bit spare/unused (EP1 returned TOD scene)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Packet ID = 218 Packet Size = 24 Not Used
Sun Azimuth
Sun Elevation
Moon Azimuth
Moon Elevation
32-bit spare/unused

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-207

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.45 Image Capture Response [251]

This packet is sent in response to an Image Capture Request packet.
Multiple response packets may be returned if the original Image Capture
Request indicated multiple captures should be completed.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 Packet ID = 251 Size = 16 Capture ID

Error
Unused Unused *1
1 Code
2 Capture Sequence ID
3 Unused
*1 – Sequence Completed

Image Capture Response - Packet Id=251 EP2 Functionality

Size 16
This parameter indicates the number of
bytes in
this data packet
Capture ID Identifier for this set of image captures.
This value was specified in the Image
Capture Request Packet.

Error Code 0 - 15
Specifies whether the IG successfully
generated an image capture.
0 - No error
1 - Invalid UNC Path
2 - Unsupported Format
3 - Generic Failure
4-15 - Reserved

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Sequence Completed 0-1
This indicates whether this is the last
image capture in the sequence.
0 - Continuing
1 - Complete

Capture Sequence ID This specifies the index of the current

image capture in the sequence, starting
from 0. This value will be appended to
the UNC Base Filename specified in the
Image Capture Request.

5-208 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 CIGI 3 Opcodes

5.3.46 Formats and Descriptions

5.3.47 Reset Standby, Operate Modes
The EP2 IG system will start up in Standby Mode. When the IG receives
an IG Control packet with the IG Mode set to Operate, than it will
transition to Operate mode at which time the IG will run a script file.
The name of the script file will be CigiDbX.rst. The X in the filename will
be the numerical value passed to the IG in the Data Base Number field
of the IG Control packet. So when the host sends the first IG Control
packet with the IG Mode set to Operate (while the IG is currently in
Standby mode) and the Data Base Number set to 1 (for example) then
the IG will switch to Operate mode and will run the CigiDb1.rst file.
When the IG receives an IG Control packet with the IG Mode set to
Reset / Standby (while the IG is currently in Operate mode) then it will
transition to Standby mode, at which time the IG will automatically un-
bind all entities with an ID in the range from 0 through 65535.

5.3.48 CigiDbX.rst—Script File

The file should be placed in a script file directory; any of the directories
that are declared in the scriptfile path would suffice. By default, if not
specifically defined via the CLI PATH 27 command, this would be the
"..\scriptfiles" directory (which would be relative to the runtime \bin
directory). Typically the CLI PATH 27 "..\..\scripfiles" declaration is
included in the startup reset file, in which case this would be the
EAS\scriptfiles directory.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 5-209

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
CIGI 3 Opcodes

This page intentionally left blank

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

5-210 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
6 Host
Communications

6.1 Introduction
For the Host computer to be able to communicate with the image
generator, it is necessary to configure the IG for the agreed upon host
interface data transfer protocols. This chapter describes the host
interface setup for the image generator, and gives examples of
recommended setup parameters for typical host communication
scenarios.
In scenarios where the IG is slave to the host, the IG relies on
continuous packets from the host in order to provide smooth motion for

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

host controlled models in the scene. Therefore, lost or delayed packets
are not acceptable. For this reason, a dedicated, collision-free network
that will not be interrupted by data traffic from other sources is
required.
Host communication configuration is done using the EP2 Application
Graphical User Interface (GUI). Parameters set with the GUI are saved
in a configuration file called epConfig.ep2 which is located in the
directory: C:\EP2\IGSetup\Config. This is an XML file which may be
edited using a simple ASCII editor such as Notepad. The parameters set
in this configuration file are critical in establishing how the remote host
computer communicates with the image generator real-time software
(RTS).
NOTE: Before making any of the changes discussed in this
chapter, users should make a copy of their configuration
file as a backup.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-1

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

Host communication setup parameters are found in two locations within

the main real-time configuration tree:
• Properties→Config→Host
• Properties→Config→Host→SimHost1

Figure 6-1. Setting Host Communication Settings

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6.2 Protocol Layers
Host communication settings are based on the definition of the
TCP/IP protocol suite and allow the user to make choices at the
four fundamental protocol layers that are defined by the TCP/IP
protocol suite:
Application
Transport
Internetwork
Network Access

6-2 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

6.2.1 Application Layer

Protocol choices at the application layer are configured in the
Config Host Properties window, which is opened from the main real-
time configuration tree at the following node:
• Properties→Config→Host

Figure 6-2. Configuration Host Properties Window

(HostType Set to ESIG)
The parameters within the Config Host Properties window will
change depending upon which Host Type value is selected. The
Host Type field is used to select the host application layer protocol.
The following protocols are available and organized by category:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

NOTE: CIGI 2 and CIGI 3 L3 are placeholders and are not
currently supported in EP2.
• CIGI
o CIGI 3.2
o CIGI 3
o CIGI 2
o CIGI 3 L3
• Native Rockwell Collins Protocols
o ESIG
o SPX
o SPX-ESIG
o SPN
• Radar Terrain Server
o RADAR
The bolded applications protocols are recommended for new
system integration. The remaining protocols are for legacy support.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-3

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

As a general guideline, the user should select the HostType and

SyncEnabled field as required by the application, and use the
defaults for the remaining parameters.

6.2.1.1 CIGI
The Common Image Generator Interface (CIGI) is designed to
promote a standard way for a host computer to communicate with
an image generator. CIGI is a data packaging protocol that does
not depend upon a specific physical communications medium or
transport protocol, but is generally implemented using the User
Datagram Protocol (UDP).
This protocol is the preferred choice when it is desired to maintain
an industry standard host communications protocol. Its
disadvantage is that it only supports the lowest common
denominator of IG features available in the marketplace.
Reference should be made to the Interface Control Document (ICD)
for the Common Image Generator Interface (CIGI). Version 3.2,
may be found at the following address:
http://cigi.sourceforge.net/files/CIGI_ICD_3_2.pdf
Additional CIGI packet implementation details are available in
Chapter 5 of this document.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Figure 6-3. Configuration Host Properties Window
(HostType Set to CIGI 3.2)

6-4 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

As specified in the CIGI ICD, CIGI supports both synchronous and

asynchronous operation. Other selectable parameters are specified
in the figure above and defined in the following table:

Table 6-1. CIGI Parameters

Name Selections Usage
HostType CIGI32 CIGI protocol using version 3.2
CIGI3 CIGI protocol using version 3
CIGI2 Unsupported legacy CIGI protocol
CIGI3L3 Unsupported customized version of CIGI version 3
CigiNedCoordSystem True/False True: Use CIGI default coordinate system definition
North, East, Down
False: Use EP2 standard coordinate definition
East, North, Up
CigiUseHostTimeStamp checkbox Checked: Use host provided timestamp for
extrapolation and other timestamp sensitive
operations.
Unchecked: Use IG provided timestamp.
SyncEnabled True/False True: Enables synchronous communications to the
host. In this mode, the IG initiates the
communications with a sync (Start of Frame) packet,
then the host sends its data.

False: Disables synchronous host communications.

In this mode, the host initiates each round of packet
communication by sending a packet, and the IG
responds with one or more response.

MultiIGEnabled True/False True: Used when one host network controls multiple

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

IGs
False: Default operation with one host interface per
IG.
IGInitTime Time in Time delay from when the real-time software has
seconds initialized to when the IG will start accepting host
packets.
GlobalExtrapEnabled True/False Enables or disables extrapolation for the EP2. This is
a system wide control and it is independent of if
extrapolation is enabled for individual models. If
extrapolation for individual models is desired, the
property must be set to TRUE.
See Chapter 4.6 for more on extrapolation.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-5

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

6.2.1.2 ESIG
The ESIG application level protocol is a native op-code host
communication protocol for the EP-80 and EP-8000 series IGs. This
protocol was first developed for image generators made by Evans &
Sutherland (hence ESIG) and continued when the Evans &
Sutherland IG product line was taken over by Rockwell Collins.
This is the preferred application level protocol because it supports
the full set of functionality built into the EP2 RTS. Because of the
large market penetration and installed base, this proprietary
protocol has the earmarks of an industry standard.

Figure 6-4. ESIG Protocol Settings

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Reference should be made to Chapters 3 and 4 for details
concerning the ESIG protocol. As specified in these chapters, the
ESIG protocol supports both synchronous and asynchronous
operation. Other selectable parameters are specified in the figure
above and defined in the following table:

Table 6-2. ESIG Parameters

Name Selections Usage

HostType ESIG EP-80/EP-8000 series native host communications
protocol
SyncEnabled True/False True: Synchronous operation enabled
False: Asynchronous operation enabled

See chapters 4.3, 4.4 for more information.

6-6 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

SyncOffset Time in Time after the “VC done” interrupt to send the host
milliseconds sync packet. This is typically set to a value less than
the refresh rate and greater than one half the
refresh rate. Default to a value of one half the
refresh rate, if not specified, or if set to a value
greater than the refresh rate.
SyncMultiplier Numeric Specifies the number of fields (VC done interrupts)
Value per IG-to-host sync packet. This is typically set to a
value of 1.
MultiIGEnabled True/False True: Used when one host network controls multiple
IGs. This is useful when the host wants to
send packets to multiple IGs and wants to
have some other IG respond.
False: Default operation with one host interface per
IG. The IG responds to each packet sent
from the host.
IGInitTime Time in Time delay from when the real-time software has
seconds initialized to when the IG will start accepting host
packets.
GlobalExtrapEnabled True/False Enables or disables extrapolation for the EP2. This is
a system wide control and it is independent of if
extrapolation is enabled for individual models. If
extrapolation for individual models is desired, the
property must be set to TRUE.

See Chapter 4.6 for more on extrapolation.

6.2.1.3 RADAR
The RADAR application level protocol is used when the image
generator needs to be configured to support the Radar Terrain
Server application provided by Rockwell Collins.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Additional information may be found in the following document:
EP2 Radar Terrain Server User Guide
RCPN 945-5465-003

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-7

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

Figure 6-5. Radar Parameters

Table 6-3. Radar Parameters

Name Selections Usage

HostType RADAR Radar Terrain Server application selection
RadarEndian Big/Little BIG: Use Big Endian packet format
LITTLE: Use Little Endian packet format
RadarMaxPacketSize Numeric Maximum packet size
Value
SyncEnabled True/False Not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SyncOffset Time in Not supported
milliseconds
SyncMultiplier Numeric Not supported
Value
MultiIGEnabled True/False Not supported
IGInitTime Time in Not supported
seconds
GlobalExtrapEnabled True/False Not supported

6-8 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

6.2.2 Transport Layer

Protocol choices at the transport layer are configured in the Config
Host SimHost1 Properties window, which is opened from the main
real-time configuration tree at the following node:
• Properties→Config→Host→SimHost1
Although rarely used, the EP-80 and EP-8000 series image generators
support simultaneous communication with up to three host computers.
Each host must be connected to an available network adapter that has
been properly set up. This host interface must be separately enabled
and configured using the other simulation host interfaces available on
the configuration tree:
• Properties→Config→Host→SimHost2
• Properties→Config→Host→SimHost3
Transport layer protocols are specified with the ConnectionType
parameter. The remaining parameters in the window apply to the
particular connection type selected, and the properties dialog changes
depending upon the selection. The following transport layer protocols
are implemented:
• RAW
• UDP
• TCP
Strictly speaking, the RAW selection is not a transport layer protocol,
but actually operates at the network layer, whereas UDP and TCP are
true transport layers that operate above the IP internetwork layer.
However, for purposes of lower level protocol selection, RAW is included
as a choice.
When one of the three available choices for the ConnectionType is
selected, the required configuration parameters for that connection type

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

will be displayed in the Config Host SimHost1 Properties window. These
parameters include choices that pertain to lower level protocols as well.

6.2.2.1 RAW
The RAW connection type refers to the standard IEEE 802.3 raw
Ethernet network protocol that actually operates at the Network
Interface layer. A dedicated Ethernet will not be interrupted by packet
collision, or delays that may be introduced by flow control and packet
reliability issues that occur with secure connection oriented protocols
such as TCP. Therefore, the RAW protocol is the recommended
connection type. EP2 uses the EsPacket2.sys network driver. This driver
shows up as Rockwell Collins Raw Packet Protocol 2 Version x.x.x.x.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-9

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

Figure 6-6. Raw Ethernet Parameters

When the RAW connection type is selected, the following

parameters apply to the protocol:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Table 6-4. Raw Ethernet Parameters

Name Selections Usage

Enabled True/False True: Enables the selected SimHost interface.
False: Disables the selected SimHost interface.
ConnectionType RAW Selects IEEE 802.1 raw Ethernet interface protocol
DriverMode PROMISCUOUS This is a full duplex mode and the preferred mode of
operation with the EP2. This mode is
source/destination agnostic. However, it is
encouraged that the NIC be used for only host
traffic. This is to ensure that other network traffic do
not interrupt the timely delivery of the host data
frames to the EP2.
CLEAR This mode initializes the raw packet driver but it
does not process any host packets. All traffic on the
host NIC are discarded.

6-10 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

DIRECTED This is a destination aware mode. This mode ensures

that only packets with a destination address
(Ethernet header) that equals the MAC address of
the host NIC are passed upstream to the EP2 for
processing.
BROADCAST Broadcast mode encourages the host NIC to forward
each frame to all enabled and active NIC’s. However,
in the current implementation of EP2 this mode
automatically defaults to promiscuous mode. To
achieve true broadcast, the host software must set
the destination address in the Ethernet header to the
broadcast address (0xFFFFFFFF)
EthernetSinglePacket True/False False: Allows multiple packets to be sent to the host
each time a single packet is received from the
host. This is used when a host expects a lot
of data back from the real-time in a given
field, such as a lot of HAT returns, moving
model response opcodes, etc., and the data
cannot all fit within the limits of a single
Ethernet packet (990 bytes, not including the
EOD and ESIG opcode header block)
True: Allows only a single packet to be sent to the
host for each packet received from the host.
EthernetPacketType IEEE Defines the usage of the EtherType/Length field in
802.3/805D the Ethernet packet frame:
IEEE 802.3: Per 802.3 (length field)
805D: Older protocol specifying E&S Bluebook
usage where 805D specifies E&S EtherType field.
UseEsigEthernetAddress True/False False: The IG will use the MAC address of the NIC
as the SRC address on packets sent to the
host. This is the preferred mode of
operation.
True: Allow the IG to use Ethernet address:

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

0x08:0x00:0x57:0x01:0x20:0x20 as its SRC
address on packets sent to the host.
EthernetResponseMode ALWAYS The image generator will respond to each packet
sent from the host with a response packet.
ON REQUEST The image generator will only respond to packets
from the host only when the Request Data bit is set.
This is useful when multiple IGs are on the network
and this particular IG is only listening and not
responding.
NEVER The image generator will never respond to packets
from the host. This is useful when the host wants to
send multiple packets to several IGs on the network
and only have a particular IG real-time respond to
the last packet. The master IG is configured to
respond, but secondary IGs are configured not to
respond.
ASYNC Not implemented.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-11

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

MaxDataSendBufSize Numeric Value Maximum size of the Data Send Buffer. Defaults to
1500.
It is important to note that the EP2 will NOT permit
response buffer sizes for Raw Ethernet packets to be
greater than 1500 bytes. Additionally, this max size
includes the Ethernet (14 bytes) and the ESIG (12
bytes) header sizes and EOD (4 bytes) so preferably,
this max size should be 1470 bytes or less.
Network Interface Network Specifies the name of the network adapter that is to
adapter names be used for the Host Network. From the factory, the
as configured host adapter is configured with the name: Host.
Open Network and Sharing Center to see available
names of networks.

6.2.2.2 UDP
The UDP connection type refers to the User Datagram Protocol, which is
a connectionless protocol used in the TCP/IP suite of protocols. This
protocol operates at the transport layer and uses a simple transmission
model that involves no handshaking and a lack of retransmission delays.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Figure 6-7. UDP Parameters

6-12 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

When the UDP connection type is selected, the following

parameters apply to the protocol:

Table 6-5. UDP Parameters

Name Selections Usage

Enabled True/False True: Enables the selected SimHost interface.
False: Disables the selected SimHost interface.
ConnectionType UDP Selects User Datagram protocol
EthernetRespon ALWAYS The image generator will respond to each packet
seMode sent from the host with a response packet.
ON The image generator will only respond to packets
REQUEST from the host only when the Request Data bit is set.
This is useful when multiple IGs are on the network
and this particular IG is only listening and not
responding.
NEVER The image generator will never respond to packets
from the host. This is useful when the host wants to
send multiple packets to several IGs on the network
and only have a particular IG real-time respond to
the last packet. The master IG is configured to
respond, but secondary IGs are configured not to
respond.
ASYNC Not implemented
Host Port ID Numeric UDP socket port number for host. This value
Value defaults to 5000 and is the recommended socket
port. The valid range is 4000-5999.

For multiple UDP socket connections, use the

following convention:
IG to host data as set on Host Port ID
Host to IG data on Host Port ID +1
Host syncs on port Host Port ID +2 if used.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

If specified Port is invalid, then the IG will revert to
the default.
IG Port ID Numeric UDP socket port number for image generator. This
Value value defaults to 5001 and is the recommended
socket port. The valid range is 5000-5999
Host sync packets sent when synchronization is
enabled will be sent on Host Port ID + 2.

If specified Port is invalid, then the IG will revert to

the default.
Host IP Address IP address This field should be set to a valid IP address of the
value remote host computer.

By convention, the test host is set to the value of

148.148.148.1 and this value may be used, if

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-13

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

desired, for the actual host.

Broadcast IP IP address Broadcast address for the connection. This value is
Address value usually the same as the IP address value with the
last octet set to 255.
The broadcast address must be consistent with the
subnet mask that is set for the network adapter. For
example, if the Broadcast address is set to
20.9.255.255, then the network subset mask should
be set to 255.255.0.0. If the broadcast address is
set to 193.0.2.255, then the subset mask must be
set for 255.255.255.0.
Network Network Specifies the name of the network adapter that is to
Interface adapter be used for the Host Network. From the factory, the
names as host adapter is configured with the name: Host.
configured Open Network and Sharing Center to see available
names of networks.

6.2.2.3 TCP
The TCP connection type refers to the Transfer Control Protocol, which is
a connection-oriented end-to-end reliable protocol used in the TCP/IP
suite of protocols. This protocol operates at the transport layer and
uses a robust and reliable stream connection using retransmission
techniques. As a result determinism cannot be guaranteed, and is
therefore not recommended for use in real-time simulation. However,
this protocol is often used in the development and test environment.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6-14 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

Figure 6-8. TCP Ethernet Parameters

When the TCP connection type is selected, the following parameters apply to
the protocol:

Table 6-6. TCP Ethernet Parameters

Name Selections Usage

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Enabled True/False True: Enables the selected SimHost interface.
False: Disables the selected SimHost interface.
ConnectionType TCP Selects Transmission Control protocol
EthernetRespon ALWAYS The image generator will respond to each packet
seMode sent from the host with a response packet.
ON The image generator will only respond to packets
REQUEST from the host only when the Request Data bit is set.
This is useful when multiple IGs are on the network
and this particular IG is only listening and not
responding.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-15

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

NEVER The image generator will never respond to packets

from the host. This is useful when the host wants to
send multiple packets to several IGs on the network
and only have a particular IG real-time respond to
the last packet. The master IG is configured to
respond, but secondary IGs are configured not to
respond.
ASYNC Not implemented
Host Port ID Numeric Socket port number for host. This value defaults to
Value 5000 and is the recommended socket port. The
valid range is 4000-5999.

For multiple UDP socket connections, use the

following convention:
IG to host data as set on Host Port ID
Host to IG data on Host Port ID +1
Host syncs on port Host Port ID +2 if used.

If specified Port is invalid, then the IG will revert to

the default.
IG Port ID Numeric Socket port number for image generator. This value
Value defaults to 5001 and is the recommended socket
port. The valid range is 5000-5999
Host sync packets sent when synchronization is
enabled will be sent on Host Port ID + 2.

If specified Port is invalid, then the IG will revert to

the default.
Host IP Address IP address This field should be set to a valid IP address of the
value remote host computer.

By convention, the test host is set to the value of

148.148.148.1 and may be used, if desired for the

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

actual host.
TCP Header SIMPLE Each packet contains a single word for the byte
Type count, followed by the opcode data
ESIG Use the ESIG compatible header
Network Network Specifies the name of the network adapter that is to
Interface adapter be used for the Host Network. From the factory, the
names as host adapter is configured with the name: Host.
configured Open Network and Sharing Center to see available
names of networks.

6-16 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

6.2.3 Internetwork Layer

The internetwork layer shields the higher levels from the network
architecture below it. Internetwork layer protocols include IP, ARP
and RARP. The IP protocol is the most important protocol here,
and it is a connectionless protocol that doesn’t provide reliability,
flow control or error recovery, and doesn’t assume reliability from
the lower layers. For the purpose of configuring the image
generator, these require no additional configuration beyond setting
up the network interface card for the correct IP addresses, subnet
masks, etc.

6.2.4 Network Access Layer

The Network Access Layer of the TCP/IP protocol suite maps to
Physical and Data Link layer of the Open Systems Interconnect
(OSI) mode. The EP-80 and EP-8000 series image generators
support 1000BASE-T Ethernet as described in the IEEE 802.3
standard as the default protocol at this level. To avoid problems
with packet collision and latency issues, a dedicated Ethernet
connection between the IG and the host computer is
recommended.
Other Network Access Layer protocols including shared memory
protocols (i.e., Scramnet+), token rings, or legacy networks and
may be supported. Please consult the factory.
For purposes of the host communication interface, raw Ethernet is
configured as a connection type at the transport layer. Whenever
any higher protocols require network access layer settings, these
settings are included in the overall set of parameters for that
particular protocol.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6.3 Example Settings
The following examples indicate the configurations for the most
commonly used protocols. Additional host communications setup
information describing how to configure a host computer acting in
the role of a test host is available in the following documents:

EP®-80 Manufacturing Acceptance Test Procedure

RCPN 964-5924-102
Appendix B

EP®-8000 Manufacturing Acceptance Test Procedure

RCPN 964-5924-101
Appendix C

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-17

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

These settings assume that the desired host IP address is

configured with the following Class C address:
148.148.148.1
Furthermore, it is assumed that the IG IP address is configured as:
148.148.148.2 IP Address
255.255.255.0 Subnet mask

6.3.1 CIGI 3.2/Synchronous/UDP

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Figure 6-9. Config Host Properties
CIGI 3.2, Synchronous, UDP

6-18 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

Figure 6-10. Config Host SimHost1 Properties

CIGI 3.2, Synchronous, UDP

6.3.2 ESIG/Raw Ethernet/Asynchronous

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Figure 6-11. Config Host Properties

ESIG, Raw Ethernet, Asynchronous

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-19

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

Figure 6-12. Config Host Properties

ESIG, Raw Ethernet, Asynchronous

6.3.3 ESIG/UDP/Synchronous

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Figure 6-13. Config Host Properties

ESIG, UDP, Synchronous

6-20 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

Figure 6-14. Config Host SimHost1 Properties

ESIG, UDP, Synchronous

6.4 Multiple IG Communication

For multiple IG communication where the IG/host communication is
via UDP over Ethernet (i.e., host-to-IGs and IGs-to-host) note that
the typical configuration has a host-to-IG cable from the NIC in the
host to a switch, and then cables from the switch to the NICs in
each RT of each IG.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

The host should broadcast to all of the RTs on a single port
number. Therefore, each IG should be configured to receive
packets from the host. Application layer protocols, UDP and TCP/IP
port number ranges, IP address formats,
synchronous/asynchronous operation, etc. should all adhere to the
host configuration procedure.
Responses from the master IG when using raw Ethernet are sent
with directed MAC addresses to the host that first talked to the IG.
It is also suggested to have the host examine the source IP address
for CIGI UDP or the source MAC address for raw Ethernet to
determine if the data received is from the expected IG.

NOTE: The IG does not check to see that the data read on a host-
to-IG port is actually from the host IP address specified in
the configuration file.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-21

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

More complex configurations involving visual and Sensor systems

may require responses from multiple IGs typically to different Host
ports.
Configuration parameters that should be reviewed for multiple IG to
host communications are below:

Table 6-7. Configuration Parameters for Multiple IG to Host

Communications
Name Selections Usage
MultiIgEnabled True/False True: Used when one host network controls
multiple IGs
False: Default operation with one host interface
per IG.
MultiIgMode Master/Slave Master: Indicates if this IG is a Master in a
multiple IG system. The master IG is
responsible for generating a sync
packet to keep all IG’s in the system
synchronized. In the EP2
implementation of Multi IG operation,
only the master IG sends response
packets to the host. It sends returns to
the host on a single port number.
Slave: Indicates if this IG is a slave in a multiple
IG system. Slave IG’s only process host
data and do not send response packets
directly to the host.
MultiIgId Numeric Value Used to ID the slave or provide a response
offset. This property has no effect in the current
implementation of EP2 since slave IG’s do not
respond to the host.
MultiIgBcastIpAddr IP Address The broadcast IP address to use for Multi IG
Value SYNC Data communication. This is the IP

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

address to which the Master IG will broadcast
the Multi IG sync packet to. It assumes that all
IG’s in the Multi IG system are on the same
subnet. The Multi IG sync packet is broadcast to
the EP2 reserved UPD port number 5003.
EthernetResponseMode ALWAYS The master IG will respond to each packet sent
from the host with a response packet. Slave IG’s
do not respond even if this option is selected.
ON REQUEST The master IG will only respond to packets from
the host only when the Request Data bit is set.
Slave IG’s do not respond even if this is
selected.
NEVER The master IG will never respond to packets
from the host.
ASYNC

6-22 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

6.5 Example Settings

6.5.1 ESIG/UDP/Asynchronous/Master

Figure 6-15. Config Host Properties

ESIG, UDP, Asynchronous, Multi IG Master

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-23

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

6.5.2 ESIG/RAW Ethernet/Synchronous/Slave

Figure 6-16. Config Host Properties

ESIG, UDP, Synchronous, Multi IG Slave

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6-24 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

6.6 Comm Record/Playback

Comm Record/Playback (CRP) is a set of tools that allows dynamic
analysis of host communication to and from the IG for testing and
troubleshooting purposes. The CRP interface is primarily controlled
from the CLI. The COMM CLI Command has record and playback
subcommands used to control the EP2 CRP App. The App offloads
the actual writing and reading of host data to and from disk. This
allows the RTS to dedicate its resources to real-time management
and scene generation. Furthermore, the App acts as a proxy host.
This allows the RTS to treat all communication packets the same
without specialized software for CRP packets. The App interacts
with the RTS via sockets so it can run locally on the same box as
the RTS or on a remote machine.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Figure 6-17. The EP2 Comm Record/Playback App

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-25

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

6.6.1 Comm \Record Command

The CLI Comm\ Record command is used to record host blocks to
file. To Record a new host block file from CLI (example.hbf):
• Enter the command COMM \Record enable=on
file=”example.hbf” remote=off and wait for the EP2 Comm
Record/Playback App to launch and connect. Note that
recording will start immediately.
• As host packets arrive you will see the Record Frames Count
incrementing.
• Enter COMM \Record enable off to disable the recording and
write the recorded data to the hard disk. Also, click the
‘disconnect’ and then ‘connect’ buttons in the EP2 Comm
Record/Playback App to be sure the application’s buffers are
cleared.
• The new file will be saved in the
C:\EP2\IGSetup\CommRecord directory unless an explicit
directory was specified.
The table below outlines the Record subcommand.
Name Selections Usage
Enable ON/OFF ON: Enables host block capturing
OFF: Disables host block capturing
Remote ON/OFF ON: Tells the RTS that the Comm Record/Playback
App is running on a remote machine. No
packets are captured until the App successfully
connects to the IG and negotiates the terms
for the recording session.
OFF: Instructs the RTS to start the App locally.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

File STRING The filename to save the host block as.

6.6.2 Comm \Playback Command

To Play a previously recorded host block file from CLI
(example.hbf):
• First, check that no active COMM \Record sessions are
running. It is not possible to playback and record at the
same time.
• Enter COMM \Playback enable=on file=”example.hbf” at the
CLI to launch the EP2 Comm Record/Playback App and begin
playback of the file. Note there are options to specify a
startblock and endblock to only play part of a recorded file.

6-26 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 Host Communications

• After playback enter COMM \Playback enable off to release

the file and prepare for the next playback.
The table below outlines the playback subcommand.
Name Selections Usage
Enable ON/OFF ON: Enables host block capturing
OFF: Disables host block capturing
Remote ON/OFF ON: Tells the RTS that the Comm Record/Playback
App is running on a remote machine. No
packets are captured until the App successfully
connects to the IG and negotiates the terms
for the recording session.
OFF: Instructs the RTS to start the App locally.
File STRING The filename to save the host block as.
StartBlock Numeric The block number at which playback starts.
Value
EndBlock Numeric The block number at which playback stops.
Value
Replay ON/OFF Enables the replay of the host block after it ends.
Relocate ON/OFF Enables/Disables the addition of offsets to the
recorded playback. This allows using a host recorded
file captured at one location to be played back with
the offsets to the all model and eyepoint positions.
LatDegree Double Latitude degree component of playback offset.
LatMinute Double Minute component of playback offset.
LatSecond Double Second component of playback offset.
LonDegree Double Longitude degree component of playback offset.
LonMinute Double Minute component of playback offset.
LonSecond Double Second component of playback offset.
Altitude Double Altitude component of playback offset.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6.6.3 OpcodeDecode Tool
EP2 has an OpcodeDecode tool that can be used for analyzing data
in HBF files. Details can be found in the EP2 User Interface Manual
(RCPN 964-5924-002) in section 1.9.1.7.2, OpcodeDecode Window.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes 6-27

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Host Communications

This page intentionally left blank

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

6-28 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
Appendix A
EP to EP2 CLI
Comparison

A.1 Introduction
The CLI commands for the EP2 interface of the EP2 real-time
software are very similar to the EP real-time, so the system can run
if driven from an unmodified host driver program. CLI commands
that were changed from those used by EP are referenced in this
table.
This table is published to help track the status of the CLI
commands for EP2. As new functionality is added, clarifications will
be added to this table.

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

A.2 Differences between EP and EP2 CLI
Commands and Parameters
Table A-1 provides a summary of the differences between EP and
EP2 real-time CLI commands and parameters. The status column
refers to how the EP2 CLI value relates to each EP CLI value.
Status may be described as:
• No Change – No change in CLI name or functionality.
• Changed – CLI command or parameter can still be used as
defined by EP, but has been updated for EP2.
• New – New CLI command or parameter used by EP2.

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-1

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

• EP2 not supported – CLI parameter is not functional in EP2 at

this time.
• Not yet implemented– CLI command and the associated
parameters are not available in EP2 at this time.
• EP2 Deprecated – EP2 parameter is no longer used/supported.
• EP Deprecated – CLI command and/or parameters have been
deprecated and replaced by a new EP2 command. See the
appropriate section in Chapter 2, CLI Commands of this manual
for further information.
• EP Deprecated list:
klod \model
klod \terrain
rotorwash \fic
Status shown in Red text are 13.0 updates.

Table A-1. EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

abort ABORT CLI Command No Change

airports AIRPORT CLI Command Changed

list list Parameter No Change
listfull listfull Parameter No Change
index index Parameter No Change
icao icao Parameter No Change
iata Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

name Parameter New
latdegree Parameter New
latminute Parameter New
latsecond Parameter New
longdegree Parameter New
longminute Parameter New
longsecond Parameter New
altitude Parameter New
h Parameter New
p Parameter New
r Parameter New
elevation Parameter New
pageRange Parameter New
lodScale Parameter New
toy Parameter New
enterScript Parameter New
exitScript Parameter New

A-2 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

duo Parameter New
spec Parameter New
compRadius Parameter New
paged Parameter EP2 Deprecated
listpaged Parameter New
listrevision Parameter New
Listxref Parameter New

AIRPORT \ALN CLI Command New

maxRwyLength Parameter New
minRwyLength Parameter New
maxHeadingDiff Parameter New
maxDistFromOrigin Parameter New

airports \max CLI Command Not yet Implemented

AIRPORT \LOD CLI Command New

scale Parameter New

AIRPORT \SUBMODEL CLI Command New

name Parameter New
sm Parameter New
x Parameter New
y Parameter New
z Parameter New
select Parameter New

AIRPORT \VISIT CLI Command New

name Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ALPHACULL CLI Command New
windgb Parameter New
pmod Parameter New
dump Parameter New
map Parameter New
reload Parameter New
force Parameter New

alter \mm CLI Command Not yet Implemented

select Parameter Not yet Implemented
bottom Parameter Not yet Implemented
top Parameter Not yet Implemented

animate ANIMATE CLI Command No Change

list list Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-3

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

start start Parameter No Change
stop stop Parameter No Change
quit quit Parameter No Change
step step Parameter No Change
suspend suspend Parameter No Change
pause pause Parameter No Change
resume resume Parameter No Change
notify notify Parameter No Change
sequence sequence Parameter No Change
frame frame Parameter No Change
scalar scalar Parameter No Change
delay delay Parameter No Change
style style Parameter No Change
cycle_time cycle_time Parameter No Change
iters iters Parameter No Change
auto_unload auto_unload Parameter No Change
no_auto_unload Parameter EP2 not supported
continuous continuous Parameter No Change
load load Parameter No Change
unload unload Parameter No Change
animate \sequence ANIMATE \SEQUENCE CLI Command No Change
list list Parameter No Change
num num Parameter No Change
start start Parameter No Change
finish finish Parameter No Change
chain chain Parameter No Change
scalar scalar Parameter No Change
cycle_time cycle_time Parameter No Change
style style Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

delay delay Parameter No Change
iters iters Parameter No Change
auto_unload auto_unload Parameter No Change

ATMOSPHERE CLI Command New

red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
terrainRadius Parameter New
layers Parameter New
illuminationScale Parameter New
rhhScalar Parameter New
reflectionTransmittanceScale Parameter New
emband Parameter New

ATMOSPHERE \GLARE CLI Command New

enable Parameter New

A-4 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

scene Parameter New
width Parameter New
haloWidth Parameter New
intensity Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
emband Parameter New

ATMOSPHERE \TUNE CLI Command New

inScatterScalar Parameter New
Scene Parameter New

barycentric CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
clear Parameter Not yet Implemented
radius Parameter Not yet Implemented

barycentric \file CLI Command Not yet Implemented

load Parameter Not yet Implemented
save Parameter Not yet Implemented

barycentric \spn_mode CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
altitude Parameter Not yet Implemented
mergerate Parameter Not yet Implemented

BEHAVIOR \MODEL CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bottom Parameter
top Parameter New

all Parameter New

enable Parameter New

BEHAVIOR \PARAM CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
clean Parameter New

bind BIND CLI Command No Change

opti Parameter EP2 not supported
nrange Parameter EP2 not supported
priority Parameter EP2 not supported
list list Parameter No Change
model model Parameter No Change
clean clean Parameter No Change
ms ms Parameter Changed

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-5

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

select select Parameter Changed
render render Parameter No Change
procfgncrit Parameter EP2 not supported
parent Parameter EP2 not supported
x Parameter EP2 not supported
y Parameter EP2 not supported
z Parameter EP2 not supported
heading Parameter EP2 not supported
pitch Parameter EP2 not supported
roll Parameter EP2 not supported
mr Parameter EP2 not supported

BIND \AUTOPRIORITY CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
noPromotion Parameter New
hostBoundOnly Parameter New
FtCritTransScale Parameter New
FtNonCritTransScale Parameter New
minVelocity Parameter New

bind \lift CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
scalar_eye Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

bind \terrain BIND \TERRAIN CLI Command Changed

list Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

mm mm Parameter Changed
enable enable Parameter No Change
conform conform Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
smoothpr smoothpr Parameter No Change
upsmooth upsmooth Parameter No Change
downsmooth downsmooth Parameter No Change
priority Parameter EP2 not supported
tp_length tp_length Parameter No Change
tp_width tp_width Parameter No Change
tp_period Parameter EP2 not supported
far_tp_period Parameter EP2 not supported
tp_mode tp_mode Parameter No Change
tp_Xoffset Parameter New
tp_Yoffset Parameter New
modeTransRange Parameter New
list Parameter New

A-6 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

bind \wave BIND \WAVE CLI Command No Change

list Parameter EP2 not supported
mm mm Parameter Changed
enable enable Parameter No Change
conform conform Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
smoothpr smoothpr Parameter No Change
upsmooth upsmooth Parameter No Change
downsmooth downsmooth Parameter No Change
priority Parameter EP2 not supported
tp_length tp_length Parameter No Change
tp_width tp_width Parameter No Change
tp_draft Parameter EP2 not supported

binocular CLI Command Not yet Implemented

heading Parameter Not yet Implemented
pitch Parameter Not yet Implemented
zoom Parameter Not yet Implemented
mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
cursor Parameter Not yet Implemented
pip Parameter Not yet Implemented
trackmm Parameter Not yet Implemented
mmOffX Parameter Not yet Implemented
mmOffY Parameter Not yet Implemented
mmOffZ Parameter Not yet Implemented

bowspray BOWSPRAY CLI Command Changed

num num Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

type type Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
xoffset xOffset Parameter No Change
yoffset Parameter EP2 not supported
zoffset Parameter EP2 not supported
impactvelocity Parameter EP2 not supported
impactdepth Parameter EP2 not supported
start start Parameter No Change
stop Parameter New
clean clean Parameter No Change
topY Parameter New
topZ Parameter New
bottomY Parameter New
bottomZ Parameter New
bowangle Parameter New

bowspray \define BOWSPRAY \DEFINE CLI Command Changed

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-7

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

type type Parameter No Change
texture Parameter Not yet Implemented
texturelength Parameter Not yet Implemented
texturewidth Parameter Not yet Implemented
widthQ1 Parameter Not yet Implemented
widthQ2 Parameter Not yet Implemented
widthQ3 Parameter Not yet Implemented
widthQ4 Parameter Not yet Implemented
maxsegmentlength Parameter Not yet Implemented
spreadscale Parameter Not yet Implemented
spraylength Parameter Not yet Implemented
fadein Parameter Not yet Implemented
ownshiprif Parameter Not yet Implemented
rifupdist Parameter Not yet Implemented
rifbackdist Parameter Not yet Implemented
startdecksprayimpactvel Parameter Not yet Implemented
completedecksprayimpactvel Parameter Not yet Implemented
dragscale Parameter Not yet Implemented
buildownshiprifrate Parameter Not yet Implemented
clearownshiprifrate Parameter Not yet Implemented
fadein Parameter Not yet Implemented
particle Parameter New
TurningRigidness Parameter New
UpdateParticleDef Parameter New
SprayVelRatio Parameter New
SprayVelVariance Parameter New
SprayVelBase Parameter New
SprayVelClamp Parameter New
SprayZRatio Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SprayZBase Parameter New
SprayZClamp Parameter New
ParticleSizeRatio Parameter New
ParticleSizeVariance Parameter New
ParticleSizeBase Parameter New
ParticleSizeClamp Parameter New
ParticleSpacingRatio Parameter New
ParticleSpacingBase Parameter New
ParticleSpacingClamp Parameter New

bowwake BOWWAKE CLI Command No Change

num num Parameter No Change
type type Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
xoffset xoffset Parameter No Change
yoffset yoffset Parameter No Change
widthScale Parameter New

A-8 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

start start Parameter No Change
stop stop Parameter No Change
clean clean Parameter No Change

bowwake \define BOWWAKE \DEFINE CLI Command Changed

type type Parameter No Change
template template Parameter No Change
boatlength boatlength Parameter No Change
width16 width16 Parameter No Change
width8 width8 Parameter No Change
width4 width4 Parameter No Change
width2 width2 Parameter No Change
tolerance tolerance Parameter No Change
spread spread Parameter No Change
fadein fadein Parameter No Change
beginFade beginFade Parameter No Change
endFade endFade Parameter No Change
transparencyMultiplier Parameter New
lodRange Parameter New

BS \TUNE CLI Command New

opacityMod Parameter New
brightModTop Parameter New
brightPersistence Parameter New
brightTop Parameter New
bumpModTop Parameter New
bright3dScale Parameter New
horizonDepressionScale Parameter New
ambientIntensity Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

specularIntensity Parameter New
profileAA Parameter New
colorRed Parameter New
colorGreen Parameter New
colorBlue Parameter New
glare Parameter New
mapSize Parameter New
heightAboveHot Parameter New
fadeHeight Parameter New
vis Parameter New
textureAA Parameter New
mode Parameter New
hazeAlpha Parameter New
hazeMax Parameter New
hazeStartFadeRange Parameter New
hazeEndFadeRange Parameter New
atEyeVisScalar Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-9

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

emband Parameter New

CAPTURE \IMAGEBUS CLI Command New

file Parameter New
stop Parameter New

CAPTURE \SCENEBUS CLI Command New

type Parameter New
file Parameter New
sp Parameter New
fov Parameter New
showJumps Parameter New
hwcompare Parameter New

CAPTURE \TEXTUREBUS CLI Command New

file Parameter New
stop Parameter New

captureimage CAPTUREIMAGE CLI Command Changed

view Parameter EP2 not supported
id id Parameter No Change
clear clear Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
width width Parameter No Change
height height Parameter No Change
zoom zoom Parameter No Change
testpattern testpattern Parameter No Change
pattern pattern Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

symbology symbology Parameter No Change
symbol symbol Parameter No Change
select select Parameter No Change
Viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New

CAPTUREIMAGE \CONFIGURE CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
enableTestPattern Parameter New
enableSymbology Parameter New
emband Parameter New

category \model CLI Command Not yet Implemented

model Parameter Not yet Implemented
categ Parameter Not yet Implemented

catenary CATENARY CLI Command No Change

A-10 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

number number Parameter No Change

enable enable Parameter No Change

type type Parameter No Change

length length Parameter No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change

x x Parameter No Change

y y Parameter No Change

z z Parameter No Change

endmm endmm Parameter No Change

endx endx Parameter No Change

endy endy Parameter No Change

endz endz Parameter No Change

latdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented

latminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
latsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
longdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
longminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
longsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
altitude Parameter Not yet Implemented
endlatdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
endlatminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
endlatsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
endlongdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
endlongminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
endlongsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
endaltitude Parameter Not yet Implemented
smc Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented

No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

catenary \define CATENARY \DEFINE CLI Command
type type Parameter No Change

width width Parameter No Change

red red Parameter No Change

green green Parameter No Change

blue blue Parameter No Change

planelimitedend Parameter Not yet Implemented

enableFade Parameter Not yet Implemented
beginFade Parameter Not yet Implemented
endFade Parameter Not yet Implemented

cdc CDC CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
cloud cloud Parameter No Change
priority priority Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-11

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

cdl CDL CLI Command No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
cmd cmd Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
segment segment Parameter No Change
bypassmfe Parameter No Change
cmdclear cmdclear Parameter No Change
segclear segclear Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
auto Parameter EP2 not supported
indicator Parameter EP2 not supported
materialmaskindex materialmaskindex Parameter No Change
begx begx Parameter No Change
begy begy Parameter No Change
begz begz Parameter No Change
endx endx Parameter No Change
endy endy Parameter No Change
endz endz Parameter No Change
movestamps Parameter EP2 not supported
movingmodelmaskindex Parameter New
bypassmfe Parameter New

CDL \CONFIG CLI Command New

reportMode Parameter New
weather Parameter New
minCloudFade Parameter New
cloudSphereScale Parameter New
boxScale Parameter New
themelFeatures Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

CDL \FIC CLI Command New
enable Parameter New

cglow CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

cglow \define CLI Command Not yet Implemented

list Parameter Not yet Implemented
index Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
latdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
latminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
latsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
longdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
longminute Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-12 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

longsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
scalex Parameter Not yet Implemented
scaley Parameter Not yet Implemented
intensity Parameter Not yet Implemented
lodrange Parameter Not yet Implemented
cglow \emband CLI Command Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented
emName Parameter Not yet Implemented
red Parameter Not yet Implemented
green Parameter Not yet Implemented
blue Parameter Not yet Implemented
intensity Parameter Not yet Implemented
dawnscalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
duskscalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
nightscalar Parameter Not yet Implemented

cglow \global CLI Command Not yet Implemented

zoffset Parameter Not yet Implemented

cglow \remove CLI Command Not yet Implemented

index Parameter Not yet Implemented

cglow \textures CLI Command Not yet Implemented

chain CHAIN CLI Command No Change

child child Parameter No Change
parent parent Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
pitch pitch Parameter No Change
roll roll Parameter No Change
stabX Parameter EP2 not supported
stabY Parameter EP2 not supported
stabZ Parameter No Change
stabHead Parameter No Change
stabPitch Parameter No Change
stabRoll Parameter No Change

chain \follow CHAIN \FOLLOW CLI Command No Change

child child Parameter No Change
parent parent Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-13

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

z z Parameter No Change

chain \lookat CHAIN \LOOKAT CLI Command No Change

child child Parameter No Change
parent parent Parameter No Change

chain \spin CHAIN \SPIN CLI Command No Change

child child Parameter No Change
parent parent Parameter No Change
radius radius Parameter No Change
spinaxis spinaxis Parameter No Change

chain \tow CHAIN \TOW CLI Command Changed

child child Parameter No Change
parent parent Parameter No Change
dist Parameter EP2 not supported
distance Parameter New

clamp CLAMP CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
list Parameter EP2 not supported

clamp \extrap_vel CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
xyz Parameter Not yet Implemented
hpr Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

clamp \hpr CLAMP \HPR CLI Command No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
minh minh Parameter No Change
minp minp Parameter No Change
minr minr Parameter No Change
maxh maxh Parameter No Change
maxp maxp Parameter No Change
maxr maxr Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
list Parameter EP2 not supported

clamp \xyz CLAMP \XYZ CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
minx minx Parameter No Change
miny miny Parameter No Change
minz minz Parameter No Change
maxx maxx Parameter No Change

A-14 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

maxy maxy Parameter No Change
maxz maxz Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
list Parameter EP2 not supported

cleandirectory CLI Command Not yet Implemented

fileExtension Parameter Not yet Implemented
dirName Parameter Not yet Implemented

CLEAR \LABEL CLI Command New

id Parameter New

clearscreen CLEAR \SCREEN CLI Command Changed

chan Parameter EP2 not supported
x Parameter EP2 not supported
y Parameter EP2 not supported
id Parameter New

clilog CLI Command Not yet Implemented

off Parameter Not yet Implemented
on Parameter Not yet Implemented

clio CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

CLIPSHADOWS CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
viewCasters Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

range Parameter New

clouds CLOUDS CLI Command Changed

aboveenable aboveEnable Parameter No Change
visAbove visAbove Parameter No Change
ambreduct ambReduct Parameter No Change
ambreductdensitydependent Parameter EP2 not supported
ambreductdensityscale Parameter EP2 not supported
layer layer Parameter No Change
region region Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
bottom bottom Parameter No Change
top top Parameter No Change
tscud tscud Parameter No Change
bscud bscud Parameter No Change
density density Parameter No Change
cloudvis cloudVis Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-15

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

VCDamplitudeScalar Parameter New
VCDfrequencyScalar Parameter New
ScudAmplitudeScalar Parameter New
MiddleLayerPower Parameter New
ExpandMiddleLayer Parameter New
typeIndex Parameter New
list list Parameter No Change
cigiLayerThreeBrokenClouds Parameter New
emband Parameter New

CLOUDS \AAAUTOCONTROL CLI Command New

layer Parameter New
enable Parameter New
minVis Parameter New
minTrans Parameter New
aglTriggerAlt Parameter New

clouds \broken CLOUDS \BROKEN CLI Command Changed

region region Parameter No Change
density density Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
altitude altitude Parameter No Change
terShadEnable Parameter EP2 not supported
terShadContrast Parameter EP2 not supported
distance distance Parameter No Change
visReductInside Parameter EP2 not supported
tershadowenable Parameter New
tershadowcontrast Parameter New
scudNoisePeriod Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

scudNoiseAmplitude Parameter New
scudOpacity Parameter New
inCloudVisRange Parameter New
speedQInit Parameter New
emband Parameter New

CLOUDS \BTUNE CLI Command New

backDist Parameter New
colorInterp Parameter New
drawScud Parameter New
drawSpeedQ Parameter New
drawPuffs Parameter New
maskRotation Parameter New
volScudSpeedQIntScale Parameter New
maxScudDelta Parameter New
affectedByWind Parameter New
numPuffTasks Parameter New

A-16 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

volScudSpeedQDensityScale Parameter New

fixedMipInnerSmallPuffShrinkDist Parameter New

flattenScud Parameter New

clouds \cue CLOUDS \CUE CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
intensity Parameter EP2 not supported
scudScale Parameter New
minVis Parameter New
size Parameter New
baseSizeForCullRangeScale Parameter New
scene Parameter New
emband Parameter New

CLOUDS \HORIZON CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
horizonAA Parameter New
MinHrzRangePercent Parameter New
MaxHrzRangePercent Parameter New
ScalarRate Parameter New
ClampMinHrzRange Parameter New
ClampRecHrzRange Parameter New
emband Parameter New

CLOUDS \OCTA CLI Command New

octa Parameter New
mapName Parameter New
widthMiles Parameter New
lodRange Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fadeBandPercent Parameter New
lighting Parameter New
spanratefill Parameter New
spanratefillnearrange Parameter New
spanratefillfarrange Parameter New
opaquecenterrange Parameter New
thickness Parameter New
particleScale Parameter New
randomScale Parameter New
nodrawcullrange Parameter New
zoffset Parameter New
cloudtype Parameter New
topIntensity Parameter New
bottomIntensity Parameter New
materialIndex Parameter New
mipTexelThreshold Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-17

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
scudStartRange Parameter New
scudFullRange Parameter New
fixedMipLevel Patameter New
print Parameter New

CLOUDS \OCTATEXTURE CLI Command New

octa Parameter New
path Parameter New
tex0 Parameter New
tex1 Parameter New
tex2 Parameter New
tex3 Parameter New
tex4 Parameter New
tex5 Parameter New
tex6 Parameter New
tex7 Parameter New
thickness Parameter New
depthModAmp Parameter New
print Parameter New

CLOUDS \OPAQUETEXTURE CLI Command New

path Parameter New
tex0 Parameter New
tex1 Parameter New
tex2 Parameter New
tex3 Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tex4 Parameter New
tex5 Parameter New
tex6 Parameter New
tex7 Parameter New
thickness Parameter New
depthModAmp Parameter New
sandStorm Parameter New
print Parameter New

clouds \scud CLOUDS \SCUD CLI Command Changed

scalar Parameter EP2 not supported
rate Parameter EP2 not supported
btrans bTrans Parameter No Change
ttrans tTrans Parameter No Change
bScudzOffset Parameter New
tScudzOffset Parameter New
layer Parameter New

A-18 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

emband Parameter New

CLOUDS \TEXTURE CLI Command New

write Parameter New
seed Parameter New
emband Parameter New

clouds \transition CLOUDS \TRANSITION CLI Command Changed

ttrans tTrans Parameter No Change
btrans bTrans Parameter No Change
layer layer Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

clouds \trim CLOUDS \TRIM CLI Command Changed

layer layer Parameter No Change
bottom bottom Parameter No Change
top top Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

CLOUDS \TUNE CLI Command New

layer Parameter New
profileAA Parameter New
colorRed Parameter New
colorGreen Parameter New
colorBlue Parameter New
ambientIntensity Parameter New
bottomSpecularIntensity Parameter New
topSpecularIntensity Parameter New
glare Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

opacityMod Parameter New
brightModBottom Parameter New
brightModTop Parameter New
brightBottom Parameter New
brightTop Parameter New
bumpModBottom Parameter New
bumpModTop Parameter New
bright3dScale Parameter New
horizonDepressionScale Parameter New
mapSize Parameter New
brightPersistence Parameter New
textureAA Parameter New
holeFade Parameter New
noMiddleLayerTest Parameter New
squashOuterLayer Parameter New
AAAltFadePercent Parameter New
TxtAltFadePercent Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-19

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

typeIndex Parameter New
hazeAlpha Parameter New
hazeMax Parameter New
hazeStartFadeRange Parameter New
hazeEndFadeRange Parameter New
atEyeVisScalar Parameter New
emband Parameter New

CLOUDS \TYPE CLI Command New

index Parameter New
octaLevel Parameter New
cloudtypetexture Parameter New
listTextures Parameter New
listTypes Parameter New
emband Parameter New

clouds \vcd CLI Command Not yet Implemented

scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
rate Parameter Not yet Implemented

CLOUDS \VOLUMESCUD
(Prototype) CLI Command New
enable Parameter New

clouds \wisps CLI Command Not yet Implemented

thickness Parameter Not yet Implemented
radius Parameter Not yet Implemented
size Parameter Not yet Implemented
range Parameter Not yet Implemented
xscale Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fadeDist Parameter Not yet Implemented
speedScalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
intensity Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
stretchFactor Parameter Not yet Implemented

cmdgroup CLI Command Not yet Implemented

master Parameter Not yet Implemented
slave Parameter Not yet Implemented
mask Parameter Not yet Implemented

COBRA CLI Command New

align Parameter New
log Parameter New
save Parameter New
restore Parameter New

A-20 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

COBRA \COLOR CLI Command New

view Parameter New
enable Parameter New
load Parameter New
save Parameter New

COBRA \EDGEBLENDCOLOR CLI Command New

view Parameter New
load Parameter New
save Parameter New
gamma Parameter New

COBRA \EDGEBLENDMASK CLI Command New

view Parameter New
enable Parameter New
load Parameter New
save Parameter New
dump Parameter New

COBRA \INTENSITY CLI Command New

view Parameter New
enable Parameter New
load Parameter New
save Parameter New
print Parameter New
x Parameter New
y Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

COBRA \NLIM CLI Command New
view Parameter New
enable Parameter New
load Parameter New
save Parameter New

COBRA \SYMBOLOGY CLI Command New

view Parameter New
enable Parameter New
file Parameter New
save Parameter New

COBRA \TESTPATTERN CLI Command New

view Parameter New
enable Parameter New
type Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-21

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

file Parameter New
resx Parameter New
resy Parameter New
save Parameter New

collisionmask COLLISIONMASK CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter Changed
list list Parameter No Change
HAT HAT Parameter No Change
NoHAT noHAT Parameter No Change
Line Line Parameter No Change
NoLine noLine Parameter No Change
LOS LOS Parameter No Change
NoLOS noLOS Parameter No Change
HD HD Parameter No Change
NoHD noHD Parameter No Change

color COLOR CLI Command Changed

palette Parameter EP2 not supported
number Parameter EP2 not supported
red red Parameter No Change
green green Parameter No Change
blue blue Parameter No Change
n Parameter New

COLOR \IDXOVERRIDE CLI Command New

trigger Parameter New
replace Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

color \restore COLOR \RESTORE CLI Command No Change
palette Parameter EP2 not supported
file file Parameter No Change

color \save COLOR \SAVE CLI Command No Change

palette Parameter EP2 not supported
file file Parameter No Change
overwrite overwrite Parameter No Change

colplane CLI Command Not yet Implemented

view Parameter Not yet Implemented
plane Parameter Not yet Implemented

comm COMM CLI Command No Change

id Parameter EP2 not supported
reset reset Parameter No Change
host host Parameter No Change

A-22 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

igResponse Parameter EP2 not supported
debug Parameter EP2 not supported
list Parameter EP2 not supported
clear Parameter EP2 not supported
all Parameter EP2 not supported

COMM \CONFIG CLI Command New

handshake Parameter New
clearOnSendFg Parameter New
smoothHat Parameter New

COMM \DEBUG CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
cpc Parameter New
CLI Parameter New
CigiFrameNumber Parameter New

comm \playback COMM \PLAYBACK CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
file file Parameter No Change
remote Parameter New
decode Parameter EP2 not supported
start Parameter EP2 not supported
end Parameter EP2 not supported
latdegree latdegree Parameter No Change
latminute latminute Parameter No Change
latsecond latsecond Parameter No Change
longdegree Parameter EP2 not supported
longminute Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

longsecond Parameter EP2 not supported
altitude altitude Parameter No Change
relocate relocate Parameter No Change
playtofile Parameter EP2 not supported
avifile Parameter EP2 not supported
channel Parameter EP2 not supported
framerate Parameter EP2 not supported
frameratescale Parameter EP2 not supported
startblock Parameter New
endblock Parameter New
replay Parameter New
londegree Parameter New
lonminute Parameter New
lonsecond Parameter New
closeRemote Parameter New

comm \record COMM \RECORD CLI Command Changed

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-23

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

enable enable Parameter No Change
remote Parameter New
file file Parameter No Change
closeRemote Parameter New

COMM \SERIALSYNC CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
comPortName Parameter New
signalDutyCycle Parameter New
ignoreOffset Parameter New

COMM \STATS CLI Command New

conn Parameter New

COMM \WATCH CLI Command New

ms Parameter New
scalar Parameter New
enable Parameter New
delta Parameter New
lat Parameter New
lon Parameter New
alt Parameter New
velocity Parameter New
remove Parameter New

continue CONTINUE CLI Command No Change

converge CONVERGE CLI Command No Change

list list Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

type type Parameter No Change
scenario scenario Parameter No Change
unload unload Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
start start Parameter No Change
pause pause Parameter No Change
load load Parameter No Change
stop stop Parameter No Change
resume resume Parameter No Change

CONVERGE \DEFINE CLI Command New

name Parameter New
type Parameter New
scenario Parameter New
h Parameter New
p Parameter New
r Parameter New

A-24 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

impactTime Parameter New
veerTime Parameter New
speedRatio Parameter New
FixedSpeed Parameter New
random Parameter New
trackownship Parameter New

COUNTERMEASURE CLI Command New

number Parameter New
all Parameter New
list Parameter New
start Parameter New
clean Parameter New

COUNTERMEASURE \DEFINE CLI Command New

number Parameter New
parentModel Parameter New
parentSubModel Parameter Changed for 11.0
xOffset Parameter New
yOffset Parameter New
zOffset Parameter New
particleSystem Parameter New
xDir Parameter New
yDir Parameter New
zDir Parameter New

COUNTERMEASURE \MONITOR CLI Command New

number Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

cpc \blend CPC \BLEND CLI Command No Change
display Display Parameter No Change
projector Projector Parameter No Change
state State Parameter No Change

cpc \dimmer CPC \DIMMER CLI Command No Change

display Display Parameter No Change
projector Projector Parameter No Change
preset Preset Parameter No Change

cpc \nvg CPC \NVG CLI Command No Change

display Display Parameter No Change
projector Projector Parameter No Change
mode Mode Parameter No Change

cpc \power CPC \POWER CLI Command No Change

display Display Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-25

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

projector Projector Parameter No Change
state State Parameter No Change

cpc \shutdown CPC \SHUTDOWN CLI Command No Change

pwr_state PWR_STATE Parameter No Change

cpc \utmdayedgeblend CPC \UTMDAYEDGEBLEND CLI Command No Change

display Display Parameter No Change
projector Projector Parameter No Change
state Mode Parameter No Change

crash CRASH CLI Command No Change

view view Parameter No Change
state state Parameter No Change
red red Parameter No Change
green green Parameter No Change
blue blue Parameter No Change
rate rate Parameter No Change

crtdbg \memory CLI Command Not yet Implemented

check Parameter Not yet Implemented
checkAlways Parameter Not yet Implemented

crtdbg \report crash CLI Command Not yet Implemented

crash Parameter Not yet Implemented

ct CLI Command Not yet Implemented

offset Parameter Not yet Implemented
desiredLevel Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

CTANDTHEME CLI Command New
use3DWholeEarth Parameter New

CTANDTHEME \CONFIG CLI Command New

FICCacheHiwaterMark Parameter New
InsetMaskCacheHiwaterMark Parameter New
MgThmCacheHiwaterMark Parameter New
MaxFree3DObjects Parameter New

CTANDTHEME \CT CLI Command New

ctFormat Parameter New
texturePageRatio Parameter New
texturePageInThrottle Parameter New
texturePageInThrottleStage2 Parameter New
textureMaxLevel Parameter New
fadeNumFields Parameter New

A-26 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

blendStartLevel Parameter New
photoSupoerSampleDstLevelMin Parameter New
photoSuperSampleSrcLevelMin Parameter New
enableBlending Parameter New
projectedPixelSizeScalar Parameter New

CTANDTHEME \CTDEBUG CLI Command New

debugCTBorders Parameter New
debugProjBorders Parameter New
debugFICs Parameter New
debugMaterialFICs Parameter New
ficIndex Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
ficEnable Parameter New
listFICColors Parameter New
dumpFICColors Parameter New
listFICIndex Parameter New
listFICMapTable Parameter New
simple Parameter New

CTANDTHEME
\DISTTOSHOREPAGER CLI Command New
maxLevel Parameter New

CTANDTHEME
\DISTTOSHOREWITHGRADIENT CLI Command New
faceNum Parameter New
filename Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

CTANDTHEME \ELEVATION CLI Command New
elevDataPath Parameter New
elevPageInThrottle Parameter New
maxElevationLevel Parameter New
elevPageRadius Parameter New

CTANDTHEME \FEATURES3D CLI Command New

featPageInThrottle Parameter New
max3DFeatureLevel Parameter New
min3DFeatureLevel Parameter New
pageRangeAtMaxLevel Parameter New
quadTreeLevelDiff Parameter New
globalDensity Parameter New
enable3D Parameter New
outOfRangeDbg Parameter New
pageMode Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-27

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

fovScalar Parameter New
cull3D Parameter New

CTANDTHEME \LOADBRUSH CLI Command New

BrushMapName Parameter New
BrushNum Parameter New
list Parameter New

CTANDTHEME \REGION CLI Command New

pageInThrottle Parameter New
radiusScale Parameter New
distanceFromRadius Parameter New
unloadRadiusDistance Parameter New
unloadFieldDelay Parameter New
loadRegion Parameter New
unloadRegion Parameter New
listRegion Parameter New

CTANDTHEME
\REMOVEDISTTOSHORE CLI Command New
faceNum Parameter New
filename Parameter New

CTANDTHEME
\REMOVEDISTTOSHOREWITHG
RADIENT CLI Command New
faceNum Parameter New
filename Parameter New

CTANDTHEME \STATS CLI Command New

FileName Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

EventName Parameter New
Clear Parameter New
Dump Parameter New
Reset Parameter New
FileClear Parameter New

CTTEST CLI Command New

testPattern Parameter New
label Parameter New
CTBlending Parameter New
replaceUndefinedByRed Parameter New
undefinedByNightCTAtNight Parameter New
ProfileLog Parameter New
PFProfileLog Parameter New
LogFile Parameter New
disableSmallBlockCache Parameter New

A-28 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

bldThemePtFeats Parameter New
enableThemePtFeatLog Parameter New
enableThemeColorMode Parameter New
enableThemeAbsMode Parameter New
enableMipLevelClamp Parameter New
dontCareAboutCTReady Parameter New
reportScreenCenterTexture Parameter New
testColorVariuesWithMipLevel Parameter New

useNewFastJetZoomCTPagingPriorit
yAlgorithm Parameter New

CTTHEME CLI Command New

useThemeAbsMode Parameter New
useTexelLerpProjPlaneMode Parameter New
interThemeBlendNumLevs Parameter New
enableThemeBiLinearBlending Parameter New
enableNewProjPlaneMode Parameter New

examineUseRadiusFlagForPFPopulat
ion Parameter New

CTTHEME \CULTFEATURES CLI Command New

density Parameter New

CTTHEME \CULTLIGHTS CLI Command New

density Parameter New

CTTHEME \CULTTUNING CLI Command New

enableHighLevFicPFResMode Parameter New
pageRangeScalar Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

Lev5FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev6FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev7FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev8FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev9FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev10FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev11FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev12FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev13FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev14FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev15FicPFResLevEnabled Parameter New
Lev5TCellDivisions Parameter New
Lev6TCellDivisions Parameter New
Lev7TCellDivisions Parameter New
Lev8TCellDivisions Parameter New
Lev9TCellDivisions Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-29

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

Lev10TCellDivisions Parameter New
Lev11TCellDivisions Parameter New
Lev12TCellDivisions Parameter New
Lev13TCellDivisions Parameter New
Lev14TCellDivisions Parameter New
Lev15TCellDivisions Parameter New

cultlights CLI Command Not yet Implemented

maxnum Parameter Not yet Implemented
densityindex Parameter Not yet Implemented
faderate Parameter Not yet Implemented
modelscalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
hatheight Parameter Not yet Implemented
minhatscale Parameter Not yet Implemented

DATABASE Parameter New

mode Parameter New
units Parameter New
origin Parameter New
latdegree Parameter New
latminute Parameter New
latsecond Parameter New
longdegree Parameter New
longminute Parameter New
longsecond Parameter New
altitude Parameter New

database_units CLI Command Not yet Implemented

units Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

db DB CLI Command Changed
file file Parameter No Change
force Parameter New

DB \CALC CLI Command New

angle Parameter New
dist Parameter New

DB \CIGI CLI Command New

skipUnload Parameter New

DB \COMPLETE CLI Command New

DB \IGNORE CLI Command New

paths Parameter New
clear Parameter New

A-30 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

list Parameter New

db \insetpaging CLI Command Not yet Implemented

on Parameter Not yet Implemented
off Parameter Not yet Implemented

DB \LIST CLI Command New

path Parameter New
type Parameter New

db \origin CLI Command Not yet Implemented

latdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
latminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
latsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
longdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
longminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
longsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
fixeddboriginmode Parameter Not yet Implemented

DB \REPOSITION CLI Command New

minTime Parameter New
distance Parameter New
maxTime Parameter New
stWait Parameter New
initMaxTime Parameter New
black Parameter New

DB \STATUS CLI Command New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

DB \UNLOAD CLI Command New
path Parameter New
type Parameter New

DB \WGS84 CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
ignoreRedicules Parameter New
test Parameter New
test2 Parameter New

DB \WORLD CLI Command New

worldRadius Parameter New
flatRadius Parameter New
roundWorld Parameter New
airportCorrect Parameter New

DEFINE CLI Command New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-31

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

name Parameter New
value Parameter New
list Parameter New

defocus DEFOCUS CLI Command Changed

level level Parameter No Change
channelMask Parameter New
alternateMask Parameter New

defocus \level DEFOCUS \LEVEL CLI Command No Change

cdefocus cDefocus Parameter No Change
rdefocus rDefocus Parameter No Change
level level Parameter No Change

DEFOCUS \RASTER CLI Command New

sigmaMin Parameter New
sigmaMax Parameter New

depthcomplexity CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

devgain DEVGAIN CLI Command No Change

band band Parameter No Change
gain gain Parameter No Change
mrdt Parameter EP2 not supported

devlevel DEVLEVEL CLI Command Changed

band Parameter EP2 not supported
temperatureC Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emband Parameter New
leveltemp Parameter New

diguy DIGUY CLI Command Changed

init init Parameter No Change
charTypesDefined Parameter New

diguy \action DIGUY \ACTION CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
index index Parameter No Change
name name Parameter No Change
speed speed Parameter No Change
forceAction forceAction Parameter No Change

diguy \char DIGUY \CHAR CLI Command No Change

A-32 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

list list Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
create create Parameter No Change
index index Parameter No Change
name name Parameter No Change
appearIndex appearIndex Parameter No Change
destroy destroy Parameter No Change

DIGUY \DEFINEACTIONLIST CLI Command New

actionListName Parameter New
actionIndex Parameter New
actionAliasName Parameter New
actionName Parameter New

DIGUY \DEFINECHARTYPE CLI Command New

charTypeName Parameter New
charTypeIndex Parameter New
appearanceIndex Parameter New
charName Parameter New
appearanceName Parameter New
actionListName Parameter New
slotNumber Parameter New

diguy \scenario CLI Command Not yet Implemented

load Parameter Not yet Implemented
merge Parameter Not yet Implemented
bind Parameter Not yet Implemented
reset Parameter Not yet Implemented
play Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

stop Parameter Not yet Implemented
clean Parameter Not yet Implemented
camera Parameter Not yet Implemented
clist Parameter Not yet Implemented
vlist Parameter Not yet Implemented
file Parameter Not yet Implemented

diguy \tuning DIGUY \TUNING CLI Command No Change

klodEnable klodEnable Parameter No Change
klodScalar klodScalar Parameter No Change
lod0Range lod0Range Parameter No Change
lod1Range lod1Range Parameter No Change
lod2Range lod2Range Parameter No Change
lod3Range lod3Range Parameter No Change
lod0Freq lod0Freq Parameter No Change
lod1Freq lod1Freq Parameter No Change
lod2Freq lod2Freq Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-33

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

lod3Freq lod3Freq Parameter No Change
fovCullFreq Parameter EP2 not supported

diguy \weapon DIGUY \WEAPON CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
aimAzimuth aimAzimuth Parameter No Change
aimElevation aimElevation Parameter No Change
gazeAzimuth gazeAzimuth Parameter No Change
gazeElevation gazeElevation Parameter No Change

DS \CONFIG CLI Command New

type Parameter New
memory Parameter New

EBGAMMA CLI Command New

vp Parameter New
tod Parameter New
gamma Parameter New

ECHO CLI Command New

enable Parameter New

ECHO \FORCE CLI Command New

mode Parameter New

edgeblend CLI Command Not yet Implemented

chan Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

refresh Parameter Not yet Implemented

effects CLI Command Not yet Implemented

sync Parameter Not yet Implemented
smoothresume Parameter Not yet Implemented
pause Parameter Not yet Implemented
resume Parameter Not yet Implemented

ELEVTEST CLI Command New

ProfileLog Parameter New
LogFile Parameter New

ELEVTEST \SHADOW CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
face Parameter New
level Parameter New
x Parameter New

A-34 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

y Parameter New
maxSunRiseStepsRendered Parameter New
maxSunSetStepsRendered Parameter New
trace Parameter New
break Parameter New

EMP \AC CLI Command New

view Parameter New
select Parameter New
enable Parameter New
gain Parameter New
level Parameter New

EMP \COLORSCALE CLI Command New

view Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New

EMP \NOISE CLI Command New

view Parameter New
noiseGain Parameter New
whiteNoiseGain Parameter New
length Parameter New

EMP \PIXELSTACK CLI Command New

view Parameter New
video Parameter New
enable Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

source Parameter New
threshold Parameter New
lineOffset Parameter New
capture Parameter New

EMP \POLARITY CLI Command New

view Parameter New
select Parameter New
enable Parameter New

EMP \SPACIALFILTER CLI Command New

view Parameter New
select Parameter New

EMP \TEMPORALFILTER CLI Command New

view Parameter New
value Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-35

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

EMP \TRACKER CLI Command New

view Parameter New
order Parameter New

EMP \ZOOM CLI Command New

view Parameter New
factor Parameter New
blend Parameter New

ENDIF CLI Command New

ENVIRONMENT
\SUNMOONMODEL CLI Command New
file Parameter New
emband Parameter New

ENVIRONMENT \TUNING CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
summerPath Parameter New
winterPath Parameter New
emband Parameter New

export \init CLI Command Not yet Implemented

parameterFile Parameter Not yet Implemented

export \pausqueue CLI Command Not yet Implemented

export \printqueue CLI Command Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

export \resumequeue CLI Command Not yet Implemented

export \shutdown CLI Command Not yet Implemented

export \tile CLI Command Not yet Implemented

tileName Parameter Not yet Implemented
xLoc Parameter Not yet Implemented
yLoc Parameter Not yet Implemented
zLoc Parameter Not yet Implemented

export \unload CLI Command Not yet Implemented

extrapolate EXTRAPOLATE CLI Command Changed

view Parameter EP2 not supported
list list Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter Changed

A-36 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

secondary secondary Parameter No Change
rotation rotation Parameter No Change
translation translation Parameter No Change
timeout timeout Parameter No Change
pa Parameter EP2 not supported
pb Parameter EP2 not supported
ra Parameter EP2 not supported
rb Parameter EP2 not supported
zoom Parameter EP2 not supported
searchlight Parameter EP2 not supported
retain Parameter EP2 not supported
enable Parameter New
maxPositionDelta Parameter New
hostRage Parameter New
aveHostRate Parameter New

eyepoint EYEPOINT CLI Command No Change

eye eye Parameter Changed
mm mm Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
cvx Parameter No Change
cvy Parameter EP2 not supported
cvz Parameter EP2 not supported
useCvNumbers Parameter EP2 not supported
h Parameter New
p Parameter New
r Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

EYEPOINT \CONTROLVOLUME CLI Command New
altEnable Parameter New
ms Parameter New

FACETRANDCOLOR CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
numColors Parameter New
grayscale Parameter New

fade FADE CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
alpha alpha Parameter No Change

FASTSLEW CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
slewRate Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-37

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

TerrainTraverseThreads Parameter New
MaxTerrainTraversals Parameter New
MaxCellsPerTraversal Parameter New

FASTSLEW
\FASTTIMEFEATURES CLI Command New
enable Parameter New
maxFeaturesPerCell Parameter New
FOVTrigger Parameter New
BigFeatureRadius Parameter New

FASTSLEW \SLEWRATESCALE CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
zoom Parameter New
slewRate Parameter New
list Parameter New

FICLAYER CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
ficPageRatio Parameter New
ficPageInThrottle Parameter New
ficMaxLevel Parameter New

FICLAYER \DEBUG CLI Command New

listFICMapTable Parameter New

file FILE CLI Command No Change

list list Parameter No Change
name name Parameter No Change
index index Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

filltjunction CLI Command Not yet Implemented
Sensor Parameter Not yet Implemented
NoSensor Parameter Not yet Implemented
OTW Parameter Not yet Implemented
NoOTW Parameter Not yet Implemented
tFillWidth Parameter Not yet Implemented
rFillWidth Parameter Not yet Implemented

fixed CLI Command Not yet Implemented

entry Parameter Not yet Implemented
select Parameter Not yet Implemented
reset Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-38 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

fixed \vf FIXED \VF CLI Command No Change
entry entry Parameter No Change
select select Parameter No Change
reset reset Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change

fjcd FJCD CLI Command No Change

enable enable Parameter No Change
cmd cmd Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
segment segment Parameter No Change
begx begx Parameter No Change
begy begy Parameter No Change
begz begz Parameter No Change
endx endx Parameter No Change
endy endy Parameter No Change
endz endz Parameter No Change
materialmaskindex materialmaskindex Parameter No Change
cmdclear cmdclear Parameter No Change
segclear segclear Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
bypassmfe bypassmfe Parameter No Change
movestamps Parameter EP2 not supported
auto Parameter EP2 not supported
indicator Parameter EP2 not supported
movingmodelmaskindex Parameter New

FJCD \CONFIG CLI Command New

closest Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

weather Parameter New
minCloudFade Parameter New
cloudSphereScale Parameter New
boxScale Parameter New
themelFeatures Parameter New

FJCD \DEBUG CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
x Parameter New
y Parameter New
z Parameter New

FJCD \FIC CLI Command New

enable Parameter New

fogcolor FOGCOLOR CLI Command Changed

region Parameter EP2 not supported

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-39

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

red red Parameter No Change
green green Parameter No Change
blue blue Parameter No Change
region Parameter New
emband Parameter New

FOGCOLOR \BASECOLOR CLI Command Changed

red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
emband Parameter New

FRAME CLI Command New

record Parameter New
path Parameter New
cnt Parameter New
capture Parameter New
vp Parameter New

GAIN CLI Command New

polyq Parameter New
polyp Parameter New
lightq Parameter New
lightp Parameter New

GAIN \AUTO CLI Command New

polyq Parameter New
polyp Parameter New
vpg Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

enable Parameter New
scene Parameter New
list Parameter New

genericairport GENERICAIRPORT CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
instance instance Parameter No Change
rwlength rwlength Parameter No Change
rwwidth rwwidth Parameter No Change
rwheading rwheading Parameter No Change
rwnumber rwnumber Parameter No Change
rwcontam rwcontam Parameter No Change
rwparallel rwparallel Parameter No Change
applights applights Parameter No Change
vla vla Parameter No Change
vlaangle vlaangle Parameter No Change
righttaxiway righttaxiway Parameter No Change

A-40 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

lefttaxiway lefttaxiway Parameter No Change
markings markings Parameter No Change
termtype termtype Parameter No Change
termpos termpos Parameter No Change
termside termside Parameter No Change
beacon Parameter New
latdegree latdegree Parameter No Change
latminute latminute Parameter No Change
latsecond latsecond Parameter No Change
longdegree longdegree Parameter No Change
longminute longminute Parameter No Change
longsecond longsecond Parameter No Change
altitude altitude Parameter No Change
slope slope Parameter No Change
dtgboards dtgboards Parameter No Change
arrestinggear arrestinggear Parameter No Change
carriermarkings carriermarkings Parameter No Change
fixedtd fixedtd Parameter No Change
fixedtddistance Parameter New
stopbar stopbar Parameter No Change
windsock Parameter New
windsocktype Parameter New
clutter Parameter New
autoplacement autoplacement Parameter No Change
autotype Parameter EP2 not supported
autoterminal Parameter EP2 not supported
fixedterminal Parameter EP2 not supported
autounderlay autounderlay Parameter No Change
autoslope Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

keeploaded Parameter New
autodecommission Parameter New
feature feature Parameter No Change

GENERICAIRPORT
\CONFIGWINDSOCK CLI Command New
type Parameter New
slot Parameter New

GENERICAIRPORT
\DAFIFMAPPING CLI Command New
mode Parameter New

GENERICAIRPORT \PRINT CLI Command New

instance Parameter New

genericairport \reference GENERICAIRPORT \REFERENCE CLI Command No Change

icao icao Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-41

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

rwy rwy Parameter No Change

GENERICAIRPORT
\UNLOADAUTOGEN CLI Command New

gfog GFOG CLI Command Changed

region region Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
height height Parameter No Change
patchy patchy Parameter No Change
rvr rvr Parameter No Change
volScudMinRVRpercent Parameter New
emband Parameter New

gfog \patchy_fog GFOG \PATCHY_FOG CLI Command Changed

patchiness patchiness Parameter No Change
volScudMinRVRpercent Parameter New
region Parameter New
emband Parameter New

gfog \transition GFOG \TRANSITION CLI Command No Change

width width Parameter No Change

GFOG \TUNE CLI Command New

opacityMod Parameter New
brightModTop Parameter New
brightPersistence Parameter New
brightTop Parameter New
bumpModTop Parameter New
bright3dScale Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

horizonDepressionScale Parameter New
ambientIntensity Parameter New
specularIntensity Parameter New
profileAA Parameter New
colorRed Parameter New
colorGreen Parameter New
colorBlue Parameter New
glare Parameter New
mapSize Parameter New
textureAA Parameter New
squashOuterLayer Parameter New
AAAltFadePercent Parameter New
TxtAltFadePercent Parameter New
mode Parameter New
hazeAlpha Parameter New
hazeMax Parameter New

A-42 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

hazeStartFadeRange Parameter New
hazeEndFadeRange Parameter New
atEyeVisScalar Parameter New
emband Parameter New
disableFogIllulmPoly Parameter New
fogIllumPolyIntensityScale Parameter New

glare GLARE CLI Command Changed

beacon beacon Parameter No Change
strobe strobe Parameter No Change
strobepattern Parameter EP2 not supported
strobeintensity Parameter EP2 not supported
strobelight Parameter EP2 not supported
strobelightenabled Parameter EP2 not supported
strobelightintensity Parameter EP2 not supported
maxvis Parameter EP2 not supported
minrif minRIF Parameter No Change
maxVisibility Parameter New
strobePattern Parameter EP2 Deprecated
strobeIntensity Parameter New
strobeLightIntensity Parameter EP2 Deprecated

strobeLightEnabled Parameter EP2 Deprecated

glare \beacon GLARE \BEACON CLI Command Changed

scene scene Parameter No Change
ontime onTime Parameter No Change
offtime offTime Parameter No Change
intensity intensity Parameter No Change
intensityID Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

patternID Parameter New
lightPointSwitch Parameter New
lightPointIntensity Parameter New
lightPointSync Parameter New

GLARE \ILLUMINATION CLI Command New

scene Parameter New
firstLobeIntensity Parameter New
addLobeIntensity Parameter New

glare \lobes GLARE \LOBES CLI Command Changed

scene scene Parameter No Change
firstlobeintensity firstLobeIntensity Parameter No Change
addlobeintensity addLobeIntensity Parameter No Change
useAlternateGlare Parameter New
alternateGlareCurve Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-43

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

GLARE \PATTERN CLI Command New
patternID Parameter New
delayTime Parameter New
softFlash Parameter New
segmentID Parameter New
onTime Parameter New
offTime Parameter New
list Parameter New

glare \strobe GLARE \STROBE CLI Command Changed

list list Parameter No Change
patternid patternID Parameter No Change
segment segment Parameter EP Deprecated
intensityid intensityid Parameter No Change
scene scene Parameter No Change
ontime onTime Parameter No Change
offtime offTime Parameter No Change
delaydoubletime delaydoubletime Parameter EP Deprecated
intensity intensity Parameter No Change
lightPointSwitch Parameter New
lightPointIntensityStep Parameter Renamed for 11.0
lightPointSync Parameter New

group CLI Command Not yet Implemented

list Parameter Not yet Implemented
view Parameter Not yet Implemented
select Parameter Not yet Implemented
group Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

GLEVEL CLI Command New
enable Parameter New
level Parameter New
emband Parameter New

GLEVEL \TABLE CLI Command New

index Parameter New
ambientScale Parameter New
colorScale Parameter New
scudScale Parameter New
list Parameter New
emband Parameter New

GROUNDFIRE CLI Command New

num Parameter New
type Parameter New
mm Parameter New

A-44 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

xoffset Parameter New
yoffset Parameter New
zoffset Parameter New
start Parameter New
stop Parameter New
clean Parameter New
all Parameter New
vpMask Parameter New
heightscale Parameter New
lifescale Parameter New

GROUNDFIRE \DEFINE CLI Command New

type Parameter New
defName Parameter New
update Parameter New

GUNFIREGLEAM CLI Command New

trigger Parameter New
visibility Parameter New
size Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
intensity Parameter New
rampIn Parameter New
hold Parameter New
rampOut Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

hat HAT CLI Command No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
tp tp Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
priority priority Parameter No Change
bypassmfe bypassmfe Parameter No Change
rotate rotate Parameter No Change
clear clear Parameter No Change
materialmaskindex materialmaskindex Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
movingmodelmaskindex Parameter New

HAT \CONFIG CLI Command New

proactive Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-45

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

lowPriorityFieldRate Parameter New
returnOnlyValid Parameter New
rotateOverride Parameter EP2 deprecated
validHOTMin Parameter New
validHOTMax Parameter New
extendZ Parameter New
cigiExtendZ Parameter New
ignoreChainedChildren Parameter New
weather Parameter New
minCloudFade Parameter New
cloudSphereScale Parameter New
boxScale Parameter New
themelFeatures Parameter New
hatSeasonHold Parameter New
hatSeasonWait Parameter New

hat \fic HAT \FIC CLI Command No Change

enable enable Parameter No Change

HAT \FORCEBYPASS CLI Command New

tp Parameter New
enable Parameter New

HAT \MONITOR CLI Command New

tp Parameter New

haze HAZE CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
top top Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ceilingvis ceilingvis Parameter No Change
AGLmode Parameter New
emband Parameter New

hd HD CLI Command No Change

tp tp Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
point point Parameter No Change
mode mode Parameter No Change
timetag timetag Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
latdegree latdegree Parameter No Change
latminute latminute Parameter No Change
latsecond latsecond Parameter No Change
longdegree longdegree Parameter No Change

A-46 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

longminute longminute Parameter No Change
longsecond longsecond Parameter No Change
altitude altitude Parameter No Change
bypassmfe Parameter EP2 not supported
process process Parameter No Change
clear clear Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
materialmaskindex materialmaskindex Parameter No Change
movingmodelmaskindex Parameter New

HD \CONFIG CLI Command New

weather Parameter New
minCloudFade Parameter New
cloudSphereScale Parameter New
boxScale Parameter New
themelFeatures Parameter New

help HELP CLI Command Changed

str Parameter EP2 not supported
cmd Parameter New
list Parameter New
deprecated Parameter New

help \full CLI Command Not yet Implemented

str Parameter Not yet Implemented

horizon HORIZON CLI Command Changed

emband Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

enable enable Parameter No Change
horb horB Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
moonhorb Parameter EP2 not supported
width Parameter New
depress Parameter New
trackWithSun Parameter New
emband Parameter New

horizon \color HORIZON \COLOR CLI Command Changed

scene scene Parameter No Change
redscale redScale Parameter No Change
greenscale greenScale Parameter No Change
bluescale blueScale Parameter No Change

horizon \curve CLI Command Not yet Implemented

emband Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-47

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

bp0 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp30 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp60 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp90 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp120 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp150 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp180 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp210 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp240 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp270 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp300 Parameter Not yet Implemented
bp330 Parameter Not yet Implemented

horizon \depress CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
radius Parameter Not yet Implemented
startrange Parameter Not yet Implemented

HORIZON \NVG CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
scale Parameter New
maxPhase Parameter New
minPhase Parameter New

horizon \step_values HORIZON \STEP_VALUES CLI Command Changed

emband Parameter EP2 not supported
step step Parameter No Change
scalar scalar Parameter No Change
list Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emband Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGI202ESIGWRAPPER CLI Command New
lrfEndian Parameter New
gainLevelEndian Parameter New
targetTrackerEndian Parameter New
thermalCuerEndian Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGICELESTIALSPHERECTRL CLI Command New
starsOverdrive Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGIENTITYANIMATIONCTRL CLI Command New
scalarEPCompatible Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGIENTITYPLUMECTRL CLI Command New

A-48 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

plumeVelocityDivisor Parameter New
plumeTransitionDivisor Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGIENTITYGLARECTRL CLI Command New
intensityEPCompatible Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGIHATREQUESTCTRL CLI Command New
enableRotateTP Parameter New
rotateTP Parameter New
enableBypassMFE Parameter New
bypassMFE Parameter New
enableOffsetOverride Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGIILLULMSOURCE0DEFAULT CLI Command New
enable Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGILOSREQUESTCTRL CLI Command New
enableFindClosestIF Parameter New
findClosestIF Parameter New
enableBypassMFE Parameter New
bypassMFE Parameter New

HOSTOP LRFRESPONSECTRL CLI Command New

alwaysReply Parameter New

HOSTOP \CIGIMFECTRL CLI Command New

minTestPointRangeEPCompatible Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

maxTestPointRangeEPCompatible Parameter New

HOSTOP \CIGIREGWINDCTRL CLI Command New

windSpeedEPCompatible Parameter New

HOSTOP \CIGIREGSETCTRL CLI Command New

environmentEPCompatible Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGISTANDARDBYTEORDER CLI Command New
enable Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGITERRSURFACECTRL CLI Command New
contaminantEPCompatible Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-49

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

HOSTOP
\CIGITRACERRESETCTL CLI Command New
cigiTracerEnvironmentEPCompatible Parameter New

HOSTOP
\CIGIVIEWDEFINITIONCTRL CLI Command New
ignoreSelectEPCompatible Parameter New
nearScale Parameter New
farScale Parameter New

HOSTOP \CIGIWEATHERCTRL CLI Command New

windEPCompatible Parameter New
cloudLayerEPCompatible Parameter New

HOSTOP \ESIG303D CLI Command New

op303D_upsmooth Parameter New
op303D_downsmooth Parameter New
op303D_tp_length Parameter New
op303D_tp_width Parameter New
op303D_tp_mode Parameter New
op303D_modeTransRange Parameter New

HOSTOP \ESIG3040 CLI Command New

op3040BindSelection Parameter New

HOSTOP \ESIGE000 CLI Command New

opE000RequestResponsePriority Parameter New

IF CLI Command New

name Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

value Parameter New
name2 Parameter New
value2 Parameter New
name3 Parameter New
value3 Parameter New
name4 Parameter New
value4 Parameter New
name5 Parameter New
value5 Parameter New

IFANY CLI Command New

name Parameter New
value Parameter New
name2 Parameter New
value2 Parameter New
name3 Parameter New
value3 Parameter New

A-50 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

name4 Parameter New
value4 Parameter New
name5 Parameter New
value5 Parameter New

IG \ANIMATION CLI Command New

sync Parameter New
smoothResume Parameter New
pause Parameter New
resume Parameter New

IG \CONNECT CLI Command New

type Parameter New
ip Parameter New
name Parameter New

illumination ILLUMINATION CLI Command Changed

source source Parameter Changed
enable enable Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter Changed
heading heading Parameter No Change
pitch pitch Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
beam beam Parameter No Change
curve curve Parameter EP Deprecated
feather feather Parameter No Change
intensity intensity Parameter Changed

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

red red Parameter No Change
green green Parameter No Change
blue blue Parameter No Change
chanmask chanmask Parameter No Change
embandmask embandmask Parameter No Change
embandindex embandindex Parameter No Change
range Parameter New
type Parameter New
atmosIllum Parameter New
beamEnable Parameter New
beamRange Parameter New
glareScale Parameter New
list Parameter New

illumination \curve CLI Command Not yet Implemented

curve Parameter Not yet Implemented
range Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-51

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

ILLUMINATION \SNVG CLI Command New

source Parameter Changed for 11.0
snvg Parameter New

intensity INTENSITY CLI Command Changed

light light Parameter No Change
poly poly Parameter No Change
llmask llmask Parameter No Change
lpmask lpmask Parameter No Change
step step Parameter No Change
scalar scalar Parameter No Change
lSrcScale Parameter New
calligraphic calligraphic Parameter No Change
random random Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter Changed
list list Parameter No Change
ln Parameter New
pn Parameter New
tod Parameter New
adjustForTod Parameter New
beginLight Parameter New
beginPoly Parameter New
end Parameter New
sm Parameter EP2 not supported
ln0..ln31 Parameter EP2 not supported
pn0..pn31 Parameter EP2 not supported

INTENSITY \GLOBAL_ENABLE CLI Command New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

light Parameter New
poly Parameter New
enable Parameter New

INTENSITY
intensity \GLOBAL_POINT_LIGHT_SOUR
\global_point_light_sources CES CLI Command No Change
scale scale Parameter No Change

intensity INTENSITY
\global_unlit_polygons \GLOBAL_UNLIT_POLYGONS CLI Command Changed
scale scale Parameter No Change
scene Parameter New
cloudCover Parameter New
list Parameter New

intensity \mask_policy INTENSITY \MASK_POLICY CLI Command No Change

cliEnableDisable cliEnableDisable Parameter No Change

A-52 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

Op3040EnableDisable op3040EnableDisable Parameter No Change
Op3023EnableDisable op3023EnableDisable Parameter No Change

Op302CEnableDisable op302cEnableDisable Parameter No Change

No Change
UseExtendedSwitchFlagInOpcodes useExtendedSwitchFlagInOpcodes Parameter
No Change
Op3040PreservePolygonIntensities op3040PreservePolygonIntensities Parameter

intensity \step_values INTENSITY \STEP_VALUES CLI Command Changed

step step Parameter No Change
light_scalar light_scalar Parameter No Change
poly_scalar poly_scalar Parameter No Change
list Parameter New

INTENSITY \SUBSWITCH CLI Command New

light Parameter New

id Parameter New

step Parameter New

scalar Parameter New

tod Parameter New

adjustForTod Parameter New

enable Parameter New

add Parameter New

ir IR CLI Command Changed

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
cooltemp Parameter EP2 not supported
roomtemp Parameter EP2 not supported
warmtemp Parameter EP2 not supported
hottemp Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fhottemp Parameter EP2 not supported
list Parameter EP2 not supported
gain gain Parameter No Change
level level Parameter No Change
gain2 gain2 Parameter No Change
level2 level2 Parameter No Change
polarity polarity Parameter No Change
polarityPreGain polarityPreGain Parameter No Change
polarityPostTrack polarityPostTrack Parameter No Change
agc agc Parameter Changed
initialize Parameter EP2 not supported
channel Parameter EP2 not supported
video video Parameter No Change
overscan Parameter EP2 not supported
accoupling accoupling Parameter No Change
mismatch Parameter EP2 not supported

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-53

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

focus focus Parameter No Change
focusH focusH Parameter No Change
focusV focusV Parameter No Change
focusSelect focusSelect Parameter No Change
focusFile focusFile Parameter No Change
noiselength noiselength Parameter No Change
variance variance Parameter No Change
correlation correlation Parameter No Change
testPattern testPattern Parameter Changed
trackerID trackerID Parameter No Change
designate designate Parameter No Change
autotrack autotrack Parameter No Change
secondaryLevelNVGEnable Parameter New
emband Parameter New

IR \AGCMODEHOSTTABLE CLI Command New

mode0 Parameter New
mode1 Parameter New
mode2 Parameter New
mode3 Parameter New
mode4 Parameter New

ir \atmmodel IR \ATMMODEL CLI Command No Change

filename Parameter EP2 not supported
band Parameter EP2 not supported
model model Parameter No Change
aerosol aerosol Parameter No Change

IR \CALC CLI Command EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

integType Parameter New
resetTime Parameter New
resetJumpTime Parameter New
redCalc Parameter New

IR \COMPAT CLI Command New

ep1_thermal Parameter New
esig Parameter EP2 Deprecated
ep1_vis_atm Parameter New
ep1_sensor_atm Parameter New
ep1_density Parameter New

ir \configure IR \CONFIGURE or IR \C CLI Command Changed

select Parameter EP2 not supported
scalar Parameter EP2 not supported
viewport viewport Parameter No Change
noise noise Parameter No Change

A-54 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

noiseCorEnable noiseCorEnable Parameter No Change
decay decay Parameter No Change
mDecay Parameter New
xStart xStart Parameter No Change
xEnd xEnd Parameter No Change
yStart yStart Parameter No Change
yEnd yEnd Parameter No Change
excludeLow excludeLow Parameter EP Deprecated
excludeHigh excludeHigh Parameter EP Deprecated
includeLow includeLow Parameter No Change
includeHigh includeHigh Parameter No Change
threshold threshold Parameter No Change
threshHigh threshHigh Parameter No Change
threshLow threshLow Parameter No Change
mgd Parameter EP2 not supported
mld Parameter EP2 not supported
center center Parameter No Change
bins bins Parameter No Change
lowerLimit lowerLimit Parameter No Change
upperLimit upperLimit Parameter No Change
linesPerElement linesPerElement Parameter No Change
videoLimitLow videoLimitLow Parameter No Change
videoLimitHigh videoLimitHigh Parameter No Change
histogramRangeBoost histogramRangeBoost Parameter No Change
sunSatValue sunSatValue Parameter No Change
sunSatStartAngle sunSatStartAngle Parameter No Change
sunSatFinishAngle sunSatFinishAngle Parameter No Change
degradedElementMode degradedElementMode Parameter No Change
secondaryCenter Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

secondaryBins Parameter New
secondaryLowerLimit Parameter New
secondaryUpperLimit Parameter New
primaryAlphaGain Parameter New
secondaryAlphaGain Parameter New
primaryAlphaLevel Parameter New
secondaryAlphaLevel Parameter New
primaryGainMinDelta Parameter New
secondaryGainMinDelta Parameter New
primaryLevelMinDelta Parameter New
secondaryLevelMinDelta Parameter New
histogramMode Parameter New
histogramExclusionMode Parameter New
noiseBipolar Parameter New
secNoise Parameter New
secNoiseCorEnable Parameter New
secNoiseBipolar Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-55

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

secNoiseLength Parameter New
whiteNoise Parameter New
whiteNoiseCorEnable Parameter New
whiteEnable Parameter New
agcCopyToManual Parameter New
hiPixToHistogram Parameter New
loPixSkipGain Parameter New
dmaForFastAGC Parameter New
emband Parameter New

ir \constraints IR \CONSTRAINTS CLI Command Changed

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
gainPriMin gainPriMin Parameter No Change
gainPriMax gainPriMax Parameter No Change
levelPriMin levelPriMin Parameter No Change
levelPriMax levelPriMax Parameter No Change
gainSecMin gainSecMin Parameter No Change
gainSecMax gainSecMax Parameter No Change
levelSecMin levelSecMin Parameter No Change
levelSecMax levelSecMax Parameter No Change
noiseCorMin noiseCorMin Parameter No Change
noiseCorMax noiseCorMax Parameter No Change
secNoiseCorMin Parameter New
secNoiseCorMax Parameter New
whiteNoiseCorMin Parameter New
whiteNoiseCorMax Parameter New
emband Parameter New

ir \control IR \CONTROL CLI Command Changed

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
zoom zoom Parameter No Change
deadElement deadElement Parameter No Change
deadElementIntensity DeadElementIntensity Parameter No Change
flashingElements flashingElements Parameter No Change
flashingElementsDuty flashingElementsDuty Parameter No Change
persistence persistence Parameter No Change
freezeFrame freezeFrame Parameter No Change
polarityOutput Parameter EP2 not supported
sensorSelect Parameter EP2 not supported
fixedPatNoise fixedPatNoise Parameter No Change
videoSwitchToMe videoSwitchToMe Parameter No Change
configSel configSel Parameter No Change
spatialFilter spatialFilter Parameter No Change
sfToTracker sfToTracker Parameter No Change
spatialFilterFile spatialFilterFile Parameter No Change
secondaryEnable secondaryEnable Parameter No Change

A-56 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

pipEnable pipEnable Parameter No Change
pipX pipX Parameter No Change
pipY pipY Parameter No Change
pipWidth pipWidth Parameter No Change
pipHeight pipHeight Parameter No Change
flashingElementsIntensity Parameter New
persistenceMode Parameter New
videoMode Parameter New
videoBlankFrames Parameter New
emband Parameter New

ir \contzoom IR \CONTZOOM CLI Command Changed

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
enable Parameter EP2 not supported
zoom Parameter EP2 not supported
swenable Parameter New
swzoom Parameter New
emband Parameter New

ir \ctstmod CLI Command Not yet Implemented

emband Parameter Not yet Implemented
auto Parameter Not yet Implemented
delay Parameter Not yet Implemented
minimum Parameter Not yet Implemented
maximum Parameter Not yet Implemented
dayscale Parameter Not yet Implemented
nightscale Parameter Not yet Implemented
dawndeltime Parameter Not yet Implemented
duskdeltime Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

rainsoakscale Parameter Not yet Implemented

ir \deroll CLI Command Not yet Implemented

viewport Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
roll Parameter Not yet Implemented

ir \diurnal IR \DIURNAL CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
sunelev Parameter EP2 not supported
peaktime peaktime Parameter No Change
minambtemp minambtemp Parameter No Change
maxambtemp maxambtemp Parameter No Change
slope slope Parameter No Change
resettime Parameter EP2 not supported
calctype Parameter EP2 not supported
firstmindeltatime firstmindeltatime Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-57

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

lastmindeltatime lastmindeltatime Parameter No Change
test Parameter New

ir \environment IR \ENVIRONMENT CLI Command Changed

temperature temperature Parameter No Change
groundtemp groundtemp Parameter No Change
windenable windenable Parameter No Change
windspeed windspeed Parameter No Change
humidity humidity Parameter No Change
absorption_scalar absorption_scalar Parameter No Change
fog_scalar fog_scalar Parameter No Change
scattering_scalar scattering_scalar Parameter No Change
skyfogscalar skyfogscalar Parameter No Change
rainsoak rainsoak Parameter No Change
skypolyscalar skypolyscalar Parameter No Change
day day Parameter No Change
month month Parameter No Change
year year Parameter No Change
latdegree latdegree Parameter No Change
latminute latminute Parameter No Change
latsecond latsecond Parameter No Change
longdegree longdegree Parameter No Change
longminute longminute Parameter No Change
longsecond longsecond Parameter No Change
lfogtrans lfogtrans Parameter No Change
solaratten solaratten Parameter EP Deprecated
minsolarirrad minsolarirrad Parameter No Change
typicalusageindex typicalusageindex Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

coldskyscalar coldskyscalar Parameter No Change
latitude Parameter New
longitude Parameter New
time Parameter New
solarcalcmethod Parameter EP2 not supported
solarfogscalar Parameter EP2 not supported
gustduration Parameter New
mingust Parameter New

ir \eogain IR \EOGAIN CLI Command Changed

emband emband Parameter No Change
lpgain lpgain Parameter No Change
lplevel lplevel Parameter No Change
modgain modgain Parameter No Change
modlevel modlevel Parameter No Change
refgain refgain Parameter No Change
reflevel reflevel Parameter No Change

A-58 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

polylevel Parameter EP2 not supported
moonscale moonscale Parameter No Change
moonlevel moonlevel Parameter No Change
prenumbra Parameter EP2 not supported
diffuse_angle Parameter EP2 not supported
featlpscale Parameter New

ir \epx IR \EPX CLI Command Changed

compat compat Parameter EP2 not supported
defaultindex defaultindex Parameter No Change
pmindex pmindex Parameter Changed
usageIndex usageindex Parameter No Change
newprimaryindex newprimaryindex Parameter No Change
newsecondaryindex newsecondaryindex Parameter No Change
supptype supptype Parameter No Change
thick Parameter EP2 not supported
supptemp supptemp Parameter No Change
suppcc suppcc Parameter No Change
deltat deltat Parameter No Change
reflection_scalar reflection_scalar Parameter No Change
visscalar Parameter EP2 not supported
emband emband Parameter Changed
emiss emiss Parameter No Change
solarabs solarabs Parameter No Change
thermalcond thermalcond Parameter No Change
backgcolor backgcolor Parameter No Change
ambrefl ambrefl Parameter No Change
intensity Parameter New
dtp Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

eoscalar Parameter New
thickness Parameter New
solarrefl Parameter New
lagScale Parameter New
calcType Parameter New

ir \file IR \FILE CLI Command Changed

load load Parameter No Change
save Parameter New
type Parameter New
path Parameter New

ir \focus IR \FOCUS CLI Command Changed

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
filter filter Parameter No Change
mode mode Parameter No Change
select select Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-59

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

blur blur Parameter No Change
blurH blurH Parameter No Change
blurV blurV Parameter No Change
toTracker toTracker Parameter No Change
file file Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

ir \fusion CLI Command Not yet Implemented

viewport Parameter Not yet Implemented
mode Parameter Not yet Implemented
param1 Parameter Not yet Implemented
param2 Parameter Not yet Implemented
param3 Parameter Not yet Implemented
param4 Parameter Not yet Implemented

ir \ground IR \GROUND CLI Command No Change

delay delay Parameter No Change
scale scale Parameter No Change
offset offset Parameter No Change

IR \HISTOGRAM CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
plane Parameter New
enable Parameter New
originX Parameter New
originY Parameter New
normalX Parameter New
normalY Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

IR \HORIZON CLI Command New
emband Parameter New
glareElevationLimit Parameter New
minTimeHorizGlow Parameter EP2 Deprecated
maxTimeHorizGlow Parameter EP2 Deprecated
maxElev Parameter New
minElev Parameter New
maxIntensityHorizGlow Parameter New
minIntensityHorizGlow Parameter New

ir \hth CLI Command Not yet Implemented

viewport Parameter Not yet Implemented
auto Parameter Not yet Implemented
enableMin Parameter Not yet Implemented
disableMin Parameter Not yet Implemented
minAltitude Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-60 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

ir \iftabedit IR \IFTABEDIT CLI Command EP2 not supported

material material Parameter EP2 not supported
rtmaterial Parameter EP2 not supported
tempcode tempcode Parameter EP2 not supported

emissivity emissivity Parameter EP2 not supported

absorptance absorptance Parameter EP2 not supported

conductivity conductivity Parameter EP2 not supported

diurnal diurnal Parameter EP2 not supported

colork colork Parameter EP2 not supported

sunshading sunshading Parameter EP2 not supported

deltat deltat Parameter EP2 not supported

list Parameter EP2 not supported

supptemp supptemp Parameter EP2 not supported
scc Parameter EP2 not supported
medium Parameter EP2 not supported
long Parameter EP2 not supported
file Parameter EP2 not supported
save Parameter EP2 not supported
restore Parameter EP2 not supported

ir \intensity IR \INTENSITY CLI Command Changed

group group Parameter No Change
viewport viewport Parameter No Change
intensity intensity Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

ir \lfmelody IR \LFMELODY CLI Command No Change

test Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emband emband Parameter No Change
minimum minimum Parameter No Change
maximum maximum Parameter No Change
mono mono Parameter No Change

ir \lighting IR \LIGHTING CLI Command Changed

emband emband Parameter No Change
diffuse diffuse Parameter No Change
octareductionenable octareductionenable Parameter No Change
visreductionenable visreductionenable Parameter No Change
octaexponent octaexponent Parameter No Change
vismin vismin Parameter No Change
vismax vismax Parameter No Change
ambient Parameter New
moondiffuse Parameter New
moonambient Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-61

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

coldskydiffuse Parameter New
dayskytune Parameter New
nightskytune Parameter New
independentambientenable Parameter New
solaratten Parameter New
overcastadjust Parameter New

IR \LP CLI Command New

emband Parameter New

type Parameter New

daydelta Parameter New

nightdelta Parameter New

dawndelta Parameter New

duskdelta Parameter New

haloscale Parameter New

ir \limits IR \LIMITS CLI Command Changed

emband emband Parameter No Change
minwavelength Parameter EP2 not supported
maxwavelength Parameter EP2 not supported
minimum Parameter New
maximum Parameter New

ir \materialcode IR \MATERIALCODE CLI Command No Change

start start Parameter No Change
end end Parameter No Change
error Parameter EP2 not supported

ir \motion CLI Command Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sensormm Parameter Not yet Implemented
cursor Parameter Not yet Implemented
viewport Parameter Not yet Implemented
period Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

ir \nlgain IR \NLGAIN CLI Command No Change

emband emband Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
index index Parameter No Change
temperature temperature Parameter No Change
gain gain Parameter No Change

ir \nvgtuning IR \NVGTUNING CLI Command Changed

emband emband Parameter No Change
fog fog Parameter No Change

A-62 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

skyfog skyfog Parameter No Change
skypoly skypoly Parameter No Change
skyPolyManual Parameter New
autosky autosky Parameter No Change
dayscale dayscale Parameter No Change
nightscale nightscale Parameter No Change
fogMin Parameter New
skyMin Parameter New
dawndeltime dawndeltime Parameter No Change
duskdeltime duskdeltime Parameter No Change
polydayscale polydayscale Parameter No Change
polynightscale polynightscale Parameter No Change
esigdaypolyscale esigdaypolyscale Parameter No Change
esignightpolyscale esignightpolyscale Parameter No Change
layerdayscale Parameter New
layernightscale Parameter New
dawntranstime dawntranstime Parameter No Change
dusktranstime dusktranstime Parameter No Change
dawntransangle Parameter New
dusktransangle Parameter New
ownshipglarescalar Parameter EP2 not supported
lightningglarescalar Parameter EP2 not supported
ct_tuning_level Parameter EP2 not supported
nighttransangle Parameter New
esigpday Parameter New
esigpnight Parameter New
epdawndeltime Parameter New
epduskdeltime Parameter New
epdawntranstime Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

epdusktranstime Parameter New
ambfraction Parameter New
moonphasetune Parameter New
moonelevtune Parameter New

ir \offset IR \OFFSET CLI Command No Change

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
trackerID trackerID Parameter No Change
horizontal horizontal Parameter No Change
vertical vertical Parameter No Change
contrasttype contrasttype Parameter No Change
master master Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

ir \polygon IR \POLYGON CLI Command Changed

render Parameter EP2 not supported
nvg Parameter EP2 not supported

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-63

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

evs Parameter EP2 not supported
mwir Parameter EP2 not supported
lwir Parameter EP2 not supported
eo Parameter EP2 not supported
lag lag Parameter Changed
emband emband Parameter No Change
mintemp mintemp Parameter No Change
maxtemp maxtemp Parameter No Change
gain Parameter New
solarrefl solarrefl Parameter No Change
dualsimoffset dualsimoffset Parameter No Change
swcontrol Parameter New
swscale Parameter New
swusage Parameter New
swintensity Parameter New
pn Parameter New
enable Parameter New
debug Parameter New
linRad Parameter New

IR \POWERLINE CLI Command New

scale Parameter New

IR \PROCESS CLI Command New

task Parameter New
process Parameter New

IR \PROFILE CLI Command EP2 Deprecated

current_state Parameter EP2 Deprecated

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ir \rainfall IR \RAINFALL CLI Command Changed
level level Parameter No Change
amount amount Parameter No Change
thermalscale thermalscale Parameter No Change
coupledenv coupledenv Parameter Changed
list list Parameter No Change

IR \RENDER CLI Command New

emband Parameter New
method Parameter New
level Parameter New

IR \SEASTATE CLI Command New

emband Parameter New
scale Parameter New
shift Parameter New

A-64 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

clamp Parameter New

IR \SHADOW CLI Command New

emband Parameter New
daydeltemp Parameter New
nightdeltemp Parameter New
dawndeltime Parameter New
duskdeltime Parameter New
dawntranstime Parameter New
dusktranstime Parameter New
usage Parameter New

ir \stmod IR \STMOD CLI Command Changed

emband emband Parameter Changed
auto auto Parameter No Change
delay delay Parameter Not yet Implemented
minimum minimum Parameter No Change
maximum maximum Parameter No Change
dayscale dayscale Parameter No Change
nightscale nightscale Parameter No Change
dawndeltime dawndeltime Parameter No Change
duskdeltime duskdeltime Parameter No Change
rainsoakscale rainsoakscale Parameter No Change
coupledCT Parameter EP2 not supported
automin Parameter New
enable Parameter New
autoAtten Parameter New
exclusion Parameter New
usage Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

nvg_eo_value Parameter New

IR \SUPPORT CLI Command New

cooltemp Parameter New
roomtemp Parameter New
warmtemp Parameter New
hottemp Parameter New
fhottemp Parameter New

ir \symbol IR \SYMBOL CLI Command Changed

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
number number Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
group group Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
roll roll Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-65

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

xscale xscale Parameter No Change
yscale yscale Parameter No Change
value value Parameter No Change
string string Parameter No Change
file file Parameter No Change
pause Parameter EP2 not supported
clipLeft Parameter New
clipRight Parameter New
clipTop Parameter New
clipBottom Parameter New
offsetX Parameter New
offsetY Parameter New
disableBlue Parameter New
emband Parameter New

ir \test IR \TEST CLI Command Changed

p0 p0 Parameter No Change
p1 p1 Parameter No Change
p2 p2 Parameter No Change
p3 p3 Parameter No Change
p4 p4 Parameter No Change
p5 p5 Parameter No Change
p6 Parameter New
p7 Parameter New
p8 Parameter New
p9 Parameter New
p10 Parameter New
p11 Parameter New
p12 Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

p13 Parameter New
p14 Parameter New
p15 Parameter New
p16 Parameter New
p17 Parameter New
p18 Parameter New
p19 Parameter New
p20 Parameter New
p21 Parameter New
p22 Parameter New
p23 Parameter New

ir \texture IR \TEXTURE CLI Command Changed

export Parameter EP2 not supported
render Parameter EP2 not supported
nvg Parameter EP2 not supported
evs Parameter EP2 not supported

A-66 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

mwir Parameter EP2 not supported
lwir Parameter EP2 not supported
eo Parameter EP2 not supported
lag lag Parameter No Change
trickle Parameter EP2 not supported
ctmaxrol Parameter EP2 not supported
ctminrol Parameter EP2 not supported
ctrolmode Parameter EP2 not supported
emband emband Parameter No Change
mintemp mintemp Parameter No Change
maxtemp maxtemp Parameter No Change
gain Parameter New
stpolygain stpolygain Parameter No Change
ctpolygain ctpolygain Parameter No Change
ctrender Parameter EP2 not supported
ftrender Parameter EP2 not supported
linRad Parameter New

ir \thermalcuer IR \THERMALCUER CLI Command Changed

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
areaOfRegard areaOfRegard Parameter No Change
sensitivity sensitivity Parameter No Change
targetSize targetSize Parameter No Change
sortMethod sortMethod Parameter No Change
hotSpot hotSpot Parameter No Change
symbols symbols Parameter No Change
maxHotSpots maxHotSpots Parameter No Change
paramFile paramFile Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

emband Parameter New

ir \track IR \TRACK CLI Command Changed

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
trackerID trackerID Parameter No Change
autotrack autotrack Parameter No Change
designate designate Parameter No Change
tracktype tracktype Parameter No Change
contrasttype contrasttype Parameter No Change
fovDelay fovDelay Parameter Changed
reload reload Parameter No Change
hprDelay Parameter New
emband Parameter New

ir \trackparams IR \TRACKPARAMS CLI Command Changed

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
type type Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-67

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

minTargetSizeX minTargetSizeX Parameter No Change
minTargetSizeY minTargetSizeY Parameter No Change
maxTargetSizeX maxTargetSizeX Parameter No Change
maxTargetSizeY maxTargetSizeY Parameter No Change
maxTargetOffsetX maxTargetOffsetX Parameter No Change
maxTargetOffsetY maxTargetOffsetY Parameter No Change
minTargetContrast minTargetContrast Parameter No Change
targetTracker Parameter New
numTrackers Parameter New
trackerDll Parameter New
trackerParams Parameter New
trackboxSymbol Parameter New
trackBoxSizeX Parameter New
trackBoxSizeY Parameter New
losSymbol Parameter New
autoRespond Parameter New
areaTrackElev Parameter New
areaTrackMode Parameter New
areaIntersectMode Parameter New
areaTrackProjectDist Parameter New
areaTrackCornerDist Parameter New
areaTrackBoxScalar Parameter New
areaTrackScreenClip Parameter New
areaTrackScreenOffsetX Parameter New
areaTrackScreenOffsetY Parameter New
areaTrackBoxExtend Parameter New
areaTrackBoxOffset Parameter New
emband Parameter New
getExtParams Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

setExtParam Parameter New
getTrackTypes Parameter New
getTrackerModes Parameter New

ir \tuning IR \TUNING CLI Command Changed

emband emband Parameter No Change
skyfog skyfog Parameter No Change
skypoly skypoly Parameter No Change
fog fog Parameter No Change
autosky autosky Parameter No Change
daydeltemp daydeltemp Parameter No Change
nightdeltemp nightdeltemp Parameter No Change
dawndeltime dawndeltime Parameter No Change
duskdeltime duskdeltime Parameter No Change
polydaydeltemp polydaydeltemp Parameter No Change
polynightdeltemp polynightdeltemp Parameter No Change
dawntranstime dawntranstime Parameter No Change

A-68 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

dusktranstime dusktranstime Parameter No Change
esigdaypolydeltemp esigdaypolydeltemp Parameter No Change
esignightpolydeltemp esignightpolydeltemp Parameter No Change
newrender Parameter EP2 not supported
oglmod Parameter EP2 not supported
layerdaydeltemp Parameter New
layernightdeltemp Parameter New
dawntransangle Parameter New
daytransangle Parameter New
dusktransangle Parameter New
nighttransangle Parameter New
esigpday Parameter New
esigpnight Parameter New
epdawndeltime Parameter New
epduskdeltime Parameter New
epdawntranstime Parameter New
epdusktranstime Parameter New

ir \turret CLI Command Not yet Implemented

viewport Parameter Not yet Implemented
sensormm Parameter Not yet Implemented
hpstabenable Parameter Not yet Implemented
rollstabenable Parameter Not yet Implemented
stoplimitenable Parameter Not yet Implemented
ratelimitenable Parameter Not yet Implemented
leftazimuth Parameter Not yet Implemented
rightazimuth Parameter Not yet Implemented
topelevation Parameter Not yet Implemented
bottomelevation Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

negroll Parameter Not yet Implemented
posroll Parameter Not yet Implemented
headingrate Parameter Not yet Implemented
pitchrate Parameter Not yet Implemented
rollrate Parameter Not yet Implemented
headingacceleration Parameter Not yet Implemented
pitchacceleration Parameter Not yet Implemented
rollacceleration Parameter Not yet Implemented

ir \visibility IR \VISIBILITY CLI Command Changed

emband Parameter New
avc avc Parameter No Change
dbunits Parameter Not yet Implemented
feet feet Parameter No Change
km km Parameter Changed
miles miles Parameter Changed
emband emband Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-69

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

ground_fog_vis_scale ground_fog_vis_scale Parameter No Change
lower_layer_vis_scale lower_layer_vis_scale Parameter No Change
upper_layer_vis_scale upper_layer_vis_scale Parameter No Change
correlation Parameter Not yet Implemented
altfeet altfeet Parameter No Change
vis_scale Parameter New
visgf_scale Parameter New
vis0_scale Parameter New
vis1_scale Parameter New
vis2_scale Parameter New
intgf_scale Parameter New
int0_scale Parameter New
int1_scale Parameter New
int2_scale Parameter New

ir \wash IR \WASH CLI Command Changed

viewport viewport Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
delayFieldCnt delayFieldCnt Parameter No Change
fadeInFieldCnt fadeInFieldCnt Parameter No Change
fadeOutFieldCnt fadeOutFieldCnt Parameter No Change
washSensitivity washSensitivity Parameter No Change
gainSensitivity gainSensitivity Parameter No Change
levelSensitivity levelSensitivity Parameter No Change
forceWash forceWash Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

ir \water IR \WATER CLI Command Changed

emband emband Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

auto auto Parameter Changed
daydeltemp daydeltemp Parameter No Change
nightdeltemp nightdeltemp Parameter No Change
dawndeltime dawndeltime Parameter No Change
duskdeltime duskdeltime Parameter No Change
dawntranstime Parameter New
dusktranstime Parameter New
scaleday Parameter New
scalenight Parameter New
sdawndeltime Parameter New
sduskdeltime Parameter New
sdawntranstime Parameter New
sdusktranstime Parameter New
winterdayscale Parameter New
waterusage Parameter New

joydef[na] CLI Command Not yet Implemented

A-70 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

heading Parameter Not yet Implemented
pitch Parameter Not yet Implemented
roll Parameter Not yet Implemented
w Parameter Not yet Implemented
landing Parameter Not yet Implemented

joystick[na] CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented

keydef KEYDEF CLI Command No Change

rrate rrate Parameter No Change
auto_rrate Parameter EP2 not supported
trate trate Parameter No Change
accel Parameter EP2 not supported
landing Parameter EP2 not supported

keypad KEYPAD CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
kph Parameter EP2 not supported
mph Parameter EP2 not supported
knots Parameter EP2 not supported
mps Parameter EP2 not supported
xvel xvel Parameter No Change
yvel yvel Parameter No Change
zvel zvel Parameter No Change
hvel hvel Parameter No Change
pvel pvel Parameter No Change
rvel rvel Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fps Parameter EP2 not supported

klod KLOD CLI Command Changed

vpg vpg Parameter Changed
enable enable Parameter No Change
timeon timeon Parameter No Change
min min Parameter No Change
max max Parameter No Change
rate rate Parameter No Change
filter filter Parameter No Change
recovery recovery Parameter No Change
priRateSc0 Parameter EP2 not supported
priRateSc1 Parameter EP2 not supported
priRateSc2 Parameter EP2 not supported
priRateSc3 Parameter EP2 not supported
priRateSc4 Parameter EP2 not supported

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-71

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

klod \model CLI Command EP Deprecated
vpg Parameter EP Deprecated
scalar Parameter EP Deprecated

KLOD \SCALE CLI Command New

type Parameter New
scale Parameter New
vpg Parameter New
list Parameter New

klod \terrain CLI Command EP Deprecated

tracking Parameter EP Deprecated
vpg Parameter EP Deprecated
scalar Parameter EP Deprecated

klod \vf CLI Command Not yet Implemented

vpg Parameter Not yet Implemented
scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented

kran CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
timeon Parameter Not yet Implemented
min Parameter Not yet Implemented
max Parameter Not yet Implemented
rate Parameter Not yet Implemented
filter Parameter Not yet Implemented

kst KST CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

timeon timeon Parameter No Change
min min Parameter No Change
max max Parameter No Change
rate rate Parameter No Change
filter filter Parameter No Change
recovery Parameter New
mode Parameter New
timeoff Parameter New
vpg Parameter New

kterrain CLI Command Not yet Implemented

rmin Parameter Not yet Implemented
rmax Parameter Not yet Implemented
mintr Parameter Not yet Implemented
mintrmaxlev Parameter Not yet Implemented
subdivlev Parameter Not yet Implemented
subdivrange Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-72 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

subdivholdlevs Parameter Not yet Implemented
clamplev Parameter Not yet Implemented
azculling Parameter Not yet Implemented
fovadjust Parameter Not yet Implemented

kterrain \tile CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
lllat Parameter Not yet Implemented
lllon Parameter Not yet Implemented
urlat Parameter Not yet Implemented
urlon Parameter Not yet Implemented
scale Parameter Not yet Implemented

kterrain \viewport CLI Command Not yet Implemented

view Parameter Not yet Implemented
mintr Parameter Not yet Implemented

laserbeam laserbeam CLI Command Changed

number Parameter New
enable enable Parameter No change
mm Parameter EP2 not supported
type type Parameter No change
beamEnable Parameter New
startDotEnable Parameter New
endDotEnable Parameter New
globalEnable Parameter New
x Parameter EP2 not supported
y Parameter EP2 not supported
z Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

heading Parameter EP2 not supported
pitch Parameter EP2 not supported
list Parameter EP2 not supported
num Parameter EP2 not supported

laserbeam \define laserbeam \define CLI Command Changed

type type Parameter No change
model Parameter New
beamAlpha Parameter New
beamWidth Parameter New
startDotAlpha Parameter New
endDotAlpha Parameter New
startDotSize Parameter New
endDotSize Parameter New
endDotShift Parameter New
texture Parameter EP2 not supported
select Parameter EP2 not supported

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-73

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

red Parameter EP2 not supported
green Parameter EP2 not supported
blue Parameter EP2 not supported
alpha Parameter EP2 not supported
width Parameter EP2 not supported
maxlength Parameter EP2 not supported
list Parameter EP2 not supported

LASERBEAM \ENDPOSITION CLI Command New

number Parameter New
latdegree Parameter New
latminute Parameter New
latsecond Parameter New
longdegree Parameter New
longminute Parameter New
longsecond Parameter New
altitude Parameter New
ms Parameter New
sm Parameter Changed for 11.0
x Parameter New
y Parameter New
z Parameter New
azimuth Parameter New
elevation Parameter New
length Parameter New

LASERBEAM \MONITOR CLI Command New

number Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

LASERBEAM \STARTPOSITION CLI Command New
number Parameter New
latdegree Parameter New
latminute Parameter New
latsecond Parameter New
longdegree Parameter New
longminute Parameter New
longsecond Parameter New
altitude Parameter New
ms Parameter New
sm Parameter Changed for 11.0
x Parameter New
y Parameter New
z Parameter New
velLeadFields Parameter EP2 Deprecated

A-74 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

lasersight CLI Command Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

levi CLI Command Not yet Implemented

viewport Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \alt CLI Command Not yet Implemented

layer Parameter Not yet Implemented
bottomaltitude Parameter Not yet Implemented
topaltitude Parameter Not yet Implemented
transitionheight Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \col CLI Command Not yet Implemented

layer Parameter Not yet Implemented
redbottom Parameter Not yet Implemented
greenbottom Parameter Not yet Implemented
bluebottom Parameter Not yet Implemented
redtop Parameter Not yet Implemented
greentop Parameter Not yet Implemented
bluetop Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \fec CLI Command Not yet Implemented

exponentcode Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \ioc CLI Command Not yet Implemented

FogColorMax Parameter Not yet Implemented
FogColorMin Parameter Not yet Implemented
fogColorScalar Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

inCloudGFogScalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
inCloudLLScalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
kScalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
kStartRange Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \len CLI Command Not yet Implemented

layer Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \lvr CLI Command Not yet Implemented

layer Parameter Not yet Implemented
visrange Parameter Not yet Implemented
abovelayervis Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \mod CLI Command Not yet Implemented

layer Parameter Not yet Implemented
bottomcmgain Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-75

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

topcmgain Parameter Not yet Implemented
omgain Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \mon CLI Command Not yet Implemented

redweight Parameter Not yet Implemented
greenweight Parameter Not yet Implemented
blueweight Parameter Not yet Implemented
control Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \ogl CLI Command Not yet Implemented

layer Parameter Not yet Implemented
uvscale Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \ren CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \tex CLI Command Not yet Implemented

layer Parameter Not yet Implemented
sizeexponent Parameter Not yet Implemented
pmod Parameter Not yet Implemented
ustretch Parameter Not yet Implemented
vstretch Parameter Not yet Implemented
illumdirection Parameter Not yet Implemented

lfog \wnd CLI Command Not yet Implemented

directionwind Parameter Not yet Implemented
velocitywind Parameter Not yet Implemented

LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

light_calibration_table \group \GROUP CLI Command No Change
set set Parameter No Change
light0 light0 Parameter No Change
light1 light1 Parameter No Change
light2 light2 Parameter No Change
light3 light3 Parameter No Change
light4 light4 Parameter No Change

LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE
\LIST CLI Command New
set Parameter New
list Parameter New

LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE
light_calibration_table \range \RANGE CLI Command No Change
set set Parameter No Change
lower lower Parameter No Change

A-76 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

upper upper Parameter No Change

LIGHT_CALIBRATION_TABLE
light_calibration_table \select \SELECT CLI Command No Change
type type Parameter No Change
set set Parameter No Change

lightpoint CLI Command Not yet Implemented

categ Parameter Not yet Implemented
force_mode Parameter Not yet Implemented
force_omni Parameter Not yet Implemented
lift_eye Parameter Not yet Implemented
lift_z Parameter Not yet Implemented
min_defocus Parameter Not yet Implemented
max_defocus Parameter Not yet Implemented
disable_random Parameter Not yet Implemented
min_raster_size Parameter Not yet Implemented
refl_mode Parameter Not yet Implemented
force_eyehalo Parameter Not yet Implemented

LIGHTPOINT \ANIMATION CLI Command New

light Parameter New
ln Parameter New
mm Parameter New
control Parameter New
oAnimType Parameter New
oPeriod Parameter New
oPhaseDelay Parameter New
oTimeOn Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

LIGHTPOINT \COPY CLI Command New
srcCategory Parameter New
dstCategory Parameter New

LIGHTPOINT \DEFINE CLI Command New

category Parameter New
n Parameter New

LIGHTPOINT \EYEPOINT CLI Command New

ms Parameter New

LIGHTPOINT \FIXTURES CLI Command New

category Parameter New
fixtureForceMode Parameter New
stanchionMotif Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-77

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

stanchionSwitchIn Parameter New
stanchionTransRange Parameter New
stanchionHeight Parameter New
stanchionAspect Parameter New
stanchionScale Parameter New
baseplateMotif Parameter New
baseplateSwitchIn Parameter New
baseplateTransRange Parameter New
baseplateSize Parameter New
list Parameter New

lightpoint \halo LIGHTPOINT \HALOS CLI Command Changed

categ category Parameter No Change
force Parameter EP2 not supported
switch_in Parameter EP2 not supported
trans_range Parameter EP2 not supported
size Parameter EP2 not supported
refPlaneForceMode Parameter New
thickness Parameter New
perspHaloMotif Parameter New
perspHaloForceMode Parameter New
perspHaloSwitchIn Parameter New
perspHaloTransRange Parameter New
perspHaloSize Parameter New
perspHaloAspect Parameter New
perspHaloIntensScalar Parameter New
fogHaloMotif Parameter New
fogHaloForceMode Parameter New
fogHaloSwitchIn Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fogHaloTransRange Parameter New
fogHaloSwitchInVis Parameter New
fogHaloTransRangeVis Parameter New
fogHaloSize Parameter New
fogHaloAspect Parameter New
fogHaloIntensScalar Parameter New
fogHaloBulgeRange Parameter New
fogHaloBulgeSizeScalar Parameter New
fogHaloBulgePeakPos Parameter New
fogHaloSizeVsVisScalar Parameter New
fogHaloSizeVsVisMinAtVis Parameter New
fogHaloSizeVsVisMaxAtVis Parameter New
reflectionMotif Parameter New
reflectionForceMode Parameter New
reflectionUseProjPos Parameter New
reflectionSwitchIn Parameter New
reflectionTransRange Parameter New

A-78 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

reflectionSize Parameter New
reflectionAspect Parameter New
reflectionIntensScalar Parameter New
reflectionZOffset Parameter New
reflectionBotStretch Parameter New
reflectionRasterDotScalar Parameter New
reflectionPosMode Parameter New
reflectionForceNear Parameter New
ZAxisForceMode Parameter New
underlayMotif Parameter New
underlayForceMode Parameter New
underlaySwitchOut Parameter New
underlayTransRange Parameter New
underlayIntensScalar Parameter New
underlayAngularResolution Parameter New
haloProjectionScale Parameter New
reflectionMotifAdv Parameter New
advanced reflection halos Parameter New
reflectionSizeAdv Parameter New
reflectionAspectAdv Parameter New
reflectionIntensScalarAdv Parameter New
reflectionZOffsetAdv Parameter New
reflectionBotStretchAdv Parameter New
reflectionRandomTex Parameter New
list Parameter New

lightpoint \foghalo CLI Command Not yet Implemented

categ Parameter Not yet Implemented
force Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

switch_in Parameter Not yet Implemented
trans_range Parameter Not yet Implemented
switch_in_vis Parameter Not yet Implemented
trans_range_vis Parameter Not yet Implemented
size Parameter Not yet Implemented
grow_scale Parameter Not yet Implemented
grow_range Parameter Not yet Implemented
aspect Parameter Not yet Implemented
intens_scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented

LIGHTPOINT \INTENSITY CLI Command New

category Parameter New
forceOmni Parameter New
applyRandomization Parameter New
applyTODIntScalar Parameter New
randomizeBoostScalar Parameter New
rainDefocusBoostReduction Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-79

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

stepIntScalar Parameter New
lightPointDiscardIntensity Parameter New
dirAmbientScale Parameter New
animDirAmbient Parameter New
lightPointSensorScale Parameter New
SPForceMode Parameter New
SPActivationThreshold Parameter New
SPBreakPt Parameter New
SPScaleAtBreakPt Parameter New
SPMinScale Parameter New
SPDimBoost Parameter New
RAForceMode Parameter New
RAForceModeSimpleLP Parameter New
RAStartDist Parameter New
RAStartDistSimpleLP Parameter New
RAEndDist Parameter New
RABreakPt Parameter New
RAScaleAtBreakPt Parameter New
RAMinScale Parameter New
RAMinScaleSimpleLP Parameter New
DMForceMode Parameter New
DMBreakPt Parameter New
LobeTuneMode Parameter New
LobeHScalar Parameter New
LobeVScalar Parameter New
list Parameter New

LIGHTPOINT \MAP CLI Command New

gmap Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

lmap Parameter New
mapOptOut Parameter New
light Parameter New
ln Parameter New
mm Parameter New
listMapFrom Parameter New
listMapTo Parameter New
begin Parameter New
end Parameter New

LIGHTPOINT \POSITION CLI Command New

category Parameter New
lightLiftZ Parameter New
lightLiftEye Parameter New
visRangeCullScalar Parameter New
visRangeCullScalarSky Parameter New
list Parameter New

A-80 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

lightpoint \rangeatten CLI Command Not yet Implemented

categ Parameter Not yet Implemented
startdist Parameter Not yet Implemented
enddist Parameter Not yet Implemented
breakpt Parameter Not yet Implemented
scale_breakpt Parameter Not yet Implemented
min_scale Parameter Not yet Implemented

lightpoint \raster CLI Command Not yet Implemented

categ Parameter Not yet Implemented
force Parameter Not yet Implemented
min_size Parameter Not yet Implemented
max_size Parameter Not yet Implemented
occult Parameter Not yet Implemented
blend Parameter Not yet Implemented
const_e Parameter Not yet Implemented
step_limit_boost Parameter Not yet Implemented
vis_limit_boost Parameter Not yet Implemented
boost_scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
step_int_scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented

LIGHTPOINT \RENDER CLI Command New

category Parameter New
forceBlendMode Parameter New
forceFog Parameter New
forceCoplanarOverride Parameter New
coplanarGroup Parameter New
coplanarLayer Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

LPEyeSelect Parameter New
list Parameter New

lightpoint \samept CLI Command Not yet Implemented

categ Parameter Not yet Implemented
force Parameter Not yet Implemented
threshold Parameter Not yet Implemented
breakpt Parameter Not yet Implemented
scale_breakpt Parameter Not yet Implemented
min_scale Parameter Not yet Implemented
dim_boost Parameter Not yet Implemented

LIGHTPOINT \SIZE CLI Command New

category Parameter New
applyPerspGrowth Parameter New
minDefocus Parameter New
maxDefocus Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-81

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

minPixelSize Parameter New
maxPixelSize Parameter New
dotSizeBoostStepLimit Parameter New
dotSizeBoostScalar Parameter New
dotSizeBoostVisThreshold Parameter New
list Parameter New

LIGHTPOINT
\STEPVALUEOVERRIDES CLI Command New
category Parameter New
step Parameter New
light_scalar Parameter New
list Parameter New

LIGHTPOINT \SWITCHES CLI Command New

category Parameter New
switches Parameter New
runways Parameter New

LIGHTPOINT \TEXTURE CLI Command New

n Parameter New
textureName Parameter New

lightsourcemgr CLI Command Not yet Implemented

debug Parameter Not yet Implemented
depthbin Parameter Not yet Implemented
stats Parameter Not yet Implemented

LIGHTSOURCETUNE CLI Command New

type Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

backscatter Parameter New
magnitude Parameter New
reverseScalar Parameter New
enableDirSrc Parameter New
emband Parameter New

LIGHTSOURCETUNE \LATITUDE CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
beginLatitude Parameter New
endLatitude Parameter New
beginBackscatter Parameter New
beginMagnitude Parameter New
endMagnitude Parameter New
emband Parameter New

LIGHTSOURCETUNE
\NDOTERANGEADJUST CLI Command New

A-82 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

nearRange Parameter New
farRange Parameter New
rangeAdjustEnable Parameter New

list CLI Command Not yet Implemented

type Parameter Not yet Implemented
begin Parameter Not yet Implemented
end Parameter Not yet Implemented

load LOAD CLI Command Changed

model model Parameter No Change
slot slot Parameter Changed
type Parameter EP2 not supported
clean Parameter EP2 not supported
apparition Parameter EP2 not supported
apparClass Parameter EP2 not supported
smalltexturememory Parameter EP2 not supported
pagerange pageRange Parameter No Change
selectTexture Parameter New
behavior Parameter New
modelType Parameter New
list Parameter New
paged Parameter New

load \inset LOAD \INSET CLI Command No Change

name Parameter EP2 not supported
path path Parameter No Change

load \ct CLI Command Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

path Parameter Not yet Implemented
numlevels Parameter Not yet Implemented
emissive Parameter Not yet Implemented
suppresscultlights Parameter Not yet Implemented
mapping2 Parameter Not yet Implemented
mapping Parameter Not yet Implemented

LOAD \PROCESSDESCRIPTION CLI Command New

path Parameter New

load \dt LOADDT CLI Command Changed

name Parameter EP2 not supported
size size Parameter No Change
bias bias Parameter No Change
pmod Parameter EP2 not supported
file Parameter New
biasrate Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-83

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

LOADEMISSIVETEXTUERS CLI Command New

eanble Parameter New

load \model CLI Command Not yet Implemented

model Parameter Not yet Implemented
slot Parameter Not yet Implemented
type Parameter Not yet Implemented
clean Parameter Not yet Implemented
apparition Parameter Not yet Implemented
smalltexturememory Parameter Not yet Implemented
pagerange Parameter Not yet Implemented

load \sct CLI Command Not yet Implemented

path Parameter Not yet Implemented
numlevels Parameter Not yet Implemented
mapping Parameter Not yet Implemented

load \terrain CLI Command Not yet Implemented

name Parameter Not yet Implemented
path Parameter Not yet Implemented

load \vf CLI Command Not yet Implemented

name Parameter Not yet Implemented
intersectionmapping Parameter Not yet Implemented
mapping Parameter Not yet Implemented
path Parameter Not yet Implemented

lobe LOBE CLI Command Changed

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

select select Parameter No Change
flashEnable Parameter New

lobe \config CLI Command Not yet Implemented

newrangecurve Parameter Not yet Implemented

lobe \define LOBE \DEFINE CLI Command Changed

number number Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
pitch pitch Parameter No Change
beam beam Parameter No Change
range range Parameter No Change
feather feather Parameter No Change
intensity intensity Parameter Changed

A-84 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

scene Parameter New
adjustForTod Parameter New
steerable steerable Parameter No Change
chanmask chanMask Parameter No Change
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
mm Parameter New
diffTable Parameter New
flashPattern Parameter New
beamEnable Parameter New
beamRange Parameter New
glareScale Parameter New
atmosIllum Parameter New
overcastDayIntensity Parameter New
list Parameter New

LOBE \LIGHTMAP CLI Command EP2 Deprecated

texels Parameter EP2 Deprecated
feet Parameter EP2 Deprecated
enable Parameter EP2 Deprecated

lobe \fog CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
intlimit Parameter Not yet Implemented
mindeltaz Parameter Not yet Implemented

lobe \ownship CLI Command Not yet Implemented

red Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

green Parameter Not yet Implemented
blue Parameter Not yet Implemented
range Parameter Not yet Implemented
height Parameter Not yet Implemented
radius Parameter Not yet Implemented

LOCKDOWN CLI Command New

enable Parameter New

lod LOD CLI Command Changed

modelname modelname Parameter No Change
lodscalar lodscalar Parameter Changed
klodpriority Parameter Not yet Implemented
minlodclamp Parameter Not yet Implemented
maxlodclamp Parameter Not yet Implemented

lod \dbloadlist LOD \DBLOADLIST CLI Command No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-85

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

lod \global CLI Command Not yet Implemented

maxlodtransrange Parameter Not yet Implemented

lod \lodlist LOD \LODLIST CLI Command No Change

lod \remove CLI Command Not yet Implemented

modelname Parameter Not yet Implemented

LODTUNE CLI Command New

group Parameter New
enable Parameter New
noZoomSwitchInScalar Parameter New
noZoomSwitchOutScalar Parameter New
noZoomTransitionScalar Parameter New
noZoomSwitchInOffset Parameter New
noZoomSwitchOutOffset Parameter New
noZoomTransitionOffset Parameter New
zoomSwitchInScalar Parameter New
zoomSwitchOutScalar Parameter New
zoomTransitionScalar Parameter New
zoomSwitchInOffset Parameter New
zoomSwitchOutOffset Parameter New
zoomTransitionOffset Parameter New

logfile CLI Command Not yet Implemented

off Parameter Not yet Implemented
on Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

los LOS CLI Command No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
tp tp Parameter No Change
priority priority Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
latdegree latdegree Parameter No Change
latminute latminute Parameter No Change
latsecond latsecond Parameter No Change
longdegree longdegree Parameter No Change
longminute longminute Parameter No Change
longsecond longsecond Parameter No Change
altitude altitude Parameter No Change
endmm endmm Parameter No Change
endx endx Parameter No Change

A-86 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

endy endy Parameter No Change
endz endz Parameter No Change
endlatdegree endlatdegree Parameter No Change
endlatminute endlatminute Parameter No Change
endlatsecond endlatsecond Parameter No Change
endlongdegree endlongdegree Parameter No Change
endlongminute endlongminute Parameter No Change
endlongsecond endlongsecond Parameter No Change
endaltitude endaltitude Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
pitch pitch Parameter No Change
length length Parameter No Change
minlength minlength Parameter No Change
closest closest Parameter No Change
bypassmfe bypassmfe Parameter No Change
materialmaskindex materialmaskindex Parameter No Change
clear clear Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
movingmodelmaskindex Parameter New
Bypassmfe Parameter New

LOS \CONFIG CLI Command New

rotateStamps Parameter New
weather Parameter New
minCloudFade Parameter New
cloudSphereScale Parameter New
boxScale Parameter New
themelFeatures Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

LOS \DISTSHORE CLI Command New
enable Parameter New

LOS \FIC CLI Command New

enable Parameter New

LOS \MONITOR CLI Command New

tp Parameter New

lrf LRF CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
viewport viewport Parameter No Change
cursor cursor Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
pitch pitch Parameter No Change
roll roll Parameter EP Deprecated
clear clear Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-87

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

light light Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
color Parameter New

LRF \CONFIG CLI Command New

maxRange Parameter New
responseMode Parameter New
minAlpha Parameter New
weather Parameter New
minCloudFade Parameter New
cloudSphereScale Parameter New
boxScale Parameter New
themelFeatures Parameter New

lrf \degrade LRF \DEGRADE CLI Command No Change

type type Parameter No Change
percent_degradation percent_degradation Parameter No Change
min_mult min_mult Parameter No Change
max_mult max_mult Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change

LRF \LATLON_FORMAT CLI Command New

format Parameter New

lrf \text LRF \TEXT CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
xoffset xoffset Parameter No Change
yoffset yoffset Parameter No Change
cursor Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

mam CLI Command Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented
set Parameter Not yet Implemented
clear Parameter Not yet Implemented
heading Parameter Not yet Implemented
speed Parameter Not yet Implemented

mam \range CLI Command Not yet Implemented

set Parameter Not yet Implemented
clear Parameter Not yet Implemented
bottom Parameter Not yet Implemented
top Parameter Not yet Implemented

mam \select CLI Command Not yet Implemented

set Parameter Not yet Implemented
select_enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-88 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

markings CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
marks Parameter Not yet Implemented

markings \table CLI Command Not yet Implemented

tdt Parameter Not yet Implemented
mapa Parameter Not yet Implemented
ua Parameter Not yet Implemented
va Parameter Not yet Implemented
mapb Parameter Not yet Implemented
ub Parameter Not yet Implemented
vb Parameter Not yet Implemented

MATERIAL CLI Command New

n Parameter New
ambient Parameter New
diffuse Parameter New
specular Parameter New
emissive Parameter New
shininess Parameter New
rangeAdjustEnable Parameter New

MATERIAL \AMBRANGEADJUST CLI Command New

nearRange Parameter New
farRange Parameter New
farScale Parameter New
scene Parameter New
list Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

MATERIAL \CONTAMINANT CLI Command New
select Parameter New
ambient Parameter New
diffuse Parameter New
specular Parameter New
emissive Parameter New
shininess Parameter New

MATERIAL \DIFFRANGEADJUST CLI Command New

nearRange Parameter New
farRange Parameter New
farScale Parameter New
scene Parameter New
list Parameter New

MATERIAL \SPECRANGEADJUST CLI Command New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-89

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

nearRange Parameter New
farRange Parameter New
farScale Parameter New
scene Parameter New
list Parameter New

MATERIALMASK CLI Command New

index Parameter New
mode Parameter New
code0 Parameter New
code1 Parameter New
code2 Parameter New
code3 Parameter New
code4 Parameter New
code5 Parameter New
code6 Parameter New
code7 Parameter New
code8 Parameter New
code9 Parameter New
init Parameter New

MATERIALMASK \PRINT CLI Command New

index Parameter New
mode Parameter New

message MESSAGE CLI Command Changed

str Parameter EP2 not supported
process Parameter New
msg Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

auto Parameter New

mfe CLI Command Not yet Implemented

fixedlod Parameter Not yet Implemented
fixedfeatlod Parameter Not yet Implemented
fixedterrlod Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
level Parameter Not yet Implemented
fixedfeatrange Parameter Not yet Implemented
fixedterrrange Parameter Not yet Implemented
vfenable Parameter Not yet Implemented

MFE \BENCHMARK CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
mfeid Parameter New
type Parameter New
tp Parameter New

A-90 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

dump Parameter New
latency Parameter New
roundtrip Parameter New
reset Parameter New

MFE \CLI CLI Command New

id Parameter New
cli Parameter New
all Parameter New

MFE \COST CLI Command New

MFE \DROP CLI Command New

id Parameter New

MFE \EVENTS CLI Command New

dump Parameter New
enable Parameter New

MFE \LIST CLI Command New

type Parameter New
id Parameter New

MFE \TRAVERSE CLI Command New

HighResFeatRadius Parameter New
HighResModelRadius Parameter New

mfstats CLI Command Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

gp Parameter Not yet Implemented
detail Parameter Not yet Implemented
clear Parameter Not yet Implemented
file Parameter Not yet Implemented
message Parameter Not yet Implemented

mmapparition CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
duration0 Parameter Not yet Implemented
duration1 Parameter Not yet Implemented
zoffset0 Parameter Not yet Implemented
zoffset1 Parameter Not yet Implemented

mmlabel CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
name Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-91

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

textred Parameter Not yet Implemented
textgreen Parameter Not yet Implemented
textblue Parameter Not yet Implemented
textalpha Parameter Not yet Implemented
bgred Parameter Not yet Implemented
bggreen Parameter Not yet Implemented
bgblue Parameter Not yet Implemented
bgalpha Parameter Not yet Implemented

mmlabel \global CLI Command Not yet Implemented

nearPixelSize Parameter Not yet Implemented
farPixelSize Parameter Not yet Implemented
drawmode Parameter Not yet Implemented
coordmode Parameter Not yet Implemented
visRange Parameter Not yet Implemented
nearRange Parameter Not yet Implemented
farRange Parameter Not yet Implemented

mmlabel \model CLI Command Not yet Implemented

list Parameter Not yet Implemented
slot Parameter Not yet Implemented
xoffset Parameter Not yet Implemented
yoffset Parameter Not yet Implemented
zoffset Parameter Not yet Implemented

mmroutes CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented
routenum Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

routeenable Parameter Not yet Implemented
wayptenable Parameter Not yet Implemented
poleenable Parameter Not yet Implemented
linethickness Parameter Not yet Implemented
wayptradius Parameter Not yet Implemented
poleThickness Parameter Not yet Implemented
polelength Parameter Not yet Implemented
wayptsrelativez Parameter Not yet Implemented
routered Parameter Not yet Implemented
routegreen Parameter Not yet Implemented
routeblue Parameter Not yet Implemented
routealpha Parameter Not yet Implemented
wayptred Parameter Not yet Implemented
wayptgreen Parameter Not yet Implemented
wayptblue Parameter Not yet Implemented
wayptalpha Parameter Not yet Implemented
polered Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-92 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

polegreen Parameter Not yet Implemented
poleblue Parameter Not yet Implemented
polealpha Parameter Not yet Implemented

mmroutes \remove CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
routeNum Parameter Not yet Implemented

mmroutes \waypoints CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
routenum Parameter Not yet Implemented
resetData Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
z Parameter Not yet Implemented
latdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
latminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
latsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
longdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
longminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
longsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
altitude Parameter Not yet Implemented
latlon Parameter Not yet Implemented

mmthreatdome CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
solidEnable Parameter Not yet Implemented
wireframeEnable Parameter Not yet Implemented
semiMinorAxis Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

semiMajorAxis Parameter Not yet Implemented
verticalAxis Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
z Parameter Not yet Implemented
red Parameter Not yet Implemented
green Parameter Not yet Implemented
blue Parameter Not yet Implemented
alpha Parameter Not yet Implemented

MIRROR CLI Command New

view Parameter New
type Parameter New
direction Parameter New
list Parameter New

MIRROR \MODEL CLI Command New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-93

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

enable Parameter New
eye Parameter New
range Parameter New
pmod Parameter New
res Parameter New
clip Parameter New

MIRROR \VIEWPORT CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
eye Parameter New
sizeX Parameter New
sizeY Parameter New
x Parameter New
y Parameter New
z Parameter New
h Parameter New
p Parameter New
r Parameter New
radius Parameter New
pan Parameter New
tilt Parameter New

MONOCONVERSION TUNE CLI Command New

emband Parameter New
redCoeff Parameter New
greenCoeff Parameter New
blueCoeff Parameter New
textureScalar Parameter New
textureOffset Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

MONOINTENSITY \POLYGON CLI Command New
sensor Parameter New
n Parameter New
primary Parameter New
secondary Parameter New

MONOINTENSITY \TEXTURE CLI Command New

sensor Parameter New
n Parameter New
intensity Parameter New

motifinfo CLI Command Not yet Implemented

file Parameter Not yet Implemented

motion CLI Command Not yet Implemented

model Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-94 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

cursor Parameter Not yet Implemented
viewport Parameter Not yet Implemented
time Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

motion \acceleration CLI Command Not yet Implemented

heading Parameter Not yet Implemented
pitch Parameter Not yet Implemented
roll Parameter Not yet Implemented

motion \rates CLI Command Not yet Implemented

heading Parameter Not yet Implemented
pitch Parameter Not yet Implemented
roll Parameter Not yet Implemented

MOVINGMODELMASK CLI Command New

index Parameter New
mm0 Parameter New
mm1 Parameter New
mm2 Parameter New
mm3 Parameter New
mm4 Parameter New
mm5 Parameter New
mm6 Parameter New
mm7 Parameter New
mm8 Parameter New
mm9 Parameter New
maskType Parameter New
remove Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

reset Parameter New

MOVINGMODELMASK \PRINT CLI Command New

index Parameter New

nlim CLI Command Not yet Implemented

list Parameter Not yet Implemented
dispID Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
name Parameter Not yet Implemented

nlim \restore CLI Command EP Deprecated

dispID Parameter EP Deprecated
fileName Parameter EP Deprecated

NEWPAGER CLI Command New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-95

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

enable Parameter New
enableElevationPager Parameter New

NEWPAGER \CT CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
maxLOD Parameter New
pageInThrottle Parameter New
pageOutThrottle Parameter New
maxRange Parameter New
offsetCenterPriorityCircleRadius Parameter New
projectedPixelSizeScalar Parameter New
debugDraw Parameter New
testPatternCT Parameter New
sleepTestPattern Parameter New
bypassStage0PageInSleepInMS Parameter New

NEWPAGER \ELEV CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
maxLOD Parameter New
pageInThrottle Parameter New
pageOutThrottle Parameter New
highResRadius Parameter New
debugDraw Parameter New
pageElevationInSlowtime Parameter New

NEWPAGER \TEST CLI Command New

mode Parameter New
toCircleWithFalloffMaxLevel Parameter New
toCircleWithFalloffRadius Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

toCircleSingleLODRadius Parameter New
offsetCenterMaxLevel Parameter New
offsetCenterRadius Parameter New
truncViewConeMaxLevel Parameter EP2 Deprecated
truncViewConeMaxRange Parameter EP2 Deprecated
truncViewConeNearFarClipScale Parameter EP2 Deprecated
pageInThrottle Parameter New
pageOutThrottle Parameter New
debugDraw Parameter New
viewConeMaxLevel Parameter New

nvgbloom NVGBLOOM CLI Command Changed

viewport Parameter EP2 not supported
numblooms Parameter EP2 not supported
halodiam Parameter EP2 not supported
atten0 atten0 Parameter No Change
atten1 atten1 Parameter No Change

A-96 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

atten2 atten2 Parameter No Change
renderMode Parameter EP2 not supported
halobloombias Parameter EP2 not supported
enable Parameter New
threshold Parameter New
halorolloff Parameter New
bloomrolloff Parameter New

nvgbloom \alpha NVGBLOOM \ALPHA CLI Command No Change

viewport Parameter EP2 not supported
x1 x1 Parameter No Change
x2 x2 Parameter No Change
x3 x3 Parameter No Change
x4 x4 Parameter No Change
x5 x5 Parameter No Change
y1 y1 Parameter No Change
y2 y2 Parameter No Change
y3 y3 Parameter No Change
y4 y4 Parameter No Change
y5 y5 Parameter No Change

NVGBLOOM \DEPTHDELTA CLI Command New

min Parameter New
max Parameter New
start Parameter New
end Parameter New

nvgbloom \diameter NVGBLOOM \DIAMETER CLI Command No Change

viewport Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

x1 x1 Parameter No Change
x2 x2 Parameter No Change
x3 x3 Parameter No Change
x4 x4 Parameter No Change
x5 x5 Parameter No Change
y1 y1 Parameter No Change
y2 y2 Parameter No Change
y3 y3 Parameter No Change
y4 y4 Parameter No Change
y5 y5 Parameter No Change

nvgbloom \haloalpha NVGBLOOM \HALOALPHA CLI Command No Change

viewport Parameter EP2 not supported
x1 x1 Parameter No Change
x2 x2 Parameter No Change
x3 x3 Parameter No Change
x4 x4 Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-97

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

x5 x5 Parameter No Change
y1 y1 Parameter No Change
y2 y2 Parameter No Change
y3 y3 Parameter No Change
y4 y4 Parameter No Change
y5 y5 Parameter No Change

NVGBLOOM \HALODIAMETER CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
diameter Parameter New

NVGBLOOM \TEXTURE CLI Command New

bloomtexture Parameter New
halotexture Parameter New

nvgbloom \weight NVGBLOOM \WEIGHT CLI Command Changed

viewport Parameter EP2 not supported
red red Parameter No Change
green green Parameter No Change
blue blue Parameter No Change
cyan cyan Parameter No Change
yellow yellow Parameter No Change
magenta magenta Parameter No Change
white white Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
method Parameter New

nvgvis CLI Command Not yet Implemented

ftpolygain Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ctpolygain Parameter Not yet Implemented

ownshiplight OWNSHIPLIGHT CLI Command Changed

select select Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
pitch pitch Parameter No Change
list Parameter New

PAGER CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
pitch Parameter New
raylength Parameter New
ct_follow_terrain Parameter New
pf_follow_terrain Parameter New
seastate_follow_terrain Parameter New
mm Parameter New
fakeZoom Parameter New

A-98 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

fakeHalfAngle Parameter New
smSubmitRangeLODModifier Parameter New
maxSwitchInEstimate Parameter New
switchInCompressionScalar Parameter New

PAGER \CT CLI Command New

mode Parameter New
offset_dist Parameter New
ray_scale Parameter New
HighResRadius Parameter New
distScale Parameter New
maxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeMaxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeLength Parameter New
ViewConeGuardband Parameter New
ViewConeDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeUncapDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeOverride Parameter New

PAGER \ELEVDB CLI Command New

mode Parameter New
offset_dist Parameter New
ray_scale Parameter New
HighResRadius Parameter New
distScale Parameter New
maxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeMaxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeLength Parameter New
ViewConeGuardband Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ViewConeDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeUncapDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeOverride Parameter New

PAGER
\GBLINSETINRANGEDEFS CLI Command New
gblInsetSwitchInRange Parameter New

suppressInsetBadFaceWarningMsg Parameter New

disableInsetInRangeCulling Parameter New

PAGER \LISTINSETINRANGE CLI Command New

PAGER \PFCULL CLI Command New

mode Parameter New
offset_dist Parameter New
ray_scale Parameter New
HighResRadius Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-99

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

distScale Parameter New
maxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeMaxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeLength Parameter New
ViewConeGuardband Parameter New
ViewConeDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeUncapDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeOverride Parameter New

PAGER \PFPAGE CLI Command New

mode Parameter New
offset_dist Parameter New
ray_scale Parameter New
maxLevel Parameter New
HighResRadius Parameter New
distScale Parameter New
ViewConeMaxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeLength Parameter New
ViewConeGuardband Parameter New
ViewConeDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeUncapDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeOverride Parameter New

PAGER\SEASTATE
mode Parameter New
offset_dist Parameter New
ray_scale Parameter New
maxLevel Parameter New
HighResRadius Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

distScale Parameter New
maxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeMaxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeLength Parameter New
ViewConeGuardband Parameter New
ViewConeDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeUncapDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeOverride Parameter New

PAGER \TERRAINSKIN CLI Command New

mode Parameter New
offset_dist Parameter New
ray_scale Parameter New
HighResRadius Parameter New
distScale Parameter New
maxLevel Parameter New
ViewConeMaxLevel Parameter New

A-100 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

ViewConeLength Parameter New
ViewConeGuardband Parameter New
ViewConeDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeUncapDistScale Parameter New
ViewConeOverride Parameter New

PAGERDEBUG CLI Command New

face Parameter New
level Parameter New
x Parameter New
y Parameter New
dumpActive Parameter New
waitAnalysis Parameter New
target Parameter New
repageElev Parameter New
breakOn Parameter New

PAGERDEBUG\PAGETOSPEC CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
lat Parameter New
lon Parameter New
radius Parameter New
maxLevel_CT Parameter New
maxLevel_Terr Parameter New
renderTerrain Parameter New

PARTICLE CLI Command New

func Parameter New
n Parameter New
delay Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

all Parameter New

PARTICLE \APPEARANCE CLI Command New

n Parameter New
defName Parameter New
startred Parameter New
startgreen Parameter New
startblue Parameter New
startalpha Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
alpha Parameter New
endred Parameter New
endgreen Parameter New
endblue Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-101

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

endalpha Parameter New
startScale Parameter New
endScale Parameter New
zScale Parameter New
minSize Parameter New
maxSize Parameter New
spanratefill Parameter New
spanratefillfarrange Parameter New
doublesided Parameter New
Lighting Parameter New
clrblend Parameter New
sceneColorMask Parameter New
sceneColorScale Parameter New
primEffects Parameter New
sensorIndex Parameter New
numderived Parameter New
derivedradius Parameter New
groundClipEnable Parameter New

PARTICLE \CHAIN CLI Command New

n Parameter New
defName Parameter New
mm Parameter New
offsetx Parameter New
offsety Parameter New
offsetz Parameter New
dirVec Parameter New
inheritVel Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

PARTICLE \EMITTER CLI Command New
n Parameter New
defName Parameter New
maxParticles Parameter New
numInitialParticles Parameter New
particlesPerSecond Parameter New
particleSpacing Parameter New
emitterModelName Parameter New
minEmitterRadius Parameter New
maxEmitterRadius Parameter New
minConeAngle Parameter New
maxConeAngle Parameter New
dirx Parameter New
diry Parameter New
dirz Parameter New
latdegree Parameter New
latminute Parameter New

A-102 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

latsecond Parameter New
longdegree Parameter New
longminute Parameter New
longsecond Parameter New
altitude Parameter New
fadeRange Parameter New
cullRange Parameter New
killRange Parameter New
LODstartRange Parameter New
LODcompleteRange Parameter New
minLOD Parameter New
clampToTerrain Parameter New

PARTICLE \MOVEMENT CLI Command New

n Parameter New
defName Parameter New
minInitialVelocity Parameter New
maxInitialVelocity Parameter New
minHeadingVelocity Parameter New
maxHeadingVelocity Parameter New
minPitchVelocity Parameter New
maxPitchVelocity Parameter New
minRollVelocity Parameter New
maxRollVelocity Parameter New
minElevation Parameter New
maxElevation Parameter New
gravityScalar Parameter New
windScalar Parameter New
windRes Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

randomPathPercentX Parameter New
randomPathPercentY Parameter New
randomPathPercentZ Parameter New
randomMovePercentX Parameter New
randomMovePercentY Parameter New
randomMovePercentZ Parameter New
friction Parameter New

PARTICLE \PRINT CLI Command New

n Parameter New
defName Parameter New

PARTICLE \SCUD CLI Command New

n Parameter New
defName Parameter New
enable Parameter New
red Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-103

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
volScudMinVis Parameter New
maxOpacity Parameter New
startRange Parameter New
fullRange Parameter New
areaScudOpacity Parameter New
areaScudAlphaThreshold Parameter New
fourCorners Parameter New
forcedMinOpacity Parameter New

PARTICLE \TEXTURE CLI Command New

n Parameter New
defName Parameter New
path Parameter New
tex0 Parameter New
tex1 Parameter New
tex2 Parameter New
tex3 Parameter New
tex4 Parameter New
tex5 Parameter New
tex6 Parameter New
tex7 Parameter New
thickness Parameter New
depthModAmp Parameter New
numSubMaps0 Parameter New

PARTICLE \TIMING CLI Command New

n Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

defName Parameter New
minParticleDuration Parameter New
maxParticleDuration Parameter New
effectDuration Parameter New
emitterDuration Parameter New
startTime Parameter New
endTime Parameter New

PARTICLE \TYPE CLI Command New

n Parameter New
defName Parameter New
type Parameter New
render Parameter New
modelName Parameter New
minSelect Parameter New
maxSelect Parameter New
eyepointMS Parameter New

A-104 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

behavior Parameter New

path PATH CLI Command Changed

list list Parameter No Change
name Parameter EP2 not supported
index Parameter EP2 not supported
type Parameter New
value Parameter New

path \add CLI Command Not yet Implemented

index Parameter Not yet Implemented
name Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented

path \append PATH \APPEND CLI Command Changed

index Parameter EP2 not supported
name Parameter EP2 not supported
disk Parameter EP2 not supported
list Parameter EP2 not supported
type Parameter New
value Parameter New

path \prepend PATH \PREPEND CLI Command Changed

index Parameter EP2 not supported
name Parameter EP2 not supported
disk Parameter EP2 not supported
list Parameter EP2 not supported
type Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

value Parameter New

path \remove PATH \REMOVE CLI Command Changed

index Parameter EP2 not supported
name Parameter EP2 not supported
list Parameter EP2 not supported
type Parameter New
value Parameter New

PHYSICSSHIP \CLEANALL CLI Command New

PHYSICSSHIP \PROPERTIES CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
enable Parameter New
displacement Parameter New
dwt Parameter New
drag Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-105

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

draft Parameter New
tplength Parameter New
tpwidth Parameter New
hprsmoothing Parameter New

PHYSICSSIM \CLEANALL CLI Command New

PHYSICSSIM \PROPERTIES CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
mass Parameter New
dragx Parameter New
dragy Parameter New
dragz Parameter New
draft Parameter New
elasticity Parameter New
collision Parameter New
parentMM Parameter New

PHYSICSTRUCK \CLEANALL CLI Command EP2 Deprecated

PHYSICSTRUCK \PROPERTIES CLI Command EP2 Deprecated

mm Parameter EP2 Deprecated

enable Parameter EP2 Deprecated

maxverticaldelta Parameter EP2 Deprecated

radius Parameter EP2 Deprecated

tiremmlist Parameter EP2 Deprecated

plumes PLUMES CLI Command Changed

latdegree latdegree Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

latminute latminute Parameter No Change
latsecond latsecond Parameter No Change
longdegree longdegree Parameter No Change
longminute longminute Parameter No Change
longsecond longsecond Parameter No Change
altitude altitude Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter Changed
xoffset xoffset Parameter No Change
yoffset yoffset Parameter No Change
zoffset zoffset Parameter No Change
num num Parameter No Change
type type Parameter No Change
start start Parameter No Change
stop stop Parameter No Change
clean clean Parameter No Change
initxvel initxvel Parameter No Change
inityvel inityvel Parameter No Change

A-106 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

initzvel initzvel Parameter No Change
begintrans begintrans Parameter No Change
endtrans endtrans Parameter No Change
all Parameter New
spMask Parameter EP2 Deprecated
vpMask Parameter New

plumes \define PLUMES \DEFINE CLI Command Changed

type type Parameter No Change
texture texture Parameter No Change
width width Parameter No Change

tolerance tolerance Parameter No Change

spread spread Parameter No Change

repeattexture repeattexture Parameter No Change

beginFade beginFade Parameter No Change

endFade endFade Parameter No Change

segmentMaxLength segmentMaxLength Parameter No Change

windeffect windeffect Parameter No Change

rise rise Parameter No Change

fadein fadein Parameter No Change

sensorindex Parameter EP2 not supported

emband1 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband2 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband3 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband4 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband5 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband6 Parameter EP2 not supported
defName Parameter New

windSpeedAutoAdjustNumParticles Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

windSpeedAutoAdjustParticleSize Parameter New

windSpeedAutoAdjustParticleOpacit
y Parameter New

mmVelocityAutoAdjustNumParticles Parameter New

update Parameter New
sensorIndex Parameter New
useParticles Parameter New

polyoffset[na] CLI Command Not yet Implemented

slope_scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
slope_scalar_32 Parameter Not yet Implemented
layer_scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
layer_scalar_32 Parameter Not yet Implemented
sa_lift_enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
sa_lift_scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-107

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

position POSITION CLI Command Changed

mm mm Parameter No Change
latdegree latdegree Parameter No Change
latminute latminute Parameter No Change
latsecond latsecond Parameter No Change
longdegree longdegree Parameter No Change
longminute longminute Parameter No Change
longsecond longsecond Parameter No Change
altitude altitude Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
latlon Parameter EP2 not supported
select select Parameter Changed
heading heading Parameter No Change
pitch pitch Parameter No Change
roll roll Parameter No Change
q1 Parameter EP2 not supported
q2 Parameter EP2 not supported
q3 Parameter EP2 not supported
q4 Parameter EP2 not supported

position \equate POSITION \EQUATE CLI Command Changed

source source Parameter No Change
destination destination Parameter No Change
x Parameter New
y Parameter New
z Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

feet Parameter New
meters Parameter New
km Parameter New
miles Parameter New

position \jiggle POSITION \JIGGLE CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
xamplitude xAmplitude Parameter No Change
yamplitude yAmplitude Parameter No Change
zamplitude zAmplitude Parameter No Change
km Parameter EP2 not supported
miles Parameter EP2 not supported
meters Parameter EP2 not supported
xsmoothing xSmoothing Parameter No Change
ysmoothing ySmoothing Parameter No Change
zsmoothing zSmoothing Parameter No Change

A-108 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

position \latlon_format POSITION \LATLON_FORMAT CLI Command No Change

format format Parameter No Change
decimal Parameter Not yet Implemented
dms Parameter Not yet Implemented

position \offset CLI Command Not yet Implemented

source Parameter Not yet Implemented
destination Parameter Not yet Implemented
world_relative Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
z Parameter Not yet Implemented
km Parameter Not yet Implemented
miles Parameter Not yet Implemented
meters Parameter Not yet Implemented
feet Parameter Not yet Implemented

position \opacity CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
opacity Parameter Not yet Implemented

position \wobble POSITION \WOBBLE CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
hamplitude hAmplitude Parameter No Change
pamplitude pAmplitude Parameter No Change
ramplitude rAmplitude Parameter No Change
hsmoothing hSmoothing Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

psmoothing pSmoothing Parameter No Change
rsmoothing rSmoothing Parameter No Change

POWERLINES CLI Command New

droop Parameter New
droopLimit Parameter New

POWERLINES \DECORATIONS CLI Command New

num Parameter New
powerlineModel Parameter New
decorationModel Parameter New
spacing Parameter New
count Parameter New
select Parameter New
scale Parameter New

PP \BASELINE CLI Command New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-109

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

Start Parameter New
End Parameter New
List Parameter New
AutoCopy Parameter New

PP \FILE CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New
deadElementFile Parameter New
fixedPatNoiseFile Parameter New
mismatchFile Parameter New
testPattern Parameter New
testPatternFile Parameter New

PP \INSETMASK CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New
mode Parameter New
maskL Parameter New
maskR Parameter New
maskT Parameter New
maskB Parameter New
file Parameter New

PP \INTERLACE CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New
enable Parameter New
pixels Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

serration Parameter New
frontPorch Parameter New
syncWidthH Parameter New
backPorchH Parameter New
lines Parameter New
preEqual Parameter New
syncWidthV Parameter New
postEqual Parameter New
backPorchV Parameter New

PP \MESSAGE CLI Command New

information Parameter New
warning Parameter New
error Parameter New
fatal Parameter New

PP \OVERLAY CLI Command New

A-110 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New
enable Parameter New
throttle Parameter New
size Parameter New
priGain Parameter New
priLevel Parameter New
secGain Parameter New
secLevel Parameter New

PP \RESPONSE CLI Command New

gainLevel Parameter New
targetTracker Parameter New
thermalCuer Parameter New
contrastDifference Parameter New
trackerView Parameter New

PP \SWRENDER CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New
enable Parameter New
x Parameter New
y Parameter New
width Parameter New
height Parameter New
srcx Parameter New
srcy Parameter New
clearenable Parameter New
clearintensity Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

PP \VIDEOALIGN CLI Command New
viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New
enable Parameter New

PP \VIDEOIN CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New
redConversion Parameter New
greenConversion Parameter New
blueConversion Parameter New
pixelFormatIn Parameter New

PP \VIDEOOUT CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-111

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

r Parameter New
g Parameter New
b Parameter New
gamma Parameter New
pixelFormatOut Parameter New

PP \VIDEOSYNC CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
emband Parameter New
syncGreen Parameter New
syncComposite Parameter New
invertVSync Parameter New
invertHSync Parameter New

PRIMEFFECTS CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
enable Parameter New
num Parameter New
nearFieldAdj Parameter New
farFieldAdj Parameter New
range Parameter New
eqSelect Parameter New
tlSelect Parameter New

PRINT \LABEL CLI Command New

text Parameter New
mm Parameter New
x Parameter New
y Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

z Parameter New
latdegree Parameter New
latminute Parameter New
latsecond Parameter New
longdegree Parameter New
longminute Parameter New
longsecond Parameter New
altitude Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
alpha Parameter New
backred Parameter New
backgreen Parameter New
backblue Parameter New
backalpha Parameter New
align Parameter New

A-112 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

scale Parameter New
id Parameter New
bold Parameter New

printscreen PRINT \SCREEN CLI Command Changed

text text Parameter No Change
chan chan Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
scale scale Parameter No Change
rotation Parameter EP2 not supported
r Parameter EP2 not supported
g Parameter EP2 not supported
b Parameter EP2 not supported
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
alpha Parameter New
backred Parameter New
backgreen Parameter New
backblue Parameter New
backalpha Parameter New
id Parameter New
bold Parameter New

PROBER \PICK CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
los Parameter New
losLength Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

size Parameter New
range Parameter New
lineWidth Parameter New
segDegree Parameter New
segMaxLen Parameter New
latdegree Parameter New
latminute Parameter New
latsecond Parameter New
longdegree Parameter New
longminute Parameter New
longsecond Parameter New
altitude Parameter New

PROBER \TVERTS CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
face Parameter New
level Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-113

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

x Parameter New
y Parameter New
break Parameter New
position Parameter New
los Parameter New
losLength Parameter New
size Parameter New

projection CLI Command Not yet Implemented

ptype Parameter Not yet Implemented
lon Parameter Not yet Implemented
lat Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
lat1 Parameter Not yet Implemented
lat2 Parameter Not yet Implemented
file Parameter Not yet Implemented

PROPERTY CLI Command New

name Parameter New
value Parameter New
row Parameter New
col Parameter New

PROXYPOLYOUTPUT CLI Command New

blockSize Parameter New

radar RADAR CLI Command Changed

continuous continuous Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

materialconvert materialconvert Parameter No Change
convertfile Parameter New
capturefile capturefile Parameter No Change
triggercapture triggerCapture Parameter No Change
waitForPaging Parameter New
allowModels Parameter New

RADAR \CTLODOVERRIDE CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
level Parameter New

radar \display RADAR \DISPLAY CLI Command Changed

type type Parameter No Change
heightscale Parameter New
matscale matscale Parameter No Change
selectmaterial selectmaterial Parameter No Change
topheight topheight Parameter No Change

A-114 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

bottomheight bottomheight Parameter No Change

radar \rendercontrol RADAR \RENDERCONTROL CLI Command Changed

range range Parameter No Change
xrange xrange Parameter No Change
yrange yrange Parameter No Change
xoffset xoffset Parameter EP Deprecated
yoffset yoffset Parameter EP Deprecated
latdegree latdegree Parameter No Change
latminute latminute Parameter No Change
latsecond latsecond Parameter No Change
longdegree longdegree Parameter No Change
longminute longminute Parameter No Change
longsecond longsecond Parameter No Change
lonrange lonrange Parameter No Change
latrange latrange Parameter No Change
lonoffset lonoffset Parameter EP Deprecated
latoffset latoffset Parameter EP Deprecated
requestid requestid Parameter No Change
maxtskinpolys maxtskinpolys Parameter No Change
lodrangescale Parameter New
overridepos overridepos Parameter No Change
crackfill Parameter New
trigger trigger Parameter No Change
x Parameter EP2 not supported
y Parameter EP2 not supported

RADAR \SMOOTH CLI Command EP2 not supported

enable Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

scalar Parameter EP2 not supported
width Parameter EP2 not supported
exclude Parameter EP2 not supported
excludebegin Parameter EP2 not supported
excludeend Parameter EP2 not supported
include Parameter EP2 not supported
includebegin Parameter EP2 not supported
includeend Parameter EP2 not supported
subpatchmode Parameter EP2 not supported
excludelist Parameter EP2 not supported

RADAR
\TERRAINLODOVERRIDE CLI Command New
enable Parameter New
level Parameter New

RAINSNOW \INIT CLI Command New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-115

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

altEnable Parameter New
altSPMask Parameter EP2 Deprecated
altVPMask Parameter New
emband Parameter New

RAINSNOW \UNLOAD CLI Command New

emband Parameter New

RANGEFOCUS CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
enable Parameter New
lensScalar Parameter New
focusDistance Parameter New

rate RATE CLI Command No Change

fieldtime Parameter EP2 not supported
multiplier multiplier Parameter No Change
rtoffset Parameter EP2 not supported

rate \tod CLI Command Not yet Implemented

scene Parameter Not yet Implemented
fieldtime Parameter Not yet Implemented
auto Parameter Not yet Implemented

REFLECTIVITYTUNE CLI Command New

scale Parameter New
lsScale Parameter EP2 Deprecated
minZVal Parameter New
reflectivityScaleWater Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

scene Parameter New

REFLECTIVITYTUNE \AOI CLI Command New

table Parameter New
rMin Parameter New
rMax Parameter New
curve Parameter New

REFLECTIVITYTUNE\WIND CLI Command New

wrMin Parameter New
windSpeedAtMinReflectivity Parameter New
curve Parameter New
reflectivityEnable Parameter New
reflectivityLSEnable Parameter New

regionalweather REGIONALWEATHER CLI Command Changed

latdegree latDegree Parameter No Change

A-116 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

latminute latMinute Parameter No Change
latsecond latSecond Parameter No Change
longdegree longDegree Parameter No Change
longminute longMinute Parameter No Change
longsecond longSecond Parameter No Change
altitude altitude Parameter Changed
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
region region Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
radius radius Parameter No Change
transitionRange transitionRange Parameter No Change
componentmask componentMask Parameter No Change
scalex scaleX Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
verticaldistabovetop verticaldistabovetop Parameter No Change
verticaltransitionrange verticalTransitionRange Parameter No Change
drawproxy drawProxy Parameter No Change
brtReduct Parameter EP2 not supported
cntrReduct Parameter EP2 not supported
InCloudVisScalar Parameter EP2 not supported
list Parameter New

REGIONALWEATHER \FILTER CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
index Parameter New
type Parameter New
model Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

xRadius Parameter New
yRadius Parameter New
deltaXY Parameter New
deltaT Parameter New
thickness Parameter New
cloudTopOffset Parameter New
cloudBottomOffset Parameter New
ambRed Parameter New
list Parameter New

REGIONALWEATHER
\FOGVOLUME CLI Command New
region Parameter New
enableFogVolume Parameter New
numberOfSegments Parameter New
fogVolTex Parameter New
fogVolAuxTex Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-117

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

fogVolTexUScale Parameter New
fogVolTexVScale Parameter New
thinning Parameter New
alpha Parameter New
shaftColorScale Parameter New
finalRedScale Parameter New
finalGreenScale Parameter New
finalBlueScale Parameter New
skirtNormal Parameter New
entryScale Parameter New
depthModAmplitude Parameter New
fogVolHeightOffset Parameter New
lighting Parameter New
spanRate Parameter New
texIntReduction Parameter New
gFogIntensityScale Parameter New
visIntensityScale Parameter New
gFogDensityScale Parameter New
visDensityScale Parameter New

REGIONALWEATHER \MODEL CLI Command New

region Parameter New
useRWCloudModels Parameter New
iSectLineLength Parameter New
startFadeRange Parameter New
fullyFoggedRange Parameter New
scudWashMax Parameter New
flatRadius Parameter EP2 Deprecated
InCloudFogVolScalar Parameter EP2 Deprecated

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

InCloudScudScalar Parameter New
maxScudDelta Parameter New

REGIONALWEATHER \PROXY CLI Command New

region Parameter New
proxyType Parameter New
mapName Parameter New
lodRange Parameter New
fadeBandPercent Parameter New
lighting Parameter New
spanratefill Parameter New
spanratefillnearrange Parameter New
spanratefillfarrange Parameter New
opaquecenterrange Parameter New
particleScale Parameter New
randomScale Parameter New
nodrawcullrange Parameter New

A-118 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

zoffset Parameter New
topIntensity Parameter New
bottomIntensity Parameter New
materialIndex Parameter New
mipTexelThreshold Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
scudStartRange Parameter New
scudFullRange Parameter New
fixedMipLevel Parameter New
print Parameter New

REGIONALWEATHER
\PROXYTEXTURE CLI Command New
region Parameter New
proxyType Parameter New
path Parameter New
tex0 Parameter New
tex1 Parameter New
tex2 Parameter New
tex3 Parameter New
tex4 Parameter New
tex5 Parameter New
tex6 Parameter New
tex7 Parameter New
thickness Parameter New
depthModAmp Parameter New
print Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

REGIONALWEATHER \TUNE Parameter New
region Parameter New
frontSkirtOpacity Parameter New
backSkirtOpacity Parameter New
radius Parameter New
earlyTransition Parameter New
topProxyWidth Parameter New
skirtProxyWidth Parameter New
skirtProxythickness Parameter New
drawSkirtProxy Parameter New
noDrawCullToVis Parameter New
hScudWashFt Parameter New
vScudWashFt Parameter New
useTopProxyTransition Parameter New
minHwCloudThickness Parameter New
legacyHostMode Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-119

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

useGlobalInRegion Parameter New

REMAP \LIGHTS Parameter New

enable Parameter New
name Parameter New

rendermode RENDERMODE CLI Command Changed

environment Parameter EP2 not supported
terrain Parameter EP2 not supported
minsliverthickness Parameter EP2 not supported
maxsliverthickness Parameter EP2 not supported
secondMapModulateStyle Parameter EP2 not supported
tshadows Parameter EP2 not supported
mflines mfLines Parameter No Change
vertexBufferObject Parameter EP2 not supported
vertexArray Parameter EP2 not supported
looseBackFaceCull Parameter EP2 not supported
intVertMax Parameter EP2 not supported
drawArealBases Parameter EP2 not supported
exportMM Parameter EP2 not supported
tiffGrab Parameter EP2 not supported
longAdjustEnable Parameter EP2 not supported
terrainFade Parameter EP2 not supported
multiThreadInitProcFT Parameter EP2 not supported
wireframe wireframe Parameter No Change
clearbkg Parameter EP2 not supported
fog Parameter EP2 not supported
lighting Parameter EP2 not supported
texture texture Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fieldtracking Parameter EP2 not supported
cullslivers Parameter EP2 not supported
clip Parameter EP2 not supported
controlvols Parameter EP2 not supported
reorderprims Parameter EP2 not supported
outline Parameter New
transparency Parameter New
depthcomplexity Parameter New
phongiteration Parameter New
drawboundingboxes Parameter New
lightproxy Parameter New
mip Parameter New
checker Parameter New
paneldots Parameter New
alphatexture Parameter New
antialiasing Parameter New
aafilter Parameter New

A-120 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

shapedFilter Parameter New
binCulling Parameter New
alphaTransparency Parameter New
alphaCull Parameter New
opaqueCull Parameter New
spanfull Parameter New
volumetric Parameter New
spanrate Parameter New
andvancedSpanrate Parameter New
anisotropic Parameter EP2 Deprecated
priAnisotropic Parameter New
secAnisotropic Parameter New
anisotropiciteration Parameter New
dynamicAnisotropic Parameter New
dirlight Parameter New
poslight Parameter New
lightscatter Parameter New
lsReflections Parameter New
lsrcaliasreduction Parameter New
contrastreduction Parameter New
softsaturate Parameter New
hwClouds Parameter New
hybridClouds Parameter New
primEffects Parameter New
mfBoxes Parameter New
smc Parameter New
hatVisual Parameter New
cdVisual Parameter New
losVisual Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

forceNearDepth Parameter New
forceFarDepth Parameter New
scud Parameter New
enhancedSeaVis Parameter New
particleLOD Parameter New

RENDERMODE \AFFINITY CLI Command New

networkFT Parameter New
networkST Parameter New
oglRender Parameter New
renderParse Parameter New
seaStates Parameter New
tricklePrepST Parameter New
sortST Parameter New
sortFT Parameter New
sortCrit Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-121

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

RENDERMODE \DEBUG CLI Command New
enableSendToSP Parameter New
shaderCacheMiss Parameter New
threadId Parameter New
processorId Parameter New
spareTimeDelay Parameter New
vpSpareTimeDelay Parameter New
ival0 Parameter New
ival1 Parameter New
ival2 Parameter New
ival3 Parameter New
ival4 Parameter New
ival5 Parameter New
ival6 Parameter New
ival7 Parameter New
ival8 Parameter New
ival9 Parameter New
ival10 Parameter New
ival11 Parameter New
fval0 Parameter New
fval1 Parameter New
fval2 Parameter New
fval3 Parameter New

RENDERMODE \IMPORTCACHE CLI Command New

model Parameter New
theme Parameter New
vectorFeature Parameter New
allocID Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

cacheMat Parameter New
stampCacheMat Parameter New

RENDERMODE \OGL CLI Command New

vboCache Parameter New
pboCache Parameter New
earlyVboST Parameter New
compressTextures Parameter EP2 Deprecated
sensorSpecificCompression Parameter EP2 Deprecated
filterMode Parameter New
texLoadTime Parameter EP2 Deprecated
reportDone Parameter New
cloudlayers Parameter New
atmosphere Parameter New
fogVolume Parameter New
depthModulation Parameter New

A-122 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

reflectionBuffer Parameter New
particleBuffer Parameter EP2 Deprecated
fogBuffer Parameter New
volumeCount Parameter New
lighting Parameter New
vertexLight Parameter EP2 Deprecated
fragmentlight Parameter New
arealight Parameter New
ownshiplight Parameter EP2 Deprecated
backscatter Parameter New
primaryTexture Parameter EP2 Deprecated
alternateTexture Parameter EP2 Deprecated
secondaryTexture Parameter EP2 Deprecated
specularTexture Parameter EP2 Deprecated
clearColor Parameter New
clearDepth Parameter New
reverseDepth Parameter New
aaSubsamples Parameter New
bitPrecision Parameter New
stencilBuffer Parameter EP2 Deprecated
instanceST Parameter New
instanceFT Parameter New
instanceMinPrim Parameter New
instanceMinGrouping Parameter New
drawCritFirst Parameter EP2 Deprecated
sortST Parameter New
sortFT Parameter New
sortCrit Parameter New
orderedOutput Parameter EP2 Deprecated

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

splitter Parameter EP2 Deprecated
sortParticleEffects Parameter New
sortBrokenClouds Parameter New
onePrim Parameter New
geFovCull Parameter New
tiny Parameter New
vpsize Parameter New
vpw Parameter New
vph Parameter New
renderParse Parameter New
cullST Parameter New
cullFT Parameter New
guardST Parameter New
importCache Parameter EP2 Deprecated
importAllocID Parameter EP2 Deprecated
cacheMat Parameter EP2 Deprecated
stampCacheMat Parameter EP2 Deprecated

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-123

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

tessellation Parameter New
deltaScale Parameter New
ditherScale Parameter New
layerScale Parameter New
clampLayerOffset Parameter New
supertile Parameter EP2 Deprecated
drawElementFlushCount Parameter New
gpuFanSpeed Parameter New
lpAntiAliasScalar Parameter New
trackAssist Parameter New

RENDERMODE \SORTCACHE CLI Command New

tightFovCull Parameter New
tightRadiusScale Parameter New
tightMinInstances Parameter New
simpleHyperZ Parameter EP2 Deprecated
backfaceCull Parameter New
backfaceThreshold Parameter New

RENDERMODE \STATEDATA CLI Command New

maxRows Parameter New
pbo Parameter New

RENDERMODE \TEXTURE CLI Command New

primary Parameter New
alternate Parameter New
secondary Parameter New
specular Parameter New
compression Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

sensorCompression Parameter New
loadTime Parameter New
splitSize Parameter New

RENDERMODE \THREAD CLI Command New

sortST Parameter New
sortFT Parameter New
sortCrit Parameter New
renderParse Parameter New
suspendST Parameter New
networkFT Parameter New
networkST Parameter New

RENDERMODE
\THROTTLETEXCOMPRESSION CLI Command New
enable Parameter New
workTime Parameter New

A-124 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

sleepTime Parameter New

resetindex CLI Command Not yet Implemented

index Parameter Not yet Implemented

ribbon RIBBON CLI Command No Change

list list Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter Cnanged
enable enable Parameter No Change
period period Parameter No Change
maxsegments maxsegments Parameter No Change
width width Parameter No Change
topred topred Parameter No Change
topgreen topgreen Parameter No Change
topblue topblue Parameter No Change
topalpha topalpha Parameter No Change
bottomred bottomred Parameter No Change
bottomgreen bottomgreen Parameter No Change
bottomblue bottomblue Parameter No Change
bottomalpha bottomalpha Parameter No Change
offsety offsety Parameter No Change
offsetz offsetz Parameter No Change
globalminwidth globalminwidth Parameter No Change
globalmaxwidth globalmaxwidth Parameter No Change

rotorwash ROTORWASH CLI Command Changed

num Parameter EP2 not supported
enable enable Parameter No Change
washmm Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

bowltemplate Parameter EP2 not supported
parentmm Parameter EP2 not supported
startheight Parameter EP2 not supported
completeheight Parameter EP2 not supported
expansiontime Parameter EP2 not supported
scale Parameter EP2 not supported
maxspeed Parameter EP2 not supported
minspeed Parameter EP2 not supported
manualmode Parameter EP2 not supported
manualindex Parameter EP2 not supported
rif Parameter EP2 not supported
faderamp Parameter EP2 not supported
heightramp Parameter EP2 not supported
windeffect Parameter EP2 not supported
number Parameter New
all Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-125

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

ROTORWASH \ALPHA CLI Command New
mode Parameter New

ROTORWASH \DEFINE CLI Command New

number Parameter New
parentmm Parameter New
startHeight Parameter New
completeHeight Parameter New
minSpeed Parameter New
maxSpeed Parameter New
startDurationScale Parameter New
completeDurationScale Parameter New
heightRamp Parameter New
startParticleSizeScale Parameter New
completeParticleSizeScale Parameter New
startParticlesPerSecondScale Parameter New
completeParticlesPerSecondScale Parameter New
startParticleVelocityScale Parameter New
completeParticleVelocityScale Parameter New
bladeZoffset Parameter New
expansiontime Parameter New
scudEnable Parameter New
areaScudStartHeight Parameter New
areaScudCompleteHeight Parameter New
brownoutStartHeight Parameter New
brownoutCompleteHeight Parameter New
groundModelName Parameter New
groundModelMaxScale Parameter New
groundModelMinScale Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

radiusScale Parameter New
fadeRamp Parameter New
heightRamp Parameter New
manualmode Parameter New
manualindex Parameter New

rotorwash \fic ROTORWASH \FIC CLI Command Not yet Implemented

index index Parameter Not yet Implemented
select select Parameter Not yet Implemented
red red Parameter Not yet Implemented
green green Parameter Not yet Implemented
blue blue Parameter Not yet Implemented
opacity opacity Parameter Not yet Implemented
inrange inrange Parameter Not yet Implemented
outrange outrange Parameter Not yet Implemented

rotorwash \lag ROTORWASH \LAG CLI Command No Change

A-126 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

tiltlagscale tiltlagscale Parameter No Change
distancelagscale distancelagscale Parameter No Change
speedlagscale speedlagscale Parameter No Change
number Parameter No Change

rotorwash \manual CLI Command Not yet Implemented

index Parameter Not yet Implemented
select Parameter Not yet Implemented
red Parameter Not yet Implemented
green Parameter Not yet Implemented
blue Parameter Not yet Implemented
opacity Parameter Not yet Implemented
inrange Parameter Not yet Implemented
outrange Parameter Not yet Implemented

rotorwash \material CLI Command Not yet Implemented

index Parameter Not yet Implemented
select Parameter Not yet Implemented
red Parameter Not yet Implemented
green Parameter Not yet Implemented
blue Parameter Not yet Implemented
opacity Parameter Not yet Implemented
inrange Parameter Not yet Implemented
outrange Parameter Not yet Implemented

ROTORWASH \MONITOR CLI Command New

number Parameter New

rotorwash \printcurrent CLI Command Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

num Parameter Not yet Implemented

rotorwash \tracks CLI Command Not yet Implemented

num Parameter Not yet Implemented
type Parameter Not yet Implemented
start Parameter Not yet Implemented
stop Parameter Not yet Implemented
clean Parameter Not yet Implemented

rotorwash \definetracks CLI Command Not yet Implemented

type Parameter Not yet Implemented
template Parameter Not yet Implemented
enablefilltemplate Parameter Not yet Implemented
filltemplate Parameter Not yet Implemented
selectmodulo10 Parameter Not yet Implemented
width Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-127

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

tolerance Parameter Not yet Implemented
spread Parameter Not yet Implemented
beginFade Parameter Not yet Implemented
endFade Parameter Not yet Implemented
segmentMaxLength Parameter Not yet Implemented
windeffect Parameter Not yet Implemented
fadein Parameter Not yet Implemented
leadingedgefade Parameter Not yet Implemented
fullheighttime Parameter Not yet Implemented
fullheightscale Parameter Not yet Implemented

ROTORWASHTABLE \FIC CLI Command New

index Parameter New
list Parameter New
type Parameter New
select Parameter New

ROTORWASHTABLE \MANUAL CLI Command New

index Parameter New
list Parameter New
type Parameter New
select Parameter New

ROTORWASHTABLE \MATERIAL CLI Command New

index Parameter New
list Parameter New
type Parameter New
select Parameter New

ROTORWASHTABLE

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

\GROUNDEFFECT CLI Command New
type Parameter New
particleSystem Parameter New
startGravity Parameter New
completeGravity Parameter New
startParticlesPerSecond Parameter New
completeParticlesPerSecond Parameter New
startParticleVelocity Parameter New
completeParticleVelocity Parameter New
startAlpha Parameter New
completeAlpha Parameter New

ROTORWASHTABLE
\OWNSHIPRECIRCULATION CLI Command New
type Parameter New
particleSystem Parameter New

A-128 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

ROTORWASHTABLE
\ROTORSPRAY CLI Command New
type Parameter New
particleSystem Parameter New
startAlpha Parameter New
completeAlpha Parameter New
startGravity Parameter New
completeGravity Parameter New
startDuration Parameter New
completeDuration Parameter New
startParticleSize Parameter New
completeParticleSize Parameter New
startParticlesPerSecond Parameter New
completeParticlesPerSecond Parameter New
startParticleVelocity Parameter New
completeParticleVelocity Parameter New

ROTORWASHTYPEDEF \SCUD CLI Command New

type Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
opacity Parameter New
inrange Parameter New
outrange Parameter New
areaScudMaxOpacity Parameter New
areaScudAlphaThreshold Parameter New
brownoutMaxOpacity Parameter New

ROTORWASH \TERRAINMODE CLI Command New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

mode Parameter New

ROUTE CLI Command New

func Parameter New
id Parameter New
all Parameter New

ROUTE \DEFINE CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
x Parameter New
z Parameter New
speed Parameter New
cyclic Parameter New
direction Parameter New
smooth Parameter New
tstart Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-129

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

tend Parameter New
id Parameter New
y Parameter New
filename Parameter New
latdegree Parameter New
latminute Parameter New
latsecond Parameter New
longdegree Parameter New
longminute Parameter New
longsecond Parameter New
altitude Parameter New

ROUTE \INFO CLI Command New

id Parameter New

ROUTE \LIST CLI Command New

ROUTERECORD CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
func Parameter New
all Parameter New

ROUTERECORD \DEFINE CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
filename Parameter New
z Parameter New
description Parameter New

rtplay CLI Command Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

list Parameter Not yet Implemented
unload Parameter Not yet Implemented
number Parameter Not yet Implemented
mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
file Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
z Parameter Not yet Implemented
scalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
cyclic Parameter Not yet Implemented
direction Parameter Not yet Implemented
play Parameter Not yet Implemented
stop Parameter Not yet Implemented
pause Parameter Not yet Implemented
resume Parameter Not yet Implemented
load Parameter Not yet Implemented
start Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-130 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

rtplay \define CLI Command Not yet Implemented

color Parameter Not yet Implemented
mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
load Parameter Not yet Implemented
turn_radius Parameter Not yet Implemented
tfm Parameter Not yet Implemented
mph Parameter Not yet Implemented
kph Parameter Not yet Implemented
knots Parameter Not yet Implemented
fps Parameter Not yet Implemented
mps Parameter Not yet Implemented
wait Parameter Not yet Implemented
grab Parameter Not yet Implemented
insert Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
z Parameter Not yet Implemented
h Parameter Not yet Implemented
r Parameter Not yet Implemented
quit Parameter Not yet Implemented
display Parameter Not yet Implemented
save Parameter Not yet Implemented
edit0 Parameter Not yet Implemented
edit1 Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
p Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented
delete0 Parameter Not yet Implemented
delete1 Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

rtplay \trigger CLI Command Not yet Implemented
number Parameter Not yet Implemented
type Parameter Not yet Implemented
mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
routenum Parameter Not yet Implemented
range Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
iterations Parameter Not yet Implemented
autostop Parameter Not yet Implemented

rtrecord CLI Command Not yet Implemented

file Parameter Not yet Implemented
start Parameter Not yet Implemented
desc Parameter Not yet Implemented
z Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-131

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
stop Parameter Not yet Implemented

runway RUNWAY CLI Command Changed

region region Parameter No Change
contaminants contaminants Parameter Changed
list Parameter New
help Parameter New

scale SCALE CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
tx tx Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
ty ty Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
tz tz Parameter No Change
channelMask Parameter EP2 not supported

season SEASON CLI Command No Change

scene scene Parameter No Change

sensorlightpoint CLI Command Not yet Implemented

emband Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

SENSORTEXSCALAR CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
nvg Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

evs Parameter New
mwir Parameter New
lwir Parameter New
eo Parameter New

shadow SHADOW CLI Command Changed

mm mm Parameter Changed
basecontrolid basecontrolid Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
intscale intscale Parameter No Change
groundlevel groundlevel Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
disableTerrainConforming Parameter New
highPrecisionRange Parameter New
airBasedZLift Parameter New

SHADOW \CONFIG CLI Command New

A-132 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

movingmodelmaskindex Parameter New
foreshortenDegrees Parameter New

SHADOW \ENV CLI Command New

ambientContrast Parameter New
diffuseContrast Parameter New
penumbraWidth Parameter New
emband Parameter New

shadow \staticmodels CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
intscale Parameter Not yet Implemented

showarealdepth CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
disable Parameter Not yet Implemented

SIGNBOARDSCALE CLI Command New

group Parameter New
enable Parameter New
nearRange Parameter New
farRange Parameter New
scale Parameter New
offset Parameter New

sky SKY CLI Command Changed

select select Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
enable Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

radius Parameter New
top Parameter New
rings Parameter New
slices Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
emband Parameter New

SKY \REFLECTION CLI Command New

select Parameter New
enable Parameter New
mode Parameter New
sizeScaleAtMinAlt Parameter New
sizeScaleAtMaxAlt Parameter New
speedScaleAtMinAlt Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-133

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

speedScaleAtMaxAlt Parameter New
emband Parameter New

SKY \TEXTURE CLI Command New

select Parameter New
intensity Parameter New
sizeFeet Parameter New
file Parameter New
scene Parameter New
apparentCloudCoverage Parameter New
list Parameter New
emband Parameter New

SMCMAP CLI Command New

n Parameter New
map Parameter New
enable Parameter New

SMPOLY CLI Command New

perimPolyConcavityRejectThreshold Parameter New

shadingNormalsEnable Parameter New
interFacePolyEnable Parameter New
excluderEnable Parameter New
smallPolyRejectThresh Parameter New
excluderInRangeDelayCount Parameter New
logInvalidFragments Parameter New
dontExcludeCheck Parameter New
morphRange Parameter New
polySensorIndexInvalidLogCountMax Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

writeModelInstAsMarker Parameter New
perModelInstViewConeCulling Parameter New
hierModelInstViewConeCulling Parameter New

diagnosticModelInstSwitchInScalar Parameter New

wakeTestSize Parameter New
doOldClipConform Parameter New

SMPOLY \ENABLE CLI Command New

modelInstance Parameter New
conformal Parameter New
coplanar Parameter New
terrainToAbsolute Parameter New
nonconformal Parameter New
terrainCutter Parameter New
perimeterPoly Parameter New

A-134 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

flattener Parameter New
excluder Parameter New
proxyPoly Parameter New
cutAndFill Parameter New
cutAndFillLinear Parameter New

SMPOLY \LATLONGFILTER CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
latitude Parameter New
longitude Parameter New
latdegree Parameter EP2 Deprecated
latminute Parameter EP2 Deprecated
latsecond Parameter EP2 Deprecated
longdegree Parameter EP2 Deprecated
longminute Parameter EP2 Deprecated
longsecond Parameter EP2 Deprecated
radius Parameter New

SNVG CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
redWeight Parameter New
greenWeight Parameter New
blueWeight Parameter New
polyGain Parameter New
lightGain Parameter New

SNVG \ATM CLI Command New

gain Parameter New
transScale Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SNVG \CLD CLI Command New
gain Parameter New
transScale Parameter New

SNVG \DIR CLI Command New

gain Parameter New
ambHighMoon Parameter New
ambNoMoon Parameter New
difHighMoon Parameter New
difNoMoon Parameter New
specHighMoon Parameter New
specNoMoon Parameter New
ambient Parameter EP2 Deprecated
diffuse Parameter EP2 Deprecated
specular Parameter EP2 Deprecated

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-135

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

SNVG \FOG CLI Command New
gain Parameter New
transScale Parameter New

SNVG \HALO CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
view Parameter New
range Parameter New
threshold Parameter New
intensity Parameter New
bloom Parameter New
radius Parameter New
maxnum Parameter New
motif Parameter New
draw Parameter New

SNVG \POS CLI Command New

gain Parameter New

SNVG \VIEWPORT CLI Command New

view Parameter New
video Parameter New
select Parameter New

SPANRATE CLI Command New

sky Parameter New
terrain Parameter New
step Parameter New
frame Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

spn CLI Command Not yet Implemented
latlon Parameter Not yet Implemented

spn \light_group CLI Command Not yet Implemented

spn Parameter Not yet Implemented
ep1 Parameter Not yet Implemented
ep2 Parameter Not yet Implemented
ep3 Parameter Not yet Implemented
ep4 Parameter Not yet Implemented
ep5 Parameter Not yet Implemented
ep6 Parameter Not yet Implemented

spn \model CLI Command Not yet Implemented

latitude Parameter Not yet Implemented
longitude Parameter Not yet Implemented
xoffset Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-136 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

yoffset Parameter Not yet Implemented
heading Parameter Not yet Implemented
altitude Parameter Not yet Implemented

spn \offset CLI Command Not yet Implemented

heading Parameter Not yet Implemented

spn \traffic CLI Command Not yet Implemented

groundModel Parameter Not yet Implemented
groundSelect Parameter Not yet Implemented
airModel Parameter Not yet Implemented
airSelect Parameter Not yet Implemented
tcasLatlonEnable Parameter Not yet Implemented

spn \visibility CLI Command Not yet Implemented

spnMax Parameter Not yet Implemented
epMax Parameter Not yet Implemented

SPXCONFIG CLI Command New

SPXCONFIG \DEBUG CLI Command New

SPXCONFIG \GENERIC CLI Command New

zeroAltitudeMode Parameter New

SPXCONFIG \HAT CLI Command New

hotRequired Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SPXCONFIG \STORM CLI Command New
number Parameter New
model Parameter New
select Parameter New

STARS CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
refEnable Parameter New
file Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STATISTICS CLI Command New

clear Parameter New
record Parameter New
filename Parameter New
SPs Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-137

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

multiplier Parameter New

stats STATS CLI Command Changed

file Parameter EP2 not supported
clear Parameter EP2 not supported
tabbed Parameter EP2 not supported
Enable Parameter New
SP Parameter New
Node Parameter New

stats \render CLI Command Not yet Implemented

file Parameter Not yet Implemented
tabbed Parameter Not yet Implemented

stats \lightprims CLI Command Not yet Implemented

stgain STGAIN CLI Command Changed

band Parameter EP2 not supported
gain gain Parameter No Change
mrdt Parameter EP2 not supported
emband Parameter New

stlevel STLEVEL CLI Command Changed

band Parameter EP2 not supported
temperatureC Parameter EP2 not supported
emband Parameter New
leveltemp Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

storm STORM CLI Command Changed
level level Parameter No Change
lightning lightning Parameter No Change
rain rain Parameter No Change
particlerain particleRain Parameter No Change
flashtype flashType Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter Changed
emband Parameter New

storm \llevel STORM \LLEVEL CLI Command Changed

level level Parameter No Change
frequency frequency Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

storm \lscene STORM \LSCENE CLI Command Changed

scene scene Parameter No Change

A-138 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

scale scale Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

storm \rlevel STORM \RLEVEL CLI Command Changed

level level Parameter No Change
cdefocus cdefocus Parameter No Change
rdefocus rdefocus Parameter No Change
cbuild cbuild Parameter No Change
cclear cclear Parameter No Change
rbuild rbuild Parameter No Change
rclear rclear Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

storm \sdist STORM \SDIST CLI Command Changed

min min Parameter No Change
max max Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

storm \slevel STORM \SLEVEL CLI Command Changed

level level Parameter No Change
minscalar minScalar Parameter No Change
maxscalar maxScalar Parameter No Change
vis vis Parameter No Change
amb amb Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

storm \sscene STORM \SSCENE CLI Command Changed
scene scene Parameter No Change
vis vis Parameter Changed
amb_reduction amb_reduction Parameter Changed
list list Parameter No Change

stormcontrol STORMCONTROL CLI Command No Change

number number Parameter No Change
cell cell Parameter No Change
select select Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
immediatelightning immediateLightning Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
cloudbase cloudBase Parameter No Change
cloudTop Parameter EP2 not supported
latdegree latDegree Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-139

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

latminute latMinute Parameter No Change
latsecond latSecond Parameter No Change
longdegree longDegree Parameter No Change
longminute longMinute Parameter No Change
longsecond longSecond Parameter No Change
altitude altitude Parameter No Change
x Parameter EP2 not supported
y Parameter EP2 not supported
z Parameter EP2 not supported
latlon Parameter EP2 not supported
extrapolate extrapolate Parameter No Change
brtReduct Parameter EP2 not supported
cntrReduct Parameter EP2 not supported

stormcontrol \ownship STORMCONTROL \OWNSHIP CLI Command Changed

rainlevel rainLevel Parameter No Change
lightninglevel lightningLevel Parameter No Change
immediatelightning immediateLightning Parameter No Change
wiperspeed wiperSpeed Parameter No Change
altWiperSpeed Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STORMCONTROL \SAND CLI Command New

number Parameter New
velocity Parameter New
autoBlowingSand Parameter New
billowingAmplitudeScale Parameter New
billowingFrequencyScale Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

stormdef STORMDEFINE CLI Command Changed
mmbase mmBase Parameter Changed
cell cell Parameter No Change
model model Parameter Changed
vis Parameter EP2 not supported
fadedistmax fadeDistMax Parameter No Change
fadedistmin fadeDistMin Parameter No Change
ambreduct ambReduct Parameter No Change
fade fade Parameter No Change
ccor ccor Parameter No Change
maxstorms maxStorms Parameter No Change
visibility Parameter New
useParticles Parameter New
colorRed Parameter New
colorGreen Parameter New
colorBlue Parameter New

A-140 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

emband Parameter New

stormdef \lightning STORMDEFINE \LIGHTNING CLI Command Changed

cell cell Parameter No Change
level level Parameter No Change
flashtype flashType Parameter No Change
glaredistmax glareDistMax Parameter No Change
glaredistmin glareDistMin Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

STORMDEFINE \LLEVEL CLI Command New

level Parameter New
frequency Parameter New
list Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STORMDEFINE \LTUNE CLI Command New

firstLightningTime Parameter New
betweenLightningTime Parameter New
secondLightningTime Parameter New
globalLightningGlareBrightUp Parameter New

cloudBrightUpWithCloudToGroundB
olt Parameter New

groundBrightUpWithCloudToCloudB
olt Parameter New

upperCloudBrightUpWithCloudToGr
oundBolt Parameter New

upperCloudBrightUpWithCloudToClo

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

udBolt Parameter New

noGroundBrightUpWithDayLightnin
g Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STORMDEFINE
\PARTICLECLOUD CLI Command New
cell Parameter New
level Parameter New
gridTexName Parameter New
puffTexName Parameter New
puffAuxTexName Parameter New
widthMiles Parameter New
thickness Parameter New
zoffset Parameter New
bottomIntensity Parameter New
topIntensity Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-141

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

zoffset Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STORMDEFINE
\PARTICLELIGHTNING CLI Command New
cell Parameter New
flashType Parameter New
num Parameter New
model Parameter New
sequence Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STORMDEFINE
\PARTICLERAINSHAFT CLI Command New
cell Parameter New
texName Parameter New
auxTexName Parameter New
radius Parameter New
xScale Parameter New
heading Parameter New
corRain Parameter New
lowLODmodelEnable Parameter New
intensityScale Parameter New
densityScale Parameter New
emband Parameter New
topZextend Parameter New

stormdef \rain STORMDEFINE \RAIN CLI Command No Change

cell cell Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

level level Parameter No Change
xshaftoffset xShaftOffset Parameter No Change
yshaftoffset yShaftOffset Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

STORMDEFINE \RLEVEL CLI Command New

level Parameter New
rdefocus Parameter New
ldefocus Parameter New
list Parameter New
emband Parameter New

STORMDEFINE \RTUNE CLI Command New

globalDefocusBuildRate Parameter New
globalDefocusClearRate Parameter New
emband Parameter New

A-142 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

STORMDEFINE \TUNE CLI Command New
fadeOutStormEffectsAlt Parameter New
sccdLineLength Parameter New
sccdStartFadeRange Parameter New
sccdFullyFoggedRange Parameter New
sccdMaxScudDelta Parameter New

particleLightningLightSourceSwitch
Num Parameter New
terShadowEnable Parameter New
terShadowContrast Parameter New
legacyVolumetricScudMinVis Parameter New

particleLightningGlareRangeScale Parameter New

optimizedParticleStormCloudRender
ing Parameter New
emband Parameter New

stpgain CLI Command Not yet Implemented

band Parameter Not yet Implemented
gain Parameter Not yet Implemented
stplevel CLI Command Not yet Implemented
band Parameter Not yet Implemented
gain Parameter Not yet Implemented

suntune CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
curve Parameter Not yet Implemented
overdrive Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

SWAPOFFSET CLI Command New
spNode Parameter New
enable Parameter New
offset Parameter New
tolerance Parameter New

switch SWITCH CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter No Change
maskIndex maskIndex Parameter No Change

symbology SYMBOLOGY CLI Command No Change

device device Parameter No Change
avcatt Parameter EP2 not supported

SYMBOLOGY \FILE CLI Command New

save Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-143

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

restore Parameter New

SYMBOLOGY \OFFSETS CLI Command New

view Parameter New
x Parameter New
y Parameter New

SYMBOLOGY \OPTIONS CLI Command New

name Parameter New

SYMBOLOGY \PLUGIN CLI Command New

name Parameter New

SYMBOLOGY \VIEWPORT CLI Command New

view Parameter New
deviceNum Parameter New

symbology \file CLI Command Not yet Implemented

action Parameter Not yet Implemented

symbology \viewmap CLI Command Not yet Implemented

srcDevice Parameter Not yet Implemented
dstdevice Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

system SYSTEM CLI Command Changed

pause Parameter EP2 not supported
resume Parameter EP2 not supported
step Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

state Parameter New

SYSTEM \AFFINITY CLI Command New

ft Parameter New
st Parameter New
bg Parameter New
network Parameter New
texAsync Parameter New

SYSTEM \BG CLI Command New

state Parameter New

SYSTEM \DIFFTABLEFORCE CLI Command New

enable Parameter New

SYSTEM \FASTTIME CLI Command New

offsetBeforeGo Parameter New

A-144 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

SYSTEM \FILES CLI Command New

maxOpenFiles Parameter New

SYSTEM \MBUS CLI Command New

log Parameter New

SYSTEM \MODULE CLI Command New

name Parameter New
enable Parameter New
list Parameter New

SYSTEM \PROCESS CLI Command New

priority Parameter New

SYSTEM \SLOWTIME CLI Command New

state Parameter New
minFields Parameter New
extraFields Parameter New
delay Parameter New

SYSTEM \THREAD CLI Command New

ft Parameter New
st Parameter New
bg Parameter New

SYSTEM \TIMEOUT CLI Command New

autorecover Parameter New
autowait Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

verbose Parameter New
halt Parameter New
eventfile Parameter New
resetOnResume Parameter New

system \page CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mmenable Parameter Not yet Implemented

targettrack CLI Command Not yet Implemented

viewport Parameter Not yet Implemented
trackerID Parameter Not yet Implemented
polarity Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
trackType Parameter Not yet Implemented
autoTrack Parameter Not yet Implemented
designate Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-145

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

drawSymbols Parameter Not yet Implemented
reload Parameter Not yet Implemented
dumpImage Parameter Not yet Implemented

terrdebug CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
tppos Parameter Not yet Implemented
model Parameter Not yet Implemented
lat Parameter Not yet Implemented
lon Parameter Not yet Implemented
tlev Parameter Not yet Implemented

TERRAIN CLI Command New

playMinCapturedPoly Parameter New
playMaxCapturedPoly Parameter New
trigger Parameter New
subdivisionRatio Parameter New
subTransitBandWidth Parameter New
texturePageRatio Parameter New
texturePageRatio2 Parameter New
textureSelectRatio Parameter New
elevPageRatio Parameter New
roughnessSensitivity Parameter New
terminalLevel Parameter New
MaxCTLevel Parameter New
multipleTasks Parameter New
InsetBlending Parameter New
ModelInstSortThreshold Parameter New
mipTransitionBand Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ctMapReleaseDelay Parameter New
pfCellReleaseDelay Parameter New
suppressModelInstances Parameter New
facetResolveLevelThreshold Parameter New
FTDelta Parameter New
terrainRapidRollOffRange Parameter New
errorTolerance Parameter New

rangeReductionScalarForErrorToler
ance Parameter New

textureLevelClampForErrorToleranc
e Parameter New

textureLevelClampOverrideForError
Tolerance Parameter New

textureLevelClampOverrideRadiusF
orErrorTolerance Parameter New
ctpmod Parameter New

A-146 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

maxST Parameter New
ctFormat Parameter New
ctBlendingLevel Parameter New
terrainBlendingLevel Parameter New
forceNormalStraightUp Parameter New
shadowEnable Parameter New
shadowTestDistance Parameter New
shadowTestMaxLevel Parameter New
shadowRepageAzimuth Parameter New
shadowRepageDistance Parameter New
reflectionSpecularityThreshold Parameter New
timeBasedCTFadeEnable Parameter New
numTimeBasedCTFadeFields Parameter New
hierRangeCullModelInstThresh Parameter New
hierRangeCullModelInstEnable Parameter New
viewConeCullerGuardBand Parameter New
stabilityThreshold Parameter New
forceHiResElev Parameter New
termLevForForceHiResElev Parameter New

TERRAIN \SUBDIVISIONSCALE CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
zoom Parameter New
subdivisionRatio Parameter New
list Parameter New

TEXTURE CLI Command New

map Parameter New
pmod Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

maxST Parameter New
maxNumSTUpdatesPerBGField Parameter New
lod Parameter New
list Parameter New
pause Parameter New
resume Parameter New

TEXTURE \CT CLI Command New

ct64 Parameter New

TEXTURE \REDUCE CLI Command New

ft Parameter New
ct Parameter New
seastate Parameter New
minFt Parameter New

TEXTURE \REFLECTION CLI Command New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-147

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

pmod Parameter New

thermal_profile CLI Command Not yet Implemented

list Parameter Not yet Implemented
action Parameter Not yet Implemented

tilepager TILEPAGER CLI Command Changed

init Parameter No Change
lodMode Parameter New
dbName dbname Parameter No Change
projType Parameter EP2 not supported
tileXDim Parameter EP2 not supported
tileYDim Parameter EP2 not supported
xDbOrig Parameter EP2 not supported
yDbOrig Parameter EP2 not supported
lonProjOrig Parameter EP2 not supported
latProjOrig Parameter EP2 not supported
dblatitude Parameter New
dblongitude Parameter New
xDbDim xdbdim Parameter No Change
yDbDim ydbdim Parameter No Change
xtiledim Parameter New
ytiledim Parameter New
loLodPgRng lolodpgrng Parameter No Change
hiLodPgRng hilodpgrng Parameter No Change
log log Parameter No Change
init Parameter New

TILEPAGER \TUNING CLI Command New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tileScalar Parameter New

TILEPAGER \VISIT CLI Command New

xIndex Parameter New
yIndex Parameter New
eyez Parameter New
location Parameter New

tod TOD CLI Command Changed

autocalc autoCalc Parameter No Change
scene scene Parameter No Change
tdawn tDawn Parameter No Change
tdusk tDusk Parameter No Change
sunrise sunrise Parameter No Change
sunset sunset Parameter No Change
sra sra Parameter No Change

A-148 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

ssa ssa Parameter No Change
melev Parameter EP2 not supported
zulumode zuluMode Parameter No Change
time time Parameter No Change
accelerate accelerate Parameter No Change
azimuth azimuth Parameter No Change
elevation elevation Parameter No Change
intensity intensity Parameter No Change
specular specular Parameter No Change
ground_ambient ground_ambient Parameter No Change
sky_intensity sky_intensity Parameter No Change
ambient_scalar ambient_scalar Parameter No Change
scene_ambient_scalar Parameter New
sceneModelDisablesAutoCalc Parameter New
et et Parameter No Change
etpathsummer etPathSummer Parameter No Change
etpathwinter etPathWinter Parameter No Change
keeptod keepTod Parameter No Change
maxElev Parameter New
sunAmbient Parameter New
delDawn Parameter New
delDusk Parameter New

TOD \CPCADJUST CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
scene Parameter New
transLevel1 Parameter New
transLevel2 Parameter New
mechanicalPos Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

glareMode Parameter New

tod \date TOD \DATE CLI Command No Change

enable enable Parameter No Change
day day Parameter No Change
month month Parameter No Change
year year Parameter No Change

tod \duotexture TOD \DUOTEXTURE CLI Command Changed

beginattenuationscale beginAttenuationScale Parameter No Change
endattenuationscale endAttenuationScale Parameter No Change
scene Parameter New
intensity Parameter New

tod \moon TOD \MOON CLI Command Changed

scale scale Parameter No Change
intensityScale intensityScale Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-149

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

specularScale specularScale Parameter No Change
ambientScale ambientScale Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
specminheight specminheight Parameter No Change
specmaxheight specmaxheight Parameter No Change
specmaxfrac specmaxfrac Parameter No Change
scene Parameter New
refEnable Parameter New
azimuth Parameter New
elevation Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
phase Parameter New
moonrise Parameter New
moonset Parameter New
mra Parameter New
msa Parameter New
maxElev Parameter New
refScale Parameter New
specFadeTimeCM Parameter New
phaseTune Parameter New
emband Parameter New

tod \sun TOD \SUN CLI Command Changed

scene scene Parameter No Change
red red Parameter No Change
green green Parameter No Change
blue blue Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

scale scale Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
hccEnable hccEnable Parameter No Change
hccPercent hccPercent Parameter No Change
specminheight specMinHeight Parameter No Change
specmaxheight specMaxHeight Parameter No Change
specmaxfrac specMaxFrac Parameter No Change
refEnable Parameter New
refScale Parameter New
azimuth Parameter EP2 Deprecated
elevation Parameter EP2 Deprecated

diffuse Parameter New

ambient Parameter New

specular Parameter New

fade Parameter New

specFadeTimeCM Parameter New
emband Parameter New

A-150 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

TOD \SUNPOSMODE CLI Command New

emband Parameter New
enable Parameter New
moonFade Parameter New
scene Parameter New
illumSunPos Parameter New
glareSunPos Parameter New
colorDaySunPos Parameter New
colorNightSunPos Parameter New
peakYellowSunPos Parameter New
peakRedSunPos Parameter New
colorSaturation Parameter New
yellowHue Parameter New
redHue Parameter New
illumMoonPos Parameter New

TOD \TIMEZONE CLI Command New

enableFixedZuluOffset Parameter New
fixedZuluOffset Parameter New

toy CLI Command Not yet Implemented

scene Parameter Not yet Implemented

tproj CLI Command Not yet Implemented

on Parameter Not yet Implemented
off Parameter Not yet Implemented
run Parameter Not yet Implemented
pause Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

stow Parameter Not yet Implemented
exit Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented
num Parameter Not yet Implemented
model_type Parameter Not yet Implemented
mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
dmm Parameter Not yet Implemented

tproj \brightness CLI Command Not yet Implemented

static_brightness Parameter Not yet Implemented
vis_range_mode Parameter Not yet Implemented
rbright Parameter Not yet Implemented
vbright Parameter Not yet Implemented
minbright Parameter Not yet Implemented
minrange Parameter Not yet Implemented
vis_tuner Parameter Not yet Implemented
scud_tuner Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-151

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

ambient_tuner Parameter Not yet Implemented

tproj \define CLI Command Not yet Implemented

min_transition Parameter Not yet Implemented
max_transition Parameter Not yet Implemented
occultation Parameter Not yet Implemented
occ_distance Parameter Not yet Implemented
occ_percent Parameter Not yet Implemented
smear_countdown Parameter Not yet Implemented
lrf_priority Parameter Not yet Implemented
display_both Parameter Not yet Implemented

tproj \modelmap CLI Command Not yet Implemented

model_type Parameter Not yet Implemented
tpmodel Parameter Not yet Implemented
tpgroup Parameter Not yet Implemented
size Parameter Not yet Implemented
tradius Parameter Not yet Implemented
tlift Parameter Not yet Implemented

tproj \stow CLI Command Not yet Implemented

xoffset Parameter Not yet Implemented
yoffset Parameter Not yet Implemented
zoffset Parameter Not yet Implemented
heading Parameter Not yet Implemented
pitch Parameter Not yet Implemented
roll Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tracer TRACER CLI Command Changed
num Parameter New
latdegree latdegree Parameter No Change

latminute latminute Parameter No Change

latsecond latsecond Parameter No Change

longdegree longdegree Parameter No Change

longminute longminute Parameter No Change

longsecond longsecond Parameter No Change

altitude altitude Parameter No Change

x x Parameter No Change

y y Parameter No Change

z z Parameter No Change

tracer_num tracer_num Parameter No Change

enable enable Parameter No Change

red red Parameter No Change

green green Parameter No Change

blue blue Parameter No Change

A-152 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

size size Parameter No Change

mm Parameter Changed for 11.0

list Parameter New

mmn Parameter EP2 not supported

tracker TRACKER CLI Command Changed

tracker tracker Parameter No Change
on Parameter EP2 not supported
off Parameter EP2 not supported
zero zero Parameter No Change
freeze freeze Parameter No Change
run run Parameter No Change
pause pause Parameter No Change
exit exit Parameter No Change
enable Parameter New
list Parameter New

tracker \assign TRACKER \ASSIGN CLI Command No Change

tracker tracker Parameter No Change d

view view Parameter No Change

select select Parameter No Change

tracker \center CLI Command Not yet Implemented

enable Parameter Not yet Implemented

TRACKER \CONFIGURE CLI Command New

tracker Parameter New
application Parameter New
configFile Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

fieldSyncOffset Parameter New

tracker \currentmode TRACKER \CURRENTMODE CLI Command No Change

tracker tracker Parameter No Change

mode mode Parameter No Change

tracker \deadzone TRACKER \DEADZONE CLI Command No Change

tracker tracker Parameter No Change

setOrigin setOrigin Parameter No Change

deadZoneEnable deadZoneEnable Parameter No Change

deadZoneBoundary deadZoneBoundary Parameter No Change

catchUpDistance catchUpDistance Parameter No Change

catchUpDegree catchUpDegree Parameter No Change

tracker \eye TRACKER \EYE CLI Command No Change

tracker tracker Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-153

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

eyepoint eyepoint Parameter No Change

x x Parameter No Change

y y Parameter No Change

z z Parameter No Change

tracker \filter TRACKER \FILTER CLI Command No Change

tracker tracker Parameter No Change

enableHPR enablehpr Parameter No Change

enableXYZ enablexyz Parameter No Change

widthHPR widthhpr Parameter No Change

widthXYZ widthxyz Parameter No Change

tracker \flipentry TRACKER \FLIPENTRY CLI Command No Change

view view Parameter No Change

select select Parameter No Change

active active Parameter No Change

rollflip rollflip Parameter No Change

mirror mirror Parameter No Change

heading heading Parameter No Change

tracker \hardwire TRACKER \HARDWIRE CLI Command No Change

tracker tracker Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
h h Parameter No Change
p p Parameter No Change
r r Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

tracker \initial TRACKER \INITIAL CLI Command No Change

view view Parameter No Change

select select Parameter No Change

mode mode Parameter No Change

heading heading Parameter No Change

pitch pitch Parameter No Change

roll roll Parameter No Change

parallax parallax Parameter No Change

dlim DLIM Parameter No Change

flip flip Parameter No Change

disttoscreen Parameter EP2 not supported

tracker \initializedata TRACKER \INITIALIZEDATA CLI Command No Change

tracker \limit TRACKER \LIMIT CLI Command No Change

view view Parameter No Change

A-154 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

select select Parameter No Change

maxx maxX Parameter No Change

maxy maxY Parameter No Change

maxz maxZ Parameter No Change

minx minX Parameter No Change

miny minY Parameter No Change

minz minZ Parameter No Change

tracker \link TRACKER \LINK CLI Command No Change

view view Parameter No Change

select select Parameter No Change

linkselect linkselect Parameter No Change

head1 head1 Parameter No Change

head2 head2 Parameter No Change

head3 head3 Parameter No Change

head4 head4 Parameter No Change

head5 head5 Parameter No Change

head6 head6 Parameter No Change

head7 head7 Parameter No Change

head8 head8 Parameter No Change

tracker \modeassign TRACKER \MODEASSIGN CLI Command No Change

view view Parameter No Change

select select Parameter No Change

mode mode Parameter No Change

head1 head1 Parameter No Change

head2 head2 Parameter No Change

head3 head3 Parameter No Change

head4 head4 Parameter No Change

No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

head5 head5 Parameter
head6 head6 Parameter No Change

head7 head7 Parameter No Change

head8 head8 Parameter No Change

zoom Parameter EP2 not supported

tracker \motionsystem TRACKER \MOTIONSYSTEM CLI Command Changed

tracker tracker Parameter No Change
ms ms Parameter Changed
xoffset Xoffset Parameter No Change
yoffset Yoffset Parameter No Change
zoffset Zoffset Parameter No Change

tracker \multipliers TRACKER \MULTIPLIERS CLI Command No Change

view view Parameter No Change

select select Parameter No Change

xheadmult xheadmult Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-155

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

yheadmult yheadmult Parameter No Change

zheadmult zheadmult Parameter No Change

xeyemult xeyemult Parameter No Change

yeyemult yeyemult Parameter No Change

zeyemult zeyemult Parameter No Change

tracker \parallax TRACKER \PARALLAX CLI Command No Change

vert vert Parameter No Change
horz horz Parameter No Change

tracker \print TRACKER \PRINT CLI Command No Change

enable enable Parameter No Change

tracker \seos TRACKER \SEOS CLI Command No Change

tracker tracker Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change

TRACKER \SEOSCONFIG CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
teletext Parameter New
bigTeletext Parameter New
checkTeletext Parameter New
brightness Parameter New
virtualCollimation Parameter New
AngularWidth Parameter New
RollOffWidth Parameter New
operationalState Parameter New
timeOfDay Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

TRACKER \SEOSDISPLAY CLI Command New
viewport Parameter New
centerX Parameter New
centerY Parameter New
centerZ Parameter New
eyepointX Parameter New
eyepointY Parameter New
eyepointZ Parameter New
radius Parameter New
fovCompensate Parameter New

TRACKER \SEOSPROJECTOR CLI Command New

viewport Parameter New
projector Parameter New
list Parameter New
fovLeft Parameter New

A-156 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

fovRight Parameter New
fovBottom Parameter New
fovTop Parameter New
heading Parameter New
pitch Parameter New
roll Parameter New

tracker \status TRACKER \STATUS CLI Command No Change

view view Parameter No Change

select select Parameter No Change

suspend suspend Parameter No Change

resume resume Parameter No Change

tracker \trackerdata TRACKER \TRACKERDATA CLI Command No Change

numht numht Parameter No Change

viewfields viewfields Parameter No Change

zerohpr zerohpr Parameter No Change

zerohprxyz zerohprxyz Parameter No Change

updateh updateH Parameter No Change

updatep updateP Parameter No Change

updater updateR Parameter No Change

updatex updateX Parameter No Change

updatey updateY Parameter No Change

updatez updateZ Parameter No Change

tracker \types TRACKER \TYPES CLI Command No Change

tracker tracker Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
pitch pitch Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

roll roll Parameter No Change
xy xy Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
location location Parameter No Change
changesel changesel Parameter No Change
changeview Parameter EP2 not supported
counterpitch counterpitch Parameter No Change
counterroll counterroll Parameter No Change

tracker \zerooffset TRACKER \ZEROOFFSET CLI Command No Change

view view Parameter No Change

select select Parameter No Change

mode mode Parameter No Change

zerox zerox Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-157

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

zeroy zeroy Parameter No Change

zeroz zeroz Parameter No Change

zeroh zeroh Parameter No Change

zerop zerop Parameter No Change

zeror zeror Parameter No Change

tracks TRACKS CLI Command No Change

num num Parameter No Change
type type Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
xoffset xoffset Parameter No Change
yoffset yoffset Parameter No Change
zoffset zoffset Parameter No Change
fade Parameter New
start start Parameter No Change
stop stop Parameter No Change
clean clean Parameter No Change

tracks \define TRACKS \DEFINE CLI Command No Change

type type Parameter No Change
template template Parameter No Change
width width Parameter No Change
segmentMaxLength segmentmaxlength Parameter No Change
tolerance tolerance Parameter No Change
spread spread Parameter No Change
fadein fadein Parameter No Change
beginFade beginfade Parameter No Change
endFade endfade Parameter No Change
leadingedgefade leadingedgefade Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

windeffect Parameter EP2 not supported
length Parameter EP2 not supported
fullheighttime Parameter EP2 not supported
fullheightscale Parameter EP2 not supported
minspeedforgrowth Parameter EP2 not supported
maxspeedforgrowth Parameter EP2 not supported

TRAFFIC CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
maxSegLength Parameter New
near Parameter New
far Parameter New
min Parameter New
speed Parameter New
density Parameter New
lane Parameter New
height Parameter New

A-158 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

reverse Parameter New
lobe Parameter New
rolloff Parameter New
ambient Parameter New
conform Parameter New

TRAFFIC \DIAG CLI Command New

verbose Parameter New
waypoints Parameter New

trails TRAILS CLI Command Changed

num num Parameter No Change
type type Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter Changed
xoffset xoffset Parameter No Change
yoffset yoffset Parameter No Change
zoffset zoffset Parameter No Change
start start Parameter No Change
stop stop Parameter No Change
clean clean Parameter No Change
all Parameter New
spMask Parameter EP2 Deprecated
vpMask Parameter New

trails \define TRAILS \DEFINE CLI Command Changed

type type Parameter No Change
texture texture Parameter No Change

width width Parameter No Change

tolerance tolerance Parameter No Change

No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

spread spread Parameter
repeattexture repeattexture Parameter No Change

beginFade beginFade Parameter No Change

endFade endFade Parameter No Change

segmentMaxLength segmentMaxLength Parameter No Change

windeffect windeffect Parameter No Change

fadein fadein Parameter No Change

sensorindex Parameter EP2 not supported

emband1 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband2 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband3 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband4 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband5 Parameter EP2 not supported
emband6 Parameter EP2 not supported
defName Parameter New

windSpeedAutoAdjustParticleSize Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-159

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

windSpeedAutoAdjustParticleOpacit
y Parameter New
update Parameter New
rise Parameter New
sensorIndex Parameter New
useParticles Parameter New

trigger \altabove TRIGGER \ALTABOVE CLI Command No Change

num num Parameter No Change
file file Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
triggering_mm triggering_mm Parameter No Change
rerun rerun Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change

trigger \altbelow TRIGGER \ALTBELOW CLI Command No Change

z z Parameter No Change
triggering_mm triggering_mm Parameter No Change
rerun rerun Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
num num Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
file file Parameter No Change

TRIGGER \CLEAN CLI Command New

trigger \hat TRIGGER \HAT CLI Command No Change

num num Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

enable enable Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
triggering_mm triggering_mm Parameter No Change
above above Parameter No Change
below below Parameter No Change
rerun rerun Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change

trigger \inrange CLI Command Not yet Implemented

file Parameter Not yet Implemented
num Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
rerun Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented

A-160 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

z Parameter Not yet Implemented
range Parameter Not yet Implemented
triggering_mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented

trigger \load TRIGGER \LOAD CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
model model Parameter No Change
file file Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
rerun Parameter New
num Parameter New

trigger \modelpos CLI Command Not yet Implemented

number Parameter Not yet Implemented
condition Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented
ltgt Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
value Parameter Not yet Implemented
file Parameter Not yet Implemented
rerun Parameter Not yet Implemented

trigger \outrange CLI Command Not yet Implemented

file Parameter Not yet Implemented
num Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
mm Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

rerun Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
z Parameter Not yet Implemented
range Parameter Not yet Implemented
triggering_mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented

TRIGGER \PAUSEROUTE CLI Command New

num Parameter New
enable Parameter New
triggering_mm Parameter New
mm Parameter New
range Parameter New
xlon Parameter New
ylat Parameter New
z Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-161

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

route Parameter New
rerun Parameter New
resume Parameter New
list Parameter New

trigger \range TRIGGER \RANGE CLI Command Changed

num num Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
x Parameter EP2 not supported
y Parameter EP2 not supported
z z Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter No Change
rerun rerun Parameter No Change
triggering_mm triggering_mm Parameter No Change
range range Parameter No Change
test Parameter EP2 not supported
list list Parameter No Change
in in Parameter No Change
out out Parameter No Change
xlon Parameter New
ylat Parameter New
rtIn Parameter New
rtOut Parameter New

TRIGGER \ROUTE CLI Command New

route Parameter New
watch Parameter New
list Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

TRIGGER \RVR CLI Command New
num Parameter New
enable Parameter New
rvr Parameter New
above Parameter New
below Parameter New
rerun Parameter New
list Parameter New

TRIGGER \RVRABOVE –
trigger \rvrabove replaced by TRIGGER \RVR CLI Command EP Deprecated
number Parameter EP Deprecated

enable enable Parameter EP Deprecated

rvr rvr Parameter EP Deprecated

file file Parameter EP Deprecated

rerun rerun Parameter EP Deprecated

list list Parameter EP Deprecated

A-162 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

num Parameter EP Deprecated

TRIGGER \RVRBELOW – EP Deprecated

trigger \rvrbelow replaced by TRIGGER \RVR CLI Command
number Parameter EP Deprecated

enable enable Parameter EP Deprecated

rvr rvr Parameter EP Deprecated

file file Parameter EP Deprecated

rerun rerun Parameter EP Deprecated

list list Parameter EP Deprecated

num Parameter EP Deprecated

TRIGGER \SPEED CLI Command New

num Parameter New
enable Parameter New
triggering_mm Parameter New
speed Parameter New
above Parameter New
below Parameter New
rerun Parameter New
list Parameter New

TRIGGER \TIME CLI Command New

num Parameter New
enable Parameter New
time Parameter New
file Parameter New
rerun Parameter New
list Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

trigger \unload TRIGGER \UNLOAD CLI Command Changed
model model Parameter Unchanged
enable enable Parameter Unchanged
file file Parameter Unchanged
list list Parameter Unchanged
num Parameter New

rerun Parameter New

TRIGGER \VIS CLI Command New

num Parameter New

enable Parameter New

vis Parameter New

above Parameter New

below Parameter New

rerun Parameter New

list Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-163

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

TRIGGER \VISABOVE – EP Deprecated

trigger \visabove replaced by TRIGGER \VIS CLI Command
number Parameter EP Deprecated

enable enable Parameter EP Deprecated

vis vis Parameter EP Deprecated

file file Parameter EP Deprecated

rerun rerun Parameter EP Deprecated

list list Parameter EP Deprecated

num Parameter EP Deprecated

TRIGGER \VISBELOW – EP Deprecated

trigger \visbelow replaced by TRIGGER \VIS CLI Command
number Parameter EP Deprecated

enable enable Parameter EP Deprecated

vis vis Parameter EP Deprecated

file file Parameter EP Deprecated

rerun rerun Parameter EP Deprecated

list list Parameter EP Deprecated

num Parameter EP Deprecated

txtack CLI Command Not yet Implemented

clear Parameter Not yet Implemented
mm Parameter Not yet Implemented
x Parameter Not yet Implemented
y Parameter Not yet Implemented
z Parameter Not yet Implemented
latdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
latminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
latsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

longdegree Parameter Not yet Implemented
longminute Parameter Not yet Implemented
longsecond Parameter Not yet Implemented
altitude Parameter Not yet Implemented
markingid Parameter Not yet Implemented

txtack \defs CLI Command Not yet Implemented

markingID Parameter Not yet Implemented
size Parameter Not yet Implemented
list Parameter Not yet Implemented

txtack \global CLI Command Not yet Implemented

liftScalar Parameter Not yet Implemented
mappingMode Parameter Not yet Implemented
projectionClamp Parameter Not yet Implemented

unbind UNBIND CLI Command Changed

A-164 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

clean clean Parameter No Change
mm mm Parameter Changed
sm Parameter EP2 not supported
sys Parameter EP2 not supported
bottom bottom Parameter Changed
top top Parameter Changed
all Parameter New

unchain UNCHAIN CLI Command Changed

child Parameter EP2 not supported
ms Parameter New
all Parameter New

UNCHAIN \FOLLOW CLI Command New

ms Parameter New

UNCHAIN \LOOKAT CLI Command New

ms Parameter New

UNCHAIN \SPIN CLI Command New

ms Parameter New

UNCHAIN \TOW CLI Command New

ms Parameter New

UNDEFINE CLI Command New

name Parameter New

unload UNLOAD CLI Command Changed

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

slot slot Parameter Changed
clean Parameter EP2 not supported
sys Parameter EP2 not supported
bottom bottom Parameter Changed

top top Parameter Changed

all Parameter New

unload \ct CLI Command Not yet Implemented

path Parameter Not yet Implemented
mapping2 Parameter Not yet Implemented
mapping Parameter Not yet Implemented

unload \inset UNLOAD \INSET CLI Command No Change

path path Parameter No Change
name Parameter EP2 not supported

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-165

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

UNLOAD
\PROCESSDESCRIPTION CLI Command New
path Parameter New

unload \dt UNLOADDT CLI Command No Change

unload \model CLI Command Not yet Implemented

slot Parameter Not yet Implemented
clean Parameter Not yet Implemented
unbind Parameter Not yet Implemented
sys Parameter Not yet Implemented
bottom Parameter Not yet Implemented
top Parameter Not yet Implemented

unload \sct CLI Command Not yet Implemented

path Parameter Not yet Implemented
mapping Parameter Not yet Implemented

unload \terrain CLI Command Not yet Implemented

path Parameter Not yet Implemented
name Parameter Not yet Implemented

unload \vf CLI Command Not yet Implemented

mapping Parameter Not yet Implemented
intersectionmapping Parameter Not yet Implemented
path Parameter Not yet Implemented
name Parameter Not yet Implemented

velocity VELOCITY CLI Command Changed

top Parameter EP2 not supported

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

mm mm Parameter No Change
kph kph Parameter No Change
mph mph Parameter No Change
knots knots Parameter No Change
mps mps Parameter No Change
x x Parameter No Change
y y Parameter No Change
z z Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
pitch pitch Parameter No Change
roll roll Parameter No Change
body body Parameter No Change
time_constant Parameter EP2 not supported
bot Parameter EP2 not supported
fps fps Parameter No Change
xtime Parameter New

A-166 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

ytime Parameter New
ztime Parameter New
headingtime Parameter New
pitchtime Parameter New
rolltime Parameter New

VF \CONFIG CLI Command New

stage2PageMode Parameter New
pageRange Parameter EP2 Deprecated
pageRangeDiskToRTMem Parameter New
stage2PageToCircleRadiusFeet Parameter New
stage2OffsetCenterRadiusFeet Parameter New
stage2ViewConeMaxRange Parameter EP2 Deprecated

stage2ViewConeNearFarClipScale Parameter EP2 Deprecated

stage1PageInThrottleSize Parameter New
stage2PageInThrottleSize Parameter New
stage1PageOutThrottleSize Parameter New
Stage2PageOutThrottleSize Parameter New
asyncModelLoad Parameter New
todShadowsForeshortenDegrees Parameter New

VF \DEBUG CLI Command New

points Parameter New
linears Parameter New
areals Parameter New
grid Parameter New
linearWidths Parameter New
todShadows Parameter New
pageInFasttime Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

video VIDEO CLI Command No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change

video \blank VIDEO \BLANK CLI Command Changed

type type Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
disablesynconblank disablesynconblank Parameter No Change
time Parameter EP2 not supported
timeout Parameter New
vpExclude Parameter New
vpInclude Parameter New

VIDEO \INTCOMP CLI Command New

view Parameter New
enable Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-167

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

day Parameter New
dusk Parameter New
night Parameter New
all Parameter New

VIDEO \OGL CLI Command New

lostVsmGenlockBlackVideo Parameter New
fieldsVsmInvalidGenlock Parameter New
fieldsVsmValidGenlock Parameter New

video \transport VIDEO \TRANSPORT CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
mode mode Parameter EP Deprecated
UseComPort Parameter New
ComPort Parameter New

viewport VIEWPORT CLI Command Changed

list Parameter EP2 not supported
view view Parameter No Change
blank_disabled_view Parameter EP2 not supported
select select Parameter No Change
name name Parameter No Change
eye eye Parameter Changed
heading Parameter EP2 not supported
pitch Parameter EP2 not supported
roll Parameter EP2 not supported
fovh fovh Parameter Changed
fovv fovv Parameter Changed
offh offh Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

offv offv Parameter No Change
zoom zoom Parameter Changed
mirror Parameter EP2 not supported
mmZoomClamp Parameter EP2 not supported
terZoomClamp Parameter EP2 not supported
vfZoomClamp Parameter EP2 not supported
arealBasesZoom Parameter EP2 not supported
multiTexture Parameter EP2 not supported
nearZoomClamp Parameter EP2 not supported
oglBrightness Parameter EP2 not supported
oglContrast Parameter EP2 not supported
enable Parameter EP2 not supported
disable Parameter EP2 not supported
visscale visScale Parameter No Change
rif rif Parameter No Change
near near Parameter No Change
far far Parameter No Change

A-168 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

forcenear Parameter EP2 not supported
clipPolys Parameter EP2 not supported
range Parameter EP2 not supported
superTextureMax Parameter EP2 not supported
h Parameter New
p Parameter New
r Parameter New

VIEWPORT \CAPTURE CLI Command New

view Parameter New
file Parameter New

viewport \mask CLI Command Not yet Implemented

view Parameter Not yet Implemented
id Parameter Not yet Implemented
enable Parameter Not yet Implemented
reference Parameter Not yet Implemented
scaleX Parameter Not yet Implemented
scaleY Parameter Not yet Implemented
scaleZ Parameter Not yet Implemented
transX Parameter Not yet Implemented
transY Parameter Not yet Implemented
transZ Parameter Not yet Implemented

VIEWPORT \EDGEBLEND CLI Command New

view Parameter New
enable Parameter New
blend Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

VIEWPORT \GAMMA CLI Command New
view Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New
bt709 Parameter New

VIEWPORT \GROUP CLI Command New

view Parameter New
group Parameter New
list Parameter New

VIEWPORT \NLIM CLI Command New

view Parameter New
enable Parameter New
restore Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-169

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

VIEWPORT \OVERLAY CLI Command New
view Parameter New
plane Parameter New
enable Parameter New
mode Parameter New
twoPlane Parameter New
load Parameter New
sox Parameter New
soy Parameter New
dox Parameter New
doy Parameter New
sx Parameter New
sy Parameter New
clear Parameter New
dots Parameter New
cnt Parameter New
preField Parameter New
res Parameter New
toggle Parameter New
begin Parameter New
end Parameter New
both Parameter New

viewport \pagingoffset VIEWPORT \PAGINGOFFSET CLI Command Changed

enable enable Parameter No Change
view view Parameter No Change
pitchscalar pitchscalar Parameter No Change
ctpagingoffsetscalar ctPagingOffsetScalar Parameter No Change
ctfixedpagingoffset ctFixedPagingOffset Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

terrainPagingOffsetScalar Parameter New
terrainfixedpagingoffset terrainFixedPagingOffset Parameter No Change
vfpagingoffsetscalar Parameter EP2 not supported
ctlodcenterscalar Parameter EP2 not supported
mmlodcenterscalar Parameter EP2 not supported
terrainlodcenterscalar Parameter EP2 not supported
vflodcenterscalar Parameter EP2 not supported
pagingoffsetrangemax Parameter EP2 not supported
mmfixedpagingoffset Parameter EP2 not supported
vffixedpagingoffset Parameter EP2 not supported
pagingModel Parameter EP2 not supported
originLockEnable Parameter EP2 not supported
paginoriginchan Parameter EP2 not supported

VIEWPORT \RENDER CLI Command New

view Parameter New

A-170 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

enable Parameter New
blank Parameter New
lpSizeScale Parameter New

visibility VISIBILITY CLI Command Changed

feet feet Parameter No Change
km km Parameter No Change
miles miles Parameter No Change
region region Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New
legacyRVRpriorityMode Parameter New

visibility \ambreduct CLI Command Not yet Implemented

reduction Parameter Not yet Implemented
scale Parameter Not yet Implemented

visibility \file VISIBILITY \FILE CLI Command Changed

save save Parameter No Change
restore restore Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

VISIBILITY \TUNE CLI Command New

densExp Parameter New

vsm VSM CLI Command No Change

mm mm Parameter Changed

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

list list Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
mask mask Parameter No Change
all all Parameter No Change
viewport viewport Parameter No Change
vp1 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp2 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp3 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp4 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp5 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp6 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp7 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp8 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp9 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp10 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp11 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp12 Parameter Not yet Implemented

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-171

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

vp13 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp14 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp15 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp16 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp17 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp18 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp19 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp20 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp21 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp22 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp23 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp24 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp25 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp26 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp27 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp28 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp29 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp30 Parameter Not yet Implemented
vp31 Parameter Not yet Implemented

wait WAIT CLI Command Changed

sleeptime Parameter EP2 not supported
seconds Parameter New

WAIT \DB CLI Command New

timeout Parameter New
blockCLI Parameter New

WAIT \DBCONFIG CLI Command New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

defaultblockCLI Parameter New

wam WAM CLI Command No Change

region region Parameter No Change
bsnow_enable bSnow_enable Parameter No Change
bsand_enable bSand_enable Parameter No Change
wheading wHeading Parameter No Change
wspeed wSpeed Parameter No Change
snowfall snowfall Parameter No Change

WAM \BREAKPOINT CLI Command New

bp1 Parameter New
bp2 Parameter New

wam \bsand WAM \BSAND CLI Command Changed

visibility visibility Parameter No Change
red red Parameter No Change

A-172 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

green green Parameter No Change
blue blue Parameter No Change
colorgain colorgain Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

wam \bsnow WAM \BSNOW CLI Command Changed

visibility visibility Parameter No Change
red red Parameter No Change
green green Parameter No Change
blue blue Parameter No Change
colorgain colorGain Parameter No Change
emband Parameter New

wam \clouds CLI Command Not yet Implemented

reductionperknot Parameter Not yet Implemented
maxreduction Parameter Not yet Implemented

wam \range WAM \RANGE CLI Command Changed

set set Parameter No Change
clear clear Parameter No Change
top top Parameter Changed
bottom bottom Parameter Changed
list Parameter New

wam \select WAM \SELECT CLI Command Changed

set set Parameter No Change
select_enable select_enable Parameter No Change
list Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

wam \snow CLI Command Not yet Implemented
spatial_turbulence Parameter Not yet Implemented
temporal_turbulence Parameter Not yet Implemented

watch WATCH CLI Command Changed

offA Parameter EP2 not supported
maskA maskA Parameter No Change
sizeA sizeA Parameter No Change
valA Parameter EP2 not supported
notValA Parameter EP2 not supported
offB Parameter EP2 not supported
maskB maskB Parameter No Change
sizeB sizeB Parameter No Change
valB Parameter EP2 not supported
notValB Parameter EP2 not supported
or Parameter EP2 not supported
and AND Parameter No Change

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-173

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

opcode opcode Parameter No Change
subopcode subopcode Parameter No Change
count count Parameter No Change
next next Parameter No Change
prev prev Parameter No Change
offsetA Parameter New
offsetB Parameter New
valueA Parameter New
valueB Parameter New
notValueA Parameter New
notValueB Parameter New

waves WAVES CLI Command Changed

model Parameter EP2 not supported
index index Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
disable disable Parameter No Change
flatten Parameter EP2 not supported
unflatten Parameter EP2 not supported
lllat Parameter EP2 not supported
lllon Parameter EP2 not supported
urlat Parameter EP2 not supported
urlon Parameter EP2 not supported
sea_state sea_state Parameter No Change
enablepolys Parameter EP2 not supported
polymodeklod Parameter EP2 not supported
shapeGain Parameter EP2 not supported
oceanelev Parameter EP2 not supported
heading heading Parameter No Change

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

height height Parameter No Change
frequency frequency Parameter No Change
length length Parameter Changed
phase phase Parameter No Change
dk Parameter EP2 not supported
dw Parameter EP2 not supported
ph Parameter EP2 not supported
pl Parameter EP2 not supported
time_constant time_constant Parameter No Change
forcing forcing Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change
start Parameter New
transit Parameter New
bindHeadingWithWind Parameter New

WAVES \BUMP CLI Command New

enableMinDistance Parameter New

A-174 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

minDistance Parameter New

waves \gridpost CLI Command Not yet Implemented

spacing Parameter Not yet Implemented

WAVES \INTENSITY CLI Command New

shift Parameter New
trim Parameter New
mipBias Parameter New

waves \lod WAVES \LOD CLI Command Changed

level Parameter EP2 not supported
range Parameter EP2 not supported
shoreFadingSensitivity Parameter EP2 Deprecated
transitBandSubScalar Parameter New
WaveStart Parameter New
WaveTransit Parameter New
SubRatioCap Parameter New
Height2IntScale Parameter New
gridPostSpacing Parameter New
high_range Parameter New

WAVES \ORIGIN CLI Command New

latdegree Parameter New
latminute Parameter New
latsecond Parameter New
longdegree Parameter New
longminute Parameter New
longsecond Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

WAVES \SPECULAR CLI Command New
enableNormalTweak Parameter New
WidthToDistRatio Parameter New
AxialExtend Parameter New
FadeOffRate Parameter New
SunElevFadeOffStart Parameter New
SunElevFadeOffEnd Parameter New
NoiseScale Parameter New
NoiseToIntensity Parameter New

WAVES \TARGET CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
HLODScalar Parameter New
remove Parameter New
list Parameter New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-175

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

WAVES \TUNE CLI Command New
DepthModAmplitude Parameter New
ThicknessToOpacity Parameter New
sBump Parameter New
sInt Parameter New
wBump Parameter New
wInt Parameter New
perturb Parameter New
pause Parameter New
run Parameter New
forceReload Parameter New

waves \whitecaps WAVES \WHITECAPS CLI Command Changed

template Parameter New
enable enable Parameter No Change
startwindspeed startWindspeed Parameter No Change
sizescale sizeScale Parameter No Change
coveragescale coverageScale Parameter No Change
startWaveHeight Parameter EP2 not supported
shoreTrans Parameter New
numRenderFTTasks Parameter New
numRenderSTTasks Parameter New
priorityRange priorityRange Parameter Changed
motionScale motionScale Parameter No Change
endWaveHeight Parameter EP2 not supported
finRange Parameter New

baseRange Parameter New

heightScale Parameter New

rangeMax Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

waves \windlanes WAVES \WINDLANE CLI Command Changed
enable enable Parameter No Change
model Parameter EP2 not supported
startwindspeed Parameter EP2 not supported
sizescale Parameter EP2 not supported
fadescale Parameter EP2 not supported
texture Parameter New
size Parameter New
motion_speed Parameter New

WAVES \WINDTOBEAUFORT CLI Command New

list Parameter New
BeaufortScale Parameter New
wind_speed Parameter New
tex_basename Parameter New

A-176 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

WAVESENHANCED CLI Command New
seaState Parameter New

bindHeadingWithWind Parameter New

bindSpeedWithWind Parameter New
localWindSpeed Parameter New

WaterBlur Parameter New

refMinLS Parameter New
oceanEnable Parameter New
enable Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED
\ANTIALIASING CLI Command New
ControlAA Parameter New
chopAA Parameter New
globalNoiseAA Parameter New
catsPawAA Parameter New
windlaneAA Parameter New
frothAA Parameter New
shorelineEffectsAA Parameter New
waveShapeAA Parameter New
waveHeightAA Parameter New
whitecapAA Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \CATSPAW CLI Command New

gain Parameter New
mapSizeScalar Parameter New
density Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

phase Parameter New
speedScalar Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \CHOP CLI Command New

waterType Parameter New
chopSteepness Parameter New
intensity Parameter New
sizeScalar Parameter New
phase Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \FLATTEN CLI Command New

steep Parameter New
width Parameter New
enable Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \FROTH CLI Command New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-177

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

waterType Parameter New
mapSizeScalar Parameter New
phase Parameter New
intensity Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \GLARE CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
scene Parameter New
width Parameter New
haloWidth Parameter New
intensity Parameter New
red Parameter New
green Parameter New
blue Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED
\GLOBALNOISE CLI Command New
pertMapSizeScalar Parameter New
ampMapSizeScalar Parameter New
amplitude Parameter New
perturbation Parameter New
phase Parameter New
speedScalar Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \LOD CLI Command New

highRange Parameter New
waveTransit Parameter New
shorelineSubdivisionSensitivity Parameter New

shorelineSubdivisionDistanceScalar Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

targetSubdivisionSensitivity Parameter New
start Parameter New
transit Parameter New
projectedEyeDistance Parameter New
eyeDistanceTarget Parameter New
zoomThreshold Parameter New
eyeSubdivisionRolloffScalar Parameter New
targetSubdivisionRolloffScalar Parameter New
maxDistanceToShoreShoaling Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \SHORELINE CLI Command New

waterTypeBlendWidth Parameter New
ctBlendWidth Parameter New
surfWidth Parameter New
shoalingWidth Parameter New
shoalingGain Parameter New
CTBlendGain Parameter New

A-178 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

catspawsWidth Parameter New
CTColorSel Parameter New
shorelineEffectsEnable Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \SPRAY CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
particleEffect Parameter New
maxActive Parameter New
startDelay Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \TARGET CLI Command New

mm Parameter New
HLODScalar Parameter New
waveTransitScalar Parameter New
remove Parameter New
list Parameter New
removeAll Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED
\WAVESHAPE CLI Command New
waterType Parameter New
waveNum Parameter New
shapeFactor Parameter New
waveHeading Parameter New
length Parameter New
heightScale Parameter New
speedScale Parameter New
wiggleScale Parameter New
wiggleAmpScale Parameter New
wiggleSpeedScale Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

wiggleSizeScalar Parameter New
wigglePhase Parameter New
wiggleSteepness Parameter New
waveEnabled Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \WHITECAP CLI Command New

waterType Parameter New
density Parameter New
intensity Parameter New
gateSpeedScalar Parameter New
edgeModScale Parameter New
durationScale Parameter New
phase Parameter New
edgeModSpeedRepeatTime Parameter New

WAVESENHANCED \WINDLANE CLI Command New

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-179

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

waterType Parameter New
intensity Parameter New
density Parameter New
mapSizeScalar Parameter New
phase Parameter New

wind WIND CLI Command No Change

layer layer Parameter No Change
region region Parameter No Change
enable enable Parameter No Change
altitude altitude Parameter No Change
heading heading Parameter No Change
speed speed Parameter No Change
list list Parameter No Change

WIND \VEGETATION CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
rotorWashSpeed Parameter New
rotorWashRange Parameter New
type Parameter New
size Parameter New
speed Parameter New
flexibility Parameter New
centerOfMass Parameter New
stretch Parameter New
flutterH Parameter New
flutterV Parameter New
list Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

ZOOM CLI Command New
mode Parameter New
highLodRange Parameter New
intermediateHighLodRange Parameter New
terDefaultLodRange Parameter New
featModelSwitchInZoomScalar Parameter New
mmSwitchInZoomScalar Parameter New
maxCTLevel Parameter New
viewConeMaxCTLevel Parameter New
viewConeCTOutOfRangeScale Parameter New
numTimeBasedCTFadeFields Parameter New
zoomLodThreshold Parameter New
zoomIntermediateLodThreshold Parameter New
modelSwitchInZoomScalar Parameter EP2 Deprecated
terrainOptOverrideRadiusScalar Parameter New
themelFeatureLODScalar Parameter New
themelFeatureFadeBand Parameter New

A-180 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
 EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

EP CLI command/parameter EP2 CLI command/parameter Type Status

offsetCenterPitchScalar Parameter New
offsetCenterEnable Parameter New

fastJetOffsetCenterFeatureCullerEn
able Parameter New

fastJetLineOrientedLODFeatureCulle
rEnable Parameter New

fastJetLineOrientedLODFeatureCulle
rThreshold Parameter New
numCTPageOutDelayFields Parameter New
manualTerrainUpdate Parameter New
manualElevationUpdate Parameter New

ZOOM \HIRESCTPAGEMODE CLI Command New

enable Parameter New
ctRangeScalar Parameter New
ctFovScalar Parameter New
ctFovRangeScalingLevel Parameter New
ctZoomRangeScalar Parameter New

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

964-5924-001 AB • EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes A-181

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information
EP to EP2 CLI Command Comparison

This page intentionally left blank

STATE 4 - MANUFACTURING RELEASE 2018-10-16

A-182 EP2 Software User Guide: CLI and Opcodes • 964-5924-001 AB

Rockwell Collins – Proprietary Information